31B-224 (5) Sent by:Livermore Edwards Mar-17-99 10:42an from 7818902429*413 585 2444 rage 2i 3
Chase Kitchen Renovation
March 17, 1999
The attention of the Bidders submitting proposals for the above-referenced project is
called to the following addenda to the specifications and drawings. The items set forth
herein, whether of omissions, additions., substitution, deletion or clarification are all
to be included in and form a part of each proposal submitted.
1. ADD Section 01020 --ALLOWANCES as attached, in its entirety. DELETE all
previous reference to screen door and screen door hardware.
END OF ADDENDUM#5
III
!i
ii
Sent by:Livermore Edwards Mar-17-99 10:42am from 7818902429+413 585 2444 Pave 3
LE9813 CHASE IaTCHENRENOVATION
SECTION 01020
ALLOWANCES
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01 SUMMARY
A. Allowance amounts below are for materials indicated only. Include all
other costs including installation and all required blocking, supports and
attachments in base bid price.
B. Coordinate allowances with requirements for related and adjacent work_
C Notify Owner of date when final decision on allowance items is required
to avoid delays in the work.
D. Furnish certification that quantities of products purchased are the actual
quantities needed with reasonable allowance for cutting or installation
losses, tolerances, mixing waste and similar margins.
E. Submit invoices or delivery slips to indicate actual quantities of materials
delivered and costs. Indicate amounts of applicable trade discounts.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
Not applicable to this section
PART 3 EXl?CUITON
3.01 SCBEDUIE
A. 'Lump sum allowances:
1. Allowance: Screen door and screen door hardware $1,000.
END oF SECTION
FEBRUARY 1999 01020-1 ALLOWANCES
Sena oy:Llvernore towaras Rap-16-99 02 13Pn from 7818902429+413 585 2444 Page 2/ 2
Chase Kitchen Renovation
ADDENDUM NO.4
March 16, 1999
The attention of the Bidders submitting proposals for the above-referenced project is
called to the following addenda to the specifications and drawings. The items set forth
heroin, whether of omissions, additions, substitution, deletion or clarification are all
to be included in and form a part of each proposal submitted.
1. ADD note to Al-1 at area of new concrete slab: "Slab shall be 6" thick with no
reinforcing and control joints every 10'-011."
2. ADD general note that all concrete shall have a steel trowel finish.
3. The following information is intended as clarification regarding the screen
door at Door DO1: The hinges shall be 3 pair of Stanley Five knuckle "Swing
Clear" hinges #FBB248, or equivalent. 1 1/2 pair shall be custom lengthened to
2 1/4".
END OF ADDENDUM#4
Sent by:Livernore Edwards Mar-12-99 12:57Pn iron 7818902429*413 585 2444 rage 8i 8
LE9813 CHASE IGTCHEN RENOVAIJON
L. Provide hardened tactile warning surface concrete finish for
handicapped ramp to meet requirements of ADA and local codes. Products
and Systems by Increte Systems, Tampa FL set the standards of quality and
durability required for this work. Conform fully to manufacturer's
printed specifications.
M. Provide concrete for misc. site items as noted on the drawings.
JWD OF SECTION
FEBRUARY 1999 02515.5 SnE'iCONORM
Sent by:Livernore Edwards Mar-12-99 12:56rA £ron 7818902429+413 585 2444 rage 7i 8
LE9813 CHASE KITCHEN RENOVATION
A. Reinforce concrete work as shown on the drawings. Allow for minimum
2" inch concrete cover.
B. Do not extend reinforcing through expansion and contraction joints.
3.05 FORMING EXPANSION AND CONTRACTION JOINTS
A. Place expansion and contraction joints as shown on the plans. Where
possible, make joints of curbs coincide with joints in walks. When
sidewalks abut building, provide continuous joint filler.
B. lit joints with filler of required profiles, set perpendicular to
longitudinal axis of walks, curbs, and gutters. Recess 118 inch below
finished concrete surface.
3.06 PLACING CONCRETE
A. Place concrete, screed and wood float surfaces to a smooth and uniform
finish, free of open texturing and exposed aggregate.
B. Avoid working mortar to surface.
C Make 1/4 inch wide hand tooled dummy joints at 5 foot intervals, or as
noted on the Drawings.
D. Round all edges, including edges of dummy and expansion an contraction
joints, with 112 radios edging tool.
E, Where paved surfaces are adjacent to walks, make concrete curbs integral
with walks. Make expansion and contraction joints of curbs coincide with
walk joints. Provide dummy joint at line between walks and curbs.
F. Provide exposed surfaces of walks and steps with heavy broom finish and
hand tooled smooth borders. Curbs to be floated smooth.
G. Ensure finished surfaces do not vary from true lines, levels, or grade by
more than 1/8 inch in 10 feet when measure with straightedge.
H. Apply curing compound on finished surfaces immediately after
placement. Apply in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations.
I. Concrete base for precast concrete pavers and brick paving shall be as
detailed on the drawings and provided with 1-112" weep holes 6' o.c. each
way.
J. Concrete service area pavement shall be placed over leveling course of
#411 stone. compacted as required, where existing base material is deemed
adequate by the Architect. Any sub-standard areas shall be excavated and
backfiIled or filled as in Section 02200. Joints shall be sawcut 2" deep.
Finish to be rough broom texture.
K. Provide concrete for sit walls and detailed on the drawings.
FEBRUARY 1999 02515-4 SrM COIVC:REIE
Sent by'Livermore Edwards Mar-12-99 12:56Pm from 7818982429+413 585 2444 Page 6i 8
LE9813 CHASE KITCHEN RENOVATION
2.04 FORMWORK AND ACCESSORIES
A, Formwork: Matched, tight fitting, and adequately stiffened to support
weight of concrete without deflection detrimental to tolerances and
appearance of concrete.
B. Joint Filler: Minimum 1/2" thick asphaltic impregnated vegetable fiber
and finely divided mineral filler, ASTM D1751.
C Concrete Curing Compound: ASTM C309. non-yellowing, non-staining
liquid membrane forming type.
2.05 CONCRETE MIX
A. Mix and proportion to produce minimum 4000 psi concrete at 28 days with
maximum slump of 3-4 inches and 4-1/2 to 7-1/2 percent air entrainment,
ASTM C94.
B. Use accelerating admixtures in cold Weather only when acceptable to
Architect. Use of admixtures shall not relax cold weather placement
requirements. Do not use calcium chloride.
C Use set-retarding admixtures during hot weather only when acceptable to
Architect.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 PREPARATION OF SUB-GRADE
A. Ensure rough grading has brought sub-grade to required elevations.
B. Fill soft spots and hollows with additional fill.
C Level and compact sub-grade, to receive granular base for concrete
walks, curbs, and gutters, to 95% maximum dry density.
3.02 PLACEMENT OF GRAVEL FILL
A. Place and level gravel fill over prepared sub-grade to a compacted depth
of 4 inches (or as shown on the plans) true to limes and levels. Compact to
95% maximum dry density.
3.03 FORMING
A. Form vertical surfaces to full depth and securely position to required
lines and levels. Ensure forma ties are not placed so ac to pass through
concrete.
B. Arrange and assemble formwork to permit easy dismantling and
stripping, and to prevent damage to concrete during formwork removal.
3.04 PLACING REINFQRCING
M- RUARY 1999 02515-3 SITE CONCRETE
Sent by:Livermore Edwards Mar-12-99 12s56em from 7818902429 413 585 2444 Page 5/ 8
LE9813 CHASE KITCHEN RENOVATION
F. ASTM D1751 - Preformed Expansion Joint Fillers for Concrete Paving and
Structural Construction.
G. ASTM C30$ - Liquid Membrane - Forming Compounds for Curing Concrete.
H. ASTM A185 - Welded steel wire fabric for concrete reinforcement.
I. Massachusetts Dept. of Transportation "Construction & Materials
Specifications", current edition.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 FILL MATERIALS
A. Gravel Base: Angular pit run crushed natural carbonate stone; free from
shale, clay, and friable materials and debris; graded within following
limits: #304.
eve Size °h—Eassin
2 inches 100
1 inch 70-90
314 inch 50 to 85
No. 4 25 to 60
No. 40 7 to 30
No. 200 0 to 15
2.02 CONCRE'T'E MATERIALS
A. Portland Cement: ASTM C150; normal - type I.
R. Fine and Coarse Aggregates: ASTM C33,
C Water: Clean and free from injurious amounts of oil, alkali, organic
matter, or other deleterious material.
D. Air Entrainment: ASTM C260.
2.03 RIEWMRCEMEN T
A. Reinforcing Steel: 60 ksi yield strength; deformed billet steel bars; ASTM
A615; galvanized finish; size as detailed.
B. Tie Wire: Minimum 16 gauge annealed type, or patented system
acceptable to Architect.
C. Welded steel wire fabric: plain, galvanized ASTM A185 sized as detailed.
FEBRUARY 1999 02515-2 STM CONCRETE
Sent by:Livermore Edwards Mar-12-99 12=56rm from 7818902429+413 585 2444 rage 4/ 8
LE9813 CHASE KITCHEN RENOVATION
SECnON 02515
STTE CONCRETE
PART GENERAL
1.01 REQUIREMENTS INCLUDED
A. Prepare sub-grade to receive base course materials for walks; curbs, steps
and pavements.
B. Place and compact base course materials for walks; curbs, steps and
pavements.
C Concrete walks, curbs, steps and pavements complete with reinforcement.
D. Concrete for site walls.
E. Provide handicapped access ramps as indicated on drawings to meet
requirements of local codes and ADA.
D. misc. site concrete.
1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS
A. Excavation, fill and backfill: Section 02200, EARTHWORK.
B. Concrete work: ,Section 03300, CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE.
G Painting and marking: Section 02612, ASPHALTIC CONCRETE PAVING.
1.03 REFERENCES
A. The BIDDING REQUIREMENTS,CONTRACT FORMS AND CONDITIONS OF THE
CONTRACT and applicable parts of GENERAL REQUIREMENTS, as listed in the
Fable of Contents, shall be included in and made a part of this Section.
B. Examine all Drawings and all other Sections of the Specifications for
requirements therein affecting the work of this Section.
1.04 REFERENCED STANDARDS
A. ASTM C150 - Portland Cement.
B. ASTM C94 - ReadY-Mix Concrete,
G ASTM 0260 - Air - Entraining Admixtures for Concrete.
D. ASTM A615 - Deformed and Plain Billct-Steel Bars for Concrete
Reinforcement.
F_ ASTM C33 - Concrete Aggregates.
FEBRUARY 1999 02515-1 SITE CONCR M
Sent bysLiwerroore Edwards Mar-12-99 12.55Pn Pron 7818902429*413 585 2444 Page 3" 8
I
I
STEEL f'05T
STEEL TAB
.,z
SGiREEN A55CM3LY
I
I
A.NOLE CLIP
tt�rt 2 x4 BRAGf-
OAK BUMPER
Nojaat 71Ytle: Dr. "of
CHASE KITCHEN RENOVATION Sate. 3/12/89
Drawing Mae' Project Itoa IS9als
WOOD SCREEN ALT #2 CLARIFICATION
UYBRUM, EDWARDS AND ASSOCIATES ASK- 1
260 Sear MR Road Aalthmn, MA 02451 (781 890-8873 Fax (781)890--2429
Sent bviLivernore Edwards Mar-12-99 12:55Pn from 7818902429+413 585 2444 Page 2i 8
Chase Kitchen Renovation
ADDENDUM NO.3
March 12, 1999
The attention of the Bidders submitting proposals for the above-referenced project is
called to the following addenda to the specifications and drawings. The items set forth
herein, whether of omissions, additions, substitution, deletion or clarification are all
to be included in and form a part of each proposal submitted.
1. I» reference to drawings A0-1, A2-1, A9-2/1 through A9-214, the following is
intended as clarification regarding the Wood Screen - Alternate #2:
a. The height of the screen shall be held consistently 12" below the beam of
the existing porcb and 4" above the ground.
b. The concrete slab shall extend to include the metal posts. The new stab and
its crushed stone base is also part of ALT#2.
c. The top of the oak bumper shall be mounted at 30".
d. There is no location where the bumper is double faced.
e. See attached ASK-1 for additional information.
2. ADD Section 02515 - Site Concrete. See attached.
3. The following information is intended as clarification regarding the screen door
at Door DOI:
a. The screen door shalt be a custom made wood door, see sketch below.
FD 2Y
it
p tiltrlty 4e x 4+ V1 tom} t�1L
7 '
Vl�r qS gout to ,6a.AvM • �
�r
pat-��►C.�k `tom r�t�� �
Apr -CD
END OF ADDENDUM#3
Sent by:Livermore Edwards Mar-18-99 11!12am from 7818902429*413 585 2444 rage e/ 8
SEC= 16100.ELECTRICAL
Arming&1
1. Note referring to existing fixture being refurbished. This note applies not
to the fixture shown,but the other four(4)fixtures is the ffigh Ceiling
Dining area. The fifth fixture to be cleaned and relamped.
DnAng
1. All V x 4' fixtures in Kitchen shall be`Type A". Pendant mount fixtures
to 121-4"to bottom of fixtures. Stem lengths to be approximately S' -6".
Field verify. See Drawing A.-2.2,East Elevation
Drawing E-3
I. Provide two(2)WP/CF duplex receptacles on Roof. One adjacent to
MUA-1 and one adjacent to EF-4. Wire both to panel`%2"and a 20 amp,
1 pole circuit breaker. See Note#2 on Drawing.
2. New electric watOxn r meter to be located in Elec. Room#202. See
Normal Paws Riser on Drawing&4.
3. All new emergency feeders shall be W cables and shall be installed in
accordance with.M.E.C. section 700.10. on Drawing E-4.
mowing-F4
1. Feeder to panel 'KP"'shall be 4#410 in 2 V2"conduit.
FND OF ADDENDUM#2
Sent by:Livermore Edwards Mar-10-99 11:11am from 7818902429+413 585 2444 Page 7/ 8
4. All vents rising up in the pipe chase of Toilet No. 243 shall combine in a
4"vent and run separately up through roof following the Kitchen Exhaust
duct.
1. The 1"CW water main between the Kitchen and the Dishwashing Room
shall be increased to 1 %"from the 11/4". Tie in from the upstairs Toilet
Room to the connection to the existing main.
1
1. Add 1 IA"vent to Item No. 14.
2. Add 2"vent to Item No.'s 22,43,47,32.
3. Item No.66. The 3/8"and 3/4"waste shall be indirect waste..
4. Item No. 8; Under remarks shall read,"Interconnect Steam Piping."
ON 15600-HEATING VNTTLATINCI AND AIR CONDITIO�Sr
Drawing I-
1. Existing Temperature Control Panels shall be relocated to the 2nd Floor
lovel corridor. Sex Drawing No. H-3
Drawi�,g H 2
1. In the Main Kitchen.the Supply duct from MUA-I through hood has(3)
36"x 20"TSR Registers shown set beck 12"from the soffit fine. Move
the(3)Registers to the soffit line.
2. The Perx tubing runs shall be encase with 4"PVC sleeves through all wall
Penetrations-
3. Pox tubing rums do not requbv insulation.
Sent by:Livernore Edwards Mar-10-99 11 :11an rron 78189024294413 585 2444 Page 6� 8
DRAWIlYGS
�10N i;53Q0_FIltEPROTEr't`M
DDwing FP-2
I. In Receiving Room 103; Change all side wall heads to upright head and
enter heads in space..
2. In Storage Room 102: Delete the two heads above and below the ceiling
and install four(4)new heads above and below ceiling a total of eight(8)
heads- Feed all ei&(8)heads from a new 2"feed and the last four(4)
heads from a new 2"feed and the last four(4)from a 1 1/2"line.
pnmrinz EL
I. Furnish and install pendant type sprinkler heads in Electric Rooms 202
and 202A(one in each room). Connect new heads to l �S"branch line
riser located in Toilet Room 203.
Ornin FP-4
4
1. System Design Data: Change system requirement to read as follows:
1gn, plication Water Rate: 0.15/2600 ft'.
MtIIiUMMA IgW.. 0.15.
SECTION 15400-ffLMLIUQ
.P 2
1. In Main Kitchen,item No.K-22: Connect to 4"sanitary main(not to
outside grease trap)with 2 7S and 2"vent . Run Z"vent in wall up to
existing vent riser so#lit and connect to 2"vent from grease trap.
2. In Dii%hawaxhing Room,item No. 47: Connect to 4"sanitary main(not to
outside grease trap)with 2"S and 2"vent . Run 2"vent in wall up to soffit
and connect to 2"vent ftm grease trap.
3. Connect two(2) 4"vent lines from the wderior 1000 gallon grease trap to
the building. Run both 4"vent lines under Kitchen Floor up in the back
wall behind the Cooking equipment line. Rise up to the soffit space and
follow hood exhaust ductwork up through the roof with bath 4"vents
through the roof separately.
Sent bviLivermore Edwards Mar-10-99 11 :11am From 7818902429+413 585 2444 Page 5/ 8
5. Fan and sub shall be Greenheek Model CUBE with GAP, 18" high
curb or approved equal by Tema or Jew Air. (Use C;PFV cwb for
kitchen odunst fan.
6. ErAire fan shall be factory painted with a baked enamel finish. Colors
shall be selxted by the Architect and may vary according to location.
D. In-Line Exhaust Fans(EF-1)
1. Exhaust fans shall be of the belt and direct drive c type, as
shown on the Drawings,with galvanized housimg for in-line MWIting,
W shall be completely weatherized Capacity shall be AMCA
certified.
�. Fan shall be the backwardly inclined type with cer iffi .1 wheel that
has been statically and dynamically balanced at the factory.
3. The motor shall be isolated from the air stream. Motor shall be heavy
duty TBFC type.
4. Furnish back draft damps' and vibration isolators with each exhaust
fora ,
5. Fans shall be Greenheck Model CSP-228,or equal."
Sent bv:Livermore Edwards Mar-10-99 11 :10an from 7818902429*413 585 2444 Page 4i 8
2. Fan shall be the backwardly inclined type with centifugsl wheel that
has been sWcally and dynamically balanced at the factory.
3. The motor shall be installed in a totally enclosed wproof housing
outside of the air stream. Furnish with single or 3 pole disconnect
switch mounted in motor compartmeynt, with factory wiring from
discor»neat to Motor. Provide wiring raceway from motor
compasttnent to curb cap.
4. She fan shall be installed on an acoustic lined aluminum roof curb as
detailed do the Drawings (similar to "Hood Exhaust Fan'). Motor
operaed low leakage ba+ckdraft dampers with edge and end seals shall
be installed in the ourb of the unit. Curb to be 12" high,without cant.
Furnish wiring pigtail on damper motor. Curbs shall be constructed to
keep fans level to less than 1/16"per foot.
5. no entire air outlet of the fan shall be protected by 112" x 1P2"
aluminum mesh securely installed in place.
6. Fan and curb shall be Crreenhack Model GB-1400-5 with Type CrPTP
curb 12"bdgh or approved equal by Perna or Term Air. All curbs shall
be custom fabricated to pitch of roof so all fans are dead level.
7. Entire fan shall be factory painted with a baked enamel finish. Colors
shall be selected by the Architect and may vary according to location.
C Roof Ventilators,Upblast (EF-1)(Kitchea Hood Exhaust)
1. Roof vaAilators shall be of the belt drive upblast celmrifugal type,with
spun aluminum housing for roof mounting and shall be completely
weatherized with bui t-m grease trough and drain. Capacity shall be
AMCA coati ied.
2. Fan shall be the backwardly inclined type with centrifugal wheel that
has bow statically and dynamically balanced at the&story.
3. The motor shall be installed in a totally enclosed, weatherproof
houdng outside of the air stream. Furnish with&story installed 3 pole
weatherproof dwoonnect swttoh mounted outside motor oompartmeat.
4. The fan shall be installed on a solid meal lined aluminum roof curb.
Curb to be of sufficient height so the fan outlet will be 40" above the,
roof;with wood nailer.(Sex Detail on Drawings).
Nil
Sent by:Livernore Edwards Mar-18-99 11 :18an from 7918902429*413 585 2444 Page 3., 8
CHUE AND DULUT IgIOW MoyA TION
S
;f�1,TIUNS
SFXQN 15600-MATING STING AND�CONDTI�G
item#1: Page 15604-1 t paragraph 2.03" Delete in its entirety and substitute the
following:
"2.03 EXHAUST FANS
A. ceiling Fasts
1. Ceiling fan ventilators shall be constructed with an woustically
loud housin&with an automatic backdamper,with cushioned
stops, and integral ceiling grille or inline adapter as required. Fan
wbeel shaft be£dtward curved centrifugal type and shall be
removable through the grip opening. Motors shalt be permanently
lubricated ball bearing type with thermal overload protection and
SCR controllers. Disoonect means shall be provided inside the
fan housing. Motors shell be mounted on torsion mounts inside the
housing to isolate va'bration. Vibration hangers for the housing
shall be provided as scheduled. Provide infine adapters for ceiling
fans being used in a horizontal air pattern.
2. Ceiling fans shall be as scheduled on the Drawings equal to
Geenheck model No. SP-250(EF-2)and SP-255(EF-5)or equal.
3. Furnish all wall caps where indicated on the Drawings equal to
Greenheck Model WC Hooded wall cap. Sizes as shown on
Drawings.
B. Roof Ventilators-Catifugal Roof Tap(EF•3)
L. Roof ventilators shall be of the belt or direct drive centrifugal type,as
shown on the Dnmft*% with spurs aluminum housing far roof
mounting, and shall be completely weatherized. Capacity shall be
AMCA. em ifted. Direct drive vewilum shall be furniahod with
manufacturer's standard solid state speed controller.
Sent by'Livermore Edwards Mar-10-99 11 !09am from 7818902429+413 585 2444 rage 2i 8
Chase Kitchen Renovation
ADDEN UK NQ.2
March 10, 1999
The attention of the Bidders submitting proposals for the above-referenced project is
called to the following addenda to the specifications and drawings. The items set forth
herein, whether of omissions, additions, substitution, deletion or clarification are all
to be included in and form a part of each proposal submitted.
1. The list of subcontractors-Smith College recommends was attached in Addendum
#1. The following trades are proprietary : Mechanical, Electrical, Fire Protection,
Automatic Temperature Control, Roofing and Sheet Metal. General Contractors
shall list the subcontractors of these trades in their bid submission.
2. General Contractors are reminded to be sure their subcontractors cross check
mechanical and electrical drawings with the architectural drawings so they get
complete information as to what should be included in their bids.
3. REPLACE in the Table of Contents the date of the edition of the ALA documents
listed from 1980 to 1997.
4. ADD note to A9-1, Door Schedule, Door #10, Remarks column: "Hardware shall be
through bolted".
3. ADD note to Al-0 in the tired of the rear loading dock: "Remove existing concrete
pad as required to prepare for new structural slab".
6. ADD wall type note to Ai-l: "Wall Type 3" at south wall of receiving area where it
is not indicated on drawings to be CMU.
7. ADD note to A9-1, detail 9: the note pointing to the shaded tiles shall read "4x4
GLOSS ACCENT CIIMAMIC TILE".
8. ADD note to A7-1, in the area of the existing Iritchen there shall be a note that
reads: "Remove and protect ceiling tile and grid as required to install new
sprinkler lines, lighting and wallboard. Wallboard shall run above ceiling tile.
Replace salvaged ceiling tile. The existing ceiling is a rated ceiling and shall
remain as a rated ceiling system."
9. REPLACE dimension to A9.1, Door Schedule, Door Type #1: vertical rail shall have a
minimum dimension of 5-112 ".
10. ADD general note to Section 08210, Wood Doors: "All interior doors shall be solid
core doors."
11- DELETE from A9-1. Door Schedule, Doors DOS, D06 and D07: Hardware Set #R5. No new
hardware is needed for these doors. ADD to A9-1, Door Schedule, Door D05, Note in
remark column: "Replace existing handle with lever handle."
12. REPLACE finish note in Section 08710, Finish Hardware, Page 4, Part 2, Paragraph
2.01.A to read: "...all hardware shall have US26D finish."
• ;Sent bi'LIVERMORE EDWARDS Feb-24-99 11255am from 1 781 890 24293413 585 2444 rage 8i 8
LE9813 CHASE KITCHEN RENOVATION
AQj!)511N
Adf4! 009rating wh wd bat�Y= to provide a Eight fit U eontsct points and weatherstripping for smooth
operation and a weatttcrtigbt closure. !rubricate hardware ttnd moving parts.
LANS
C_IPta jntelbe e_ M AgLtdgr,_sudua Immediately after tmtoUation. Exercise care to avoid damage to protective
coatings and finishes. Rg=%'e E1 IS&gl&ZWZ and ualartts.dirt,and other substances.
Ckruo $lgbt of factory-glazed units Imme+diataty alter tostpiling windows. !Nash and polish glass on both face9
before Substantial CovVI tdmL Comply Witti macttfacntrer't recot=WAcioas for rwal cfe niag and
mainucance. Reradva tioapermanaat labile from Ststss surtdcet before shiptt nt.
Umove ad,=LIM glass that hu bun broken, chipped, cracked, abraded. Or damaged during the caistruetlon
ptttiod.
Prgr=r wie4ow units from damage or deterioration tnldl the time of Substantial Comptction.
END OP SECTION 0010
WOOD WINDOWS 08610 Page 5
Seht bv:LIVERMORE EDWARDS Feb-24-99 11 :55an from 1 781 898 2429+413 585 2444 rage 7i 8
LH9813 CHASE KITCHEN RENOVATION
Zibrirste_,ktipdalxt to pradWt WAS that are reglazable without dl==144 sash fruning, Provide openings and
mQrdau precut,where possible, to receive hardware and other items.
efmdds weathemrieein to peritlleter of ewch operating sash,
r-or doubie.huag sash, provide weatberstripping only at MT17 uaJ rails of operable s4i.h.
Provide reMQvIIblg ibaeet screen for cacti operating sash, with location detetgttned by marlufacrurer.
Provide ziswrinrxons,called or asap-on type,coordinated with gaaaa selection and gIU4 srstr--o in4lcated.
FACIOM- 17re 1W 11daw Mrs: Exeepc for light sizes in excess of 100 united inch" (M MM widttl Pius
length), glare window units iA the shop before delivery, uit ess factory glazing is not ttvuusble frQM
m=ufacturer. Campy wich requirements of Division 8 Section 'Olaxlq' of these Spxlflcatlons and
NwwaA LS,2. _
Compi • Mbfigaden. asserably, finishing, hardware application, and othet wort:before sbipmem to the Project
site. to the maximum extent possible. DisusemWt comf,onctas My as Aectuary for shlpmenr arid instailarioit.
Where necessary for tiding at site,provide anlptt allowance for sodbi 4,trimistiag, sad Curing.
w Ant& Provide the fdilowing firtltti on rxposed wood in tuvu:
Sip-erjMc _Unxs., Provide Manufacturer's staWard shep'printa coat on interior wood surfaces only.
PART 3--AX4QJTTQN
V ,
>=xds.rtitie�rox
ESii ring n=i2194 before itlstallation. Verify that opening is correct and dill plate is level. Do not proceed with
installation ands tuuatisfact:ory conditions have been corrected.
Masonry surfaces shell be<0 Anil frse of corAMCtion debris.
Wood framd wills shad tx dry, glean, sotut4, wttli•tutlled, free of voids, and ,vitttout Offsets at jolters.
Ensure that nail heads are driven Plush with surfaces in opening and within 3 inches(?S mm)of corner.
Com)dina:t;witld*w lnst IlWon with wall flatshizis turd other built-in componems.
fN1q 6.1 s ATlQN
QrnplY with rngmda=M;l's instructions turd recommendations for Installing window units. hardwart:, operators,
atat:s.sorks. and o1ber enmPortaetta of the work-
&a 51t1t1 pw Unils plumb, level, true to line, without warp of rack of friam or sash. Provide proper support xAG
anchor securely in place,
Set gill members in a bed of sealant or with joint MLm or gaslteu, as indicated, to provide wembenisht
construction.
WOOD WINDOWS 086 14 Page d
Sent by:LIVERMORE EDWARDS Feb-24-99 11 :54an from 1 781 898 2429*413 585 2444 Page 6/ 8
LE983 3 CHASE K fr-HEN RENOVATION
wand: Clear ponderass pine or ocher tultable PM.graitt IUMber, kiln dried to a rttoisture'eontent of 6 to 12
percent at time of fabricadoa and frae of visible finger joints, blue stain, kslou,pitch pockets,and surract checks
iarger than 1132 inch(0.8 MM)wide by 2 incites(S 1 ilia)lag.
Lumber shall be water repc{tetu preservative treated afar=dining per NWWDA I.S. 4.
Alt1rx1tMl1n -red =net Manuf1wturtr's standard Aluminum.1735 rnii duck extruded aadding mocharriaally bonded
to exterior wood lash and frame members.
Trim Jdarnt1ers MOHOw=a14rttLnum cmmsia=6or trim.
Finish: Factory-applied,baked-on enamel finish in campliance with AAMA 603.8.
Caw: White,
Wir Eabric!Qt= ten. 19-by-14 (I.2-by-1.6-MM)or 18-by-16(1.2-by 1.4-mm)mesh of O h -m 3
m•)diameter.coated aluulitrum wire,complying with FS RR-W-363, Type VII. G.1 r .- eL,,-r 40"R-
:'$s& ind Q!azing Matariali; Provide manufacturer's 5r8" low emissivity insvlattng glazing material with Argon
gas thing that complies with Division 8 Section'Glazing.' Provide tempered glazing where required by code.
Gera,?! Provide manufacturer's etaneLvel hardware, necer;ary to eperatt, ti&Wly close, w1d sect:rely lock
windows. Do not use aluminum in frictional contact with other metals. Froyide ali hardware It,white r1rdsh.
• 1 .
CounMr aianeine echent'M: Comply with AMA 942.7.
: Concealed block,"-tackle type of size and capacity to hold sash statiotlary at any opco
pasidor, where required by manufacturer. At all other locations provide spring balances.
ACCF530RlES
1n=La Dv Provide Irmect screens for each 0petab10 exterior sash or ventilator. Locate sereem on inside or
twtside of window radii or ventilator, dqrettdin= upon window type. Design windows and hardware to
accommodate screens in a tight-fitting, rernovabte srrangt:mcm.with a mirlimnm of exposed fasteners and latches.
Screen Frames: Fabricate. frsrttes of tubulaz shaped. extmdcd- of formed-alurninutrl members is white
f nish. Provide pm-attached retainer cables at screens.
(Ifittet rPaLe lvittnririe}; provide grilles in designs shown. for non-removabte application to inside of each sash
tight, Material aholl be extruded do alumlttum in the exterior, wood ou tilt interior with a spacer bas between the
glass lites.
1:1mbliflers: Provide au jAmbliners in white.
Custom Panning: Provide custom decorative extruded aluminum panning ss indicated da Drawings_
Ear _AT N
9�anerat; Fubrieate wood window unite to comply with indicated standards. Include a complete ;yztem for
a,sembly of coropooeats and ane3lorage of window units.
Comply wldi requirements of NWWDA LS.2 for moisrtrte content of lumber at time of fabricatlon-
WOQ0 WINDOWS 09610 Page 3
Sent by:LrVERMORE EDWARDS Feb-24-99 11 =54am from 1 781 890 24293413 585 2444 ►a 9 5/ 8
LE98 S 3 CHASE KITCHEN RENOVATION
Hardware,iticluding operators,
Gl=ing details.
Accessories.
Camplrt: tot initial Color celcctio on 12-inch- (300-=-) long sections of window members. Where ftnisbes
involve wmW color variations, Include Sample sets showing the MI range of variations expectzd.
SSAMRia fQX-Ytrifuc tom: Tht Art hlMt reserves the right to require additions! samples that show fabricatW
tttcliniques, workmuuhip, and design orha:dwam and a cesmortrs_
ERCIECI
Ficl?l Mensuremeniv Chock window openings by Geld measurements before fabrication aAd show recorded
measurements on Shop Drswtng:. Cnordinete fabrication schedule with construction progress to avoid delaying
the Work.
Where field Melaurements cannot " made without delaying the Worg. gtlarAnlet opening dirne:siom and
proceed with fabricating wood wiladews without 11eld rawurements. Cwrdirims wall catucruction to OUMN
that actual opening dimensions correspond to guaranteed dirrensiorss.
yV�AN-TY
le1Lngr41 W rram: The special warranty %pteiried in dhis Arrisfa 9h9i1 not deprive the Owner of other rights the
Owner may have under other provisions of the Contract DocutMnrs and shtil bts in addition to, std rub eoncurrznt
with,other warranties made by the Contractor under requiremenns or the Contract Doctimerim
SpIcial A rrnnty: Submit s written warranty execuled by wood iuftldtsw manufacturer agreeing to repair or
replace window components that rail in materials or workxnmhip within the specified warranty petiod. Failures
ihrdtide,but are not limited io.the following:
5truerura1 failure includizig exc%ssive deflaction,water leakage, air infiltration,or cotide:untion.
Faulty operation of sash and hardware.
necerioration of finishes ante other rnatariats beyond normal weathering.
Warranty;ariod for Fxlfrimr rind Pairn Finish: 10 years after date of Substantial Comptetion.
Aarrtt„mty Perim for inen�g,01AM, 20 years ofter date of Substantial Cotnpktioa.
PART 2-PROaUCTS
MAN );:A0T1JIlFAq
Manufacruic : Subject to compliance with requircaxnts,provide window urtits by the following:
Falgle Windows, Inc.
MATERIALS
QdriZZ,itt. Comply witft requirements of NWWDA I.S. 2.
WOOD WINDOWS D$610 Fage 2
Sent bV:LIVERMORE EDWARDS Feb-24-99 11 :53am from 1 781 890 24293413 585 2444 Page 4i 8
LE9813 CHASE KTTCBENN RENOVATTON
SFC'TIQN 08610.`NOQD_W rNLUWS
PART t ..(11i"NERAL
F,�.�TFrrvfENTS
Drawings and general provisions of ego Contract, includirns Genera!and Suppie11cluAry Conditions fad Division t
Specification Sftdou. apply to this Section.
SUMMARY
ni-y tir:n inctude_the following wood window rypes:
Awning windows.
Doubte-hung wit44ows.
Nonopcntive trtxed)windows.
Decorsuive wiWows.
geiZgii cctielts: The fQ110 vihS Sections contain rt:gttiretnenti that relate: to this Section:
f i)4tFjQ]3 6 Age ioD -EinfSh Ca=n=" for kHrAor and exterior wood trim that is not ioctuded as part of the
wood window units.
Pilygeion R Srrtino 'r'.la in ° for glazing rtquirernents for wood windows, Incluang factory-=lazed window
units.
SIIRMTTTA S
'en Aril: Submit arch item in Uhis Article accordicg to the Conditions of the Ccvraci utd Division 1 Spccifcation
5ectlons.
Prod L QxA,for each type of wood window required,including the following:
Constrtxtion details and fabrication tnetbods.
Profiles and ditnenaicnc of iodividttaicompotients.
Data on hardware,accessories,and fusitshes.
Recommendations for Maitaenutce and cleaning of exterior surfaces.
Shop Drlyyln^t±s for each type of wiridow required, incitiding infortnation not fully detailed in tnanUfaMrer's
standard Product Data and ft following:
Layout and installation details,including artelsflrs.
1"i4vaf10n1 at U4 inch c 1 foot(1:50)scale and typical window unlit elevations zt 3f4 inch = t foot(1.20)
acme.
Full-size section det2lls of typical composite ff=n ecs, including reinWcetnent and stiffeners.
WOOD WINDOWS 08610 Page 1
Sent by:LIVERMORE EDWARDS Feb-24-99 11 :53am From 1 781 890 24293413 585 2444 Page 3i 8
2/24/98
ubContractor Bid List
Mechanical Contractors Communleatlon Contractors
SAG Mechanical lHolyoke, Ms. Cofim-Lin 'Springfield,Ms.
Har Grodsky Co. ltplingftld,Me. Haas E1*C. 'South Hadley,Ma
Moran eta ev Ile. a. H00811 mmu*ations jHolyoka, Mo.
canWR
13pringfield, a- Comm-Tract lWafthern,
I
Electrical Contractors! Automatic Te arature Control
Beco Electrlo Sprina eld,Ma, E. .t. 1-603-02MI90 Hampton N.H.
Collins Electrtc Chico 99,Ma. Yankee ToohnolOgy Ludlow,Ma.
Davtd R.Northu EleaWe Agawam,Me-
Haas ElertriG south Hadley,Ma. Roofing Cantrl;actora
M.L.-Schmitt, Inc. Springfield,Mat. IYoung Northam on MA.
Moynihan rmisme South H4419y,Ma. on% Sri field tole.
Orchard Electdo `Northa ton, Ma. Rivet SprtngfIs d tilts.
&ysterns alectrlc ;Worthington Mo, Than ttdc0 a Ma.
5 rant field Flea,- @ rin field a.
Unlver"I Elec. Springfield,MA. PoIntini Contraotors
Easthampton Etectrlc Easthampton,Ma Ganrtel ,Mik6 INGRhampion,Ma.
Quantum E160. iWest B n meld Ma. I Loom,Owen 114orthamptEM.
M s 890tric Hatfield,Mo. r aMeaot lNorthgmpton, Ms.
Coffey&tieady Northampton,Ma.
Fire Protection CoU04n,Joe Peliam,Ms.
Allied Fire Protection Sprinflaid, 1140votfly Northern on,Me.
as eta a nivoer Co. }tol oke Ma. arneron Amherst,Cola.
Grinned Co. Orwington,01,
H.F.P. (Oouth Hadley,Ma. $he6t Metal Fabricators
Wer4Rhoti6e Meohania4l South Hadley,Ma, I Kleebe $noel Wel Ludlow Ma,
A&G Fire Protection Ludlow MA. 5 er Sheet Metal 5 fr81d, ta,
M..t.Moran Hydeflville,MA. Be Ire Air Weet OEN.,ice.
Millwork Cu6Mm Bheet mortal Haydenville,MA.
WaMak Wsstiteltt MA.
Amherst WoQdworkl Kortharnpton,MA. ,Elov&tcr Contractors
John Carlo oodworkinQ Wesir►eld,MA. 18Ch nd er Hartford, Conn-
Wright AratZ eCtursl lNo0harnoton.MA. jaily stato Chteopea,tuna.
Haydenville Woodworking Amherst,Mo. Ctla WBSI "gfleld Me.
Laaret Nisi ffnr Gellert) Hot oke MA.
Bradford Woodworking morence Ma.
Sent by:IIVERMORE EDWARDS Feb-24-99 11 :53am from 1 781 890 2429 413 585 2444 Pa 9e 2/ 8
Chase Kitchen Renovation
4M MW NQ"
February 24, 1999
The attention of the Bidders submitting proposals for the above-referenced
project is called to the following addenda to the specifications and drawings.
The items set forth -herein, whether of omissions, additions, substitution,
deletion or clarification are all to be included in and form a part of each
proposal submitted.
Attached is a list of subcontractors Smith College recommends be invited to bid.
General Contractors shall list mechanical, electrical, Era protection, sheet
metal and communication subcontractors in their bid submission.
DELETE Section 08610 - WOOD WINDOWS in its entirety. ADD Section 08610 -
WOOD WINDOWS, as attached, in its entirety. This is proprietary bid, Eagle
windows shall be bid with no substitutions. Please contact Daft Campbell at
Lynx Windows and Doors for additional information at (413) 247-5810.
The General Contractor shall supply materials and labor for installation of 16
stainless steel comer guards. These are to be located in the field.
ADD note to 5/A9-2 "Existing rail shall be cleaned and repaired as required for
repainting."
END OF ADDENDUM#1
S-nt by:LIVERMORE EDWARDS Feb-24-99 11 :52am from 1 781 890 2429*413 585 2444 Page li 8
LIVERMORE, EDWARDS AND ASSOCIATES � `^
ARCHITECTS AND PLANNERS
FAX TRANSMISSION SHEEN'
260 Sear Hit] Road
Waltham,Massachusetts
Job Number. 02451
Q Tel,(781)890-8874
No,of NP8 G3 Fax(781)890-2429
(Include Transmission Sheet
LEoKice@aol.rom
• -
FROM:
FAX/SPEED DIAL#: Q
DATE: rL ' 42-A - `1� TIIvi
MESSAGE:
" R
Ativadro&C-erruri D.A.Sullivan Muois Construction Forish Constriction Co..sic,
581-4022 Mark WIMP Joe h4arois James B,Scheurar
P,p.Box 656 82-84 blo:tl:Sweet 148 Newton Street 21 Mainline D}five.Bo;358
Texas Road Northampton,MA 0;060 South Hadley,MA 0107: Westfrtid,MA 01086
Nonhatnpton,Ma 01060 413-584.0310 413.533.1320 413.56+8.862
413-584-4022 fax 413.587.5710 fa,N-413.532-1149 fax-413-562.7136
fax-413-584.0011
Fontaine Brothers Wright Builders
Dave Fontaine Jonatbat+Wright
A.R.preen do Son,Inc. 510 cottagx Street a8 sen,Street
David G oen Springrield,MA 01104 Northampton,MA 01060
19 St.James Avenue 413-781-2020 - 413-586.8287
P CJ.Box 1009 fax•5MK76
1401YOke.MAO 104)
413-538-7947
fax-413.5344798
SPE IA.L N MU&TONS
cc: '�
LE9813 CHASE KITCHEN RENOVATION
3.07 TESTING
A. Balancing Loads:
1. Circuits shall be connected to the panelboniis so that the total load is distributed equally
between each line and neutral to within ten percent. Branch circuits shall be balanced on
their own panelboards,and feeder loads balanced on the main distribution panel. Reasonable
load testing shall be arranged for verification if requested by the Public Works Department.
FEBRUARY 1999 16100-22 ELECTRICAL
LE9813 CHASE KITCHEN RENOVATION
b. A listing of the As-built cabling and components installed.
c. A record of the dynamic test results, both data communication simulation and the
real time photographs showing the Time Domain Reflectometer (TDR)
measurements of the individual cable segments.
CL Formalized As-built Drawings indicating the physical cable plant, component and
node locations..,,
e. A topology diagram depicting the network configuration for Owner's reference when
additions. changes,or modifications are made to the original design.
2.15 EMERGENCY CALL-FOR-AID SYSTEM(Handicap Toilet)
A. The building's Emergency Call-For-Aid System will be furnished and installed(including cabling) by
the Electrical Contractor.
B. Each Emergency Call Station shall consist of a single gang box with blank plate and a call switch. Call
switch shall be Simplex 5001 series.
C. The call station switch shall be long-life, positive acting mounted on a stainless steel plate marked
"Emergency". The unit shall include a six foot(6)long nylon pull cord
D. The combination chime/light station shall be a single bulb dome lamp with soft chime tone, flame
retardant ABS panel with snap-in lens. Provide lamps,chime and all required transformers.
E. Activation of system shall cause dome to illuminate and chime to tone. Signal cancellation must be
made at the point of origin.
PART 3-INSTALLATION
3.01 GENERAL INSTALLATION REQUIREMENTS
A The Electrical Contractor shEW endeavor to layout and perform his work in such a manner as to cause
no delay in the construction by other trades.
B. The Electrical Contractor shall verify all measurements and shall be responsible for the correctness of
same. No allowance will be made for differences between actual measurements and those shown on
per•
C. 1$m laying out his work, the Electrical Contractor finds that the work of other trades might interfere
with his,the Architect shall be notified
D. The locations of outlets,apparatus,and equipment are approximate only and the runs of feeders,mains,
and branches are not necessarily to be made exactly as shown on the plans. The exact locations of such
work shall be determined after full consideration has been given to work of other trades and without
changes in the design of the systems. The entire installation shall conform to the latest issue of the
Massachusetts Electrical Code and local inspection authorities.
FEBRUARY 1999 16100-19 ELECTRICAL
LE9813 CHASE KITCHEN RENOVATION ...
1. Acceptance testing shall be performed by the Architect/Engineer and Owner during a period
designated by the Owner. The period of time required for acceptance testing is two (2)
working days. Contractor shall furnish a minimum of one(1) technician for the acceptance
testing period This area shall be completed with all furnishings ready for occupancy.
2. Make additional mechanical and electrical adjustments within the scope of the work and
which are deemed necessary by the Architect or Owner as a result of the acceptance tests.
R Testing and Inspection
1. Test and inspect all parts of the work provided under this Section and as required by codes,
standard or -authorities having jurisdiction, and conduct all tests and inspections to the
complete satisfaction of the Architect and all authorities. Notify the Architect and all
involved authorities at least one (1) week prior to testing or inspection. Do not cover work
prior to testing or inspection.
2. The Contractor shall certify all twisted pair cable drops with a time domain reflectometer
(MR)device in order to verify compliance with IEEE Specifications. The test results for all .
cable drops must meet or exceed the following Specifications when tested from each end-
a. Compliance with EIAMA T569B wiring sequence.
b. Distance: Less than 90 meters.
C. Attenuation at 10.0 NlHz: Less than 6.95 dB.
CL Near end crosstalk(NEXT)at 10.0 Mhz: Greater than 44.1)Db.
e. Cable Resistance: Less than 9.4 OHMS(18.8 loopback).
f Noise: Less than 100 mv.
g TDR testing will be performed with 10 8.Category V patch cables;one at TDR,and
one at signal injector.
h Document all data obtained in cable certification process for each drop, including
Outlet IO and Pass/Fail status.
S. System Documentation:
1. Prepare and submit four(4) copies of operation and maintenance manuals, neatly bound as
outlined in this Specification.
-- 2. Manual to include:
a. A system block diagram with all input(ou tpu t terminations and patch points
identified.
a_ FEBRUARY 1999 16100-18 ELECTRICAL
LE9813 CHASE KITCHEN RENOVATION
standards,criteria,or other requirements. including,but not limited to,structural support,fire
rating and health/safety requirements regarding all items. Such conformity shall have
precedence over this Specification.
2. Secure equipment firmly in place, including boxes, conduit, and cables. Provide fastenings
and supports adequate to support loads.
3. Install work neatly, with boxes, equipment, etc., plumb and square. Adjust layout as
necessary to preserve symmetry and aesthetics. Install equipment to provide maximum safety
to future operators.
4. Clearly,logically,and permanently mark connectors,jacks,cables,and cable terminations.
P. Wiring
1. Provide wire, conduits, and raceways according to standard broadcast practices. Do not
exceed 301/6 fill in conduit.
2. Exercise care in wiring to avoid damage to cables and equipment
3. Wiring shall not rest on ceiling material nor touch any heat sources. Conduits exposed to
physical abuse shall be run in RSC,3/4"minimum
4. Install all data wire and cable. Ensure proper. .
a. Pulling tensions.
b. Quantities.
C. Types.
d. Lengths.
e. Routing.
f. Wire group separation.
g. Identification.
5. The interconnection of all equipment requiring shielded cable shall be by Belden type 9451,
or equivalent,unless otherwise specified
6. All wires shall be permanently identified at each wire end by marking with "E-Z" tape
markers or equivalent
7. Splicing of cables is not permitted between terminations at specified equipment
8. Form, in a neat and orderly manner, all conductors in enclosures and boxes, wireways and
wiring troughs, providing circuit and conductor identification. Tie as required using MB
"Ty-Raps"of appropriate size and type. Limit spacing between ties to 6",and provide circuit
and conductor identification at least once in each enclosure.
9. Provide ample service loops at each termination so that plates,panels, and equipment can be
unmounted for service and inspection.
Q. Acceptance Testing
AOKI. FEBRUARY 1999 16100-17 ELECTRICAL
LE9813 CHASE KITCHEN RENOVATION Amok
5. Where existing cables(outlets)are being relocated to an adjacent«all.Contractor shall cut off
connector and pull cable to new outlet box location. Pull and label as specified
K Testing of Data Cables
1. Each pair and the shield of each cable shall be tested for opens. shorts, grounds, and pair
reversal. Grounded and reversed pairs shall be corrected by the Contractor. Open and
shorted pairs shall be examined to determine if the problem is caused by faulty termination. If
the termination is proper, the bad pairs shall be tapped at both ends and noted on the punch
down sheets.
2. If any data cable contains any bad conductors or pairs,the entire cable shall be replaced at no
charge to the Owner.
3. All terminated UTP cables shall conform to the Specifications for Category 5 cable.
L. Grounding
1. All equipment racks, housings,and raceways shall be grounded
2. Data system shall contain a single point ground All cabinets,racks,etc,shall be connected to
a single point ground which, in turn, will be connected to the grounding systems conductors
in that area.
3. All manufacturers grounding requirements shall be adhered to as a minimum.
M. Labeling
1. Each cable shall be labeled:
a. Where it enters a termination or patch panel.
b. On the front of the patch panel or punch block
2. Cables shall be labeled using pre-printed or write-on markers with a clear overwrap to protect
the labeling. If pre-printed markers are utilized, the clear overwrap shall cover the entire
legend
3. All cables will be labeled at both ends,with room number and floor.
N. Field Quality Control
1. Employ a Job Superintendent or Project Manager during the course of the installation to
provide co-ordination of the worm of the Division and of other trades and to provide technical
information when requested by other trades. This person shall be responsible for all quality
control during installation,equipment set-up and testing.
O. General Co-ordination(Date and Telephone Wiring)
1. Entire system shall conform completely with pertinent codes, laws, ordinances, regulations,
FEBRUARY 1999 16100-16 ELECTRICAL AWWW
LE9813 CHASE KITCHEN RENOVATION
b. Minimum bend radius: 2.00 in.
C. Nominal diameter: .217 in.
d. Cable shall be Belden No. 1583A or approved equal.
4. Wall Plates and Connectors
a. Furnish and install faceplales, boxes and inserts based on equipment as
manufactured by Hubbell.
i. - Date-Category 5 5110 Type.
ii. Voice-FTJ Type
b. Data runs will be punched down (8 wires) to Category V RJ45 patch panels using
EIAMA 568B standard.
C. Voice station wires will be punched down to 110 Type blocks.
CL Provide two (2) port faceplates for "Data Only" locations and three (3) port
faceplates for combined voice/data locations.
5. Voice cable to be Category 3.
�w J. Installation of Data and Telephone Cabling
1. Install materials and equipment in accordance with manufacturers printed instructions to
comply with governing regulations and industry standards applicable to the work and as
shown on approved Shop Drawings.
a. Contractor shall rigidly adhere to manufacturer's published specifications for pulling
tension,minimum bend radii,and sidewall pressure when installing all cables.
2. Arrange and mount all equipment and materials in a manner acceptable to the
Architect/Engineer and Owner.
3. Installation shall conform to the following basic guidelines:
a. Use of approved wire,cable,and wiring devices.
b. Neat and uncluttered wire termination.
C. Cable marking materials shall be employed throughout the length of each cable run.
The Contractor shall label each cable at the ends and at each splice/junction point.
Contractor shall label cables in accordance with 2.13.M, "Labeling"of this section.
4. Provide fire stopping for electrical penetrations through fire rated floors, walls, and other
partitions of building construction.
FEBRUARY 1999 16100-15 ELECTRICAL
LE9813 CHASE KITCHEN RENOVATION .
backboard shall remain and be sealed off with plastic covering during construction to avoid dust
intrusion as much as practicable.
C. New outlet locations,as shown on Drawings,shall consist of standard size outlet box, and cover plates
(smooth phenolic ivory),with 3 ports;(1)for data(1)for telephone,and(1)for future expansion.
D. The work in this Section shall be performed by a Contractor who has been pre-qualified by the College.
Acceptable Contractor is Hogan.
E. Work of this Section shall include the installation, termination, and testing of all data and telephone
wiring from the outlets indicated on the Contract Drawings to the Data and Telephone Equipment as
directed by the Owner.
F. Each Telephone/Data outlet drop shall consist of one (1) data and one (1) voice drop, run from each
outlet location to the existing equipment
G. All data runs must be installed without cross-connects between wall jack and patch panel terminations.
K Voice nuns may be cross connected on 110 blocks.
I. Data cabling shall be Category V, unshielded twisted pair,(UP),with a blue sheath as manufactured
by IBM Belden,or AT&T.
1. The installed cabling must meet or exceed-the following specifications:
a. UTP (unshielded twisted pair), Category V rated, 24 AWG solid bare CU. PVC "
jacket 4 pairs.
b. Nominal capacitance at 1 KHZ:4 PF/FT.
C. Nominal velocity of progragation: 67%
d. Nominal Delay: 1.5 NS/FT.
C. Nominal Condr/D.C.R at 20 C: 27 OHMS/1000 FT.
f. Characteristic Impedance: 100 OHMS+/-15%.
2. Frernrencv Max.Attenuation Min.Crosstalk
1 MHz 6.3 dB/1,000 Ft 62 dB/1,000 Ft
4 MHz 13 dB/1,000 Ft 53 dB/1,000 Ft
10 MHz 20 dB/1,000 Ft 47 dB/1,000 Ft
16 MHz 25 dB/1,000 FL 44 dB/1,000 Ft
20 MHz 28 dB/1,000 FL 42 dB11,000 Ft
100 MHz 67 dB/1,000 FL 32 dB/1,000 FL
3. Physical Characteristics
a. Maximum pulling tension: 41 lbs.
AVVI,
FEBRUARY 1999 16100-14 ELECTRICAL
LE9813 CHASE KITCHEN RENOVATION
C. Circuit breakers shall be equippers with individually insulated, braced and protected connectors. The
front faces of all circuit breakers shall be flush with each other. Large permanent, individual circuit
numbers shall be affixed to each breaker in a uniform position., Tripped indication shall be clearly
shown by the breaker handle taking a position between "ON' and "OFF". Provisions for additional
breakers shall be such that no additional connectors will be required to add breakers.
D. Each panelboard,as a complete unit,shall have a short circuit rating equal to 42,000 amps.
E. Panelboard assembly shall be enclosed in a steel cabinet. The rigidity and gauge of steel to be as
specified in UL Standard 50 for cabinets. The size of wiring gutters shall be in accordance with UL
Standard 67. Cabinets to be equipped with latch and tumbler lock on door of trim. Doors over 48"
long shall be equipped with three-point latch and vault lock. All locks shall be keyed alike. End walls
shall be removable. -
F. The panelboard interior assembly shall be dead front with panelboard front removed. Main lugs shall
be barriered on five sides. The barrier in front of the main lugs shall be hinged to be fixed part of the
interior. The end of the bus structure opposite the mains shall be barriered.
G. Panelboards shall be listed by UL and shall bear the UL label. Panelboard shall be Square D I-LINE,
series for 120/208 volts. No substitutions will be allowed
2.12 FIRE ALARM SYSTEM (Furnished by Owner,Installed by Electrical Contractor)
A. The Electrical Contractor shall install fire alarm system components as shown on Drawings. All fire
alarm equipment shall be furnished by the Owner and shall be as manufacnued by Simplex to match
existing system.
B. All wiring in conduit shall be furnished and installed by the Electrical Contractor.
C. The building shall be wired on a"zone"per floor basis unless otherwise indicated by the Owner.
2.13 ELECTRIC SERVICE
A. Electric service shall be 600 ampere,208Y/120 volt,3 phase,4 wire.
B. The Electrical Contractor shall provide new secondary feeder(sized as shown on Plans)from existing
pad mounted transformer as directed by the Owner. Connect to new main disconnect as shown on
Drawings.
C. The system shall be property grounded as required by the Massachusetts Electrical Code. Ground cable
shall be secured to the water service with an approved clamp;bond water pipe sections as required by
Section 250-81 NEC.
2.14 TELEPHONE/DATA SYSTEM
A. The building's internal telephone/data system is existing,and will be modified to accommodate the new
building layout as shown on the Drawings and directed by the Owner.
B. Existing head end equipment, including fiber optic data and telephone equipment mounted on existing
FEBRUARY 1999 16100-13 ELECTRICAL
LE9813 CHASE KITCHEN RENOVATION
2.09 SERVICE ENTRANCE EQUIPMENT
A. Service entrance equipment shall consist of a 600 amp, 3 pole, 4 wire and solid neutral combination
main circuit breaker and GT compartment. The main circuit breaker shall have a minimum rating of
22 KAIC at 240 volts.
2.10 PANELBOARDS
A. Furnish and install circuit breaker lighting and receptacle panelboards as required and where shown on
the Plans. Panelboards shall be equipped with thermal-magnetic molded case circuit breakers with
frame and trip ratings as required.
B. Circuit breakers shall be quick-make, quick-break, thermal-magnetic, trip indicating, and have
common trip on all multi-pole breakers. Trip indication shall be clearly shown by the breaker handle
taking position between "On" and "Off' when the breaker is tripped Connections to the bus shall be
bolt-on.
C. Bus bar connections to the branch circuit breaker shall be the "distributed phase" or "phase sequence"
type. All current-carrying parts of the bus assembly shall be plated.
D. Terminals for feeder conductors to the panelboard mains and neutral shall be UL listed as suitable for
the type of conductor specified Terminals for branch circuit wiring,both breaker and neutral. shall be
UL listed as suitable for,the type of conductor specified.
E. Panelboard circuit numbering shall be such that starting at the top, odd numbers shall be used in
sequence down the left-hand side and even numbers shall be used in sequence down the right-hand
side.
F. A circuit directory frame and card with a clear plastic covering shall be provided on the inside of the
door. The directory card shall provide a space at least 1/4" high by 3" long or equivalent for each
circuit. The directory shall be typed to identify the load fed by each circuit.
G. Each panelboard, as a complete unit, shall have a short circuit current rating equal to or greater than
10,000 amps.
H. Panelboards shall be listed by Underwriters'Laboratories and bear the UL label. Panelboards shall be
Square D, "NQOD"series for 120/208 volts. No substitutions will be allowed
2.11 DISTRIBUTION PANELBOARDS
A. Furnish and install distribution/power panelboards where shown on the Plans. Panelboards shall be
equipped with thermal-magnetic,molded case circuit breakers of frame and trip ratings as required.
B. Panelboard bus structure and main lugs shall have current ratings as required Such ratings shall be
established by heat rise tests with maximum hot spot temperature on any connector or bus bar not to
exceed 50°C above ambient. Heat rise tests shall be conducted in accordance with Underwriters
Laboratories Standard UL 67. The use of conductor dimensions will not be accepted in lieu of actual
heat tests.
FEBRUARY 1999 16100-12 ELECTRICAL
LE9813 CHASE KITCHEN RENOVATION
nism shall be an integral part of the box,not the cover,with positive pad-locking provisions in
the"Off'position.
3. Switches shall be furnished in NEMA 1 general purpose enclosures unless NEMA 3R
(rainproof) is required. Enclosures shall have gray enamel, electro-deposited on cleaned
phosphatized steel.
4. Switches shall be horsepower rated for 240 volts AC.
5. Fuses shall be as required.
6. Switches shall be Square D, heavy duty type in NEMA 1 or NEMA 311 enclosures,or equal.
C. Disconnect switches for 120 volt,single phase motors shall be single or double pole toggle switches as
specified,or required.
D. Motor starters shall be across-the-line magnetic type rated in accordance with NENIA Standards, sizes
and horsepower ratings. Starters shall be mounted in general purpose enclosures unless otherwise
indicated on the Plans.
1. Across-the-line magnetic starters shall be equipped with double break silver alloy contacts.
All contacts shall be replaceable without removing power wiring or removing starter from
panel.
2. Coils shall be of molded construction, replaceable from the front without removing the starter
from the panel.
3. Overload relays shall be the melting alloy type with a replaceable control circuit module.
Thermal units shall be of one-piece construction and interchangeable. The starter shall be
inoperative if the thermal unit is removed
a. All three phase magnetic starters shall have"Hand-Off-Auto"selector switch, three-
pole,three-phase of NEMA size applicable,with three melting alloy overload relays
and three-position H-O-A switch in cover of general purpose enclosure. To be
Allen-Bradley Bulletin 522. No substitutions will be allowed.
b. All single phase magnetic starters shall be single pole magnetic contactor without
overload protection, with "Hand-Off-Auto" selector switch in cover of general
purpose enclosure. To be Allen-Bradley Bulletin 509. No substitutions will be
allowed
C. A control transformer shall be furnished and installed in each starter,fused,with 24
volt secondary. Starter coils shall be 24 volt
CL Furnish a minimum of one auxiliary contact in each starter for use by others for
interlocking purposes.
E. Equivalent equipment by Cutler-Hammer,General Electric will be considered
FEBRUARY 1999 16100-11 ELECTRICAL
LE9813 CHASE KITCHEN RENOVATION Aosw
b. Type"D"-30 amp, 125/250 volt, 3 pole,4 wire,Leviton Cat.No. 278.
10. Clock hanger outlet with single receptacle and strong hook for hanging heavy clocks,Leviton
Cat.No.688-L ivory finish,or equal. Clocks shall be provided by the Owner.
11. Wall plates shall be smooth molded urea or phenolic plastic, ivory with matching screws. To
be Leviton CaL No. 86000 series,or equal.
12. Occupancy sensors shall consist of wall mounted passive infrared sensors mounted in
standard size switch box at standard switch height Sensor to include integral manual auto/off
bypass switch. time delay adjustment from 30 seconds to 30 minutes, and daylight level
sensor adjustable from 2.4 to 300 f.c. Provide decorator style ivory phenolic plastic cover. To
be Watt Stopper Cat.No. WS-120,or equal for 120 volt operation.
2.07 LIGHTING FLYTURES
A. Furnish and install lighting fixtures on all light outlets shown on plans. All fighting fixtures to have
label of Underwriters Laboratories, Inc. Fixtures to be complete in all respects with all required glass-
ware and lamps. All lamps to be new. Furnish and install all required hardware to fit in all type
ceilings. Fixtures are to be cleaned after lamps and diffusers are installed. Any chipped, cracked or
otherwise defective material shall be replaced
B. Fluorescent ballasts shall be solid state electronic type, approvable for use on their system by the
Massachusetts Electric Co. FLxture/lamp combinations for which electronic ballasts are not available
shall be high power factor, energy efficient magnetic type, complete with automatic reset thermal ""
protector,and shall be CBM certified.
C. All fixtures shall be installed complete with lamps of the stated type and size. T-8 lamps shall be 3500
K. Compact fluorescent PL lamps shall be 3,500 K.
D. All fixtures to be independently supported from building structure.
E. Fixtures are identified by letter on the Fixture Schedule and by corresponding letter on Drawings.
Manufacturers' names and catalogue numbers are listed to show type and standard of quality.
Complete schedule of lighting fixtures shall be submitted to and approved by the Architect and Owner.
2.08 MOTOR STARTERS AND SWITCHES
A. Furnish and install motor starting,protecting,and controlling devices for motors.
B. Furnish and install heavy duty fused safety switches as required
1. All switches shall have switch blades which are fully visible in the "Off' position with the
door open. All current-carrying parts shall be plated to resist contusion and promote cool
operation.
2. Switches shall be quick-made and quick-break such that, during normal operation of the
switch,the operation of the contacts shall not be capable of being restrained by the operating
handle after the closing or opening action of the contacts has started The handle and mecha-
FEBRUARY 1999 16100-10 ELECTRICAL
LE9813 CHASE KITCHEN RENOVATION
F. Pull and junction boxes,whether surface or flush.shall be galvanized code gauge.
G. Pull boxes and wireways shall be standard NeAA-1 enclosures with cover plates and screws,
bonderized paint finished
H. Pull and splice boxes not indicated on the Drawings shall be provided as required by the National and
the Massachusetts Electrical Codes.
I. Outlet boxes and covers shall be as manufactured by Steel City electrical Company, General Electric
Company,Raco,or approved equal.
2.05 NAMEPLATES
A. Furnish and install nameplates identifying all apparatus, controls, panels and safety switches. The
nameplates shall be Seton style 2060 engraved plastic, or equal, screw attached Submit schedule of
nameplate lettering for approval.
2.06 WIRING DEVICES
A. The Electrical Contractor shall install devices where shown on the plans. Where two or more de-ices
occur at one location,they shall be provided with a gang plate. All unused boxes to be furnished with
blank plates.
1. Duplex Receptacles - 20 amp. 125 volt with grounding screw, side and back wired To be
Leviton Cat.No. 5352-I,or equal.
2. Ground fault interrupting receptacles shall be Leviton Cat.No.6898-HGI,or equal.
3. Weatherproof cover for receptacles shall be lockable,vertical,UL Listed,with Lexan base and
6d.4 screw attachment,Tay Mac Cat.No.20-3-5-0,or equal.
4. Duplex receptacles, isolated ground - 20 A, 125 V, side and back wired Leviton Cat. No.
5362-IG,or equal.
5. Light Switches, Single Pole -20 amp, 120/277 volt, back and side wined Leviton Cat No.
1221-2,or equal.
6. Light Switches,3 Way-20 amp, 120/277 volt,back and side wired Leviton Cat No. 1223-2,
or equal.
7. Light Switches,4 Way-20 amp, 120/277 volt,back and side wired,Leviton Cat No. 1224-2,
or equal.
8. Switch and Pilot Light-20 amp, 120 volt,side and back wired,red handle,Leviton Cat No.
1221-PLR,or equal.
9. Power receptacles shall be flush type,of NEMA configuration shown,with matching cord and
cap,Leviton,or equal,as follows:
a. Type"R"-50 amp, 125/250 volt,3 pole,4 wire,Leviton Cat No.279.
FEBRUARY 1999 16100-9 ELECTRICAL
MW
LE9813 CHASE KITCHEN RENOVATION
E. Flexible steel conduit (Type MC) shall be used from homenu► point(ENM to remaining portions of
circuits(between receptacles,fights,switch legs,etc.),as shown on Plans.
2.02 WIREWAYS
A. Wireways shall be made to accommodate conductors as required in accordance with applicable rules of
the National Electrical Code. To be of code gauge steel and supported as required by Code. Wireways
shall be furnished and installed complete with the necessary complement of fittings, connectors, and
accessory parts. Wireways shall be of the "lay-inn" type with standard knockouts and with screw
covers for full channel access. All sheet metal parts shall be coated with a nut inhibitor and finished in
grey baked enamel. All hardware shall be plated to prevent corrosion.
2.03 CONDUCTORS
A. Conductors shall be 98%conductivity copper, with 600 volt insulation, and shall be of types indicated
below unless otherwise shown on the plans. Aluminum conductors shall not be used
B. Conductors X10 AWG and smaller,Type THWN,sofid.
C. Conductors 94 AWG through#8 AWG,Type THWN,stranded
D. Conductors 43 AWG and larger,Type THW,stranded
E. Branch circuit wiring located above lay in file ceilings or fished in stud partitions may be Type MC
cable;single and multi-circuit home tuns shall be raceway and wire as specified.
F. Wire and cable for special systems shall be as specified in those specification sections.
G. Wire and Cable to be by Cerro,Southwire,Triangle/PWC,or equal.
2.04 OUTLET AND JUNCTION BOXES
A. Outlet boxes and covers shall be galvanized or sheradized pressed steel unless otherwise noted or
required by the National Electrical Code,and shall be as required for their use.
B. Junction and outlet boxes,where exposed to weather and wet locations shall be of the cast aluminum,
threaded hub type and provided with watertight screw-on cover and gasket
�. Outlet boxes shall be of sizes and types to accommodate:
1. structural conditions.
2. size and number of raceways and conductors or cables entering.
3. device of fixture for which required
D. Boxes occurring at plastered surfaces shall have a suitable plaster ring installed
E. Where multiple devices are looted at one point,gang type boxes shall be used
FEBRUARY 1999 16100-8 ELECTRICAL,
LE9813 CHASE KITCHEN RENOVATION
1.18 CUTTING AND PATCHING
A Cutting and/or drilling of all openings and holes 4" in diameter or smaller, required for the installation
of electrical apparatus in the building, shall be performed by the Electrical Contractor. All work and
materials shall be installed in such a manner and at such time to keep cutting and patching to a
minimum Cutting and/or drilling of structural supports (i.e. beams or joists) is not allowed without
written approval by the Architect Location for openings, etc. shall be checked by the Plumbing
Contractor, and error due to failure to co-ordinate work with other divisions shall be the responsibility
of the Electrical Contractor failing to co-ordinate,who shall make the corrections at his own expense.
B. All holes larger than d"in diameter shall be provided by the General Contractor.
C. Work shall include furnishing and locating sleeves or inserts required before the new walls are built, or
be responsible for the cost of cutting and patching required for conduit and equipment where sleeves
were not installed or where incorrectly located. The Electrical Contractor shall do all drilling required
for the installation of hangers.
D. Patching of all holes, after installation of piping or equipment, shall be performed by the General
Contractor or appropriate tradesmen.
E. All pipe cutting or threading shall be done in a location approved by the Owner.
F. No pipe cutting or threading shall be done in areas where completed concrete floor slab is to remain in
finishes or be painted later. Should this area be necessary, the Electrical Contractor shall cover the
entire working area with canvas tarpaulins in an approved manner.
1.19 RECORD DRAWINGS
A. Submit Record Drawings as specified in Division 1.
PART 2-MATERIALS
2.01 RACEWAYS
A. Rigid galvanized steel or intermediate steel conduit shall be used for all raceway nms concealed in
concrete,nut under slabs,run in trenches or pits,exposed below 6'above floor,and for service entrance
conductor sweeps. Conduit shall comply with the latest applicable Federal Specifications.
B. Electrical metallic tubing may be used for all homerun raceways run in walls or partitions, raceways
run exposed inside the building, or run concealed m or above furred spaces unless otherwise specified
above. Electrical metallic tubing shall comply with the latest applicable requirements of the National
Electrical Manufacturers Association. Couplings,connectors,and fittings for electrical metallic tubing
may be of the set screw type.
C. Electrical metallic tubing shall be used for all homeruns.
D. Flexible Steel Conduit(Type MC)shall be used for final connections to motors, (Type MC), or other
movable equipment to facilitate removal and connections.
'` FEBRUARY 1999 16100-7 ELECTRICAL
LE9813 CHASE KITCHEN RENOVATION
8. List of recommended spare parts.
9. Copies of all service contracts.
10. Performance curves for pumps,fans,etc.
11. List of all names, addresses, and phone numbers of all Contractors as well as the local
representative for each item of equipment.
1.16 GUARANTEE
A. The Electrical Contractor shall guarantee the satisfactory operation of his work in all parts for a
period of one(1)year after date of final acceptance,and shall agree to promptly repair or replace
any items of his work which are found to be defective during this period.
B. The Electrical Contractor shall pay for repair of damage to the building caused by defects in his work
and for repair to plaster, wood, and other materials or equipment caused by replacement or repairs to
the entire satisfaction of the Architect
C. Any part of the work installed under this Contract requiring excessive maintenance shall be considered
as being defective.
1.17 ALTERNATES
A. Alternate Bid Item No. 1
1. Price above the Base Bid for furnishing all labor,materials,and other costs in connection with
furnishing and installing new lighting in the Dining Rooms and all associated wiring,
switches,etc. See Drawings for Scope.
2. This Alternate will impact lighting and circuitry.
B. Alternate Bid Item No.2
1. Alternate Bid Item No. 2 shall be the addition in price above the Base Bid for fiunishing all
Libor, materials, and other costs in connection with the Porch/Portcal extension and all
relative receptacles,wiring,etc. See Drawings for Scope.
2. This Alternate will impact the location of a special receptacle.
C. Alternate Bid Item No.3
1. Alternate Bid Item No. 3 shall be the addition in price above the Base Bid for furnishing all
labor, materials, and other costs in connection with the new overhead electrical distribution
system from the Kitchen Hood to the Island sinks. See Drawings for Scope.
2. This Alternate will impact the receptacles in this area.
FEBRUARY 1999
16100 ELECTRICAL
LE9813 CHASE KITCHEN RENOVATION
1.13 ENVIRONMENTAL CONDITIONS
A. All necessary tools machinery, scaffolding, and transportation for completion of his Contract shall be
provided by the individual Contractor.
B. The Electrical Contractor shall provide his own portable extension lines and obtain 120 volt, 60 cycle.
single phase electric energy from the General Contractor to drive his machines and light his work. He
shall provide his own light bulbs,plugs,sockets,etc.
C. All broken or waste material_ rags, packing, etc., resulting from his work shall be removed by the
individual Contractor.
1.14 WORK CONCEALED
A. All piping,duct work,cable, and raceway shall be installed concealed in all areas except storage rooms.
closets,and mechanical or electrical equipment rooms.
B. Exposed runs shall be run straight and level,parallel or perpendicular to the lines of the building.
1.15 OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS
A. After all final tests and adjustments have been completed, fully instruct the proper Owner's
representative in all details of operation for equipment installed. Supply qualified personnel to operate
equipment for sufficient length of time to assure that Owner's representative is properly qualified to
take over operation and maintenance procedures.
B. Furnish the Architect, for his approval, three (3) copies of an Operation and Maintenance Manual.
Inscribe the following identification on the cover. the words, "Operation and Maintenance Manual",
the name and location of the equipment or the building,the name of the Contractor, and the Contract
number. The manual shall have a Table of Contents with tab sheets placed before each Section. The
instructions shall be legible and easily read, with large sheets of Drawings folded in. The manuals
shall be bound in hard binders or an approved equivalent
C. The manual shall include the following information:
1 Description of systems.
2. Description of start up,operation,and shutdown procedures for each item of equipment
3. Winter/summer changeover procedures.
4. Schedule of adjustment,care,and routine maintenance for each item of equipment
5. Lubrication chart.
6. Wiring and control diagrams with data to explain detailed operation and control of each item
of equipment
7. Valve chart,if applicable.
FEBRUARY 1999 16100-5 ELECTRICAL
LE9813 I CHASE KITCHEN RENOVATION
C. The review of Shop Drawings by the Architect shall not relieve the Electrical Contractor from any
obligation to perform the work strictly in accordance with the Contract Drawings and Specifications.
The responsibility for errors in Shop Drawings shall remain with the Contractor.
D. In the event that materials are being delivered to or installed on the job for which Shop Drawings or
samples have not been approved and/or which are not in accordance with the Specifications, the
Electrical Contractor will be required to remove such materials and substitute approved materials at his
own expense and as directed by the Architect
1.08 PERMITS,FEES, AND INSPECTIONS
A. The Electrical Contractor shall secure all permits and pay all fees required for his work. He shall be
required to secure all other permits and pay all other fees and charges incidental to the proper carving
out of the Contract. He is to assume all responsibility regarding the observance of the rules and
regulations so far as they relate to his part of the work
B. The Electrical Contractor shall arrange and pay for all required inspections of his work.
1.09 TEMPORARY HOOK-UPS
A. The General Contractor will provide any temporary hook-ups required for the use of water or sanitary
for construction purposes and testing out apparatus as specified in Division 1.
1.10 TEMPORARY LIGHT AND POWER
A. The General Contractor will furnish and install temporary light and power as specified in Division 1.
1.11 PLANS AND SPECIFICATIONS
A. The Electrical Contractor shall refer to the Architectural Drawings of interior details,plans,elevations,
and structural layout in preparing his estimate These documents are intended to supplement the
Mechanical and Electrical Plans and Specifications and any applicable work indicated or implied
thereon is to be considered a part of the Contract requirements.
B. The Specifications are complementary and anything called for,or reasonably implied, in the Plans and
not in the Specifications,or vice versa,shall be considered as called for or reasonably implied in both.
C. The Electrical Contractor shall not scale the Drawings.
D. Because of the small scale of the Drawings,it is not possible to indicate all offsets,fittings and accesso-
ries that may be required The Electrical Contractor shall carefidly investigate the structural and finish
conditions affecting all his work and shall arrange such work accordingly, firrnishing such accessories
as may be required to meet such conditions,at no additional cost
1.12 PRODUCT HANDLING
A The Electrical Contractor shall provide for the delivery of all his materials and fixtures to the building
site when required, so as to carry on his work efficiently and to avoid delaying his work and that of
other trades.
FEBRUARY 1999 161004 ELECTRICAL
LE9813 CHASE KITCHEN RENOVATION
F. All work shall be laid out and installed so as to require the least amount of cutting and patching.
Drilling of all holes required for the installation of pipes, conduit,and cable runs shall be performed by
the Electrical Contractor installing such items.
G. The Electrical Contractor shall be responsible for the proper protection of his work and materials from
injury or loss at the hands of others and shall make good such loss or injury at his own expense. All
pipes left open during the progress of the work shall be capped or plugged at all times. All instruments
and operating apparatus shall be protected by suitable means.
H. The Electrical Contractor shall be responsible for all equipment and materials installed under this
Section until the final acceptance of the project by the Owner.
I. Before submitting his bid, the Electrical Contractor shall visit the site with the Drawings and
Specifications and shall become thoroughly familiar with all conditions affecting his work since the
EIectrical Contractor will be held responsible for any assumption he may make in regard thereto.
J. The Electrical Contractor shall check the Architectural Plans and Specifications before ordering any
materials and the installation of work Any discrepancies shall be called to the attention of the
Architect before proceeding with the work-
1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Equality of materials or articles other than those named or described in this Section will be determined
in accordance with the provisions of the General Requirements, except that substitutions will only be
considered for items where the words, "or equal' appear in product specifications and as approved by
the Architect and Owner.
B. The Electrical Contractor shall agree to accept as final the results of tests secured b},a qualified testing
laboratory engaged by the Owner. Tests will be conducted in accordance with the General Require-
ments.
1.06 PRODUCTS
A- With the exception of items specifically noted other-wise, all materials used shall be U.S. made, new,
full weight, and first class in every respect, without defects, and designed to function properly in that
portion of the work for which they are intenders, and with the same brand of manufacturers for each
class of material or equipment Electrical materials and equipment of types for which there are Under-
writers Laboratories standard requirements, listings, or labels shall conform to their requirements and
be so labeled-
1.07 SUBMITTALS
A. Before ordering materials shipped to the job, the Electrical Contractor shall submit to the Architect six
(6)sets of catalogue cuts, manufacturers'data sheets,or Shop Drawings,giving all details,dimensions,
capacities,etc.of all materials to be furnished
B. The Electrical Contractor shall check the Shop Drawings thoroughly for compliance with the Plans and
Specifications before submitting them to the Architect for review, making any and all changes which
may be required.
FEBRUARY 1999 16100-3 ELECTRICAL
LE9813 CHASE KITCHEN RENOVATION
13. Disconnect and remove existing electrical equipment made obsolete by new construction. All
removed equipment shall be the property of the Owner and delivered to such places as
designated by the Owner.
14. All existing electrical systems and equipment which are to remain in operation and which
interfere with new construction shall be relocated and reconnected as required.
1.03 CODES,ORDINANCES AND INSPECTIONS
A. All materials and the installation thereof shall conform to the requirements of the Massachusetts State
Building Code,Massachusetts Electrical Code, and local laws, rules, regulations, and codes pertaining
thereto. Where provisions of the Contract Documents conflict with any codes, rules or regulations, the
latter shall govern. Where the Contract requirements are in excess of applicable codes, rules or
regulations,the Contract provisions shall govern unless the Architect rules otherwise.
B. The Electrical Contractor shall comply with the Local Code Enforcement Officials' instructions at no
additional cost to the Owner.
1.04 INSTALLATION REQUIREMENTS
A The Electrical Contractor shall employ only competent and experienced workmen at a regular schedule
in harmony with the other tradesmen on the job. He shall also exercise care and supervision of his
employees in regard to proper and expeditious laying out of his work
B. The Electrical Contractor shall have a Foreman or Superintendent assigned to the Project who shall be
authorized to make decisions and receive instructions exactly as if the Electrical Contractor himself
were present The Foreman or Superintendent shall not be removed or replaced without the express
approval of the Architect after construction work begins.
C. The Electrical Contractor shall be held responsible for any injuries or damage done to the building
premises or adjoining property or to other Contractors'work resulting from the execution of his part of
the work in any manner whatsoever,and in case of dispute arising as to the extent or share of responsi-
bility incurred by the Electrical Contractor,it is agreed between the Owner and the Electrical Contra-
ctor that such liability and extent of damage shall be finally determined by the Architect whose decision
shall be final and binding on both parties to the Contract for the work in question.
D. The Electrical Contractor shall co-operate to the fullest extent with all other trades in order to expedite
the progress of the work He shall famish all information pertaining to his materials as to sizes,
locations, and means of support, to all other trades requiring such information. The Electrical
Contractor shall also furnish all sleeves,frames,beams, supports, inserts, etc., hereinafter specified so
that the General Contractor may build them in place. In case of failure on the part of the EIectrical
Contractor to give proper information as above,he will be required to bear the extra expense involved
due to such failure.
E. The arrangement of all piping, duct work, conduit, wire and cable indicated on the Drawings is
diagrammatic only,and indicates the minimum requirements of this work. Conditions at the building
shall determine the actual arrangement of runs,bends, offsets,etc. The Electrical Contractor shall lay
out all his work and be responsible for the accuracy thereof. Conditions at the building shall be the
determining factor for all measurements.
FEBRUARY 1999 16100-2 ELECTRICAL,
LE9813 CHASE KITCHEN RENOVATION
SECTION 16100
ELECTRICAL
PART 1 -GENERAL
1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A Include General Conditions, Supplementary General Conditions,and applicable parts of Division 1,as
part of this Section.
B. Examine all other Sections of the Specifications for requirements which affect work under this Section
whether or not such work is specifically mentioned in this Section.
C. Co-ordinate work with that of all other trades affecting, or affected by the work of this Section. Co-
operate with such trades to assure steady progress of all work under the Contract
1.02 SCOPE OF WORK
A Furnish all labor, materials, plant, equipment and services necessary for and reasonably incidental to
the complete installation of all electrical work specified herein and/or indicated on the Drawings,
including,but not limited to,the following:
1. New Electric Service and Service Entrance Equipment
2. Branch Circuit Wiring and Conduit
3. Feeders.
4. Panelboards.
5. Lighting Fixtures and Lamps.
6. Telephone/Data System
7. Fire Alarm System Modifications.
8. Emergency Call For Aid System
9. Wiring devices and plates.
10. Power wiring to motors and equipment furnished by other trades or Owner including final
connections to kitchen equipmenL
11. Arrange for inspections and perform tests.
12. Guarantee and instructions.
look FEBRUARY 1999 16100-1 ELECTRICAL
AWK LE 9813 CHASE KITCHEN RENOVATION
3.10 IDENTIFICATION
A. All piping, valves, controls and equipment on the project shall be identified as specified herein. All
marks of identification shall be easily visible from the floor or usual point of vision.
B. All piping shall be identified as to the service of the pipe and the normal direction of flow. The letters
shall be 1" high and the flow arrows shall be at least 6" long. The letters and flow arrows shall be
made by precut stencils and black oil base paint with aerosol can or snap-on,pre-printed plastic labels.
Install identification in each room and additionally so that markers are not over 50 feet on center.
C. Each valve,except nmout valves.but including control valves, shall be tagged with a brass disc 1-1/2"
in diameter. The disc shall contain a number, and a valve list shall be provided under glass in the
Boiler Room showing the location of the valve, the service and the valve and any pertinent remarks
regarding the operation of the valve. Securely fasten the discs to the valves with brass "S" hooks or
chains.
D. All panel mounted controls and instruments, and all equipment shall be identified by engraved
nameplates mounted just under the control or instrument. The engraved nameplates shall be engraved
on"Lamacoid", or approved equal plastic which will be black and show white letters when engraved
Letters shall be 1/2"high.
E. No identification shall be done until all painting required under the Architectural section of these
Specifications has been accomplished.
3.11 SPARE PARTS
A- Filters: Each air handling unit, fan coil unit.and cabinet type unit heaters shall be provided with three
(3)extra sets of filters for each unit. One(1) set shall be installed by this Contractor after substantial
completion is issued and the two(2)remaining sets shall be delivered to the Owner.
B. Fan Coil Unit Motors: This Contractor shall provide one (1) spare fan coil unit motor for each size
installed on the project. Spare motors shall be delivered to the Owner.
C. Fan Belts: This Contractor shall provide one(1)spare fan belt of each size furnished-
D. Furnish a typewritten certificate confirming the above and stating the Owner designated location to
which the spare parts have been delivered. Delivery of parts shall be confirmed by the Owner's
representative,who shall countersign the Certificate.
END OF SECTION
'k FEBRUARY 1999 15600-31 HEATING,VENTILATING
AND AIR CONDITIONING
LE 9813 CHASE KITCHEN RENOVATION AWk
adjusted and balanced to deliver the water and air quantities as specified, indicated on the Drawings,or
as directed.
B. Balancing shall be performed by an independent contractor hired directly by the Owner.
3.07 INSULATION
A. All pipe and duct insulation shall be installed by an independent insulation contractor regularly
engaged in that business.
B. Insulation shall not be-omitted on piping in walls nor bn branches running through radiator covers.
Longitudinal seams on jackets shall be located so that they are not visible from the floor. Remove all
stickers from covering.
C. Insulation shall be applied over clean pipe with all joints butted firmly together and sealed with butt
strips. Insulation shall run through all hangers and sleeves and have an 18 gauge sheet metal saddle
equal to three times the pipe diameter in length. All pipes over 2" in diameter shall be supported
through insulation by fitting a protection saddle to the thickness of the insulation inside the vapor
barrier jacket.
D. All fittings, valves, etc. shall be insulated with the proper factory pre-cut insulation. The ends of the
insulation shall be tucked snugly into the throat of the fitting and the edge adjacent to the pipe covering
tufted and tucked into My insulated pipe fitting. The one piece PVC fitting cover shall then be
secured by taping the ends of the adjacent pipe covering.
Aftl.
3.08 EQUIPMENT INSTALLATION
A. All equipment furnished under this Section shall be installed in accordance with its manufacturer's
printed installation instructions,whether so shown on the Drawings or not,and all labor and materials
required to accomplish this shall be famished by the HVAC Contractor and be included in his bid.
3.09 SYSTEM TESTS AND CLEAN-UP
A. The entire Heating and Ventilating system shall be tested at completion of the building,and it shall be
established that all controls are calibrated accurately and performing satisfactorily and that all units are
heating and ventilating satisfactorily. The systems shall be checked for vibration and excessive noise
and all such conditions corrected.
B. At the completion of all work, all equipment on the project shall be checked and thoroughly cleaned
including coils, plenums, under equipment and any and all other areas around or in equipment
provided under this Section. Any filters used during construction shall be replaced with new filters
during final clean-up.
C. At the completion of all work,all equipment on the project shall be checked for painting damage, and
any factory finished paint that has been damaged shall be repaired to match the adjacent areas.
D. Any metal or especially covered areas that have been deformed shall be replaced with new material and
repainted to match the adjacent areas.
FEBRUARY 1999 15600-30 HEATING,VENTILATING
AND AIR CONDITIONING
AWA LE 9813 CHASE KITCHEN RENOVATION
or 1.7 times the "SE" value in Appendix A of ASME B31.9, Code for Pressure Piping, Building
Services Piping.
D. After the hydrostatic test pressure has been applied for at least 10 minutes, examine piping,joints,and
connections for leakage. Eliminate leaks by tightening, repairing, or replacing components as
appropriate,and repeat hydrostatic test until there are no leaks.
E. After system has been determined to be leak-free. the Architect shall be notified and the test shall be
repeated in his or his representative's presence.
F. When delicate control mechanisms are installed in the piping system, they shall be removed during the
tests to prevent shock damage. This does not apply to control valves.
G. Leaks developing subsequent to these tests shall not be repaired by mastic or other temporary means.
All leaks shall be repaired by removal of the valve, fitting, joint, or section that is leaking and
reinstalling new material with joints as specified herein before.
3.05 CLEANING AND FLUSHING
A. All water circulating systems for the project shall be thoroughly cleaned before placing in operation to
rid the system of dirt, piping compound, mill scale, oil, and any and all other material foreign to the
water being circulated..Clean all strainers.
B. Extreme care shall be exercised during construction to prevent all dirt and other foreign matter from
entering the pipe or other parts of the system. Pipe stored on the project shall have the open ends
capped and equipment shall have all openings fully protected. Before erection, each piece of pipe.
fitting,or valve shall be visually examined and all dirt removed
C. After system is complete, the Heating& Ventilating Contractor shall add trisodium phosphate in an
aqueous solution to the system at the proportion of one pound per fifty gallons of water in the system.
After the system is filled with this solution, the system shall be brought up to temperature and allowed
to circulate for two hours. The system shall then be drained completely and refilled with fresh water.
The Architect shall be given notice of this cleaning operation and he or his representative shall be
present to observe the cleaning operation,and, if he deems it necessary,the cleaning operation shall be
repeated.
D. After the system has been completely cleaned as specified herein, it shall be tested by litmus paper or
other dependable method and shall be left on the slightly alkaline side(ph=7.5 plus or minus). If the
system is found to be still on the acid side, the cleaning by the use of trisodium phosphate shall be
repeated-
E. The HVAC Contractor shall not add any water treatment chemicals, or at any time "stop-leak"
compounds to the system.
3.06 WATER AND AIR FLOW BALANCE AND TESTS
A After completion of the installation of the heating, ventilating, and exhaust systems, and prior to
acceptance by the Owner, all systems and appurtenances applicable to the above systems shall be
FEBRUARY 1999 15600-39 HEATING,VENTILATING
AND AIR CONDITIONING
LE 9813 CHASE KITCHEN RENOVATION
D. No pipe cutting or threading shall be done in areas where completed concrete floor slab is to remain as
finished or be painted later. Should use of such an area be necessary, the HVAC Contractor shall cover
the working area with canvas tarpaulins in an approved manner.
3.03 PIPE INSTALLATION
A. All piping shall be run true and straight at proper pitch without strain and shall be firmly supported
throughout. Provision for expansion and contraction shall be made with offsets or expansion loops.
All pipe shall be cut off clean and threaded with sharp dies,reamed and burrs removed.
B. Where screwed fittings are used, bushings shall not be used from branch connections or reducers.
Connections to equipment shall be full size of tappings. Reductions in the run of pipe shall be made
with eccentric or concentric reducers as required for draining and venting.
C. All piping shall be run concealed throughout finished spaces either in furred spaces, shafts, chases, or
above hung ceilings.
D. Special care must be taken throughout the equipment rooms, vertical pipe shafts, above hung ceilings,
and elsewhere throughout all floors to maintain maximum headroom and clearances for access to other
equipment and to avoid conflict with electrical conduits, lighting fixtures, other piping, ducts, and
equipment of other trades.
E. Connections to equipment shall be made with unions or flanges to permit future replacement, removal
and senvicing of equipment. Flexible connections where required to isolate movement of equipment
from piping system or of piping system from equipment,shall be as specified.
F. Before any part of the various piping systems is placed in operation, blow out piping with compressed
air and/or water to remove all chips and scale and flush and drain until all traces of dirt,scale and other
foreign matter have disappeared Refer to other sections for additional requirements.
G. Vent all high points and drain all low points throughout the system.
3.04 PIPING SYSTEM TESTS
A- All piping installed on the project,unless specifically shown otherwise, shall be hydraulically tested as
specified herein. The HVAC Contractor shall provide all equipment required to make the tests
specified herein. Piping may be tested a section at a time in order to facilitate the construction.
B. The HVAC Contractor shall fill the section of pipe to be tested with water and bring the section up to
pressure with a test pump. These tests shall be conducted before any insulation is installed and any
insulation installed prior to these tests shall be removed. Gauges used in the tests shall have been
recently calibrated with a dead weight tester.
C. Subject piping system to a hydrostatic test pressure which at every point in the system is not less than
1.5 times the design pressure. The test pressure shall not exceed the maximum pressure for any vessel,
pump,valve,or other component in the system under test Make a check to verify that the stress due to
pressure at the bottom of vertical runs does not exceed either 90%of specified minimum yield strength,
FEBRUARY 1999 15600-38 HEATING, VENTILATING lawk
AND AIR CONDITIONING
LE 9813 CHASE KITCHEN RENOVATION
Competent technicians shall be provided for instruction purposes. The Control Manufacturer
shall furnish schematic systems control diagram to be delivered to the Owner on AutoCAD
disks.
5. Control and management systems shall neither be considered complete nor acceptable until
all conditions of the Sequence of Operation have been attained. all temperatures are
maintained within specified limits of all operating conditions,and all systems damper leakage
of controlled within specified limits.
J. Service and Guarantee:
1. The complete`installation, including all equipment, shall be guaranteed free from defects in
workmanship and material for a period of 12 months from date of acceptance in writing by
the Owner. Provide at no cost to the Owner, all necessary service, adjusting, and checking
during the 12 month guarantee period
2. During warranty period, the ATC Contractor shall update and implement all latest revisions
of software offered by the Contractor that applies to this Project
PART 3 -INSTALLATION
3.01 CLEANING AIR SYSTEM
A. No air handling units shall be run for temporary heating, ventilating, testing, or otherwise without
filters in place.
B. Upon completion of construction and before testing, the interior of all air handling units and plenums
shall be vacuum cleaned to remove all construction dirt,dust. etc. before the units are turned on, and
clean filters shall be installed.
3.02 CUTTING,PATCHING AND DRILLING
A. Drilling of all holes 2" diameter and smaller required for the installation of heating and ventilating
piping and equipment shall be performed by the HVAC Contractor. Cutting and patching shall be
performed by the General Contractor in accordance with the General Conditions. All work and
materials shall be installed in such a manner and at such time to keep cutting and patching to a
minimum. Location for chases, openings, etc. shall be checked by the HVAC Contractor, and error
due to failure to co-ordinate work with other Divisions shall be the responsibility of the HVAC
Contractor,who shall make the corrections as his own expense.
B. Work shall include famishing and locating inserts required before the floors and walls are built,or be
responsible for the cost of cutting and patching required for pipes where sleeves and inserts were not
installed, or where incorrectly located. The HVAC Contractor shall do all drilling required for the
installation of hangers. Patching of all holes, after installation of piping or equipment shall be
performed by the General Contractor.
C. As the work nears completion,all pipe cutting and threading,etc. shall be done in a location approved
by the Architect
FEBRUARY 1999 15600-37 HEATING,VENTILATING
AND AIR CONDITIONING
LE-9813 CHASE KITCHEN RENOVATION -
4. Sequence for Radiation(Hot Water):
a. Furnish room sensor for radiation which shall modulate control valve serving
radiation at new heater to satisfy space demand On a demand for lower heating
requirement,the N.O.valve shall close.
b. During unoccupied periods, set point of sensor shall be lowered to match
corresponding and respective zone setback temperature.
5. Toilet and Miscellaneous Exhaust Fans:
a. Generallv, these fans are the minimum exhaust which handle the minimum outdoor
air brought in by the respective air handling unit and shall run only during occupied
periods (The Kitchen Exhaust EF-4,Make up Air system MUA-1 is independent.)
Interlock Kitchen exhaust fan(EF4) so that when respective make-up air unit
(MUA-1)is o$ exhaust fan will be off, and when make-up air unit starts, the
exhaust fan shall nm All other toilet exhaust fans shall be light switch controlled
I. Adjustment and Calibration:
1. On completion of the job, the ATC Contractor shall completely calibrate, test, and adjust,
ready for use,all electronic controls,thermostats,valves, damper motors, and relays prodded
under his contract and be present for functional tests on systems. The Building Management
System shall be completely checked,test nut,and adjusted.
2. Before the Architect is asked to witness the functional tests, the entire control and manage-
ment system must be complete,controls calibrated The controlled devices will be physically
inspected and checked to assure that these terminal devices are, in fact, under proper control
and working smoothly over their entire range of operation.
3. The adjustment procedure shall include the following steps:
a. Preliminary set up and calibration per Specifications and Shop Drawings.
b. Physical checkout of all components for completeness and accuracy, simultaneously
with mechanical system balancing.
C. Review of system with Architect
CL Functional test for Owner's benefit,instruction,and acceptance.
e. Not less than 30 or more than 60 days after systems have been in full operation,
review problems with Owner,recheck all adjustments,and recalibrate as required
4. The Control Manufacturer shall provide a complete instructional manual covering the
function and operation of all control and management system components on the job, which
shall include a trouble-shooting and operating procedure. This manual shall be famished to
the Owner's operating personnel and shall show the total integrated control system.
FEBRUARY 1999 15600-36 HEATING,VENTILATING
AND AIR CONDITIONING
LE 9813 CHASE KITCHEN RENOVATION
3. The central site shall allow receipt of alarms and messages while in a functional mode other
than energy management, i.e., incoming alarms shall be displayed while the operator is in a
word processing,spreadsheet,or other operating mode.The system must automatically switch
from a non-energy management mode, respond to an alarm, and return to the exact position
left in the previous functional mode.
4. The building operator shall be able to communicate and direct all control functions through
the use of a 2-button "mouse" operator interface to monitor and control all functions and
sequences within the system.
K Sequences of Operation:
Following are the typical sequences of operation for HVAC equipment provided by Automated Logic's
System 20/20. Within each section, each paragraph describes a specific control sequence for a
component of the equipment start/stop, status, etc. Each specific control sequence will require
appropriate 1/0 points.which are listed at the end of each sequence in parenthesis.
1. Air Handling Units: The systems shall be indexed between occupied, warm-up. and
unoccupied cycles of operation by the BAS.
a. Occupied Cycle: The unit supply fan shall be started from the hood light switch
(which shall turn on the hood lights,start the kitchen hood exhaust fan and start the
make up air unit) and shall run continuously. The outside air dampers shall open,
** the associated kitchen exhaust fan shall nut and the system shall come under
control. An outdoor air temperature sensor and a discharge air temperature sensor
shall control the multiple gas fiunaces to reset discharge air according to load. This
unit is designe to run on a 100%outside air condition.
A duct type smoke detector (furnished by the Electrical Subcontractor) located
downstream of the unit filters shall shut down the unit fans on sensing smoke.
C. Unoccupied Cycle: The system shall remain o$and close outside air damper.
2. The new kitchen shall be divided into eight(8)zone areas for heat distribution,through a new
"PEX tubing header,"with 3 way valve control
3. Unit Heaters/Cabinet Heaters
a. Room sensor thru microprocessor controller shall cycle fan to satisfy space demands
for heat. On lower demand,the fan shall be de-activated-
b. All unit heaters and cabinet heaters shall be locked off thru the microprocessor the
cooling cycle thus eliminating surface mounted aquastats to prevent cold running.
C. During unoccupied periods, set point of sensor shall be lowered to match
corresponding and respective zone setback temperatures.
FEBRUARY 1999 15600-35 HEATING,VENTILATING
AND AIR CONDITIONING
LE 9813 CHASE KITCHEN RENOVATION
5. Local Site Communication Network
a. The modules shall communicate within their respective network with a token
passing technique. This network shall be consistent with the IEEE RS-185
standard including a minimum baud rate of 9,600 BPS maintained at a minimum
of 10,000 feet. The Contractor shall provide all wiring required for the local site
network.
F. Software
1. The Contractor shall provide all software required for efficient operation of all the functions
required by this specification. Software shall be modular in design for flembility in expansion
or revision of the system. The software shall,as a minimum,include:
a. Complete database entry
b. Configuration of all application programs to provide the sequence of operation
indicated
C. Graphics of each system as shown on the UO Summary Tables
d. Alarm limits and alarm messages for all critical and non-critical alarms
e. Configuration of all reports and point summaries indicated
G. Systems Software
1. The central site shall display graphically, in up to 256 different colors, the following system
information:
General area maps shall show locations of controlled buildings in relation to local landmarks.
Floor plan maps shall show heating and cooling zones throughout the buildings in a range of
colors which provide a visual display of temperature relative to their respective setpoints. The
colors shall be updated dynamically as zones' comfort condition change. Locations of space
sensors shall also be shown for each zone. Setpoint adjustment and color band displays shall
be provided
Mechanical system graphics shall show the type of mechanical system components serving
any zone through the use of a pictorial representation of components. It shall also provide a
current status of all I/O points being controlled and applicable to each piece of equipment
including analog readouts in appropriate engineering units at appropriate locations on the
graphic representation.
2. Each category of software shall consist of interactive software modules. Each module shall
have an associated priority level and shall execute as determined by the program controller as
defined in the real time operating system.
FEBRUARY 1999 15600-34 HEATING,VENTILATING
AND AIR CONDMONING
LE 9813 CHASE KITCHEN RENOVATION
Controls,Model P-74FA-5-C.
C. Flow Switches: Flow switches shall have a repetitive accuracy of+ 1% of their
operating range. Switch actuation shall be adjustable over the operating flow range.
Switches shall have snap-acting Form C contacts rated for the specific electrical
application.
d. Watt-hour Transducers: Watt-hour transducers shall have an accuracy of+0.25%
for kW and kWh outputs from full lag to full lead power factor. Input ranges for kW
and kWh transducers shall be selectable without requiring the changing of current or
potential transformers,and shall have dry contact pulse accumulation.
e. Voltage-to-Digital Alarm Relays: Relays shall monitor status of boiler or chiller
safeties and overloads and shall be sized and connected so as not to impede the
function of the monitored contacts. Switch shall have self-wiping,snap-acting Form
C contacts rated for the application.equal to Veris Industries,Inc.Hawkeye 735.
f. Humidity Sensors: Sensors shall have an accuracy of+5%over a range of 20%to
95%RH Visala Mod.HMW- 0U.
g. Current Sensing Relays: Relays shall monitor status of motor loads. Switch shall
have self-wiping, snap-acting Form C contacts rated for the application. The
setpoint of the contact operation shall be field adjustable.
h. Control Relays: Control relay contacts shall be rated for 150% of the loading
application. with self-wiping, snap-acting Form C contacts, enclosed in dustproof
enclosure. Relays shall have silver cadmium contacts with a minimum life span
rating of one mullion operations. Relays shall be equipped with coil transient
suppression devices.
i. Solid State Relays (SSR): Input/output isolation shall be greater than 10 billion
ohms with a breakdown voltage of 15 V root mean square,or greater,at 60 Hz. The
contact operating life shall be 10 million operations or greater. The ambient
temperature range of SSRs shall be 20CF-140CF. Input impedance shall be greater
than 500 ohms. Relays shall berated for the application. Operating and release
time shall be 10 milliseconds or less. Transient suppression shall be provided as an
integral part of the relays.
j. Freezestat shall be capillary type equal to Johnson Control,Model A70HA-1C.
k. Control valves shall be DDC modulating type. All two-way valves shall be Spartan
two position valves. All three-way valves shall be Barber Colman with Belimo
Actuators,Model AF24-S.
1. All control dampers shall be opposed blade type with edge and jam seals and
internal linkage. Damper operators shall be provided for all dampers equal to
Belimo AF24-S with AV 10-18 or 2G-JSA shaft extensions where required.
FEBRUARY 1999 15600-33 HEATING,VENTILATING
AND AIR CONDITIONING
LE 9813 CHASE KITCHEN RENOVATION Amw-
mum current. Each configurable as normally open or normally closed, and either
dry contact or bussed
b. Universal inputs: Thermistor, dry contacts or 0-5VDC with 0-100K Ohm input
impedance.
C. Enhanced Zone Sensor Input: The input shall provide one thermistor input, one
local setpoint adjustment, one timed local override switch and an occupancy LED
indicator.
4. Instrumentation and Control
a. Temperature Sensors: Sensors shall be of the type and have accuracy ratings as
indicated and/or required for the application and shall permit accuracy rating of
within 1%of the temperature range of their intended use.
1) Sensors used for mired air application shall be the averaging type and have
an accuracy of+1 OF. Kele Precon Model ST-FZ.
2) OA temperature sensors shall have a minimum range of-52°F to 1520F
and an accuracy of within +1°F in this temperature range. Kele Precon
Model ST-0.
3) Room temperature sensors shall have an accuracy,of+0.25°F in the range AAW
of 45°F to 96°F, ALC Model BA-lOK-2-RSO-RLC Type 3 with network
connector, warm/cool adjustment override switch and LED
Occupied/Unoccupied indicator.
4) Chilled water sensors shall have an accuracy of+0.251--F in their range of
application.
5) Hot water temperature sensors shall have an accuracy of+0.75°F over the
range of their application.
b. Pressure Instruments
1) Differential Pressure and Pressure Sensors. Sensors shall have a 4-20 MA
output proportional signal with provisions for field checking. Sensors shall
withstand up to 150% of rated pressure, without damaging the device.
Accuracy shall be within+2%of full scale. Sensors shall be manufactured
by MAMAC No.PR-272-2-XX-B-1-2-2.
2) Pressure Switches. Pressure switches shall have a repetitive accuracy of+
2%of range and withstand up to 150%of rated pressure. Sensors shall be
diaphragm or bourdon tube design. Switch operation shall be adjustable
over the operating pressure range. The switch shall have an application
rated Form C, snap-acting, self-wiping contact of platinum alloy, silver
alloy, or gold plating. Switches shall be manufactured by Johnson
FEBRUARY 1999 15600-32 HEATING,VENTILATING
AND AIR CONDITIONING
LE 9813 CHASE KITCHEN RENOVATION
controllers(total capacity exceeds 500,000 points per Lgnet).
i. The LANgate shall provide two RS232 ports which can be connected to Central Site
Workstations,portable computers,or modems.
j. LANgate shall provide full arbitration between multiple users, whether they are
communicating through the same LANgate or different ones.
2. Terminal Control Modules-T-Line
a. Terminal Control Modules shall be capable of providing the Direct Digital Control
of single zone terminal HVAC units,air handling units, fan coil units,exhaust fans,
unit ventilators,etc.
b. Each T-Line controller shall communicate with the Cmnet through the Tnet
Interface Module (TNT). The TNI shall provide one RS485 port for a Cmnet
connection and one RS485 port for the Tnet connection. In addition, a direct
connect RS485 port shall also be provided for connection of a laptop computer.
C. In the event of a loss of communication with the TNI, each T-Line controller shall
store a default algorithm which maintains the space temperature until
communication with the TNI is restored.
CL Each TNI shall execute application programs, calculations, and commands via a
microcomputer resident in the TM. The database and all application programs for
each T-Line shall be stored in mad/writable non-volatile memory within the TNI.
All non-volatile memory shall have a battery backup of at least five years.
e. The TNI shall contain both software and hardware to perform full DDC/PID control
loops. T-Line shall be able to provide normal binary type output.
f. Each T-Line shall be able to support various type of zone temperature sensors. such
as: temperature sensor only, temperature sensor with built-in local override switch,
with setpoint adjustment switch.
g. Each T-Line for VAV application shall have a built-in air flow transducer for
accurate air flow measurement in order to provide the Pressure Independent VAV
operation.
h. Each T-Line and TNI shall have LED indication for visual status of communication,
power,and all outputs.
L Each TNI shall be software programmable for communicating at 9600 baud to 38.4
Kbps. Circuits shall be optically isolated
3. Terminal Control Devices-T-Line
a. Digital outputs: These outputs shall be 24VAC or VDC maximum, 3 amp maxi-
FEBRUARY 1999 15600-31 HEATING,VENTILATING
AND AIR CONDITIONING
LE 9813 CHASE KITCHEN RENOVATION
provided by the Electrical Contractor specifically for that purpose.
7. All wiring shall comply with nationaL state.and local electrical codes. All power wiring will
be installed and terminated by the Electrical Contractor. Power wiring shall be defined as
follows:
a. Wiring of all devices and circuits carrying voltages greater than 120 volt(except for
power to the temperature control panels).
b. Wiring of power feeds to disconnects,starters,and electric motors.
C. Wiring of 120V AC power feeds to all temperature control panels where required.
d. Installation of and wiring of line power to fused disconnects for each air compressor.
e. Power wiring to 120V single phase motors.
f. Wiring from disconnects to compressor motor starters and from compressor motor
starters to compressor motor.
E. Field Hardware: Field hardware must be of a modular design to ensure reliability and system
performance.
1. Global Network Controller-LANgate
a. The LANgate shall be a microprocessor-based communications device which acts as
a gateway between the System Control Module Network (CMnet) and the Global
Network(Lgnet).
b. Both the Cmnet and the Lgnet shall be"peer-to-peer" networks which allow all con-
trol modules to communicate with equal authority.
C. Each LANgate shall support a Cmnet on which may reside any combination of up to
100 zone controllers,rooftop unit controllers,and/or Control Modules.
CL The LANgate shall be responsible for routing global information from the various
Cmnets which may be installed throughout a building.
e. The Lgnet may configure as RS485 (38.4 Kbps), ARCnet (2.5 Mbps), or Ethernet
(10 Mbps), or Token Ring (16Mb4s) all of which may be implemented over fiber
optic,twisted pair,or coaxial cable.
£ Each Cmnet shall support up to 100 controllers.
g. Multiple LANgates can be added to the Lgnet if the projects require more than 100
controllers.
IL Up to a total of 60 LANgates can be added to the Lgnet, each supporting up to 100
FEBRUARY 1999 15600-30 HEATING,VENTILATING
AND AIR CONDITIONING
LE 9813 CHASE KITCHEN RENOVATION
3. All Drawings shall be reviewed after the final system checkout and updated or corrected to
provide "as-built" Drawings to show exact installation. The system will not be considered
complete until the "as-built" Drawings have received their final approval. The Contractor
shall deliver three(3)sets of"as-built"Drawings,and one(1)CADD disk of these Drawings.
4. Before final configuration,the Contractor shall provide 1/0 Summary forms that include:
a. Description of all points.
b. Listing of binary and analog hardware required to interface to the equipment for
each function.
C. Listing of all application programs associated with each piece of equipment.
d Failure modes for control functions to be performed in case of failure
5. Provide an accurate graphic flow diagram for each software program proposed to be used on
the project as part of the submittal process. Revisions made as a result of the submittal _
process, during the installation. start-up or acceptance portion of the project: shall be
accurately reflected in the "as-built" graphic software flow diagrams herein required by this
specification.
6. The Contractor shall be able to simulate the operation of all sofh,,am application programs to
" ensure they are free from design errors and that they accurately accomplish the application
sequence of operations. The simulation must show each output value and how it varies in
relation to an artificial time clock The time clock may run at normal time increments,
increased increments(fast motion)or decreased increments(slow motion).
D. Wiring: All temperature control wiring will be installed and terminated by the ATC Contractor.
Control wiring shall be as follows:
1. All circuits which are activated or deactivated by temperature control System components,
such as,but not limited to,PE's and high and low limit protective devices.
2. All circuits which activate or deactivate temperature control system components, such as
solenoid air valve.
3. All temperature control panel wiring to terminal strips and field wiring from terminal strips to
field mounted devices.
4. All wiring to the"Auto"side of hand-off auto switches on units being controlled by the ATC
Contractor.
5. Wiring of all electro-mechanical devices required to be located on or in temperature control
panels.
6. All wiring to the temperature control panels shall be by the ATC subcontractor from sources
FEBRUARY 1999 15600-29 HEATING,VENTILATING
AND AIR CONDITIONING
LE 9813 CHASE KITCHEN RENOVATION
6. Provide the following system hardware:
a. Central Site(s)and Control Modules
b. All sensing devices and necessary transducers to perform the functions listed in UO
Summary Tables.
c. All relays, switches, indicating devices, and transducers required to perform the
functions listed in UO Summary Tables.
d. All monitoring and control wiring and air tubing.
e. All modems and accessories.
7. Provide all software identified in Part 3 of this Specification. The database required for
implementation of these specification shall be provided by the Contractor. including: point
descriptor,alarm limits, calibration variables,graphics,reports and point summaries.
8. The system as specified shall monitor,control,and calculate all of the points and perform all
the function as listed in UO Summary Tables attached to the end of this specification.
9. Codes and Regulations. All electrical equipment and material and its installation shall
conform to the current requirements of the following authorities:
a. Occupational Safety and Health Act(OSHA) AW*
b. National Electric Code(NEC)
C. National Fire Code
d. Uniform Building Code
e. Uniform Mechanical Code
f. Uniform Plumbing Code
g. UL916
h. Note: Where two or more codes conflict, the most restrictive shall apply. Nothing
in these plans and specifications shall be construed to permit work not conforming
to applicable codes.
C. Submittals,Documentation and Acceptance
1. Shop Drawings. A minimum of sic(6)copies of Shop Drawings shall be submitted and shall
consist of a complete list of equipment and materials, including manufacturer's descriptive
and technical literature, catalog cuts,and installation instructions. Shop Drawings shall also .
contain complete wiring, routing, schematic diagrams, tag number of devices, software
descriptions, calculations, and any other details required to demonstrate that the system will
function properly. Drawings shall show proposed layout and installation of all equipment and
the relationship to other parts of the work-
2. Shop Drawings shall be approved by the Engineer and the College before any equipment is
installed. Therefore, Shop Drawings must be submitted in time for review so that all installa-
tions can be completed per the project's completion schedule.
FEBRUARY 1999 15600-28 HEATING,VENTILATING
AND AIR CONDITIONING
LE 9813 CHASE KITCHEN RENOVATION
3. All components of the direct digital controllers shall be manufactured by Automated Logic,or
equal,with peripheral electric/electronic devices manufactured by Barber Colman.
4. All components of the system shall be furnished and installed by Automated Logic. i.e.
Yankee Technology, Inc., of Ludlow,MA. The system shall be a properly integrated system
installed by competent mechanics regularly employed in the profession of temperature
control. Unless specified to the contrary, all equipment shall be fully proportioning. The
control system shall be complete in all respects, including room thermostats, immersion
thermostats, switches, relays,valves, cabinets and other accessory equipment, and a complete
system of control wiring for integration into existing remaining reused controls where
specified all-connected and properly integrated to the control system
5. The temperature control system shall be DDC and shall utilize electric/electronic power for
the control dampers and valves. The control systems Lans connection shall be extended
from the existing system located in Gill Hall and routed through the existing 4" conduit
to Mo ban Hall.
6. All wiring,conduit junction boxes,fittings,etc., necessary for the temperature control system _
shall be furnished and installed by the ATC Contractor and shall conform to all standards and
codes as described under Section 16000 -Electrical Work. Wiring shall be in metal raceways
where required by prevailing codes.
7. Provide nameplates for all control deices. Devices on panels to have "Lamicoid"
nameplates. isolated control valves,relays.etc. to be marked with stamped tape.
B. Scope of Work
1. All temperature control work shall be performed by Yankee Technologies of Ludlow, MA. it
is the responsibility of this Contractor to co-ordinate all HVAC work with the Temperature
Control Contractor prior to submitting a bid.
2. The Contractor shall furnish and install all necessary hardware, wiring, pneumatic tubing,
computing equipment and software as defined in this specification.
3. All material and equipment used shall be standard components, regularly manufactured and
available and not custom designed especially for this project All systems and components,
except site specific software,shall have previously been thoroughly tested and proven in actual
use prior to installation on this project
4. The system architecture shall be fully modular permitting expansion of application software,
system peripherals,and field hardware.
5. The system, upon completion of the installation and prior to acceptance of the project, shall
perform all operating functions as detailed in this Specification.
rte" FEBRUARY 1999 15600-27 HEATING,VENTILATING
AND AIR CONDITIONING
LE 9813 . CHASE KITCHEN RENOVATION
g. Loop Isolation: Each loop supply and return module shall have a means of fully
isolating the loop from the rest of the system.
h. Piping Inlet/Outlet Size: All manifold inlets/outlets shall be 1-1/4" NPT female, to
fit maximum size plumbing and greater system adaptability.
i. The manifold header is pre-assembled (ready for wall mounting and suitable for
direct connection to heat source), pressure tested and supplied with the following
components.
j. Header is 1-1/4"solid brass. Supply outlet is made to receive 24 volt powerhead for
individual thermostatic controL and an internal shutoff to serve as a service stop. A
temperature gauge and compression fittings to receive tubing are also provided
k Return header is 1-1/4" solid brass. Each return is fitted with an internal shut-off
valve and factory installed flow meter, drain purge, fill capability, and compression
fitting to receive tubing.
3. Fittings
a Fitting Composition: Brass compression fittings consisting of nut,ferrule and insert
with a ring for connecting PEX or copper tubing to manifold-
b. Fitting Types:
-took
Manifold to PEX tubing sizes 3/8", 1/2",518"3/4"
Manifold to 1/2"copper tubing
Hose Bib
Manifold Cap
C. Required Features: Well fitting, easily installed Copper tubing should not require
soldering.
2.24 AUTOMATIC TEMPERATURE CONTROL
A. General Requirements
1. All components of the system shall be furnished and installed by Automated Logic.
2. The controls shall be a direct expansion of the Campus'existing energy management system
as manufactured by automated Logic System 20/20, and shall be extended from the existing
communication lines located in Gill Hall. It is mandatory that the installed system be
Property interfaced with the existing central site (CS) computer hardware ALC 20/20
configuration and the existing master central site software library, located at the HVAC
Department Building. It will be the Contractor's responsibility to develop site specific operat-
ing parameters, building name, general area maps,floor plans, mechanical system graphics,
thermal graphs,all to be displayed graphically at the central site(CS)via the existing software
programs.
FEBRUARY 1999 15600-26 HEATING,VENTILATING
AND AIR CONDMONING
LE 9813 CHASE KITCHEN RENOVATION
n Marking: All PEX tubing shall be marked at intervals of not more than five(5) feet
in accordance with ASTM F876 as follows:
i. Nominal tubing size.
U. Type of plastic tubing material.
iii. Standard dimension Ratio. SDR9.
iv. Pressure rating for water and temperature for which the pressure rating is
valid.
V. ASTM designation,ASTM F876.
vi. Manufacturer's name and production code.
Additional Marking
i. Date of manufacturina.
ii. Oxygen diffusion protection to DIN4726.
iii. Length indications in five (5) foot intervals, for ease of measuring the
tubing.
2. Manifolds: Manifolds used in PEX tubing installation shall be Stadler Model VS Series and
consist of individual loop control and adaptation utilizing modular Polyacrylamide thermo-
plastic components ready for assembly. The manifold should also include the following
features:
a. Modular Design: This eliminates the need for multiple manifold configurations and
allows for future expansion.
b. Venting: Each supply and return vent/temperature module shall have an automatic
integrated air vent.
C. Temperature Measurements: Each supply and return manifold shall have a
thermometer integrated to indicate supply and return water temperatures.
Temperature readouts will assist in the diagnostics and set up of a radiant heating
system.
d. Flow Measurements: Each loop return block shall have incremental adjustment and
flow rate indication. Temperature and flow readouts will assist in the diagnostics
and set up of a radiant heating system.
e. Balancing Valves: Each return block will provide a balancing valve and a visual
flow meter for proper balancing of the radiant heating system allowing different loop
lengths and tube sizes to be connected to the same manifold. Each valve shall be
able to fully close to allow complete loop isolation.
f. Supply/Return Indication: Each loop supply module shall be red to indicate
incoming hot water, and each return loop module shall be blue to indicate cooler
return water.
FEBRUARY 1999 15600-25 HEATING,VENTILATING
AND AIR CONDITIONING
LE 9813 CHASE KITCHEN RENOVATION
IL Sustained Pressure:
Nominal Minimum Minimum
Tube Burst Pressure Wall Thickness
Size psi 4L 180°F psi 0), 1800'F
3/8" 250 210
1/2" 195 165
5/8" 190 165
3/4" 190 165
i. Burst Pressure: The minimum burst pressure, for PEX plastic tubing shall be as
given.
Nominal Minimum Minimum
Tube Burst Pressure Wall Thickness
Size psi c 180-F psi,�&, 180°F
3/8" 275 235
1/2" 215 185
5/8" 210 180
3/4" 210 180
j. Environmental Stress Cracking: "There shall be no loss of pressure in the tubing
when tested in accordance with 7.9" (paragraph of ASTM F876). loop
k_ Degree of Crosslinking: "When tested in accordance with 7.9,(paragraph of ASTM
F876), the degree of crosslinldng for PEX tubing material shall be within the range
of 65%to 89%inclusive."
1. Stabilizer Migration Resistance: "When tested in accordance with 7.10 (paragraph
of ASTM F876), the time t2 (tz= time to failure of boiled sample) shall be at least
50%of the time,tj" (ti =time to failure of unboded sample).
m. Bend Radius: The minimum bend radius for cold bending of the tube shall not be
more than six (6) times the outside diameter for up to a 90 degree bend. For 180
degree bends,the minimum bend radius shall be as follows:
3/8"tubing 3.0" radius
1/2"tubing 3.75"radius
5/8"tubing 4.5" radius
3/4"tubing 5.75"radius
FEBRUARY 1999 15600-24 BEATING,VENTILATING
AND AIR CONDITIONING "
LE 9813 CHASE KITCHEN RENOVATION
2. American Society of Testing and Materials, Standard Specification F877 entitled,
"Crosslinked Polyethvlene(PEX)Plastic Hot and Cold Water Distribution Systems".
3. German Standard DIN 4726, "Pipelines of plastic materials used in warm water floor heating
systems".
C. Materials
1. Tube
a. Tube Composition: Crosslinked Polyethylene (PEX) in accordance with ASTM
F876.
b. Manufacturing Method: All PEX tubing shall be manufactured using the "electron
beam method of crosslinking,performed at ambient temperature and pressure.
C. Working PressurelTemperature: The minimum continuous working pressure rating
of the PEX tubing shall be 100 psi Id, 180 F working temperature and 80 psi:a 200
F working temperature.
d. Physical Properties: As supplied by Embassy Industries. Inc., all PEX tubing shall
conform to ASTM F876 "American Society of Testing and materials, Standard
Specification F876 entitled, "Crosslinked Polyethylene(PEX)Tubing",and German
Standard DIN 4726 for"Oxygen Permeation"as related to the following paragraphs:
e. Tubing: The tubing shall be homogeneous throughout and essentially uniform in
color,opacity,density,and other properties. The inside and outside surfaces shall be
matte or glossy in appearance. the tubing walls shall be free of cracks, holes.
blisters,voids.foreign inclusion.or other defects that are visible to the naked eve and
that may affect the wall integrity.
f. Dimensions and Tolerances
Nominal Average Outside Minimum
Tubing Size Diameter Wall Thickness
3/8" 0.500" 0.070"
1/2" 0.625" 0.070"
518" 0.750" 0.083"
3/4" 0.875" 0.097"
g. Density: The crosslinked polyethylene tubing material shall have a density in the
range from 0.926 to 0.949 Mg/m'.
FEBRUARY 1999 15600-23 HEATING,VENTILATING
"* AND AIR CONDITIONING
LE 9813 CHASE KITCHEN RENOVATION
C. Manufacturer: Subject to compliance with requirements,provide expansion compensators of one of the
following:
Flexonics Div., UOP,Inc.
Hyspan Precision Products, Inc.
Keflex,Inc.
Metraflex Co.
Vibration Mountings and Controls,Inc.
D. Provide pipe alignment guides on both sides of expansion joints,and elsewhere as indicated. Construct
with 4-finger spider traveling inside guiding sleeve,with provision for anchoring to building substrate.
1. Manufacturer. Subject to compliance with requirements, provide pipe alignment guides of
the following:
Hyspan Precision Products,Inc.
Metraflex Co.
2.21 STRAINERS
A- Pipeline strainers shall be full size,iron body, "Y"pattern and shall be installed on the inlet side of each
steam trap,and elsewhere as indicated on the Drawings. Strainers 2" and smaller shall have screwed
ends;2-1/2"and larger shall have flanged ends.
B. Strainers for steam and condensate systems over 50 psig. shall be 250 lb. class. Strainers for other
systems shall be 125 lb. class. Strainers shall be Illinois. Bames and Jones, Armstrong, or equal. and
shall be so installed as to permit ready removal of basket. Each strainer 2-1/2" and larger shall be
provided with hose end globe valve on blow-off.
2.22 ACCESS PANELS
A. Furnish and install access panels at all valves,volume dampers, tec. installed above plastered ceilings,
in walls, and all other non-accessible spaces. Access panels in plastered ceilings shall be Karp Type
DSC-214 PL(12"x 12");access panels in walls shall be Karp type DSC-211 "Universal'(12"x 12").
2.23 HEATING DISTRIBUTION SYSTEM
A. Scope of Work
1. This Specification is to provide relevant product data for a heating distribution tubing system
consisting of PEX tubing with oxygen permeation protection, distribution manifolds and
associated fittings.
B. References
1. American Society of Testing and Materials, Standard Specification F876, entitled
"Crosslinked Polyethylene(PEX)Tubing".
FEBRUARY 1999 15600-22 HEATING, VENTILATING
AND AIR CONDITIONING
LE 9813 CHASE KITCHEN RENOVATION
8. Pipe Nipples: Fabricated from same pipe as used for connected pipe; except do not use less
than Schedule 80 pipe where length remaining unthreaded is less than 1-1/2"and where pipe
size is less than 1-1/2",and do not thread nipples full length(no close-nipples).
9. Copper Tube: ASTM B88; Type as indicated for each service; hard-drawn temper for water
piping;soft temper for oil piping.
10. DWV Copper Tube: ASTM B306.
it. ACR Copper Tube: ASTM B280.
12. Wrought-Copper Solder-Joint Fittings: ANSI B 16.22.
13. Cast-Copper Solder-Joint Drainage Fittings: ANSI B 16.23.
14. Wrought-Copper Solder-Joint Drainage Fittings: ANL SI B16.29.
15. Red Brass Pipe: ASTM B43.
16. Cast-Bronze Threaded Fittings: ANSI B 16.15.
17. Welding Materials: Except as otherwise indicated provide welding materials as determined
by Installer to comply with installation requirements. Comply with Section II,Part C, ASME
Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code for welding materials.
18. Soldering Materials: Except as otherwise indicated, provide soldering materials as
determined by Installer to comply with installation requirements.
19. Brazing Materials: Except as otherwise indicated,provide brazing materials as determined by
Installer to comply with installation requirements. Comply with SFA-5.8.Section 11. ASME
Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code for brazing filler metal materials.
20. Gaskets for Flanged Joints: ANSI B 16.21;full-faced for cast-iron flanges;raised-face for steel
flanges,unless otherwise indicated
21. Note: Grooved piping will NOT be allowed
2.20 PACKLESS EXPANSION JOINTS
A General: Provide packless expansion joints where indicated for piping systems, with materials and
pressure./temperature ratings selected by Installer to suit intended service. Select packless expansion
joints to provide 200%absorption opacity of piping expansion between anchors.
B. Expansion Compensators: Pressure rated for 60 psi for low pressure systems, 2-ply phosphor bronze
bellows, brass shrouds and end fittings for copper piping systems, or 2-ply stainless steel bellows,
carbon steel shrouds and end fittings for steel piping systems. Provide internal guides and anti-torque
devices,and removable end clip for proper positioning.
FEBRUARY 1999 15600-21 HEATING,VENTILATING
AND AIR CONDITIONING
LE 9813 CHASE KITCHEN RENOVATION
2.19 PIPE AND FITTINGS
A. General
1. Reference is made to specifications of recognized authorities to establish quality. Latest
editions of their publications at time of bidding shall be in force.
2. All piping shall have manufacturer's name or trademark rolled into each and every length of
pipe.
3. All threads for screwed joints shall be National Taper Pipe Thread conforming to ANSI
B2.1-1968.
4. Qualify welding procedures, welders and operators in accordance with ASME B31.1. or
ASME B31.9,as applicable,for shop and project site welding of piping work
B. Application
1. Hot Water Supply and Return: Black steel pipe,Schedule 40,size 2"and smaller threaded.2-
1/2"and larger welded,or Type"L"copper.
C. Materials
1. Black Steel Pipe : ASTM A53, A106 or A120; except comply with ASTM A53 or A106
where close coiling or bending is required.
2. Malleable-Iron Threaded Fittings: ANSI B16.3; plain or galvanized as indicated Class 150
for Schedule 40 piping, Class 300 for Schedule 80.
3. Yoloy Steel Pipe: ASTM A714; Class 4:Grade IV.
4. Steel Flanges/Fittings: ANSI B16.5, including bolting and gasketing of the following
material group, end connection and facing except as otherwise indicated, Class 150 for
Schedule 40 piping,Class 300 for Schedule 80.
a. Material Group: Group 1.1
b. End Connections: Buttwelding
C. Facings: Raised-face
5. Wrought-Steel Buttwelding Fittings: ANSI B16.9, except ANSI B16.28 for short-radius
elbows and returns;rated to match connected pipe.
6. Yoloy Steel Buttwelding Fittings: ASTM A714.
7. Forged Branch Connection Fittings: Except as otherwise indicated, provide type as
determined by Installer to comply with installation requirements, Bonney "Weldolets" or
"Threadolets",or equal.
FEBRUARY 1999 15600-20 HEATING,VENTILATING
AND AIR CONDITIONING
LE 9813 CHASE KITCHEN RENOVATION
F. Pipe Insulation
1. All insulation including covering shall be fire resistant and fire retardant and shall have a
flame spread rating not exceeding 25. smoke developed rating not exceeding 50, all
complying with NFPA 225 and/or U.L.723. Adhesives used for applying and sealing jackets
shall also conform to these same fire retardant and smoke ratings.
2. On exposed insulation. all longitudinal seams shall be kept at the top of the pipe and
circumferential joints shall be kept to a minimum. Raw ends of insulation shall be concealed
by neatly folding in the ends of the jackets. Fittings, valve bodies, and flanges shall be
furnished with the same jacket materials used on adjoining insulation.
3. Covering shall not be applied until all parts of the work have been tested by the Contractor
and approved by the Architect.
4. Pipe insulation shall be closed cell Armaflex insulation as manufactured by Gustin-Bacon,
Manville,or other approved equal.
5. All hot water piping shall be insulated with Armaflex,closed cell pipe insulation.or approved
equal. The insulation shall have an average thermal conductivity not to exceed .25 BTU in.
per sq. fL per F. per hour at a mean temperature of 75 degrees F. Thickness of the insulation
shall be as scheduled below. The insulation shall be applied over clean dry pipe with all joints
firmly togethdr. Longitudinal jacket laps and the butt strips shall be smoothly secured with
Benjamin Foster 85-20 adhesive. Note: All refrigerant piping nut outdoors shall be covered
with an aluminum jacket and secured with stainless steel bands.
G. Insulation thickness shall be as follows:
1. Hot Water:
a. Runouts up to 2 in.: 1-1/2 in.
b. Runouts 1 in..and less: 1-1/2 in.
C. Runouts 1-1/4 in.to 2 in.: 2 in.
d. Runouts 2-1/2 in.to 4 in.: 2 in.
2. Equipment:
a. Chilled water pumps and chilled barrel: 3/4 in.armaflex.
b. Chilled water expansion tanks 3/4 in.armaflex
c. Air separator: 3/4 in.armaflex
FEBRUARY 1999 15600-19 HEATING,VENTILATING
AND AIR CONDITIONING
LE 9813 CHASE KITCHEN RENOVATION ,
B. For all pipe 2-1/2"and larger-Grinnell Figure No. 20,at 10'intervals.
C. For all other suspended piping-Grinnell Figure 70 at 6' intervals for tubing 1-1/4"or less, 10' intervals
for piping at 1-1/2"and larger.
D. All hangers directly in contact with non-ferrous pipe or tubing shall be copper plated or plastic coated.
E. Hangers or supports shall be placed within l'of each horizontal elbow. Vertical runs of pipe not over 5'
in length shall be supported on hangers placed not over 12" from the elbow on the connecting
horizontal run.
F. Install Figure 167 insulation shield between hanger and insulation on all piping; hangers to be installer)
outside pipe insulation.
G. Vertical risers shall be supported with Grinnell Figure CT-121C plastic coated riser clamp; to be
installed immediately below a coupling.
2.18 INSULATION
A. All air supply, return, and fresh air ducts shall be insulated. Insulation for concealed ducts shall be
1-1/2 in. thick 1 pound density glass fiber (flexible) duct insulation with factory applied reinforced
aluminum foil jacket equal to Manville Type FSK. Secure to duct with Benjamin Foster No. 85-20
adhesive. Lap jacket 2 in. at all seams and secure flaps with staples and adhesive to provide complete
vapor barrier. In addition, this concealed duct insulation shall be tied 18 in. o.c. with 18 gauge
aluminum or copper wire where ducts exceed 24 in. in width. ,.
B. Kitchen Hood Exhaust and Dishwasher Exhaust insultaed with a 2" thick layer of Pabco "Super
FireTemp" or equal, applied according to manufacturer's printed recommendations. giving full duct
coverage. System shall provide a two(2)hour fire rating.
C. All concealed air ducts from the fresh air intakes to the air handling units shall be insulated in the same
manner as for the ductwork for concealed supply ducts.
D. All exposed fresh air ducts from the fresh air intakes to the air handling units and all exposed supply
and return air ducts,or where so noted,shall be insulated with 1 in. thick, 6 pound density, rigid glass
fiberboard with Manville Type EAF vaporseal facing. Attach board to ducts with double prong stick
clips. Seal at joints to maintain vapor barrier. All edges and angles shall be reinforced with comer
beads. Finish shall consist of tackbcard of Benjamin Foster No. 30-36 Sealfas, embedded Manville
Duuamesh 205,and a heavy finish coat of Benjamin Foster No. 30-35 Sealfas,all applied according to
manufacturer's recommendations. Note: Omit ductwork insulation on supply ducts located in the
Natatorium and Gymnasiurn.
E. Acoustical Insulation: Duct lining acoustical insulation shall be shop installed by the Sheet Metal
Contractor.Liner shall be 1 in. thick 3 pound density, non-combustible glass fiber with U.L. approved
neoprene coating on air side. Acoustical lining shall be installed where shown on Drawings. All lined
ductwork shall be insulated as listed above unless otherwise noted
FEBRUARY 1999 15600-18 HEATING,VENTILATING
AND AIR CONDITIONING
LE 9813 CHASE KITCHEN RENOVATION
2.13 PRESSURE GAUGES
A. Gauges shall be Ashcroft. Marsh. U.S. Gauge Company or Trerice equal to Ashcroft "Quality" line
gauges, Grade A. 1% accuracy. Each gauge shall be installed with a pulsation damper (Ashcroft
#1106B)and a brass lever handle gauge cock(Ashcroft 41095).
B. Model number,size and range to be as follows:
1. Ashcroft-#1018, 3-1/2" dial, red tipped pointer with scale range such that normal operating
pressure is approximately,at mid-scale.
2.14 UNIONS _
A. Unions shall be of the same class and material as the pipe and fittings of the system in which they are
installed. In black steel piping systems, they shall be 200 lb. black malleable iron with brass ground
joint equal to Dart Figures 0832. 0834, 0835,0836 or 0838. In copper and brass piping, they shall be
125 lb.bronze or brass with ground joint
B. Flanged unions for welded pipe shall be weld neck. 150 lb. raised face. Flanged joints shall be packed
with impregnated asbestos gaskets placed inside the bolt circle with graphite applied to both faces.
C. Dielectric unions shall be provided between ferrous and non-ferrous piping to prevent galvanic
corrosion. The dielectric unions shall meet the requirements for tensile strength of pipe fittings in
accordance with Federal Specification WW-U-531 and shall be suitable for temperatures and pressures
encountered. The ends shall be threaded flanged,brazed, or soldered to match adjacent piping. The
Amok metal parts of the union shall be separated so that the electrical current is below 1 percent of the
galvanic current which would exist with metal to metal contact
2.15 PIPE SLEEVES
A. Standard UPS steel or wrought iron sleeves shall be provided wherever exposed pipes pass through
masonry walls or partitions. Pipe sleeves are to be two pipe sizes larger than line size. Insulated piping
sleeves shall be sized to allow insulation to pass through the sleeve without gouging.
2.16 HOT WATER SPECIALTIES AND VALVES
Air Vents: Air vents shall be provided where shown and at all other high points, where shown or not.
Vents shall be of the manual type and shall be full line size,but in no case shall they be less than 2 in.
steel pipe. Chambers shall be a minimum of 12 in. high. Drain tubing shall be extended in such a
manner that the globe valve and end of drairiline are readily accessible. Air vents for radiation shall be
installed in the return side of each loop of radiation before piping drops down to return main. These vents
to be key or screw type equal to Dole or Taco.
2.17 HANGERS
A. Hangers shall be as manufactured by Grinnell Company, Carpenter & Paterson, Fee & Mason, or
equal-
FEBRUARY 1999 15600-17 HEATING,VENTILATING
AND AIR CONDITIONING
LE 9813 CHASE KITCHEN RENOVATION
620 or G-623.
2. Globe: 2-1/2 in. and smaller-Stockham Figure B-120 or 752, 3 in. and larger- Stockham
Figure G-609 or G-613.
3. Check: 2-1/2 in. and smaller-Stockham Figure B-319; 3 in. and larger- Stockham Figure
G-931.
4. Ball Valves: Watts Series 600-SS-SK
E. All shut-off valves 2-1/2 in. and larger shall be Watts Series G-4000,cast iron body, 316, steel disc and
shaft,Nordel EPT seat,designed for bubbletight shutoff. Valves to be fitted with lever operator for two
position operation.
F. Gate and/or globe valves shall not be used as substitutes for the following valves when used as balance
valves.
G. Balance and/or shut-off valves 4 in. and larger - Tour & Anderson Series STAF, neoprene seat,
semi-steel body,with stainless steel or bronze top and bottom bushings, 150 prig working pressure. 125
pound ANSI flanges,Figure 101F or 118F,G6-HI2. Provide open position stop on all valves. Provide
hand operators for all valves which are 6 R or more above the floor.
H. Balance and/or shut-off valves 2-1/2 in. and 3 in. sizes - Tour & Anderson Series STAF, lever
operated faced plug, neoprene seat, semi-steel body with stainless steel or bronze top and bottom
bushings, 150 prig working pressure,Figure 118. Provide open position stops for all valves.
I. For 2 in.and smaller-Balancing valves shall be Tour&Anderson Figure STAD or STA-D,semi-steel
body. bronze plug with neoprene or Teflon resilient face, bronze top and bottom bushings, complete
with lever. Provide open position stop and plastic cap on all valves which are labeled'Balance Valves"
on the Drawings. All valves at fan coil unit shall be furnished with drain kit
J. Pump discharge check valves shall be Muessco, Williams & Hager, or Smolensky equal to Muessco
105-DT silent type,steel body,stainless steel trim and spring,renewable seat, 150 psig ASME rated
2.12 THERMOMETERS
A. Thermometers shall be Moeller, Palmer, Taylor, Trerice or Weiss, equal to Taylor 30EJ31009 with
aluminum case, industrial glass, red reading merrwy, 9" scale length, 2°F subdivisions. Stem length
shall be sufficient to assure accurate and fast response but in no case less than 3-1/2"nor less than one-
third of pipe diameter in which installed. Each thermometer shall be provided with a brass, monel, or
stainless steel separable socket of matching length, and with lagging extension when installed in
insulated pipe. Thermometers shall be adjustable angle type, positioned as required to be easily seen
and read from normal operator's position.
B. Ranges shall be manufacturer's standard closest to the following:
1. Hot water heating system:25-240°F
FEBRUARY 1999 15600-16 HEATING,VENTILATING
AND AIR CONDITIONING
LE 9813 CHASE KITCHEN RENOVATION(
2.10 UNIT HEATERS
A. Unit heaters shall be of the vertical and horizontal blow-through propeller fan type with hot water
heating coil. Capacity shall be as shown on the Drawings.
B. Casing shall be constructed of heavy gauge furniture steel. It shall be phosphatized and completely dip
painted with a heavy duty baked enamel.
C. Coil shall be constructed on a single serpentine copper tube. Aluminum fins shall be mechanically
attached to the coil by expansion. All connections and U-bends shall be electrically induction-brazed to
the tube. The coil shall be tested for 100 psi.
D. Fan shall be selected for quiet operation and shall be factory balanced.
E. Motor shall have electrical characteristics as shown on Drawings. Motor shall be equipped with
permanent lubricated bearings.
F. Horizontal units shall be equipped with horizontal and vertical adjustable discharge louvers.
G. Unit heaters shall be Modine,Trane,AAF,or equal,as shown on Drawings.
2.11 VALVES
A_ All valves shall be of the same make except as noted below for special valves and shall be Crane,
Watts,Walworth,or Tour&Anderson manufacture based on the following Stockham valves. All ball
valves shall be Watts,and all balancing valves shall be Tour and Anderson. No substitutions will
be allowed.
B. All water valves installed in copper tube piping shall be, in general, solder end pattern, all bronze with
iron hand wheel, rated for not less than 200 pounds non-shock water pressure. In general, all line
service valves are to be gate valves,manual vents are to be globe type.
C. Solder end valves are as follows:
1. Gate Valves-Stockham Figure B-109.
2. Globe Valves-Stockham B-14T.
3. Check Valves-Stockham B-309.
4. Drain Valves-Watts No.B-6000 ball valve with hose adapter,cap and chain.
5. Ball Valves-Watts Series B-6001-SS-XH.
D. Screw end and flanged valves shall be as follows:
1. Gate: 2-1/2 in. and smaller-Stockham Figure B-120;3 in. and larger-Stockham Figure G-
FEBRUARY 1999 15600-15 HEATING,VENTILATING
AND AIR CONDITIONING
LE 9813 CHASE KITCHEN RENOVATION
C. Radiators header pipes shall be manufactured square 0.109" wall thickness and include all necessary
supply, remm, and air vent connections. Piping connections shall be '/" as a stand alone unit; 3/,
where two or more units are piped together.
D. Radiator expansion shall not exceed 0.016 inch per linear foot at 215°F. Expansion compensation
shall be provided in the piping connections with'`PEX'tubing connectors.
E. Radiators shall be phosphatized and primed with flat white baked enamel and finish painted with a
gloss baked enamel,for a total paint thickness of 2 to 3 mils(0.002: -0.003"). In harsh environments.
such as Kitchen and Toilet Rooms.anti-corrosion finish paint shall be used. Color of the finish shall be
selected from available standard and optional colors prior to ordering. Color selection shall be by the
Architect
F. Panel Radiators shall be fin-nished complete with the necessary mounting brackets. Furnish and install
all center and end trim end cap trim, inside and outside comer trim and all vertical pipe trim.
2.09 CABINET HEATER
A. The unit heater shall be of the blow-through cabinet type with hot water heating coil. The capacity of the
unit heater shall be as shown on the Drawings.
B. The cabinet shall be constructed of 16 gage furniture grade steel. All exposed comers and edges shall be
rounded. The front panel shall be fastened by quick-acting allen head cam locks for easy access. Metal
surfaces shall be cleaned, phosphatized. prime coated, and all exposed surfaces shall be finished in a
baked enamel. color to be selected by the Architect Units shall be floor, ceiling, or wall mounted as Aowk
scheduled.
C. Fan shall be all steel, multi-blade, forward curved centrifugal type fan which has been statically and
dynamically balanced to eliminate vibration. Fans shall be assembled to a fan board and mounted below
the coil in the unit casing.
D. The motor shall be of the PSC open type,sleeve bearing with resilient mount in the unit. The motor shall
be suitable for electrical characteristics as shown on Drawings.
E. The heating coil shall be serpentine connected and shall be of the finned copper tubing type and shall be
hydrostatically tested to twice the working pressure.
F. Provide four(4)sets of throw-away filters located in a frame in the return air stream. The filters shall be
easily removable by removing the front access panel. One(1) set shall be installed during construction
phase. Immediately following substantial completion and/or beneficial occupancy, the HVAC
Subcontractor shall install the second,clean set and deliver the two(2)remaining sets to the Owner.
G. Unit shall be equal to Sterling Cabinet Unit heater Model No's as follows; CH-1-Horizontal, recessed
ceiling type RC-1200-03;Ch-2-Vertical semi-recessed wall type RW-1120-03.
H. Units shall be American Air Filter,Trane,Modine,or equal, and shall be complete with motor starters,
tamperproof access doors and front panels,recessing flanges,and extended motor oilers.
FEBRUARY 1999 15600-14 HEATING,VENTILATING
AND AIR CONDITIONING
LE 9813 CHASE KITCHEN RENOVATION
shall come complete with the following factory installed features:
1.) Orifices for natural gas, 321 stainless steel heat exchanger, E-3 stainless steel burners, 120
volt power supply. 24 volt control transformer, fan and limit safety controls, reverse air flow
limit, twin centrifugal blowers, adjustable belt drive, pre-wired terminal blocks, vented
terminal cap, and weatherized, galvanized steel cabinet with interlocking joint construction
for outdoor mounting. The unit shall have a E-3 (409)stainless steel pan, intermittent spark
pilot/timed lockout two-stage gas controls (unit mounted and remote temperature selector),
with regulated combination redundant gas valve (consisting of combination pilot solenoid
valve,electric gas valve, pilot filter,pressure regulator,pilot shut-o$ and manual shut-off, all
in one body). Gas supply pressure must not exceed 0.5 PSI(8oz.- 14" W.C.). Minimum inlet
pressure for natural gas is 5" W.C. The unit shall have Electronic modulation, make-up air
controls/dampers. 1 '/-2 HP 208/3 supply voltages, open drip proof totally enclosed, and
energy efficient. The unit shall have Firestat(s),Freezestat, convenience outlet, motor starter,
filter rack with 2" disposable, pleated filters, downtum plenum(insulated), and discharge
dampers. 2-position. The unit shall have double wall cabinet construction. FM manifold
arrangement high ambient burner cut-otT gas pressure switches, and an air flow proving
switch.
C. Additional features-field installed shall include full perimeter roof curb, remote control console, two-
stage thermostat,thermostat guard with locking cover,and a 100%outside air hood.
2.07 BASEBOARD RADIATION
A. Furnish and install finned tube radiators as shown on Drawings. Radiator assemblies shall be I=B=R
rated,Ted Reed Thermal, Sterling,Vulcan,or equal.
B. Type "A" shall be Sterling"Versa-Line" Style "5-144-14B" with 4-1/4" square steel fins, .032 thick.
40 per foot, 1-1/4"iron pipe element,single tier element, 14"high slope top cover,full backplate,rated
at 960 Btuh per foot at 170OF A.W.T.,with ball bearing hanger bracket with cradle.
C. Enclosures shall be manufactured of 16 gauge cold rolled steel enamel finish,with color selected by the
Architect
D. Support brackets shall be die formed for rigidity and must be designed to support both the element and
enclosure. Ball bearing cradles shall be provided for movement of element during expansion and
contraction. Brackets to be furnished at a maximum of 3'-0" on centers, with a minimum of two
support brackets for each radiator. Roller bearing pipe hangers shall be used to support supply or
retum piping under covers.
2.08 PANEL RADIATION
A. Furnish and install panel radiators as shown on Drawings. Radiator assemblies shall be I=B=R rated,
manufactured by Runtal Radiator or equal.
B. Radiators shall be manufactured of cold rolled low carton steel,fully welded and consisting of header
pipe at each end,connected by flat oval water tubes,0.058"wall thickness for 85 psi working pressure.
FEBRUARY 1999 15600-13 HEATING,VENTILATING
AND AIR CONDITIONING
LE 9813 CHASE KITCHEN RENOVATION
A. Ceiling fan ventilators shall be constructed with an acoustically lined housing, with an automatic
backdamper,with cushioned stops,and integral ceiling grille or inline adaptor as required. Fan wheel
shall be forward curved centrifugal type and shall be removable through the grill opening. Motors shall
be permanently lubricated ball bearing type with thermal overload protection and SCR controllers.
Disconnect means shall be provided inside the fan housing. Motors shall be mounted on torsion
mounts inside the housing to isolate vibration. Vbrarion hangers for the housing shall be provided as
scheduled. Provide inline adapters for ceiling fans being used in a horizontal air pattern.
B. Ceiling fans shall be as scheduled on the Drawings equal to Nutone,Breidert,or Greenheck.
C. Furnish all wall caps where indicated on the Drawings equal to Breidert Model 34 for 3-1/4" x 10" or
8"diameter ducts. '
2.04 AIR DIFFUSERS, GRILLES, AND REGISTERS
A. Diffusers, grilles, and registers shall be Anemostat-Waterloo. Titus, or Barber Colman. equal to those
specified in the Following paragraphs. See Drawings for sizes,cfin's,locations,and qualities of various
types. In general,all units shall be installed with face bars parallel to floor or nearest wall. All volume
control dampers shall be key operated Finish for all diffusers, grilles, and registers to be factory
finished with color selected by the Architect/Engineer.
B. Return and Exhaust Register(ER. RR)-Titus Model 350FUAG-15 steel deflected blade register, off-
white finish,with opposed blade damper.
C. Top Supply Register(TSR)-Titus Model 272FL'AG-15,all aluminum construction, double deflection.
white finish,with opposed blade damper.
2.05 LOUVERS
A. All wall louvers shall be extruded aluminum construction, equal to the following Ruskin Mfg. Co.
model.
1. Type "A" - No. ELF375D with box frame, extended sill, 1/2" aluminum mesh bird screen,
and Kynar 500 finish.
2.06 MAKE-UP AIR UNIT(MUA)
A- The Make Up Air Unit shall be a factory-designed assembly of two duct furnaces with a large capacity
blower cabinet and control options for heating and makeup air. The unit shall be designed for single
unit installation and providing unified appearance. Controls and wiring shall be accessible through
lift-away side panels. Both systems and the duct furnaces in the system shall be designed-<ertified by
the American Gas Association (A-G.A.)and display the respective label. The unit shall be equal to
Renzor Model No.RQBL-500.
B. The unit shall be completely weather sealed with no additional protective covering required. The
packaged unit shall be designed for installation on a full roof curb. The gas furnace shall have a
natural draft system in which combustion air enters through hooded intakes, located in the heater side
panels, and discharged at the top of each heater by means of an approved gravity vent cap. The unit
FEBRUARY 1999 15600-12 HEATING,VENTILATING
AND AIR CONDITIONING
LE 9813 CHASE KITCHEN RENOVATION
nominal thickness, 3 pound density, non-combustible glass fiber with UL approved neoprene
coating on air side.
2. Insulation shall be applied with 100%adhesive coverage,plus stick clips on all sides of duct,
24"on center in direction of air flow, 12" to 18" on center at right angles to air flow. Coat
leading edge of each insulation section with adhesive.
3. Lining shall be Certainteed No. 300"Ultralite",or equal.
Q. Where called for on Drawings, final connections to diffusers and registers shall be made with fle.dble
ductwork, UL listed, Class 1. To be Thermaflex S-LP-10 for exhaust/return, M-KA for supply, or
equal. Joints shall be sealed with duct tape and Thermoflex duct straps. Connection to rigid ductwork
shall be made with spun conical taps.
R Install duct-type smoke detectors furnished by the Electrical Contractor.
S. Fle..-dble Air Duct:
1. Fle-dble air duct shall be Wiremold, Thermoflex, Cleveflex, or equal, and shall be equal to
Wiremold Type CRK Vanguard Duct
2. Flexible duct shall be manufactured from fully annealed alununum and formed into a
multiple corrugated construction,then encased with 1 inch, 3/4 lb. density fiberglass blanket
and sheathed with a vinyl vapor barrier. The duct shall have an inside bending radius of not
more than 3/4 inch I.D. It must comply with the latest NFPA Bulletin 90A and be listed as
Class 1 air duct.UL Standard 181. Duct shall have published pressure ratings of not less than
101 S.A. positive pressure, .5 inch W.A_ negative pressure. Duct shall also be UL rated for
velocities up to 6,500 F.P.M.E.
T. Flexible Connections: Provide, in each duct connection to every air handling unit and fan, 30 ounce
double neoprene coated woven glass fabric flexible connection not less than 4" long securely held to
retaining clamps.
2.02 DUCTWORK SHOP DRAWINGS
A. Layout and details shall clearly indicate compliance with the above Specifications. Any variations in
design details,fittings,or accessory items for which approval is requested shall be specifically marked
on the Drawings,as shall any major variations from the Drawing(minor variations are assumed to be
field conditions). Drawings for Fan Room shall be at 3/8 in.= 1&0 in.scale.
B. The Drawings shall not be submitted to the Architect for approval until the ductwork has been
coordinated with all other trades. The Sheet Metal Contractor shall assume the responsibility for and
bear the cost of any alterations required after approval because of inaccurate Shop Drawings or lack of
proper coordination, and also for any changes in sheet metal erected prior to approval of Shop
Drawings.
2.03 CEILING FANS
FEBRUARY 1999 15600-11 HEATING,VENTILATING
"* AND AIR CONDITIONING
LE 9813 CHASE KITCHEN RENOVATION
Button punching shall not be used except for pre-erection attachment of fittings.
I. Provide hinged galvanized steel access and inspection doors opposite each manual damper,at each fire
damper,and at every duct mounted control device. Doors shall be equal to Buensod-Stacey Type S-2 of
rigid construction with cast type rotary latches. Where space limitations do not allow for full swing of
the access door, two rotary type latches shall be used Doors located in insulated ducts shall be
furnished with extended frames to serve as a stop for insulation. Insulate doors located in insulated
ductwork. All doors shall be gasketed. Door shall be 12" by 12" minimum except where limited by
duct width and shall be larger where necessary for access to fire damper fusible links or other devices.
J. Hangers for all rectangular ducts 4 sq. ft. in area or above shall be round bar type fastened to 1-1/4" x
1-1/4"x 1/8" angles under the ducts. Ducts less than 4 sq. ft. in area shall be hung with black
1"x 1/16" strap iron bent 1" under bottom side of the duct and fastened to the duct with sheet metal
screws, using not less than two screws per side and as many more so that they are not greater than 6"
centers.
K. Hangers are to be placed on not greater than 8'-0"centers or closer where required so that the ductwork
can support the weight of a man at any point
L. Wherever sound insulation lining is called for, the sheet metal duct size shown on the Drawings must
be increased to provide the clear inside dimensions or cross sectional area shown on the Drawings.
M. Duct joint sealing, reinforcing, flanges, etc. for rectangular sheet metal ducts shall be based on
maintaining airtight ducts at 2" WG Maximum static pressure with maximum leakage of 5%of total
fan capacity; 1/2 of 1% for round and oval ducts. All joints in ductwork shall be sealed with U.L.
classified United Duct Sealer,or equal.
N. Duct systems shall have sufficient volume dampers, whether or not shown, to control and adjust the
total volume of each system. each zone, in each branch and at each diffuser or grille. The HVAC
Contractor shall consult with the College's Balancing Contractor for the proper placement of volume
dampers prior to installation. Volume dampers shall be of the butterfly type with 18 gauge galvanized
iron blade. All dampers shall be equipped with Duro-Dyne Tvpe UNM..D locking quadrant. All
dampers shall be provided with damper bearings on each end of shaft mounted on a 2"x 3"x 1/8"plate
held to duct with sheet metal screws. Maximum width of single blades shall be 14". Splitter dampers
shall not be used
0. Provide where shown or indicated on the Drawings fire and/or smoke dampers with a UL label for not
less than 1-1/2 hour fire protection rating in accordance with UL-555 continuing inspection service.
Blades and frame shall be galvanized steel construction with blades of an interlocking design, haying
two folded guides which serve as stops. Fusible links shall be equal to Grinnell Fig. 1351, 20 pounds,
issue A. Dampers shall be installed according to latest edition of NFPA-90A, mounted with 1-1/2"x
1-1/2"x 1/8" reMming angles on both sides of partition, wall, or floor, and sleeves as per the UL test
under which the damper fire rating was obtained Angles shall completely close the wall opening and
provide anchorage to the dampers. Damper blade stack shall not reduce duct fiee area.
P. Apply duct liner thermal-acoustic insulation in low velocity duct systems as shown on the Drawings.
1. Duct lining shall be shop installed by the Sheet Metal Contractor. Material shall be 1"
FEBRUARY 1999 15600-10 HEATING,VENTII ATING
AND AIR CONDITIONING "
LE 9813 CHASE KITCHEN RENOVATION
PART 2-MATERIALS
2.01 SHEET METAL WORK
A. All duct runs shall be checked for clearances before installation of any ductwork. Above hung ceilings,
duct locations and elevations must be co-ordinated with work of other trades to avoid conflicts with
structure,piping,conduit and light fixtures.
B. All sheet metal ducts shall be constructed of galvanized steel sheet of bend forming quality. The
following Specialty Ducts shall be:
1. Ducts for the Dishwasher Room exhaust system shall be stainless steel, liquid tight.
2. Ducts for the Kitchen exhaust system shall be No. 16 gauge black steel, all welded
construction.
C. Duct construction shall be in accordance with best practices and latest ASHRAE or SMACNA
requirements for metal gauges.joints, reinforcing and supports. All exposed ductwork shall be con-
structed and hung to provide a neat,smooth,finished appearance. Cadmium plated sheet metal screws
shall be used on all exWsed ductwork. Ducts shall be fi ee from thumping or rattling when fans are
turned on or off.
D. Duct sizes shall be strictly followed and no changes in shape or dimensions shall be made by the
HVAC Contractor without first obtaining approval from the Architect, except that duct shall be offset
as required to clear structural members and to co-ordinate with other trades and any duct changes must
meet the latest ASHRAE and SMACNA standards.
E. The center line radius of all duct elbows where shown on the Drawings shall be at least one and one-
half times the width of the duct Where building conditions do not allow for this radius or where
square turns are shown, manufactured double walled duct turns equal to Aero-Dyne or Tuttle&Bailey
shall be used in the supply or exhaust air ducts and "Sonotru" acoustical attenuating turns as
manufactured by South Control Products Co. shall be used in any air ducts where acoustical insulation
is included.
F. Duct sections 1'-6" wide or less shall be butted together and jointed with flat drive cleats 2-1/8"wide.
Top and bottom cleats shall be cut flush with duct and side cleats bent over to make a tight joint
Standing bar slips as specified for ducts over 18"may be used at the HVAC Contractor's option.
'G. Ducts from 18"to 30"wide shall be jointed with 112"standing bar slips made of metal the same as or
heavier than duct sheets. Joints in ducts with either dimension over 30"shall have 1"standing bar slips
on those sides over 30". Where sides are over 42",the standing bar slips will be reinforced with 1-1/2"
x 1-1/2"x 1/8"angles. Additional angle stiffeners not over 60"apart shall be provided between joints.
Ducts over 60"in width shall be jointed with 1-1/2"x 1/8"angle irons riveted to ductwork on all sides
with 1/8"rivets at not more than 4-1/2"on centers,sections bolted with 3/16"stove bolts at not over 6"
centers,sheets turned over angles into joint at least 1/4".
H. Sheet metal screws 3/4"#10 may be used to attach stiffener angles to ductwork to secure seams,spaced
not over 12"on centers and not less than two per side of 12"or more,except where specified otherwise.
FEBRUARY 1999 15600-9 HEATING,VENTILATING
AND AIR CONDITIONING
LE 9813 CHASE KITCHEN RENOVATION
2. This Alternate will not impact this trade.
C. Alternate Bid Item No. 3
1. Alternate Bid Item No. 3 shall be the addition in price above the Base Bid for furnishing all
labor, materials, and other costs in connection with the new overhead electrical distribution
system from the Kitchen Hood to the Island sinks. See Drawings for Scope.
2. This Alternate will not impact this trade.
1.19 CUTTING AND PATCHING -
A. Cutting and/or drilling of all openings and holes 4"in diameter or smaller, required for the installation
of plumbing in the building, shall be performed by the Plumbing Contractor. All work and materials
shall be installed in such a manner and at such time to keep cutting and patching to a minimum.
Cutting and/or drilling of structural supports (i.e. beams or joists) is not allowed without written
approval by the Architect. Location for openings,etc. shall be checked by the HVAC Contractor, and
error due to failure to co-ordinate work with other divisions shall be the responsibility of the HVAC
Contractor failing to co-ordinate,who shall make the corrections at his own expense.
B. All holes larger than 4"in diameter shall be provided by the General Contractor.
C. Work shall include furnishing and locating sleeves or inserts required before the new walls are built, or
be responsible for the cost of cutting and patching required for pipes where sleeves were not installed or AMW
where incorrectly located. The HVAC Contractor shall do all drilling required for the installation of
hangers.
D. Patching of all holes, after installation of piping or equipment, shall be performed by the General
Contractor or appropriate tradesmen.
E. All pipe cutting or threading shall be done in a location approved by the Owner.
F. No pipe cutting or threading shall be done in areas where completed concrete floor slab is to remain in
finishes or be painted later. Should this area be necessary,the HVAC Contractor shall cover the entire
working area with canvas tarpaulins in an approved manner.
1.20 RECORD DRAWINGS
A. Submit Record Drawings as specified in Division 1.
B. Record Drawings shall reflect all changes from the Contract Drawings whether by change order or by
field conditions. Principal dimensions of concealed work, fire dampers, volume dampers, control
dampers and control valves, and for piping installation, valve numbers shall be added to these
Drawings prior to submittal to the Architect. In addition to the above all revised areas shall be clearly
marked with a revision bubble.
FEBRUARY 1999 15600-8 HEATING, VENTILATING
AND AIR CONDITIONING
LE 9813 CHASE KITCHEN RENOVATION
B. The Contractor shall be responsible for work and equipment until finally inspected, tested and
accepted; protect work against theft. injury, or damage; and carefully store material and equipment
received on site which is not immediately installed Close open ends of work with temporary covers or
plugs during construction to prevent entry of obstructing or foreign material.
C. Work under each Section includes receiving,unloading,uncrating,storing,protecting,setting in place,
and connecting-up completely arty equipment supplied under each Section. Work under each Section
shall also include exercising special care in handling and protecting equipment and fixtures, and shall
include the cost of replacing any of the equipment and fixtures which are missing or damaged by
reason of mishandling or failure to protect on the part of the HVAC Contractor.
D. Equipment and material stored on the job site shall be protected from the weather,vehicles,dirt and/or
damage by worlanen or machinery. Insure that all electrical or absorbent equipment or material is
protected from moisture during storage.
1.17 CLEANING
A. The Contractor shall thoroughly clean and flush all piping, ducts, and equipment of all foreign
substances inside and out before being placed m operation. Thoroughly flush all piping of any oils,
burrs,solder,and flax. Replace strainers and filters at completion of cleaning.
B. If any part of a system should be stopped or damaged by any foreign matter after being placed in
operation, the system shall be disconnected cleaned and reconnected at no additional cost to the
Owner.
C. During the course of construction, all ducts and pipes shall be capped to insure adequate protection
against the entrance of foreign matter.
D. Keep the job site free from the accumulation of waste material and rubbish. Upon completion of all
work under the Contract, the Contractor shall remove from the premises all rubbish,debris, and excess
materials left over from his work. Any oil or grease stains on floor areas caused by the Contractor shall
be removed and floor areas left clean.
1.18 ALTERNATES
A. Alternate Bid Item No. 1
1. Price above the Base Bid for furnishing all labor,materials,and other costs in connection with
furnishing and installing new lighting in the Dining Rooms and all associated wiring,
switches,etc. See Drawings for Scope.
2. This Alternate will impact existing diffusers and ductwork in this area
B. Alternate Bid Item No.2
1. Alternate Bid Item No. 2 shall be the addition in price above the Base Bid for furnishing all
labor, materials, and other costs in connection with the Porch/Portcal extension and all
relative receptacles,wiring,etc. See Drawings for Scope.
FEBRUARY 1999 15600-7 HEATING,VENTILATING
AND AIR CONDITIONING
LE 9813 CHASE KITCHEN RENOVATION
1.15 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE MANUALS
A. After all final tests and adjustments have been completed, fully instruct the proper Owner's
representative in all details of operation for equipment installed Supply qualified personnel to operate
equipment for sufficient length of time to assure that Owner's representative is property qualified to
take over operation and maintenance procedures. This Contractor shall video tape the instruction
procedures and deliver three(3)copies of the tape with the Operation and Maintenance Manuals,
B. Furnish the Architect, for approval, three (3) copies of an Operation and Maintenance Manual.
Inscribe the following identification on the cover the words OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE
MANUAL, the name and location of the equipment or the building, the name of the Contractor, and
the Contract number. The manual shall have a Table of Contents with tab sheets placed before each
section. The instructions shall be legible and easily read,with large sheets of drawings folded in. The
manuals shall be bound in hard binders or an approved equivalent
C. The manual shall include the following information:
1. Description of systems.
2. Description of start up,operation,and shutdown procedures for each item of equipment
3. Winter/summer changeover procedures.
4. Schedule of adjustment,care,and routine maintenance for each item of equipment
5. Lubrication chart.
6. Wiring and control diagrams with data to explain detailed operation and contra of each item
of equipment
7. Valve chart.
8. List of recommended spare parts.
9. Copies of all service contracts.
10. Performance curves for pumps,fans,etc.
11. List of all names, addresses, and phone numbers of all Contractors as well as the local
representative for each item of equipment
D. See the"Automatic Temperature Control'paragraphs of this Section for additional requirements.
1.16 PROTECTION
A- Work under each Section shall include protecting the work and material of all other Sections from
damage by work or workmen,and shall include making good all damage thus caused.
FEBRUARY 1999 15600-6 HEATING,VENTILATING
AND AIR CONDITIONING
LE 9813 CHASE KITCHEN RENOVATION
1.1 l PRODUCT HANDLING
A. Delivery: The HVAC Contractor shall provide for the delivery of all his materials and fixtures to the
building site when required so as to carry on his work efficiently and to avoid delaying his work and
that of other trades. Delivery and storage of materials and equipment must be co-ordinated with the
Smith College Physical Plant,and is limited to areas designated by the College.
B. Storage and Handling: The HVAC Contractor shall, at all times,fully protect his work and materials
from injury or loss by others. Any injury or loss which may occur shall be made good without expense
to the Owner. The HVAC Contractor shall be responsible for the proper protection of all his materials
until the building is accepted by the Owner.
1.12 ENVIRONMENTAL CONDITIONS
A. All necessary tools machinery, scaffolding, and transportation for completion of his Subcontract shall
be provided by the HVAC Contractor.
B. The HVAC Contractor shall provide his own portable extension lines and obtain 120 volt, 60 cycle,
single phase electric power from the General Contractor to drive his machines and light his work. He
shall provide his own light bulbs,plugs,sockets,etc.
C. All broken or waste material, rags, packing, etc., resulting from his work shall be removed by the
HVAC Contractor.
1.13 WORK CONCEALED
A. All piping and ductwork shall be installed concealed in all areas except storage rooms, closets, and
mechanical or electrical equipment rooms,unless specifically noted otherwise on the Drawings.
B. Piping containing water shall not be installed concealed in walls having an exterior exposure above
grade.
1.14 GUARANTEE
A. The HVAC Contractor shall guarantee the satisfactory operation of his work in all parts for a period of
one(1)year after date of substantial completion,and shall agree to promptly repair or replace any items
of his work which are found to be defective during this period
B. The HVAC Contractor shall pay for repair of damage to the building caused by defects in his work and
for repair to plaster,wood, and other materials or equipment caused by replacement or m s to the
entire satisfaction of the Architect
C. Any part of the work installed under this Contract requiring excessive maintenance shall be considered
as being defective.
FEBRUARY 1999 15600-5 HEATING,VENTILATING
AND AIR CONDITIONING
LE 9813 CHASE KITCHEN RENOVATION
B. The HVAC Contractor shall check the Shop Drawings thoroughly for compliance with the Plans and
Specifications before submitting them to the Architect for review, making any and all changes which
may be required.
C. The review of Shop Drawings by the Architect shall not relieve the Contractor from any obligation to
perform the work strictly in accordance with the Contract Drawings and Specifications. The
responsibility for errors in Shop Drawings shall remain with the HVAC Contractor.
D. In the event that materials are being delivered to or installed on the job for which Shop Drawings or
samples have not been approved and/or which are not in accordance with the Specifications, the
Contractor will be required to remove such materials and substitute approved materials at his own
expense and as directed by the Architect
1.08 PERMITS,FEES AND INSPECTIONS
A. The HVAC Contractor shall secure all permits and pay all fees required for his work. He shall be
required to secure all other permits and pay all other fees and charges incidental to the proper carrying
out of the Contract He is to assume all responsibility regarding the observance of the Hiles and
regulations so far as they relate to his part of the work.
B. The HVAC Contractor shall arrange and pay for all required inspections of his work.
1.09 TEMPORARY HOOK-L'PS
A. The General Contractor will provide any temporary hook-ups required for the use of water or sanitary
for construction purposes and testing out apparatus as specified in Division 1.
1.10 PLANS AND SPECIFICATIONS
A. The HVAC Contractor shall refer to the Architectural Drawings of interior details, plans, elevations,
and structural layout in preparing his estimate. These documents are intended to supplement the
Mechanical and Electrical Plans and Specifications and any applicable work indicated or implied
thereon is to be considered a part of the Subcontract requirements.
B. The Plans and Specifications are complementary and anything called for,or reasonably implied, in the
Plans and not in the Specifications,or vice versa,shall be considered as called for or reasonably implied
in both
C. The HVAC Contractor shall assume all responsibility in scaling measurements from the Drawings.
D. Because of the small scale of the Drawings,it is not possible to indicate all offsets,fittings and accesso-
ries that may be required. The HVAC Contractor shall carefully investigate the structural and finish
conditions affecting all his work and shall arrange such work accordingly, firrnishing such fittings,
traps,offsets,valves,and accessories as may be required to meet such conditions,at no additional cost
E. The HVAC Contractor shall consult the College's Temperature Control and Balancing Contractor to
co-ordinate work of these trades and to have a full comprehension of the work to be done as well as to
determine the conditions affecting the location and placement of all equipment and materials.
FEBRUARY 1999 15600-4 HEATING,VENTILATING
AND AIR CONDITIONING
LE 9813 CHASE KITCHEN RENOVATION
F. All work shall be laid out and installed so as to require the least amount of cutting and patching.
Drilling of all holes required for the installation of pipes,conduit,and cable runs shall be performed by
the Contractor installing such items.
G. The HVAC Contractor shall be responsible for the proper protection of his work and materials from
injury or loss at the hands of others and shall make good such loss or injury at his own expense. All
pipes left open during the progress of the work shall be capped or plugged at all times. All instruments
and operating apparatus shall be protected by suitable means.
H. The HVAC Contractor shall be responsible for all equipment and materials installed under this Section
until the final acceptance of the project by the Owner.
I. The HVAC Contractor shall check the Architectural Plans and Specifications before ordering any
materials and the installation of work. Any discrepancies shall be called to the attention of the
Architect before procuring with the work
J. Before submitting his bid, the HVAC Contractor shall visit the site with the Drawings and
Specifications and shall become thoroughly familiar with all conditions affecting his work since the
HVAC Contractor will be held responsible for am.assumption he may make in regard thereto.
1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Equality of materials or articles other than those named or described in this Section will be determined
tom' in accordance with the provisions of the General Requirements. No substitution will be allowed for
the Watts ball valves,Gould pumps,Tour and Anderson balancing valves,etc.
B. The HVAC Contractor shall agree to accept as final the results of tests secured by a qualified testing
laboratory engaged by the Owner. Tests will be conducted in accordance with the General Require-
ments.
1.06 PRODUCTS
A With the exception of items specifically noted otherwise, all materials shall be new, full weight, and
first class in every respect, without defects, and designed to function properly in that portion of the
work for which they are intended,and with the same brand of manufacturer for each class or category
of material or equipment Electrical materials and equipment of types for which there are Underwriters
Laboratories standard requirements, listings, or labels shall conform to their requirements and be so
labeled
1.07 SUBMITTALS
A Before ordering materials shipped to the job,the HVAC Contractor shall submit to the Architect six(6)
sets of catalogue cuts, manufacturers' data sheets, or Shop Drawings, giving all details, dimensions,
capacities,etc. of all materials to be furnished on the project In addition to the above, one (1) set of
Shop Drawings shall be submitted to the College's HVAC Department for review and approval.
FEBRUARY 1999 15600-3 HEATING,VENTILATING
AND AIR CONDITIONING
LE 9813 CHASE KITCHEN RENOVATION law..
11. Record Drawings.
12. Demolition, removal from site and legal disposal of all existing heating and ventilating
systems and equipment, made obsolete by new construction. All piping and equipment shall
be the property of the College and shall be delivered to such places designated by the College.
1.03 CODES,ORDINANCES AND INSPECTIONS
A. All materials and the installation thereof shall conform to the requirements of the Massachusetts State
Building Code, Electrical Code, Fuel Gas and Plumbing Code, NFPA 96 and local laws. Hiles.
regulations, and codes pertaining thereto. Where provisions of the Contract Documents conflict with
any codes, rules or regulations.the latter shall govern. Where the Contract requirements are in excess
of applicable codes, Hiles or regulations, the Contract provisions shall govern unless the Architect rules
otherwise.
B. The HVAC Contractor shall comply with the Local Code Enforcement Officials' instructions at no
additional cost to the Owner.
1.04 INSTALLATION REQUIREMENTS
A. The HVAC Contractor shall employ only competent and experienced workmen at a regular schedule in
harmony with the other tradesmen on the job. He shall also exercise care and supervision of his
employees in regard to proper and expeditious taring out of his work
B. The HVAC Contractor shall have a Foreman or Superintendent assigned to the Project who shall be
authorized to make decisions and receive instructions exactly as if the HVAC Contractor himself were
present. The Foreman or Superintendent shall not be removed or replaced without the express
approval of the Architect after construction work begins.
C. The HVAC Contractor shall be held responsible for any injuries or damage done to the building
premises or adjoining property or to other Contractors'work resulting from the execution of his part of
the work in any manner whatsoever, and in case of dispute arising as to the extent or share of
responsibility inctured by the HVAC Contractor, it is agreed between the Owner,and the HVAC
Contractor that such liability and extent of damage shall be finally determined by the Architect whose
decision shall be final and binding on both parties to the Contract for the worm in question.
D. The HVAC Contractor shall co-operate to the fullest extent with all other trades in order to expedite the
progress of the work He shall furnish all information pertaining to his materials as to sizes, locations,
and means of support,to all other trades requiring such information. The HVAC Contractor shall also
furnish all sleeves, frames, beams, supports, inserts, etc., hereinafter specified so that the General
Contractor may build them in place. In case of failure on the part of the HVAC Contractor to give
proper information as above,he will be required to bear the extra expense involved due to such failure.
E. The arrangement of all piping, ductwork, conduit, wire and cable indicated on the Drawings is dia-
grammatic only, and indicates the minimum requirements of this work. Conditions at the building
shall determine the actual arrangement of runs,bends,offsets,etc. The HVAC Contractor shall lay out
all his work at the site and be responsible for the accuracy thereof. Conditions at the building shall be
the determining factor for all measurements.
FEBRUARY 1999 15600-2 HEATING,VENTILATING AW
AND AIR CONDITIONING
LE 9813 CHASE KITCHEN RENOVATION
SECTION 15600
HEATING,VENTILATING AND AIR CONDITIONING
PART 1-GENERAL
1.01 RELATED DOCUNIENTS
A. Include General Conditions, Supplementary General Conditions, applicable parts of Division 1, and
conditions of the Contract as part of this Section.
B. Examine all other Sections of the Specifications for requirements which affect work under this Section
whether or not such work is specifically mentioned in this Section.
C. Co-ordinate work with that of all other trades affecting, or affected by the work of this Section. Co-
operate with such trades to assure steady progress of all work under the Contract.
1.02 SCOPE OF WORK
A. Furnish all labor, materials, plant, equipment and services necessary for and reasonably incidental to
the complete installation of all HVAC work specified herein and/or indicated on the Drawings,
including,but not limited to,the following,
1. Cabinet heaters,unit heaters,radiators and make-up air units.
2. Piping systems for hot water,including pumps,valves,and specialties.
3. Duct systems for supply, return and exhaust, including fire dampers, registers, louvers, and
terminal boxes.
4. Exhaust fans.
5. Insulation for piping and ductwork.
6. Energy management(building automation)system All temperature control work shall be
by Yankee Technology,Inc.
7. Installation of and connection to equipment furnished by others.
8. Air and water balance, tests, start-up. All water and air testing and balancing shall be
preformed by Wings Testing and Balancing,Inc and billed directly to the College.
9. Guarantee.
10. Instructions.
FEBRUARY 1999 15600-1 HEATING,VENTILATING
AND AIR CONDITIONING
LE9813 CHASE KITCHEN RENOVATION
3.08 CLEANING UP
A. After all the fixtures have been set and ready for use, and before leaving the job, thoroughly clean all
fixtures installed under this Contract, removing all plaster, stickers, rust stains, and any foreign matter
or discoloration of fixtures,leaving every part in perfect condition and ready for use.
3.09 EQUIPMENT INSTALLATION
A. All equipment furnished under this Section shall be installed in accordance with its manufacturers
printed installation instructions.whether so shown on the Drawings or not, and all labor and materials
required to accomplish this shall be furnished by the Plumbing Contractor and be included in his Bid
3.10 DISINFECTION
A. Flush out entire system.
B. Introduce chlorine or solution of calcium hypochlorite or sodium hypochlorite. Fill lines slowly and
apply agent at rate which will produce 50 parts per million of chloride as determined by residual
chlorine tests at end of lines. Open and close valves and hydrants while system is being chlorinated-
C. After twenty-four (24) hours, test for residual chlorine. If more than 5 ppm are present, flush out
system until all traces are removed.
D. After disinfection, flush treated water from system through its extremities. Continue flushing until
samples of water are satisfactory to local authorities having jurisdiction. Repeat flushing if samples
taken daily over next three(3)days indicate that quality of water is not being maintained Do not draw
samples from hydrants and undisinfected hose.
E. Submit test results to Owner.
END OF SECTION
tow FEBRUARY 1999 15300-17 .
PLUMBING
LE9813 CHASE KITCHEN RENOVATION
continuity of invert
3.03 WATER PIPE FITTINGS AND CONNECTIONS
A. Mains, Branches and Runoffs: Piping shall be installed as indicated. Pipe shall be cut accurately to
measurements established at the building by the Plumbing Contractor and shall be worked into place
without springing or forcing. Care shall be taken not to weaken structural portions of the building.
Above ground piping shall be run parallel with the lines of the building unless otherwise indicated.
Branch pipes from service lines may be taken from top, bottom or side of main, using such crossover
fittings as may be required by structural or installation conditions. Supply pipes, valves and fittings
shall be kept a sufficient distance from other work and other services to permit not less than 1/2"
between finished covering on the different services.
B. E.xcpansion and Contraction of Pipe: Allowance shall be made throughout for expansion and
contraction of pipe.
3.04 CUTTING AND PATCHING
A. Drilling of all holes required for the installation of plumbing shall be performed by the Plumbing -
Contractor. All work and materials shall be installed in such a manner and at such time to keep cutting
and patching to a minimum.
B. Cutting of openings larger than those that can be drilled will be performed by the General Contractor.
C. Patching of all holes, after installation of piping or equipment, will be performed by the General +.
Contractor.
3.05 INSULATION
A. Insulation shall be applied by an independent Insulation Contractor regularly engaged in that business.
B. Insulation shall not be omitted on piping in walls. Covering shall be applied before masonry proceeds.
C. Insulation shall be applied over clean pipe with all joints butted fim-dy together and sealed
3.06 SLEEVES AND ESCUTCHEONS
A. The Plumbing Contractor shall finish and set all sleeves required All water piping passing through
masonry walls shall be provided with standard weight steel pipe, or Schedule 40 PVC pipe sleeves,
inside diameter to be slightly larger than pipe passing through same. Center pipe in sleeve.
B. Provide chromium plated escutcheons where uninsulated pipes pass through walls.
3.07 INSPECTION AND TESTS
A Tests for Plumbing Systems: Soil,waste,vent and water piping shall be tested by the Plumbing Con-
tractor and approved before acceptance. Underground piping shall be tested prior to backfiMng.
Equipment required for tests shall be furnished by the Plumbing Contractor at no additional cost to the
Owner. All tests shall be witnessed and approved by the Local Plumbing Inspector, and shall be
performed as required by the Plumbing Code.
FEBRUARY 1999 15400-16 PLUMBING
LE9813 CHASE KITCHEN RENOVATION
A. Furnish and install all brass automatic trap primers where indicated on the Drawings. Primer shall
include automatic pressure activated brass valve with vacuum breaker, and copper duplex manifold
distribution reservoir as indicated on the Drawings. Valve shall conform with A.S.S.E. Standard
1018.
B. Valve shall be Precision Plumbing Products, Inc.. or equal.
PART 3 -EXECUTION
3.01 SOIL,WASTE,DRAIN AND VENT PIPING
A- Installation: -
1. Drainage and Vent Pipes: Horizontal soil, rain leaders and waste pipes shall have a
minimum grade of 1/4"per foot for piping 3"and less and 1/8"per foot for piping larger than
3". Horizontal waste lines receiving the discharge from two or more fixtures shall be
provided with end vents unless separate venting of fixtures is noted
2. Fittings: Changes in pipe size on soil waste, and drain lines shall be made with reducing
fittings. Changes in direction shall be made by the appropriate use of 45'wyes, long or short
sweep 1/4 bends, 1/6. 1/8, or 1/16 bends. or by a combination of those or equivalent fittings.
Single and double sanitary tees and 1/4 bends may be used in drainage lines only where the
direction of flow is from horizontal to vertical.
3. Union Connections: Slip joints will be permitted only in trap seals or on the inlet side of the
traps. Use of bushings will not be permitted-
B. Joints: Installation of pipe and fittings shall be made in accordance with the manufacturer's
recommendations. Mitering of joints for elbows and notching of straight nets of pipe for tees will not
be permitted. Threaded joints shall have American National taper pipe threads conforming to National
Bureau of Standards Handbook H28, with graphite or inert filler and oil, with an approved graphite
compound,or with polytetrafluorethylene tape applied to the male threads.
3.02 INSTALLATION OF SEWER PIPE
A- Bedding for the pipe shall provide full and stable support, with recesses excavated for pipe bells. All
pipe shall be laid to the specified line and grade,with a fine bearing throughout each length and with
the bell ends uphill.
B. Pipe Joints: The flexible water tight rubber gaskets shall be installed in accordance with the directions
of the manufacturer.
C. Plastic Pipe: Install plastic piping in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. At minimum,
envelope all PVC pipe in 6" of screened gravel. Clear interior of conduit of dirt and debris as work
progresses. Maintain swab or drag in line and pull past each joint as it is completed
D. Joint Adapters: Make joints between PVC pipe and other type of pipe with standard manufactured
PVC adapters and fittings.
E. Lay conduit beginning at low point of system, true to grades and alignment indicated with unbroken
FEBRUARY 1999 15400-15 PLUMBING
LE9813 CHASE KITCHEN RENOVATION -
D. The kitchen equipment layout drawings show the approximate size, number and locations of
connections for each item of kitchen equipment. The Plumbing Subcontractor is advised that the
size, number and arrangement of connections may vary with different manufacturers. This
Subcontractor shall make the connections no smaller than those provided at the fixture; and shall
vary the arrangement to suit the equipment furnished. The Kitchen Equipment Subcontractor shall
furnish certified roughing-in drawings to the Plumbing Subcontractor before proceeding with the
work.
E. The following items and those indicated on Drawings shall be furnished and installed by others,
but the Plumbing Subcontractor shall make all connections, hot and cold water, gas. waste. and
vent piping, thereto and provide necessary traps,shut-offs, thereof.
Kitchen Equipment
Pot Sink
Hand Sinks
Food Waste Disposals
Vegetable Sink
Steamers
Kettles
Tilting Frying Pan
Pre-Rinse Sink&Disposer
Dishwasher
Range
Ovens
Warmer/Servers
F. The Kitchen Equipment Subcontractor shall furnish to the Plumbing Subcontractor for installation
all faucets, strainers, lever handle wastes and waste outlets required on equipment furnished by the
Kitchen and Laboratory Equipment Subcontractor. All other specialty items such as tailpieces.
traps, valves, shut-offs, and floor drains shall be furnished and installed by the Plumbing
Subcontractor
G. The Kitchen and Laboratory Equipment Subcontractor shall furnish gas solenoid valve in full size
of gas header. The Plumbing Subcontractor shall install solenoid in gas header piping. The
Electrical Subcontractor shall wire the valve into the fire suppression system for the kitchen hood.
H. The Plumbing Subcontractor shall furnish and install gas cocks at each gas fired appliance.
2.16 EQUIPMENT CONNECTIONS
A. Make final hot water, cold water, waste, and gas connections to kitchen equipment. Install
solenoid gas valve on gas line feeding cooking equipment.
B. Make final hot water, cold water, waste, vent, and gas connections to classroom and laboratory
equipment and fixtures furnished and installed by others. Provide solenoid gas valves on branches
feeding lab equipment.
2.17 TRAP PRINTER
FEBRUARY 1999 15400-14 PLUMBING
LE9813 CHASE KITCHEN RENOVATION
Owner.
2.14 BACKFLOW PREVENTERS
A. Furnish and install the following backflow preventers, as manufactured by Watts Regulator:
1. On cold water feed to power wash: No. 909-SQT-1" complete with bronze strainer; full
port,bronze ball valve shut-offs, and No. 909-AG-C. V air gap and drain piping.
2. On cold water piping for Ice machine: No. 909SQT, sizes as indicated on the Drawings,
complete with bronze strainer,full port, bronze ball valve shut-offs and No. 909-AG-F, 2"
air gap and drain piping.
3 . On cold water make-up to commercial disposal: Furnish and install Watts 1/2"
800M4QT pressure type vacuum breaker. Provide with repair kit.
4. On tempered hot water to hose reel: Furnish and install Watts Model - 7 dual check
backflow preventer. Backflow shall be installed on vertical piping between mixing faucet
and hose reel. This Subcontractor shall install Zurn size 100 shock arrestor on inlet
connection to hose reel. Provide with repair kit.
B. This Subcontractor shall provide a spare parts repair kit for each 909 reduced pressure backflow
preventer, to consist of a repair kit for the first check, second check,and relief valve.
►, C. All backflow preventers shall be approved by the Massachusetts State Plumbing Examiners and
shall be installed in strict accordance with manufacturer's recommendations and instructions, and
in accordance with Regulation 310CMR 22.22. '
D. Units shall be Watts Regulator Co., Febco,Division of CMB, Ind.,Hersey Products, Inc., or equal.
E. The Plumbing Subcontractor shall file and prepare all applications for backflow preventer approval
with the Department of Environmental Protectiom and pay all fees and charges.
F. All certificates of approval and test results shall be sent to the Architect.
2.15 KITCHEN EQUIPMENT
A. Equipment shall be set in place by the Kitchen Equipment Subcontractor.
B. The Plumbing Subcontractor shall run hot and cold water, gas, drainage, waste and vent to each of
these fixtures as required and make final connections to same, ready for use.
C. The Plumbing Subcontractor shall furnish and install shut-off valves at each fixture and where
required, shall provide unions to permit the removal of fixtures for repairs. All hot and cold water
piping, valves, waste and vent piping to kitchen equipment exposed to normal view including
piping under exposed counters, shall be chrome-plated brass pipe or chrome-plated copper tubing
after fabrication.
-13 PLUMBING
FEBRUARY 1999 15400
LE9813 CHASE KITCHEN RENOVATION -
if necessary, shall be built into place as the building progresses. This Contractor shall be held
responsible for the stability and proper support of all plumbing fixtures.
C. Water Closet(P-1)
Madera Model 2234.015, elongated vitreous china, siphon jet flush action, 1.6 gallon flush. Church
Model 5321.112, elongated solid plastic seat, open front less cover with check hinge (white), Sloan
royal flush valve Model 111-3 with vacuum breaker and angle stop.
D. Water Closet-Handicapped(P-lA)
Madera Model 2234.015, 17" H. elongated vitreous china siphon jet flush action. 1.6 gallon flush.
Church Model 5321.112, elongated solid plastic seat,open front less cover with check hinge (white),
Sloan royal flush valve-Model 111-3 with vacuum breaker and angle stop.
E. Lavatory-Handicapped(P-2)
Ellissa Petite Model 0410.021, 4" centers, vitreous china. Symmons Scot Model S-60-H metering
faucet, centerset with blade-type handle, BrassCraft No. CS400A stops and risers; Chicago 337 grid
strainer and offset tailpiece; Sanitary Dash No. R370-17 polished chrome plated trap with cleanout
plus. Insulate drain and stops with Tru-Bro,Inc.Model 105W molded vinyl insulation kit.
F. Floor Drain(P-3)
Zurn Model ZN415, dura-coated. cast iron body, bottom outlet with 6" diameter nickel bronze, Type
"H" strainer. See Drawing for trap primer locations to have Zurn Model ZN-3284 funnel assembly
where so noted on the Drawings.
G. Floor Drain(P-4)Kitchen .�.
Zurn Model ZN415, dura-coated, cast iron body, bottom outlet with 6" diameter nickel bronze, Type
"N" strainer.-See Drawing for trap primer locations to have Zurn Model ZN-328-4 funnel assembly
where so noted on the Drawings.
H. Floor Drain(P-5)Floor Sink
Zurn Model ZN-1900, dura-coated, cast iron body,with white A.R.E. interior, 3", bottom outlet with
12 % " square N.B. grate and frame. Drain shall include; (p) trap primer construction, (33) white
ARE.anti splash bottom dome strainer.
I. Floor Drain(P-6)W.Bucket
Zurn Model ZN-1910,dura-coated,cast iron body,with white ARE. interior, 3",bottom outlet with 8
'/Z"square N.B. grate and frame. Drain shall include;(p)trap primer construction, (25)white A.R.E.
anti splash bottom dome strainer.
J. Hose Bibb(P-7)
Woodford Model 26 hose bibb with vacuum breaker and loose key handle.
K Wall Hydrant(P-8)
Woodford Model No.60 3/."hose thread,loose key with vacuum breaker,all chrome plated.
2.13 DEMOLITION
A. Removal of all obsolete fixtures, drains, piping, etc., not to be re-used shall be removed by this
Contractor and shall become the property of the Owner. The Plumbing Contractor shall be responsible
for delivering and/or properly disposing of all obsolete equipment to such places as designated by the
FEBRUARY 1999 15400-12 PLUMBING
LE9813 CHASE KITCHEN RENOVATION
2.08 HOT WATER CIRCULATING PUMP
A. New recirculation pump (CP-1) shall be Taco Model 009 circulator pump, with aquastat operation to
deliver 5 gpm at 10'-0"head, 1/25 H.P.
B. This Contractor shall furnish and install pump aquastat for pump. Wiring of pump and aquastat shall
be by the Electrical Contractor.
C. Circulating pump shall be Taco Cartridge type. No substitutions will be allowed.
2.09 GREASE TRAP
A. Grease interceptor shall be of steel construction «Oth standard acid resisting base coating inside and
out, and shall be supplied with trap and cleanout. gasketed cover, 3" threaded inlet and outlet. flexible
drain-off hose, grease accumulating hood and fabricated steel fully enclosed housing with anti-skid
cover with adjustable interceptor carrier brackets.and flashing flange and clamp device..
B. Grease interceptor shall be Zurn Z-1173-79-RE-800 rated at 50 gpm flow rate with 100 lbs. grease
capacity.or equal by Wadw.Josam,or J.R. Smith Recess unit top flush with finished floor.
C. No substitutions will be allowed.
2.10 WATER HAMNIER ARRESTERS
A. Where indicated on the Drawings,famish and install Precision Plumbing Products.Inc. SC-Series type
shock absorbers,sizes as shown on Drawings,or as required. No substitutions will be allowed.
2.11 ACCESS PANELS
A. Access panel doors for all concealed inaccessible valves, balancing fittings, or cleanouts in masonry
walls, plastered or gypsum wallboard walls or ceilings, shall be fiunished by the Plumbing Contractor
and installed by tradesmen of wall or ceiling finish. Access panels in plastered ceilings shall be Karp
Type DSC-214 PL(12" x 12" min.); in walls, shall be Karp type DSC-214M"Universal" (12"x 12");
for drywall ceilings, shall be Karp Sesame Slim Trim Access Hatches,Type KSTDW/CAD (12" x 12"
min.)with screw driver type lock
B. Access panels shall be Karp Associates, Inc., Inn-co, Inc., Milcor Division, Birmingham Ornamental
Iron,or equal.
2.12 PLUMBING FUTURES AND FIXTURE TRDANIINGS
A. General Requirements: Reference made herein to numbers of plumbing fixtures to establish type and
quality of materials. Angle stops, straight stops, stops integral with the faucets, or concealed type of
lock shield,loose key pattern stops for supplies shall be fiunished and installed with fixtures. Exposed
traps and supply pipes for all fixtures and equipment shall be chrome plated and connected to the rough
piping systems at the wall. Wall escutcheons shall be chromium plated or nickel plated brass with
polished,bright surfaces.
B. The Plumbing Contractor shall furnish all supports, brackets, bolts, etc. for proper installation of all
fixtures requiring support They shall be in accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations,and,
FEBRUARY 1999 15400-11 PLUMBING
LE9813 CHASE KITCHEN RENOVATION
2.04 CLEANOUTS
A. Where cleanouts occur in finished floors throughout the building, they shall be Zurn ZN-1405-2,
nickel-bronze for concrete finish floor, Zorn ZN-1405-7 nickel-bronze recessed for resilient floors;
Zurn ZN-1405-7 for ceramic the floors, ZN-1405-14 for carpeted floors; or equal by J. R. Smith or
Wade.
2.05 INSULATION
A. All water piping shall be insulated with Anmaflex closed cell pipe insulation with self-sealing lap, V
thick for hot water, 1/2" thick for cold water. Insulation shall be one piece snap-on type. All exposed
piping within 10'-0"of-finished floor shall be insulated as noted above and shall be fully jacketed with a
PVC cover.
B. Fittings shall be insulated with mitered cut insulation applied over fittings with joints taped Cold
water piping shall also have mastic applied to all overlapping surfaces to form a vapor barrier.
C. Insulation and fitting jackets shall be installed according to the manufacturer's recommendations. Anv
gaps or fishmouths shall be remade.
D. Install a twelve (12") inch length of'wood blocking at each hanger, insulation shall run continuous
through the hanger. Jacket shall match adjacent insulation jacket.
E. All exposed drain and water piping at handicapped lavatories shall be insulated with Truebro "Handi
Lav-Guard",or equal,molded insulation kit.
n
2.06 THERMOMETERS
A. Thermometers shall be Jav, Moeller, Palmer, Taylor, Trerice. or Weiss, equal to Trerice 80700 with
aluminum case, industrial glass, dial type, 4-1/2" diameter, 2°F subdivisions. Stem length shall be
sufficient to assure accurate and fast response,but in no case less than 3-1/2"nor less than one-third of
pipe diameter in which installed Each thermometer shall be provided with a brass, monel,or stainless
steel separable socket of matching length,and with lagging extensions when installed in insulated pipe.
Thermometers shall be adjustable angle type, positioned as required to be easily seen and read from
normal operator's position.
B. Ranges shall be manufacturer's standard closest to the following:
1. Hot water:30T- 180T.
C. Provide at inlet and outlet hot water heater.
2.07 PRESSURE GAUGES
A. 4-1/2"dial, double-spring with soft copper tubing loop and pet cock. Operating range shall be in the
center of the scale. To be U.S.Gage Co.,or approved equal.
B. Provide at water entrance,on both sides of pressure reducing valve.
FEBRUARY 1999 15400-10 PLUMBING
LE9813 CHASE KITCHEN RENOVATION
3. Valves shall be as manufactured by Stockham,Hammond,American Valve,or equal.
E. Balancing Valves:
1. Where indicated on the Drawings, fumish and install balance circuit setter, with calibrated
scale,with bronze body and disc and connections for differential pressure meter.
2. Balancing valves shall be Tour&Anderson.
F. Check Valves
1. Check valves shall be finnished and installed where indicated on the Drawings. Checks up to
2" shall be Class 125. Solder ends, body and caps shall be ASTM B62 cast bronze
composition,swing type disc,Stockham Figure B-309.
2. Check valves 2-1/2" and larger shall be iron body, bronze mounted with body and cap
conforming to ASTM A126, Class B cast iron, flanged swing type disc, Stockham Figure
G-931.
3. Check valves shall be as manufactured by Stockham,Jenkins,Lunkenheimer,or equal.
G. Vacuum relief valves shall be Watts Model 36A-3/4".
H. Globe valves shall be as manufactured by Hammond IB-t 18 or IB-140.
I. Pressure Reducing Valves
1. Pressure reducing valves (PRV) shall be as manufactured by Watts Regulator Co., Model
U5B-GG with thermal bypass. No substitutions shall be allowed.
2. Furnish and install,where indicated on the Drawings,Ametek/U.S. Gauge Co.'s Figure P500,2" diameter,0 lb.
to 100 lbs.
2.03 HANGERS
A. Hangers shall be as manufactured by Grinnell Comparry, Carpenter & Paterson, Fee & Mason, or
equal.
B. For cast iron pipe-Grinnell Fig.260,one to each length of cast iron pipe;at twelve foot(12)intervals
for threaded piping.
C. For hot, cold, and return water piping-Grinnell Fig. 70 at six foot(6) intervals for copper tubing 1-
1/4" or less; ten foot(10) intervals for piping at 1-1/2" and larger. Install Fig. 167 insulation shield
between hanger and insulation. Hangers to be installed outside the insulation. Hangers for gas piping
shall be installed at eight foot(8)intervals.
D. Hangers or supports shall be placed within one foot(1)of each horizontal elbow. Vertical runs-of pipe
not over five feet(5) in length shall be supported on hangers placed not over 1/2" from the elbow on
the connecting horizontal rum.
FEBRUARY 1999 15400-9 PLUMBING
LE9813 CHASE KITCHEN RENOVATION ,. -
valves,and for piping installation.valve numbers shall be added to these Drawings prior to submittal to
the Architect. In addition to the above all revised areas shall be clearly marked with a revision bubble.
PART2-PRODUCTS
2.01 PIPING MATERIALS
A. All soil,waste,and vent piping in accessible areas 2-1/2"and larger, shall be cast iron "no hub". ASA
Group 022 pipe and fittings, joined with cast iron clamps as manufactured by "Clamp-All". No
substitutions will be allowed. All soil,waste,and vent below slab shall be service weight, cast iron pipe
with oakum and lead,-sealed gas and watertight. In lieu of lead and oakum joint piping, below slab
may be service weight with push-on rubber rings.
B. In lieu of cast iron piping,pipe sizes 3"and smaller shall be Type"L"copper pipe with solder fittings.
C. All waste lines 2" and smaller shall be Type "L" copper. All vent lines 2" and smaller shall be type
copper.
D. All hot and cold water piping within the building shall be hard copper Type "L" seamless drawn
tubing, assembled with sweat fittings. All solders used shall be lead free, cadmium free, "Silberbrite-
100", or equal, complying with the latest issue of ANSI A-5.8 publications. All exposed runs to all
toilet fixtures and sinks shall be chrome plated.
E. All gas piping shall be Schedule 40 threaded black steel pipe with fittings. All pipes 2-1/2" and larger
shall be Schedule 40 pipe with threaded or welded joints.
2.02 BALL VALVES
A. On water lines inside the building, ball valves shall be as manufactured by Watts Series B6001. No
substitutions will be allowed. Valves shall be provided with stainless steel ball, reinforced teflon seats
and seals,bronze body,400 psi wog,positive 100%shut-off.
B. Drain valves at all low points shall be 1/2"or 3/4"solder by 3/4"hose end with attached cap and chain.
C. Provide gas cocks for sizes 1"and smaller,and provide gas rated ball valves on gas piping 1-1/4" and
larger with tee handles.
D. Gate Valves:
1. Where indicated on the Drawings,all gate valves 4"and larger,shall be Class 125 iron body
bronze mounted with body and bonnet conforming to 200 psi wog non-shock cast iron,
flanged ends, with Teflon packing, two-piece packing gland assembly, Hammond Figure
1R1138,Stockman,or equal.
2. Valves 3" and smaller where indicated on the Drawings shall be Class 125. Body and
bonnets shall be of ASTM B62 cast bronze composition,solid disc,copper silicone alloy stem,
brass packing gland,Teflon packing and malleable handwheel, solder end, Stockham Figure
B-104,Hammond 1R1138,or equal.
FEBRUARY 1999 15400-8 PLUMBING
LE9813 CHASE KITCHEN RENOVATION
1.18 CLEANING
A. The Contractor shall thoroughly clean and flush all piping, ducts, and equipment of all foreign
substances inside and out before being placed in operation. Thoroughly flush all piping of any oils,
burrs,solder.and flux. Replace strainers and filters at completion of cleaning.
B. If any part of a system should be stopped or damaged by any foreign matter after being placed in
operation, the system shall be disconnected, cleaned, and reconnected at no additional cost to the
Owner.
C. During the course of construction, all equipment and pipes shall be capped to insure adequate
protection against the entrance of foreign matter.
D. Keep the job site free from the accumulation of waste material and rubbish Upon completion of all
work under the Contract, the Contractor shall remove from the premises all rubbish.debris,and excess
materials left over from his work. Any oil or grease stains on floor areas caused by the Contractor shall
be removed and floor areas left clean.
1.19 ALTERNATES
A Alternate Bid Item No. 1
1. Price above the Base Bid for furnishing all labor, materials,and other costs in connection with
furnishing and installing new lighting in the Dining Rooms and all associated wiring,
switches,etc. See Drawings for Scope.
2. This Alternate will not impact work of this trade.
B. Alternate Bid Item No. 2
1. Alternate Bid Item No. 2 shall be the addition in price above the Base Bid for furnishing all labor, materials,and
other costs in connection with the Porch/Portical extension and all relative receptacles,wiring,
etc. See Drawings for Scope.
2. This Alternate will not impact this trade.
C. Alternate Bid Item No. 3
1. Alternate Bid Item No. 3 shall be the addition in price above the Base Bid for furnishing all
Libor, materials, and other costs in connection with the new overhead electrical distribution
system from the Kitchen Hood to the Island sinks. See Drawings for Scope.
2. This Alternate will not impact this trade.
1.20 RECORD DRAWINGS
A. Submit Record Drawings as specified in Division 1.
B. Record Drawings shall reflect all changes from the Contract Drawings whether by change order or by
A�** field conditions. Principal dimensions of concealed work,buried sanitary,vent and water piping and
FEBRUARY 1999 15400-7 PLUMBING
LE9813 CHASE KITCHEN RENOVATION
B. Piping containing water shall not be installed concealed in walls having an exterior exposure above
grade, unless specifically so shown on the Drawings. When pipes are indicated to be installed in
exterior walls, the Plumbing Contractor shall be responsible for ensuring that wall and pipe insulation
is properly installed to protect them from freezing.
1.16 OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS
A After all final tests and adjustments have been completed, fully instruct the proper Owner's
representative in all details of operation of equipment installed Supply qualified personnel to operate
equipment for sufficient length of time to assure that Owner's representative is properly qualified to
take over operation and maintenance procedures. This Subcontractor shall video tape the instruction
procedures an deliver two(2)copies of the tape with the Operation and Maintenance Manuals.
B. Furnish the Architect, for his approval, three (3) copies of an Operation and Maintenance Manual.
Inscribe the following identification on the cover the words, "Operation and Maintenance Manual",
the name and location of the equipment or the building, the name of the Subcontractor, and the
Contract number. The manual shall have a Table of Contents with tab sheets placed before each
section_ The instructions shall be legible and easily read with large sheets of drawings folded in. the
manuals shall be bound in hard binders or an approved equivalent
C. The Manual shall include the following information:
1. Description of systems.
2. Description of start-up,operation,and shutdown. awn
3. Schedule of adjustment,care,and routine maintenance for each item of equipment
4. Lubrication chart
5. Wiring and control diagrams with data to explain detailed operation and control of each item
of equipment.
6. Valve chart.
7. Lisrt of recommended spare parts.
8. Copies of all service contracts.
9. Performance curves for pumps,etc.
10. List of all names, addresses, and phone numbers of all Subcontractors as well as the local
representative for each item of equipment
1.17 GUARANTEE
A. The Plumbing Contractor shall guarantee the satisfactory operation of his work in all parts for a period
of one(1)year after the date of final acceptance,and shall agree to promptly repair or replace any items
of his work which are found to be defective during this period.
B. The Plumbing Contractor shall pay for repair of damage to the building caused by defects in his work
and for repair to piaster,wood, and other materials or equipment caused by replacement or repairs to
the entire satisfaction of the Architect
C. Any part of the work installed under this Contract requiring excessive maintenance shall be considered
as being defective.
FEBRUARY 1999 15400.6 PLUMBING
LE9813 CHASE KITCHEN RENOVATION
1.12 ENVIRONMENTAL CONDITIONS
A All necessary tools machinery, scaffolding, and transportation for completion of his Contract shall be
provided by the Plumbing Contractor.
B. The Plumbing Contractor shall provide his own portable extension lines and obtain 120 volt, 60 cvcle,
single phase electric energy from the General Contractor to drive his machines and light his work. He
shall provide his own light bulbs,plugs,sockets,etc.
C. All broken or waste material, rags, packing, etc., resulting from his work shall be removed by the
Plumbing Contractor.
1.13 PROTECTION
A The Plumbing Contractor shall.at all times,filly protect his work and materials from injury or loss by
others. Any injury or loss which may occur shall be made good without expense to the Owner. The
Plumbing Contractor shall be responsible for the proper protection of all his materials until the building
is accepted by the Owner.
1.14 CUTTING AND PATCHING
A. Cutting and/or drilling of all openings and holes 4" in diameter or smaller, required for the installation
of plumbing in the building, shall be performed by the Plumbing Contractor. All work and materials
shall be installed in such a manner and at such time to keep cutting and patching to a minimum.
Cutting and/or drilling of structural supports (i.e. beams or joists) is not allowed without written
approval by the Architect. Location for openings, etc. shall be checked by the Plumbing Contractor.
and error due to failure to co-ordinate work with other divisions shall be the responsibility of the
Plumbing Contractor failing to co-ordinate,who shall make the corrections at his own expense.
B. All holes larger than 4" in diameter shall be provided by the General Contractor.
C. Work shall include fiu-nishing and locating sleeves or inserts required before the new walls are built, or
be responsible for the cost of cutting and patching required for pipes where sleeves were not installed or
where incorrectly located. The Plumbing Contractor shall do all drilling required for the installation of
hangers.
D. Patching of all holes, after installation of piping or equipment, shall be performed by the General
Contractor or appropriate tradesmen.
E. All pipe cutting or threading shall be done in a location approved by the Owner.
F. No pipe cutting or threading shall be done in areas where completed concrete floor slab is to remain in
finishes or be painted later. Should this area be necessary, the Plumbing Contractor shall cover the
entire working area with canvas tarpaulins in an approved manner.
1.15 WORK CONCEALED
A. All piping,hangers and supports shall be installed concealed in all areas except storage rooms, closets,
and mechanical or electrical equipment rooms.
look
FEBRUARY 1999 15400-5 PLUMBING
LE9813 CHASE KITCHEN RENOVATION ., .
D. In the event that materials are being delivered to or installed on the job for which Shop Drawings or
samples have not been approved and/or which are not in accordance with the Specifications, the
Plumbing Contractor will be required to remove such materials and substitute approved materials at his
own expense and as directed by the Architect.
1.08 PERMITS,FEES AND INSPECTIONS
A. The Plumbing Contractor shall secure all permits and pay all fees required for his work. He shall be
required to secure all other permits and pay all other fees and charges incidental to the proper carving
out of the Contract He is to assume all responsibility regarding the observance of the rules and
regulations so far as they relate to his part of the work-
B. The Plumbing Contractor shall arrange and pay for all required inspections of his work.
1.09 TEMPORARY HOOK-UPS
A. The General Contractor will provide any temporary hook-ups requited for the use of water or sanitary
for construction purposes and testing out apparatus as specified in Section 01500.
1.10 PLANS AND SPECIFICATIONS
A. The Plumbing Contractor shall refer to the Architectural Drawings of interior details, plans,elevations,
and structural layout in preparing his estimate. These documents are intended to supplement the
Mechanical and Electrical Plans and Specifications and any applicable work indicated or implied
thereon is to be considered a part of the Contract requirements. Awk
B. The Specifications complementary and anything called for,or reasonably implied,in the Plans and not
in the Specifications.or vice versa,shall be considered as called for or reasonably implied in both.
C. The Plumbing Contractor shall not scale the Drawings.
D. Because of the small scale of the Drawings, it is not possible to indicate all offsets,fittings and accesso-
ries that may be required The Plumbing Contractor shall carefully investigate the structural and finish
conditions affecting all his work and shall arrange such work accordingly, firnishing such fittings,
traps,offsets,valves,and accessories as may be required to meet such conditions,at no additional cost.
1.11 DELIVERY,STORAGE,AND HANDLING
A Delivery: The Plumbing subcontractor shall provide for the delivery of all his materials and fixtures to
the building site when required so as to carry on his work efficiently and to avoid delaying his work and
that of other trades. All delivery and storage must be coordinated with the Smith College Phvsical
Plant Department. The Plumbing Contractor shall take delivery of all pre-purchased plumbing fixtures
and equipment, and shall be responsible for the proper handling, storage, and protection of these
materials from that point on. Any damage or loss of these materials after delivery shall be the
responsibility of this Contractor.
B. Storage and Handling: The Plumbing Contractor shall, at all times, fully protect his work and
materials from injury or loss by others. Any injury or loss which may occur shall be made good
without expense to the Owner. The Plumbing Contractor shall be responsible for the proper protection
of all his materials until the building is accepted by the Owner.
FEBRUARY 1999 154004 PLUMBING _
LE9813 CHASE KITCHEN RENOVATION
F. All work shall be laid out and installed so as to require the least amount of cutting and patching.
Drilling of all holes required for the installation of pipes,conduit,and cable nuts shall be performed by
the Subcontractor installing such items.
G. The Plumbing Contractor shall be responsible for the proper protection of his work and materials from
injury or loss at the hands of others and shall make good such loss or injury at his own expense. All
pipes left open during the progress of the work shall be capped or plugged at all times. All instruments
and operating apparatus shall be protected by suitable means.
H. The Plumbing Contractor shall be responsible for all equipment and materials installed under this
Section until the final acceptance of the project by the Owner.
I. The Plumbing Contractor shall check all of the Architectural Plans and Specifications before ordering
any materials and the installation of work. Am discrepancies shall be called to the attention of the
Architect before proceeding with the work.
1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Equality of materials or articles other than those named or described in this Section will be determined
in accordance with the provisions of the General Requirements, except that substitutions will only be
considered for items where the words, "or equal" appear in the product specification, and as approved
by the Architect and Owner.
B. The Plumbing Contractor shall agree to accept as final the results of tests secured by a qualified testing
laboratory engaged by the Owner. Tests will be conducted in accordance with the General Require-
ments.
1.06 PRODUCTS
A With the exception of items specifically noted otherwise, all materials used shall be U.S. made, new,
full weight, and first class in every respect, without defects, and designed to function properly in that
portion of the work for which they are intended, and with the same brand of manufacturer for each
class of material or equipment Electrical materials and equipment of types for which there are
Underwriters Laboratories standard requirements,listings,or labels shall conform to their requirements
and be so labeled
1.07 SUBMITTALS
A Before ordering materials shipped to the job,the Plumbing Contractor shall submit to the Architect six
(6)sets of catalogue cuts, manufacturers'data sheets,or Shop Drawings, giving all details,dimensions,
capacities,etc.of all materials to be furnished
B. The Plumbing Contractor shall check the Shop Drawings thoroughly for compliance with the Plans
and Specifications before submitting them to the Architect for review, making any and all changes
which may be required.
C. The review of Shop Drawings by the Architect shall not relieve the Plumbing Contractor from any
obligation to perform the work strictly in accordance with the Contract Drawings and Specifications.
The responsibility for errors in Shop Drawings shall remain with the Plumbing Contractor.
FEBRUARY 1999 15300-3 PLUMBING
LE9813 CHASE KITCHEN RENOVATION
and pumps, heat exchangers, and controls) to be removed is the property of the Owner and
shall be delivered to such places designated by the Owner. Removal from the site of all
obsolete material after the Owner's review shall be by this Contractor.
B. Refer to appropriate Division - 2 Sections for trenching and backfill required in conjunction with
plumbing piping,not work of this Section.
1.03 CODES,ORDINANCES AND INSPECTIONS
A. All materials and the installation thereof shall conform to the requirements of the Massachusetts State
Building Code, Electrical Code, Fuel Gas and Plumbing Code and local laws, rules, regulations, and
codes pertaining thereto. Where provisions of the Contract Documents conflict with any codes, rules or
regulations,the latter shall govern. Where the Contract requirements are in excess of applicable codes,
niles or regulations,the Contract provisions shall govern unless the Architect Hiles otherwise.
B. The Plumbing Contractor shall comply with the Local Code Enforcement Officials' instructions at no
additional cost to the Owner.
1.04 INSTALLATION REQUIREMENTS
A The Plumbing Contractor shall employ only competent and experienced workmen at a regular schedule
in harmony with the other tradesmen on the job. He shall also exercise care and supervision of his
employees in regard to proper and expeditious laying out of his work.
B. The Plumbing Contractor shall have a Foreman or Superintendent assigned to the Project who shall be
authorized to make decisions and receive instructions exactly as if the Plumbing Contractor himself ..
were present. The Foreman or Superintendent shall not be removed or replaced without the express
approval of the Architect after construction work begins.
C. The Plumbing Contractor shall be held responsible for any injuries or damage done to the building
premises or adjoining property or to other Subcontractors'work resulting from the execution of his part
of the work in any manner whatsoever, and in case of dispute arising as to the extent or share of
responsibility incurred by the Plumbing Contractor, it is agreed between the Owner and the Plumbing
Contractor that such liability and extent of damage shall be finally determined by the Architect whose
decision shall be final and binding on both parties to the Contract for the work in question.
D. The Plumbing Contractor shall co-ordinate to the fullest extent with all other trades in order to expedite
the progress of the work He shall fiunish all information pertaining to his materials as to sizes,
locations, and means of support, to all other trades requiring such information. The Plumbing
Contractor shall also furnish all sleeves,frames,beams, supports, inserts, etc., hereinafter specified so
that the General Contractor may build them in place. In case of failure on the part of the Plumbing
Contractor to give proper information as above,he will be required to bear the extra expense involved
due to such failure.
E. The arrangement of all piping, duct work, conduit, win; and cable indicated on the Drawings is
diagrammatic only,and indicates the minimum requirements of this work Conditions at the building
shall determine the actual arrangement of runs,bends,offsets,etc. The Plumbing Contractor shall lay
out all his work and be responsible for the accuracy thereof. Conditions at the building shall be the
determining factor for all measurements.
FEBRUARY 1999 15400-2 PLUMBING
LE9813 CHASE KITCHEN RENOVATION
SECTION 15400
PLUMBING
PART I -GENERAL
1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Include General Conditions, Supplementary General Conditions,and applicable parts of Division 1. as
part of this Section.
B. Examine all other Sections of the Specifications for requirements which affect work under this Section
whether or not such work is specifically mentioned in this Section.
C. Co-ordinate work with that of all other trades affecting, or affected by the work of this Section. Co-
operate with such trades to assure steady progress of all work under the Contract.
1.02 SCOPE OF WORK
A. Furnish all labor, materials, plant, equipment and services necessary for and reasonably incidental to
the complete installation of all plumbing work specified herein and/or indicated on the Drawings,
including,but not limited to,the following:
1. Sanitary waste and venting systems inside the building, connecting to drainage systems
within and to 10"-0" outside the building. Furnish piping, traps, flanges, seals. cleanouts,
fixtures,drains,supports,and roof terminals.
2. Water service and sanitary sewer connecting to existing tines within the building. Provide
valves,boxes,fittings and all required components for a complete installation.
3. Hot, cold and return hot water distribution systems. Furnish piping, fittings, insulation, sup-
ports,valves,water heater,and pump.
4. Plumbing fixtures and supports.
5. Arrange for inspections and perform cleaning and testing.
6. Gas piping system connecting each and every fixture,device,and item of equipment requiring
gas within the building. The system shall be installed with all incidentals necessary for a
complete operational system and shall include all piping,valves, stops,drips, meters,pressure
reducing valves, vents to atmosphere, gauges, structural supports (hangers), and such other
standard specified accessories as are necessary for a complete approved system.
7. All final connections to all items of equipment furnished by others requiring water,gas,drain,
and waste connections.
8. The disconnecting and removal of all existing piping systems, fixtures, and equipment
interfering with, or trade obsolete by, new construction. All piping,fixtures, and equipment
(i.e. copper and brass piping, fittings and valves, flush valves, mixing valves, water heaters
FEBRUARY 1999 15400-1 PLUMBING
LE9813 CHASE KITCHEN RENOVATION
Test connections may also serve as drain pipes.
I. Install pressure gauge on the riser or feed main at or near each test connection. Provide gauge with a
connection not less than 1/4" and having a soft metal seated globe valve arranged for draining pipe
between gauge and valve. Install gauges to permit removal and where they will not be subject to
freezing.
J. Threaded Joints: Conform to ANSI B1.20.1, tapered pipe threads for field cut threads. Join pipe.
fittings,and valves as follows.
K Flanged Joints: Align flanged surfaces parallel. Assemble joints by sequencing bolt tightening to make
initial contact of flanges and gaskets as flat and parallel as possible. Use suitable lubricants on bolt
threads. Tighten bolts gradually and uniformly to appropriate torque specified by the bolt
manufacturer.
L. Mechanical Grooved Joints: Cut or roll grooves on pipe ends dimensionally compatible with the
couplings.
M. End Treatment: After cutting pipe lengths,remove burrs and fins from pipe ends.
3.04 VALVE INSTALLATIONS
A. General: Install fire protection specialty valves. fittings. and specialties in accordance with the
manufacturer's written instructions,NFPA 13 and 14.and the authority having jurisdiction.
B. Gate Valves: Install supervised open gate valves so located to control all sources of water supply except low
fire department connections. Where there is more than one control valve.provide permanently marked
identification signs indicating the portion of the system controlled by each valve.
C. Alarm Check Valves: Install valves in the vertical position in proper direction of flow including the
bypass check valve and retard chamber drain line connection. Install valve trim in accordance with the
valve manufacturer's appropriate trim diagram. Test valve for proper operation.
D. Hose Cabinets: Install cabinet with 2-1/2" hose outlet valves with quick disconnect 2-1/2" to 1-1/2"
reducing coupling hose and flow restriction device at each standpipe outlet
3.05 FINAL CLOSEOUT
A. Identification: Apply signs to control, drain, test, and alarm valves identifying their purpose and
function. Provide lettering size and style selected by Architect/Engineer from NFPA's suggested styles.
B. Adjustments: Place the system in operation with controls functioning. Adjust controls and apparatus
for proper operation. Test thermometers and gauges for accuracy over the entire range. Remove and
replace items found defective.
FEBRUARY 1999 15300-20 FIRE PROTECTION
LE9813 CHASE KITCHEN RENOVATION
B. Safing Insulation
1. Fire safing insulation shall be Thermafiber as manufactured by USG Interiors, Inc. or
Architect-Engineer approved equal, 4" minimum thickness by the required full length and
width,or as indicated on the Drawings.
2. Provide incidental galvanized steel clip anchors.
C. Seal Compound: At "poke-through" openings, apply "Firecode" seal compound as manufactured by
USG Interiors,Inc.,or approved equal,over Thennafiber fire safing.
D. Preparation
1. At all fire rated assemblies,prepare all penetrations for pipes and perimeters.
E. Application
1. Install approved fire safing insulation of proper size leaving no voids. Compress and friction
fit fire safing and use attachment clips where necessary.
2. Seal completely around all openings and over the fire safing insulation with sealing
compound.
3. Install fire safing around all pipe penetrations and sleeves passing through fire walls,ceilings,
floors,etc.
3.03 INTERIOR PIPING INSTALLATION
A. Install sprinkler piping to provide for system drainage in accordance with NFPA 13.
B. Use approved fittings to make all changes in direction, branch takeoffs from mains,and reductions in
pipe sizes.
C. Install unions in pipes 2" and smaller adjacent to each valve. Unions are not required on flanged
devices or in piping installations using grooved mechanical couplings.
D. Install flanges or flange adapters on valves, apparatus, and equipment having 2-1/2 and larger
connections.
E. Hangers and Supports: Comply with the requirements of NFPA 13 and NFPA 14. Hanger and support
spacing and locations for piping joined with grooved mechanical couplings shall be in accordance with
the grooved mechanical coupling manuf tcturees written instructions for rigid systems.
F. Make connections between underground and above ground piping using an approved transition piece
strapped or fastened to prevent separation.
G. Install sleeve at pipe penetrations in basement and foundation walls. Refer to Division 15 Section,
"Basic Materials and Methods".
H. Install test connections sized and located in accordance with NFPA 13 complete with shutoff valve.
FEBRUARY 1999 15300-19 FIRE PROTECTION
LE9813 CHASE KITCHEN RENOVATION
i. Valves with Built-in Tamper Switches: Furnish and install, and each flow control *'A*
station. Milwaukee Valve Co.'s Model BBVSCS02 grooved ends. 175 psi., slow
closing"Butterball"butterfly valves,complete with built-in tamper switch for 2-1/2"
pipe size: Model BB-SCS02 for threaded pipe 2" and smaller. Valves shall be FM
approved and UL listed
j. Head guards shall be equal to Central Model 1 for upright sprinklers in areas
specified on drawings.
k. Drain and test connections shall be equal to AGF Model 1000 with sight glass. and
test orifice.
1. Water flow switches shall be equal to Potter VSF-D with two sets of SPDT contacts
and time delay.
PART 3-EXECUTION
3.01 CLEANING AND TESTING
A- Prior to connecting sprinkler risers for flushing, flush water feed mains, lead-in connections and
control portions of sprinkler piping. After fire sprinkler piping installation has been completed and
before piping is placed in senice, flush entire sprinkler system, as required to remove foreign
substances, under pressure as specified m ANSUivT'PA 13. Continue flushing until water is clear, and
check to ensure that debris has not clogged sprinklers. AW
B. After flushing system, test fire sprinkler piping hydrostatically, for period of 2 hours, at not less than '
200 psi or at 50 psi in excess of maximum static pressure when maximum static pressure is in excess of
150 psi. Check system for leakage of joints. Measure hydrostatic pressure at low point of each system
of zone being tested. Test dry-pipe hydrostatically except in freezing conditions, test with air at
pressures not less than 50 pst for period of 2 hours. Check system for leakage. Leave differential dn•-
valve clappers open during test,to prevent damage.
C. Repair or replace piping system as required to eliminate leakage in accordance with ANSUNFPA
standards for "little or no leakage", and retest as specified to demonstrate compliance. Do not use
chemicals,stop-leak compounds,mastics,or other temporary repair methods.
3.02 FIRE SAFING
A- Work Included: Provide labor,materials,and equipment necessary to complete the work including,but
not limited to the following:
1. Fire safing at all penetrations through fire barriers,including all penetrations through existing
plaster ceiling for the installation of Attic sprinklers.
2. Fire safing at all penetrations through smoke barriers.
3. Extent of fire and smoke barriers as indicated on the Architectural Drawings.
4. Fire safing at all penetrations through floors, shafts, corridor walls, stairway walls,
mechanical rooms,electrical rooms,vaults,storage rooms,kitchen,and machine rooms.
FEBRUARY 1999 15300-18 FIRE PROTECTION
LE9813 CHASE KITCHEN RENOVATION
disc and bronze seat ring,bolted cover,flanged ends.
Fairbanks: 0711
Jenkins: 729
Stockham: G-940
Wahvorth: 8883-LT
4. Install valves where required for proper operation of piping and equipment, including valves
in branch lines where necessary to isolate sections of piping. Locate valves so as to be
accessible and so that separate support can be provided when necessary.
5. Install valves with stems pointed up, in vertical position where possible, but in no case with
stems pointed-down-ward from horizontal plane unless unavoidable.
M. Fire Protection Specialties
1. Provide fire protection specialties,UL listed in accordance with the following listing. Provide
sizes and types which mate and match piping and equipment connections.
a. Upright sprinkler heads shall be Viking Corp., Model "M" standard upright
sprinkler head. rough brass. Temperature rating 1650F or as required by the
insurance underwriter. Boiler Room and heads adjacent to unit heaters to have
212°F rattns.
b. Semi-recessed pendant sprinkler heads shall be Viking Model "M" chrome plated
head with Type"F-V adjustable escutcheon, rated at 165°F unless otherwise noted:
to be installed in all occupied spaces.
C. Pendant sprinkler heads shall be Viking Model "M" polished chrome finish, with
chrome plated escutcheon;to be installed in Storage Rooms.
CL Horizontal sidewall sprinkler heads shall be Viking Microfast Model "M" extended
coverage horizontal sidewall sprinkler designed to cover 16' wide s 20' throw with
32 gpm at 16 psi. white polyester with matching "E-1" two-piece recessed escut-
cheon.
e. Tamper switches shall be equal to Potter Electrical Signal Company, Model OSYS-
B,small case.and shall be installed on all control valves for the sprinkler system.
f. Spare sprinklers shall be provided in one 12-head cabinet equal to Reliable, Model
A-I cabinet. Each cabinet shall have an assortment of heads as used on the job and
also an approved type sprinkler head wrench; mount cabinet in alarm check valve
area
g. Subject to compliance with requirements, provide fire protection specialties of the
following Grinnell Fire Protection Systems,Co.,Inc.,Viking Corporation,or equal.
h. Alarm Test Modules: Furnish and install AGF Manufacturing,Inc.'s UL listed and
FM approved "Test and Drain" for the alarm test loops, where indicated on the
drawings,complete with combination sight glasslorifice.
FEBRUARY 1999 15300-17 FIRE PROTECTION
LE9813 CHASE KITCHEN RENOVATION
diate supports for smaller diameter pipe. Do not use wire or perforated metal to support
piping,and do not support piping from other piping.
7. Support sprinkler piping independently of other piping.
8. Install hangers and supports to allow controlled movement of piping systems and to permit
freedom of movement between pipe anchors and to facilitate action of expansion joints,
expansion loops,expansion bends and similar units.
9. Pipe Slopes: Install hangers and supports to provide pipe slopes and so that maximum pipe
deflections allowed to ANSI B31 Pressure Piping Codes are not exceeded
10. Hanger Adjustments: Adjust hangers so as to distribute loads equally on attachments.
L. Valves
1. Provide factory-fabricated valves recommended by manufacturer for use in service indicated.
Provide valves of types and pressure ratings indicated;provide proper selection as determined
by Installer to comply with installation requirements. Provide end connections which proper-
ly mate with pipe, tube,and equipment connections. Where more than one type is indicated,
selection is Installer's option.
a. Unless otherwise indicated,provide valves of same size as upstream pipe size.
b. Provide hand-wheels,fastened to valve stem,for valves other than quarter-turn.
2. Gate Valves
a. Threaded End.2"and Smaller: FM, UL-listed, 175 psi, bronze body, solid wedge,
outside screw and yoke,rising stem.
Crane: 459
Fairbanks: 0222
Hammond: 18681
Jenkins: 275U
Stockham: B-133
Walworth: 904
b. Flanged End, 2-1/2" and Larger: FM, UL listed, 175 psi, iron body bronze
mounted,solid wedge,outside screw and yoke,rising stem
Crane: 467
Fairbanks: 0412
Hammond: IR1154
Jenkins: 825-A
Stockham: G-634
Walworth: 8713-F
3. Check Valves
a. 2-1/2"and Larger. FM, 175 psi,iron body bronze mounted,renewable composition
FEBRUARY 1999 15300-16 FIRE PROTECTION
LE9813 CHASE KITCHEN RENOVATION
2. Provide factory-fabricated hanger-rod attachments complying with MSS SP-58, of one of the
following MSS types listed selected by Installer to suit horizontal piping hangers and
building attachments, in accordance with MSS SP-69 and manufacturer's published product
information. Use only one type by one manufacturer for each piping service. Select size of
hanger-rod attachments to suit hanger rods.
a. Steel Turnbuckles: MSS Type 13.
b. Swivel Turnbuckles: MSS Type 15.
C. Malleable Iron Sockets: MSS Trpe 16.
d. Steel Weldless Eye Nuts: MSS Type 17.
3. Provide factory-fabricated building attachments complying with MSS SP-58, of one of the
following types listed, selected by Installer to suit building substrate conditions, in accordance
with MSS SP-69 and manufacturer's published product information. Select size of building
attachments to suit hanger rods.
a. Top Beam C-Clamps: MSS Tree 19.
b. Side Beam or Channel Clamps: MSS Type 20.
C. C-Clamps: MSS Type 23.
d. Side Beam Clamps: MSS Type 27.
e. Malleable Beam Clamps: MSS Type 30.
4. Subject to compliance with requirements, provide hangers and supports of one of the
following:
B-Line Systems Inc.
Carpenter and Patterson,Inc.
Comer&Lada Co.,Inc.
Elcen Metal Products Co.
Fee&Mason Mfg. Co.
TIT Grinnell Corp.
5. Install building attachments at required locations on structural steel for proper piping support.
Space attachments within maximum piping span length indicated on MSS SP-69. Install
additional building attachments where support is required for additional concentrated loads,
including valves, flanges, guides, strainers, expansion joints, and at changes in direction of
piping-
6. Install hangers, supports, clamps and attachments to support piping properly from building
structure, comply with MSS SP-69. Arrange for grouping of parallel nuns of horizontal
piping to be supported together on trapeze type hangers where possible. Install supports with
maximum spacings complying with MSS SP-69. Where piping of various sizes is to be
supported together by trapeze hangers,space hangers for smallest pipe size or install interme-
FEBRUARY 1999 15300-15 FIRE PROTECTION
LE9813 CHASE KITCHEN RENOVATION
grade•or in exterior walls,caulked between sleeve and pipe. *'
C. Install pipe sleeves of types indicated where piping passes through walls, floors,
ceilings and roofs. Do not install sleeves through structural members of work,
except as detailed on drawings, or as reviewed by Architect Install sleeves so that
piping will have fret movement in sleeve, including allowance for thermal expan-
sion; but not less than 2 pipe sizes larger than piping nun. Install length of sleeve
equal to thickness of surface; except floor sleeves. Extend floor sleeves 1/4" above
level floor finish, and 3/4" above floor finish sloped to drain. Provide temporary
support of sleeves during placement of concrete and other work around sleeves. and
provide temporary closure to prevent concrete and other materials from entering
sleeves.
d. Sleeve Seals: Install in accordance with the following:
Fill and pack annular space between sleeve and pipe with oakum caulk
with lead,on both sides.
2. Provide pipe escutcheons as specified herein with inside diameter closely fitting pipe outside
diameter, or outside of pipe insulation where pipe is insWated Select.outside diameter of
escutcheon to completely cover pipe sleeve extension, if any. Furnish pipe escutcheons with
nickel or chrome finish for occupied areas;prime paint finish for unoccupied areas.
a_ Pipe Escutcheons for all areas: Provide chrome plated sheet steel escutcheons, solid
or split hinged
b. Subject to compliance with
requirements, provide pipe escutcheons of one of the
following:
Chicago Specialty Mfg. Co.
Producers Specialty&Mfg. Co.
Sanitary-Dash Mfg. Co.
C. Install pipe escutcheons on each pipe penetration through floors, walls, partitions,
and ceilings where penetration is exposed to view, and on exterior of building.
Secure escutcheon to pipe so escutcheon covers penetration hole, and is flush with
adjoining surface.
K Supports,Anchors,and Seals
1. Provide factory-fabricated piping hangers and supports complying with MSS SP-58,of one of
the following MSS types listed,selected by Installer to suit piping systems,in accordance with
MSS SP-69 and manufacturer's published product information. Use only one type by one
manufacturer for each piping service. Select size of hangers and supports to exactly fit pipe
size.
a. Adjustable Steel Clevis Hangers: MSS Type 1,for piping larger than 4".
b. Adjustable Steel Band Hangers: MSS Type 7,for piping 4"and less.
C. Two-Bolt Riser Clamps: MSS Type 8.
FEBRUARY 1999 15300-14 FIRE PROTECTION
LE9813 CHASE KITCHEN RENOVATION
6. Type "L"seamless drawn hard copper tubing with solder joint pressure fittings, where noted
on the drawings.
C. Install pipes and pipe fittings in accordance with recognized industry practices which will achieve
permanently leakproof piping systems, capable of performing each indicated service without piping
failure. Install each run with minimum joints and couplings,but with adequate and accessible unions
for disassembly and maintenance/replacement of valves and equipment Reduce sizes (where indicat-
ed) by use of reducing fittings. Align piping accurately at connections, within 1116" misalienment
tolerance. Comply with ANSI B31 Code for Pressure Piping.
D. Locate piping nuns, except as otherwise indicated vertically and horizontally (pitched to drain) and
avoid diagonal runs wherever possible. Orient horizontal runs parallel with walls and column lines.
Locate nuns as shown 6r described by diagrams,details and notations or, if not otherwise indicated, nm
piping in shortest route which does not obstruct usable space or block access for servicing building and
its equipment
Hold piping close to walls, overhead constriction, columns and other structural and permanent-
enclosure elements of building. Wherever possible in finished and occupied spaces, conceal piping
from view, by locating in column enclosures, in hollow wall construction or above suspended ceilings:
do not encase horizontal nrrns in solid partitions,except as indicated-
E. Electrical Equipment Spaces: Do not run piping through transformer vaults. Elevator Machine Room,
and other electrical or electronic equipment spaces and enclosures unless unavoidable. Install drip pan
under piping that must be run through electrical spaces. Any piping intended to be tun through
'* electrical spaces shall be reviewed by the Architect prior to irnstallation.
F. Thread pipe in accordance with ANSI B2.I; cut threads full and clean using sharp dies. Ream
threaded ends to remove burrs and restore full inside diameter. Apply pipe joint compounder pipe joint
tape (Teflon) where recommended by pipe/fitting manufacturer, on male threads at each joint and
tighten joint to leave not more than 3 threads exposed-
G. Flanged Joints: Match flanges within piping system. and at connections with valves and equipment.
Clean flange faces and install gaskets. Tighten bolts to provide uniform compression of gaskets.
K Grooved Pipe Joints: Comply with fitting manufacturers instructions for making grooves in pipe ends.
Remove burrs and ream pipe ends. Assemble joints in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.
I. Clean exterior surfaces of installed piping systems of superfluous materials,and prepare for application
of specified coatings(if any).
J. Provide temporary equipment for testing,including pump and gages. Test each natural section of each
piping system independently, but do not use piping system valves to isolate sections where test pres-
sures exceed valve pressure rating. Fill each section with water and pressurize for indicated pressure
and time.
1. Pipe Sleeves: Provide pipe sleeves of one of the following:
a. Steel Pipe: Fabricate from schedule 40 galvanized steel pipe;remove burrs.
b. Sleeve Seals: Provide sleeve seals for sleeves located in foundation walls below
FEBRUARY 1999 15300-13 FIRE PROTECTION
LE9813 CHASE KITCHEN RENOVATION
(6) Branch Stub-Ins: Upper housing with full locating collar for rigid
positioning engaging machine-cut hole in pipe, encasing elastomeric
gasket conforming to pipe outside diameter around hole, and lower
housing with positioning lugs, secured together during assembly with nuts
and bolts.
(7) Fittings: Grooved or shouldered end design to accept grooved mechanical
couplings.
Malleable Iron: ASTM A 47.
Ductile Iron: ASTM A 536.
(8) Flanges: Conform to Class 125 cast iron and Class 150 steel bolt hole
alignment.
Malleable Iron: ASTM 47.
Ductile Iron: ASTM A 536.
(9) Grooves: Conform to the following:
Standard Steel: Square cut
Lightweight Steel: Roll grooved.
(10) Manufacturer. Subject to compliance with requirements, provide grooved
piping products of the following:
ITT Grinnell Corp.
Victaulic Co.
B. Piping above ground and within the building shall conform to all requirements of NFPA 13 and shall
be as follows:
1. Exposed sprinkler piping, subject to vandalism (stair halls and similar areas), shall be
Schedule 40 black steel pipe,welded,suitable for 175 psi.working water pressure.
2. All concealed sprinkler piping (above acoustical ceiling tiles and plaster ceilings; in pipe
chases)and exposed sprinkler piping in Mechanical Equipment Rooms shall be Schedule 10
seamless light wall, steel pipe with rolled grooved ends, for piping 2" and larger, complete
with suitable couplings and fittings for rolled grooved end steel pipe.
3. All concealed piping and all exposed sprinkler piping in Mechanical Equipment Rooms
1-1/2"and smaller,shall be at the option of the Fire Protection Subcontractor,either Schedule
40 black steel pipe with screwed fittings or standard weight roll grooved pipe with grooved
fittings.
4. All exposed sprinkler piping, 1-1/2"and smaller, shall be Schedule 40 black steel pipe with
screwed fittings.
5. Schedule 40 seamless red brass pipe with brass screwed fittings suitable for 175 psi. working
water pressure.
FEBRUARY 1999 15300-12 FIRE PROTECTION
LE9813 CHASE KITCHEN RENOVATION
f. Furnish complete chart and flow diagram of entire system listing the valve number,
fluid controlled and zone reference location for all valves corresponding to the tag
numbers. The chart shall be Beamed under glass and hung in the Mechanical Equip-
ment Room where directed. Furnish two (2) extra copies of the chart to the
Architect
g: Furnish and install a laminated red phenolic plate with engraved white lettering for
each zone control flow switch and isolation valve. Nameplates shall be located
adjacent to all exposed and concealed valves, approximately 12" below finished
ceiling.
2.02 PIPE.TUBE,AND FITTINGS
A. Interior Piping
1. Black Steel Pipe: ASTM A 53, A 106 or A 120: except comply with ASTM A 53 or A 106
where close coiling or bending is required
a. Pipe Weight: Schedule 40.
b. Fittings: Class 125,cast-iron threaded,ANSI B 16.4,or flanged,ANSI B 16.1.
C. Fittings: Mechanical grooved pipe couplings and fittings; cut-groove type for piping
2-1/2"and larger only.
(1) Electric-Resistance-Welded Steel Pipe: ASTM A 135.
(2) Pipe Weight: Schedule 10 for 5"and smaller,0.134"wall thickness for 6".
(3) Fittings: Mechanical grooved pipe couplings and fittings; roll-groove or
mechanical locking type.
d. Grooved Piping Products(for use on pipes 2-1/2"and larger)
(1) Coupling Housings: Malleable iron conforming to ASTM A 47.
(2) Coupling Housing: Ductile iron conforming to ASTM A 536.
(3) Coupling Housings Description: Grooved mechanical type,which engages
grooved or shouldered pipe ends, encasing an elastomeric gasket which
bridges pipe ends to crate seal. Cast in two or more parts,secure together
during assembly with nuts and bolts. Permit degree of contraction and
expansion as specified in manufacturer's latest published literature.
(4) Gaskets: Mechanical grooved coupling design,pressure responsive so that
internal pressure serves to increase seal's tightness, constructed of elan-
tomers having properties as designated by ASTM D 2000.
(5) Bolts and Nuts: Heat-treated carbon steel, ASTM A 183,minimum tensile
110,000 psi.
FEBRUARY 1999 15300-11 FIRE PROTECTION
LE9813 CHASE KITCHEN RENOVATION
of the following:
Allen Systems.Inc.
Brady(W.K)Co., ;Signmark Div.
Industrial Safety Supply Co.,Inc.
Seton Name Plate Corp.
2. Provide manufacturer's standard pre-printed semi-rigid, snap-on, color-coded pipe markers.
complying with ANSI A13.1.
a. For external diameters less than 6", provide full-band pipe markers, extending 360°
around pipe at each location,fastened as follows:
Snap-on application of pre-tensioned, semi-rigid plastic pipe marker.
b. Lettering: Manufacturer's standard pre-printed nomenclature which best describes
piping system in each instance,as selected by Architect.
C. Locate pipe markers as follows:
(1) Near each valve and control device.
(2) Spaced intermediately at maximum spacing of 50' along each piping run.
except reduce spacing to 25'in congested areas of piping and equipment.
(3) Branch piping need not be marked
3. Provide manufacturers standard solid brass valve tags with printed enamel lettering, with
piping system abbreviation in approximately 3/16" high letters and sequenced valve numbers
approximately 3/8" high and with 5/32" hole for fastener. Provide tags on all valves and
control devices.
a Provide 1-1/8"sq.brass tags with black lettering.
b. Provide manufacturer's standard solid brass chain(wire link or beaded type),or solid
brass S-hooks of the sizes required for proper attachment of tags to valves, and
manufactured specifically for that purpose.
C. Submit valve schedule for piping system, typewritten and reproduced on 8-1/2" x
I V bond paper. Tabulate valve number, piping system, system abbreviation (as
shown on tag),location of valve(room or space),and variations for identification(if
any). Mark valves which are intended for emergency shun-off and similar special
uses, by special "flags", in margin of schedule. In addition to mounted copies.
finnish extra copies for Maintenance Manuals as specified in Division 1.
d. For each page of valve schedule,provide glazed display frame, with screws for re-
movable mounting on masonry walls. Provide frames of finished hardwood or
extruded aluminum,with SSB-grade sheet glass.
e. Mount valve schedule frames and schedules in rooms where indicated or, if not
otherwise indicated,where directed by Architect.
FEBRUARY 1999 15300-10 FIRE PROTECTION
LE9813 CHASE KITCHEN RENOVATION
2. This Alternate will not impact this trade.
C. Alternate Bid Item No. 3
1. Alternate Bid Item No. 3 shall be the addition in price above the Base Bid for furnishing all
labor. materials. and other costs in connection with the neiv overhead electrical distribution
system from the Kitchen Hood to the Island sinks. See Drawings for Scope.
2. This Alternate will not impact this trade.
1.20 CUTTING AND PATCHING
A. Cutting and/or drilling of all openings and holes 4" in diameter or smaller, required for the installation
of fire protection in the building, shall be performed by the Fire Protection Contractor. All work and
materials shall be installed in such a manner and at such time to keep cutting and patching to a
minimum. Cutting and/or drilling of structural supports (i.e. beams or joists) is not allowed without
written approval by the Architect Location for openings, etc. shall be checked by the Fire Protection
Contractor. and error due to failure to co-ordinate work with other divisions shall be the responsibility
of the FIRE PROTECTION Contractor failing to co-ordinate, who shall make the corrections at his
own expense.
B. All holes larger than 4"in diameter shall be provided by the General Contractor.
C. Work shall include furnishing and locating sleeves or inserts required before the new walls are built, or
be responsible for the cost of cutting and patching required for pipes where sleeves were not installed or
where incorrectly located. The Fire Protection Contractor shall do all drilling required for the
installation of hangers.
D. Patching of all holes, after installation of piping or equipment. shall be performed by the General
Contractor or appropriate tradesmen.
E. All pipe cutting or threading shall be done in a location approved by the Owner.
F. No pipe cutting or threading shall be done in areas where completed concrete floor slab is to remain in
finishes or be painted later. Should this area be necessary, the Fire Protection Contractor shall cover
the entire working area with canvas tarpaulins in an approved manner.
PART 2-MATERIALS
2.01 FIRE PROTECTION PIPING MATERIALS AND PRODUCTS
A Provide piping materials and factory-fabricated piping products of sizes, types, pressure ratings,
temperature ratings, and capacities as indicated Where not indicated, provide proper selection as
determined by Installer to comply with installation requirements. Provide sizes and types thatching
piping and equipment connections; provide fittings of materials which match pipe materials used in
fire protection piping systems. Where more than one type of material or product is indicated, selection
is Installer's option.
B. Basic Identification
1. Subject to compliance with requirements, provide mechanical identification materials of one
FEBRUARY 1999 15300-9 FIRE PROTECTION
LE9813 CHASE KITCHEN RENOVATION -
5. In areas where, due to construction conditions, more than one trade is required to use
common openings in chases,shafts and sleeves for the passage of conduits, raceways, piping,
ductwork and other materials, this Subcontractor must plan and locate the positions of
equipment to be furnished under this Section so that all items including piping and/or
equipment of other trades may be accommodated within the space available. Location and
positioning shall be done prior to installation of same and to the satisfaction of the Architect
6. This Subcontractor, before installing his work, shall see that it does not interfere with the
clearances required for finished columns, pilasters, partitions or walls, as shown on the
Contract Architectural or Structural Drawings showing foundations, floor plans, roof plans.
and details.
7. Piping work that is installed under this Contract which interferes with the architectural design
or building structure,shall be changed as directed by the Architect, and all costs incidental to
such changes shall be paid by this Subcontractor at no additional cost to the Owner.
1.18 CLEANING
A. The Contractor shall thoroughly clean and flush all piping, ducts, and equipment of all foreign
substances inside and out before being placed in operation. Thoroughly flush all piping of any oils,
burls,solder,and flux. Replace strainers and filters at completion of cleaning.
B. If any part of a system should be stopped or damaged by any foreign matter after being placed in
operation , the system shall be disconnected, cleaned, and reconnected at no additional cost to the
Owner.
C. During the course of constriction, all ducts and pipes shall be capped to insure adequate protection
against the entrance of foreign matter.
D. Keep the job site free from the accumulation of waste material and rubbish. Upon completion of all
work under the Contract, the Contractor shall remove from the premises all rubbish,debris,and excess
materials left over from his work. Any oil or grease stains on floor areas caused by the Contractor shall
be removed and floor areas left clean.
1.19 ALTERNATES
A. Alternate Bid Item No. 1
1. Price above the Base Bid for fiunishing all labor,materials,and other costs in connection with
firrnishing and installing new lighting in the Dining Rooms and all associated wiring,
switches,etc. See Drawings for Scope.
2. This Alternate will not impact work of this trade.
B. Alternate Bid Item No. 2
1. Alternate Bid Item No. 2 shall be the addition in price above the Base Bid for furnishing all
labor, materials, and other costs in connection with the Porch/Portical extension and all
relative receptacles,wiring,etc. See Drawings for Scope.
FEBRUARY 1999 15300-8 FIRE PROTECTION
LE9813 CHASE KITCHEN RENOVATION
8. Copies of all service contracts.
9. Performance curves for pumps,etc.
10. List of all names, addresses, and phone numbers of all Subcontractors as well as the local
representative for each item of equipment.
1.16 GUARANTEE
A. The Fire Protection Subcontractor shall guarantee the satisfactory operation of his work in all parts for
a period of one(1)year after the date of final acceptance,and shall agree to promptly repair or replace
any items of his work which are found to be defective during this period
B. The Fire Protection Subcontractor shall pay for repair of damage to the building caused by defects in
his work and for repair to plaster, wood, and other materials or equipment caused by replacement or
repairs to the entire satisfaction of the Architect.
C. Any part of the work installed under this Contract requiring excessive maintenance shall be considered
as being defective.
1.17 RECORD DRAWINGS
A. Refer to Division 1 for Record Drawings.
B. Record Drawings shall reflect all changes from the Contract Drawings whether by change order or by
field conditions. Principal dimensions shall be indicated of concealed work, fire protection lines,
valves, and zone flow switches. All changes must be clearly marked with a bubble drawn around the
area of work effected by the change.
C. Co-ordination of Trades
1. The Fire Protection Subcontractor shall give full co-operation to the Subcontractors of other
trades, and shall furnish any information necessary to permit the work of all trades to be in-
stalled satisfactorily and with least possible interference or delay.
2. In areas where conflicts may occur, if so directed by the Architect, this Subcontractor shall
prepare composite sketches at a suitable scale,not less than 1/4"= 1'-0",clearly showing how
his work is to be installed in relation to the work of other trades.
3. Piping and other equipment shall not be installed in congested and possible problem areas by
this Subcontractor without fast coordinating the installation of same with other trades and the
Architect This Subcontractor, at his own expense, shall relocate all uncoordinated piping
and other equipment installed should they interfere with the proper installation and mounting
of electrical equipment, ductwork, piping, hung ceilings, and other structural finishes
installed by other trades.
4. This Subcontractor shall co-ordinate the elevations of all piping and equipment in hung ceil-
ings for the installation of recessed lighting fixtures, duct boxes, etc. Conflicts shall be
brought to the attention of the Architect for a decision before the piping and/or equipment of
other trades is installed-
FEBRUARY 1999 15300-7 FIRE PROTECTION
LE9813 CHASE KITCHEN RENOVATION
1.13 ENVIRONMENTAL CONDITIONS ,
A. All necessary tools machinery, scaffolding, and transportation for completion of his Contract shall be
provided by the Fire Protection Subcontractor.
B. The Fire Protection Subcontractor shall provide his own portable extension lines and obtain 120 volt.
60 cycle, single phase electric energy from the General Contractor to drive his machines and light his
work He shall provide his own light bulbs,plugs,sockets,etc.
C. All broken or waste material, rags, packing, etc., resulting from his worm shall be removed by the
individual Subcontractor.
1.14 WORK CONCEALED
A. All piping shall be installed concealed in all areas except storage rooms, closets, and mechanical or
electrical equipment rooms, except that in rooms without ceilings, horizontal runs only may be
exposed.
B. Piping containing water shall not be installed concealed in walls having an exterior exposure above
grade.
1.15 OPERATING AND MAINTENANCE MANUALS
A. After all final tests and adjustments have been completed, fully instruct the proper Owner's re-
presentative in all details of operation of equipment installed Supply qualified personnel to operate
equipment for sufficient length of time to assure that Owner's representative is properly qualified to
take over operation and maintenance procedures.
B. Furnish the Architect, for his approval, three (3) copies of an Operation and Maintenance Manual.
Inscribe the following identification on the cover: the words, "Operation and Maintenance Manual",
the name and location of the equipment or the building, the name of the Subcontractor, and the
Contract number. The manual shall have a Table of Contents with tab sheets placed before each
section. The instructions shall be legible and easily read,with large sheets of drawings folded in. The
manuals shall be bound in hard binders or an approved equivalent.
C. The Manual shall include the following information:
1. Description of systems.
2. Description of start-up,operation,and shutdown
3. Schedule of adjustment,care,and routine maintenance for each item of equipment.
4. Lubrication chart
5. Wiring and control diagrams with data to explain detailed operation and control of each item
of equipment.
6. Valve chart.
7. List of recommended spare parts.
FEBRUARY 1999 15300-6 FIRE PROTECTION Aawk
LE9813 CHASE KITCHEN RENOVATION
Contract Drawings and Specifications. The responsibility for errors in shop drawings shall
remain with the individual Subcontractor.
4. In the event that materials are being delivered to or installed on the job for which shop
drawings or samples have not been approved and/or which are not in accordance with the
Specifications, the Fire Protection Subcontractor will be required to remove such materials
and substitute approved materials at his own expense and as directed by the Architect.
5. Submit certificate upon completion of fire protection piping work which indicates that work
has been tested in accordance with ANSI/NFPA 13, and also that system is operational,
complete,and has no defects.
1.09 PERMITS,FEES AND INSPECTIONS
A_ The Fire Protection Subcontractor shall secure all permits and pay all fees required for his work. He
shall be required to secure all other permits and pay all other fees and charges incidental to the proper
carving out of the Contract He is to assume all responsibility regarding the observance of the rules
and regulations so far as they relate to his pan of the work.
B. The Fire Protection Subcontractor shall arrange and pay for all required inspections of his work
1.10 TEMPORARY HOOK-UPS
A. The General Contractor will provide any temporary hook-ups required for the use of water or sanitary_
for constriction purposes and testing out apparatus as specified in Division 1.
1.11 PLANS AND SPECIFICATIONS
A. The Fire Protection Subcontractor shall refer to the Architectural Drawings of interior details, plans,
elevations, and structural layout in preparing his estimate. These documents are intended to
supplement the Mechanical and Electrical Plans and Specifications and any applicable work indicated
or implied thereon is to be considered a part of the Contract requirements.
B. The Specifications and Plans are complementary and anything called for,or reasonably implied, in the
Plans and not in the Specifications,or vice versa shall be considered as called for or reasonably implied
in both
C. The Fire Protection Subcontractor shall not scale the drawings.
D. Because of the small scale of the drawings,it is not possible to indicate all offsets,fittings and accesso-
nes that may be required The Fire Protection Subcontractor shall carefully investigate the structural
and finish conditions affecting all his work and shall arrange such work accordingly, furnishing such
fittings, traps, offsets,valves, and accessories as may be required to meet such conditions, at no addi-
tional cost
1.12 PRODUCT HANDLING
A. The Fire Protection Subcontractor shall provide for the delivery of all his materials and fixtures to the
building site when required so as to carry on his work efficiently and to avoid delaying his work and
that of other trades.
FEBRUARY 1999 15300-5 FIRE PROTECTION
LE9813 CHASE KITCHEN RENOVATION
The Fire Protection Subcontractor shall lay out all his work and be responsible for the accuracy thereof.
Conditions at the building shall be the determining factor for all measurements. In no case shall
piping be installed laterally in thickness of slab or deck_
F. All work shall be laid out and installed so as to require the least amount of cutting and patching.
Drilling of all holes required for the installation of pipes,conduit,and cable nuns shall be performed by
the Subcontractor installing such items. All piping shall be installed concealed in finished spaces.
G. The Fire Protection Subcontractor shall be responsible for the proper protection of his work and
materials from injury or loss at the hands of others and shall make good such loss or injury at his own
expense. All pipes left open during the progress of the work shall be capped or plugged at all times.
All instruments and operating apparatus shall be protected by suitable means.
H. The Fire Protection Subcontractor shall be responsible for all equipment and materials installed under
this Section until the final acceptance of the project by the Owner.
I. The Fire Protection Subcontractor shall check all of the Architectural Plans and Specifications and
shall field verify all existing conditions before ordering any matenals and the installation of work Any
discrepancies shall be called to the attention of the Architect before proceeding with the work.
1.07 PRODUCTS
A. With the exception of items specifically noted otherwise, all materials used shall be U.S. made, new,
full weight, and first class in every respect, without defects, and designed to function properly in that
portion of the work for which they are intended, and with the same brand of manufacturers for each
class of material or equipment. Electrical materials and equipment of types for which there are
Underwriters Laboratories standard requirements,listings,or labels shall conform to their requirements
and be so labeled
1.08 SUBMT17ALS
A. Before ordering materials shipped to the job, the Fire Protection Subcontractor shall submit to the
Architect eight(8)sets of catalogue cuts or manufacturers'data sheets, giving all details, dimensions,
capacities,etc.of all materials to be fiunished One adition set shall be forwarded directly to the college
for review.
B. Submit hydraulic calculations and scaled layout drawings for fire protection pipe and fittings including,
but not necessarily limited to, pipe and tube sizes, locations, elevations and slopes of horizontal rims,
wall and floor penetrations, and connections. Show interface and spatial relationship between piping
and proximate equipment
1. Shop Drawings are subject to review and will require approval by Owner's insurer's rating
organization(IRI)and the Northampton Fire Department prior to submitting to the Architect
for approval.
2. The Fire Protection Subcontractor shall check the shop drawings thoroughly for compliance
with the Plans and Specifications before submitting them to the Architect for review, making
any and all changes which may be required
3. The review of shop drawings by the Architect shall not relieve the Fire Protection
Subcontractor from any obligation to perform the work strictly in accordance with the
Av%.
FEBRUARY 1999 15300-4 FIRE PROTECTTON
LE9813 CHASE KITCHEN RENOVATION
considered for items where the words,"or equal"appear in the product specification.
I. The Fire Protection Subcontractor shall agree to accept as final the results of tests secured by a qualified
testing laboratory engaged by the Owner. Tests will be conducted in accordance with the General
Requirements.
1.05 CODES,ORDINANCES AND INSPECTIONS
A. All materials and the installation thereof shall conform to the requirements of the Massachusetts State
Building Code, Electrical Code. Fuel Gas and Plumbing Code and local laws. rules, regulations, and
codes pertaining thereto. Where provisions of the Contract Documents conflict with arty codes. rules or
regulations,the latter shall govern.
Where the Contract requirements are in excess of applicable codes, Hiles or regulations, the Contract
provisions shall govern unless the Architect rules otherwise.
B. The Fire Protection Subcontractor shall comply with the Local Code Enforcement Officials, in-
structions at no additional cost to the Owner. Review proposed system with said officials prior to
commencing work
1.06 INSTALLATION REQUIREMENTS
A The Fire Protection Subcontractor shall employ only competent and experienced workmen at a regular
schedule in harmony with the other tradesmen on the job. He shall also exercise care and supervision
of his employees in regard to proper and expeditious laying out of his work
B. The Fire Protection Subcontractor shall have a Foreman or Superintendent assigned to the Project ii ho
shall be authorized to make decisions and receive instructions exactly as if the Fire Protection
Subcontractor himself were present. The Foreman or Superintendent shall not be removed or replaced
without the express approval of the Architect after construction work begins.
C. The Fire Protection Subcontractor shall be held responsible for any injuries or damage done to the
building premises or adjoining property or to other Subcontractors' work-resulting from the execution
of his part of the work in any manner whatsoever, and in case of dispute arising as to the extent or
share of responsibility incurred by the Fire Protection Subcontractor, it is agreed between the Owner
and the Fire Protection Subcontractor that such liability and extent of damage shall be finally
determined by the Architect whose decision shall be final and binding on both parties to the Contract
for the work in question.
D. The Fire Protection Subcontractor shall co-operate to the fullest extent with all other trades in order to
expedite the progress of the work He shall furnish all information pertaining to his materials as to
sizes, locations, and means of support, to all other trades requiring such information. The Fire
Protection Subcontractor shall also fuunish all sleeves,frames,beams,supports, inserts,etc.,hereinafter
specified so that the General Contractor may build them in place. In case of failure on the part of the
Fire Protection Subcontractor to give proper information as above,he will be required to bear the extra
expense involved due to such failure.
E. The arrangement of all piping, ductwork, conduit, wire and cable indicated on the drawings is dia-
grammatic only, and indicates the minimum requirements of this work Conditions at the building
shall determine the actual arrangement of runs,bends,offsets,etc.
FEBRUARY 1.999 15300-3 FIRE PROTECTION
LE9813 CHASE KITCHEN RENOVATION _
1.03 SYSTEM DESIGN ,AAW
A. The Fire Protection Subcontractor shall perform a water flow test, and with this information, shall
calculate pipe sizes and sprinkler head configuration and orifice sizes in accordance with NFPA 13.
B. Sprinkler head and pipe run locations,as shown on the drawings,are to be interpreted as diagrammatic
only. The Fire Protection Subcontractor shall produce a design based on actual available water
pressure and submit it to the Architect for approval before beginning fabrication and installation.
C. Design Criteria: Pipe sizing and sprinkler head layout shown on the drawings is provided to indicate a
suggested pipe routing, zoning, and sprinkler head location, and shall not be used for estimating
purposes. Location of piping and heads shall be co-ordinated with all other trades. Actual pipe sizing,
types of heads, and layout shall be based on a hydraulically designed system in accordance with the
requirements of NFPA 13, the Northampton Fire Department, and IRI Insurance Underwriter.
Location of sprinkler heads, in relation to the ceilings and walls and spacing of the heads, shall not
exceed that permitted by NFPA 13 of the light hazard occupancy. The Fire Protection Subcontractor
shall prepare working drawings and hydraulic calculations per NFPA 13 and shall obtain Northampton
Fire Department and IRI Inwrance Underwriter approval prior to start of work. The Fire Protection
Subcontractor shall perform water flow tests or obtain water flow data in writing from local authority.
Co-ordinate work of this Section with all trades to avoid interference with ductwork, FIRE
PROTECTION and plumbing, piping, electrical work, structure, etc. Final sprinkler head locations
shall be subject to Architect's approval.
The number of heads and pipe sizes may be increased or reduced due to hydraulic calculations or the
installation of revised heads, provided the revised heads are UL listed and F.M. approved and meet
NFPA 13,Northampton Fire Department,and Insurance Underwriter's criteria Additionally. all heads
shall be in accordance with NFPA 13 recommendations. Aftk
1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Manufacturers: Firms regularly engaged in manufacture of fire protection piping systems products, of
types, materials,and sizes required, whose products have been in satisfactory use in similar service for
not less than five(5)years.
B. NFPA Code: Comply with ANSYNFPA 13,"Installation of Sprinkler System".
C. FM Compliance: Comply with Factory Mutual"Approval Guide".
D. FM Labels: Provide sprinkler products bearing FM approval labels.
E. UL Labels: Provide fire sprinkler piping products which have been approved and labeled by Under-
writers Laboratories.
F. Local Fire Department/Marshall Regulations: Comply with governing regulations pertaining to fire
sprinkler piping.Review proposed system with said officials prior to commencing work
G. Final installation of system is subject to approval by Owner's insurer's rating organization and local
Fire Department
H. Equality of materials or articles other than those named or described in this Section will be determined
in accordance with the provisions of the General Requirements, except that substitutions will only be
FEBRUARY 1999 15300-2 FIRE PROTECTION
LE9813 CHASE KITCHEN RENOVATION
SECTION 15300
FIRE PROTECTION
PART 1-GENERAL
1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A Include General Conditions, Supplementary General Conditions,applicable parts of Division 1, and
conditions of the Contract as part of this Section.
B. Examine all other Sections of the Specifications for requirements which affect work under this Section
whether or not such work is specifically mentioned in this Section.
C. Co-ordinate work with that of all other trades affecting, or affected by the work of this Section. Co-
operate with such trades to assure steady progress of all work under the Contract
1.02 SCOPE OF WORK
A. Furnish all labor,materials,appurtenances and services necessary for,and reasonably incidental to,the
complete installation of all fire protection work specified herein and/or indicated on the drawings,
including,but not limited to,the following:
1. Fire protection service piping from the existing service line located in the existing Dormitory
Facility.
2. Complete dry pipe automatic sprinkler system System shall be installed in all spaces.unless
otherwise noted, including renovation to existing Dormitory sprinkler system.
3. Sprinkler heads shall be centered in ceiling tiles. Main,cross main, and branch piping shall
be installed above ceiling,and all pendant heads shall be semi-recessed type.
4. The Fire Protection Subcontractor shall fiunish all labor and materials required for his own
hoisting,rigging,and scaffolding during the entire course of the project.
5. Disconnect and remove all existing sprinkler heads and piping made obsolete by or
interfering with new construction.
6. Submit Plans and Calculation to the college insurance provider (IRI Incorporated)'for
approval prior to commencing work
B. Related wodc,to be performed under other sections of his Specification shall include the following:
1. Wiring of flow switches,tamper switches, electric bell,etc.back to the fire alarm panel shall
be by the Electrical Subcontractor,coordinated and as directed by the Fire Protection Subcon-
U=or.
2. Cutting and patching.
FEBRUARY 1999 15300-1 FIRE PROTECTION
LE9813 CHASE KITCHEN RENOVATION
3.01 INSTALLATION
A. Before installation of toilet and bath accessories, check surfaces, openings
and recesses to receive units to ensure they are of proper size and location,
and are plumb and square. Check substrate materials, blockings, and built-
in anchor plates for structural adequacy to support the accessories.
B. Mount accessories securely on wall surfaces and into wall openings and
recesses, tightly anchored into place, and with trim fitted tightly and
neatly against the wall surface. Mount surface counted accessories plumb,
level, and true, and securely anchored into place.
C. After installation, adjust all accessories for proper operation, and clean and
polish all exposed surfaces. Protect accessories from damage from all
sources whatever.
END OF SECTION
FEBRUARY 1999 10800-3 TOILET AND BATH ACCESSORIES
LE9813 CHASE KITCHEN RENOVATION
2.01 TOILET AND BATH ACCESSORIES A%K
A. Furnish and install toilet and bath accessories indicated on the Drawings or
as scheduled below, except toilet and bath accessories specified to be
provided under other Sections.
B. Products manufactured by Bobrick have been specified herein to establish
type and quality and is not necessarily complete nor limited to specified
manufacturers. Equivalent products of other manufacturers will be
acceptable subject to approval of the Owner and Architect. Carefully review
the Drawings for other types of toilet and bath accessories and to establish
quantities, location, and mounting heights of the various accessories
required. Locations and mounting heights not indicated shall be as directed
by the Architect.
2.02 TOILET ACCESSORIES SCHEDULE
A. Bathroom
1. Mirror B294
2. Toilet Paper Dispenser B-288, B-386
3. Towel Dispenser B-3609P
4. Soap Dispenser B-306
AOW
5. San. Napkin Dispenser Bobrick
6. San. Napkin Disposer B-354
7. Coat Hook B670
8. Tilt Mirror B294 (16x24)
9. Grab bars B6806
2.03 FASTENINGS, PACKING, AND MARKING
A. Fastening devices shall be theft-proof, of appropriate type and of adequate
capacity for each purpose intended. Exposed head of fasteners shall be
stainless steel with finish to match surrounding surfaces. Accessories shall
have screws, bolts, and other fastenings necessary •for proper . installation,
wrapped in same package as the accessory item for which it is intended.
B. Each package shall be clearly labeled indicating the portion of the work
for which it is intended.
PART 3 EXECUnON
FEBRUARY 1999 10800-2 TOILET AND BATH ACCESSORIES
LE9813 CHASE KITCHEN RENOVATION
SECTION 10800
TOILET AND BATH ACCESSORIES
PART1 GENERAL
1.01 REQUIREMENTS INCLUDED
A. Furnish and install all toilet and bath accessories as required to complete
the work of the Contract, as indicated on the Drawings and as specified
herein.
1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS
A. Wood blocking for accessory supports at gypsum drywall partitions: Section
09250, GYPSUM DRYWALL and in Section 06100, ROUGH CARPENTRY.
B. Masonry walls: Section 04200, UNIT MASONRY
1.03 REFERENCES
A. The BIDDING REQUIlEMENTS,CONTRACT FORMS AND CONDITIONS OF THE
CONTRACT and applicable parts of GENERAL REQUIREMENTS, as listed in the
Table of Contents, shall be included in and made a part of this Section.
B. Examine all Drawings and all other Sections of the Specifications for
requirements therein affecting the work of this Section.
1.04 SUBMITTALS
A. Shop Drawings: Submit complete shop drawings of all work of this Section
to Architect for approval, showing all pertinent details of construction and
installation, including details of methods of anchorage and attachment to
supporting materials.
B. Product Data: Submit complete manufacturer's product data of all work of
this Section to Architect for approval, consisting of complete product
description and specifications, catalog cuts, and other descriptive data
required for complete product and product use information.
C. Do not order materials or begin fabrication work until Architect's approval
of submittals has been obtained.
1.05 GUARANTEE
A. In addition to the specific guarantee requirements of GENERAL CONDITIONS
and MODIFICATIONS TO THE GENERAL CONDITIONS, the Contractor shall
obtain in the Owner's name the standard written manufacturer's guarantee
of all materials furnished under this Section where such guarantees are
offered in the manufacturer's published product data. All these guarantees
shall be in addition to, and not in lieu of, other liabilities which the Con-
tractor may have by law or other provisions of the Contract Documents.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
FEBRUARY 1999 10800-1 TOILET AND BATH ACCESSORIES
LE9813 CHASE KITCHEN RENOVATION
SECTION 10260
CORNER GUARDS
PART1 GENERAL
1.01 REQUIREMENTS INCLUDED
A. Provide and install CORNER GUARDS as shown on Drawings.
1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS
A. Masonry: Section 04200, UNIT MASONRY.
B. Finish carpentry: Section 06200, FINISH CARPENTRY.
C. Gypsum drywall work: Section 09250, GYPSUM DRYWALL.
D. Blocking: Section 06100, ROUGH CARPENTRY.
1.03 REFERENCES
A. Attention is directed to the Bidding Documents, Contract Documents, and
Division 1, which are herewith made a part of this Section.
B. Review all Drawings, and all Sections of the Specifications for provisions
therein affecting the work of this Section.
1.04 SUBMITTALS
A. Samples of finishes for the following items shall be furnished to the
Architect before fabrication.
1. Corner guards.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 Comer guards: 3-1/2" x 3-1/2" stainless steel cement-on corner guards three
feet high or in heights as indicated on the drawings as manufactured by
Wilkinson Company, Inc., Stow, OH or equal by Miller Corporation, Elkhard, IN.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 GENERAL
A. Provide templates and coordinate with other trades so that suitable
mounting conditions are provided.
B. Provide for vandalproof attachment for all items appropriate to specific
surface conditions.
C. Replace all damaged or defective equipment at no cost to the Owner.
END OF SECTION
FEBRUARY 1999 10260-1 CORNERGUARDS
LE9813 CHASE KITCHEN RENOVATION
B. Store material off ground and under cover; protected from weather and
construction operations.
C. Handle materials during transportation and installation in a manner that
prevents racking or damage to finish or adjacent construction.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.01 MATERIALS
A. Solid plastic toilet partitions:
1. Panel material: Manufacturer's standard polymer resin solid
homogeneous sheet..
B. Fittings: Door latches and coat hook on inside face of door. All fittings
shall meet ADA accessibilty requirements.
C Equal products by Misco Partitions Corp. or Santana Solid Plastic
Products.
PART 3 -EXECUTION
3.01 INSTALLATION
A. Install materials and systems in accordance with manufacturer's
instructions and approved submittals. Install materials and systems in
proper relation with adjacent construction and with uniform "" •
appearance. Coordinate with work of other sections.
B. Limit openings between panels, doors and pilasters to less than 1/2".
C Adjust hardware, clean, and protect work.
END OF SECTION
FEBRUARY 1999 10160-2 TOILET PARTITIONS
LE9813 CHASE KITCHEN RENOVATION
SECTION 10160
TOILET PARTITIONS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01 REQUnUDAE_N-TS INCLUDED
A. Work of this Section consists of furnishing all labor, materials, tools and
equipment, necessary to furnish and install toilet partions and related
accessories complete as indicated on the Drawings and as specified
herein.
B. Provide toilet partitions and screens as follows:
1. Floor-supported partitions.
2. Wall-hung screens.
1.02 RELATED REQUIItEMENTS
A. Masonry work: Section 04200, UNIT MASONRY.
B. Wood blocking and nailers: Section 06100, ROUGH CARPENTRY>
C Drywall work: Section 09250, GYPSUM DRYWALL
1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDS
A. American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM):
B221 Aluminum-Alloy Extruded Bars, Rods, Wire, Shapes, and Tubes
A 591 Steel Sheets
1.04 SUBMITTALS
A. Submit shop drawings and samples as follows:
1. Shop drawings shall include details of fabrication and erection and
shall indicate anchorage, accessories, and finishes.
2. Sample shall include a sample partition section which 'indicates
frame comer construction, typical attachment pieces and specified
finish.
B. Manufacturer's Product Data: Submit manufacturer's. descriptive. data of
including standard drawings and installation instructions.
1.05 PRODUCT DELIVERY,STORAGE,AND HANDLING
A. Deliver material to project site in manufacturer's packaging, fully
identified and protected from damage by padded blankets.
FEBRUARY 1999 10160-1 TOILET PARTITIONS
LE9813 CHASE KITCHEN RENOVATION
2.01 MATERIALS ..;,
A. Hardboard panel chaulkboards with chalk receptive writing surface:
"Duracite" surface on 1/4" hardboard with backerboard in sizes indicated
on drawings as manufactured by Claridge Products and Equipment, Inc.
complete with aluminum trim and chaulk tray. Or equal by Carolina
Chaulkboard Co., Marsh, or LEMCO, Inc.
2.02 FASTENINGS, PACKING, AND MARKING
A. Fastening devices shall be theft-proof, of appropriate type and of adequate
capacity for each purpose intended. Exposed head of fasteners shall be
stainless steel with finish to match surrounding surfaces. Accessories shall
have screws, bolts, and other fastenings necessary for proper installation,
wrapped in same package as the accessory item for which it is intended.
B. Each package shall be clearly labeled indicating the portion of' the work
for which it is intended.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 INSTALLATION
A. Before installation of chaulkboards, tackboards and accessories, check
surfaces, openings and recesses to receive units to ensure they are of
proper size and location, and are plumb and square. Check substrate
materials, blockings, and built-in anchor plates for structural adequacy to
support the accessories.
B. Mount units securely on wall surfaces and into wall openings and recesses,
tightly anchored into place, and with trim fitted tightly and neatly against
the wall surface. Mount surface units plumb, level, and true, and securely
anchored into place.
C After installation, adjust all units for proper operation, and clean and
polish all exposed surfaces. Protect units from damage from all sources
whenever.
END OF SECTION
FEBRUARY 1999 10110-2 CHAULKBOARDS AND TACKBOARDS
LE9813 CHASE KITCHEN RENOVATION
SECTION 10110
CHAT-JU BOARDS AND TACKBOARDS
PART GENERAL
1.01 REQUIRETN=S INCLUDED
A. Furnish and install all chaulkboards, tackboards and accessories as
required to complete the work of the Contract, as indicated on the Drawings
and as specified herein.
1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS
A. Wood blocking for accessory supports at gypsum drywall partitions: Section
09250, GYPSUM DRYWALL and in Section 06100, ROUGH CARPENTRY.
B. Masonry walls: Section 04200, UNIT MASONRY
1.03 REFERENCES
A. The BIDDING REQUIREMENTS,CONTRACT FORMS AND CONDITIONS OF THE
CONTRACT and applicable parts of GENERAL REQUIREMENTS, as listed in the
Table of Contents, shall be included in and made a part of this Section.
B. Examine all Drawings and all other Sections of the Specifications for
requirements therein affecting the work of this Section.
1.04 SUBMITTALS
A. Shop Drawings: Submit complete shop drawings of all work of this Section
to Architect for approval, showing all pertinent details of construction and
installation, including details of methods of anchorage and attachment to
supporting materials.
B. Product Data: Submit complete manufacturer's product data of all work of
this Section to Architect for approval, consisting of complete product
description and specifications, catalog cuts, and other descriptive data
required for complete product and product use information.
C Do not order materials or begin fabrication work until Architect's approval
of submittals has been obtained.
1.05 GUARANTEE
A. In addition to the specific guarantee requirements of GENERAL CONDITIONS
and MODIFICATIONS TO THE GENERAL CONDITIONS, the Contractor shall
obtain in the Owner's name the standard written manufacturer's guarantee
of all materials furnished under this Section where such guarantees are
offered in the manufacturer's published product data. All these guarantees
shall be in addition to, and not in lieu of, other liabilities which the Con-
tractor may have by law or other provisions of the Contract Documents.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
FEBRUARY 1999 10110-1 CHAULKBOARDS AND TACKBOARDS
LE9813 CHASE KITCHEN RENOVATION
8. Concrete Floors:
Two Coats Sika Chemical "Sikagard 619" or PPG "Aquapon
Polyamide-Epoxy Clear Concrete Sealer and Finish 97-
57/98".
9. Mechanical and Electrical Work (Paint all exposed items through-out
the project except factory finished items with factory-applied baked
enamel finishes which occur in mechanical rooms or areas, and
excepting chrome or nickel plating, stainless steel, and aluminum
other than mill finished. Paint all exposed ductwork and inner
portion of all ductwork visible through grilles and registers):
Same as specified for other interior metals, hereinabove.
END OF SECI7ION
FEBRUARY 1999 09900-12 PAINTING
LE9813 CHASE KITCHEN RENOVATION
One Coat Benjamin Moore "Latex Q.D. Prime Seal" (201)
Two Coats Benjamin Moore "Regal Aquavelvet Eggshell" (319)
2. Interior Gypsum Wallboard Ceilings for Flat Finish:
(manufacturer to be Benjamin Moore)
One Coat Benjamin Moore "Latex Q.D. Prime Seal" ( 201)
Two Coats Benjamin Moore "Regal Satin Wall" (215)
3. Interior concrete block walls for Semi-Gloss finish:
One Coat Benjamin Moore "Moorcraft Exterior Blockfiller"
(173)
One Coat Benjamin Moore "IronClad Tile-Like Enamel Semi-
Gloss" (371)
or
One Coat Benjamin Moore "IronClad Tile-Like Clear Glaze
Semi-Gloss" (370.01)
4. Interior Architectural Woodwork and Doors for Paint Finish (all
softwoods and paint grade hardwoods and veneers):
One Coat Benjamin Moore "Alkyd Enamel Underbody" (217)
Two Coats Benjamin Moore "Satin Impervo Enamel"
5. Interior Architectural Woodwork and Doors for Transparent Finish
(all hardwoods and hardwood veneers, except paint grade and factory-
finished items):
1st Coat Benwood Paste wood filler (238), tinted to shade of the
stain with universal tinting colors. (Omit for close
grained woods).
2nd Coat Moore's Interior Wood Finishes Penetrating Stain
(241). (Omit if to be natural).
Finish Two coats Benwood Polyurethane Finish Low Lustre
(435)
6. Interior Metal Handrail Assemblies:
One Coat Epoxy Primer in shop, under other Section
After Installation:
Prime Coat IronClad Retard-X Rust Inhibitive Latex Primer (162)
Finish One or two coats Impervex Enamel (309) or one or two
coats IronClad Latex High Gloss Enamel (308)
FEBRUARY 1999 09900-I1 PAINTING
LE9813 CHASE KITCHEN RENOVATION
Coats Paint 170
4. Exterior Galvanized Metals:
Before Installation:
One Coat Benjamin Moore "IronClad Galvanized Metal Latex
(all surfaces) Primer" (155)
Wash Primer, as recommended by finish paint
manufacturer
One Coat Benjamin Moore "Ironclad Q.D. Industrial Enamel"
(all surfaces, (071)
within Devoe Bar-Ox Exterior Metal Enamel
recommended
time limit)
After Installation:
One Coat Benjamin Moore "Ironclad Q.D. Industrial Enamel"
exposed (071)
surfaces) Devoe Bar-Ox Exterior Metal Enamel
Glidden Glid-Guard Alkyd Industrial Enamel
5. Other Exterior Metals:
One Coat Approved primer, in shop under other Sections
(where specified)
One Coat Field Primer:
Benjamin Moore "Ironclad Retardo Primer" (163)
Devoe Bar-Ox Primer
Glidden Glid-Guard Alkyd Industrial Primer
One Coat Benjamin Moore "Ironclad Q.D. Industrial Enamel"
(071)
Devoe Bar-Ox Exterior Metal Enamel
Glidden Glid-Guard Alkyd Industrial Enamel
6. Sheet Metal Work:
Requires no further finishing under this Section.
D. PAINTING SCHEDULE FOR INTERIOR SURFACES:
Important Note: Notwithstanding anything in the following schedule to the
contrary, interior painting and finishing shall conform to the applicable
laws and building code regarding fire hazard classifications of finish
materials.
1. Interior Gypsum Wallboard Walls for Latex Eggshell Finish:
(manufacturer to be Benjamin Moore)
FEBRUARY 1999 09900-10 PAINTING
LE9813 CHASE KITCHEN RENOVATION
D. Final Inspection: Protect all painted surfaces against damage until the date
of Substantial Completion of Work. The Architect will at this time conduct a
final inspection of all painting work. All areas which do not comply with
the requirements of this Specification shall be repainted or retouched to
the satisfaction of the Architect at no additional cost to the Owner.
3.08 PAINTING SCHEDULE
A. Number of coats scheduled is minimum. Refer to Paragraph 3.05A,
hereinbefore.
B. Surfaces not to be Finished: Finishes for the following items are either
included under other appropriate Sections or require no painting, except
as may be otherwise specifically scheduled with subsequent Exterior and
Interior Schedules.
1. Chrome or nickel plating, stainless steel, bronze, brass, and aluminum
other than mill finished, unless otherwise specified.
2. Factory finished mechanical and electrical equipment, pumps, and
machinery, which occur in mechanical or equipment rooms or areas.
3. Galvanized ducts, pipes, conduits, etc., occurring within mechanical
areas or spaces. Also all such items fully concealed from view in the
finished work.
4. Factory finished materials, specialties, and accessories unless
otherwise specified.
5. Ceramic and clay products, glass, plastic, and other surfaces with
"integral" finishes, except as otherwise scheduled herebelow.
6. Surfaces specified as "unfinished" in the following schedule.
C. PAINTING SCHEDULE FOR EXTERIOR SURFACES:
1. Exterior Concrete: (if required)
One or Two Benjamin Moore "IronClad Chex-Wear Epoxy-Ester
Coats Enamel" (226)
* 2. Exterior Masonry: (if required)
One Coat Benjamin Moore "Moorcraft Interior and Exterior
Block Filler" (173)
One or Two Benjamin Moore "Impervex Enamel" (309)
Coats
3. Exterior Woodwork: (if required)
One Coat Benjamin Moore "Moorcraft Primer" (176)
One or Two Benjamin Moore "Moorcraft Latex House and Trim
FEBRUARY 1999 09900-9 PAINTING
LE9813 CHASE KITCHEN RENOVATION
L. Pipe, conduit, and similar items exposed to view and required to be painted
shall, if, adjacent or close to wall or ceiling, match the surface on or near
which they are mounted, unless otherwise directed.
3.06 BACKPAINTING AND PRIMING
A. Architectural Woodwork:
1. Architectural woodwork for paint finish shall be sealed or primed on
rear surfaces and other concealed surfaces with one coat of wood
sealer, primer, or undercoat before being installed and as soon as
delivered to job. Standards shall meet AWI criteria of premium grade.
2. Architectural woodwork for transparent finish shall be sealed on the
back and on all surfaces which will be concealed after erection.
Standards shall meet AWI criteria of premium grade.
3. Seal or prime all wood glazing rabbets and sealant slots before glazing
or sealant work is begun.
B. Sealing of Wood Doors:
1. Wood doors scheduled for transparent finish shall be sealed with one
coat of specified varnish, as appropriate, on all surfaces as soon as
delivered to job, except that if stained finish is required obtain
alternate instructions from Architect. Standards shall meet AWI
criteria of premium grade. AM**
2. Wood doors scheduled for paint finish shall be sealed with one coat of
specified primer on all surfaces as soon as delivered to job.
3. Seal all cut-outs in similar manner prior to installation of butts, locks,
and closers.
4. After being fitted by the carpenter, all cut edges shall be sealed again,
in similar manner, and then top and bottom edges shall be given an
additional seal coat.
3.07 COMPLETION
A. Cleaning: At the completion of the work, remove all paint and varnish spots
and all oil, grease, or other stains caused by this work, from all surfaces
leaving their finishes in a satisfactory condition.
B. At the completion of the work, masking materials and other debris shall be
removed, and fixtures, plates, etc., removed to facilitate application of the
paint shall be replaced.
C. Retouching: Touch-up and repair any applied finishes which, for any
reason have been damaged during construction work. All finished work
applied under this Section shall have perfect surfaces when completed
work is ready for inspection for Substantial Completion.
FEBRUARY 1999 09900-8 PAINTING
LE9813 CHASE KITCHEN RENOVATION
OW 1. Preparation of other materials shall be in accordance with
recommendations of the manufacturers of the materials to be finished
and the primers and finishes to be applied.
3.05 APPLICATION
A. Painting Schedule, hereinbelow, lists minimum number of coats required.
If complete coverage and hiding of the base materials is not obtained with
the specified minimum number of coats, provide all additional coats
required for complete coverage and for uniform finished appearance
without additional cost to the Owner.
B. Workmanship shall be top-quality in all respects, in strict accordance with
the manufacturer's printed instructions. No material shall be thinned in
any way, except as directed by manufacturer.
C. Materials shall be applied in strict accordance with the manufacturer's
directions. No material shall be thinned in any way except as directed by
manufacturer.
D. Each coat applied must be inspected and approved by the Architect before
the application of the succeeding coat, otherwise no credit for the coat
applied will be given and the work in question shall be recoated without
additional expense to the Owner. Notify the Architect when each coat is
ready for inspection.
E. Minimum drying time shall comply with that recommended by
manufacturer. However, each coat shall be thoroughly dry before
application of subsequent coat.
F. Finishes shall be lightly sanded between coats using #00 sandpaper.
G. The prime coat on gypsum wallboard shall be tinted slightly darker than
the color of the final shade.
H. Closets shall be finished inside the same as adjoining rooms, unless
otherwise specified.
I. Paint all doors, panels, etc., in the "open" position.
J. Finished work shall be free from runs, sags, hairs, defective brushing, an
clogging of lines and angles. Flaws visible in the completed work shall be
removed and the area satisfactorily repaired.
K. Concrete floor to receive sealer:
1. The sealer shall be applied at a rate of not more than 200 sq. ft./gal.
2. After the first coat has cured for 24 hours but not more than 72 hours,
the second coat shall be applied at a rate of not more than 400 sq.
ft./gal.
FEBRUARY 1999 09900-7 PAINTING
LE9813 CHASE KITCHEN RENOVATION
2. Fill all nail holes, cracks, open joints, and other defects after first coat
is dry, using an exterior filler compatible with the finished specified
and tinted to camouflage repairs.
3. After fitting by the carpenter, top and bottom of all doors must be
primed with the same as the face of the doors.
G. Field-Welded Ferrous Metal:
1. After installation and field-welding and grinding, and immediately
before painting, remove all rust, loose mill scale, dirt, weld flux, weld
spatter, weld smoke stains, burnt primer, and other foreign material
with wire brushes and/or steel scrapers. Hand tool cleaning in
accordance-with SSPC-SP2-63. Power tool clean in accordance with
SSPC-SP3-63. Remove all grease and oil by use of solvent
recommended by paint' manufacturer. Sandpaper exposed surfaces,
and between coats, as required to product smooth, even finishes.
2. Sand smooth and spot prime all welded areas, and all areas where
prime coat has damaged or abraded, using rust-inhibitive primer
scheduled hereinbelow.
H. Other Ferrous Metals:
1. Remove rust, mill scale, and all foreign materials. Wire brush or sand
damaged or rusted area to bright metal. Remove grease or dirt by use
of solvent recommended by paint manufacturer just prior to applying ..•
paint.
2. Spot prime all areas where shop coat has been damaged or abraded,
using same type paint as used for shop coat.
I. Metal Galvanized Iron:
1. All new surfaces must be aggressively cleaned with a grease-cutting
solvent such as mineral spirits, to remove fabricating oils.
2. Abraded areas that have begun to rust must be sanded clean and spot
primed without delay, with one of Moore's IronClad Rust Inhibitive
Paints.
J. Other Non-Ferrous Metal:
1. Shop primed non-ferrous metals shall be prepared similarly to ferrous
metals, above.
2. Unprimed non-ferrous metals shall be thoroughly cleaned of oil,
grease, and temporary protective coatings by use of appropriate
solvent as recommended by primer manufacturer, and shall then be
given any additional pretreatment recommended by the primer
manufacturer to assure the permanent adhesion of the paint coats.
K. Other Materials:
FEBRUARY 1999 09900-6 PAINTING
LE9813 CHASE KITCHEN RENOVATION
1. Holes, dents, and similar flaws in gypsum wallboard and plaster shall
OW be filled with plaster of Paris or spackling compound, and cracks shall
be cut out and filled. Sandpaper shall not be used on gypsum
wallboard surfaces. Surface of patch shall be left smooth and flush
with adjacent surfaces. Patched areas shall not be detectable in the
finished work.
2. Before painting new plaster surfaces shall be tested with a moisture
detecting device, such as Kaydel Plaster Test, Type CP-48,
manufactured by Hard Moisture Gauges, Inc. Sealer or paint shall not
be applied when the moisture content of the plaster exceeds 8%, as
determined by the test. Testing shall be done in the presence of the
Architect and in as many locations as directed. Plaster shall be
thoroughly_ dry-brushed before painting or sealing.
D. Concrete and Masonry:
1. Wire-brush clean all concrete and masonry surfaces previously
painted.
2. Thoroughly clean of dirt, grit, loose materials, mortar drippings, and
other deleterious substances.
3. Major patching and repair of concrete and masonry under the other
appropriate Sections.
4. Concrete floor which is to receive sealer shall be thoroughly washed
with a cleaning and degreasing solution, in accordance with the
recommendations of the sealer manufacturer.
5. The first coat for masonry is a fill coat, and shall be well brushed into
the surface in accordance with the manufacturer's directions.
Preliminary coats on masonry are to take up all absorption of the
surface, and additional undercoats shall be applied if necessary to
achieve perfect uniformity of the finish coat.
E. Wood to be Painted: (as per AWI standards)
1. Sand smooth and free of marks before applying the first coat.
2. Wash sap spots and knots with mineral spirits. When dry, touch-up
spots and knots with an approved sealer for exterior work and with
two coats of shellac for interior work.
3. Fill all nail holes, cracks, open joints, and other defects, with filler
putty after the primer is dry.
4. After fitting by the carpenter, top and bottom of all doors must be
primed with the same as the face of the doors.
F. Wood to be Transparent Finished: (as per AWI standards)
1. Sand smooth and free of marks before applying the first coat.
FEBRUARY 1999 09900-5 PAINTING
LE9813 CHASE KITCHEN RENOVATION
B. If the surfaces are not thoroughly dry or if they cannot be put in proper Awk-
condition to receive paint or other finish by customary cleaning methods,
sanding, or spackling, notify the Architect in writing.
C The starting of work on any surface will be construed as acceptance of the
surface as being satisfactory to properly receive the work of this Section.
Any corrections subsequently required will be at the expense of the
Contractor.
3.02 JOB CONDITIONS
A. No work shall be done in rain, dew or fog, when the temperature is below
50 0F., or before the materials to be painted or finished have thoroughly
dried out. Avoid finishing exterior surfaces while they are exposed to the
hot sun.
B. Floors and adjacent surfaces, as well as the surface to be painted, shall be
clean before painting.
C Piping and heating equipment shall not be painted while heated. Piping
and heating equipment shall remain cold until after the final coat has
thoroughly dried.
3.03 PROTECTION
A. Furnish and lay drop clothes in all rooms and areas where painting and
finishing is being done, to adequately protect flooring and other work ,
from all damage during the painting work.
B. Remove or otherwise protect plated hardware, accessories, device plates,
lighting fixtures, factory finished work, and similar items; or provide
ample in-place protection. Use only skilled mechanics for removal,
resetting, and protection.
3.04 SURFACE PREPARA'T'ION
A. Prepare all surfaces to receive finishes in strict accordance with the
manufacturer's printed preparation instructions applicable to each of the
project materials, conditions, and finishes.
B. Substrate shall be clean and dry before coating is applied. Surfaces with a
shop or existing coat shall be well covered by touching up bare or abraded
spots with the same material used for shop coat. Substrate shall be smooth,
free from raised grain; putty sags, cracks, rust, grease, dirt, or other
foreign matter or defect.
Gypsum Drywall and Plaster:
C Nail holes, cracks, and similar blemishes shall be neatly puttied, sanded
smooth, and tinted to match before finish coats are applied. Putty shall be
allowed to set up properly before being painted. Filled holes shall not be
detectable in the finished work.
FEBRUARY 1999 09900-4 PAINTING
LE9813 CHASE KITCHEN RENOVATION
B. Assume full responsibility for the proper performance of all 'materials
used, for appropriateness of method of application with respect to materials
and substrates encountered, and for the compatibility of any materials
applied with shop coats and other coats previously applied, including
primers, sealers, preservative treatments, etc. Notwithstanding specific
schedules hereinbelow to the contrary, select the primer which has been
verified to be appropriate for each of the substrates and finishes
encountered.
C. Other painting materials required, but not specifically described, such as
linseed oil, shellac, turpentine, and thinner shall be of the highest quality
and shall have identifying labels on containers.
D. It is to be understood by the general contractor and the painting contractor
that all coatings must conform to all state and local regulations including
VOC/VOS rules at the time of application.
2.02 COLORS AND SAMPLES
A. Color scheme shall be in accordance with schedule provided by the
Architect, and all tinting and matching shall be to the satisfaction of the
Architect. Provide facilities for comparison and adjustment of colors. No
limit is placed on the number of colors that may be required. Refer to
Architectural Finish Schedule.
B. For all transparent wood finishes, samples shall be prepared in accordance
00... with the specifications on pieces of the same kind of wood, at least 12 in. X
12. in., until the finish is approved.
C. For painted finishes, samples including prime coat(s) shall be prepared as
directed on pieces of like substrate as specified for the project, at least 36
in. X 36 in. until the finish is approved.
D. If so directed by the Architect, a full wall/column sample will be painted in
the finished space for approval by the Architect.
2.03 FILLERS,SOLVENTS,AND MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS
A. Turpentine shall be pure gum spirits of turpentine conforming to Fed.
Spec. TT-T-801.
B. Drier shall conform to Fed. Spec. TT-D-65.
C. Tinting materials shall be of best quality, ground in pure boiled linseed oil,
limeproof, and non-fading.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 ACCEPTANCE OF SURFACES
A. Inspect all surfaces to receive finishes to ensure that they are in proper
condition to receive the work to be performed under this Section.
FEBRUARY 1999 09900-3 PAINTING
LE9813 CHASE KITCHEN RENOVATION
TT-T-801 Turpentine, Gum Spirits, Steam Distilled, Sulfate Wood, and An
Destructively Distilled
B. Steel Structures Painting Council (SSPC):
SP 3 Power Tool Cleaning
C. All Wood work should follow AWI standards for finishes. Reference Section
06200, Finish Carpentry.
1.05 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: Submit manufacturer's product data to Architect for approval,
consisting of complete product description and specifications, complete test
data, complete preparation and application instructions, and other
pertinent technical data required for complete product, and product use
information.
B. Obtain Architect's approval of submittals before ordering materials or
proceeding with the work.
1.06 PRODUCT DELIVERY,STORAGE AND HANDLING
A. Materials shall be delivered to the building in unopened original
containers bearing the manufacturer's labels.
B. Materials shall be stored in fully sealed containers, outside the building,
preferably in exterior storage shed. Oily rags and waste must be removed
from the building every night, and under no circumstances will be allowed
to accumulate. Each space containing stored paint materials shall be
provided with UL labeled fire extinguisher of suitable type, class, and
capacity.
1.07 WARRANTY
A. Furnish and deliver standard written manufacturer's warranty in Owner's
name covering all materials and workmanship under this Section, in
addition to, and not in lieu of, guarantee requirements set forth under
GENERAL CONDITIONS and MODIFICATION TO THE GENERAL CONDITIONS,and
other liabilities which the Contractor may have by law or other provisions
of the Contract Documents.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 MATERIALS
A. Materials used shall be best grade products of their respective kinds. The
Painting Schedule and color selections are based on products manufactured
by Benjamin Moore, and is specified to establish a standard of quality and
kind of material desired. Only first-line products of the below-listed
manufacturers may be used. Except where noted that substitutions will not
be accepted.
FEBRUARY 1999 09900-2 PAINTING
LE9813 CHASE KITCHEN RENOVATION
SECTION 09900
PAINTING
PART GENERAL
1.01 REQUIRE1=S INCLUDED
A. Furnish and install painting and finishing work throughout the exterior
and interior of the Project as indicated on the Drawings and as specified
herein.
B. Examine all Sections of the Specifications and the complete set of Drawings
with care, in order to determine the full extent of the painting and
finishing work required. Materials provided under other Sections which
necessitate painting or finishing and which are left unfinished under the
requirements of the other Sections of these Specifications shall be painted
and finished to completion under this Section, unless specifically scheduled
herein to be left unfinished.
C. All preparatory work of materials and surfaces to receive paint beyond that
specified to be done as work of other Sections, shall be included as work of
this Section.
1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS
A. Prime coat on handrails and railings: Section 05520, HANDRAILS AND
RAILINGS.
B. Wood preservative treatments: Section 06100, ROUGH CARPENTRY.
G Prime coat on hollow steel doors and frames: Section 08100, STEEL DOORS
AND FRAMES.
D. Factory finish and prime coats on mechanical and electrical fixtures and
equipment: Division 15, MECHANICAL and Division 16, ELECTRICAL.
E. Prefinished metal work: Section 05500, METAL FABRICATIONS.
1.03 REFERENCES
A. The BIDDING REQUIREMENTS,CONTRACT FORMS AND CONDITIONS OF THE
CONTRACT and applicable parts of DIVISION 1 - GENERAL REQUIREMENTS, as
listed in the Table of Contents, shall be included in and made a part of this
Section.
B. Examine all Drawings and all other Sections of the Specifications for
requirements therein affecting the work of this Section.
1.04 REFERENCED STANDARDS
A. Federal Specifications (Fed. Spec.):
TT-D-65 Drier; Paint, Liquid
FEBRUARY 1999 09900-1 PAINTING
LE9813 CHASE KITCHEN RENOVATION
B. Deliver additional materials to the site and place in designated storage
area(s) in building.
3.04 CLEANING
A. Clean resilient base after installation in strict accordance with
manufacturer's published instructions, removing all exposed adhesive
and other stains. Replace any material which cannot be cleaned to
satisfactory appearance, sucject to Architect's approval.
B. Remove all rubbish, cartons, debris, and tools from the work and leave
work areas broom clean at completion of work.
END OF SECTION
FEBRUARY 1999 09678-4 RESILIENT BASE AND ACCESSORIES
LE9813 CHASE KITCHEN RENOVATION
A. Initial Preparation: Surface to receive resilient base shall be turned
*� over to this trade plumb, true to line and plane, with joints finished
flush, clean, and free of loose dirt and dust, grease, oil, and other
deleterious materials such as paint and glue, ready to receive work of
this Section.
B. Final Preparation:- Thoroughly examine all surfaces to receive work of
this Section, and notify Architect, in writing, of all conditions which
would adversely affect this work. Do not commence work on any
surface where such notice has been sent until corrective work has been
completed or waived. Starting of work shall constitute acceptance of
conditions in the area as suitable to properly receive the resilient base
work.
1. Do final cleaning of surfaces just before installation. Remove
dust, dirt, and other loose particles.
3.02 INSTALLATION
A. General:
1. Do not begin installation until work of other Sections, including
painting, has been substantially completed. Use only
experienced workmen. Strictly adhere to printed instructions of
the manufacturers of the various materials.
2. Room temperatures at any area in which resilient base is being
installed shall be maintained at temperatures of not less than
65°F. for a period of at least 48 hours prior to commencement of
work to at least 48 hours after completion of the work in the
given area.
B. Install resilient base in manner to ensure uniform positive contact with
subsurface, and to product finished surfaces which are smooth, even,
and in true planes, free of buckles, waves, and other imperfections.
Store and use adhesive in accordance with manufacturer's printed
instructions.
C. Form inside and outside comers neatly. Heat-form external corners for
uniform cove appearance. Cope internal comers (do not miter). Scribe
and fit joints accurately. A maximum of three lengths of base will be
permitted in closets with joints at comers only.
D. Install subfloor levelor system according to manufacturer's printed
instructions. Install under flooring materials at each location where
dissimilar flooring materials are of different thickness in order to make
the final finish surface perfectly level.
3.03 ADDITIONAL MATERIALS
A. Furnish additional resilient base in quantity of at least 3% of total of
!ow each different color of base used on project, carefully wrapped and
sealed.
FEBRUARY 1999 09678-3 RESILIENT BASE AND ACCESSORIES
LE9813 CHASE KITCHEN RENOVATION
A. In addition to the specific p guarantee requirements of the GENERAL
CONDITIONS and the SUPPLEMENTARY GENERAL CONDITIONS, the
Contractor shall obtain in the Owner's name the standard written
manufacturer's guarantee of all materials furnished under this Section
where such guarantees are offered in the manufacturer's published
product data. All these guarantees shall be in addition to, and not in lieu
of, other liabilities which the Contractor may have by law or other
provisions of the Contract Documents.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS - RESILIENT MATERIALS
A. Resilient materials shall be uniform in thickness, size,. and profile.
B. Resilient materials shall be cut accurately with square, true edges.
C. Plain colors shall be uniform throughout.
D. Colors (maximum of colors) shall be as selected by the Architect .
from a full range of manufacturer's standard colors.
E. Resilient materials shall be free of objectionable odors, blisters, cracks,
objectionable foreign material, or other physical defects affecting
appearance of serviceability.
2.02 VINYL BASE
A. Vinyl base shall be smooth surface, toeless carpet type at carpeted floors
and set on cove type at other floor conditions 1/8". thick- 4" or 6" high,
rounded tops, in 40 ft., 50 ft., or 100 ft. lengths. Base of toe of set on type
base shall be flexible enough to conform to floor variations of 1/8".
Base shall be manufactured by Roppe or equivalent product approved
by the Architect.
2.03 ADHESIVE AND PRIMER
A. Adhesive shall be vinyl base adhesive of type and brand recommended
by manufacturer.
B. Primer, if required, shall be as recommended by the manufacturer.
2.04 SUB-FLOOR LEVELOR SYSTEM
A. Provide PVC subfloor levelor system Type LS as manufactured by,
Chagrin Falls, OH or equal system as approved by architect. Provide
adhesive as recommended by manufacturer.
PART 3 EXECUTION '
3.01 PREPARATION OF SURFACES
FEBRUARY 1999 09678-2 RESILIENT BASE AND ACCESSORIES
LE9813 CHASE KITCHEN RENOVATION
SECTION 09678
RESILIENT BASE AND ACCESSORIES
PART1 GENERAL
1.01 REQUIREMENTS INCLUDED
A. Furnish and install resilient base and related items, as indicated on the
Drawings and as specified herein.
B. Furnish and install subfloor levelor system.
1.02 RELATED REQUIREMEN'T'S
A. Gypsum wallboard wall finish, ready to receive resilient base: Section
09250, GYPSUM DRYWALL.
B. Resilient tile flooring: Section 09660, RESILIENT FLOORING.
C. Finish millwork items: Section 06200, FINISH CARPENTRY.
1.03 REFERENCES
A. The BIDDING REQUIREMENTS,CONTSACT FORMS AND CONDITIONS OF THE
CONTRACT and applicable parts of DIVISION 1 - GENERAL REQUIREMENTS,
as listed in the Table of Contents, shall be included in and made a part of
this Section.
B. Examine all Drawings and all other Sections of the Specifications for
requirements thergin affecting the work of this Section.
1.04 COORDINATION
A. Coordinate work with that of other trades affecting, or affected by, this
work, cooperating as necessary with said trades to assure the steady
progress of all the work of the Contract.
1.05 SUBMITTALS
A. Samples: Submit representative samples of products to be furnished
under this Section to Architect for selection and approval. Delivered
materials shall closely match the approved materials.
B. Product Data: Submit complete manufacturer's product data to Architect
for approval, consisting of complete product description and
specifications, complete test data and technican characteristics,
complete installation instructions, and other pertinent technical data
required for complete product and product use information.
C. Do not order materials or proceed with installation work until
Architect's approval of submittals has been obtained.
1.06 GUARANTEE
FEBRUARY 1999 09678-1 RESILIENT BASE AND ACCESSORIES
LE9813 CHASE KITCHEN RENOVATION
2. Adjust sheets that have not been seated level with surrounding
surfaces in manner recommended by manufacturer.
3. Replace pieces showing broken corners, miscuts or fracture lines by
carefully removing, and replacing with new pieces of same type,
color, pattern, and thickness. Location of joints shall be as approved
by Architect and shall be undercut so as to minimize joint appearance.
Miscut pieces of flooring will not be accepted and must be replaced.
4. Fully weld all joints and install at drains and penetrations as
reccommended by manufacturer. Provide fully welded base.
3.03 CLEANING,POLISHING,AND PROTECTING OF VINYL COMPOSITION TILE AND
SHEET VINYL FLOORING '
A. Allow flooring to set for at least five .days without traffic.
B. At end of setting period, wash with diluted commercial floor cleaner, rinse
thoroughly, and apply one coat of commercial buffable floor polish, all in
strict accordance with manufacturer's printed instructions.
C. After application of floor polish, cover vinyl composition flooring with
Kraft paper or prohibit traffic completely.
D. Immediately prior to inspection for Substantial Completion, but not less
than 48 hours after the first application of polish, dry or damp mop floors.
Buff polished floors to high luster with mechanical buffer. In areas where
the original coat of polish has become worn or damaged, thoroughly clean
and, if necessary, strip original polish and apply new coat of same type and
brand of polish. Buff new applications of polish as specified.
E. Provide Owner with full copies of maintenance instructions for flooring.
END OF SECTION
FEBRUARY 1999 09660- 6 RESILIENT FLOORING
LE9813 CHASE KITCHEN RENOVATION
refer to Architect for decision. Where pattern is designed, layout of
ho"` floor pattern prior to installation shall be approved by the Architect.
2. Room temperature in any area in which resilient materials are being
installed shall be maintained at not less than 65°F. for a period of at 1
east 48 hours prior to commencement of tile work to at least 48 hours
after completion of this work in the given area, and not less than 60°F.
from that time on.
3. Lav resilient materials in manner to insure good, uniform contact
with subsurface materials, and to produce finished surfaces which are
smooth, even, and in true planes, free of buckles, waves, and other
imperfections. Store and use adhesive in accordance with
manufacturer's published instructions.
4. Where different colors of resilient tile flooring occur in adjoining
rooms or areas, and no threshold is called for, install feature strip
under door or across center of doorless opening, of color selected by
Architect.
5. Fit flooring neatly into breaks and recesses, against bases and
thresholds, and around pipes, columns, and other projections. Cut, fit,
and scribe borders after application of field tile.
6. Install edge strips where resilient flooring materials terminate at
points higher than contiguous finished flooring.
7. Clean off surplus adhesive from resilient materials and adjacent
surfaces.
B. Vinyl Composition Tile
1. Lay tile square with room axis, with joints aligned in one direction and
staggered in the other, and with borders not less than 1/2 the width of
the field tile, all as directed or approved by the Architect. Direction of
tile grain, when laid, shall lie in single direction or in pattern as
indicated on drawings. Use only full tiles in the field.
2. Adjust tiles that have not been seated level with surrounding tiles in
manner recommended by manufacturer.
3. Replace tile showing broken comers or fracture lines by warming
tile, carefully removing, and replacing with new tile of same type,
color, pattern, and thickness.
C. Sheet Vinyl
1. Provide sheet goods in pattern as shown on drawings and install
according to manufacturer's printed instructions. Obtain approval for
actual flooring layout with Architect before commencing work. Use
templates to cut in medalions. Under cut patterns according to
manufacturer's instructions.
FEBRUARY 1999 09660- 5 RESILIENT FLOORING
LE9813 CHASE KITCHENRENOVATION
A. Cleaners and Polish: Floor cleaner shall be a commercial floor cleaner,
equal to Armstrong "C-410#, Hillyard "Super Shine-All", or Huntington
Laboratories "Contract Floor Polish", as approved by the Architect.
PART 3 EXECtTIION
3.01 PREPARATION OF SURFACES
A. Initial Preparation Under Other Sections:
1. Surfaces to receive resilient materials shall be level, plumb, true and
clean, free of projections, ridges, and waves, and free of loose dirt and
dust, grease, oil, and other deleterious materials such as resin type
curing compounds, paint, glue, and similar materials, ready to receive
work of this Section. Filling of cracks with crack filler, as required,
however, will be included as part of the work of this Section.
2. When variation in finished surface exceeds allowable amount
specified therein, it shall be brought within the allowable tolerance
with latex type underlayment applied in strict accordance with
manufacturer's instructions.
B. Inspection of Surfaces and Final Preparation Under This Section
1. Thoroughly examine all surfaces to receive work of this Section, and
notify the Architect in writing of all conditions which would
adversely affect this work. Do not commence work in any area where
such notice of adverse conditions has been sent until corrective work
has been completed or waived. Start of work in any area without
issuances of such notice shall constitute acceptance of conditions in
the area as suitable to properly receive the work of this Section.
2. Fill all cracks, control joints, etc., in subsurfaces, using approved
Crack Filler in accordance with manufacturer's published
instructions. Do final cleaning of surfaces just prior to installation,
removing all dust, dirt, and other loose particles which may have
accumulated since initial cleaning.
3. Allow concrete work to dry adequately before commencing
application of flooring materials, checking the moisture content, if
necessary, by means of primer tests, relative humidity tests, or mat
moisture and bonding tests, all such tests being at the option of the
Contractor, although the Architect may require any such tests to be
done by the Contractor at the Contractor's expense, if he wishes to
verify or record the moisture conditions.
3.02 INSTALLATION
A. General
1. Do not begin installation until work of other sections including
painting, has been substantially completed. Use only experienced
workmen. Strictly adhere to printed instructions of the
manufacturer's of the various materials; if found to be in conflict
FEBRUARY 1999 09660-4 RESIL NT FLOORING
LE9813 CHASE KITCHEN RENOVATION
F. Resilient materials shall be free of objectionable odors, blisters, cracks,
objectionable foreign material, or other physical defects affecting
appearance or serviceability.
2.02 VINYL COMPOSITION FLOORING
A. Vinyl Composition Tile (VCT): 1/8 in. thick, 12 in. by 12 in. Essentials as
manufactured by Mannington. Tile shall meet or exceed Fed. Spec. SS-T-
312B, Type IV.
1. Tile will be installed in patterns as directed by the architect using as
many as three colors selected from the manufacturer's standard color
selection. Ten % of the flooring shall be feature tileffeature strips
selected from Feature Tile selection.
B. Linoleum flooring to be Marmoleum sheet flooring in 1/8" thickness and
roll width of 79" and accent tiles to be Asmourtile 90 to 300 mm sq tiles by
1/8" thickness complete with accessories as distributed by Gerbert Limited
Lancaster, PA. Colors to be as selected by Architect in pattern as indicated
on drawings.
C. Rubber the flooring and treads and risers to be Marathon Plus in 3.5 mm
thickness as manufactured by Estrie (call (800) 225-1183 to contact
manufacturer's representative) with all accessories as required for a
complete installation including treads, reducer strips, bases, corner pieces,
#OW etc. to meet site conditions in color to be selected by the Architect from
manufacturer's standard colors.
2.03 ADHESIVES, MASTIC UNDERLAYMENTS, CRACK FILLERS, AND PRIMERS
A. Adhesives shall be type and brand recommended by manufacturer for each
of the various conditions and flooring materials. Where manufacturer lists
more than one recommended adhesive, manufacturer's "preferred choice"
shall be used.
B. Mastic Underlayments for use at concrete floors shall be latex type as
recommended by flooring manufacturer, and equal to Armstrong "S-180
Latex Underlayment", Selby, Battersby & Co., "Levelite-Latex" or other
product, approved by the Architect. Underlayment used to correct floor
slabs with defective surfaces or surfaces not constructed to specified
tolerances will be provided as part of the work of this Section.
C. Crack Filler shall be as recommended by flooring manufacturer, and equal
to Armstrong "S-175 Floor Patch", Kentme "Fast Ken-patch No. 13" or as
approved by the Architect.
D. Primers for use for all the various conditions and materials shall be as
recommended by manufacturer of each specific material for each specific
application.
2.04 CLEANER
FEBRUARY 1999 09660- 3 RESILIENT FLOORING
LE9813 CHASE KITCHEN RENOVATION
2. Adhesives, Mastics, Crack Fillers, Primers, Cleaners, and Polishes: JAW
Duplicate samples, at least 1/2 pint, in metal cans. (Submit only if
requested by Architect).
C Product Data: Submit complete manufacturer's product data to Architect for
approval, consisting of complete product description and specifications,
complete test data and technical characteristics, complete installation
instructions, and other pertinent technical data required for complete
product and product use information.
D. Obtain Architect's approval of submittals before proceeding with
fabrication or installation of the work.
1.06 COORDINATION
A. Coordinate work of this Section with work of other Sections affecting, or
affected by, this work, as necessary to ensure completion of work of the
Contract on schedule.
1.07 GUARANTEE
A. In addition to the specific guarantee requirements of the GENERAL
CONDITIONS and MODIFICATIONS TO GENERAL CONDITIONS, the Contractor
shall obtain in the Owner's name the standard written manufacturer's
guarantee of all materials furnished under this Section where such
guarantees are offered in the manufacturer's published product data. All
these guarantees shall be in addition to, and not in lieu of, other liabilities
which the Contractor may have by law or other provisions of the Contract
Documents.
1.08 INSTALLATION REQUIREMENTS
A. All flooring work shall be installed by experienced mechanics with 5 years
experience in the installation of the flooring specified. When required by
manufacturer installer shall be trained and licenced. Only manufacturer
approved methods and materials shall be used for the work.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 GENERAL MATERIALS REQUIREMENTS
A. Resilient materials shall be uniform in thickness and size.
B. Resilient material shall be cut accurately with square-true edges.
C Plain colors shall be uniform throughout.
D. Variegated colors and patterns shall be reasonably uniform so as not to mar
appearance of floor.
E. Except as otherwise indicated or specified, all colors shall be as selected by ,
the Architect from the full range of manufacturer's standard colors.
FEBRUARY 1999 09660- 2 RESILIENT FLOORING
LE9813 CHASE KITCHEN RENOVATION
SECTION 09660
RESILIENT FLOORING
PART1 GENERAL
1.01 REQUIREMENTS INCLUDED
A. Provide preparation for all floor surfaces as required to receive new
flooring.
B. Furnish and install resilient tile flooring and related items, as indicated on
the Drawings and as specified herein.
C Furnish and install rubber treads and risers and related items as indicated
on the Drawings and as specified herein.
1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS
A. Concrete floor: Section 03300, CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE
B. Resilient base: Section 09678, RESILIENT BASE AND ACCESSORIES.
C. Special floor leveling: Section 03550, CONCRETE FLOOR TOPPING.
D. Wood underlayment: Section 06100, ROUGH CARPENTRY
1.03 REFERENCES
A. The BIDDING REQUIREMENTS,CONTRACT FORMS AND CONDITIONS OF THE
CONTRACT and applicable parts of DIVISION I - GENERAL REQUIREMENTS, as
listed in the Table of Contents, shall be included in and made a part of this
Section.
B. Examine all Drawings and all other Sections of the Specifications for
requirements therein affecting the work of this Section.
1.04 REFERENCED STANDARDS
A. Federal Specifications (Fed. Spec.):
SS-T-312B Tile, Floor, Asphalt, Rubber Vinyl, and Vinyl Composition
1.05 SUBMITTALS
A. Submit samples and manufacturer's product data to Architect for selection
and approval. Do not order materials until Architect's approval has been
obtained.
B. Samples: Submit samples as follows. Delivered materials shall closely match
the approved materials.
1. Resilient Tile: Duplicate tiles of each type, size, pattern, and thickness
specified, and in color(s) requested.
FEBRUARY 1999 09660- 1 RESILIENT FLOORING
LE9813 CHASE KITCHEN RENOVATION
B. Extra Panels: Furnish to Owner at least 5% extra acoustical panels of types
used on the project, in unopened, standard manufacturer's cartons, for
future maintenance or replacement.
END OF SECTION
FEBRUARY 1999 09510-3 ACOUSTICAL CEILINGS
LE9813 CHASE KITCHEN RENOVATION
finish, classified by UL Inc. for flame spread rating of 0-25 and labeled -
Class 25, noncombustible, Fed. Spec. SS-S-118b, tested by ASTM E84,
"Angled Tegular Cirrus" No. 584 by Armstrong Co.
2. Suspension System: Exposed, two-direction, painted steel Tee Grid
System, 2 ft. by 2 ft., 15/16 in. wide flange, equal to products of
Armstrong Co., USG Interiors, Inc., or Chicago Metallic Corp., as
approved by Architect. Exposed portions shall be factory painted with
white enamel. Assembly shall be suitable for fire rated assembly as
specified.
B. Type ACT-2 Exposed "Tee" Suspended "1 hr-rated" Acoustical Ceiling System:
1. Acoustical Panels: Shall be 3/4 in. thick by 24 in. by 24 in. size, as
scheduled, with tgular edges, soft textured finish, and white factory
finish, classified by UL Inc. for flame spread rating of 0-25 and labeled
Class 25, noncombustible, Fed. Spec. SS-S-118b, tested by ASTM E84,
"Angled Tegular Cirrus" No. 578 by Armstrong Co.
2. Suspension System: Exposed, two-direction, painted steel Tee Grid
System, 2 ft. by 2 ft., 15/16 in. wide flange, equal to products of
Armstrong Co., USG Interiors, Inc., or Chicago Metallic Corp., as
approved by Architect. Exposed portions shall be factory painted with
white enamel. Assembly shall be suitable for fire rated assembly as
specified.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 INSTALLATION
A. Installation:
1. Installation of ceiling systems shall be done by an authorized
representative or franchised applicator of the manufacturer, or an
applicator approved by the manufacturer, in strict accordance with
the manufacturer's printed instructions. It shall conform to the
governing laws and building code and to the standards specified under
ASTM Standard C636.
2. Provide all secondary framing required to avoid interference with
overhead work of other trades.
3. Install grid system in accordance with layout on the Reflected Ceiling
Plans, flush and level with exposed "Tees" in perfect alignment.
Install acoustical panels, maintaining direction of pattern and "mill-
run" in one direction throughout. Subcontractor shall contact related
trades and coordinate ceiling system with the integration of electrical
fixtures/systems and mechanical systems.
4. Installation of Suspension Trim shall be according to Manufacturer's
printed instructions. Intersecting Tee type connection to suspension
grid shall be used.
FEBRUARY 1999 09510-2 ACOUSTICAL CEILINGS
LE9813 CHASE KITCHEN RENOVATION
SECTION 09510
ACOUSTICAL CEILINGS
PART GENERAL
1.01 REQUIREMENTS INCLUDED
A. Scope: Furnish all materials and install all acoustical ceiling work and
related items, to complete the work as indicated on the Drawings. Include:
1. New exposed "Tee" suspended panel ceilings.
2. Patching and repairing of existing panel ceilings to remain where
disturbed by work of this Contract.
1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS
A. Adjacent Gypsum Soffits: Section 09250, GYPSUM DRYWALL.
B. Section 16000, ELECTRICAL.
C. HVAC Registers and Grills: Mechanical.
D. Sprinklers: Section 15300, FIRE PROTECTION.
E. Plastic Wall Panels: Section 09270, FIBERGLASS REINFORCED PLASTIC WALL
PANELING.
1.03 REFERENCES
A. The BIDDING REQUIREMENTS,CONTRACT FORMS AND CONDITIONS OF THE
CONTRACT and applicable parts of DIVISION 1 - GENERAL REQUIREMENTS, as
listed in the Table of Contents, shall be included in and made a part of this
Section.
B. Examine all Drawings and all other Sections of the Specifications for
requirements therein affecting the work of this Section.
1.04 SUBMITTALS:
A. Shop Drawings: Submit to Architect for approval complete shop drawings
of all acoustical ceiling work. Obtain approval of shop drawings before
proceeding with installation of acoustical materials.
B. Samples: Submit to the Architect for approval samples of acoustical tiles,
panels and members of suspension system proposal for use.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
A. Type ACT-1 Exposed "Tee" Suspended "non-rated" Acoustical Ceiling System:
1. Acoustical Panels: Shall be 314 in. thick by 24 in. by 24 in. size, as
scheduled, with tegular edges, soft textured finish, and white factory
FEBRUARY 1999 09510-1 ACOUSTICAL CEILINGS
LE9813 CHASE KITCHEN RENOVATION
3.08 EXTRA TILE
A. Provide additional 10% of each type and color of tile in sealed and marked
boxes for Owner's future repair and maintenance.
3.09 CLEAN-UP
A. Upon completion of the work of this section, remove all debris relating to
the conduct of this portion of the work from the premises.
END OF SECTION
FEBRUARY 1999 09330-5 VITREOUS CLAY TILE
LE9813 CHASE KITCHEN RENOVATION
space outward; making adjustments along walls, partitions and borders. •. ,
Joints between tile shall be 5/32 inch wide. Coordinate with work of
others, including abrasive nosing at steps.
D. Prime backing surfaces of wall surfaces for base application of tile.
Spread a 1/8 inch thick layer of setting adhesive on wall surface. Set in
and plumb tile with uniform joints, joints shall align with floor joints.
Comply with ANSI A118.4 for installation.
E. For rapid-set mortar follow manufacturer's installation instructions for
required curing time. Set file so as to break the skin formed on the rapid-
set mortar.
3.04 GROUTING
A. Tiles must be firmly set and setting bed completely dry. Joints must be
free of any debris, excess setting material or foreign matter before
grouting.
B. Mix grout according to Manufacturer's instructions.
C After grout has slaked, joints shall be thoroughly filled and wiped flush.
Care is to be taken not to scratch tiles. Clean all excess grout from all
exposed surfaces. Keep expansion joints clean and open for the
installation of sealant.
3.05 SEALANT AT EXPANSION JOINTS.
A. Install polyurethane sealant with a Shore A hardness of 35 or greater in
matching color at expansion joints according to details indicated on
drawings and meeting manufacturer's requirements.
B. Sealant color to be approved by architect. Provide backer rod and bond
breaker at building expansion joints.
3.06 CLEANING
A. Clean floor and base according to manufacturer's instructions.
3.07 PROTECTION
A. After quarry tile has been grouted and expansion joints sealed, cover
entire floor with waterproof kraft paper for a minimum period of
seventy-two (72) hours.
B. Protect with suitable mats, boards, or other protection from foot or wheel
traffic for seven (7) days after installation.
C Provide temperature and humidity control to meet manufacturer's
printed recommendations for full curing time.
FEBRUARY 1999 09330-4 VITREOUS CLAY TILE
LE9813 CHASE KITCHEN RENOVATION
A. Verify that substrate conditions meet requirements of manufacturer for
setting the product. Commencement of work indicates contractor has
accepted substrate conditions.
B. Set tile only at climatic conditions acceptable to manufacturer of product
to be set.
C Provide underlayment reinforcing appropriate to installation conditions
or as specifically indicated. Provide 2' - 0" wide strip at all cracks or
sawcuts where the expected horizontal movement is less than 1/8" or as
indicated on plans. Lap 8" minimum beyond crack or sawcut.
D. Tile shall be set according to standards set by the Tile Council of America.
E. Provide expansion joints as indicated on drawings, at all walls between
base and wall tile and at all existing joints in flooring substrates.
Expansion joints are to be provided at all locations where distances
between indicated joints exceed 36' - 0" in open floor areas or 16' - 0" at
areas exposed to direct sunlight. Contractor to obtain approval of
architect for expansion joint layout before the commencement of the
work.
F. Tile shall be laid in tile pattern(s) as indicated on drawings and, when
field conditions are met that conflict with drawings, as approved in field
by architect.
G. Tile flooring contractor will coordinate his work with the work of other
trades and install tile flooring in accordance with the schedule set by the
General Contractor coordinating the work.
3.02 UNDERLAYMENT REINFORCING
A. Use manufacturer's recommended cleaning method and bonding agent or
primer.
B. Install membrane according to manufacturer's recommended proceedure.
C All joints to be double cut butted type. Full adherence of membrane
required before application of flooring tile.
3.03 TILE INSTALLATION
A. Thoroughly clean and dry floor and wall surface. Provide bond coat as
required. Install tile meeting requirements of TCA Method F113-98, ANSI
A118.4 and tile setting material manufacturer's printed instructions for
thin set applications and TCA Method Flll-98 for thick set applications.
Misplaced tiles shall be replaced.
B. When installing tile over underlayment reinforcing membrane cover
100% coverage required of setting material with flat trowel application.
Reapply mortar with notch side of trowel over base as per requirements
for tile set.
C Bring each tile to true and level plane by use of a beating block; test
plane distortion with a straight-edge. Lay tile from the centerline of
FEBRUARY 1999 09330-3 VITREOUS CLAY TILE
LE9813 CHASE KITCHEN RENOVATION
2. Color and finish as selected by architect from manufactured selected
colors and finishes. Provide patterns, colors and shapes as indicated
on the drawings and as required to complete the work. Submit
samples of each color and finish for approval by Architect and
Owner.
3. Tile at dish drop shall be 12" x 12" modular "Chromtech Porcelain
Stoneware" as manufactured by Cerim-Floor Gres and distributed by
Boston Tile Company, Dedham, MA. color to be selected by Architect.
B. Tile Base Trim
1. Tile base trim shall round top cove base be 5" x 6" modular "Quarry
Naturals" Q-3565U as manufactured by American Olean.
2. Color and finish as selected by architect from manufactured selected
colors and finishes. Provide patterns, colors and shapes as indicated
on the drawings and as required to complete the work.Submit
samples for approval by Architect and Owner.
2.02 SETTING AND GROUTING MATERIALS
A. Setting Materials
1. Floor and wall thin set mortar shall be acrylic modified portland
cement sanded grout meeting requirements of ANSI A118.4.
2. Thick set mortar shall be acrylic modified portland cement sanded
grout meeting requirements of ANSI A118.6.
3. Underlayment Reinforcing Mesh: 40 mil self-bonding, laminated
flex fiber applied elastomeric sheet membrane, ECB "Anti-Fracture
Membrane, as manufactured by National Applied Construction
Products or equal.
B. Grout
1. Hydroment 1900 epoxy grout meeting requirements of ANSI A118.6.
Color is to be selected by architect and owner from manufacturer's
full range of colors.
2. Grout for tile base at tile floors shall match tile floor grout.
3. All grout shall be delivered to site premixed in manufacturer's
marked packaging.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 GENERAL
FEBRUARY 1999 09330-2 VITREOUS CLAY TILE
LE9813 CHASE KITCHEN RENOVATION
SECTION 09330
VITREOUS CLAY TILE
PART GENERAL
1.01 REQUIREMENTS INCLUDED
A. Prepare subfloor as required for proper installation of vitreous clay tile
work.
B. Furnish all materials and install all vitreous clay the work and related
items, to complete the work, as indicated.
C. Provide thick set bedding for all floor tile in coolers and freezers.
D. Remaining floor tile to be thin set.
1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS
A.. Concrete: Section 03300, CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE.
B. Abrasive nosings and threads: Section 05500, METAL FABRICATIONS.
C. Subflooring: Section 06100, ROUGH CARPENTRY.
D. Coolers and Freezers: Section 11400, FOOD SERVICE EQUIPMENT and
Drawing FS-2.
1.03 SUBMITTALS
A. Samples: Submit samples of actual tiles and accessories of all finish
materials specified under this Section to the Architect for selection and
approval.
1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Applicable provisions of the following trade standard publications shall
apply to work of this Section, and are hereby incorporated into the
Contract Documents.
1. ANSI A118 Standard Specifications, as applicable.
2. Handbook for Ceramic Tile Installation, Tile Council of America
(TCA), latest edition.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 TILE MATERIALS
A. Floor Tile
1. Floor file shall be 6" x 6" x 1/2" modular "Quarry Naturals" as
manufactured by American Olean. Color to be "Shadow Grey".
FEBRUARY 1999 09330-1 VITREOUS CLAY TILE
LE9813 CHASE KITCHEN RENOVATION
A. Provide additional 10% of each type and color of tile in sealed and marked „-
boxes for Owner's future repair and maintenance.
3.09 CLEAN-UP
A. Upon completion of the work of this section, remove all debris relating to
the conduct of this portion of the work from the premises.
END OF SECTION
FEBRUARY 1999 09310-6 CERAMIC TILE
LE9813 CH.-\SE KITCHEN RENOVATION
Joints between tile shall be 5/32 inch wide. Coordinate with work of
others, including abrasive nosing at steps.
D. Prime backing surfaces of wall surfaces for base application of tile.
Spread a 1/8 inch thick layer of setting adhesive on wall surface. Set in
and plumb tile with uniform joints, joints shall align with floor joints.
Comply with ANSI A118.4 for installation.
E. For rapid-set mortar follow manufacturer's installation instructions for
required curing time. Set tile so as to break the skin formed on the rapid-
set mortar.
3.04 GROUTING
A. Tiles must be firmly set and setting bed completely dry. Joints must be
free of any debris, excess setting material or foreign matter before
grouting.
B. Mix grout according to Manufacturer's instructions.
C After grout has slaked, joints shall be thoroughly filled and wiped flush.
Care is to be taken not to scratch tiles. Clean all excess grout from all
exposed surfaces. Keep expansion joints clean and open for the
installation of sealant.
3.05 SEALANT AT EXPANSION JOINTS.
A. Install polyurethane sealant with a Shore A hardness of 35 or greater in
matching color at expansion joints according to details indicated on
drawings and meeting manufacturer's requirements.
B. Sealant color to be approved by architect. Provide backer rod and bond
breaker at building expansion joints.
3.06 CLEANING
A. Clean floor and base according to manufacturer's instructions.
3.07 PROTECTION
A. After quarry tile has been grouted and expansion joints sealed, cover
entire floor with waterproof kraft paper for a minimum period of
seventy-two (72) -hours.
B. Protect with suitable mats, boards, or other protection from foot or wheel
traffic for seven (7) days after installation.
C Provide temperature and humidity control to meet manufacturer's
printed recommendations for full curing time.
3.08 EXTRA TILE
FEBRUARY 1999 09310-5 CERAMIC TILE
LE9813 CHASE KITCHEN RENOVATION
Floor Wall
Dry Set Mortar 1/8" in 10' 1/8" in 8'
Organic Adhesive 1/16" in 3' 1/8" in 8'
Latex Portland Cement Mortar 1/8" in 10' 1/8" in 8'
Epoxy 1/16" in 3'
B. Set tile only at climatic conditions acceptable to manufacturer of product
to be set.
C. Provide underlayment reinforcing appropriate to installation conditions
or as specifically indicated. Provide 2' - 0" wide strip at all cracks or
sawcuts where the expected horizontal movement is less than 1/8" or as
indicated on plans. Lap 8" minimum beyond crack or sawcut.
D. Tile shall be set according to standards set by the Tile Council of America.
E. Provide expansion joints as indicated on drawings, at all walls between
base and wall tile and at all existing joints in flooring substrates.
Expansion joints are to be provided at all locations where distances
between indicated joints exceed 36' - 0" in open floor areas or 16' - 0" at
areas exposed to direct sunlight. Contractor to obtain approval of
architect for expansion joint layout before the commencement of the
work.
F. Tile shall be laid in tile pattern(s) as indicated on drawings and, when
field conditions are met that conflict with drawings, as approved in field
by architect. ,
3.02 UNDERLAY vIENT REINFORCING
A. Use manufacturer's recommended cleaning method and bonding agent or
primer.
B. Install membrane according to manufacturer's recommended proceedure.
C. All joints to be double cut butted type. Full adherence of membrane
required before application of flooring tile.
3.03 TILE INSTALLATION
A. Thoroughly clean and dry floor and wall surface. Provide bond coat as
required. Install tile meeting requirements of TCA Method F113-98, ANSI
Al 18.4 and tile setting material manufacturer's printed instructions.
Misplaced tiles shall be replaced.
B. When installing tile over underlayment reinforcing membrane cover
100% coverage required of setting material with flat trowel application.
Reapply mortar with notch side of trowel over base as per requirements
for tile set.
C. Bring each tile to true and level plane by use of a beating block; test
plane distortion with a straight-edge. Lay file from the centerline of
space outward; making adjustments along walls, partitions and borders.
FEBRUARY 1999 09310-4 CERAMIC TILE
LE9813 CHASE KITCHEN RENOVATION
A. Portland Cement Mortar Installation Materials: Provide materials to
comply with ANSI A108.1 as required for installation method designated.
B. Cleavage Membranes: Polyethylene film. 4 mil. ASTM C171 Type 1.1.2.
C Underlayment Reinforcing Mesh: Welded wire fabric 2" x 2" 16116 gauge
or self bonding, sheet applied elastomeric membrane, ECB Membrane as
manufactured by National Applied Construction Products or equal.
D. Dry Set Portland Cement Mortar: ANSI 118.1 water retentive Portland
Cement mortar where thinset mortar applications are indicated.
E. Latex-Portland Cement: ANSI A118.4. Mixture of Portland Cement, sand
and special latex additives. Latices vary considerably. Follow
manufacturer's directions explicitly.
F. Organic Adhesive: ANSI A136.1 Type 1 for areas requiring prolonged
water resistance. Provide primer sealer as recommended by the
manufacturer.
G. Epoxy Mortar: ANSI 118.3 Formula AAR-II or high temperature resistance
formula where indicated.
2.03 GROUTING MATERIALS
A. Commercial Portland Cement Grout: Preblended compound composed of
Portland Cement and additives formulated for type of tile installed.
B. Latex Portland Grout: Use latex additive in grout compatible with latex
Portland Cement mortar.
C Dry Set Grout: Portland Cement and additives formulated for type of tile
installed.
D. Epoxy Grout: ANSI 118.3 AAR-II or HITOR for high temperature
requirements.
E. Grout for Pre-Grouted Sheets: Use same elastomeric used in factory
mounted sheets.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 GENERAL
A. Verify that substrate conditions meet requirements of manufacturer for
setting the product. Commencement of work indicates contractor has
accepted substrate conditions.
Before installation begins, substrate surfaces shall not show variations in
excess of:
FEBRUARY 1999 09310-3 CERAMIC TILE
LE9813 CHASE KITCHEN RENOVATION
1. ANSI A108.1 - Installation of ceramic tile with Portland Cement.
ANSI A108.4 - Installation of ceramic tile with water resistant
organic adhesives.
ANSI A108.5 - Installation of ceramic tile installed with dry set
Portland Cement Mortar or Latex Portland Cement Mortar.
ANSI A108.6 - Installation for ceramic tile installed with chemical
resistant epoxy.
2. American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM)
ASTM C150 - Specifications for Portland Cement
ASTM C206 - Specifications for Hydrated Lime
3. Federal Specifications (FS)
FS TT-S 001543 Class A or B (COM-NBS) One Part Silicone Rubber
4. "Handbook of Ceramic Tile Installation" - latest edition, as published
by the Tile Council of America.
1.06 PRODUCT HANDLING
A. Deliver to job site and store packaged material in original containers with
labels intact. Prevent damage to materials by water, freezing or other
causes.
1.07 PROJECT CONDITIONS
A. Maintain temperatures at not less than 50°F in tiled areas during
installation, and for 7 days after completion unless higher temperatures
are required by manufacturer's instructions.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 TILE MATERIALS
A. Tile to be 6" x 6" ceramic wall tile as manufactured by American Olean.
Colors for tile to be 07 - Gloss Linen, 67 - Almond, and 103 - Hunter Green.
Accent tile to be 6" x 6" Earthenware Glazed Wall Tile by American Olean.
Color to be to be EA03 Gloss Woodland Green.
B. Sizes, colors, textures and patterns as selected by the architect. See
drawings and schedules.
C Provide trim of the same color, size and finish of adjacent flat tile.
D. Glazed wall tile pre-grouted in factory mounted sheets with white silicone
rubber meeting FS TT-S 001543 Class A or B (COM-NBS).
E. Accessories - Furnish cast vitreous china accessories to match or
harmonize with color and finish of adjacent wall tile. Accessories
required where shown on drawings.
2.02 SETTING MATERIALS
FEBRUARY 1999 09310-2 CERAMIC TILE
LE9813 CHASE KITCHEN RENOVATION
SECTION 09310
CERAMIC TILE
PART 1 GENERAL
1.01 REQUIREMENTS INCLUDED
A. Prepare subfloor and wall surfaces as required for proper installation of
ceramic tile work.
B. Extent of tile as indicated on drawings and schedules. Types of tiles are as
follows:
1. Glazed Wall Tile
1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS
A. Concrete Floors: Section 03300, CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE.
B. Millwork: Section 06200, FINISH CARPENTRY.
C. Gypsum Wallboard: Section 09250, GYPSUM DRYWALL.
1.03 REFERENCES
A. The BIDDING REQUIREMENTS,CONTRACT FORMS AND CONDITIONS OF THE
CONTRACT and applicable parts of DIVISION 1 - GENERAL REQUIREMENTS,
as listed in the Table of Contents, shall be included in and made a part of
this Section.
B. Examine all Drawings and all other Sections of the Specifications for
requirements therein affecting the work of this Section.
1.04 Submittals
A. Certificates of Compliance: The manufacturer shall furnish Certificates
of Compliance_ stating conformance with all requirements of American
National Standards Institute Specification ANSI A137.1 1988.
B. Master Grade Certificate: Furnish Master Grade Certificates for each
shipment and type of tile signed by the manufacturer and the installer.
C Samples: Submit samples of each type of tile for each color and texture
required, not less than 12" square. A full size sample of each type of trim
for each color is required.
1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Source of Materials: Provide materials obtained from one source for each
type and color of tile, grout and setting materials.
B. Work shall be executed and tested in accordance with current editions of
the following standards:
FEBRUARY 1999 09310-1 CERAMIC TILE
LE9813 CHASE KITCHEN RENOVATION
A. Dow Number 11, or other adhesive compatible with FRP, or as
recommended by manufacturer. Use 100% coverage.
2.03 FASTENERS
A. Non-corrosive metal panhead mechanical fastener, 16" o.c. at outside
edges. Stagger fasteners on opposing panel edges. Hold fasteners
approximately 1" from panel edge.
2.04 VINYL MOLDINGS
A. Apply molding to all joints, corners (inside and out) and top and bottom of
panels. Set moldings in sealant.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 INSTALLATION
A. Install all FRP, adhesives, fasteners and moldings in accordance with
manufacturer's recommendations. Gypsum drywall surface to which
paneling is to be applied shall be smooth, clean, dry and free from defects
which might lead to distortion of FRP work.
3.02 CLEAN-UP
A. Upon completion of the work of this section, remove all debris relating to
the conduct of this portion of the work from the premises.
END OF SECTION
FEBRUARY 1999 09270-2 FIBERGLASS REINFORCED
PLASTIC WALL PANELING
LE9813 CHASE KITCHEN RENOVATION
SECTION 09270
FIBERGLASS REINFORCED PLASTIC WALL PANELING
PART 1 GENERAL
1.01 REQUIREMENTS INCLUDED
A. Furnish all materials and install all fiberglass reinforced plastic wall
paneling and cast fiberglass reinforced plastic panels (FRP) & (CFRP)
work and related items, to complete the work, as indicated on drawings
and specifications.
1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS
A. Gypsum Wallboard Substrate: Section 09250, GYPSUM DRYWALL.
B. Suspended Glass Board Ceilings: Section 09510, ACOUSTICAL CEILINGS.
C. Sealants: Section 07900, SEALANTS
D. Finish Carpentry Section 06200
1.03 SUBMITTALS
. A. Samples: Submit samples of all finish materials specified under this
Section to Architect for selection and approval.
1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. The drawings were prepared and this specification written on the basis of
using the products and the specifications of the Glasbord-X panels and
accessories, a product of Kemlite. It is not the intent to limit competitive
bidding. Equivalent products with equal construction colors and patterns
will be considered.
B. Meets USDAIFSIS requirements
C. Factory Mutual approved (J.I. IV5V5A9 AM)
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 PANELING
A. Fiberglass reinforced plastic panels (FRP), Glasbord-X as manufactured by
Kemlite, flame spread and smoke Class A(1) ASTM E-84, 4' x 8' long
embossed surface, 0.09 inches thickness, and weighing 0.7 pounds per
square foot. Color to be selected by Architect from Manufacturer's
standard colors.
'Aw 2.02 ADHESIVE
FEBRUARY 1999 09270-1 FIBERGLASS REINFORCED
PLASTIC WALL PANELING
LE9813 CHASE KITCHEN RENOVATION
faces of exterior steel framed curtain walls, do all sealing work required, as
indicated on the Drawings and generally as listed below.
1. Seal all joints between the gypsum wallboard and surrounding
construction.
2. Seal full perimeters of all frames, sleeves, ducts, and other items set
into, or passing through, gypsum wallboard construction.
3. Seal full perimeters of all projections through the gypsum wallboard
construction, such as pipes, conduits, etc.
4. Seal all control joints in the gypsum wallboard work.
5. Seal all joints between gypsum wallboard and adjoining gypsum
wallboard panels at comers and intersections.
6. Seal all joints between gypsum wallboard and adjoining door and
window frames in exterior walls.
7. Do all other sealing called for on the Drawings or reasonably required
to produce maximum thermal and sound transmission reduction
through the walls and partitions.
B. Seal joints in partitions continuing above suspended ceilings, in similar
manner, for acoustical purposes.
C Sealing shall be done using sealant of type specified hereinbefore, in strict
accordance with manufacturer's printed instructions and applicable
requirements of ASTM C 919. Sealant shall thoroughly fill void for a
complete sound and thermal seal, and shall be tooled to dense, smooth,
concave finish.
1. Except as may be otherwise specifically called for on the Drawings, in
two layer wallboard work seal only the outer layer.
3.09 PROTECTION AND CLEANING
A. Protect the work of other trades and work of this Section already installed
against soiling and damage by the exercise of reasonable care and
precautions. Repair or replace any work so damaged or soiled.
END OF SECTION
FEBRUARY 1999 09250-11 GYPSUM DRYWALL
LE9813 CHASE KITCHEN RENOVATION
A. Walls and partitions indicated on the Drawings with a STC Rating or
indicated to receive acoustical insulation shall have a single, continuous
layer of insulation installed as indicated and specified, filling the entire
open space between the framing members. Carry insulation behind backs
of all electric boxes and similar appurtenances. Provide mechanical
attachment to prevent future settlement.
3.06 INSTALLATION OF WALLBOARD ACCESSORIES
A. Install accessories at gypsum wallboard installations, as follows, in strict
accordance with manufacturer's instructions.
1. Install joint reinforcement tape at all joints, and at all internal
corners where abutting surfaces are both gypsum wallboard
construction.
2. Install corner beads at all external wallboard corners.
3. Install casing bead wherever finish wallboard abuts dissimilar
materials and other places where specifically called for on the
Drawings.
4. Install control joints generally over (and under) centers of all major
wall openings (those greater than 40% of wall height, measured floor
to ceiling), over all door frames, over control joints in back-up
materials, and at maximum distance of 30 ft. in walls, 60 ft. or to limit
areas to not more than 2400 sq. ft., at ceilings (except where lesser
distance is indicated), and other places specifically called for on the
Drawings. Interrupt furring and/or framing behind the control
joints. In all cases, specific locations of control joints shall be as
indicated or as directed by the Architect, and this information must be
in hand before control joint installation is begun.
5. Install access panels supplied by others as required. Before
installation, verify correct rating of panel to be installed.
3.07 JOINT FINISHING
A. Finish all corners, joints, and edges of gypsum wallboard and gypsum soffit
board work, and all corner beads, casing beads, control joints and other
trim to provide complete finishing of all exposed wallboard surfaces, in
strict accordance with manufacturer's printed instructions and ASTM C 840.
Finish to absolutely flush, true surface showing no irregularity when
tested by light source parallel to the plane of the nominal wallboard face.
B. Finish all concealed joints in wallboard above ceiling finishes flush with
tape and a minimum of two coats of compound to provide a continuous,
uninterrupted plane for acoustical and fire-resistive performance.
Concealed joints may be left in rough condition without finish sanding.
3.08 ACOUSTICAL SEALING
A. Walls and partitions designated on the Drawings with an STC Rating and/or
indicated to receive acoustical or thermal insulation, including interior
FEBRUARY 1999 09250-10 GYPSUM DRYWALL
LE9813 CHASE KITCHEN RENOVATION
1. Thoroughly fasten together, anchor, and brace to provide absolutely
rigid structural conditions fully capable of supporting the loads to be
applied with factor of safety not less than 2-1/2 to 1. Carry out the
work generally as detailed, strictly following instructions of the
manufacturer for steel and stud structural framing use. Screw all
connections with self-tapping metal screws or other appropriate
fasteners and provide all additional reinforcement required to assure
the required performance.
3.04 GYPSUM WALLBOARD APPLICATION
A. Unless otherwise indicated, application of gypsum wallboard shall conform
to ASTM C840.
B. Apply thickness and layers of gypsum wallboard at ceilings, walls,
partitions, column and beam enclosures as indicated. Stagger joints in each
layer. Locate joints in first layer on opposite sides of partitions to occur on
different studs. Apply wallboard at ceilings with long dimension
perpendicular to furring channels, with each end occurring over a
framing member. Install wallboard at walls and partitions with long
dimension vertical, and with each end and edge lying over a framing
member.
1. At double layer installations apply second layer by combination of
laminating' adhesive and mechanical fastenings (through first layer
into the steel framing and/or furring member behind), in strict
accordance with manufacturer's printed recommendations for each
project condition.
C. Carry gypsum wallboard, each side, continuously from floor to underside of
deck construction above, including above suspended ceilings, for acoustical
and fire-resistive performances.
D. To minimize end joints, use maximum practical lengths. Bring gypsum
wallboard panels into contact, but do not force into place. Fit abutting ends
and edges neatly. Provide slots for sealant at top, bottom, ends, and comers
of wallboard at all walls and partitions indicated to receive acoustical
insulation, as indicated. Also provide slots for sealant where wallboard
abuts other finish materials, as specified hereinbelow.
E. Spacing and installation of drywall screws for the various applications and
fire-rating requirements shall conform to the printed standards of the
manufacturer.
F. Set heads of fasteners flush with surface of the paper, but not breaking the
paper. Where attached loosely to a framing or furring member, a second
fastener shall be installed within 1-1/2 in.
G. Cut gypsum wallboard neatly at comers, edges, etc., and for pipes, electrical
outlets, electrical conduit and raceway, recessed cabinets, and other
projections.
3.05 ACOUSTICAL INSULATION
FEBRUARY 1999 09250-9 GYPSUM DRYWALL
LE9813 CHASE KITCHEN RENOVATION
3. Position steel studs vertically engaging both floor and runners.
Anchor studs located adjacent to door and floor glass frames, partition
intersections, corners, and over partition ends, to the floor and ceiling
runner flanges with positive screw engagement with 3/8 in. Type S
partition screws or by locking the studs with metal lock fasteners and
to the ceiling runner flanges by screw engagement. Allow for relief
of 1/2 in. roof or ceiling deflection at tops of all partitions by
screwing through slotted holes.
4. Install double stud at door and fixed glass frame jambs and securely
attach to the frame anchors by at least two screws per anchor. Over
steel door and fixed glass frames, install steel track header and install
studs above, with back-to-back pair, centered over the door to secure
control joints. Run continuous length of cold-rolled steel channel
through the stud cores, overlapping at least one stud beyond jamb
studs at each end. Frame out for recessed cabinets, accessories, grilles,
etc., as recommended by the manufacturer for each of the project
conditions.
C. Steel Stud Chase Walls: Construct partitions on both sides of non-fire rated
chase walls in same manner as other partitions, with studs in direct
alignment across the chase. Brace with three gypsum wallboard gussets,
per pair of studs, across the chase, located at quarter points, and screwed to
the studs. Comply with manufacturer's published details.
D. Steel Furring: Install screwable steel furring channels over faces of
concrete or masonry walls to receive gypsum wallboard finishes,
continuously along tops and bottoms of walls and in continuous vertical
rows space 16 in. o.c. along full length of each furring member, through
alternate flanges.
E. Metal Access Panels: Install all metal access panels at partitions, furrings,
and suspended ceilings. Access panels will be furnished to this trade loose
under other Section(s).
F. Fixture Attachments: Before any wallboard is installed, a complete survey
of all fixtures, accessories, cabinet work, shelves, rail brackets, door stops,
or other items to be attached to the finished work of this Section shall be
made and wood blocking or other attachments shall be installed within the
steel framing and furring work to receive the loads. Blockings or other
attachments for the various loads shall be as recommended by the
manufacturer and shall be described on the shop drawings. All such
fixture attachments shall be observed by the Contractor before
commencing installation of wallboard. All such blockings and attachments
shall be provided as work of this Section.
G. Miscellaneous Framing and Furring: Construct all special miscellaneous
screwable steel stud framing and furring, such as at ceiling edgings,
soffits, column and beam enclosures, skylight wells, etc., as detailed and as
required to achieve the shapes and profiles indicated and other
miscellaneous framing indicated and/or reasonably required for the
thorough completion of the Project.
FEBRUARY 1999 09250-8 GYPSUM DRYWALL
LE9813 CHASE KITCHEN RENOVATION
3.03 STEEL FR.A MLNG AND FURRING
A. Suspended Ceilings: Install complete suspended steel ceiling framing
system in accordance with ASTM C 754, and the following:
1. Install hangers at ends of, and 48 in. on center along lengths of main
runners, securing to ceiling structure above with the appropriate
anchors. Provide all additional secondary framing as required to
provide support by primary framing members or deck above. Do not
anchor hangers to pipes, ducts, or other overhead non-structural
elements.
2. Install steel runner channels 48 in. on center maximum and within 6
ft. of walls.
3. Install screwable steel furring channels perpendicular to main
runners and spaced 24 in. on center along length of, and within 6 in.
of walls without wall angles, and within 8 in. of ends of panels and
clipped to, the main runners.
4. Entire installation shall be level and true, with maximum variation
from level 1/8 in. when measured with a 10 ft. straight-edge, and with
accumulation of variation of level not to exceed 1/2 in. per room or
area.
B. Screwable Steel Stud Partition construction shall conform to ASTM C754,
and the following:
1. Installation of Partition Track: Align standard steel track at floors and
ceiling construction according to partition layouts and secure with
suitable fasteners to the floor and ceiling construction at a spacing
not to exceed 24 in. o.c. Carry all walls and partitions full height as
noted on the Drawings above ceiling to underside of floor and roof
decks. Fill all voids above track, such as steel deck flutes, "solidly with
packing wool or fiberglass insulation at non-fire rated partitions, and
with mineral wool fire-safing insulation at fire rated partitions for
smoke and fire-stopping purposed in flutes of steel deck directly above
top track where partitions run perpendicular to flutes, to achieve
effective closure and to assure the rated performance at fire-rated
assemblies. Where partitions run parallel to trusses provide 2 X 6
bridging 2'0" o.c. Where acoustical partitions (those to receive
acoustical insulation) and fire-rated partitions run parallel to trusses,
install all the track in continuous bed of acoustical or thermal sealant
formed by applying a 1/4 in. minimum bead of sealant to the rear of
the track and pressing into place. At fire-rated partitions also install
tightly backed fire-safing insulation in the voids for smoke and fire-
stopping purposes to achieve effective closure and to assure the rated
performance of the fire-rated assemblies.
2. Installation of Steel Studs: Steel studs shall be one piece, without
splices installed at spacing not to exceed 16 in. o.c. (or other spacing
indicated) and located at abutting construction and at the internal
apex of comers. Provide additional studs at comer conditions, frame
jambs, etc., as called for on the Drawings and specified herein.
FEBRUARY 1999 09250-7 GYPSUM DRYWALL
LE9813 CHASE KITCHEN RENOVATION
I. Acoustical Sealant:
1. Sealant for concealed applications shall be "BA-98 Acoustical Sealant",
manufactured by Pecora Chemical Corp., equivalent product
manufactured by U.S. Gypsum Co., National Gypsum Co., or approved
equal.
2. Sealant for exposed applications shall be paintable "AC-20 Acrylic
Latex Caulk", manufactured by Pecora Chemical Corp., equivalent
product manufactured by DAP or Gibson Homans Co., or approved
equal.
J. Exterior Sheathing: Asphalt wax-treated gypsum sheathing product
designed to resist moisture at exterior of wall framing in sizes, thickness
and fire ratings as indicated on drawings.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 INSPECTION AND COORDINATION
A. Inspect job conditions and related work and report to Architect in writing,
all conditions interfering with the proper installation of work of this
Section. Commencement of work in any given area shall constitute
acceptance of conditions in that area as acceptable to receive work of this
Section.
B. Make all changes and adjustments in work of this Section as needed to
accommodate the work of other trades, providing all cutting and patching
until it has been inspected.
3.02 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
A. Work shall conform to published specifications and installation
instructions of each manufacturer, the approved shop drawings, above-
referenced quality assurance standards, the governing laws and code.
Refer to Drawings to determine location of fire-resistive, fire-protective,
and acoustically-rated work, and construct this work to conform to the
specifications and installation instructions of UL or other testing
agency(ies). Also refer to the Drawings to determine the number of layers
of gypsum board, thickness of board, etc., for each of the installations.
B. Erect gypsum drywall work, rigidly support, and securely fasten in place,
in such manner that plumb, level, and true finished lines and surfaces will
result in the finished work in accordance with the requirements of ASTM C
754 and ASTM C 840.
C. Do gypsum drywall work only after all windows and door openings are
enclosed and a temperature of not less than 550F. is maintained during and
up to completion of the drywall work.
D. Gypsum drywall work only after permanent heat is installed.
FEBRUARY 1999 09250-6 GYPSUM DRYWALL
Sent by:LIVERMORE EDWARDS Feb-19-99 81 : 11pm from 1 781 890 2429+413 737 3558 F-a9e 2i 2
LE9813 CHASE SITCHEN RENOVATION
resistant gypsum will board shall be used at toilet rooms and kitchen areas
and as indicated on the drawings.
E. Joint Treatment Materials: Joint treatment materials shall conform to ASTM
C 475.
1. Laminating Adhesive and Joint Finishing compound: As recommended
by gypsum wallboard manufacturer, interior type for interior general
use, exterior type for use at water-resistant gypsum backer board.
2. Joint Tape: 2 in. to 2-1/2 in. wide paper tape, as recommended by
gypsum wallboard manufacturer.
F. Screws:
1. Screws for Attachment of Gypsum Wallboard to Steel Framing and
Furring Members: Self-drilling, Type S, bugle head screws,
conforming to ASTM C 646, with bugle-type Phillips-head, appropriate
size and length in each case as recommended by manufacturer.
2. Screws for Attachment of Gypsum Wallboard to Wood Blocking: Self-
drilling Type W screws conforming to ASTM C 894, with bugle-type
Phillips-head. Screw length and size in each case shall be as
recommended by gypsum wallboard manufacturer.
3. Screws for Attachment of Steel Framing and Furring Members to Other
Steel Members: Self-drilling, Type S, pan head screws, conforming to
ASTM C 646, appropriate size and length in each case as recommended
by manufacturer.
G: Accessories shall conform to ASTM C 840 and the following:
1. Corner Bead: 1 in. by 1 in. perforated flange, standard type, 26 gauge,
galvanized steel, for compound finishing.
2. Metal Trim: 24 gauge, galvanized steel, with perforated flanges, for
compound finishing.
3. Control Joint: 26 gauge, galvanized steel, "Vee" type, with perforated
flanges, for compound finishing.
H. Acoustical Insulation:
1.
Blanket/Batt Insulation: Indicated thickness by 16-1/8 in. and 24-118
in. wide, as appropriate, equal to "Fiberglas CWI Unfaced Insulation",
manufactured by Owens-Corning Piberglas Corp., or approved equal.
2. Packing Wool Insulation: Fiberglas or mineral wool packing
insulation, equal to products manufactured by U.S. Gypsum Co. or
Owens-Corning Fiberglas Corp.
3. Fire Safing Insulation: Mineral fiber fire-rated fire safing insulation
in conformance with the governing n or laws
a lding code,
manufactured by U.S. Gyp q
FEBRUARY 1999 09250-5 GYPSUM DRYWALL
LE9813 CHASE KITCHEN RENOVATION
B. Cement board fiberglass reinforced lightweight concrete panel "Wonder ..
Board" by Modulars, Inc., Hamilton, OH or "Durock" by USG Industries,
Chicago, IL.
2.02 MATERIALS
A. Ceiling Suspension System: Shall be a complete, mechanical suspension
system, conforming to ASTM C 645, consisting of cold-rolled steel channel
main runners, screwable steel furring channels, hangers, and anchors,
and all required clips and other components, required for complete
installation.
1. Hanger anchors shall be of type suitable for each of project
conditions, and of sufficient capacity (not less than 150 lb. live load
each) for purpose intended.
2. Hangers shall be 12 gauge, minimum, galvanized and annealed steel
wire.
3. Steel runner channels shall be 1-1/2 in. cold-rolled 16 gauge steel
channels, weighing 475 lb. per 1,000 lin. ft., shop painted black.
4. Screwable steel ceiling furring channels shall be 25 gauge hot-dip
galvanized, ,screwable, pressed steel furring channels, 7/8 in. thick,
hat section.
5. Clips for attachment of steel furring channels to steel carrying A
channels shall be proprietary clips as recommended by manufacturer.
6. Tie Wire: Not less than 16 gauge annealed and galvanized.
B. Screwable Steel Stud Framing System: Unless otherwise indicated, shall be a
complete proprietary framing system consisting of prefabricated, non-load
bearing, screwable 20 gauge (heavy gauge) and 25 gauge (light gauge)
hot-dip galvanized steel studs, and all required steel track, anchors, and
related items, conforming to ASTM C 645, all hot-dip galvanized.
1. Steel studs at jambs of door and fixed glass frames, at open partition
ends, where the partition is to receive wall-mounted shelves, heavy
fixtures, etc., and where use of light gauge studs is limited by
manufacturer's structural design tables shall be 20 gauge. At other
locations studs shall be 25 gauge.
2. Wood blockings for support of fixtures, accessories, etc., shall be
Construction and/or Standard Grade Hem-fir.
C. Screwable Steel Wall Furring Channels: 25 gauge hot-dip galvanized,
screwable, pressed steel furring channels, 7/8 in. thick, hat section, Z
furring channels, lin., 1-1/2 in. and 2 in. Z shaped channels.
D. Gypsum Wallboard: Indicated thickness(es) by 48 in. width by lengths as
required, tapered edge, paper finish, conforming to ASTM C36. Where used
in fire-rated assemblies, Type X fire resistant type shall be used. Moisture
FEBRUARY 1999 09250-4 GYPSUM DRYWALL
LE9813 CHASE KITCHEN RENOVATION
C 1002 Specification for Steel Drill Screws for the Application of Gypsum
Board or Metal Plaster Bases
C 1047 Specification for Accessories for Gypsum Wallboard and Gypsum
Veneer Base
B. All products used in the Project shall be manufactured by the same
manufacturer.
1.05 SUBMITTALS
A. Shop Drawings: Furnish complete shop drawings and product cuts of all
work of this Section to Architect for approval, showing all pertinent details
of construction -and installation, and sizes, gauges, configurations, and
connections of all components. Confirm on shop drawings that deflection
will not exceed L1360 of length.
B. Samples: Furnish samples of materials to be furnished under this Section to
Architect for approval.
1.06 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Reference Standards: Conform to governing laws, building code and
manufacturer's printed standards.
1.07 COORDINATION
A. Work of this Section shall be coordinated with the work of other Sections to
assure the steady progress of all the work of the Contract. Obtain complete
information regarding wall and ceiling mounted fixtures, grilles, registers,
access panels, equipment, accessories, etc. to be used on the work from
other trades. In no case shall work of other Sections be concealed until it
has been inspected.
1.08 PRODUCT DELIVERY,STORAGE,AND HANDLING
A. Deliver all manufactured materials to site in original packages, containers,
or bundles bearing the manufacturer's name and brand names, type of
material, and contents.
B. Store materials in interior spaces, above floors, under cover, away from
sweating walls and other damp surfaces, and with good ventilation.
C. Handle gypsum boards to prevent damage to edges, ends, or surfaces.
Protect metal comer beads, casing beads, and trim from being bent or
damaged.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 MANUFACTURERS
A. Materials shall be manufactured by Gold Bond Building Products, United
States Gypsum Co., Georgia-Pacific Co.
FEBRUARY 1999 09250-3 GYPSUM DRYWALL
LE9813 CHASE KITCHEN RENOVATION
1.03 REFERENCES
A. The BIDDING REQUIREMENTS,CONTRACT FORMS AND CONDITIONS OF THE
CONTRACT and applicable parts of DIVISION 1 - GENERAL REQUIREMENTS, as
listed in the Table of Contents, shall be included in and made a part of this
Section.
B. Examine all Drawings and all other Sections of the Specifications for
requirements therein affecting the work of this Section.
1.04 REFERENCED STANDARDS
A. American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM):
C 36 Specification for Gypsum Wallboard
C 79 Test Method for Gypsum Sheathing Board
C 442 Specification for Gypsum Backing Board and Coreboard
C 475 Joint Treatment Materials for Gypsum Wallboard Construction
C 514 Specification for Nails for the Application of Gypsum Wallboard
C 630 Specification for Water-Resistant Gypsum Backing Board
C 645 Specification for Non-Load (Axial) Bearing Steel Studs, Runners
(Track), and Rigid Furring Channels for Screw Application of
Gypsum Board
C 646 Specification for Steel Drill Screws for the Application of Gypsum
Board to Light-Gauge Steel Studs
C 754 Specification for Installation of Steel Framing Members to
Receive Screw-Attached Gypsum Board
C 840 Specifications for Application and Finishing of Gypsum Board
C 893 Type G Steel Screws for the Application of Gypsum Board to
Gypsum Board
C 894 Type W Screws for the Application of Gypsum Board to Wood
Framing
C 919 Sealants in Acoustical Applications
C 931 Specification for Exterior Gypsum Soffit Board
C 954 Specification for Steel Drill Screws for the Application of Gypsum
Board to Steel Studs from 0.033 in. (0.84-mm) to 0.112 in. (2.84-
mm) in Thickness
FEBRUARY 1999 09250-2 GYPSUM DRYWALL
LE9813 CHASE KITCHEN RENOVATION
SECTION 09250
GYPSUM DRYWALL
PART GENERAL
1.01 REQUIREMENTS INCLUDED
A. Furnish and install gypsum drywall work, as indicated on the Drawings and
as specified herein. Include, but do not limit to:
1. Steel suspension systems for interior gypsum wallboard ceilings.
2. Screwable steel stud interior partition framing.
3. Screwable steel stud framed and furred enclosures at columns and
beams.
4. Rated fire walls and shaft-wall construction at vertical chases and at
mechanical shafts where indicated.
5. Blockings and attachments for fixture supports on exterior and
interior walls.
6. Gypsum wallboard finishes for interior ceilings, walls, partitions,
ceiling edgings, soffits, interior skylight wells, column enclosures,
beam enclosures, etc.
7. Acoustical sealing and acoustical insulation of gypsum wallboard
finishes at steel stud framed partitions and furrings where indicated.
8. Other gypsum drywall work called for on the Drawings or reasonably
required to complete the Project intent.
9. Install access panels required in gypsum drywall work.
10. The drywall contractor must provide all required cranes and lifts.
1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS
A. Wood blocking, furring, grounds, etc., except plumbing fixture support
blocking: Section 06100, ROUGH CARPENTRY.
B. Access doors: Section 08305, ACCESS DOORS.
C. Resilient base: Section 09678, RESII.IENT BASE AND ACCESSORIES.
D. Painting: Section 09900, PAINTING.
E. Wood trim: Section 06200, FINISH CARPENTRY.
F. Curved plaster ceilings: Section 09100, PLASTERING WORK.
G. Comer guards: Section 10100, SPECIALTIES
FEBRUARY 1999 09250-1 GYPSUM DRYWALL
LE9813 CHASE KITCHEN RENOVATION
A. In Accordance with the following ASTM Standards and manufacturer's
recommendations:
1. Metal Lath, Gypsum Lath, and Accessories: C841.
2. Gypsum Plaster: C 842.
B. Gypsum Plaster Work
1. Plaster Type: Shall be smooth-trowelled gypsum-lime plaster finish
applied over a single double-back gypsum-sand base coat applied to
back-up material to which a continuous application of bonding
agent or metal lath, as appropriate, has been applied. 3.4 lb. diamond
mesh metal lath shall be used where insufficient back-up surface is
available.
2. Patching of existing plaster to remain shall be done with best
workmanship and with careful attention given to matching
appearance of new work to the existing work and to make transitions
between new and existing work as imperceptible as possible in the
finished work.
C. Tolerances: For flatness of surface, do not exceed 1/4 in. in 8 ft. for bow
or warp of surface and for plumb and level.
3.02 CLEANING
A. Remove plaster and protective materials from accessories and from
adjacent surfaces.
END OF SECTION
FEBRUARY 1999 09210-3 PLASTERING WORK
LE9813 CHASE KITCHEN RENOVATION
7. C 842, Specification for Application of Interior Gypsum Plaster. ,
8. C 847, Specification for Metal Lath.
9. C 954, Specification for Steel Drill Screws for the Application of
Gypsum Board or Metal Plaster Bases to Steel Studs from 0.33 in. (0.84
mm) to 0.112 in. (2.84 mm) in Thickness.
10. C 1002, Specification for Steel Drill Screws for the Application of
Gypsum Board or Metal Plaster Bases.
1.05 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: - Manufacturer's specifications and installation instructions
for each product specified.
B. Shop Drawings: Show layout of control joints.
1.06 PROJECT CONDITIONS
A. Environmental Requirements: Comply with ASTM C 842.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 MATERIALS
A. Materials shall be by U.S. Gypsum Co., National Gypsum Co., or equal
approved by the Architect.
B. Gypsum Plastering Materials:
1. Base Plaster: Gypsum neat plaster complying with ASTM C28.
2. Finish plaster: Gypsum gauging plaster complying with ASTM C28.
C Metal Lath:
1. Diamond Mesh Lath: Expended metal lath with 5/16 in. wide
diamonds, weighing 2.5 lbs. and 3.4 lbs. per sq. yd., galvanized or
painted steel, and complying with ASTM C 847.
D. Sand: ASTM C35.
E. Water: Potable.
F. Delivery and Storage of Materials: Manufactured materials shall be
delivered to the site in original packages or containers bearing the
manufacturer's names and brand names and stored to protect from
damage.
PART 3 EXECUTITON
3.01 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
FEBRUARY 1999 09210-2 PLASTERING WORK
LE9813 CHASE KITCHEN RENOVATION
SECTION 09210
PLASTERING WORK
PART 1 GENERAL
1.01 REQUIREMENTS INCLUDED
A. Scope: Furnish all materials and install all lathing and plastering work
and related items, to complete the work, as indicated. Include:
1. Patching of defects in existing gypsum plaster surfaces which
presently exist or are caused by work of this Contract.
2. Plaster surfaces as indicted on the drawings.
1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS
A. Demolition work: Section 02112, SELECTIVE DEMOLITION AND CLEANING
B. Gypsum drywall ceilings: Section 09250, GYPSUM DRYWALL
C Rough carpentry. : Section 61000, ROUGH CARPENTRY
1.03 REFERENCES
A. The BIDDING REQUIREMENTS,CONTRACT FORMS AND CONDITIONS OF THE
CONTRACT and applicable parts of DMSION 1 - GENERAL REQUIREMENTS,
as listed in the Table of Contents, shall be included in and made a part of
this Section.
B. Examine all drawings and all other sections of the Specifications for
requirements therein affecting the work of this section.
1.04 REFERENCED STANDARDS
A. Association Standards and Quality: Specification Standards ANSI A42.1 and
A42.2 shall apply to the work of this Section.
B. American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM):
1. A 641, Specification for Zinc-Coated (Galvanized) Carbon Steel Wire.
2. C 28, Specification for Gypsum Plasters.
3. C 35, Specification for Inorganic Aggregates for Use in Gypsum
Plaster.
4. C 37, Specification for Gypsum Lath.
5. C 59, Specification for Gypsum Casting and Molding Plaster.
6. C 841, Specification for Installation of Interior Lathing and Lathing.
FEBRUARY 1999 09210-1 PLASTERING WORK
LE9813 CHASE KITCHEN RENOVATION
shall be coated with mirror backing paint, baked on. Adhesives ,,
shall be of the type recommended by the manufacturer of the
glass for the conditions of installation.
d. Observation glass shall be 1/4" transparent mirror glass,
pyrolitic silver on grey glass as manufactured by Globe Amerada
Glass Co, or approved equal.
e. Security Glazing shall be 1/4" thickness with PVB interlayer
meeting requirements of ASTM F 1233.
2.02 GLAZING MATERIALS
A. Glazing Sealant: Shall be a one-part, liquid-polymer, acrylic-based
sealant.
B. Glazing compound shall be elastic glazing compound meeting Fed. Spec.
TT-G-00410c.
G Glazing tape shall be polyisobutylene or polybutene tape, flat or tapered
configuration as required by profile of glazing stop, 1/8 in. . minimum
thickness.
D. Setting blocks, spacers and setting glides shall be made of resilient
neoprene, with 70-90 durometer for setting blocks and 40-50 durometer
for spacers.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 All glazing work shall conform to the manufacturer's printed instructions, the
standards of the Flat Glass Manufacturers Association "Glazing Manual", and
with details on the Drawings.
3.02 Furnish tempered glass which has been fully tempered after cutting to finish
size to achieve a flexural strength of 4 times normal glass strength. Provide
all tempered glass free of visually exposed tongue marks and oil canning.
3.03 Set exterior glass by heel bead method, using glazing tape on the interior stop,
a heel bead of glazing sealant, and glazing sealant on the exterior stop. Set
interior glass by conventional stop bead glazing method, using glazing
compound on both stops, except at tempered glass and wired-glass substitute
glazing tapes and/or glazing sealant on both stops.
3.04 Mirrors shall be flush mounted with adhesive, with adjacent edges closely
butted, according to manufacturer's printed recommendations.
END OF SECTION
FEBRUARY 1999 08800-2 GLASS AND GLAZING
LE9813 CHASE KITCHEN RENOVATION
SECTION 08800
GLASS AND GLAZING 1�7
PART GENERAL
1.01 REQUIREMENTS
A. Furnish all labor and materials to complete all glass and glazing work as
indicated. Include, but do not limit to:
1. Glazing of interior doors with fixed lites.
2. Glazing for interior frames.
3. Mirrors.
1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS
A. Steel doors: Section 08100, STEEL DOORS AND FRAMES
1.03 SUBMITTALS
A. Samples: Submit 12" x 12" samples of all glass and glazing items to
Architect for approval.
B. Shop Drawings: Submit complete shop drawings of all work under this
Section to Architect for approval, including engineer calculations for
interior structural glass screen, glazing channels and support channels.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 GLASS
A. Glass shall be of thickness and quality specified herein, and shall
conform to Fed. Spec. DD-G-451 a and DD-G-001403.
1. Glass Schedule: Exterior and interior glass shall be of types indicated
on the Drawings and specified as follows. All glass shall conform to
all federal, state, and local safety glazing requirements.
a. Glass for general use shall be 1/4 in. thick clear wire-glass
(where required by governing code) and clear float glass at other
locations, flat tempered where required to comply with safety
.glazing requirements.
b. Curtainwall, door and window insulating glass shall be 1 inch
thick and shall consist of 1/4 inch thick tempered glass sheets,
metal tubing spaced and double hermetically sealed to form a
double glazed panel. The spacer shall be filled with a moisture
absorbing desiccant. Both lites shall be clear glass.
c. Flush mounted unframed mirrors shall be 1/4 inch thick mirror
quality glass with a copper protected silver coating. The copper
FEBRUARY 1999 08800-1 GLASS AND GLAZING
LE9813 CHASE KITCHEN RENOVATION
B. Provide services of hardware manufacturer's representative to inspect
AM hardware six months after Substantial Completion of Project. Readjust and
restore hardware.
END OF SECTION
FEBRUARY 1999 08710-11 FINISH HARDWARE
LE9813 CHASE KITCHEN RENOVATION
c. Kickplates 8" both sides
Set #8
a. Butts
b. Storeroom lockset
c. Coordinator
e. Closer on each leaf
f. Astrigal on inactive leaf
g. Automatic flush bolts T&B inactive leaf
Set #9
a. Butts
b. Privacy lock set
c. Closer
d. Kickplates 8" both sides
PART 3 -EXECUTION
3.01 INSTALLATION
A. Hardware shall be attached and placed by skilled mechanics and shall be
fitted and adjusted accurately. Install hardware on doors and frames at
locations conforming to ANSI and NAHM standards, and DHI
"Recommended Locations for Builder's Hardware."
B. Install metal thresholds, weatherstripping, sound seals, etc., furnished as
part of finish hardware, in strict accordance with manufacturer's
published recommendations and with approved Submittals. Set exterior
thresholds in beds of sealant provided under Section 07900, SEALANTS.
3.02 COMPLETION AND CONTINUED MAINTENANCE
A. Before completion of work of this Section, inspect work with Architect
and adjust and correct work to leave operating parts in perfect operating
condition, jointing to adjacent materials tight, surfaces without blemishes
or stains, work properly executed and complete, and defects and damaged
work replaced is corrected.
FEBRUARY 1999 08710-10 FINISH HARDWARE
LE9813 CHASE KITCHEN RENOVATION
c. Entrance lockset
d. Kickplate 30" high both sides
e. Weatherstripping at 4 sides of door.
Set #2
a. Butts.
b. Passage set
c. Kickplate 30" high both sides
Set #3
a. Butts.
b. Storeroom Lockset
c. Kickplate 30' high both sides
Set #4
a. Butts.
b. Storeroom lockset
c. Kickplates 8" both sides
d. Kickplates
Set #5
a. Existing Doors to get replacement hardware to match existing.
Set #6
a. Butts
b. Office lockset
c. Closer
d. Kickplates 8" both sides
Set #7
a. Butts
b. Storeroom lockset
FEBRUARY 1999 08710-9 FINISH HARDWARE
LE9813 CHASE KITCHEN RENOVATION
2.15 HANDICAPPED ASSIST DEVICES Awk,
A. Where indicated provide and install handicapped assist device complete
with all elements to provide service as intended. Coordinate with all other
hardware, existing field conditions, etc.
B. Door assist system to be Beasam Model #150 Automatic Door Opening
Mechanism (W. J. Flynn Company, Woburn MA).
C. System to have the following features: NA
2.16 ALARM DEVICES FOR DOOR SECURITY
A. Where alarm device is specified at exit doors with Von Duprin exit devices
provide a Von Duprin Monitor Strike Device at door latch.
B. Provide Von Duprin head mounted magnetic door position monitor switch
for all alarmed doors.
C. Wire alarms so that either device, if both are provided, registers alarm.
D. Provide Power supply as required for specified device.
2.17 CARD READING DEVICES (Supplied and installed by Owner)
A. Card Readers to be "Synergistics" as supplied by. A.L.Purington
Corporation (508) 754-2618.
B. Control Panel to be as supplied by A.L Purington Corp. for above indicated
use.
2.18 POWER SUPPLY FOR DOOR SYSTEMS
A. Power Supply device to be MPB 851 by Von Duprin.
2.19 ELECTRIC STRIKES
A. Strikes to be Von Duprin Series 6000 compatible with latching hardware
and power device for door system.
2.20 FINISH HARDWARE SCHEDULE
A. Refer to the Door Schedule on the Contract Drawings for general
functions and locations of finish hardware to be furnished hereunder for
doors and frames.
B. Hardware Sets Schedule:
Set #1
a. Butts
b. Closer w/ holdopen
FEBRUARY 1999 08710-8 FINISH HARDWARE
LE9813 CHASE KITCHEN RENOVATION
!$Wk B. Furnish specified manufacturer's 8-inch high (16-inches high for
handicapped doors and 32-inches high for kitchen doors) kick plates for
doors where so indicated, of widths as determined by door width; 2 inches
LWOD for single doors, and one inch LWOD for pairs of doors.
C. Items are to be solid in material specified. No plated products will be
accepted.
2.09 DOOR PULLS
A. Furnish Burns No. 26B surface pulls for doors where so indicated.
2.10 FLUSH BOLTS AND COORDINATORS
A. Manual flush bolts: Ives No. 458B.
B. Automatic flush bolts for hollow metal doors: Ives No. 459B.
C. Automatic flush bolts for wood doors: Ives No. 456B.
D. Coordinators: Ives 900 Series.
2.11 ROLLER LATCHES
A. Furnish Glynn-Johnson No. GJ-30 roller latches for doors where so
indicated.
2.12 SILENCERS
A. Furnish Ives No. 20 silencers for all interior pressed steel door frames, at
a rate of 3 silencers per single door, and 2 per pair of doors.
2.13 THRESHOLDS
A. Furnish and install thresholds as indicated on documents suitable for
purpose and conditions indicated.
B. Finish of thresholds to be mill finish aluminum unless otherwise
indicated.
C. Thresholds shall meet requirements of ADA and local Accessibility codes.
2.14 SOUND GASKETING AT DOORS
A. Where indicated on drawings or schedules, provide sound gasketing at all
edges of doors.
B. For door jambs and heads, provide Zero Model #770 adjustable sound
sealing system.
C. At door sills provide Zero Model #362 automatic door bottom in wood doors
and Model #360 in metal doors.
FEBRUARY 1999 08710-7 FINISH HARDWARE
LE9813 CHASE KITCHEN RENOVATION
2.04 KEYING AND KEY CONTROL
A. Grand Master Key all locks to the existing lock system, as directed by the
Architect and/or the Owner.
B. Furnish four (4) Grand Master Keys and four {4) Master Keys each set.
Deliver all master keys as directed.
C Furnish three (3) change keys for each locking device.
D. Construction Masterkey all cylinders. Furnish twelve (12) Construction
Master Keys.
2.05 CLOSERS
A. Furnish closers for all doors where so indicated, with drop plates and
accessories as required, for mounting locations on door face which will
be least frequently exposed to view. Refer to the Door Schedule on the
drawings for degrees of opening for each door ' requiring closers.
B. Closers for exterior out swinging doors: LCN Series 4111 or 4110 w/90 deg.
stop.
C Closers for interior doors, except as otherwise indicated: LCN Series 4111
or 4110 w/ Cush-N-Stop holder on non-fire-rated doors only..
2.06 EXIT DEVICES
A. Refer to the Door Schedule on the Drawings for locations of doors
requiring exit devices.
B. Exit devices for pairs of doors: Von Duprin 99 Series. Finish color to be
selected by Architect.
C Exit hardware for single doors shall be Von Duprin Series to match double
doors with dogging. Finish color to be selected by Architect.
2.07 STOPS AND STAYS
A. Furnish a stop or stay for each door and each leaf of a pair of doors.
Provide floor stops for all locations, except where conditions do not
permit proper installation of same; in such cases provide overhead stays.
B. Determine height of each floor stop by the various conditions, such as
undercut doors, thresholds, carpeting, and other floor coverings. Where
carpeting occurs, furnish a base riser where so required.
D. Overhead stays: Corbin Series 775.
2.08 PUSH PLATES AND KICK PLATES
A. Furnish specified manufacturer's 16 by 5 inch push plates for doors
where so indicated.
FEBRUARY 1999 08710-6 FINISH HARDWARE
LE9813 CHASE KITCHEN RENOVATION
15. Astragals: Pemko, Therm-L-Brush
16. Silencers Ives
17. Handicapped assist devices: Beasam
D. Provide thru bolts with finish washers wherever possible to connect to
door hardware (closers, pulls, hinges, exit devices).
2.02 HINGES AND PIVOTS
A. Furnish 2 hinges or pivots per door, for heights up to and including 60
inches: and an additional hinge or pivot for each additional 30 inches, or
fraction thereof, in height of the door.
B. Furnish Stanley Lifespan 500 continuous hinges cut full length for all as
indicated on schedule.
C Furnish Stanley CB 1900 Series, except as otherwise noted, for all interior
doors, and sized as follows:
Door Thickness Door Width Hinge Weight Hinge Height
1-3/8 inches . All widths Plain bearing 4-1/2 inches
1-2/4 inches 39 inches and less Regular weight 4-1/2 inches
1-2/4 inches More than 39 inches Extra heavy 4-1/2 inches
D. Determine hinge widths by the specific trim condition.
E. All exterior doors shall have pivot hinges.
2.03 LOCKSETS AND LATCHSETS
A. Refer to the Door Schedule and the drawings for intended lock functions.
Submit lock functions to Owner for final approval.
B. Furnish Corbin ML2200 (6PIN, L4 Keyway) locksets for all doors, except as
otherwise noted below:
• Dorm room locksets ML2210
• Exterior doors ML2265
• Closet doors ML2257, DL4000
C Furnish 2-3/4 inch backset locks and latches, with -wrought box strikes.
D. Furnish abrasive type textured strip behind levers at all mechanical
rooms, elevator machine room, electrical rooms, and other hazardous
areas for identification of hazard by handicapped..
E. Furnish cylinder locks, only, for overhead doors, entrance doors and
screens.
FEBRUARY 1999 08710-5 FINISH HARDWARE
LE9813 CHASE KITCHEN RENOVATION
1.11 GUARANTEE
A. In addition to the specific guarantee requirements of the GENERAL
CONDITIONS and modifications to the GENERAL CONDITIONS, the Contractor
shall obtain in the Owner's name the standard written manufacturer's
guarantee of all materials furnished under this Section where such
guarantees are offered in the manufacturer's published product data. All
these guarantees shall be in addition to, and not in lieu of, other liabilities
which the Contractor may have by law or other provisions of the Contract
Documents.
PART 2 -PRODUCTS
2.01 FINISH HARDWARE - GENERAL
A. Finish and Base Material Designations: Unless otherwise indicated, all
hardware shall have US4 finish. Door closers shall be sprayed finish to
match hardware.
B. Hardware Mounting Heights: DHI "Recommended Locations for Builders
Hardware", except as otherwise indicated.
C. Acceptable Manufacturers: Numbers used in preparation of this Section
have been taken from the following manufacturer's catalogues, or equal
as approved by Architect.
1. Butts and hinges: Stanley
2. Locksets, latchsets and cylinders Corbin Russwin
3. Exit devices Von Duprin
4. Closers: LCN
5. Push-pull bar assemblies: Burns
6. Pulls: Burns
7. Protection plates: Burns
8. Floor stops: Ives
9. Overhead stops: Ives
10. Flush bolts: Ives
11. Coordinators: Ives
12. Roller latches: Glynn Johnson
13. Gasketing: Zero
14. Thresholds: Pemko
FEBRUARY 1999 08710-4 FINISH HARDWARE
LE9813 CHASE KITCHEN RENOVATIO.N
B. Each hardware item shall have the required screws, bolts, and fastenings
necessary for proper installation and shall be wrapped in the same
package as the hardware item for which it is intended, and shall match
finish of hardware with which to be used.
1.08 PRODUCT DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING
A. Delivery of hardware shall be made to the Project by the Hardware
Supplier in accordance with the instructions of the Contractor.
B. Provide adequate locked storage space with shelving for the hardware,
and shall be responsible for all items of hardware after. receipt from the
Supplier, and shall replace all hardware lost or damaged after delivery
and receipt. -
C. Furnish receipts for hardware and accessory items to Owner.
1.09 MATERIALS AND QUALITY
A. Work of this Section shall conform to governing laws and building codes.
B. Hardware shall be of the grade of solid metal entirely free from
imperfections in manufacture and finish.
C. Qualities, weights, and sizes given herein are the minimum that will be
accepted. It is the responsibility of the Hardware Supplier to supply the
specified size and weight of hardware and the proper function of
hardware in each case and to provide the proper UL approved hardware
at UL labeled fire-rated doors.
D. To the fullest extent possible, each of the following items shall be the
product of one manufacturer for the entire project:
1. Locksets and lockset trim.
2. Butts.
3. Door closers.
1.10 HANDICAPPED REQUIREMENTS
A. Ensure that the various items of hardware are of a design and function to
permit exterior doors to be opened with a maximum pressure of fifteen
(15) pounds; and interior doors to be opened with a maximum pressure of
ten (10) pounds.
B. Equip doors, opening into hazardous areas from path of travel, with
knurled knobs or handles, to provide tactile warning for the visually
handicapped.
C. Ensure that all hardware conforms to the handicapped requirements of
the Architectural Barriers Board having jurisdiction and the ADA, for use
in public buildings.
FEBRUARY 1999 08710-3 FINISH HARDWARE
LE9813 CHASE KITCHEN RENOVATION
1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Hardware supplier shall have in his employ a member of the American
Society of Hardware Consultants, who shall be responsible for the
complete requirements of this Project.
B. Hardware installation shall conform to Door and Hardware Institute (DHI)
published recommendations.
1.05 SUBMITTALS
A. Hardware Schedule: Submit six copies of a complete hardware schedule, as
proposed, within ten days after award of contract for approval by the
Architect. Hardware schedule shall be in vertical format and shall list
each door opening throughout the Project, its size and materials, fire
labeling (if any) and other relevant information. Submit therewith
complete catalog cuts and descriptive data of items that differ from
products specifically scheduled herein. Formal details of the hardware
shall be subject to Architect's approval.
B. Product Data: Submit complete manufacturer's product data to Architect
for approval, consisting of complete catalog cuts including as descriptive
data, UL listings, and other pertinent technical data required for complete
product and product use information.
G Samples: Submit to the Architect for approval, a complete line of samples
as directed by the Architect. Samples shall be plainly marked giving
hardware number used in this Specification, the manufacturer's
numbers, types and sizes. The Architect will deliver approved samples to
the Project site to be stored. Samples will remain with the Architect until
delivery of all hardware to the Project is complete, after which time they
will be turned over to the Contractor for incorporation into the work.
1.06 REVIEW AND TEMPLATES
A. Hardware Supplier shall review hardware functions with the Architect at
time of submission of the hardware schedules to ensure the
appropriateness of each of the hardware functions.
B. Keying arrangement: Prior to ordering keys for hardware to be
furnished hereunder, submit a complete keying arrangement to the
Architect, for transmittal to, and approval by, the Owner.
C. Hardware Supplier shall furnish all templates required by all
Subcontractors on the project at such times and in such quantities as
requested.
1.07 PACKING AND MARKING
A. Hardware shall be packaged for delivery to the site in packages legibly
marked with labels indicating the manufacturers' numbers, types, sizes,
and Hardware Schedule reference number.
FEBRUARY 1999 08710-2 FINISH HARDWARE
LE9813 CHASE KITCHEN RENOVATION
SECTION 08710
FINISH HARDWARE
PART 1 - GENER.A.L.
1.01 REQUIREMENTS INCLUDED
A. Furnish and install finish hardware for interior and exterior doors except
as specified otherwise, including related items and services, as indicated
on Drawings and as specified herein. Furnish hardware schedules and
templates as required for fabrication of doors and frames under other
Sections.
1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS
A. Rough and finish hardware, under other appropriate Sections. Specific
items of finish hardware and accessories specified to be provided under
other Sections including, but not limited to, the following:
1. Hardware for architectural woodwork.
2. Hardware for miscellaneous building specialties.
3. Hardware for various equipment items.
4. Hardware for mechanical and electrical equipment.
B. Wood thresholds: Section 06200, FINISH CARPENTRY.
C Steel doors and frames: Section 08110, STEEL DOORS AND FRAMES.
D. Magnetic holder, card readers, door openers and sensors: Section 16100,
ELECTRICAL.
E. Finish painting for shop primed items: Section 09900, PAINTING.
F. Coiling door hardware: Section 08330, COILING DOORS AND GRILLES.
1.0 3 REFERENCES
A. The BIDDING REQUIREMENTS,CONTRACT FORMS AND CONDITIONS OF THE
CONTRACT and applicable parts of DIVISION 1 - GENERAL REQUIREMENTS,
as listed in the Table of Contents, shall be included in and made a part of
this Section.
B. Examine all Drawings and all other Sections of the Specifications for
requirements therein affecting the work of this Section.
FEBRUARY 1999 08710-1 FINISH HARDWARE
LE9813 CHASE KITCHEN RENOVATION
B. Sash and Frames: -
1. Clad Tilt Double Hung and Clad Awnings: Sheet and extruded
exterior aluminum cladding (.045" - .055" thick) with baked-on acrylic
white coating. Both sash shall be operable.
2. Glazing: Glazing shall be clear float glass, ASTM-C1036, system shall
be 3/4" insulating glass with air space, except tempered glass shall be
provided adjacent to doors.
3. Screens: For each operable window, provide aluminum framed screens
with fiberglass insect screening; removeable for cleaning. Screening
shall conform to ANSI-SMA-1004 and be 18/16 mesh, supplied complete
with all hardware.
4. Muntins shall be full surround removeable interior wood grilles in
configuration(s) indicated on drawings.
5. Provide extension jambs and sills as required to match exterior wall
contruction.
6. For all double hung units at classrooms, lower sash shall not open more
than 6 inches.
PART 3 -EXECUTION
3.01 INSTALLATION
A. Install materials and systems in accordance with manufacturer's
instructions and approved submittals. Install materials and systems in
proper relation with adjacent construction and with uniform appearance.
Coordinate with work of other sections.
B. Restore damaged finishes and test for proper operation. Clean and protect
work from damage.
FEBRUARY 1999 08610-2 WOOD WINDOWS
LE9813 CHASE KITCHEN RENOVATION
SECTION 08610
WOOD WINDOWS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01 REQUIREMENTS INCLUDED
A. Provide wood windows.
1. Individual units set in conventional wall construction.
B. Wood window types:
1. Clad Tilt Double-Hung Windows.
2. Clad Awning Windows.
1.02 SUBMITTALS
A. Submit for approval samples, shop drawings, product data, mock-ups,
warranty, test reports, maintenance data.
1.03 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Comply with governing codes and regulations. Provide products of
acceptable manufacturers which have been in satisfactory use in similar
service for three years. Use experienced installers. Deliver, handle, and
store materials in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.
B. Performance:
1. Comply with NWWDA I.S. 2-93 for grade of window required.
2. Comply with ASTM E283-73 for air infiltration.
1.04 WARRENTY
A. Provide manufacture's standard 20 year warrenty for the insulated glass and
2 year warrenty for wood components, hardware, weather stripping, screens
and glazing beads in addition to the requirements of the general conditions
for this contract.
PART 2-PRODUCTS
2.01 MATERIALS
A. Units: for the purpose of this specification and the window schedule on the
drawings units manufactured by NORCO Windows are listed to establish
�* quality and intent. Equal units by Anderson, or Crestline. Other
manufacturer's may be proposed for substitution if approved by the
Architect.
FEBRUARY 1999 08610-1 WOODWINDOWS
LE9813 CHASE KITCHEN RENOVATION
1.05 GUARANTEE
A. In addition to the specific guarantee requirements of GENERAL CONDITIONS
and MODIFICATIONS TO GENERAL CONDITIONS, the Contractor shall obtain in
the Owner's name the standard written manufacturer's guarantee of all
materials furnished under this Section where such guarantees are offered
in the manufacturer's published product data. All these guarantees shall
be in addition to, and not in lieu of, other liabilities which the Contractor
may have by law or other provisions of the Contract Documents.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 METAL ACCESS DOORS-
A. Access doors shall be flush-type, 16 g. minimum thickness for frame and 14
gauge for panel, 22 in. X 22 in. and 24 in. X 36 in., sizes as indicated specially
designed for each type of wall and ceiling finish and construction with
which used, with factory-applied prime finish, as manufactured by
Inryco/Milcor Inc., Karp Associates Inc., C.E. Sparrow Company, Inc., or
equal approved by Architect. Refer to Architectural, Mechanical, and
Electrical Drawings for locations, sizes, and materials with which used.
1. Where installed at fire-rated walls or ceilings, access doors shall be of
fire-resistive construction and shall bear the proper U.L. label.
2. Where installed in gypsum wallboard walls or ceilings, access doors Awk
shall be of the type which will accept adhesive-mounted gypsum
board flush with surrounding surfaces. Gypsum board will be
provided under Section 09250, GYPSUM DRYWALL.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 INSTALLATION
A. Metal access doors shall be installed in strict accordance with the approved
shop drawings and the manufacturer's printed instructions and
recommendations.
B. It shall be the responsibility of the access panel installer to verify the
required fire rating of the panel before installation.
END OF SECTION
FEBRUARY 1999 08305-2 ACCESS DOORS
LE9813 CHASE KITCHEN RENOVATION
SECTION 08305
ACCESS DOORS
PART 1 GENERAL .
1.01 REQUIREMENTS INCLUDED
A. Furnish, deliver to Project site, unload in designated storage area, and
where specifically called out, install access doors as indicated on the
Drawings and as specified herein.
B. Where metal access doors and Panels are called for on the Drawings, and/or
are required on the project for access to valves, damper controls, pipes,
conduits, switches, regulators, etc., they shall be furnished under this
Section to the proper trades for building into the work, except that any
access panels specifically specified under the Mechanical or Electrical
Sections of the Specifications to be provided as work of those trades are
excluded from the work of this Section. Doors provided under the
mechanical or electrical sections shall meet the product requirements of
this section.
1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS
A. Gypsum Wallboard: Section 09250, GYPSUM DRYWALL.
B. Access panels for mechanical and electrical systems: All Division 15
Sections and Section 16100, ELECTRICAL.
1.03 REFERENCES
A. The BIDDING REQUIREMENTS,CONTRACT FORMS AND CONDITIONS OF THE
CONTRACT and applicable parts of DIVISION 1 - GENERAL REQUIREMENTS, as-
listed in the Table of Contents, shall be included in and made a part of this
Section.
B. Examine all Drawings and all other Sections of the Specifications for
requirements therein affecting the work of this Section.
1.04 SUBMITTALS
A. Shop Drawings: Submit complete shop drawings of all work of this Section
to Architect for approval, showing all pertinent details of construction,
finish and installation.
B. Product Data: Submit complete manufacturer's product data of all work of
this Section to Architect for approval, consisting of complete product
description and specifications, catalog cuts, and other descriptive data
required for complete product and product use information.
C Do not order materials or begin fabrication or installation work until
Architect's approval of submittals has been obtained.
FEBRUARY 1999 08305-1 ACCESS DOORS
LE9813 CHASE KITCHEN RENOVATION
B. Cut wood doors to fit frames accurately, leaving uniform clearance at heads
and jambs and uniform bevels. Do not cut rails and stiles beyond
manufacturer's specified limits. Undercut as required to clear finish
materials, fit thresholds, etc., including correct clearance for carpeting.
C. Hang doors plumb and true. Apply door hardware so that opening and
closing movement of doors is smooth and free.
D. After fitting, remove doors to permit sealing of tops, bottoms, and edges
under Section 09900, PAINTING, then re-hand and leave in proper working
conditions, without binding, sticking, or warping.
E. Clearances for fire-rated doors shall conform to NFPA 80.
3.05 PAINTING AND FINISHING
A. Field painting and finishing will be provided under Section 09900,
PAINTING. Ensure that doors are primed or sealed before installation. Paint
or seal coats shall be dry before items are installed.
B. Finish work shall be sandpapered at field joints and where required by
installation and shall be left in perfect condition for finishing under
Section 09900, PAINTING.
3.06 ADJUSTMENT AND CLEANING
A. Prime Coat Touch-Up: Immediately after erection, sand smooth any rusted
or damaged areas of prime coat and apply touch-up of compatible air-
drying primer.
B. Protection Removal: Immediately prior to final inspection, remove
protective plastic wrappings from prefinished doors.
C. Final Adjustments: Check and readjust operating finish hardware items,
leaving steel doors and frames undamaged and in complete and proper
operating conditions.
3.07 CLEAN-UP
A. Remove all cartons and debris as the work progresses and leave work areas
in broom clean condition at completion of the work of this Section.
3.08 COMPLETION
A. Before completion of Work of this Section, inspect work in the company of
the Architect adjustments and corrections to work leaving all operating
parts in perfect operating condition, all jointing to adjacent material tight,
all surfaces without blemishes or stains, all work properly executed and
complete, and all defects and damaged work replaced or corrected.
B. Rehang or replace doors that cannot be made to operate properly, as
directed by Architect.
END OF SECTION
FEBRUARY 1999 08210-5 WOODDOORS
LE9813 CHASE KITCHEN RENOVATION
4. Louvers: Provide manufacturer's standard flat-slat louver of sizes and
locations called for on the Drawings. Louvers shall finish flush with
face sheet of door and shall meet door species and finish.
5. Guarantee: Solid core flush doors shall be covered by manufacturer's
standard lifetime guarantee (interior) covering all defects in
materials and workmanship, including warping, for the life of the
original installation.
G Hollow Core Flush Interior Wood Doors: Shall be flush type, 1-3/8 in. thick,
meeting or exceeding ANSIINWMA I.S.1 Series and AWI Standards for SHC
standard hollow core.
1. Veneer for doors with paint finish: Rotary cut Natural birch, Good
Grade.
2. Guarantee: Hollow core flush doors shall be covered by manufacturer's
two year guarantee (interior) covering all defects in materials and
workmanship, including warping.
D. Exterior wood and glass doors shall be solid wood in configuration and
profiles indicated on drawings constructed from Ponderosa Pine fully
primed for exterior use as manufactured by Morgan or approved equal.
Provide accompagning screen door of same materials and finish.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 DELIVERY AND STORAGE
A. Deliver wood doors to Project site. Protect during shipment to prevent
damage. Store in interior areas fully protected from moisture and damage.
3.02 COORDINATION
A. Examine steel door frame installations. Verify that frames meet tolerances
and other requirements of wood door manufacturer.
B. Submit list of conditions detrimental to wood door installation and do not
begin door installation until such conditions are corrected.
3.03 PREPARATION
A. Condition doors to ambient temperature and humidity at point of
installation before hanging.
B. Supervise sealing of wood doors in field under Section 09900, PAINTING.
3.04 INSTALLATION
A. Installations shall conform with approved submittals, including
manufacturers published instructions, and to AWI Standards.
FEBRUARY 1999 08210-4 WOODDOORS
LE9813 CHASE KITCHEN RENOVATION
B. Doors shall not be delivered to the job site until the building is thoroughly
dried out. Doors shall be stored flat, above floors, in dry area(s) until
installation. Doors shall be stored and hung in buildings that maintain a
humidity range of between 30 and 60 percent.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS
A. Interior flush-type mineral core fire-rated wood doors shall be as
manufactured by K-D Frame and Door Corp., Steel Buck Corp., Pioneer Door
Corp., Cal-Wood Door Div., or approved equal.
B. Non-rated interior flush-type solid core wood doors shall be as
manufactured by Weyerhauser Company; Eggers Industries, Architectural
Door Division; Algoma Hardwoods Inc.; Cal-Wood Doors Div. Timberland
Industries, Inc.; or approved equal.
C. Interior glass framed or paneled wood doors shall be manufactured by
Morgan Woodwork, or approved equal.
2.02 WOODDOORS
A. Mineral Core Flush Wood Fire-Rated Interior Doors: Shall be flush wood-
faced mineral core doors, 1-3/4 in. thick, five ply, with crossbanding and
face veneers bonded to both faces, of fire-rated construction. Doors shall
have edge banding of high density, fire resistant, laminated wood fiber
sheets of special laminated material (SLM). Adhesive for bonding veneers
shall be waterproof resin glue. Provide blocking for hardware so that all
screws fasten into hard-wood for their complete length. Furnish
Underwriters' Label of indicated Class and Hour rating affixed to hinge
jamb of each door.
1. Veneers for doors with transparent natural finish: Plain, sliced, wood,
Stain Grade, Premium Grade.
2. Guarantee: Mineral core flush doors shall be covered by
manufacturer's standard lifetime guarantee (interior), covering all
defects in materials and workmanship, including warping, for the life
of the original installation.
B. Solid Core Flush Interior Wood Doors: Shall be flush type, 1-3/4 in. thick, of
5-ply construction with face veneers bonded to both faces. Core shall be
particleboard, 30 to 32 lb. per cu. ft. density. Crossband shall be thoroughly
kiln-dried hardwood, 1/16 in. thick, extending full width of door.
1. Veneers for doors with transparent finish: Plain sliced, wood, Stain
Grade, Premium Grade.
2. Veneers for doors with paint finish: Rotary cut, Good Grade, Natural
birch.
3. Standards: Doors shall meet or exceed ANSI/NWMA I.S. 1 and AWI
Standards Section 1300-G-3, Type PC-5 or PC-7 construction.
FEBRUARY 1999 08210-3 WOODS
LE9813 CHASE KITCHEN RENOVATION
1.05 SUBMITTALS
A. Samples: If required by Architect, submit cutaway door samples to
Architect for approval showing core construction, cross banding, and face
veneer of each door type.
1. For transparent finished doors submit samples of door faces
representing typical range of color and gain. Also submit strips of
solid wood 3 in. wide by 12 in. long of species to be used for exposed
edges, trim, and other solid wood components.
B. Product Data: Submit complete manufacturer's product data to Architect for
approval, consisting of complete product description and specifications,
complete installation instructions, and other pertinent technical data
required for complete product and product use information.
G Do not order materials or begin fabrication until Architect's approval of
submittals has been obtained.
1.06 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Submit certification that fabricator of door frames has been engaged
regularly in fabrication and installation of door frames of types and
quality specified• for at least five years. List similar successful installations
in place for at least two years.
1.07 FIRE-RATING REQUIREMENTS
A. Doors indicated or scheduled on the Drawings to receive Underwriters'
Laboratories (UL) label shall bear a UL label of Class and hour-rating
scheduled on the Drawings.
B. Fire-rated doors shall conform to the requirements of NFPA 80.
1.08 GUARANTEE
A. In addition to the specific guarantee requirements of Document 00700,
GENERAL CONDTTIONS and Document 00810, SUPPLEMENTARY CONDITIONS,
the Contractor shall obtain in the Owner's name the standard written
manufacturer's guarantee of all materials furnished under this Section
where such guarantees are offered in the manufacturer's published
product data. All these guarantees shall be in addition to, and not in lieu of,
other liabilities which the Contractor may have by law or other provisions
of the Contract Documents.
B. Include, but do not limit to, standard manufacturer's guarantees specified
under product descriptions.
1.09 PRODUCT STORAGE AND HANDLING
A. Doors shall be properly packaged by manufacturer and fully protected
during shipment, unloading, and storage. Comply with requirements of
NWMA Ref. 1.
FEBRUARY 1999 08210-2 WOODDOORS
LE9813 CHASE KITCHEN RENOVATION
SECTION 08210
WOOD DOORS
PART 1 GENERAL,
1.01 REQUIREMENTS INCLUDED
A. Furnish and install wood doors and related items, as indicated on Drawings
and as specified herein.
B. Furnish and install special hinged screen door at exterior entrance as
shown on drawings.
1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS
A. Steel doors and frames, including metal frames for wood doors: Section
08100,STEEL DOORS AND FRAMES.
B. Glass vision panels: Section 08800, GLASS AND GLAZING.
C. Finish hardware and templates: Section 08710, FINISH HARDWARE.
D. Painting and finishing of doors in field: Section 09900, PAINTING.
,, *► 1.03 REFERENCES
A. The BIDDING REQUIREMENTS,CONTRACT FORMS AND CONDITIONS OF THE
CONTRACT and applicable parts of DIVISION 1 - GENERAL REQUIREMENTS, as
listed in the Table of Contents, shall be included in and made a part of this
Section.
B. Examine all Drawings and all other Sections of the Specifications for
requirements therein affecting the work of this Section.
1.04 REFERENCED STANDARDS
A. American National Standards Institute/National Woodwork Manufacturers
Association (ANSI/NWMA):
I.S. 1 Industry Standard for Wood Flush Doors
B. The Architectural Woodwork Institute (AWI):
Standards Quality Standards of the Architectural Woodwork Institute
C. National Fire Protection Association (NFPA):
80 Standard For Fire Doors and Windows
D. National Woodwork Manufacturers Association (NWMA):
Ref. 1 How To Store, Handle, Finish, Install and Maintain Wood Doors
FEBRUARY 1999 08210-1 WOODDOORS
LE9813 CHASE KITCHEN RENOVATION
3.01 DELIVERY AND STORAGE
A. Deliver steel doors, frames, and related items to project site and store in
interior areas fully protected from moisture and damage.
3.02 FABRICATION
A. Buckling and warping of face sheets shall not exceed 1/16 in. in any
direction.
B. Formed members shall be straight and true with mitered joints, and
properly aligned.
C Welded joints shall be dressed smooth to hide joint.
3.03 INSTALLATION
A. Set frames in proper position properly plumbed, and aligned.
1. Hang doors plumb and true, and apply door hardware so that opening
and closing movement of doors is smooth and free.
B. Frame and door installations shall conform to SDI 105. Fire rated door and
frame assemblies shall conform to NFPA 80 and SDI 118.
C Place frames before construction of enclosing walls and ceilings.
D. Provide a minimum of three wall anchors per jamb at hinge and strike
levels.
3.04 PAINTING AND FINISHING
A. Finish painting shall be provided under Section 09900, PAINTING. Prime
doors and frames as specified in Part 2 of this Section.
B. Provide field touch-up as necessary.
3.05 INSPECTION AND ADJUSTMENT
A. Before completion of work of this Section, inspect work in company of
Architect and make adjustments and corrections to work as necessary to
leave operating parts in perfect operating condition, jointing to adjacent
material tight, surfaces without blemishes or stains, work properly
executed and complete, and defects and damaged work replaced or
corrected.
END OF SECTION
FEBRUARY 1999 08100-6 STEEL DOORS AND FRAMES
LE9813 CHASE KITCHEN RENOVATION
three anchors per jamb. One additional anchor shall be added per jamb for
each additional 30 in. in height, or part thereof. At UL labeled frames, wall
anchors shall conform to requirements of Underwriters' Laboratories, Inc.
I. Floor Anchors:
1. Provide concealed 12 ga. clip-angle floor anchor at each frame jamb
and equivalent concealed floor anchor at each mullion. Floor anchors
at jambs in areas to receive subsequent floor fill or setting beds shall
be adjustable type; others shall be solidly welded to the jambs.
2. At UL labeled frames, floor anchors shall conform to requirements of
Underwriters' Laboratories, Inc.
J. Workmanship: The finished frames shall be strong and rigid, with neatly
formed members, free from dents, buckling, warping, and other defects
and with all welded joints on exposed surfaces dressed smooth and flush.
2.04 PROVISIONS FOR HARDWARE
A. Door and frames shall be mortised, reinforced, punched, drilled, and tapped
at factory to receive all finish hardware in accordance with templates
provided by Finish Hardware Supplier under Section 08710, FINISH
HARDWARE. All such preparation shall conform to requirements set forth
in the above-listed reference standards.
B. Each door frame shall be punched to receive rubber silencers; three on
latch side of each single door frame and two at head of each door pair
frame.
C Provide for acoustical gasketing as indicated on drawings.
2.05 SHOP FINISH
A. After fabrication, all metal shall be dressed smooth, degreased and
thoroughly cleaned of rust, scale, oil, and other impurities. All exposed
surfaces of ungalvanized steel shall be hot-phosphate coated to condition
the surface of the metal to resist and inhibit corrosion and provide positive
paint adhesion. Galvanized sheet metal surfaces shall have been given hot-
phosphate treatment at the mill, as previously specified and shall be
additionally treated as required to assure positive paint adhesion. All
exposed surfaces shall be given a dip or spray coat of baked-on, rust-
inhibitive metallic oxide, zinc chromate, or synthetic resin primer applied
to all exposed surfaces, including backs of frames, ready to receive finish
painting under Section 09900, PAINTING.
2.06 KITCHEN DOORS AND FRAMES
A. All doors and frames in kitchen, bakery, and commissary and back-of-
counter areas in servery shall be galvanized according to the provisions of
this specification.
PART 3 EXECLMON
FEBRUARY 1999 08100-5 STEEL DOORS AND FRAMES
LE9813 CHASE KITCHEN RENOVATION
corrugated steel, spot-welded to face sheets or manufacturer's standard -
honey comb cores.
D. Hollow portions of doors shall be filled with mineral rock wool or other
thermal and sound-deadening insulation, UL approved "U" factor of
exterior doors shall be 0.24 or better, tested in accordance with ASTM C 236.
E. Lock edges of stiles shall be beveled 1/8 in. in 2 in. Bottom shall be formed
as required to properly fit thresholds, magnetic type weatherstripping,
finish floor materials, etc.
F. Workmanship: The finished doors shall be strong and rigid, with neatly
formed members, free from dents, buckling, warping, weld-spots, and other
defects, and with all welded joints dressed smooth and flush.
2.03 STEEL FRAMES
A. Materials:
1. Sheet metal for fabrication of all exterior frames and frames indicated
to be installed in loading dock, kitchen, and dish washing areas shall
be hot-dip galvanized, coating weight 0.06 oz. per sq. ft. per side,
conforming to ASTM A 525 and A 526 and hot-phosphate, mill-treated
(to assure positive paint adhesion) cold-rolled carbon sheet steel.
2. Sheet metal shall be of prime quality, free of rust, scale, pitting, and
surface defects.
a
B. Steel frames shall be sizes and profile indicated on the Drawings. Steel for
frame shall be 14 ga.
C. Frames for steel doors shall be shop assembled, except where size requires
field assembly. Joints shall be closed tight, continuously welded and then
ground smooth on exposed surfaces.
D. Provide all internal formed steel head reinforcement to ensure absolute
rigidity of frame assemblies.
E. Provide proper-sized, removable, rectangular-profile 18 ga. steel gluing
beads at glazed openings and secured in place with oval head, Phillips head
screws at corners and not farther than 9 in. on center between. Dimple
holes for flush fitting of screw heads.
F. Door frames to be equipped at factory with removable spreader for
shipping.
G. Frames to be installed in steel stud partitions shall be treated on concealed
surfaces with sound-deadening, reinforcing mastic as recommended by
manufacturer and conforming to UL requirements.
H. Wall anchors: Provide concealed metal wall anchors appropriate for
adjoining wall (drywall or masonry as required) construction. Wall
anchors shall be non removable, welded-on, and of same material and
gauge as frame. Frames 7 ft. 6 in. in height and less shall be provided with
FEBRUARY 1999 08100-4 STEEL DOORS AND FRAMES
LE9813 CHASE KTTCHEN RENOVATION
G Do not order materials or begin fabrication of work of this Section until
Architect's approval of submittals has been obtained.
1.07 FIRE RATING REQUIREMENTS
A. Doors indicated to receive Underwriters' Laboratories (UL) label shall bear
the UL label of Class and hour-rating scheduled. Each frame to receive a UL
labeled door and frames for fire-rated fixed-glass partitions shall bear UL
frame label.
B. Fire-rated doors and frames shall conform to the requirements of NFPA 80
and shall have been tested, listed, or labeled in accordance with ASTM A 152
by a nationally recognized independent testing and inspection agency
acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction.
1.08 PRODUCT STORAGE AND HANDLING
A. Doors, frames, and related items shall be properly packaged and protected
during shipment, handling, and storage to prevent damage.
B. Materials shall be stored indoors or under cover, on raised platforms, fully
protected from dirt and moisture.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS
A. Flush steel doors and frames shall be manufactured by Williamsburg Steel
Products, Pioneer Door Co., or approved equal. Doors shall be products of
single manufacturer.
2.02 FLUSH STEEL DOORS
A. Material:
1. Sheet metal for fabrication of all exterior doors and doors indicated to
be installed in loading dock, kitchen and dish washing areas shall be
hot-dipped galvanized, coating weight 0.06 oz. per sq. ft. per side,
conforming to ASTM A 525 and A 526 and hot-phosphate, mill-treated
to ensure positive paint adhesion, cold-rolled carbon sheet steel.
2. Sheet metal shall be prime quality, free of rust, scale, pitting, and
surface defects.
B. Flush doors shall be 1-3/4 in. thick, sizes as indicated, custom fabricated to
two outer 18 ga. steel sheets with edges welded and finished flush. Vertical
edges shall be formed of face sheets. Top and bottom edges shall be
reinforced with internal 14 ga. steel channels, closed flush at heads for
exterior doors only. Seams or joints will not be permitted on door faces or
edges. Edge joints will be allowed on interior doors.
C, Door shall have internal reinforcing consisting of continuous 18 ga.
vertical steel channels or "zees", 6 in. on center, or continuous 26 ga.
FEBRUARY 1999 08100-3 STEEL DOORS AND FRAMES
LE9813 CHASE KITCHEN RENOVATION
A 568 General Requirements for Steel, Carbon and High Strength `-
Low-Alloy Hot-Rolled Sheet, Hot-Rolled Strip, and Cold-Rolled
Sheet
A 569 Steel Carbon (0.15 Maximum, Percent), Hot-Rolled Sheet and
Strip, Commercial Quality
C 236 Steady-State Thermal Performance of Building Assemblies by
Means of a Guarded Hot Box
E 152 Fire Tests of Door Assemblies
C. Steel Door Institute (SDI):
100 Standard Steel Doors and Frames
105 Recommended Erection Instructions for Steel Frames
118 Base Fire Door Requirements
D. National Fire Protection Association (NFPA):
80 Standard for Fire Doors and Windows
1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Reference Standards: Conform to governing laws and building code, and
the following trade standards:
1. ANSI A115.1 through A115.14, as applicable.
2. SDI 100, SDI 105, and SDI 118.
3. NFPA 80.
1.06 SUBMITTALS
A. Shop Drawings: Submit complete shop drawings of work of this Section to
Architect for approval, showing profiles and gauges of metal, construction
details of each frame type, elevations of door design types, conditions of
openings, details of construction, UL label requirements, provisions for
finish hardware, glazing conditions, shop finish, and other pertinent
information. Show anchorage and accessory items.
1. Provide schedule of doors and frames using same reference numbers
for details and openings as those on the Contract Drawings.
2. Indicate location of glazing frames and stops with glass and glazing
requirements.
B. Product Data: Submit complete manufacturer's product data to Architect for
approval, consisting of complete specifications, test report data, installation
instructions, and other pertinent technical data required for complete
product and product use information.
FEBRUARY 1999 08100-2 STEEL DOORS AND FRAMES
LE9813 CHASE KITCHEN RENOVATION
SECTION 08100
STEEL DOORS AND FRAMES
PART GENERAL
1.01 REQUIREM=S INCLUDED
A. Furnish and install steel doors, glass side lights, and frames and related
items as indicated on Drawings and as specified herein.
1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS
A. Finish hardware and templates, including weatherstripping: Section 08710,
FINISH HARDWARE.
B. Finish field painting: Section 09900, PAINTING.
C. Grouting of frames: Section 04200, UNIT MASONRY.
D. Glass side lights and vision panels: Section 08800, GLASS AND GLAZING.
1.03 REFERENCES
A. The BIDDING REQUIREMENTS,CONTRACT FORMS AND CONDITIONS OF THE
CONTRACT and applicable parts of DIVISION 1 - GENERAL REQUIREMENTS, as
listed in the Table of Contents, shall be included in and made a part of this
Section.
B. Examine all Drawings and all other Sections of the Specifications for
requirements therein affecting the work of this Section.
1.04 REFERENCED STANDARDS
A. American National Standards Institute (ANSI):
A115.1 Series on Door and Frame Preparation (A115.1 thru A115.17)
A123.1 Nomenclature for Steel Doors and Steel Door Frames
A151.1 Performance Test for Standard Steel Doors, Frames, Anchors,
Hinge Reinforcings and Exit Device Reinforcings
B. American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM):
A 366 Steel Sheet, Carbon, Cold-Rolled, Commercial Quality
A 525 General Requirements for Steel Sheet, Zinc-Coated
(Galvanized) by the Hot-Dip Process
A 526 Steel Sheet, Zinc-Coated (Galvanized) by the Hot-Dip Process,
Commercial Quality
FEBRUARY 1999 08100-1 STEEL DOORS AND FRAMES
LE9813 CHASE KITCHEN RENOVATION
1. Sealed joints shall be left with a uniform, slightly concave profile,
free from gaps, cracks, and entrapped air.
2. Joints shall be filled completely to within 1/16 in. of finished surface.
3. Where required, light tooling of the joint can be performed
immediately after sealant application.
E. Thresholds of exterior doors shall be set in full beds of exterior sealant, not
less than 3/8 in. thick. At Contractor's option, a polybutene or
polyisobutylene sealant by same manufacturer may be used at thresholds.
3.03 CLEANING _
A. Remove smears from adjacent surfaces immediately, as the work
progresses. Exercise particular care to prevent smearing or staining of
surrounding surfaces which will be exposed in the finished work, and
repair any damage done to same as result of this Work without additional
cost to the Owner.
B. Remove all cartons, debris, emptied containers, and tubes, etc., as the work
progresses, and finally at completion of work of this Section. Legally
dispose of the same off the site.
END OF SECTION
FEBRUARY 1999 07900-6 SEALANTS
LE9813 CHASE KITCHEN RENOVATION
1. Examine all joints to receive sealant prior to application, and notify
the Architect in writing of all conditions detrimental to achieving
positive, weather tight and air-tight seals. Do not commence work in
any area where such notice of adverse conditions has been sent until
corrective work has been completed or waived. Start of work in any
area without issuances of such notice shall constitute acceptance of
conditions as correct to properly receive the work of this Section.
3. Preparation of joints shall conform to manufacturer's printed
recommendations. Joints and spaces to be sealed shall be sound, clean,
dry, and free of dust, loose mortar, and other foreign matter. Wire
brush joints in concrete and masonry, and air-blow or vacuum clean.
4. Surfaces which have been given protective coatings and all those
which contain oil or grease shall be thoroughly cleaned with xylol or
MEK solvent, with due precautions taken to minimize hazards.
5. Prime all surfaces where and as recommended by sealant
manufacturer.
6. Exterior joints shall be backed with joint backing material to eliminate
back bond. Where width of joint is 1/2 in. or less, prepare joint so
depth of sealant bead is approximately equal to its width. Where width
of joint exceeds 1/2 in., prepare joint so depth of sealant bead is
approximately equal to 1/2 its width or 1/2 in., whichever is greater.
7. Backing of joints to receive interior sealant will not be required
.except where depth of joint exceeds width of joint, in which case it
shall be backed to that depth by use of compressible foam, as above, or
non-staining oakum.
3.02 GENERAL SEALANT APPLICATION
A. Sealing of joints shall be scheduled for as long as possible a time following
completion of concrete work.
1. Concrete work shall be thoroughly dried and cured prior to start of
sealant application.
B. Joints to be sealed shall be thoroughly cleaned and primed shall be applied
to surfaces that will be sealed. Adjacent surfaces shall be suitably protected
from staining and other damage during sealant application. Sealant shall
be applied to clean, dry surfaces, within three hours after primer
application.
C Primer and sealant shall be applied in accordance with the sealant
manufacturer's written recommendations, using hard guns or pressure
equipment. Temperature of sealant and surfaces to be sealed shall be as
recommended by the sealant manufacturer.
D. Sealant shall be forcibly gunned into the joint to obtain maximum bond to
joint shoulders.
FEBRUARY 1999 07900-5 SEALANTS
LE9813 CHASE KITCHEN RENOVATION
2. At interior joints greater than 1/2 in. in width or subjected to periodic
building movement, substitute exterior type sealant as specified above.
3. Where surrounding wall surfaces are to be unpainted, substitute
exterior type sealant as specified above.
B. Sealant for interior use at plumbing fixtures, showers, and other areas of
high humidity shall be General Electric SCS 1702 Sanitary Sealant or
approved equal. Silicone sealant shall be specifically formulated to resist
growth of mold and mildew and shall meet requirements of Fed. Spec. TT-S-
001543A.
C. Acoustical Sealant:
1. Sealant for concealed applications shall be "BA-98 Acoustical Sealant,"
manufactured by Pecora Chemical Corp., equivalent product
manufactured by U.S. Gypsum co., National Gypsum Co., or approved
equal.
2. Sealant for exposed applications shall be paintable "AC-20 Acrylic
Latex Caulk," manufactured by Pecora Chemical Corp., equivalent
product manufactured by DAP or Gibson Homans Co., or approved
equal.
D. Primer for sealants shall be as recommended by manufacturer for each
specific material.
2.03 JOINT BACKING
A. Joint backing for general use in joints in vertical surfaces shall be
compressible, closed-cell, polyurethane foam, or a similar plastic foam
recommended by manufacturer.
B. Joint backing for general use at joints in horizontal surfaces shall consist
of two rows of butyl rubber or neoprene foam rod in contact with one
another, and each compressed to approximately 2/3 original width when in
place.
C. All such materials shall not be of type which will bleed through sealant,
discolor its surface, or produce other deleterious effects. In each instance,
size shall be selected to provide compression to approximately 2/3 original
width when in place. Profile of backing material shall be concave profile
to the rear of the sealant, and shall be equipped with a bond-breaking film.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 PREPARATION OF JOINTS TO RECEIVE SEALANT
A. Unless otherwise indicated, use of sealants shall conform to the following:
ASTM C 790 for latex sealants and ASTM C 962 for other sealants.
B. Preparation of Joints:
FEBRUARY 1999 07900-4 SEALANTS
LE9813 CHASE KITCHEN RENOVATION
1.07 PRODUCT DELIVERY,STORAGE AND HANDLING
A. Materials under this Section shall be delivered to, and stored at, the job site
in unbroken factory sealed containers with labels intact.
1.08 WARRANTY
A. Furnish joint sealant manufacturer's written single-source performance
warranty that joint sealant work will be free of defects related to
workmanship or material deficiency for five years from date of Substantial
Completion.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 EXTERIOR SEALANTS
A. Sealant for exterior horizontal joints shall be non-staining, two component
polyurethane based sealant conforming to Fed. Spec. TT-S-00227, Class A,
with a Shore A Hardness of 30±5, or better.
1. Sealant shall be Type I (self-leveling), equal to Tremco THC-900, or
approved equal.
2. Color of sealants shall be selected by the Architect from the
manufacturer's standard color chart.
3. Primer shall be that recommended by the sealant manufacturer.
4. Sealant and primer shall be products of the same manufacturer.
B. Sealant for general use at exterior joints in vertical building surfaces shall
be (1) two-part, low-modulus, polyurethane sealant, gun-grade, non-
sagging type, conforming to Fed. Spec. TT-S-00227, Type II, Class A, and to
ASTM C 920, Type M, Grade NS, Class 25, Use NT. Sealant shall be equal to
"Dymeric" manufactured by Tremco Mfg. Co., "Dynatrol II" manufactured
by Pecora Corp., "Vulcan 227" manufactured by Mameco International, or
"Iso-Flex 2000" manufactured by H.S. Peterson Co., Inc.
1. Color(s) of sealant shall be manufacturer's standard color(s), as
selected by Architect, to match, or contrast with adjacent materials.
2.02 INTERIOR SEALANT
A. Sealant for general interior uses shall be paintable acrylic-latex sealant,
conforming to ASTM C 834. Sealant shall be "AC-20 Acrylic- Latex",
manufactured by Pecora Co. or equivalent product manufactured by DAP or
Gibson-Holman Co.
1. Color(s) of sealant shall be manufacturer's standard color(s) as
selected by Architect to match or contrast with adjacent materials.
FEBRUARY 1999 07900-3 SEALANTS
LE9813 CHASE KITCHEN RENOVATION
1.04 REFERENCED STANDARDS
A. American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM):
C 790 Use of Latex Sealing Compounds
C 834 Latex Sealing Compounds
C 920 Elastomeric Joint Sealants
C 962 Use of Elastomeric Joint Sealants
B. Federal Specifications (Fed. Spec.):
TT-S-00227 Sealing Compound: Elastomeric Type, Multi-Component (For
Caulking, Sealing, and Glazing in Buildings and Other
Structures
TT-S-001543A Sealing Compound: Silicone Rubber Base (For Caulking,
Sealing, and Glazing in Buildings and Other Structures)
1.05 COMPATIBILITY
A. Sealant and sealant joint backing materials selected shall be suitable for
the use intended and compatible with the material with which they will be
in contact. Compatibility of sealant and accessories shall be verified by theme
sealant manufacturer.
1.06 SUBMITTALS
A. Manufacturers' product data shall be submitted for each sealant and sealant
material proposed. Product data shall include test results and shall be in
conformance with reference applicable standards where standards or
testing requirements have been specified.
B. Manufacturer's standard color chart of sealants shall be submitted for
selection of colors.
C. Samples of the following shall be submitted for approval:
Item Quantify and Size
Joint Backer Two pieces, full size 4 in. length
Sealant, each Cured sample of each color selected for the Architect
type 2 x 2 in.
D. Furnish samples of any other materials of this Section requested by
Architect for approval. Form of samples shall be as requested by the
Architect.
E. Do not order materials or begin installation until Architect's approval of
submittals has been obtained.
FEBRUARY 1999 07900-2 SEALANTS
LE9813 CHASE KITCHEN RENOVATION
SECTION 07900
SEALANTS
PART 1 GENERAL
1.01 REQUIREMENTS INCLUDED
A. Caulk and seal joints as indicated on the Drawings and as specified. Include,
but do not limit to:
1. Sealing of expansion joints and control joints in exterior concrete.
2. Sealing of joints between perimeter of exterior door frames, window
frames, skylights, and other items occurring in openings in exterior
walls, and the surrounding construction, including bed sealing of
thresholds.
3. Sealing and caulking of interior perimeter joints at door frames,
window frames, skylight systems, and other wall openings.
4. Acoustical caulk at the junction of materials to prevent the passage of
sound as indicated on the Construction Documents.
5. Sealant at all joints between finished surfaces and between finished
surfaces and fixed equipment in kitchen, food preparation, and food
serving, food storage, and dish washing areas.
6. All other exterior and interior sealing called for, or reasonably
inferred from the Drawings, and as required to provide weather tight
conditions in exterior walls.
1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS
A. Compatible expansion joint filler at concrete control joints: Section 03300,
CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE.
B. Acoustical sealing of gypsum drywall work: Section 09250, GYPSUM
DRYWALL.
C. Acoustical sealing at masonry walls: Section 04200, UNIT MASONRY.
D. Food Service Equipment: Section 11400, FOOD SERVICE EQUIPMENT.
1.03 REFERENCES
A. The BIDDING REQUIREMENTS,CONTRACT FORMS AND CONDITIONS OF THE
CONTRACT and applicable parts of DIVISION 1 - GENERAL REQUIREMENTS, as
listed in the Table of Contents, shall be included in and made a part of this
Section.
B. Examine all Drawings and all other Sections of the Specifications for
requirements therein affecting the work of this Section.
FEBRUARY 1999 07900-1 SEALANTS
LE9813 CHASE KITCHEN RENOVATION
d. Pipe Flashing: Flash penetrating pipe, conduit and duct
penetrations with prefabricated pipe seals where possible and
field fabricated sealants where necessary.
e. Expansion Joints: Treat expansion joins as indicated in expansion
joint manufacturer's standard details and published instructions
for specific conditions.
f. Unusual Penetrations: Seal clusters of pipes and unusually
shaped penetrations with pourable sealer, 2 in. deep in pitch
pocket seal, as indicated in manufacturer's standard details and
published instructions for specific conditions.
9. Roof Drains: Install membrane into drain flange and seal
between membrane and drain base with water cut-off mastic, as
indicated in manufacturer's standard details and published
instructions for specific conditions.
h . Sheet metal copings, fascias, roof edge, and flashings will be
furnished and installed under Section 07620, SHEET METAL
FLASHING AND TRIM.
7. Provide daily night seal at loose edges to prevent water flow beneath
finished roofing.
a. Mix sealer components as instructed by manufacturer. Apply at .,
rate of 1 gal./100 linear ft., 12 in. back from sheet edges on
exposed substrate.
b. Embed membrane in sealer and apply continuous pressure with
2-1/2 in. tubing filled with sand. Pull sheet free before
continuing permanent installation.
3.05 CLEANING
A. Keep surrounding surfaces clean as work progresses.
B. Remove cartons, debris, emptied containers, and other rubbish as work
progresses, and at completion of work of this Section. Legally dispose of
rubbish off site.
END OF SECTION
FEBRUARY 1999 07530-8 ELASTOMERIC SHEET ROOFING
LE9813 CHASE KITCHEN RENOVATION
1. General: Start installation only in presence of manufacturer's
technical representative.
2. Cut sheets to maximum size possible, in order to minimize seams and
to accommodate contours of roof deck and proper drainage across
shingled laps of sheets.
3. Loose/Ballasted Elastomeric Sheet Roofing: Install membrane by
unrolling over prepared substrate, nailing only at perimeter and at
roofing penetrations. Lap adjoining sheets as recommended by
Elastomeric Sheet Roofing manufacturer and bond as recommended
by manufacturer, covering top edges of each sheet at seams with
uniform fillet of sealant. Install flashings and counter flashings as
shown and as recommended by manufacturer. Apply ballast course
in uniform thickness at rate of 10 lbs. per square foot, spreading
with care to minimize possibility of damage to membrane.
4. Adhesive Adhered Elastomeric Sheet Roofing: Install membrane by
unrolling over prepared substrate, lapping adjoining sheets as
recommended by manufacturer. Apply adhesive to surfaces to be
bonded and roll Elastomeric Sheet Roofing into place when adhesive
has properly cured. Treat seams with special cement and apply
sealant to exposure sheet edges, tapering application as
recommended by manufacturer. Install mechanical fasteners,
flashings and counter-flashings, and accessories at location and as
recommended by manufacturer.
5. Walkway Protection Boards: Install boards at locations shown and
where required for access to roof-mounted equipment, Place
protection boards carefully to avoid damage to membrane, laying
over an additional layer of roof membrane material, loosely applied,
for additional , protection.
6. Elastomeric Flashings. Provide elastomeric sheet flashings at
elastomeric sheet roofing work, as indicated.
a. Use longest practical lengths and widths of elastomeric sheet
flashing material to eliminate or minimize joints. Complete
splices between flashings and main roof sheet before bonding
flashings to vertical surfaces. Splices shall be sealed 3 in. beyond
fasteners that attach membrane to horizontal nailer in same
manner as splices within roofing membrane. Flashings shall be
bonded 100% to subsurfaces, except at coves where movement is
anticipated, where flexible tube shall be installed.
b. Apply bonding adhesive to flashing and surface to which it is
being bonded. When bonding adhesive has dried to the point
where it does not string or stick to a dry finger touch, roll
flashing into adhesive. Do not bridge flashing at changes of
direction.
C. Nail top of flashing 12 in. on center under sheet metal copies,
counter flashing, and other sheet metal work.
FEBRUARY 1999 07530-7 ELASTONiMCSHEETROOFING
LE9813 CHASE KITCHEN RENOVATION
D. Work shall conform to manufacturer's published specifications. Roof
shall be made permanently weatherproof in continuous operation,
including connection to flashing and roof edge provided under Section
07620, SHEET METAL FLASHING AND TRIM.
E. Provide manufacturer's recommended weatherproofing method at all
special conditions, such as at projections, at connections to sheet metal
roof edge, flashings, .etc.
F. Special Cautions:
1. Do not use oil-based or plastic roof cement.
2. Do not subject elastomeric materials to contact with petroleum,
grease, oil, solvents, vegetable or mineral oil, nor animal fat.
Prevent contact with hot pipes, and ducts.
3. Cements and bonding adhesive contain petroleum distillates and are
extremely volatile and flammable. Avoid breathing vapors and do
not use near fire or flame.
4. Ensure that splicing and bonding surfaces are dry during
installation.
G. Do not damage or stain surrounding work. Remove stains and repair
damage immediately, as work progresses, as part of work of this Section. ,.
3.03 ROOF INSULATION
A. Follow sequence coding. Install only as much insulation and daily as can
be covered with roofing by close of work. Do not expose materials to rain
or snow, nor overnight. Replace material that becomes wet.
B. Lay insulation over roof deck with spots of cold adhesive to facilitate
handling during placement and securing of mechanical fasteners.
Neatly cut board to fit around roof penetration sand projections. Trim
edges of boards so that no edge is left unsupported. Stagger transverse
joints in board underlayment 2 ft. in adjacent crows and butt edges
tightly. Joints between boards shall be less than 1/4 in. wide.
C Insulation shall be fastened mechanically to roof deck by installation of
proprietary anchor plates for sheet roofing.
D. Install tapered cants and crickets as indicated on approved shop drawings
to provide required roof slope and pitch to drains.
E. Feather or taper board around drains for smooth transition between roof
surface and drain clamp ring.
3.04 ELASTOMERIC ROOFING
A. Elastomeric Sheet Roofing Membrane Installation:
FEBRUARY 1999 07530-6 ELASTOMERIC SHEET ROOFING
LE9813 CHASE KITCHEN RENOVATION
B. Splicing cement and splice cleaner shall be as recommended by
membrane manufacturer.
C. Lap sealant for sealing the exposed edge of the splices shall be trowel or
gun consistence, as recommended by membrane manufacturer.
D. Water cutoff mastic shall be as recommended by membrane
manufacturer.
E. Night seal shall be as recommended by membrane manufacturer.
F. Pourable sealer shall be as recommended by membrane manufacturer.
G. Prefabricated elastomeric accessories (pipe seal, inside and outside
corners, etc.) shall be as manufactured and recommended by membrane
manufacturer.
H. Nailing Strips and Fasteners: Nailing strips shall be extruded rubber and
fasteners shall be non-corrodible.
I. Roofing Nails: 11 gauge hot-dip galvanized, length to penetrate wood
members at least 7/8 in., with 5/8 in. diameter heads, as recommended by
membrane manufacturer.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 INSPECTION OF SURFACES
A. Carefully check roof deck areas for conditions affecting application and
performance. Ensure pull-out resistance of deck to be 360 lb. minimum.
Report defects in writing to Architect. Do not proceed with roofing work
until defects have been corrected.
B. Beginning work shall constitute acceptance of its conditions and any
defects in roofing work resulting from such accepted surfaces shall be
corrected without further expense to the Owner.
3.02 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
A. Surfaces to receive roofing materials shall be rigid, tight, clean, dry,
smooth, free of scale, dust, oil, or other foreign matter, and also free of
frost or the effects of freezing. Thoroughly clean surfaces to remove
loose particles immediately before application of subsequent materials.
Do not apply roofing materials over wet subsurfaces.
B. Where surfaces joints at roof and wall substrates exceed 1/4 in. width, fill
flush with surface with pourable sealer before proceeding with the
installation.
C. Do not leave unfinished roof areas uncovered overnight or during
inclement weather.
FEBRUARY 1999 07530-5 ELASTOMERIC SHEET ROOFING
LE9813 CHASE KITCHEN RENOVATION
2.02 INSULATION
A. Rigid insulation beneath membrane:
1. Rigid isocyanurate component shall have minimum density of 2 lb.
cu. ft., minimum compressive strength (ASTM D 1621) of 25 psi,
maximum moisture vapor transmission (ASTM E96) of 2.0 perm, "C"
factor of 0.16 in. and "R" factor of 6.67 (1 in.) or in thickness as
indicated on the drawings which ever is greater and shall be
skinned with factory applied fiberglass bituminous felts as
manufactured by Celotex Corp, NRG Barriers or Firestone.
2. Tapered isocyanurate insulation shall have an average R-value of
R-20 and a slope of 1/8" per foot to drains. Crickets shall slope at 1/4"
per foot.
3. Insulation shall be approved by Factory Mutual (FM) for Class 1
Insulated Steel Deck Construction and shall be UL listed Class A.
4. Provide 4' x 4' square of tapered insulation at each roof drain sloped
to drain to prevent ponding.
2.03 MEMBRANE ROOFING MATERIAL
A. Fully Adhered Elastomeric Sheet Roofing System:
1. Elastomeric Sheet Material: Manufacturer's standard thickness but
not less then 60 mils, 1400 psi minimum tensile strength (ASTM D
412), 250% elongation (ASTM D 413), vapor permeable, ultraviolet
and ozone resistant, low temperature brittleness of -40OF (-400C)
(ASTM D 746) black.
2. Flashings - 60 mil. fully compatible with roofing system.
3. Product to be as manufactured by Carlysle Syntech Systems Inc.
Membrane system must be fully compatible with existing membrane
system.
2.04 ROOFING BOARD
A. For installation of membrane over steel decking use manufacturer's
approved recovery board.
2.05 RELATED MATERIALS
A. Bonding adhesive shall be as recommended by manufacturer. Adhesive
shall be compatible with all materials to which the elastomeric membrane
is to be bonded.
FEBRUARY 1999 07530-4 ELASTOMERIC SHEET ROOFING
LE9813 CHASE KITCHEN RENOVATION
B. Protect all materials from the weather, under cover, and on raised
platforms.
C. Adhesives, cements, mastics and sealers shall be stored between 60OF and
800F. Should they be exposed to lower temperatures, restore to room
temperature for three to five days prior to use. Do not use materials
damaged in handling or storage.
D. Store leveler board with full protection against dampness prior to laying.
Leveler boards shall be dry when applied, and shall be protected from the
weather during installation. Any materials damaged by exposure to the
elements or other cause shall be rejected and promptly removed from the
site.
1.07 GUARANTEE
A. Furnish and deliver written manufacturer's guarantee in Owner's name
covering all materials and workmanship under this Section, in addition
to, and not in lieu of, guarantee requirements set forth under Document
00700, GENERAL CONDITIONS and Document 00810, MODIFICATIONS TO
GENERAL CONDITIONS, and other liabilities which the Contractor may
have by law or other provision of the Contract Documents.
B. Furnish manufacturer's warranty stating that manufacturer shall
maintain roofing and elastomeric membrane flashings in water-tight
condition at his own expense for fifteen years from the date of
Substantial Completion, provided that Owner gives the manufacturer
written notice of any leak within thirty days from the discovery of such
leak. Warranty is solely intended to cover any condition caused by
defective materials, installation, and ordinary wear and tear. Warranty
shall not cover damage from lightning, full gales, hurricanes, or similar
unusual natural occurrences or any condition caused by any deliberate
act or by negligence in maintenance.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 ROOF SYSTEM
A. Roofing system shall be a mechanically fastened fully adhered membrane
roof system. Materials and installation shall conform to the
manufacturer's standard specifications, and work of this Section shall be
executed by Roofing Subcontractor licensed by the manufacturer.
B. Elastomeric roofing system shall consist of single-ply EPDM sheet adhered
or mechanically attached over insulation layer or leveler board.
G Roofing system shall be listed in most recent Factory Mutual Research
Corporation (FMRC) Approval Guide for Class I-60 Roofing systems.
Installation shall be in accordance with FMRC Data Sheets 1-28, 1-29 and
1-49.
D. Manufacturers approved walkway pads to all equipment from roof access.
FEBRUARY 1999 07530-3 ELASTOMERIC SHEET ROOFING
LE9813 CHASE KITCHEN RENOVATION
as listed in the Table of Contents, shall be included in and made a part of
this Section.
B. Examine all Drawings and all other Sections of the Specifications for
requirements therein affecting the work of this Section.
1.04 REFERENCED STANDARDS
A. AMERICAN SOCIETY FOR TESTING AND MATERIALS(ASTM):
C728 Perlite Thermal Insulation Board
B. Federal Specifications (Fed. Spec.):
HH-I-1972 Insulation Board, Thermal, Polyurethane and
Polyisocyanurate Faced
1.05 SUBMITTALS
A. Shop Drawings: Submit shop drawings indicating slope-to-drain plan of
roof showing all slopes, valleys, crickets, and drain details. Provide
details of roof penetrations.
B. Shop Drawings for Final Inspection: Submit shop drawings for final
inspection of the roof as follows:
1. Shop Drawings shall be approved and assigned by the roof
manufacturer.
2. Shop drawings shall include: outline of roof and roof size, location
and type of all penetrations, perimeter and penetration details,
special details, location of Membrane Anchors, and a Bill of
Materials.
C Samples: Submit samples of each material under this Section requested by
Architect, for approval. Samples shall be in size and form requested by
Architect, and reasonable to show characteristics, color and finishes of
the materials.
1. Submit a 1 ft. x 1 ft. sample of roof leveler board.
D. Product Data: Submit complete manufacturer's product data of all
materials and systems to Architect for approval, consisting of complete
product description, test data, specifications, sufficient to fully describe
the proposed work.
E. Do not order materials or begin installation until Architects approval of
submittals has been obtained.
1.06 PRODUCT DELIVERY,STORAGE,AND HANDLING
A. Manufactured materials shall be delivered in original, factory-sealed
packages, cans and rolls, all bearing the name and description of the
product and the name of the manufacturer.
FEBRUARY 1999 07530-2 ELASTOMERIC SHEET ROOFING
LE9813 CHASE KITCHEN RENOVATION
* SECTION 07530
ELASTOMERIC SHEET ROOFING
PART GENERAL
1.01 REQUIREMENTS INCLUDED
A. Furnish and install adhered membrane roofing system as required to
complete the work of the Contract, as indicated on the Drawings and as
specified herein.
B. Provide temporary walkway over roofing for use of contractors of other
trades in performing work at the roof. Provide protection of roofing at
work sites on the roof as required.
C. Pre-Roofing Conference:
1. Before installation of roofing and associated work, meet at the Project
site with installer, roofing manufacturer, installers of related work,
demolition contractor, and other entities concerned' with roofing
performance, including whre applicable Owner's Insurer, test
agencies, governing authorities, Architect, and Owner.
2. Record discussions and agreements and furnish copy to each
participant.
3. Provide minimum of 72 hours advance notice to participants before
convening pre-roofing conference.
D. Special Requirements: Provide roofing system listed in most recent
Factory Mutual Research Corp. Approval Guide for Class I-60 roofing
system and complying with installation specifications outlined in Factory
Mutual Research Corp. Data Sheet 1-28.
E. Provide walking pads to all roof top equipment from roof access.
1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS
A. Sheet metal work, preformed roof edge flashing and parapet cap: Section
07620, SHEET METAL FLASHING AND TRIM.
B. Metal roof deck: Section 05300, METAL DECKING.
G Concrete decking: Section 03300, CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE.
D. Skylights, roof pentrations, and mechanical equipment: See respective
sections.
1.03 ACES
A. The BIDDING REQUIREMENTS,CONTRACT FORMS AND CONDITIONS OF THE
CONTRACT and applicable parts of DIVISION 1 - GENERAL REQUIREMENTS,
FEBRUARY 1999 07530-1 ELASTOMERIC SHEET ROOFDG
LE9813 CHASE KITCHEN RENOVATION
3. For penetrations by plastic pipe, the following materials are
acceptable: Hilti CP 642 Firestop Collars; Hilti FS 611A Intumescent
Firestop Sealant or equal.
4. For penetrations by combustible items (penetrants consumed by high
heat and flame) including insulated metal pipe, PVC jacketed, flexible
cable or cable bundles the following material is acceptable: Hilti FS
611A Intumescent Firestop Sealant or equal.
5. For large size/complex penetrations made to accommodate cable trays,
multiple steel and copper pipes, electrical busways and raceways, the
following material is acceptable: Hilti FS 635 Trowelable Firestop
Compound _or equal.
B. Provide a firestop system with an "F" rating as determined by UL 1479 or
ASTM E 814 which is equal or higher than the time rating of construction
being penetrated.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 PREPARATION
A. Clean surfaces to receive firestopping materials of dirt, dust, grease, oil,
loose material, and other matter which may effect bond of firestopping
material or the fire resistance.
B. Insure that surface to be firestopped is prepared in accordance with
manufacturer's instructions.
3.02 INSTALLATION
A. Refer to Underwriter's Laboratories, Inc. (UL) Fire Resistance Directory;
"Through-Penetration Firestop Systems (XHEZ)" for system details.
B. Install firestopping materials in accordance with manufacturer's
instructions.
END OF SECTION
FEBRUARY 1999 07271-3 FIRE PENETRATION SEALANT
LE9813 CHASE KITCHEN RENOVATION
1.06 QUALITY ASSURANCE 100*-
A. Qualifications: Applicator shall receive training on installation of through-
penetration firestop materials from manufacturer's representative.
1.07 REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS
A. Conform to applicable code requirements.
1.08 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING
A. Deliver materials in original unopened containers identified with
manufacturer's brand designation and UL label where applicable.
B. Store materials under cover and protect from damage in accordance with
manufacturer's instructions.
C. Do not use damaged or expired materials.
D. Before handling, read product and material safety data sheets.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 MANUFACTURERS
A. Subject to compliance with through penetration firestop systems (XHEZ) •
listed in Volume II of the UL Fire Resistance Directory. This specification i,
written based on Hilti Construction Chemicals, Inc. but "or equal" is
acceptable, provide products of the following manufacturers as identified
below:
Hilti Construction Chemicals, Inc.
Tremco Construction Products
United States Gypsum
2.02 MATERIALS
A. Use only firestop products that have been UL 1479 or ASTM E 814 tested for
the specific fire-rated construction conditions being firestopped,
conforming to construction assembly type, penetrating item size and type,
annular space requirements, and fire-rating involved for each distinct
application.
1. For penetrations by non-combustible items including steel pipe,
copper pipe, rigid steel conduit and electrical metallic tubing (EMT),
the following materials are acceptable: Hilti FS. 601 Elastomeric
Firestop Sealant; Hilti FS 605 High Performance Firestop Sealant or
equal.
2. For fire-rated construction joints or other gaps, the following material
is acceptable: Hilti FS 610 Elastomeric Firestop Sealant or equal.
FEBRUARY 1999 07271-2 FIRE PENETRATION SEALANT
LE9813 CHASE KITCHEN RENOVATION
SECTION 07271
FIRE PENETRATION SEALANTS
PART 1 GENERAL
1.01 REQUIREMENTS INCLUDED
A. Provide all equipment and materials, and do all work necessary to complete
the firestop sealant work for the entire project. The general contractor
shall be responsible for the actual field locations of penetrations through
fire rated partitions and or floors as required.
1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS
A. Section 07900, SEALANTS
B. Section 15250, MECHANICAL INSULATION
C Section 15300, FIRE PROTECTION
D. Section 16050, BASIC ELECTRICAL MATERIALS AND METHODS
1.03 REFERENCES
A. ASTM E 814: Test Method of Fire Tests of Through-Penetration Firestops.
B. UL 1479: Fire Tests of Through-Penetration Firestops.
C UL Fire Resistance Directory: Through-Penetration Firestops Systems
(XHEZ).
D. NFPA 70: National Electrical Code.
E. NFPA 101: Life Safety Code.
1.04 DEFINITION
A. Firestopping: A material, or combination of materials, used to retain the
integrity of fire-rated construction by maintaining an effective barrier
against the spread of flame (and to impede passage of smoke, gases and
water) through penetrations in fire-rated wall and floor assemblies.
1.05 SUBMITTALS
A. Submit under provision of section 01300.
B. Product Data: Provide data on product characteristics, product performance,
limitation criteria and documentation of proposed through-penetration
firestop systems which reflect actual job conditions.
C Manufacturer's installation instructions: Indicate preparation and
installation instructions.
FEBRUARY 1999 07271-1 FIRE PENETRATION SEALANT
LE9813 CHASE KITCHEN RENOVATION
1. Around all pipes, ducts, etc., penetrating through floors except in fire -
rated chases.
2. Other places where fire safing insulation is indicated or reasonably
required to carry out the intent of the Drawings.
3.04 VAPOR BARRIER UNDER SLABS
A. Install vapor barrier under all new concrete slabs. Lap material 8" at all
seams and tape in place securely. Take care not to puncture barrier. Where
rigid insulation is installed place under insulation.
3.05 CLEANING
A. Upon completion of building insulation work in any area, remove all
rubbish and debris from the work area and leave in broom clean condition.
END OF SECTION
FEBRUARY 1999 07210-4 BUILDING INSULATION
LE9813 CHASE KITCHEN RENOVATION
2.02 FIBERGLASS OR MINERAL PACKING WOOL INSULATION
A. Fiberglass or Mineral Packing Wool Insulation shall be bagged, fiberglass
or mineral fiber, insulating packing wood, equal to "Fiberglas Packing
Wool" by Owens-Corning Fiberglas Corp., or "Thermafiber Packing Wool"
manufactured by United States Gypsum Co., or equivalent product
manufactured by Manville Corp., as approved by Architect.
2.03 FIRE SAFING
A. Fire safing insulating shall be mineral wool fiber fire stopping insulation,
equal to "Thermafiber Fire Safing insulation", manufactured by United
States Gypsum Co., or equivalent product manufactured by Owens-Corning
Fiberglas Corp, Rockwool Industries, Inc., Manville Corp., or approved
equal conforming to governing. laws and building code.
2.04 Rigid insulation shall be closed cell polyurethane equal to Dow SM.
2.05 Vapor barrier under slabs shall be 6 mil polyethelene sheeting.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 INSTALLATION - GENERAL
A. Insulating materials and installation shall be in strict accordance with
manufacturer's printed instructions and specific recommendations, and
health and safety precautions, for each of the project conditions and in
accordance with the governing laws and building code.
3.02 GLASS FIBER BLANKETBATT INSULATION
A. Install continuous application of glass fiber blanket/batt insulation as
indicated. Fit all batts tightly together and to framing members, furring
strips, penetrations, and the abutting construction for positive thermal
seal. Carry continuously behind light cans, junction boxes, etc.
B. Install blanket/batt insulation, fully filling spaces between framing
members. Pack tightly into corners, and fill all double studs and box
headers and sills, and other similar voids, with insulation to maintain the
insulation integrity across the entire wall area.
C Provide support as required to retain batts in place batts in attic and ceiling
spaces.
D. Coordinate work with that of other Sections.
3.03 FIRE SAFING
A. Thoroughly pack into place, tightly and to maximum practicable density,
mineral wool fire safing insulation in the following locations, filling all
voids and hollow spaces, to serve as fire stopping:
FEBRUARY 1999 07210-3 BUILDING INSULATION
LE9813 CHASE KITCHEN RENOVATION
1.04 REFERENCED STANDARDS ►-
A. Federal Specifications (Fed. Spec.):
HH-I-521 Insulation Blankets, Thermal (Mineral Fiber, for Ambient
Temperatures)
1.05 SUBMITTALS
A. Samples: Submit representative samples of all materials proposed for use
under this Section to the Architect for approval.
B. Product Data: Submit complete manufacturer's product data for all materials
and systems to Architect for approval, consisting of complete product
description and specifications, complete instructions, and other pertinent
technical data required for complete product and product use information.
C. Do not order materials or begin installation until Architect's approval of
submittals has been obtained.
1.06 PRODUCT DELIVERY,STORAGE AND HANDLING
A. Materials shall be delivered to site in original, unopened packages or
containers bearing manufacturer's names, brand name, and types and
thickness of contents.
B. Store off the floor in interior spaces, adequately protected against damage
from all sources.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 FIBERGLASS BLANKETBATT INSULATION
A. Fiberglass Blanket/Batt Insulation shall be indicated thickness(es) by full
16-1/8 in. and 24-1/8 in. width (depending on spacing of wood framing
members) foil-faced, commercial fiberglass blanket or batt insulation,
conforming to Fed. Spec. HH-I-52le, Type I, equal to "Fiberglas CWI Blanket
Insulation", manufactured by Owens-Coming Fiberglas Corp., or equivalent
manufactured by Manville Corp., CertainTeed Corp., or approved equal by
Architect.
B. Fiberglass Blanket/Batt Insulation at attic spaces shall be non-combustible
foil PRK faced "Flame Spread 25" in indicated thicknesses) by full 16-1/8
in. and 24-1/8 in. width (depending on spacing of wood framing members)
commercial fiberglass batt insulation, conforming to ASTM C665 Type III,
Class A, Flame Spread 25, manufactured by Owens-Coming Fiberglas Corp.,
or equivalent manufactured by Manville Corp., CertainTeed Corp., or
approved equal by Architect.
G Unfaced sound insulation for suspended ceiling application shall be
"Sonobatts" in indicated thickness(es) commercial fiberglass batt
insulation in 24" widths, conforming to ASTM C665 Type I, manufactured bye
Owens-Coming Fiberglas Corp., or equivalent manufactured by Manville
Corp., CertainTeed Corp., or approved equal by Architect.
FEBRUARY 1999 07210-2 BUILDING INSULATION
LE9813 CHASE KITCHEN RENOVATION
SECTION 07210
BUILDING INSULATION
PART 1 GENERAL
1.01 REQUIREMENTS INCLUDED
A. Provide all equipment and materials, and do all work necessary to complete
the building insulation work as indicated on the Drawings, and as specified
herein. Building insulation shall include but not be limited to:
1. Glass fiber batt insulation in all new interior partitions.
2. Fire-safing insulation at fire-stopped spaces between edges of floor
slabs and exterior concrete brick or curtain wall construction; around
pipes, ducts, etc., penetrating through floors except in fire-rated
chases; and other places as may be called for on the Drawings.
3. Rigid insulation at interior or exterior of concrete walls or under
concrete slabs.
4. Glass fiber batt insulation with vapor barrier in exterior wall systems.
5. Glass fiber batt insulation in attic assemblies with vapor barrier when
indicated.
6. Other building insulation work as may be called for on Drawings and
not indicated or specified to be included under other Sections.
B. Provide vapor barrier under all new concrete slabs on grade.
1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS
A. Exterior wall construction: Section 06100, ROUGH CARPENTRY.
B. Acoustical and thermal insulation at gypsum drywall steel stud framing and
furring: Section 09250, GYPSUM DRYWALL.
G Pipe insulation: Section 015400, PLUMBING and Section 15250, MECHANICAL
INSULATION.
D. Duct insulation: Section 15250, MECHANICAL INSULATION.
1.03 REFERENCES
A. The BIDDING REQUIREMENTS,CONTRACT FORMS AND CONDITIONS OF THE
CONTRACT and applicable parts of DIVISION 1 - GENERAL REQUIREMENTS, as
listed in the Table of Contents, shall be included in and made a part of this
Section.
B. Examine all Drawings and all other Sections of the Specifications for
requirements therein affecting the work of this Section.
FEBRUARY 1999 07210-1 BUILDING INSULATION
LE9813 CHASE KITCHEN RENOVATION
B. Where locking hardware is required for cabinets Best cylinders with 7
pin removeable cores shall be supplied and installed under this section
following the general hardware specification requirements as listed
under Section 08710, FINISH HARDWARE.
PART 3 EXECU'ITON
3.01 WORKMANSHIP
A. The details shown on the drawings are an outline or requirements and
are not intended to interfere with manufacturer's standard shop
procedures and practices. Where important differences occur between
these details and the manufacturer's standards, the manufacturer shall
flag such differences by notes on shop drawings.
3.02 QUALITY OF MILLWORK
A. Wood cabinets, tops, and shelving exposed to view shall conform to AWI
"premium" grade AWI Quality Standards. All other work shall conform to
AWI "custom" grade standards.
B. Millwork finishes shall be as follows:
L Wood for transparent finish: AWI "Premium Grade", AWI Finish
System No. 5, premium grade catalized polyurethane.
2. Wood for opaque finish: AWI "Custom Grade", AWI Finish System No.
11, premium grade opaque catalyzed polyurethane.
3.03 DELIVERY
A. Delivery millwork only under favorable weather conditions and store
within building at such time that proper conditions of temperature and
humidity for storage 65°F to 75°F can be maintained.
3.04 INSTALLATION OF MILLWORK
A. Installation is part of the work of FINISH CARPENTRY.
B. Touch-up work shall be according to requirements of
manufacturer/fabricator of units.
3.05 CLEAN UP
A. Upon completion of the work of this section, remove all debris relating
the conduct of this portion of the work from the premises.
B. Provide manuals, instructions and project close-out according to project
manual.
END OF SECTION
FEBRUARY 1999 06400-4 CABINETS AND COUNTERS
LE9813 CHASE KITCHEN RENOVATION
low B. Movable Shelving and Dividers:
3/4" clear Ponderosa Pine or 3/4" AB Grade Fir plywood with exposed
edges edgeband with a clear pine or fir stained to match cabinet exterior.
C. Backs:
1/2" AB grade fir plywood.
D. Framing, Blocking, Nailers, etc.:
No. 2 Pine or equal.
E. Filler Strips:
Similar grade to adjacent material.
2.02 LAMINATED PLASTIC ASSEMBLIES
A. NEMA Standard LD-3 high pressure decorative laminates: Formica,
Nevamar, WilsonArt or equal: color and finish as called for in the color
schedule to meet the following standards:
1. Surface Sheet: 1/16" thick
2. Back Sheet: 1/32" thick phenolic back sheet.
3. Edging: 1/16" thick, general purpose; or postforming
grade 0.5" thick.
4. Adhesive: Fire resistant, as recommended or furnished
by the plastic laminate manufacturer.
5. Backing: 3/4" AC Grade DFPA plywood. No flake board or
particle board will be permitted.
2.03 SOLID SURFACING MATERIAL
A. Solid surfacing material (SSM) shall be Corian as manufactured by Dupont
in dimensions and configurations shown on drawings. Color to be Aurora.
2.04 SPECIAL FACING MATERIALS
A. Special facing materials used on cabinet bodies shall be as follows:
2.05 CABINET HARDWARE
A. Knape and Vogt, Garcy, Stanley, or equal, to suit indicated functions of
items fabricated and shall be listed and noted on the shop drawings for
each items submitted for approval. For shelving standards K &V 180
�ww standards or equal are required.
FEBRUARY 1999 06400-3 CABINETS AND COUNTERS
LE9813 CHASE KITCHEN RENOVATION
Architectural Woodwork Quality Standards, Guide Specifications _Aft
and Quality Certification Program - Latest Edition
C. LD-3 High Pressure Decorative Laminates - National Electrical
Manufacturers Association (NEMA)
1.05 SUBMITTALS
A. Shop Drawings: Submit shop drawings in complete detail to Architect for
approval, covering all architectural woodwork items.
B. Samples: Submit duplicate samples of all requested materials of fabricated
items to Architect for approval. Size and form of samples shall be as
specified or as requested by the Architect.
C. Do not order materials or begin production runs of architectural woodwork
items until Architect's approval has been obtained.
D. Do not order materials or begin production until field measurements have
been done.
E. Verification of all field dimensions are the responsibility of the Contractor.
F. Approved mock-ups and samples shall be retained and protected, and shall
become the standard of quality and finish for all work under this section.
1.06 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Millwork must be fabricated and assembled by a millwork subcontractor
equipped and experienced to do work equal in all respects to the best
standards for fabricating quality millwork. Millwork shall be
manufactured at the shop of the millwork subcontractor and assembled in
single and complete units to the greatest extent that the requirements of
delivery and installation in the building will permit.
1.07 GUARANTEE
A. In addition to the specific guarantee requirements of GENERAL CONDITIONS
and MODIFICATIONS TO GENERAL CONDITIONS, the Contractor shall obtain in
the Owner's name the standard written manufacturer's guarantee of all
materials furnished under this Section where such guarantees are offered
in the manufacturer's published product data. All these guarantees shall
be in addition to, and not in lieu of, other liabilities which the Contractor
may have by law or other provisions of the Contract Documents.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 MATERIALS FOR WOOD CABINETS AND SHELVING
A. Stile, Rails, Panel Doors:
3/4" solid stock hard maple conforming to "Premium" grade AWI Quality
Standards for all work. -
FEBRUARY 1999 06400-2 CABINETS AND COUNTERS
LE9813 CHASE KITCHEN RENOVATION
SECTION 06400
CABINETS AND COUNTERS
PART 1 GENERAL
1.01 REQUIREMENTS INCLUDED
A. Furnish all labor, materials, services, equipment and appliances required
for millwork indicated on the drawings and specified herein.
1. Cabinets _ and counters
2. Laminated plastic assemblies
3. Shelving
4. Millwork hardware.
5. Millwork installed on food service equipment set in place by others.
1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS
A. Finish carpentry, millwork and counters: Section 06200, FINISH
CARPENTRY.-
B. Plumbing work: Section 15400, PLUMBING.
C. Painting and finishing: Section 09900, PAINTING.
D. Items by others set in/on millwork fabrications.
1.03 SHOP DRAWINGS
A. Prepare and submit copies of millwork shop drawings to the Architect for
approval. Show fabrication of typical units, unit assemblies, locations
and installation setting details. Cabinet hardware proposed to be
furnished with, and as a part of cabinets to suit indicated use of function
of the item, shall be listed or noted on the shop drawings. Identify all
material on shop drawings, as required to complete the work, ready for
installation.
1.04 REFS UiNCED STANDARDS
A. American National Standards Institute (ANSI):
A161.2 Performance Standards for Fabricated High Pressure Decorative
Laminate Countertops
A208.1 Particleboard, Mat-Formed Wood
B. The Architectural Woodwork Institute (AWI):
FEBRUARY 1999 06400-1 CABINETS AND COUNTERS
LE9813 CHASE KITCHEN RENOVATION
AW A. Just prior to completion of work of this Section, inspect work in the
company of the Architect and make adjustments and corrections to the
work leaving all operating parts in perfect operating condition, all
jointing to adjacent material tight, all surfaces without blemishes or stains,
all work properly executed and complete, and all defects and damaged work
replaced or corrected.
END OF SECTION
FEBRUARY 1999 06200-7 FINISH CARPENTRY
LE9813 CHASE KITCHEN RENOVATION
3.03 SPECIFIC INSTRUCTIONS FOR FINISH CARPENTRY WORK
A. Important Note: No attempt is made in the following specific instructions to
list all elements of finish carpentry and architectural woodwork required
on this Project, and it shall be the responsibility of the Contractor to
determine for himself from the Drawings the scope and nature of the work
required. These specific instructions are intended only to provide
additional instructions regarding those portions of the finished carpentry
and architectural woodwork for which information beyond that given on
the Drawings or covered in the AWI Quality Standards seems needed to
properly describe the work. Where the scope of a category is listed it is
done in a general manner to assist the Contractor in determining the
general nature of work he shall look for as being required in said category,
and not to limit the work.
3.04 FINISH CARPENTRY WORK
A. Generally, the scope of finish carpentry work shall be taken to include
plywood mounting panels at electrical and telephone rooms for installation
of telephone and electrical equipment.
B. Install plywood mounting panels on back walls of electrical and/or
telephone room(s) where required. Securely anchor to supporting
structures by anchorage devices of appropriate type and adequate capacity.
Maintain the work plumb, level, straight, and true.
C. Exterior finish carpentry work shall be installed with galvanized fasteners;
and- waterproof glues and filler. Materials and installation shall be in
conformance to general practice consistent with that required for exterior
applications.
3.05 MILLWORK
A. Include all millwork throughout the Project except that provided as parts of
manufactured assemblies under other Sections.
B. Fabricate and install all millwork items indicated in accordance with the
details on the Drawings and the above material schedule and workmanship
requirements, and the above mentioned quality standards applicable to this
work. All work shall be constructed and installed with the highest quality
of workmanship by first-class mill workers and finish carpenters
normally engaged in work of the indicated type and specified quality.
C. Miscellaneous Items: Construct and install all required standing and
running trim, paneling, rails and other miscellaneous millwork items
throughout, as called for on the Drawings and as required to satisfactorily
complete the entire work, whether or not each and every required piece is
specifically indicated on the Drawings. All trim shall be of same material
and finish as the larger member to which applied.
D. Provide all cut-outs required in laminate work at shop from templates as
required for built-in items. ,,
3.06 COMPLETION _
FEBRUARY 1999 06200-6 FINISH CARPENTRY
LE9813 CHASE KITCHEN RENOVATION
Construction and workmanship of transparent and laminated plastic
finished architectural woodwork shall conform to, or exceed, the
requirements of "Premium Grade" as established by AWI Quality Standards.
Other architectural woodwork and finish carpentry work shall conform to
"premium" grade.
B. Joints shall be tight and so formed as to conceal shrinkage. Butt joints shall
be fitted with concealed spline. Shop miters four inches or greater shall be
glued and doweled or locked with metal spline. Miters less than four inches
shall be glued and splined with the spline concealed.
C Frames shall be free of splices along lengths of members. Running trim
shall have a minimum of splices or joints and where such splices or joints
occur, they shall be fastened securely so that all exposed surfaces result in
smooth, continuous planes.
D. Exposed edges of plywood and particleboard shall be edged with triangular-
section edge strip of (matching) hardwood, at least 1I2 in. thick, the full
width of the plywood or particleboard edge. Miter edge strips at corners.
Edge strips shall not be exposed on faces of the sheets.
E. Fasteners in .finished work shall be blind nailed or concealed, wherever
possible, meeting requirements of AWI Quality Standards for grade
specified. Glue or adhesive shall be used as required for grade specified.
Surface nails or finish screws, when exposed to view shall be set and
concealed as required for grade specified. Putty filler will not be accepted
ew in exposed surfaces specified to be "Premium Grade". Nailing through
laminated plastic will not be permitted.
F. Wherever attaching onto floors, walls or ceilings, care shall be taken to
protect pipes or conduits embedded therein. Damage to embedded or
enclosed work shall be corrected without further cost to Owner.
G. Work shall be secured as to prevent checks _or warps. Woodwork shall be
properly framed, closely fitted, and accurately set to the required lines and
levels and shall be rigidly secured in place.
3.02 PAINTING AND FINISHING
A. Field painting and finishing will be provided under Section 09900,
PAINTING, but it shall be the responsibility of this Contractor to see to it
that all finish carpentry items and architectural woodwork items be primed
and back primed or sealed before installation. Paint or seal coats must be
dry before items are installed.
B. Finish work shall be sandpapered at field joints and where required by
installation and shall be left in perfect condition for finishing under
Section 09900, PAINTING.
C For items finished under other sections but installed under this section
touch-up work shall meet requirements of manufacturer or fabricator and
shall be done by mechanics experienced in the type of work required.
FEBRUARY 1999 06200-5 FINISH CARPENTRY
LE9813 CHASE KITCHEN RENOVATION
Materials for transparent finished, laminated plastic finished, and paint -
finished architectural woodwork shall be as follows:
1. Solid Stock Hardwood for general exposed transparent finish use
throughout shall be from, clean, select, ash, free from all knots and
defects and conforming to AWI Quality Standards.
2. Plywood for exposed transparent finish shall be from No. 1 Premium
Grade, fire-treated (Class II), plain sliced white ash veneered plywood,
veneer or solid lumber core, as recommended by and conforming to
the AWI Quality Standards. No exposed defects or patches will be
allowed.
3. Solid stock hardwood for exposed paint finish shall be from clear
select plain-sawn stock natural birch or white poplar conforming to
specified AWI Quality Standards except all bullnose and chair rail trim
shall be hard maple.
4. Plywood for exposed paint finish shall be paint grade, Good Grade,
rotary cut Birch veneered plywood, veneer or lumber core, as
recommended by and to conform to the specified AWI Quality
Standards.
5. Backup for laminated plastic finishes shall be 3/4" AC grade DFPA
plywood conforming to AWI Quality Standards.
6. Laminated plastic shall be first quality, General Purpose grade, high
pressure laminate, 1/16 in. thick, conforming to NEMA standards and
ANSI A161.2, matte finish, in solid colors as selected by Architect, as
manufactured by Wilson-Art, Formica, Textolite, Nevamar, or equal
approved by Architect. Adhesive shall be as recommended by
laminated plastic manufacturer, in accordance with AWI Quality
Standards.
D. Solid Surfacing Material (SSM) shall be Corian from manufacturer's
selected colors as manufactured by Dupont and shall be provided in
dimensions and color indicated on the documents and approved by the
Architect.
2.02 CABINET AND SHELVING HARDWARE
A. Knape and Vogt, Garcy, Stanley, or equal, to suit indicated functions of
items fabricated and shall be listed and noted on the shop drawings for
each items submitted for approval.
B. Provide locking cylinders and keying matching door hardware as
specified under section 08710, FINISH HARDWARE.
PART 3 EXECUIZON
3.01 WORKMANSHIP AND INSTALLATION REQUIREMENTS �
A. Finished woodwork shall be dressed and sanded free from machine and tool
marks, abrasions, raised grain, or other defects on surfaces exposed to view.
FEBRUARY 1999 06200-4 FINISH CARPENTRY
LE9813 CHASE KITCHEN RENOVATION
continuously maintained at a temperature above 650F. Obtain approval
of Owner's representative before delivering architectural woodwork
materials or fabricated items. Store all materials off the floor, fully
protected from damage of all kinds.
2. Plywood for exposed transparent finish shall be from No.l Premium
Grade plain sliced maple veneered plywood, veneer or solid lumber
core, as recommended by and conforming to the AWI Quality
Standards. No exposed defects or patches will be allowed.
3. Materials used for laminated plastic or transparent finished
architectural woodwork shall meet or exceed the requirements of
"Premium Grade" as established by AWI Quality Standards. Materials
for other architectural woodwork and finish carpentry work shall
conform to AWI Quality Standards "Custom Grade".
4. Wood requiring preservative treatment shall be pressure-treated with
waterborne preservatives, to comply with AWPB LP-2 for above-
ground items and LP-22 for ground contact items. Kiln dry after
treatment to 19% maximum mositure content for lumber and 15% for
plywood. Treat above-ground wood exposed to deterioration by
moisture and all wood in contact with the ground or fresh water.
5. Fire-retardant treatment of wood shall be pressure impregnated to
comply with AWPA C20 for lumber and AWPA C27 for plywood. Provide
where indicated and where required by code. Do not use fire-retardant
treatment containing amonium phosphates. Vehicle for preservative
shall be compatible with final finish.
6. Wood panel for exterior exposed paint finish shall be waterproof, sign
grade MDO board as recommended by and conforming to AWI Quality
Standards.
7. Wood trim for exterior exposed paint finish shall be clear pine
conforming to AWI Quality Standards "Custom Grade".
8. Wood shall be furnished in longest practical lengths with respect to
each intended use, and single-length pieces shall be used wherever
possible.
9. Take all necessary field measurements before starting fabrication of
built-in work.
B. Utility Mounting Panel Materials:
1. Plywood for construction of mounting panels, at telephone, electrical
and mechanical rooms shall be A-D veneer plywood (A veneer
exposed), APA Interior Grade.
C Architectural Woodwork Materials: All finish carpentry wood work where
concealed by cabinet doors shall be for paint finish. All other
architectural woodwork, except that specifically indicated to be laminated
plastic finished, or transparent finished, shall be for paint finish.
FEBRUARY 1999 06200-3 FINISH CARPENTRY
LE9813 CHASE KITCHEN RENOVATION
A161.2 Performance Standards for Fabricated High Pressure Decorative'""'
Laminate Countertops
A208.1 Particleboard, Mat-Formed Wood
B. The Architectural Woodwork Institute (AWI):
Architectural Woodwork Quality Standards, Guide Specifications
and Quality Certification Program - Latest Edition
G LD-3 High Pressure Decorative Laminates - National Electrical
Manufacturers Association (NEMA)
1.05 SUBMITTALS
A. Shop Drawings: Submit shop drawings in complete detail to Architect for
approval, covering all architectural woodwork items.
B. Samples: Submit duplicate samples of all requested materials of fabricated
items to Architect for approval. Size and form of samples shall be as
specified or as requested by the Architect.
C Do not order materials or begin production runs of architectural woodwork
items until Architect's approval has been obtained.
D. Do not order materials or begin production until field measurements have
been done.
E. Verification of all field dimensions are the responsibility of the Contractor.
F. Provide full size mock up of all items so indicated on drawings for
Architect's and Owner's approval prior to proceeding with the work.
G. Approved mock-ups and samples shall be retained and protected, and shall
become the standard of quality and finish for all work under this section.
1.06 GUARANTEE
A. In addition to the specific guarantee requirements of GENERAL CONDITIONS
and MODIFICATIONS TO GENERAL CONDITIONS, the Contractor shall obtain in
the Owner's name the standard written manufacturer's guarantee of all
materials furnished under this Section where such guarantees are offered
in the manufacturer's published product data. All these guarantees shall
be in addition to, and not in lieu of, other liabilities which the Contractor
may have by law or other provisions of the Contract Documents.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 FINISH CARPENTRY AND ARCHITECTURAL WOODWORK MATERIALS
A. General:
1. Do not deliver materials to site until building has been closed in,
materials have been installed and are sufficiently dry, and building is
FEBRUARY 1999 06200-2 FINISH CARPENTRY
LE9813 CHASE KITCHEN RENOVATION
SECTION 06200
FINISH CARPENTRY
PART GENERAL
1.01 REQUIREMENTS INCLUDED
A. Provide all equipment and materials, and do all work necessary to complete
finish carpentry and millwork as indicated on the Drawings and as
specified herein. Include, but do not limit to:
1. Finish carpentry work, including all wood trim.
2. Back boards for mounting telephone and electrical. panels.
3. Architectural woodwork, including millwork and wainscotting.
4. Plastic laminate vanity and counter tops, cabinets and shelving,
except as provided under CABINETS AND COUNTERS, SECTION 06400.
1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS
A. Rough carpentry: Section 06100, ROUGH CARPENTRY.
B. Interior rails: Section 05720, ORNAMENTAL RAILS AND ACCESSORIES
C Painting: Section 09900, PAINTING.
D. Installation of doors: Section 08100, STEEL DOORS AND FRAMES
E. Installation of wood doors: Section 08210, WOOD DOORS
F. Installation of finish hardware: Section 08710, FINISH HARDWARE.
G. Installation of specialities: Section 10100, SPECIALTIES.
H. Section 06400, CABINETS AND COUNTERS.
1.03 REFERENCES
A. The BIDDING REQUIREMENTS,CONTRACT FORMS AND CONDITIONS OF THE
CONTRACT and applicable parts of DIVISION 1 - GENERAL REQUIREMENTS, as
listed in the Table of Contents, shall be included in and made a part of this
Section.
B. Examine all Drawings and all other Sections of the Specifications for
requirements therein affecting the work of this Section.
1.04 REFERENCED STANDARDS
A. American National Standards Institute (ANSI):
FEBRUARY 1999 06200-1 FINISH CARPENTRY
LE9813 CHASE KITCHEN RENOVATION
H. Nailing of rough carpentry work shall conform to requirements of the
governing laws and codes.
I. Where nailing or power-driving into concrete or masonry is done, take
care to avoid puncturing conduits, pipes, ducts, etc., embedded in such
work, and repair any damage so caused.
J. Install all plywood sheathing and subflooring throughout, as indicated.
Where one side is to be exposed, install with best veneer to exposed side.
Provide solid framing or blocking under all ends and edges. Allow
approximately 1/16 in. gap between panel edges at square edged plywood
panels and 3/32- in. gap at tongue-and-groove edged plywood panels.
Installation and nailing of plywood board shall be in strict accordance with
the printed specifications and recommendations of the American Plywood
Association.
K. Install continuous X" bridging across wood joist and rafter installations
where and as indicated on structural drawings and/or as required by
governing code, built up of 1 in. by 4 in. wood strips or of proprietary metal
type. Provide continuous 1 in. by 3 in. wood strapping across underside of
wood joist installations except where resilient steel furring channels or
clips are called for, perpendicular to the joists, and located 16 in. on center,
for support of ceiling finish. Shim all furring and strapping as required to
assure straight lines and true planes for the finish materials to be applied.
3.02 BUILDING FELTS AND PROTECTIVE PAPERS
A. Provide -(l) all building felts required for installation of work of this
Section and (2) protective papers required for protection of finished floors,
previously installed equipment and existing equipment, except where
specified to be provided by a different trade.
3.03 CLEANING
A. Upon completion of rough carpentry work in any given area, remove all
rubbish and debris from the work area and leave in broom clean condition.
END OF SECTION
FEBRUARY 1999 06100-5 ROUGH CARPENTRY
LE9813 CHASE KITCHEN RENOVATION
E. Unless otherwise specifically indicated, wood nailers, furrings, etc., less
than 2 in. nominal thickness shall be secured to back-up concrete or
masonry materials by use of appropriate fasteners located 4 in. from ends
and spaced not greater than 16 in. on center along lengths of the members.
Type and length of fastening devices shall be such as to develop positive
and secure anchorage to the back-up material.
2.03 BUILDING FELTS AND PROTECTIVE PAPERS
A. Building felts for general use shall be Type K.
B. Kraft paper for protective purposes shall conform to Fed. Spec. UU-P-246a,
Type 1, and shall be positively non-staining.
PART 3 EXECUTION -
3.01 ROUGH CARPENTRY WORK
A. No attempt is made in this Specification to list the .various elements of
rough carpentry work, as the major part of the work to be done is clearly
shown on or reasonably inferred from the Drawings. The rough carpentry
work required shall include all such work required . throughout the project
to complete the entire intent of the work, regardless of whether or not
each and every item is specifically called for. Refer to Drawings to
determine the major extent of the rough carpentry work required.
B. The Contractor shall be responsible for structural integrity, connections,
and anchorage of all rough carpentry work.
C. Construct all rough carpentry work plumb, level, and true with tight, close
fitting joints, securely attached and braced to surrounding construction, all
in a first class workmanlike manner. Counterbore for bolt heads, nuts, and
washers where required to avoid interference with other materials.
D. Install continuous strips of fiberglas sill sealer under all sill plates bearing
on perimeter foundation walls.
E. Install wood framing members in one-piece, full length members for
maximum strength, laid out and spaced in accordance with the structural
framing drawings.
F. Install wood blockings, nailers, ledgers, etc., as indicated or specified,
furnished in not less than 12 ft. lengths, except where shorter lengths are
required.
G. Install all wood grounds required at gypsum drywall, and all grounds and
screeds required at stucco soffit work, including those required by other
trades to properly attach their work, such as grounds for attachment of
fixtures, louvers, grilles, registers, diffusers, etc. At gypsum drywall
include all blockings for attachment and anchorage of all fixtures,
accessories, cabinets, shelves, rail brackets, door stops, and other items
required to be attached to finished walls and ceilings, all of adequate
strength to carry with a factor of safety of at least 2 to 1 the various loads tom.
be applied.
FEBRUARY 1999 06100-4 ROUGH CARPENTRY
LE9813 CHASE KITCHEN RENOVATION
Preservers Association and Fed. Spec. TT-W- 571g. Retention shall be at
least 0.35 lbs. of dry salts per cu. ft. of wood. Supply certificate of
treatment to Architect. All treated wood shall be redried before
installation and all field cuts shall be brush treated with the
preservative material.
2. Under no circumstances shall creosote preservatives be used.
3. Wood preservative treatment for roofing elements shall be compatible
with EDPM roofing materials and with the guidelines of Factory
Mutual.
G. Sill Sealer shall be 1 in. by 6 in. fiberglass "Sill Sealer" by Owens-Corning
Fiberglas Corp.
2.02 ROUGH HARDWARE
A. Provide all rough hardware required to complete this work and to attach
this work in a secure and rigid manner to work of this and other trades,
including all inserts, anchors, anchor bolts, "L" bolts, lag bolts, screws,
washers, nuts, nails, joist hangers, post anchors, and other rough
hardware. Assist other trades as necessary in the placement of inserts and
anchor bolts in concrete and masonry and furnish full instructions
regarding locations, sizes, and other requirements of the items in order
that they may properly prepare their work to receive same. All rough
hardware shall comply in all respects with the governing laws and codes.
B. All rough hardware to be exposed in the finished exterior and interior
work shall be hot-dip galvanized steel (conforming to applicable ASTM
standard) or non-ferrous, except that cadmium plating may be substituted
for galvanized at interior locations only. Concealed rough hardware may
be unplated. Exposed exterior nails shall be hot-dip galvanized steel, or
non-ferrous. Fully concealed exterior nails and interior nails shall be
bright steel. Rough hardware items shall be of appropriate type and of
proper capacity and size as required for each specific project condition.
C. Beam hangers shall be proprietary steel assemblies, with top flanges, equal
to "Series LB and B", by Simpson Co., equivalent by Cleveland Steel
Specialties or Heckman Building Products Co., or equal approved by
Architect. Joist hangers shall be proprietary steel assemblies, as
manufactured by Simpson Co., Cleveland Steel Specialties or Heckman
Building Products Co., or equal approved by Architect. Types, capacities,
and size of all steel framing accessories shall conform to building code and
job requirements. Where exposed to exterior weather, metal framing
accessories shall be hot-dip galvanized.
D. Unless otherwise specifically indicated, wood sill plates, ledgers, etc., of 2
in. nominal thickness or greater shall be bolted to backup concrete or
masonry materials by use of 1/2 in. "L" bolts located 4 in. from ends and
splices and spaced not greater than 32 in. on center along lengths of the
members, to develop positive and secure anchorage to the back-up
material.
FEBRUARY 1999 06100-3 ROUGH CARPENTRY
LE9813 CHASE KITCHEN RENOVATION
A. All materials when delivered to site shall be stacked and stored above the
ground under protective coverings or indoors in such manner as to insure,au,
proper drainage, ventilation, and protection. No kiln dried materials shall
be placed in the building until concrete, and masonry work have been
completed and are sufficiently dry.
B. Lumber shall be of sound stock, new, straight, of consistent size, free of
stains and mildew, and kiln dried to a moisture content of not more than
19%. Where exposed or semi-exposed, wood members shall be selected for
best possible appearance from the grade of stock specified.
C. Lumber shall be surfaced four sides and shall bear the grade and trademark
of the association under whose rules it was produced, and a mark of mill
identification.
D. Lumber shall be furnished in longest practical lengths with respect to .
each intended use, and single length pieces shall be used wherever
possible.
E. General Carpentry Material Schedule:
Item Grade ecies
Lumber 2 in. • nominal Select Structural Spruce-Pine-
thickness or greater Framing, Fb 1500 psi Fir
for studs, andjoists.
Built up headers.
Lumber 2 in. nominal Stud Grade Spruce-Pine-
thickness for non- Fir
structural studs and
cripples.
Lumber 2 in. nominal No. 2 Structural Spruce-Pine-
thickness or greater or Better Fir
for other uses.
Lumber less than 2 in. No. 2 Common Spruce-Pine-
nominal thickness: Fir
Plywood Interior U.S. Product Standard Group 1
Subflooring: PS-1-74, STURD-I-FLOOR Species
Interior Grade, Exterior
Glue, T & G Edges
F. Wood Preservative Treatment
1. Pressure Type: All lumber for use as sill plates, plates, furring strips,
etc., in contact with face brick masonry, foundation walls, roofing or
slabs-on-grade shall be pressure treated with a toxic salt wood
preservative conforming to Fed. Spec. TT-W-535, Type B, applied in a
closed cylinder by vacuum process, full cell method in strict
accordance with the recommended practices of the American Wood ,
FEBRUARY 1999 06100-2 ROUGH CARPENTRY
LE9813 CHASE KITCHEN RENOVATION
SECTION 06100
ROUGH CARPENTRY
PART 1 GENERAL
1.01 REQUIREMENTS INCLUDED
A. Include all rough carpentry work as required to complete the Work of the
Contract, as indicated. Include, but do not limit to:
1. All rough hardware, inserts, related metal components, etc., for work
of this Section, except those items specifically specified to be provided
by other trades.
2. All rough carpentry framing (beams, joists, rafters, headers, studs,
cripples, sills, plates, ledgers, ridge boards, etc.) blockings, edgings;
curbs, grounds, screeds, nailing strips, nailing inserts, furring,
strapping, sheathing, subflooring, etc., required for all trades,
including preservative treatments and applications.
3. Building felts for work of this Section, and protective papers and
boards for finished floors and walls. Protection for installed items as
required.
4. Other usual items of normal rough carpentry work indicated on the
Drawings or necessary for the proper completion of the project, even
though not specifically mentioned herein.
1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS
A. Installation of inserts and cast-in or built-in anchor bolts to secure work of
this Section to concrete and masonry: Section 03300 CAST-IN-PLACE
CONCRETE.
B. Finish carpentry and millwork: Section 06200, FINISH CARPENTRY
C. Building insulation: Section 07210, BUILDING INSULATION.
D. Gypsum drywall: Section 09250, GYPSUM DRYWALL
E. Accessories: Section 10800, TOILET AND BATH ACCESSORIES
F. Metal rails: Section 05520, HANDRAILS AND RAILINGS
G. Metal fabrications: Section 05580, SHEET METAL FABRICATIONS
H. Windows: Section 08520, ALUMINUM WINDOW SYSTEMS
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 MATERIALS
FEBRUARY 1999 06100-1 ROUGH CARPENTRY
LE9813 CHASE KITCHEN RENOVATION
edges of adjacent construction. Attachment and sealant for panels adjacent to
equipment producing heat shall be suitable for such hot locations. ""k
C. Coordinate with work of other sections; provide inserts and templates as
needed. Install work plumb and level with uniform appearance.
D. Restore damaged finishes and protect work.
END OF SECTION
FEBRUARY 1999 05580-2 SHEET METAL,FABRICATIONS
LE9813 CHASE KITCHEN RENOVATION
SECTION 05580
SHEET METAL FABRICATION
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01 REQUIREMENTS INCLUDED
A. Provide sheet metal fabrications of stainless steel:
1. Stainless steel wall panels, battens,. caps, sills, ,trim nd enclosu�es�
1.02 SUBMITTALS
A. Submit for approval samples, shop drawings, product data.
1.03 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Comply with governing codes and regulations. Provide products of
acceptable manufacturers which have been in satisfactory use in similar
service for three years. Use experienced installers. Deliver, handle, and
store materials in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.01 MATERIALS
A. Materials:
1. Stainless steel: (Type 304) 16 gage or as shown on the Architectural
documents with AISI No. 4 satin directional polish.
2. Hardware: Stainless steel hinges, pulls, and locking devices as approved.
PART 3 -EXECUTION
3.01 INSTALLATION
A. Take field measurements prior to fabrication, where possible. Form to
required shapes and sizes with true, straight edges, lines and angles. Provide
light-tight, hairline joints.
B. Install materials and systems in accordance with manufacturer's
instructions and approved submittals. Install materials and systems in
proper relation with adjacent construction.
C. Water troughs, pans, etc. shall be of fully welded construction, free of
distortion, blemishes and scale; ground smooth and polished.
D. SS wall panels shall be fully adhered to substrate with mfg's approved
adhesive in sizes and configurations as indicated on drawings. Battens shall
OOW be adhered to panels in full bead of silicone sealant. Provide sealant at all
FEBRUARY 1999 05580-1 SHEET METAL FABRICATIONS
LE9813 CHASE KITCHEN RENOVATION
perimeter. At exposed applications, hold expanding grout back 1/2 in. from
finish surface and fill voids with Portland cement grout to match color and
texture of surrounding concrete surface.
E. Electrolytic Isolation: Where dissimilar metals are to come into contact with
one another, isolate by application of a heavy coating of bituminous paint
on contact surfaces in addition to shop coat specified above. Do not permit
the bituminous paint in any way to remain on surfaces to be exposed or to
receive sealant.
3.04 STEEL HANDRAILS AND RAILINGS
A. Fabricate and install interior and exterior steel handrails and railings at
stairs and platforms, ramps, open wells, overlooks, and other locations as
called for on the Drawings.
B. Handrails, at all but mechanical and service areas, throughout, shall be of
Architectural Quality. Exceptional care shall be taken in welding and
grinding, filling and surface sanding to provide truly smooth, clean, neat
and flush construction throughout, free of all surface defects and
defacements.
C. Steel handrails shall be fabricated of seamless round steel pipe, in
accordance with designs and configurations as called for on the Drawings.
Sizes and shapes of all members shall be as indicated. Joints shall be full-
welded and ground flush and smooth.
D. Include as part of this work all posts, balusters, pipe handrails,
intermediate rails, proprietary wall brackets, proprietary weld-on fittings
(escutcheons, flanges, and returns, 90 degree corners, bends, crossovers,
tees, etc.) anchors, and other items required for complete installations.
E. Exterior handrails shall be hot-dip galvanized after fabrication as specified
hereinbefore.
END OF SECTION
FEBRUARY 1999 05520-5 HANDRAILS AND RAILINGS
LE9813 CH.3SE KITCHEN RENOVATION
3. Furnish to the Contractor, with copy to Architect, a certified statement
that galvanizing complies fully with this Specification. AMMk
B. Shop Painting:
1. Steel handrail and railing assemblies shall be given a shop coat of
epoxy primer to type specified hereinbefore. Handrail and railing
assemblies will be field primed and painted under the work of Section
09900, PAINTING.
2. Immediately before shop painting, remove all rust, loose mill scale,
dirt, weld flux, weld spatter, and other foreign material with wire
brushes and/or steel scrapers. Power tool clean in accordance with
SSPC SP3. Remove any grease and oil by use of solvent recommended
by paint manufacturer. Sandpaper exposed surfaces as . required to
produce smooth, even finishes.
3. Apply paint by spray process in strict accordance with
manufacturer's printed instructions to uniform thickness(es)
recommended by manufacturer. Apply thoroughly and evenly and
work into comers and joints taking care to avoid sags and runs.
4. Do not paint surfaces to be embedded in concrete, or to be welded in
the field. After field welds are complete, grind smooth and flush,
thoroughly clean and then apply specified primer over all unprimed
surfaces in the field by brush or roller.
5. After erection, sand smooth and retouch all portions of the shop coats
chipped or damaged during erection, and coat all field welds and
connections with primer equivalent to that used for the shop coat.
3.03 INSTALLATION
A. Materials shall be carefully handled and stored under cover in manner to
prevent deformation and damage to the materials and to shop finishes, and
to prevent rusting and the accumulation of foreign matter on the metal
work. All such work shall be repaired and cleaned prior to erection.
B. Work shall be erected square, plumb, and true, accurately fitted, and with
tight joints and intersections. All anchors, inserts, and other members to
be set into concrete or masonry shall be furnished loose by this trade to be
built-into concrete and masonry by those trades as the work progresses.
Later cutting or drilling shall be avoided wherever possible.
C Metal work shall be rigidly braced and secured to surrounding
construction, and shall be tight and free of rattle, vibration, or noticeable
deflection after installation.
D. Where members, other than expansion bolts or inserts, are fastened into
concrete, set such members in proprietary-type expanding grout
manufactured specifically for such purpose, used strictly in accordance
with manufacturer's directions. Holes to receive members shall be formed
with galvanized sheet metal sleeves, expanded polystrene foam, or other +.
approved method to provide at least 1/2 in. clearance around entire
FEBRUARY 1999 05520-4 HANDRAILS AND RAILINGS
LE9813 CHASE KITCHEN RENOVATION
F. Shop paint for prime coat of steel handrail assemblies shall be Tnemec "No.
66 Hi-Build Epoxyline", Carboline "No. 190", DuPont "Corlar", or Napko "TPC
Epoxycote PA No. 5616" epoxy primer. Dry film thickness of application
shall be 3.0 to 4.0 mils.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 FABRICATION AND WORKMANSHIP
A. Metal surfaces shall be clean and free from mill scale, flake, rust and rust
pitting; well formed and finished to shape and size, true to details with
straight, sharp lines and angles and smooth surfaces. Curved work shall be
to true radii. Exposed sheared edges shall be eased.
B. Weld all permanent connections. Weld shall be continuous on all exposed
surfaces and where required for strength on concealed surfaces. Exposed
welds shall be ground flush and smooth, with voids filled with metallic
filling compound (metallic filling compound not permitted on surfaces to
receive hot-dip galvanizing). Tack-welding will not be permitted unless
specifically called for. Do not use screws or bolts where they can be
avoided. Where used, fastener heads shall be countersunk, screwed up
tight, and threads nicked to prevent loosening.
C. Fastenings shall be concealed where practicable. Thickness of metal and
details of assembly and supports shall give amply strength and stiffness.
Joints exposed to weather shall be formed to exclude water.
D. Do all cutting, punching, drilling, and tapping required for attachment of
hardware and of work by other trades where so indicated or where
directions for same are given prior to, or with approval of, shop drawings.
E. Live loads shall be not less than the minimum required by law. In addition,
the top railing shall be capable of resisting a force of 200 lb. applied at any
point in any direction. Design and construction shall be such as to assure
that under these design live loads there shall be no failure of any member
or connection, deflection of not more than L/360 of length of any member,
and without permanent deformation of any member or fastener. Factor of
safety shall be not less than 2-1/2 to 1.
3.02 SHOP COATINGS
A. Galvanizing:
1. Ferrous metal under this Section for exterior use shall be hot-dip
galvanized, including all bolts, nuts, washers, and other related
ferrous metal items used therewith. Galvanizing shall be done in
largest practicable units.
2. Hot-dip galvanizing process shall comply with ASTM A123, A153, A385,
and A386, as applicable. After galvanizing processed items shall be
straightened to remove all warpage and distortion caused by the
process.
FEBRUARY 1999 05520-3 HANDRAILS AND RAILINGS
LE9813 CHASE KITCHEN RENOVATION
B. American Welding Society (AWS):
D1.1 Structural Welding Code Steel
C Steel Structures Painting Council (SSPC):
SP 3 Power Tool Cleaning
1.04 SUBMITTALS
A. Shop Drawings: Submit shop drawings of steel handrail and railing work to
Architect for approval, showing sizes and thicknesses of all members types
of materials, methods of connection and assembly, complete dimensions,
clearances, anchorage, relationship to surrounding work by other trades,
shop paint and protective coatings, and other pertinent details of
fabrication and installation.
B. Samples: Submit duplicate samples of all materials to be furnished under
this Section in size and form requested by Architect.
C Do not order materials or begin fabrication until Architect's approval of
submittals has been obtained.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 MATERIALS
A. Materials shall be new stock, free from defects impairing strength,
durability or appearance, and of best commercial quality for each intended
purpose.
1. Steel pipe shall be seamless steel pipe conforming to ASTM A53,
Schedule 40. Galvanized steel pipe shall be used at exterior uses.
2. All other steel shall conform to ASTM A36.
B. Provide all anchors, bolts, sockets, sleeves, and other parts required for
securing each item of work of this Section to the construction. Furnish
required inserts and sleeves for installation in concrete under Section
03000, CONCRETE WORK. Furnish anchors, bolts. Furnish required inserts
and sleeve for installation in timber under Section 06100, ROUGH
CARPENTRY.
C Grout for setting handrail posts in concrete, where applicable shall be Set-
45, manufactured by Master Builders, Inc., Cleveland, OH 44122, or approved
equal.
D. Exposed fastenings shall be of the same materials and finish as the metal to
which applied, unless otherwise noted.
E. Welding rods shall conform to AWS Standards and the recommendation of
the welding rod manufacturer. Welding of steel shall conform to AWS D1.1.
FEBRUARY 1999 05520-2 HANDRAILS AND RAILINGS
LE9813 CH.kSE KITCHEN RENOVATION
SECTION 05520
HANDRAILS AND RAILINGS
PART GENERAL
1.01 REQUIREMENTS INCLUDED
A. Furnish and install steel handrails and railings, and related items, as
indicated on the Drawings and as specified herein.
1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS
A. Placing of metal inserts and sleeves where required for attachment of work
of this Section to concrete: Section 03000, CONCRETE WORK.
B. Metal fabrications other than specified herein: Section 05500, METAL
FABRICATIONS.
C. Field finish painting: Section 09900, PAINTING.
D. Placing of blocking for attachment in walls and partitions: Section 06100,
Rough Carpentry.
E. Galvanizing and metal coatings, Section 05035, Galvanizing.
1.0 3 REFERENCES
A. The BIDDING REQUIREMENTS,CONTRACT FORMS AND CONDITIONS OF THE
CONTRACT and applicable parts of DIVISION 1 - GENERAL REQUIREMENTS, as
listed in the Table of Contents, shall be included in and made a part of this
Section.
B. Examine all Drawings and all other Sections of the Specifications for
requirements therein affecting the work of this Section.
1.04 REFERENCED STANDARDS
A. American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM):
A 36 Structural Steel
A 53 Pipe, Steel, Black and Hot-Dipped, Zinc-Coated Welded and
Seamless
A 123 Zinc (Hot Galvanized) Coatings on Products Fabricated from
Rolled, Pressed and Forged Steel Shapes, Plates, Bars, and
Strip
A 153 Zinc Coating (Hot-Dip) On Iron and Steel Hardware
A 385 High-Quality Zinc Coatings (Hot-Dip)
A 386 Zinc Coating (Hot-Dip) on Assembled Steel Products
FEBRUARY 1999 05520-1 HANDRAILS AND RAILINGS
LE9813 CHASE KITCHEN RENOVATION
specified above. Do not permit the bituminous paint in any way to remain _Aak
on surfaces that are to be exposed or are to receive sealant.
3.03 INSTALLATION
A. Materials shall be carefully handled and stored under cover in manner to
prevent deformation and damage to the materials and to shop finishes, and
to prevent rusting and the accumulation of foreign matter on the metal
work. All such work shall be repaired and cleaned prior to erection.
B. Work shall be erected square, plumb, and true, accurately fitted, and with
tight joints and intersections. All anchors, inserts and other members to be
set in concrete or masonry shall be furnished loose by this trade to be
built-into concrete and masonry by those trades as the work progresses.
Later cutting or drilling shall be avoided wherever possible.
C Metal work shall be rigidly braced and secured to surrounding
construction, and shall be tight and free of rattle, vibration, or noticeable
deflection after installation.
D. Where members, other than expansion bolts or inserts, are fastened into
concrete oe masonry, set such members in proprietary-type expanding
grout manufactured specifically for such purpose, used strictly in
accordance with manufacturer's directions. Holes to receive members shall
be formed with galvanized sheet metal sleeves, expanded polystyrene foam,
or other approved method to provide at least 1/2 in. clearance around
entire perimeter. At exposed applications, hold expanding grout back 1/2 - .
in. from finish surface and fill voids with Portland cement grout to match
color and texture of surrounding concrete surface.
3.04 DESCRIPTION OF MAJOR ITEMS
A. The items described below constitute the major part of the work of this
Section, but are not intended or implied to cover each and every item that
may be required to properly complete the work. Carefully review the
Drawings to determine the full extent of the miscellaneous metal work
required, and carefully review the other trade Sections of the
Specifications, to determine the extent of metal work to be done by those
trades. All miscellaneous metal work not specifically specified to be
provided under other Section(s) but shown on the Drawings or reasonably
inferred therefrom, shall be furnished and installed as part of the work of
this Section.
B. Support brackets and dunnage for floor, wall, roof and ceiling mounted
mechanical equipment not provided by other sections.
END OF SECTION
FEBRUARY 1999 05500-6 METAL FABRICATIONS
LE9813 CHASE KITCHEN RENOVATION
D. Do all cutting, punching, drilling, and tapping required for attachment of
hardware and of work of other Sections where so indicated or where
directions for same are given prior to, or with approval of, shop drawings.
E. Live loads shall be not less than the minimum required by law. Where
specific live loads are not set forth in the laws and codes applicable to this
work, or in Contract Documents, designs shall be such as to support the live
loads normally imposed, without failure, without deflection of more than
L/360 of length of any number, and without permanent deformation, all
with a safety factor of not less than 2-1/2 to 1.
3.02 SHOP COATINGS
A. Galvanizing: All ferrous metal under this Section for exterior use,
including steel -lintels in exterior masonry walls, in addition to interior
items specifically so specified, shall be hot-dipped galvanized, including. all
bolts, nuts, washers, and other. related ferrous metal items used therewith.
1. Hot-dip galvanizing process shall comply with ASTM A123, A153, A385,
and A386 as applicable. After galvanizing, processed items shall be
straightened to remove warpage and distortion caused by the process.
2. Furnish certified statement that galvanizing complies fully with this
Specification.
B. Shop Painting: Ungalvanized ferrous metals under this Section shall be
given a shop coat of rust inhibitive primer of type specified hereinbefore.
Galvanized metals shall be field primed and painted under Section 09900,
PAINTING.
1. Immediately before shop painting, remove all rust, loose mill scale,
dirt, weld flux, weld spatter, and other foreign material with wire
brushes and/or steel scrapers. Power tool clean in accordance with
SSPC SP 3. Remove grease and oil by use of solvent recommended by
paint manufacturer. Sandpaper exposed surfaces as required to
produce smooth, even finishes.
2. Apply paint by spray process in strict accordance with
manufacturer's printed instructions to uniform thickness(es)
recommended by manufacturer. Apply thoroughly and evenly and
work well into corners and joints taking care to avoid sags and runs.
3. Do not paint surfaces to be embedded in concrete or masonry, or to be
welded in the field. After field welds are complete, grind smooth and
flush, thoroughly clean and then apply specified primer over all
unprimed surfaces in the field by brush or roller.
4. After erection, sand smooth and retouch shop coats chipped or
damaged during erection, and coat all field welds and connections with
primer equivalent to that used for the shop coat.
C Electrolytic Isolation: Isolate dissimilar metals from all other with heavy
coating of bituminous paint on contact surfaces, in addition to shop coat
FEBRUARY 1999 05500-5 METAL FABRICATIONS
LE9813 CHASE KITCHEN RENOVATION
5. Metal stairs shall be erected level and plumb, in correct alignment free `
from distortion and defect. Include all field welding and bolting as
required. Welding shall conform to AWS D1.1.
6. Steel pipe shall be seamless steel pipe conforming to ASTM A53,
Schedule 40. Steel tubing shall be structural steel square tubing
conforming to ASTM A501.
7. Construction specialties such as slotted inserts, wedge inserts, etc., shall
be as manufactured by Hohmann and Barnard; Gateware Erectors Inc.;
Richmond Screw Anchor Co.; or equal approved by the Architect.
8 Non-ferrous _metals shall be as specified under descriptions of specific
items, hereinbelow.
C. Provide anchors, bolts, sockets, sleeves, and other parts required for
securing each item of work of this Section to the construction. Furnish
inserts and sleeves to be set into concrete form work and concrete under
Section 03300, CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE.
D. Exposed fastenings shall be of the same material and finish as the metal to
which applied, unless otherwise noted.
E. WeldING rods shall conform to AWS Standards and the recommendations of
the welding rod manufacturer. .
F. Shop Paints: Shop paint for ferrous surfaces shall be high-quality, lead-
free, rust-inhibitive primer, equal to Tnemec No. "10-99" Metal Primer or
equivalent products manufactured by Devoe and Raynolds Co. or Carboline,
or approved equal.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 FABRICATION AND WORKMANSHIP
A. Metal surfaces shall be clean and free from mill scale, flake, rust and rust
pitting; well formed and finished to shape and size, true to details with
straight, sharp lines and angles and smooth surfaces. Curved work shall be
to true radii. Exposed sheared edges shall be eased.
B. Weld all permanent connections. Weld shall be continuous on all exposed
surfaces and on concealed surfaces where required for strength. Exposed
welds shall be ground flush and smooth, with voids filled with metallic
filling compound. Tack-welding will not be permitted unless specifically
called for. Do not use screws or bolts where they can be avoided. Where
used, heads shall be countersunk, screwed, up tight and threads nicked to
prevent loosening.
C. Fastenings shall be concealed where practicable. Thickness of metal and
details of assembly and supports shall provide ample strength and stiffness.
Joints exposed to weather shall be formed to exclude water.
FEBRUARY 1999 05500-4 METAL FABRICATIONS
LE9813 CHASE KITCHEN RENOVATION
A. Shop Drawings: Submit shop drawings of all metal fabrications to Architect
for approval, showing sizes and thicknesses of all members, types of
materials, methods of connection and assembly, complete dimensions,
clearances, anchorage, relationship to surrounding work of other sections,
shop paint and protective coatings, and other pertinent details of
fabrication and installation.
1. Indicate profiles, sizes, connection attachments, reinforcing,
anchorage, openings, size and type of fasteners, and any accessories.
2. Include erection drawings, elevations, applicable details, and field
dimensions.
3. Indicate welded connections using standard AWS welding symbols.
Indicate net weld lengths.
B. Samples: Submit duplicate samples of all materials to be furnished under-
this Section in size and form requested by Architect.
C. Do not order materials or begin fabrication until Architect's approval of
submittals has been obtained.
1.07 PRODUCT HANDLING AND STORAGE
A. Materials shall- be carefully handled and stored under cover in manner to
prevent deformation and damage to the materials and to shop finishes, and
to prevent rusting and the accumulation of foreign matter on the metal
work. All such work shall be repaired and cleaned before erection.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 MATERIALS
A. Materials shall be new stock, free from defects impairing strength,
durability or appearance, and of best commercial quality for each intended
purpose.
1. Unless otherwise specifically called for, work of this Section shall be
fabricated of structural steel conforming to ASTM A36.
B. Metal Stairs
1. Concrete-filled metal pan stairs shall be designed and fabricated to
support a uniform live load of 100 psf with stringer deflection not to exceed
L/360 of span and shall conform to Commonwealth of Massachusetts State
Building Code requirements.
2. Structural steel shapes shall be ASTM A 36 steel; sheet steel ASTM A 611.
3. Fabricate stairs with closed risers and treads of pan construction to
receive concrete fill. Form treads and risers from 12 gage minimum
sheet steel.
4. Steel pan stairs shall receive a shop coat of steel primer.
FEBRUARY 1999 05500-3 METAL FABRICATIONS
LE9813 CHASE KITCHEN RENOVATION
Steel for Buildings.
B. American Iron and Steel Institute (AISI):
Spec. Specifications for the Design of Cold-Formed Steel Structural
Members
C. American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM):
A 36 Structural Steel
A 53 Pipe, Steel, Black and Hot-Dipped, Zinc Coated Welded and
Seamless
A 123 Zinc (Hot-Galvanized) Coatings on Products Fabricated from
Rolled, Pressed, and Forged Steel Shapes, Plates, Bars, and Strip
A 153 Zinc Coating (Hot-Dip) on Iron and Steel Hardware
A 385 High-Quality Zinc Coatings (Hot-Dip)
A 386 Zinc Coating (Hot-Dip) on Assembled Steel Products
A 501 Hot-Formed Welded and Seamless Carbon Steel Structural Tubing
D. American Welding Society (AWS):
D1.1 Structural Welding Code - Steel
D1.3 Structural Welding Code - Sheet Steel
E. Steel Structures Painting Council (SSPC):
SP 3 Power Tool Cleaning
1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Referenced Standards: Conform to governing laws, building code, and
following standards:
1. AISI Specifications.
2. AISC Code.
3. AISC Specifications.
4. National Association of Architectural Metal Manufacturers (NAAMM),
applicable publications.
5. AWS Dl.l and D1.3.
1.06 SUBMITTALS
FEBRUARY 1999 05500-2 METAL FABRICATIONS
LE9813 CHASE KITCHEN RENOVATION
SECTION 05500
METAL FABRICATIONS
PART GENERAL
1.01 REQUIREMENTS INCLUDED
A. Provide all equipment and materials, and do all work necessary to complete
the metal fabrications work as indicated on the Drawings and as specified
herein.
1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS
A. Building into concrete and masonry of all metal inserts, sleeves, slots, and
anchor bolts except expansion type, to secure work of this Section to
concrete and masonry: Section 03300, CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE and Section
04200, UNIT MASONRY.
B. Masonry anchors and ties for masonry work, Section 04200, UNIT
MASONRY.
G Handrails and railings: Section 05721, ORNAMENTAL INTERIOR RAILS AND
ACCESSORIES and Section 05520, METAL HANDRAILS AND RAILINGS.
D. Rough hardware for rough carpentry work: Section 06100, ROUGH
CARPENTRY.
E. Field painting: Section 09900, PAINTING.
F. Galvanizing and metal coatings. Section 05035, GALVANIZING
G. Hangers, brackets, troughs, guards, and other steel items called for on
Drawings or in the Specifications to be provided for mechanical and
electrical work and required exclusively for the support or protection of
Mechanical and Electrical Work: All Division 15 Sections and Section 16100,
ELECTRICAL.
1.03 REFERENCES
A. The BIDDING REQUIREMENTS,CONTRACT FORMS AND CONDITIONS OF THE
CONTRACT and applicable parts of GENERAL REQUIREMENTS, as listed in the
Table of Contents, shall be included in and made a part of this Section.
B. Examine all Drawings and all other Sections of the Specifications for
requirements therein affecting the work of this Section.
1.04 REFERENCED STANDARDS
A. 'American Institute of Steel Construction (AISC):
Code Code of Standard Practice for Steel Buildings and Bridges
Spec. Specification for Design, Fabrication and Erection of Structural
FEBRUARY 1999 05500-1 METAL FABRICATIONS
LE9813 CHASE KITCHEN RENOVATION
3.01 INSTALLATION
A. Comply with AISC codes and specifications, and with AWS "Structural
Welding Code".
B. Touch-up field welds and abraded areas with shop primer.
END OF SECTION
FEBRUARY 1999 05120-2 STRUCTURAL STEEL
LE9813 CHASE K17TCHEN RENOVATION
SECTION 05120
STRUCTURAL STEEL
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01 REQUIREMENTS INCLUDED
A. Provide structural steel for building construction including sub-framing
units which are part of the general framing system. Include anchors,
bases, bearing plates, bracing, lintels when part of structural framing,
and detail fittings.
B. Modify existing structural steel systems and components to accommodate
remodeling and new work.
1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS
1.03 SUBMITTALS
A. Submit for approval shop drawings, product data, test reports.
1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Comply with governing codes and regulations. Provide products of
acceptable manufacturers which have been in satisfactory use in similar
service for three years. Use experienced installers. Deliver, handle, and
store materials in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.01 MATERIALS
A. Steel shapes, plates and bars: ASTM A 36.
B. Steel tube: ASTM A 500 Grade B.
G Anchor bolts: ASTM A 307.
D. Non-metallic shrinkage resistant grout; Euclid Euco NS, L&M Crystex,
Sonneborn Sonnegrout or approved equal. Compressive strength suited
for project requirements.
E. Shop finish for interior exposed structural steel: SSPC SP-6 cleaning;
Tnemec Series 37 Chem-Prime, universal rust inhibitive primer,.
compatible with epoxy & urethane top coats or approved equal.
F. Galvanized lintels: Hot dip galvanized ASTM A 123.
G. Welding: AWS D1.1.
pow, PART 3 -EXECUTION
FEBRUARY 1999 05120-1 STRUCTURAL STEEL
LE9813 CHASE KITCHEN RENOVATION
3. Joints: Maintain joint widths, except for minor variations required
to maintain bond alignment, lay walls with 3/8 inch joints. Cut
joints flush for masonry walls which are to be concealed or to be
covered by other materials. Tool exposed joints slightly concave.
4. Rake out mortar in preparation for application of caulking or
sealants where shown.
5. Remove masonry units disturbed after laying; clean and relay in
fresh mortar. Do not pound comers at jambs to fit stretcher units
which have been set in position. If adjustments are required,
remove units, clean off mortar, and reset in fresh mortar.
6. Veneer Walls
a. Keep cavity clean of mortar droppings during construction.
Strike joints cavity flush.
3.03 LINTELS
A. Provide minimum bearing at each jamb, of 6 inches for openings less
than 6 feet-0 wide, and 8 inches for wider openings.
B. All lintels shall be ASTM A36: Hot dipped galvinized ASTM A123.
3.04 FLASHING
A. Place thru-wall flashing on bed of mortar and cover with mortar. ..
B. Seal flashing penetrations with mastic before covering with mortar.
C Terminate flashing 1/2" from face of the wall.
D. Extend flashings beyond edges of lintels, at least 4" and turn up edge on
sides to form pan to direct moisture to exterior.
E. Provide concealed flashings in masonry work as shown.
F. Provide to Owner daily "Instamatic" photographs showing the detailed
construction of all flashing work.
3.05 CLEANING
A. Exposed masonry walls shall be thoroughly cleaned with water and fiber
brushes to remove mortar stains, dirt and dust.
B. If the mason has difficulty removing stains, he may use stiff fiber
brushed and not over 10% solution of muriatic acid.
C Rake out imperfect mortar joints and repoint as directed by the Owner, so
that the entire work shall be free of blemishes.
D. Cleaning shall be entirely completed before windows and door frames are
installed.
FEBRUARY 1999 04200-6 UNIT MASONRY
LE9813 CHASE KITCHEN RENOVATION
OOW F. Do not lower the freezing point of mortar by use of admixtures or
antifreeze agents.
1. Do not use calcium chloride in mortar or grout.
G. Pattern Bond: Lay unit masonry work in running bond with vertical
joint in each course centered on units in courses above and below.
Interlock each course of each wythe at corners.
H. Layout walls in advance for accurate spacing of surface bond patterns,
with uniform joint widths and to properly locate openings, movement-
type joints, returns and offsets. Avoid the use of less-than-half-size units
at comers, jambs and wherever possible at other locations.
I. Lay-up walls plumb and true and with courses level, accurately spaced
and coordinated with other work.
J. Tooth-in all block work at infill conditions.
K. Built-In Work
1. As the work progresses, build-in-items specified under this and
other sections of these specifications. Fill in solidly with masonry
around built-in items.
a. Fill space between hollow metal frames and masonry solidly with
mortar.
b. Where built-in items are to be embedded in cores of hollow
masonry units, place a layer of metal lath in the joint below and
rod mortar or grout into core.
c. Install channel frames of steel where shown for elevator and
overhead doors, according to the manufacturer's specifications.
d. Install loose lintels of steel where shown.
e. Install access panels where required in masonry. Before
installation, verify correct fire rating of panel to be installed.
L. Mortar Bedding and Jointing
1. Mix mortar ingredients for a minimum of 5 minutes in a mechanical
batch mixer. Use water clear and free of deleterious materials which
would impair the work. Do not use mortar which has begun to set, or
if more than 2 1/2 hours has elapsed since initial mixing.
2. Lay hollow concrete masonry units with full mortar coverage on
horizontal and vertical face shells; also bed webs in mortar in
starting course on foundation walls and in all courses where
adjacent to cells or cavities to be reinforced or to be filled with
concrete or grout.
FEBRUARY 1999 04200-5 UNIT MASONRY
LE9813 CHASE KITCHEN RENOVATION
2. Space anchors as shown, but not more than 24 inches on center --%,
vertically and 36 inches on center horizontally.
C. Flashing and Weep Holes
1. Provide concealed flashings over door openings, windows, angles
and as shown to be built into masonry.
2. Provide concealed flashings as follows:
a. All flashings for masonry work shall be 5 oz. electrolytic sheet
copper bonded on ,both sides to asphalt saturated cotton fabric as
manufactured by AFCO Products, York or Phoenix.
3. Provide plastic tube type weeps at the base of all cavities or
horizontal interruptions of cavities at 2'-0" on center in such a way
as to insure full drainage of cavity.
D. Miscellaneous Masonry Accessories
1. Reinforcing Bars: Deformed steel, ASTM A615, Grade 60 of the size
shown.
2. Premolded Control Joint Strips: Solid rubber strips with a Shore A
durometer hardness of 60 to 80, of size and configuration as
indicated.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 CONDITION OF SUBSTRATE
A. Examine the areas and conditions under which masonry is to be in-
stalled.'Do not proceed with the work until unsatisfactory conditions have
been corrected.
3.02 INSTALLATION, GENERAL
A. Thickness: Build masonry construction to the full thickness shown,
except, build single-wythe walls to the actual thickness of the masonry
units using units of nominal thickness indicated on the drawings.
B. Build recesses as shown and as required for the work of other trades.
C. Cut masonry units with motor-driven saw designed to cut masonry with
clean, sharp, unchipped edges. Cut units as required to provide pattern
shown and to fit adjoining work neatly. Use full units without cutting
wherever possible.
D. Do not wet masonry units.
E. Frozen Materials and Work: Do not use frozen materials or materials
mixed or coated with ice or frost. Do not build on frozen work. Remove
and replace masonry work damaged by frost or freezing.
FEBRUARY 1999 04200-4 UNIT MASONRY
LE9813 CHASE KITCHEN RENOVATION
3. Weight: Provide units complying with ASTMC129. Units shall be
"normal weight", using ASTM C33 concrete aggregates for a dry net
weight of not less than 125 lbs. per cubic feet or CMU units which
are rated as having a 2 hr fire-rating as noted on the drawings.
a. Concrete masonry units (CMU): provide manufacturer's stan-
dard color and texture.
2.03 MORTAR
A. Portland cement: ASTM C150, Type I.
1. Natural color for CMU
2. Color for brick veneer mortar to be selected by the Architect.
B. Hydrated lime: ASTM C207, Type S.
C. Sand: ASTM C144.
2.04 MASONRY ACCESSORIES
A. Horizontal Joint Reinforcing, for concrete masonry units.
1. Provide welded wire units prefabricated in straight lengths of not
less than 10 feet, with matching corner and 'tee' units. Fabricate
from cold-drawn steel wire complying with ASTM A82, with
deformed continuous side rods and plain cross-rods, and a unit width
of 1 1/2 inches to 2 inches less than thickness of wall.
2. Provide units fabricated as follows:
a. Truss type fabricated with single pair of 9 gauge side rods and
continuous diagonal cross-rods spaced not more than 16 inches
on center.
3. For exterior walls, hot-dip galvanize after fabrication with 0.8 oz.
zinc coating, ASTM A116 Class 3.
B. Anchoring Devices for Masonry
1. Flexible Anchors: Where masonry is shown or specified to be
anchored to structural framework with flexible anchors, provide 2-
piece anchors which will permit horizontal and vertical movement
of masonry, but will provide lateral restraint.
a. Flexible anchors shall be either adjustable web tie type 3/16"
galvanized steel 12" long with a 4" taper.to rod, 8" wide or
b. L-type corrugated tie 3" long with 4" bend inserted into anchor
clip made of 14 ga. by 3/4" wide galvanized steel.
c. or approved equal.
FEBRUARY 1999 04200-3 UNIT MASONRY
LE9813 CHASE KITCHEN RENOVATION
1• Concrete masonry units must be purchased from a single
manufacturer. lmft.
C. Work shall conform to published reccommendations of the Brick Institute
of America.
D. Flashing details shall conform to Factory Mutual guidelines.
1.04 SUBMITTALS
A. Samples
I. Submit samples of typical unit masonry units, required. Include, if
required,- the full range of exposed color and texture to be expected
in the completed work. Architects review will be for color and
texture only.
2. Submit samples of manufacturer's standard mortar colors, a colored
mortar may be selected for the masonry units exposed to view.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 BRICK
A. Face brick shall match existing in color and size and shall conform to
ASTM C 216, Grade SW, Type FBW, except that compressive strength shall
not be less than 6,000 psi (individual) nor 8,000 psi (average of five) ..p,
water absorption shall not exceed 10% (individual) nor 8% (average of
five) when subjected to five hour boiling test when tested in accordance
with ASTM C67 Color range shall be hand picked and blended at plant and
stored on pallets in proper percentages to assure color continuity in the
masonry construction.
B. Provide all special shapes of each type of brick as required to complete
the work as indicated in the Contract Documents.
2.02 CONCRETE MASONRY UNITS
A. Manufacturer: Obtain concrete masonry units from one manufacturer, of
uniform texture and color.
B. Concrete Masonry Units
I. Size: Manufacturer's standard units with nominal face dimensions of
16 inches long x 8 inches high (15-5/8 inches x 7-5/8 inches actual),
unless otherwise shown, depth as shown on the drawings.
Contractor should take note that some concrete units are not
standard sizes. General Contractor will be responsible for matching
blocks at existing block walls.
2. Special Shapes: Provide (with matching textured finish as re-
quired) required for lintels, corners, jambs, sash control joints,
headers, bonding and other special conditions as required for a
complete installation.
FEBRUARY 1999 04200-2 UNIT MASONRY
LE9813 CHASE KITCHEN RENOVATION
SECTION 04200
UNIT MASONRY
PART GENERAL
1.01 REQUIREMENTS INCLUDED
The conditions of the Contract including General Conditions, Modifications to
the General Conditions, and General Requirements, apply to the work specified
in this section.
A. The extent of the concrete masonry unit work is shown on the drawings
and includes but is not limited to:
1. Brick masonry work
2. Concrete masonry units (CMU)
3. Concrete masonry accessories
4. Masonry mortar
5. Reinforcing for concrete masonry units
6. Install access panels in masonry walls.
7. Daily "Instamatic" photographic record of all flashing installation.
1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS
A. Concrete work: Section 03300, CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE
B. Door frames: Section 08100, STEEL DOORS AND FRAMES
C. Access doors and frames: Section 08305, ACCESS DOORS
D. Painting of block walls: Section 09900, PAINTING
E. Sealing of joints: Section 07900, SEALANTS
F. Protection of pedestrian walks: Section 01500, TEMPORARY FACILITIES
1.03 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Lay up all walls and partitions plumb and true with courses level and
accurately spaced and coordinated with other work. Variations from
plumb, true of level of more than 1/8 inch in 8'-0" in any direction is
unacceptable.
B. Masonry Units
FEBRUARY 1999 04200-1 UNIT MASONRY
LE9813 CHASE KITCHEN RENOVATION
C. After the initial set on the seeded floor slab (when the slab will suppport the -
weight of a man without indentation) power floating will start with trowel
machines equiped with float blades.
D. After power floating operation when the surface water sheen has
disappeared, machine troweling will start and several trowelings will be
required to produce a smooth-hard-even surface.
E. The Trap-Rock surface will be hardened by applying a curing/sealer. The
membrane curing/sealer will have a solid content of 25% or greater with a
coverage not to exceed 400 SF per gallon. This will be placed immediately
after the final troweling of the finished floor slab.
F. All trades will be kept off the finished floor for a minimum of three days and
only foot traffic allowed for another seven days after the placement of the
trap rock flooring surface.
G. Restore damaged finishes as approved. Clean and protect work from damage.
END OF SECTION
FEBRUARY 1999 03350-2 CONCRETE FIMSHES
LE9813 CHASE KITCHEN RENOVATION
SECTION 03350
CONCRETE FINISHES
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01 SUMMARY
A. Provide processed concrete surface finishes:
1. Trap Rock Floor Finish at interior locations where new concrete floor is
indicated to be exposed.
1.02 SUBMITTALS
A. Submit for approval samples, product data, 4' by 4' mock-ups. Final approved
sample finished surface shall used as the standard for acceptance of the
finished work.
1.03 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Comply with governing codes and regulations. Provide products of
acceptable manufacturers which have been in satisfactory use in similar
service for three years. Use experienced installers. Deliver, handle, and
store materials in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.
B. Trap rock flooring installation shall be Trap-Rok Floor Surface installed by
' S&F Concrete Contractors, Inc., Hudson, MA or pre-approved equal by
Architect and Owner.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.01 MATERIALS
A. Trap Rock shall be fine grained igneous stone graded 3/8" to 1/8" and shall
show no greater than 20% loss on the standard Los Angeles Rattler Test.
PART 3 -EXECUTION
3.01 INSTALLATION
A. Perform operations to achieve approved appearance. Protect adjacent work
from damage. All floor finishing work shall be coordinated with the work of
other sections and shall be scheduled for installation in such sequence and
areas as directed by the general contractor in charge of the coordination of
the work.
B. Prior to its application on a screeded' concrete surface, the crushed stone is
thoroughly wet down and then mixed with one volume of portland cement to
six volumes of crushed stone. The mixture is evenly spread or cast upon the
screeded surface at a minimum of 314# per square foot of surface. In turn,
the cast-on stone mixture is then bull floated to a depth of approximately
3/8".
FEBRUARY 1999 03350-1 CONCRETE FINISHES
LE9813 CHASE KITCHEN RENOVATION
D. Non-Slip Aggregate Finish: Where indicated, provide abrasive, non-slip
aggregate finish to troweling 1/4 lb.ft.2 of abrasive into surface.
E. Sealing: Apply two coats of sealing/dustproofing compound to all
concrete surfaces indicated to be left exposed in the finished work.
Strictly comply with manufacturer's installation instructions and
recommendations. Thoroughly clean and prepare concrete before
sealing to remove all discoloration, dirt and stains.
F. Exposed wall surfaces in and on the exterior ramp will be rubbed with an
abrasive hone after applying a thin coat of cement grout. All fins and
form marks will be removed and the surface left smooth and hard.
3.08 CURING
A. Begin curing immediately after placement and preliminary finishing.
Keep concrete continuously moist for at least 7 days after placement.
B. Cure slabs with use of membrane forming curing compound applied in
strict compliance with manufacturer's instructions and
recommendations. Protect fresh concrete surfaces from drying winds,
rain, soiling and damage. Protect with plastic film sheeting as needed.
3.09 TOLERANCES
A. The following allowable installed tolerances are allowable variations
from locations and dimensions indicated by the Contract Documents and
shall both be added to allowable tolerances indicated for other work.
1. Allowable Variation from True Plumb: ± 1/8" in 10'-0"
2. Allowable Variation for True Level: ± 1/8" in 10'-0"
3. Allowable Variation from True Line: + 1/8" in 10'-0"
4. Allowable Variation from True Wall Thickness: ± 114"
5. Allowable Variation from True Plane of Adjacent Surfaces:
before finishing. After finishing, joints shall be flush and
invisible.
B. Provide ACI 301 Class A surface finish.
3.10 PROTECTION
A. Provide temporary protection to ensure work being without damage or
deterioration at time of final acceptance.
END OF SECTION
Avow
FEBRUARY 1999 03300-8 CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE
LE9813 CHASE KITCHEN RENOVATION
E. The Contractor shall pay for all cutting, patching and remedial work
necessary because of failure to properly place and coordinate embedded
items.
3.06 CONCRETE MIXING,TRANSPORT AND PLACEMENT
A. Dispatch ready-mixed concrete from plant at intervals not exceeding 30
minutes. Keep drums in constant rotation during transportation and
delivery. Do not add water during transit nor at the job site without the
written permission of the Architect.
B. Provide at least 72 hours advance notice to the Architect before placing
any concrete. Obtain Architect's approval of soil bearings for footing and
slabs before placing concrete.
C Place concrete continuously and in compliance with ACI, except where
more restrictive requirements are specified. Place concrete within 90
minutes after cement has been mixed with aggregate or within 45
minutes after addition of water and admixtures.
1. Avoid excessive handling and flowing of concrete. Avoid
segregation of the mix.
2. Do not drop concrete "freefall" for more than 6 feet without the use
of elephant trunks.
D. Pumping of concrete will be permitted only if the Contractor provides
full-time independent inspection and testing acceptable to the Architect
and the cost of the special inspection and testing is included in the base
Contract Price.
E. Consolidate concrete with electric/mechanical vibrating equipment
acceptable to the Architect to eliminate honeycombs and air pockets and
to ensure full coverage of reinforcing steel. Avoid over vibration and do
not use vibrators to move concrete within forms.
3.07 FINISHES
A. Surfaces Concealed in the Finished Work: Provide as cast surfaces with at
least minimum concrete coverage over reinforcing steel. Where
concrete is indicated to be directly covered with a thin finish such as
paint, veneer plaster, or wall covering, provide surfaces as specified for
"Surfaces Exposed in the Finished Work".
B. Surfaces Exposed in the Finished Work: Provide smooth, uniform surfaces
that appear monolithic. Remove fins and projections. Fill and patch
voids with fine concrete grout. Rub entire surface with burlap bags and
neat cement past or other acceptable technique to create a fine textured,
uniform "plaster-like" surface.
C Slab Trowel Finish: Steel trowel and power float slab surfaces to provide
hard, slick, smooth, uniform planes within specified tolerance. Slabs
shall have ACI 302, Class #4 finish. Do not add cement, sand, water, or
mortar to slab surfaces.
FEBRUARY 1999 03300-7 CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE
LE9813 CHASE KITCHEN RENOVATION
D. Remove standing water from formwork before placing concrete. Except
in freezing weather, wet soil bearing immediately before placing
concrete, but do not soften bearing surfaces.
3.03 REINFORCEMENT
A. Place and tie reinforcing in position and secure against displacement. Tie
all splices and at least 25% of all intersections, but in no case tie less than
necessary to maintain secure position. Except as indicated otherwise, lap
splices at least 40 bar diameters. Stagger splices in adjacent bars.
Maintain clear spacing between parallel bars at least the greatest of the
following: 1-1/2", one and one-half the maximum aggregate size, or two
times the bar diameter.
I. Provide chairs, bolsters, spacers and hangers as needed to maintain
at least minimum concrete coverage over steel. Provide plastic
tipped accessories where finished work will be exposed to view.
Turn tie wire back into center of form to avoid exposed wire.
B. Place welded wire fabric reinforcement in largest flat sheets available
and lap at seams at least 10". Support welded wire fabric at least 3'-0" on
center each way. Concrete bricks may be used instead of bolsters to
support fabric reinforcing.
C. Do not fabricate, rebend or rework steel reinforcing at the job site.
3.04 JOINTS
A. At locations indicated or approved by Architect, provide construction,
isolation, contraction, and control joints as needed to control cracking
and/or differential settlement. Provide shear transfer dowels and
galvanized steel keyway sections at construction and control joints.
B. Provide contraction joints at least 1/4 the depth of slabs at locations
approved by Architect. Form contraction joints by saw cutting or by
using removable strip inserts.
3.05 EMBEDDED WORK
A. Build into work all items indicated and required to be embedded into cast-
- in-place concrete. Accurate place embedded items using templates and
setting diagrams provided with embedded items by other trades.
B. Do not embed any wood other than necessary nailing of blocks into
concrete.
C. Telephone and electrical conduit shall be run in concrete only when
specifically approved by the Architect in writing. Do not run conduit
larger than 3/4" in concrete. Only one layer of 3/4" conduit will be
allowed in slabs on grade. Aluminum conduit cannot be run in concrete
under any circumstances.
D. Do not run plumbing pipes of any size in concrete.
FEBRUARY 1999 03300-6 CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE
LE9813 CHASE KITCHEN RENOVATION
'low H. Vapor Barrier: 6 mil clear, virgin polyethylene sheeting in largest
sheets available to minimize seams.
I. Formwork: Contractor's option, but shall be suitable to provide straight,
flat, accurately aligned surfaces within specified tolerances. Where
exposed to view in the finished work, formwork shall be new and capable
of providing exposed surface as specified.
J. Ready-Mix Concrete: Shall comply with ASTM C94, except where more
restrictive requirements are specified in this section. Batch plant shall
be certified in compliance with National Ready-Mixed Concrete
Association Standards.
K. Curing Compound: Provide compound complying with ASTM C309, Type 1.
Where direct glue-down finished materials are indicated to be installed
over concrete, provide curing compounds which are certified by their
manufacturer to not impair the bonding capability of normally used
construction adhesives.
L. Grout: Provide non-shrink, 5000 psi minimum grout. Provide one of the
following products:
1. U.S. Grout Corporation, Five Star Grout
2. Sonneborne, Sonogrout
0*1 3. Master Builders, Embeco
4. Upson, High Flow
PART 3 -EXECUTION
3.01 INSPECTION
A. The installer/erector shall examine substrates, supports, and conditions
under which this work is to be performed and notify Contractor, in
writing, of conditions detrimental to the proper completion of the work.
Do not proceed with work until unsatisfactory conditions are corrected.
Beginning work means installer accepts substrates and conditions.
3.02 FORMWORK
A. Securely construct and brace formwork to provide concrete members and
structures of sizes, shapes, elevations, profiles, alignments, and positions
indicated within specified tolerances.
B. Provide openings and sleeves in formwork to accommodate work of other
trades. Coordinate installation to ensure correct sizes and locations.
C. Clean and adjust forms immediately prior to placing concrete. Apply
form release agent to aid form removal before placing reinforcing steel.
FEBRUARY 1999 03300-5 CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE
LE9813 CHASE KITCHEN RENOVATION
2• Maintain concrete temperature of at least 60° F.
forms and ground in contact with concrete shall be Reinforcement oofe frost.
3. Keep concrete and formwork at least 50° F for at least 96 hours after
placing concrete.
4. The use of calcium chloride in any form is not permitted.
C. Hot Weather: Concrete, when deposited, shall be less than 80° F. Cool the
mix in a manner acceptable to the Architect if the concrete temperature
is higher.
I. Comply with ACI 305 in hot weather.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.01 MATERIALS AND PRODUCTS
A. Portland Cement: ASTM C150, type as required. Use only one brand of
cement throughout project. Limit temperature of cement to 140° F when
delivered to batching plant.
B. Aggregates: 'ASTM C33. Provide aggregates with long history of
successful use in similar work and conditions. Grade fine aggregate from
1/4" to fines; grade coarse aggregate from 1/4" to size.
C. Water: Clean and drinkable and free from impurities which are
detrimental to concrete.
D. Air-Entraining Admixture: ASTM C260; use only admixtures which have
been accepted in mix designs. Provide one of the following products:
I• W.R. Grace, Darex AEA
2. Master Builders, MBVR
3. Sika Chemical, Sika, AER
E. Water-Reducing Admixture: ASTM C494; use only admixtures which have
been accepted in mix designs. Provide one of the following products:
I. W.R. Grace, WRDA
2. Master Builders, Pozzolith
3. Sika Chemical, Plastocete
F. Reinforcing Bars: ASTM A615, Grade 60, new, deformed, unless indicated
otherwise. Tag and identify reinforcing with waterproof marks for
checking, sorting and placing.
G. Welded Wire Fabric: ASTM A185, new, rectangular. Tag and identify
reinforcing with waterproof marks for checking, sorting and placing.
FEBRUARY 1999 03300-4 CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE
LE9813 CH-kSE KITCHEN RENOVATION
2. Slump: 3:" to 4"
3. Entrained Air Content: 4% to 6% for concrete exposed to freezing
and 2% to 4% for all other concrete.
4. Maximum Aggregate Size: 3/4".
5. Minimum Cement Content: 5.5 sacks of cement per cubic yard of
concrete.
B. Mix Design Revisions: When necessary because of job conditions,
weather, test results or other reasonable circumstances, mix designs may
be adjusted if_ submitted to and approved by the Architect in advance of
use.
1.07 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: Submit manufacturer's product data, installation
instructions, use limitations and recommendations for each proprietary
material used and for all other materials as requested by Architect.
Provide certifications stating that materials comply with requirements.
B. Shop Drawings: Provide large scale shop drawings for fabrication,
installation and erection of steel reinforcing. Provide sufficient
information and detail so that reinforcing can be placed without the use
of the Contract Drawings. Provide information on the number of pieces,
sizes, grade of steel, accessories and all other information needed for
fabrication and placement. Show coordination of reinforcing with all
items which are to be embedded into concrete construction.
C. Mix Designs: Submit written reports for each proposed mix design at least
15 working days in advance of start of work. Include specific
information on quantities of admixtures and water used.
D. Test- Reports: Submit certified reports for tests required within 48 hours
after tests are made. Provide three copies each to Architect, Contractor,
and concrete producer.
E. Dray Slips: Provide concrete delivery slips showing job name and
location, date and time of delivery, quantity of concrete, quality and type
of concrete, admixtures and all other relevant information. Submit at the
end of each week.
1.08 PROJECT CONDITIONS
A. Weather: Protect concrete from damage and reduced strength or
performance due to weather extremes during mixing, placing and curing.
B. Cold Weather: Unless special precautions are taken to protect concrete, do
not work when temperatures are below 40° F or when temperatures are
expected to fall below 40° F within 72 hours after placing concrete.
1. Comply with ACI 306 in cold weather.
FEBRUARY 1999 03300-3 CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE
LE9813 CHASE KITCHEN RENOVATION
B. Quality Control: Perform testing and sampling during concrete works as ,
follows:
1• Sample concrete in compliance with ASTM C172.
2. Make on slump test in compliance with ASTM C143 for each load at
discharge from truck.
3. Make one air content test in compliance with ASTM D173 for each set
of compressive strength specimens.
4• Make one set of compressive strength tests in compliance with ASTM
C39 for each 50 yards of concrete or fraction thereof. Test one
specimen -at 7 days, one specimen at 28 days, and retain one specimen
for future testing if needed.
C. Reference Standards: Strictly comply with the following referenced
standards:
I. ACI 318, Building Code Requirements for Reinforced Concrete.
2. ACI 301, Specifications for Structural Concrete for Buildings.
3. ACI 304, Recommended Practice for Measuring, Mixing, and Placing
Concrete.
4. ACI 305, Recommended Practice for Hot Weather Concreting.
5. ACI 306, Recommended Practice for Cold Weather Concreting.
6. ACI 347, Recommended Practice for Concrete Formwork.
7. ACI 315, Detailing Manual.
8. ACI 302, Recommended Practice for Concrete Floor and Slab
Construction.
9. ACI 308, Standard Practice for Curing Concrete.
10. CRSI, Reinforced Concrete - A Manual of Standard Practice.
11. CRSI, Recommended Practice for Placing Reinforcing Bars.
12. CRSI, Recommended Practice for Placing Bar Supports.
1.06 MIX DESIGN
A. Mix Design: Proportion mixes in compliance with ACI 301. Provide
concrete of consistency which will work easily into corners and around
reinforcement with the method of placement to be used and will not
segregate or allow excess free water to collect on the surface. Provide
concrete having the following characteristics:
L Compressive Strength: As shown on the drawings. -
FEBRUARY 1999 03300-2 CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE
LE9813 CHASE KITCHEN RENOVATION
SECTION 03300
CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01 REQUIREMENTS INCLUDED
A. The work of this section specifies all cast-in-place concrete required for
the project including, but is not limited to, floor slabs, concrete stairs,
grade beams, footings and bases, and other miscellaneous concrete work.
1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS
A. Carefully examine all of the Contract Documents for requirements which
affect the work of this section.
1. Carefully review all of the Contract Documents for anchor bolts,
sleeves, anchors, and all other items which must be cast into
concrete construction.
2. Items needed to be embedded in concrete work are not described in
detail and must be determined through careful coordination of all
subcontractors and building trades.
B. Site Concrete: Section 02515, SITE CONCRETE.
1.03 REFERENCES
A. All of the Contract documents, including General Conditions,
Modifications to the General Conditions and Division 1 General
Requirements, apply to the work of this section.
1.04 INTENT
A. A major intent of the work of this section is to provide structurally sound
cast-in-place concrete required for the project. When exposed to view in
the finished work, concrete shall have smooth, flat, uniform surface
texture and appearance.
B. Remove and replace work in sufficiently large sections as directed by the
Architect, if this intent is not met.
1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Testing Agency: The Owner will provide the services of an independent
testing agency acceptable to the Architect and authorizes having
jurisdiction to design concrete mixes, to test and evaluate materials, and to
certify the work of this section.
1. Certificates signed by concrete producer may be submitted instead of
material testing when acceptable to the Architect.
FEBRUARY 1999 03300-1 CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE
LE9813 CHASE KITCHEN RENOVATION
B. Remove loose material from compacted subbase. Proof roll and check for areas
requiring additional compaction. Report unsatisfactory conditions in writing.
Beginning of work means acceptance of subbase.
C. Apply prime coat to prepared subbase. Apply tack coat to previous laid work
and adjacent in-place concrete surfaces.
D. Place asphalt concrete at minimum temperature of 225 degrees F in strips not
less than 10' wide overlapping previous strips. Complete entire base course
before beginning surface course.
E. Construct curbs to dimensions indicated or if not indicated to match existing. If
above conditions are not applicable then provide standard shapes. Provide
tack coat between curb and pavement.
F. Begin rolling when pavement can withstand weight of roller. Roll while still
hot to obtain maximum density and to eliminate roller marks.
G. Test in-place asphalt work for thickness and smoothness. Remove and replace
defective work and patch to eliminate evidence of patching. Provide the
following thickness and smoothness unless required otherwis'e:.
1. Subbase course: 6" gravel base
2. Base course: 2" plus or minus 1/2"
3. Surface course: 1-1/2" plus or minus 1/4" at drives and parking; V plus
or minus 1/4" at walks.
4. Surface course smoothness: Plus or minus 1/8" in ten feet. No ponding of
water is acceptable.
END OF SECTION
FEBRUARY 1999 02612-2 ASPHALT CONCRETE PAVING
LE9813 CHASE KITCHEN RENOVATION
SECTION 02612
ASPHALT CONCRETE PAVING
PARTI - GENERAL
1.0 SUMMARY
A. Provide asphalt concrete paving for following applications and prepared
subbase and compacted base.
1. Roads.
2. Parking areas.
3. Driveways.
4. Walkways.
B. Provide striping for parking, roadway, and handicapped markings.
C. Provide and install curbing to match existing as shown on drawings.
1.02 SUBMITTALS
A. Submit for approval product data, test reports.
1.03 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Comply with governing codes and regulations. Provide products of acceptable
manufacturers which have been in satisfactory use in similar service for
three years. Use experienced installers. Deliver, handle, and store materials
in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.
PART2 - PRODUCTS
2.01 MATERIALS
A. Prime coat: Cut-back asphalt.
B. Tack coat: Emulsified asphalt.
C. Asphalt cement: AASHTO. M226 and as required by local authorities.
D. Aggregate: Crushed stone or crushed gravel.
E. Traffic paint: Quick-drying chlori nated-rubber alkyd type, color as approved.
PART 3 -EXECUTION
3.01 INSTALLATION
A. Asphalt/aggregate Mixture: Comply with local DPW Standard Specifications
for Highways and Bridges. Class as required by loading and use.
00W
FEBRUARY 1999 02612-1 ASPHALT CONCRETE PAVING
LE9813 CHASE KITCHEN RENOVATION
C. Material containing excess moisture shall be dried to required Optimum
Moisture Content before it is placed and compacted. Excessively moist
soils shall be removed and replaced or shall be scarified by use of plows,
discs, or other approved methods, and air-dried to meet the above
requirements.
D. Materials which are within the moisture requirements specified above,
but which display pronounced elasticity or deformation under the action
of earth-moving and compaction equipment, shall be reduced to Optimum
Moisture Content, or below, to secure stability.
E. In the event of sudden downpours or other inclement weather, exposed
subgrades and fills which become inundated or excessively moistened
shall have excess water removed and soil dried as specified above.
END OF SECTION
FEBRUARY 1999 02200-12 EARTHWORK
LE9813 CHASE KITCHEN RENOVATION
Pavement, including
1 ft. beyond edge 90 8 95
Pipe cover -- 6 95
D. Compaction requirements shall apply to material directly below the
indicated supported item (base, course, footing, or structure), and to all
material above the undisturbed earth beneath fill, and enclosed by the
following planes:
1. Horizontal plane at the elevation of the bottom of the supported item
(base course, footing, or structure), within a perimeter line located 2
ft. beyond the exterior face or edge of item.
2. Flat planes extending from the perimeter line downward and
outward at 450 angle with the horizontal, to where the planes
intersect undisturbed earth. Where zones of higher and lower
percentages of compaction overlap, that of the higher percentage
shall apply.
E. Compaction of backfill in excavation shall be to a density not less than
that required of the surrounding area fill.
F. Equipment and methods employed to achieve specified compaction shall
be subject to the approval of the Owner's representative, and equipment
shall be replaced and methods revised as directed until specified
compaction is obtained.
G. Compaction of .each lift shall be completed before placing of the next lift
is started.
H. Backfill adjacent to wall, conduit, pipe, and similar item, and in other
areas where wheeled equipment cannot safely be employed, shall be
placed in 8 in. thick layers, to the specified compaction, using mechanical
tampers.
3.06 MOISTURE CONTROL
A. Variation of moisture content in fill and backfill materials shall be
limited to Optimum Moisture (-I% to +3%). Moisture content shall be as
uniformly distributed as practical within each lift, and shall be adjusted
as necessary to obtain the specified compaction.
B. Material which does not contain sufficient moisture to be compacted to
the specified densities shall be moisture conditioned by sprinkling,
disking, windrowing, or other method approved by the Architect.
1. Material conditioned by sprinkling shall have water added before
compaction. Uniformly apply water to surface of subgrade or layer
of soil material to obtain sufficient moisture content. The Contractor
shall maintain sufficient hoses and/or water distributing equipment
"^ at the site for this purpose.
FEBRUARY 1999 02200-11 EARTHWORK
LE9813 CHASE KITCHEN RENOVATION
1. Shoring shall be employed as necessary to protect such items.
2. Foundation walls and footings have been designed to act with other
portions of the structure to withstand the loads they will bear in
completed project; they have not been designed to withstand
construction loads or unbalanced earth or equipment loadings.
D. Backfill shall be placed carefully and shall not damage items against
which it is placed.
E. Except as otherwise noted, tolerance of top surface of completed backfill
shall be ± 2 in. from true grade indicated, and variations from indicated
tolerance shall approximately compensate within each 100 sq. ft. area.
1. Tolerance for backfill beneath concrete foundation shall be plus 1/2
in. and minus 2 in.
2. Tolerance for backfill beneath concrete slab on grade shall be plus
1/2 in. and minus 1-1/2 in.
3.05 COMPACTION
A. Degree of compaction shall be determined in accordance with ASTM D
1557.
B. Except as otherwise noted, fill and backfill materials shall be placed in
successive horizontal lifts which do not exceed specified thickness.
C Subgrade and backfill of indicated areas or structures shall be compacted
as specified in the following table:
COMPACTION TABLE
Area Subgrade Max. Compacted Compaction
or Compaction Thickness Per of Each Lift
Structure Minimum % Lift - in. Maximum %
Above pipe cover to 85 12 90
subgrade
Area or structure not 85 12 90
otherwise noted
Building 90 6 95
Concrete Building 90 8 95
entrance or exit pad
Footing, foundation,
manhole, or similar
structure, and within
2 ft. horizontally 90 8 95
FEBRUARY 1999 02200-10 EARTHWORK
LE9813 CHASE KITCHEN RENOVATION
OOW 3.02 PLACING EMBANKMENTS
A. Filling shall be done in any area only after the testing laboratory or
Owner's representative has reviewed subgrade.
B. Benching: Fills placed on existing slopes which exceed 6 ft. horizontal to 1
ft. vertical shall be keyed or benched into the existing slope not less than
5 ft. to prevent the formation of slippage planes.
C Compaction at End of Day: Areas undergoing filling shall be smooth-rolled
before the end of the work day to seal and protect these areas from
rainfall infiltration during the night.
D. Except as otherwise noted, tolerance of top surface of completed fill areas
shall be +/- 2 in. from true grade indicated. Variations from indicated
tolerance shall approximately compensate within each 100 sq. ft. area.
3.03 BEDDING
A. Minimum width of bedding material shall be at least as wide as the item to
be installed on it. Where width of bed is less than full width of trench,
concrete or "Granular Fill" shall be placed adjacent to bedding material to .
fill full width of the trench, and shall be compacted with bedding
material.
1. Width of bedding for sewer pipe shall extend full width of trench
excavation.
B. Where bed is damaged during excavation or while placing pipe, or
otherwise, it shall be repaired to specified grade, contour, and compaction
before weight of pipe is placed on it.
C Bedding material and embedment material for utilities will be furnished,
placed, and compacted under the appropriate utility specification section.
3.04 BACKFILL
A. Excavation below finished grades shall be backfilled. Temporary
planking, timbering, forms, debris, and refuse shall be removed before
backfill is placed.
B. Backfilling shall be done in any area only after the Owner or
representative of testing laboratory has inspected and approved
subgrade, foundations, or other work in excavations. Notice that the work
is ready for inspection shall be given promptly, and sufficient time shall
be allowed for making necessary examinations.
C In order to prevent lateral movement, care shall be exercised in placing
backfill adjacent to foundation wall, footing, utility line, and other
structures. Backfill on opposite sides of such items shall be kept at
approximately the same elevation as backfilling progresses to prevent
Am unbalanced earth pressure. During backfilling the difference in
elevation of backfill on opposite sides of the structure shall not exceed 12
in.
FEBRUARY 1999 02200-9 EARTHWORK
LE9813 CHASE KITCHEN RENOVATION
minimum 28 day compressive strength of 2,000 psi if in rock, or with low
compacted Granular Fill, if in earth.
H. If bearing surface of subgrade which is to receive fill, concrete footing,
structure, or other construction becomes softened, disturbed, or unstable,
unsuitable material shall be removed down to a firm bearing surface and
replaced with suitable material. Subgrade shall then be protected from
further disturbance until construction item is placed.
I. Excavations shall not be wider than required to set, brace, and remove
forms for concrete, install piping, or perform other necessary work.
Width of trench at 12 in. above top of pipe or conduit shall be less than
the outside diameter of the pipe or the conduit shall be less than the
outside diameter of the pipe or the conduit + 3 ft. Sides of trench above
this level shall be sloping, at an angle 30 degrees or less from vertical,
from this level to grade. In materials where sloping walls are not stable,
trench walls shall be sheeted..
J. Rock excavation by blasting shall be done in strict accordance with
applicable laws and ordinances. Explosives shall be stored on-site only
when blasting is in progress. When the need for explosives has passed,
they shall be removed from the site.
1. Surfaces of rock foundation shall be sufficiently rough to bond well
with the masonry and embankments to be built and, if required,
shall be cut to rough benches or steps.
2. Before masonry is built upon rock, the rock shall be freed from all
vegetation, dirt, clay, shale, excessively cracked rock, water, ice, and
other objectionable substances. Picking, wedging, streams of water
under high pressure, stream jets, and other effective means shall be
used to clean exposed rock.
3. Except as otherwise indicated on the Drawings, rock shall be
excavated to a depth 6 in. or more below bottom of structures.
K. Below-Ground Demolition
1. Underground construction, pipe, and similar items indicated on the
Drawings as to be demolished or removed, shall be demolished and/or
removed. Other items, not indicated on the Drawings, which impede
construction of new work indicated, shall be abandoned, demolished,
and/or removed only with the approval of the Owner's
representative.
2. Pipe which is to be abandoned in place shall be suitably and
permanently plugged at end. Plug shall be stiff concrete, with a
thickness, measured parallel to pipe axis of 1 pipe diameter, for pipe
less than 18 in. diameter. Both inner and outer faces of plug for pipe
equal to or greater than 18 in. diameter shall be formed. Pipe less
than 4 in. diameter need not be plugged.
AMW
FEBRUARY 1999 02200-8 EARTHWORK
LE9813 CHASE KITCHEN RENOVATION
2. Structural Fill shall be a gravelly sand or sandy gravel, graded
within the following limits:
Sieve Size % Passing by Weight
4 in. 100
No. 4 30 - 80
No. 40 5 - 30
No. 200 0 - 8
3. Common Fill shall be backrun sand, gravel, or mixture thereof,
graded within the following limits:
Sieve Size % Passing by Weight
6 in. 100
No. 4 30 - 90
No. 200 0 - 15
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 EXCAVATION
A. Sheeting, shoring, bracing, pumping, bailing, and other incidental work
low necessary to make and maintain excavations and keep them free from
water at all times during placing of concrete, utility lines, and fill
backfill materials, shall be performed or supplied as required. Fill and
backfill shall be placed in dry or dewatered areas only.
B. Sheeting shall be installed where required to maintain safe and workable
conditions in excavations. Sheeting, including necessary wales and
struts, shall be selected and designed by the Contractor. Use of sheeting
shall equal or exceed minimum required for safety and/or conformance
to law.
C. Structures, pipes, pavement, earth, and other property liable to damage
from excavation operations shall be braced, under-pinned, and supported
as required to prevent damage and movement.
D. As excavation -approaches underground utilities and structures,
excavation shall be done by hand tools. Such manual excavation is
incidental to normal excavation and no special payment will be made.
E. Excavation shall include satisfactory disposal of 'excavated material not
employed as backfill or fill materials.
F. Excavation for pipe and other items shall be carried far enough below
underside of item to accommodate bedding material.
G. Excavations which extend below indicated or specified levels ("over-
excavations"), shall be filled to those levels with concrete having a
FEBRUARY 1999 02200-7 EARTHWORK
LE9813 CHASE KITCHEN RENOVATION
C. The Contractor shall be responsible for obtaining test samples of soil
materials proposed to be used and transporting them to the site
sufficiently in advance of time planned for use of these materials for
testing of materials to be completed. Use of these proposed materials by
the Contractor prior to testing and approval or rejection shall be at the
Contractor's risk:
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 SOURCE OF MATERIALS
A. Material shall be obtained from required on-site excavation, to the extent
that suitable material is available, and from off-site sources, to the extent
that suitable material is not available from on-site excavations.
2.02 BACKFILL MATERIALS
A. On-site materials for use in compacted backfill shall be natural,
inorganic, granular soil, taken from areas of excavation after stripping
of topsoil and removal of unsuitable material.
B. Material containing organic matter, topsoil, organic silt, peat, or soft or
frost-susceptible soil is unsuitable for any of the following areas:
Backfill beneath building area
Backfill beneath pavement and within 5 ft. of subgrade
Bearing strata material
Bedding
G Backfill materials shall be free from rocks greater than 4 in. in diameter
or length, having largest dimension greater than 3/4 lift thickness, or
greater than 1/2 ft. in volume, and foreign matter, such as construction
debris, trash, wood, roots, leaves, sod, organic matter, or soft clay and silt.
Sound sieves of building stone, masonry, and concrete from on-site
sources subject to the same size limitations as stone, may be employed in
backfill. Individual pieces shall be mixed into general backfill material,
leaving no voids between pieces. Backfill shall be clean, non-organic
material, of non-swelling character, capable of being readily compacted
to form a solid, stable embankment. Materials containing ice or frozen
lumps shall not be employed.
D. Backfill material shall be well graded within the specified limits.
Gradation of materials shall be determined in accordance with ASTM C136.
L Granular Fill shall be well graded natural sand and gravel, graded
within the following limits:
Sieve Size % Passing by Weight
1-1/2 in. 100
3/4" 80-100
No. 4 20 - 60
No. 40 10 - 35
No. 200 0 : 8
FEBRUARY 1999 02200-6 EARTHWORK
LE9813 CH-.SE KITCHEN RENOVATION
AOW excavation has been completed. Protect the excavation from frost if
placing of concrete is delayed.
B. Completed foundations which have not been backfilled shall be protected
from freezing by temporary additional earth cover, insulating blankets,
heaters, or other methods acceptable to the Architect.
G Frozen material shall not be placed as fill or backfill.
1.12 SHORING AND SHEETING
A. Provide shoring, sheeting and/or bracing at excavations, as required, to
prevent collapse of earth at side of excavations.
B. Comply with federal, state, and local regulations.
C. Remove sheeting and shoring and the like, as backfilling operations
progress, taking all necessary precautions to prevent collapse of
excavation sides.
1.13 ROCK
A. Rock - shall be defined as sound and solid mass, layer, or ledge of mineral
matter in place of such hardness and texture that it:
1. Mechanical Definition of Rock:
Cannot be effectively loosened or broken down by ripping in a
single pass with a late model tractor-mounted hydraulic ripper
equipped with one digging point of standard manufacturer's design
adequately sized for use with and propelled by a crawler type tractor
rated between 210- and 240-net flywheel horsepower, operating in
low gear, or
2. Manual Definition of Rock:
In areas where the use of the ripper described above is
impracticable, rock defined as sound material of such hardness and
texture that it cannot be loosened or broken by a 6 lb. drifting pick.
The drifting pick shall have a handle not less than 34 in. in length.
1.14 COORDINATION
A. Prior to start of earthwork the Contractor shall arrange an on-site
meeting with the Owner's representative for the purpose of establishing
Contractor's schedule of operations and scheduling inspection procedures
and requirements.
B. As construction proceeds, the Contractor shall be responsible for
notifying the Owner's representative prior to start of earthwork
operations requiring inspection and/or testing.
FEBRUARY 1999 02200-5 EARTHWORK
LE9813 CHASE KITCHEN RENOVATION
caused by settlement, lateral movement, undermining, washout, and other-
hazards created by earthwork operations.
B. In case of any damage or injury caused in the performance of the work,
the Contractor shall, at his own expense, make good such damage or
injury to the satisfaction of, and without cost to the Owner. Existing roads,
sidewalks, and curbs damaged during the project work shall be repaired
or replaced to their original condition at the completion of operations.
The Contractor shall replace, at his own cost, existing bench marks,
monuments, and other reference points which are disturbed or destroyed.
C. Buried structures, utility lines, etc., including those which project less
than 18 in. above grade, which are subject to damage from construction
equipment shall be clearly marked to indicate the hazard. Markers shall
indicate limits of danger areas, by means which will be clearly visible to
operators of trucks and other construction equipment, and shall be
maintained at all times until completion of Project.
1.10 DRAINAGE AND DEWATERING
A. The Contractor shall provide, at his own expense, adequate pumping and
drainage facilities to keep excavated areas sufficiently dry from ground
water and/or surface runoff so as not to adversely affect construction
procedures or cause excessive disturbance of underlying natural grouod
or footing and slab subgrades.
B. The Contractor shall grade and ditch the site as necessary to direct
surface runoff away from open excavations and subgrade surfaces.
Positive drainage (minimum 1.0% slope) shall be maintained at all times.
C. Water from trenches and excavations shall be disposed of in such a
manner as will not cause injury to public health nor to public or private
property, nor to existing work, nor to the work completed or in progress,
nor to the surface of roads, walks, and streets, nor cause any interference
with the use of the same by the public. Methods of disposal of pumped
effluent shall not cause erosion or siltation, and shall conform to
requirements of erosion and sediment control.
D. Under no circumstances place fills, pour concrete, or install piping and
appurtenances in excavations containing free water.
E. There shall be sufficient pumping equipment, in good working order,
available at all times to remove water.
F. Where, in the opinion of the Owner's representative, pumping of
excavations is not effective in maintaining a dry firm subgrade, other
dewatering methods acceptable to the Owner's representative, shall be
employed.
1.11 FROST PROTECTION
A. Do not excavate to full indicated depth when freezing temperatures may
be expected, unless footings or slabs can be poured immediately after the
FEBRUARY 1999 02200-4 EARTHWORK
LE9813 CHASE KITCHEN RENOVATION
1. Observation during excavation and replacement of existing fill in
the building area and under paved areas.
2. Observation of compaction of building excavation subgrade and
paved area subgrades.
3. Observation during placement and compaction of fills.
4. Laboratory testing and analysis of fill and bedding materials
specified, as required.
5. Observation of footing installation.
6. Observation of subgrade preparation for slab-on-grade and paved
areas.
7. Observe construction and perform water content, gradation, and
compaction tests at a frequency and at locations determined by the
testing laboratory. The results of these tests will be submitted to the
Architect, copy to the Contractor, on a timely basis so that the
Contractor can take such action as is required to remedy indicated .
deficiencies. During the course of construction, the testing
laboratory will advise the Architect in writing with copy to
Contractor if, at any time, in his opinion, the work is not in
substantial conformity with the Contract Documents.
8. Observation of fills following interruption 'by rains or other
inclement weather.
B. The testing laboratory's presence does not include supervision or
direction of the actual work by the Contractor, his employees or agents.
Neither the presence of the testing laboratory, nor any observations and
testing performed by it shall excuse the Contractor from defects
discovered in his work.
C The Owner reserves the right to modify or waive testing laboratory
services.
1.08 SUBMITTALS
A. A 10 lb. sample of each off-site material proposed for use, and of any on-
site material when so requested by the Architect shall be submitted for
approval.
1. Samples required in connection with compaction tests will be taken
and transported by the testing laboratory.
1.09 PROTECTION OF EXISTING STRUCTURES AND UTII.TTIES
A. The work shall be executed in such manner as to prevent any damage to
adjacent property and any other property and existing improvements
such as, but not limited to: streets, curbs, paving, utility lines and
structures, monuments, bench marks and other public and private
property. Protect existing structures and foundations from damage
FEBRUARY 1999 02200-3 EARTHWORK
LE9813 CHASE KITCHEN RENOVATION
B. Examine all Drawings and all other Sections of the Specifications for
requirements therein affecting the work of this Section.
1.04 REFERENCED STANDARDS
A. American Association of State Highway and Transportation Officials
(AASHTO):
T 191 Density of Soil In-Place by the Sand Cone Method
T 239 Moisture Content of Soil and Soil-Aggregate In-Place by Nuclear
Methods (Shallow Depth)
B. American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM):
C 33 Concrete Aggregates
C 136 Sieve Analysis of Fine and Coarse Aggregates
C 1557 Moisture-Density Relations of Soils and Soil Aggregate Mixtures
Using 10-1b. (4.54-kg.) Rammer and 18-in. (457-mm.) Drop.
1.05 EXISTING CONDITIONS
A. The Contractor shall become thoroughly familiar with the site, consult
records and drawings of adjacent structures and of existing utilities and
their connections, and note all conditions which may influence the work
of this Section.
B. By submitting a bid, the Contractor affirms that he has carefully
examined the site and all conditions affecting work under this Section.
No claim for additional costs will be allowed because of lack of full
knowledge of existing conditions.
G Before beginning work the Contractor will, at his own expense, conduct
subsurface testing. This testing shall include the use of an AUTOMATIC
ELECTRONIC UTILITY LINE TRACER (Metrotech 810 or Equal) to locate all
existing utilities in the affected area.
1.06 INFORMATION NOT GUARANTEED
A. Information on the Drawings and in the Specifications relating to
subsurface conditions, natural phenomena, and existing utilities and
structures is from the best sources psesently available. Such information
is furnished only for the information and convenience of the Contractor,
and the accuracy or completeness of this information is not guaranteed.
1.07 QUAI=CONTROL
A. The Owner reserves the right to retain a testing laboratory to perform
on-site observation and testing in accordance with Section 01400,
QUALITY CONTROL during the construction operation. The services of the .
testing laboratory may include, but not be limited to the following:
FEBRUARY 1999 02200-2 EARTHWORK
LE9813 CHASE KITCHEN RENOVATION
, * SECTION 02200
EARTHWORK
PART GENERAL
1.01 REQUIREMENTS INCLUDED
A. Provide all equipment and materials, and do all work necessary to
complete the earthwork which includes, but is not limited to the
following:
1. Site excavation, filling, and grading.
2. Excavation and backfill for buildings and structures.
3. Excavation and backfill for utilities.
4. Preparation of subgrade for slabs, pavements, and landscaping.
5. Sheeting, bracing, and support of excavations as necessary.
6. Drainage and dewatering as necessary to perform work in the dry.
7. Placement and compaction of fills.
8. Underground testing for utility locations.
1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS
A. Inspection and testing: Section 01410, TESTING AND LABORATORY
SERVICES.
B. Building demolition and maintenance of clean roadways: Section 02112,
SELECTIVE DEMOLITION AND CLEANING.
C. Furnishing and installing utility bedding and embedment materials is
included under the appropriate utility specification section.
D. Aggregate base courses beneath paving, is included under the applicable
paving specification section.
E. Provision of a Professional Land Surveyor to provide survey control:
Section 01030, FIELD ENGINEERING.
1.03 REFERENCES
A. The BIDDING REQUIREMENTTS,CONTRACT FORMS,AND CONDITIONS OF THE
CONTRACT and applicable parts of DIVISION 1 - GENERAL REQUIREMENTS,
as listed in the Table of Contents, shall be included in and made a part of
this Section.
FEBRUARY 1999 02200-1 EARTHWORK
LE9813 CHASE KITCHEN RENOVATION
project or salvaged for Owner's use. Contractor shall, upon remova--**-
from the site, have rights of salvage of the materials.
G Cleaning:
1. Upon completion of selective demolition work in any exterior or
interior work are; remove all loose and crumbling finish materials,
paint, etc., and all loose dust and debris, brush down all exposed
surfaces, and leave the area broom clean, ready for subsequent work
on the Contract.
2. Following broom cleaning, thoroughly clean all exposed interior
surfaces throughout which are to be left exposed in the finished
work and all exterior and interior surfaces to receive new finishes,
including painting, in the finished work. Clean in a manner
suitable for each of the materials, such as to cause no damage to same
or to surrounding materials to remain. Except for items subject to
water damage, provide wet cleaning with bristle brush, clean water,
and caustic detergent followed by careful, controlled, thorough,
rinsing with fresh, clean water. Clean items subject to water damage
by effective dry method(s). Exercise extreme care to control wash
water and rinse water run-off, splashing, etc., to prevent damage to .
the building surfaces or finishes to remain.
END OF SECTION A
FEBRUARY 1999 02112-4 SELECTIVE DEMOLPTION AND CLEANING
LE9813 CHASE KITCHEN RENOVATION
.,, c. Provide demolition so as not to release hazardous materials into
the environment.
2. Carry out selective demolition work with utmost care, using
appropriate and safe tools and methods to assure that the building
structures or finishes are not damaged or are not subjected to
damaging shock or vibration. Do not endanger building structure
by cutting, removal, overloading, or other cause. Contractor will
coordinate with owner to ensure noise control methods and the
timing of the work meets with his satisfaction.
3. Cut or remove work causing openings in exterior walls, roofs, or
other elements providing weather protection, only after temporary
weatherproof enclosures have been provided under Section 01560,
TEMPORARY CONTROLS.
4. Repair damage done to elements of building to remain, except
repairs specified to be provided under other Sections. Provide neat
cutting and trimming of elements to remain wherever cutting is
required, to provide straight, true, and sharp, cut-lines and edges.
Do not overcut or overdrill, nor break, puncture, tear down, or
otherwise damage existing construction beyond the limits needed for .
proper preparation of openings or for proper passage of
penetrating elements. Where existing finishes, except paint or
varnish, are indicated to be removed, remove down to bare
subsurfaces without causing damage to the subsurfaces.
5. Do not allow debris to accumulate. Sprinkle during handling and
loading to reduce dust. Either store debris outside of building
temporarily in dumpster type container(s) or remove from premises
daily. Carry debris out in containers or drop in fully enclosed
chutes, in no case passing through, throwing from, or dropping free
from windows, wall openings, etc.
6. Block or effectively filter return air systems in a safe manner to
prevent intrusion of dust into remaining air handling systems.
7. Items to be Reused: Carefully remove all existing items specified or
designated on Drawings to be reused on the work in manner to
assure least possible damage. After removal, store in protected
storage areas for later refurbishing and/or reinstallation, as
specified. Replace with equivalent new items all items designated to
be reused which, in the opinion of the Architect, have become too
damaged to- be satisfactorily reused, without additional cost to the
Owner.
8. The Owner will remove all items that he requires for salvage before
the building or portion of the building to be demolished is turned
over to the Contractor for Construction with the exception of items
specifically tagged or indicated on the drawings to be turned over to
the owner at the location designated by the owner.
9. Disposal: Remove and legally dispose of off-the-site all materials
removed which are not designated on Drawings to be reused on the
FEBRUARY 1999 02112-3 SELECTIVE DEMOLITION AND CLEANING
LE9813 CHASE KITCHEN RENOVATION
his trade that are to remain in place, be salvaged or to be removed. The -*",-
individual trades shall disconnect, cap, or deactivate all items that are tr,
be removed by the demolition contractor. The completion of any work
not covered under the separate contracts of the subcontractors will be
the responcibility of the General Contractor.
1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS
1. Weather protection enclosures, dust barriers and curtaining and
miscellaneous protective barriers.
2. Disconnecting, plugging, capping, etc., of existing mechanical and
electrical work to be removed and demolition and removal of
portions -of existing mechanical and electrical work to be removed
which are indicated and/or specified to be removed by Mechanical
and Electrical trades.
3. Pest and rodent control.
1.03 REFERENCES
A. The BIDDING REQUIREMENTS,CONTRACT FORMS AND CONDITIONS OF THE
CONTRACT and applicable parts of DIVISION 1 - GENERAL REQUIREMENTS,
as listed in the Table of Contents, shall be included in and made a part of
this section.
B. Examine all drawings and all other sections of the specifications for
requirements therein affecting the work of this section.
PART 2- PRODUCTS
Not applicable to this section.
PART 3 -EXECUTION
3.01 EXECUTION
A. Phasing and Commencement of Work: It is intended that by the date of
execution of the Contract agreement the work areas for work of this
contract will be fully evacuated by Owner and ready for demolition work
to begin. However, no work shall be started in or on the existing building
for any of the phases until prior written approval has been issued to the
Contractor by the Owner, such approval not to be unreasonably withheld.
B. Selective Demolition:
1. Do all work to conform to the governing laws and building codes. All
permits required for the selective demolition work shall be procured
by the Contractor.
a. Provide unobstructed legal exits at all times.
b. Meet Requirements of Clean Air Act.
FEBRUARY 1999 02112-2 SELECTIVE DEMOLITION AND CLEANING
LE9813 CHASE KITCHEN RENOVATION
SECTION 02112
SELECTIVE DEMOLITION AND CLEANING
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01 REQUIREMENTS INCLUDED
A. Scope: Include all selective demolition and cleaning work as required to
complete the work of the Contract as indicated. Include, but do not limit
to:
1. All selective demolition work within, on, or relative to, the existing
building as specifically called for on the Drawings and as required to
accommodate the additions and renovation work, except specific
demolition and removal work specified to be done as work of other
Sections.
2. Cutting of all grooves, chases, openings, holes, etc., required for all
trades through or into existing construction, except cutting and
drilling specified to be done as work of other Sections.
3. Removal from site and legal disposal of all removed materials, trash,
debris, etc., removed by selective demolition operations, except any
items indicated to be reused on the project or to be stored by Owner's
• future use.
4. Careful removal of items indicated to be reused on the project, and
safe storage until time for reinstallation.
5. Careful removal of items indicated to be salvaged for Owner's future
use, including safe storage within the existing building.
6. General cleaning of all interior and exterior work areas of the
building followed by thorough cleaning and surface preparation of
all interior surfaces to be exposed in the finished work, and all
interior and exterior surfaces to receive subsequent new finishes, in
the finished work.
7. Provision of Sidewalk Tunnels if required as indicated in Section
01500 - TEMPORARY FACILITIES.
8. Full cleaning of affected streets and roadways with sweepers and by
any means necessary to remove debris, dust, earth, rocks, etc. caused
by the construction of this contract on a regular basis in order to
maintain a clean roadway at all times. Work 'shall be accomplished to
the satisfaction of the Owner's designated representative.
9. Dispose of refridgerant in conformance with all applicable laws and
regulations.
B. NOTE: It is the intent of this specification that demolition work be done
by the demolition contractor. It will be the responsibility of each trade
to mark and coordinate with the demolition contractor for all items in
FEBRUARY 1999 02112-1 SELECTIVE DEMOLITION AND CLEANING
LE9813 CHASE KITCHEN RENOVATION
b. Instances which might affect the validity of warranty or bond. "" -
7. Contractor, name of responsible principal, address, and telephone
number.
1.04 FORM OF SUBMITTALS
A. Prepare in duplicate packets.
B. Format:
1. Size 8-1/2 in. X 11 in., punched sheets for standard three-ring
binder.
a. Fold larger sheets to fit into binders.
2. Cover: Identify each packet with typed or printed title "WARRANTIES
AND BONDS". List:
a. Title of Project.
b. Name of Contractor.
C Binders: Commercial quality, three-ring, with durable and cleanable
plastic covers.
1.05 TIME OF SUBMITTALS
A. For equipment or components parts of equipment put into service during
progress of construction:
1. Submit documents within ten days after inspection and acceptance.
B. Otherwise make submittals within ten days after Date of Substantial
Completion, prior to final request for payment.
C For items of work where acceptance is delayed materially beyond Date of
Substantial Completion, provide updated submittal within ten days after
acceptance, listing date of acceptance as start of warranty period.
1.06 SUBMTITALS REQUIRED
A. Submit warranties, bonds, service, and maintenance contracts as
specified in respective section of Specifications.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
Not applicable to this section.
PART 3 EXECUTION
Not applicable to this section.
END OF SECTION
FEBRUARY 1999 01740-2 WARRANTIES AND BONDS
LE9813 CHASE KITCHEN RENOVATION
SECTION 01740
WARRANTIES AND BONDS
PART1 GENERAL
1.01 REQUIREMENTS INCLUDED
A. Compile specified warranties and bonds.
B. Compile specified service and maintenance contracts.
C. Co-execute submittals to verify compliance with Contract Documents.
D. Review submittals to verify compliance with Contract Documents.
E. Submit to Architect for review and transmittal to Owner.
1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS
A. General warranty of construction: GENERAL CONDITIONS.
B. Operating and maintenance data: Section 01730, OPERATING AND
MAINTENANCE DATA.
C. Warranties and Bonds required by Specific Products: Divisions 2 through
16.
1.03 SUBMITTAL REQUIREMENTS
A. Assemble warranties, bonds, and service and maintenance contracts,
executed by each of the respective manufacturers, suppliers, and
subcontractors.
B. Number of original signed copies required: Two each.
G Table of Contents: Neatly typed, in orderly sequence. Provide complete
information for each item including:
1. Product or work item.
2. Firm, with name of principal, address, and telephone number.
3. Scope.
4. Date of beginning of warranty, bond, or service and maintenance
contract.
5. Duration of warranty, bond, or service and maintenance contract.
6. Provide information for Owner's personnel:
a. Proper procedures in case of failure.
FEBRUARY 1999 01740-1 WARRANTIES AND BONDS
LE9813 CHASE KITCHEN RENOVATION
C Submit four copies of approved data in final form within ten days after
final inspection or acceptance.
1.09 INSTRUCTION OF OWNER'S PERSONNEL
A. Before final inspection or acceptance, instruct Owner's designated
operating and maintenance personnel in the operation, adjustment and
maintenance of products, equipment, and systems.
B. Operating and maintenance manual shall constitute the basis of
instruction. Review contents of manual with personnel in full detail to
explain all aspects of operating and maintenance.
PART 2 PRODUCTS -
Not applicable to this section.
PART 3 EXECUTION
Not applicable to this section.
END OF SECTION
FEBRUARY 1999 01730-7 OPERATING AND MAINTENANCE DATA
LE9813 CHASE KITCHEN RENOVATION
2. Circuit directories of panelboards.
a. Electrical service.
b. Controls.
c. Communications.
3. As-installed color coded wiring diagrams.
4. Operating procedures:
a. Routine and normal operating instructions.
b. Sequences required.
c. Special operating instructions.
5. Maintenance procedures:
a. Routine operations.
b. Guide to "trouble-shooting".
c. Disassembly, repair and reassembly.
d. Adjustment and checking.
6. Manufacturer's printed operating and maintenance instructions.
7. List of original manufacturer's spare parts, manufacturer's current
prices, and recommended quantities to be maintained in storage.
8. Other data as required under pertinent sections of specifications.
D. Prepare and include additional data when the need for such data becomes
apparent during instruction of Owner's personnel.
E. Additional requirements for operating and maintenance data: Respective
sections of Specifications.
1.08 SUBMITTAL SCHEDULE
A. Submit two copies of preliminary draft of proposed formats and outlines
of contents prior to start of Work.
1. Architect will review draft and return one copy with comments.
B. Submit one copy of complete data in final form 15 days prior to final
inspection or acceptance.
1. Copy will be returned after final inspection or acceptance, with ,
comments.
FEBRUARY 1999 01730-6 OPERATING AND MAINTENANCE DATA
LE9813 CHASE KITCHEN RENOVATION
d. Special operating instructions.
3. Maintenance Procedures:
a. Routine operations.
b. Guide to "trouble-shooting".
c. Disassembly, repair, and reassembly.
d. Alignment, adjusting, and checking.
4. Servicing and lubrication schedule.
a. List of lubricants required.
5. Manufacturer's printed operating and maintenance instructions.
6. Description of sequence of operation by control manufacturer.
7. Original manufacturer's parts list, illustrations, assembly drawings_
and diagrams required for maintenance, including:
a. Predicted life of parts subject to wear.
b. Items recommended to be stocked as spare parts.
8. As-installed control diagrams by controls manufacturer.
9. Each contractor's coordination drawings.
a. As-installed color code piping diagrams.
10. Charts of valve tag numbers, with location and function of each
valve.
11. List of original manufacturer's spare parts recommendations,
manufacturer's current prices, and recommended quantities to be
maintained in storage.
12. Other data as required under pertinent sections of specifications.
G Contents, for each electric and electronic system, as appropriate:
1. Description of system and component parts.
a. Function, normal operating characteristics, and limiting
conditions.
b. Performance curves, engineering data, and tests.
c. Complete nomenclature and commercial number of replaceable
parts.
FEBRUARY 1999 01730-5 OPERATING AND MAZUENANCE DATA
LE9813 CHASE KITCHEN RENOVATION
c. Information required for re-ordering special manufactured
products.
2. Instructions for care and maintenance.
a. Manufacturer's recommendation for types of cleaning agents and
methods.
b. Cautions against cleaning agents and methods which are
detrimental to product.
c. Recommended schedule for cleaning and maintenance.
C. Content, for moisture-protection and weather-exposed products:
1. Manufacturer's data, giving full information on products.
a. Applicable standards.
b. Chemical composition.
c. Details of installation.
2. Instructions for inspection, maintenance, and repair.
D. Additional requirements for maintenance data: Respective sections of
Specifications.
1.07 MANUAL FOR EQUIPMENT AND SYSTEMS
A. Submit four copies of complete manual in final form.
B. Content, for each unit of equipment and system, as appropriate:
1. Description of unit and component parts.
a. Function, normal operating characteristics, and limiting
conditions.
b. Performance curves, engineering data, and tests.
c. Complete nomenclature and commercial number of replaceable
parts.
2. Operating procedures:
a. Start-up, break-in, routine and normal operating instructions.
b. Regulation, control, stopping, shut-down and emergency
instructions.
c. Summer and winter operating instructions.
FEBRUARY 1999 01730-4 OPERATING AND MAINTENANCE DATA
LE9813 CHASE KITCHEN RENOVATION
. B. Product Data:
I. Include only those sheets which are pertinent to the specific
product.
2. Annotate each sheet to:
a. Clearly identify specific product or part installed.
b. Clearly identify data applicable to installation.
c. Delete references to inapplicable information.
C Drawings:
1. Supplement Product Data with drawings as necessary to clearly
illustrate:
a. Relations of component parts of equipment and systems.
b. Control and flow diagrams.
2. Include reduced photocopies or microfiche aperture cards of Project
Record Drawings for Plumbing, Fire Protection, HVAC and Electrical
work. Provide additional maintenance and operations drawings
keyed to Record Drawings.
D. Written text, as required to supplement product data for the particular
installation:
1. Organize in consistent format under separate headings for different
procedures.
2. Provide logical sequence of instructions for each procedure.
E. Copy of each warranty, bond, and service contract issued.
1. Provide information sheet for owner's personnel, give:
a. Proper procedures in event of failure.
b. Instances which might affect validity of warranties or bonds.
1.06 MANUAL FOR MATERIALS AND FINISHES
A. Submit four copies of complete manual in final form.
B. Content; for architectural products, applied materials and finishes:
I. Manufacturer's data, giving full information on products.
a. Catalog number, size, composition.
b. Color and texture designations.
FEBRUARY 1999 01730-3 OPERATING AND MAINTENANCE DATA
LE9813 CHASE KITCHEN RENOVATION
a. Provide reinforced punched binder tab, bind in with text.
b. Fold larger drawings to size of text pages.
5. Provide fly-leaf for each separate product or each piece of operating
equipment.
a. Provide typed description of product and major component parts
of equipment.
b. Provide indexed tabs.
6. Cover: Identify each volume with typed or printed title "OPERATING
AND MAINTENANCE INSTRUCTIONS". List:
a. Title of Project.
b. Identity of general subject matter covered in the manual.
G Binders:
1. Commercial quality three-ring binders with durable and cleanable
plastic .covers.
2. Maximum ring size: 1 inch.
3. When multiple binders are used, correlate the data into related
consistent groupings.
1.05 CONTENT OF MANUAL
A. Neatly typewritten table of contents for each volume, arranged in
systematic order.
1. Contractor, name of responsible principal including address, and
telephone number.
2. A list of each product required to be included, indexed to content of
the volume.
3. List, with each product, name, address, and telephone number of:
a. Subcontractor or installer.
b. Maintenance contractor, as appropriate..
c. Identify area of responsibility of each.
d. Local source of supply for parts and replacement.
4. Identify each product by product name and other identifying ,.
symbols as set forth in Contract Documents.
FEBRUARY 1999 01730-2 OPERATING AND MAINTENANCE DATA
LE9813 CHASE KITCHEN RENOVATION
SECTION 01730
OPERATING AND MAINTENANCE DATA
PARTI GENERAL
1.01 REQUIREMENTS INCLUDED
A. Compile product data and related information appropriate for Owner's
maintenance and operation of products furnished under the Contract.
1. Prepare operating and maintenance data as specified in this Section
and as referenced in other pertinent Sections of the Specifications.
B. Instruct Owner's personnel in maintenance of products and in operation
of equipment and systems.
1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS
A. Submittals: Section 01340, SHOP DRAWINGS, PRODUCT DATA, AND SAMPLES.
B. Record Specifications and Drawings: SECTION 01720, PROJECT RECORD
DOCUMENTS.
C- Warranties and bonds: Section 01740, WARRANTIES AND BONDS.
1.03 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Preparation of data shall be done by personnel:
1. Trained and experienced in maintenance and operation of described
products.
2. Familiar with requirements of this Section.
3. Skilled as technical writer to the extent required to communicate
essential data.
4. Skilled as draftsman competent to prepare required drawings.
1.04 FORM OF SUBMITTALS
A. Prepare data in form of an instructional operating and maintenance
manual for use by Owner's personnel.
B. Format:
1. Size: 8-1/2 in. X 11 in.
2. Paper: 20 pound minimum, white, for typed pages.
3. Text: Manufacturer's printed data, or neatly typewritten.
4. Drawings:
FEBRUARY 1999 01730-1 OPERATING AND MAINTENANCE DATA
LE9813 CHASE KITCHEN RENOVATION
1.06 SUBMITTAL
A. At Contract closeout, deliver reproducible mylar or erasable no tear
vellum copies and AutoCad files on disk of each set of Record Documents to
Architect for Owner. Revisions shall be neat,- legible, accurate and
consistent with original Drawings in quality of drafting.
B. Accompanying submittal with transmittal letter in duplicate, containing:
1. Date.
2. Project title and number.
3. Contractor's name and address.
4. Title and number of each Record Document.
5. Signature of Contractor or his authorized representative.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
Not applicable to this section.
PART 3 EXECUTION
Not applicable to this section.
END OF SECTION
FEBRUARY 1999 01720-3 PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENT'S
LE9813 CHASE KITCHEN RENOVATION
2. Provide locked cabinet or secure storage space for storage of
samples.
B. File documents and samples in accordance with Construction
Specifications Institute Master format.
C. Maintain documents in a clean, dry, legible condition and in good order.
Do not use record documents for construction purposes.
D. Make documents and samples available at all times for inspection by
Architect.
1.04 MARKING DEVICES
A. Provide felt tip marking pens for recording information in color code
designated by Architect.
1.05 RECORDING
A. Maintain current, discrete sets of Record Documents for general
construction (site work and architectural and structural work) and for
Plumbing, Fire Protection, HVAC, and Electrical Work.
B. Label each document "PROJECT RECORD" in neat large printed letters.
C. Record information concurrently with construction progress. Do not
conceal any work until required information is recorded.
D. Drawings: Legibly mark to record actual construction:
1. Depths of various elements of foundations in relation to finish first
floor datum.
2. Horizontal and vertical locations of underground utilities and
appurtenances, referenced to permanent surface improvements.
3. Location of internal utilities and appurtenances concealed in the
construction, referenced to visible and accessible features of the
structure.
4. Field changes of dimensions and detail.
5. Changes made by Architect's Supplemental Instructions or Change
Order.
6. Details not on original Contract Drawings.
E. Specifications and Addenda; Legibly mark each Section to record:
1. Manufacturer, trade name, catalog number, and supplier of each
Product and item of equipment actually installed.
2. Changes made by Architect's Supplemental Instructions or by
Change Order.
FEBRUARY 1999 01720-2 PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTS
LE9813 CHASE KITCHEN RENOVATION
SECTION 01720
PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTS
PART GENERAL
1.01 REQUIREMENTS INCLUDED
A. Maintain at the site for the Owner one record copy of:
1. Project Manual and Specifications, including discrete sets of Contract
Documents for:
a. Site work and architectural and structural work,
b. Plumbing work,
c. Fire protection work,
d. HVAC work, and
e. Electrical work.
2. Drawings.
3. Addenda and Bulletins.
4. Change Orders and other modifications to the Contract.
5. Architect's Supplemental Instructions or other written instructions.
6. Approved Shop Drawings, Product Data, and Samples.
7. Field test records.
8. Construction photographs.
9. Copies of building, electric, plumbing, and public safety codes.
1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS
A. Manufacturer's certificates: Section 01300, SUBMITTALS.
B. Shop Drawings, etc.: Section 01340, SHOP DRAWINGS, PRODUCT DATA AND
SAMPLES.
1.03 MAINTENANCE OF DOCUMENTS AND SAMPLES
A. Store documents and samples in Contractor's field office apart from
documents used for construction.
w, 1. Provide files and racks for storage of record documents.
FEBRUARY 1999 01720-1 PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENT'S
LE9813 CHASE KITCHEN RENOVATION
B. Provide on-site containers for collection of waste materials, debris, and
rubbish.
C. Remove waste materials, debris, and rubbish from the site periodically
and dispose of at legal disposal areas away from the site.
3.02 DUST CONTROL
A. Clean interior spaces prior to the start of finish painting and continue
cleaning on an as-needed basis until painting is finished.
B. Schedule operations so that dust and other contaminants resulting from
cleaning process will not fall on wet or newly-coated surfaces.
3.03 FINAL CLEANING
A. Employ skilled workers for final cleaning.
B. Clean and restore adjoining surfaces and other work which was soiled or
damaged superficially during the installation; replace other work
damaged beyond successful restoration. Where the performance of
subsequent work could possible result in damage to the complete unit or
element, provide protective covering or other provisions to minimize
possible damage.
C. Remove, grease, mastic, adhesives, dust, dirt, stains, fingerprints, labels, ,
and other foreign materials from sight-exposed interior and exterior
surfaces.
D. Wash and shine glazing and mirrors.
E. Polish glossy surfaces to clear shine.
F. Heating, Ventilating and Air Conditioning Equipment:
1. Clean permanent filters and replace disposable filters units in units
that are operated during construction.
2. Do not operate equipment without filters during construction and
testing.
G. Broom clean exterior paved surfaces; rake clean other surfaces of the
grounds.
H. Before final completion and Owner-occupancy, inspect sight-exposed
interior and exterior surfaces and work areas to verify that Work is clean.
END OF SECTION
FEBRUARY 1999 01710-2 CLEANING
LE9813 CH.-kSE KITCHEN RENOVATION
SECTION 01710
CLEANING
PART GENERAL
1.01 REQUIREMENTS INCLUDED
A. Execute cleaning during progress of the Work and at completion of the
Work, as required by GENERAL CONDITIONS.
1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS
A. Conditions of -the Contract and Special Conditions Relative to Cleaning
Requested by the Owner: GENERAL CONDITIONS and MODIFICATIONS TO THE
GENERAL CONDITIONS.
B. Cleaning for specific Products or Work: Division 2 through 16.
1.03 DISPOSAL REQUIREMENTS
A. Conduct cleaning and disposal operations to comply with codes,
ordinances, regulations, and antipollution laws.
1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Do not allow accumulation of waste materials or rubbish. At the
completion of Work remove all waste materials and rubbish from the
Project as well as all tools, equipment, machinery, and surplus materials.
Restore all areas used for storage of debris or rubbish to rough grade
condition. Where storage of trash is designated, such storage shall be in
an orderly manner as directed by the Owner.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 MATERIALS
A. Use cleaning materials that pose no hazards to health or property, and
will not damage surfaces.
B. Use those cleaning materials and methods recommended by manufacturer
of surface material to be cleaned.
C. Use cleaning materials only on surfaces recommended by cleaning
material manufacturer.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 DURING CONSTRUCTION
A. Execute daily cleaning to keep the Work, the site, and adjacent properties
free from accumulations of waste materials, rubbish, and windblown
debris resulting from construction operations.
FEBRUARY 1999 01710-1 CLEANING
LE9813 CHASE KITCHEN RENOVATION
SECTION 01700
CONTRACTCLOSEOUT
PARTI GENERAL
1.01 SUMMARY
A. The following are prerequisites to substantial completion. Provide the
following:
1. Punch list.
2. Supporting documentation.
3. Warranties.
4. Certifications.
5. Occupancy permit.
6. Start-up and testing of building systems.
7. Change over of locks.
8. Start up and testing of all food service equipment.
B. Provide the following requisites to final acceptance:
1. Final payment request with supporting affidavits.
2. Completed punch list.
C. Provide a marked-up mylar set of drawings including changes which
occurred during construction. (Record Documents)
D. Provide. the following closeout procedures:
1. Submission of record documents.
2. Submission of maintenance manuals.
3. Training and turnover to Owner's personnel.
4. Final cleaning and touch-up.
5. Removal of temporary facilities, including all restoration and repair
work required.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
Not applicable to this section.
PART EXECUTION
Not applicable to this section.
END OF SECTION
FEBRUARY 1999 01700-1 CONIRACTQASEOUT
LE9813 CHASE KITCHEN RENOVATION
approval or disapproval of the substitution will be enumerated by the
Architect. Disapproval of the substitution shall not cause for an increase
in contract price or a delay in schedule.
D. Request constitutes a representation that Contractor:
1. Has investigated proposed Product and determined that it meets or
exceeds, in all respects, specified Product.
2. Will provide the same warranty for substitution as for specified
Product.
3. Will coordinate installation and make other changes which may be
required for Work to be complete in all respects.
4. Waives claims for additional costs which may subsequently become
apparent.
E. Substitutions will not be considered when they are indicated or implied on
Shop Drawing or Product Data submittals without separate written request,
or when acceptance will require substantial revision of Contract
Documents.
F. Architect will determine acceptability of proposed substitution, and will
accept or reject' substitutions in writing within a reasonable time.
Amk
PART 2 PRODUCTS
Not applicable to this section.
PART 3 EXECUTION
Not applicable to this section.
END OF SECTION
FEBRUARY 1999 01600-4 MATERIAL AND EQUIPMENT
LE9813 CHASE KITCHEN RENOVATION
E. After installation, provide coverings to protect Products from damage from
traffic and construction operations, remove when no longer needed.
1.08 PRODUCT OPTIONS
A. Within 30 days after date of Contract, submit complete list of materials and
equipment proposed, with names of manufacturers, trade names, and model
designations.
B. Options:
1. Products specified only by reference standard: Any Product meeting
that standard.
2. Products specified by naming several manufacturers: Products of any
named manufacturer meeting Specifications.
3. Products specified by naming one or more manufacturers and "or
approved equal": Submit a request for substitution for any
manufacturer not specifically named.
4. Products specified by naming only one manufacturer: No option.
1.09 MATERIAL SUBSTITUTIONS
A. Where products or materials are specified by manufacturer's name, trade
name or catalog reference, the words "or approved equal" shall be
understood to follow unless there is a statement specifically indicating that
no substitution will be allowed. An item shall be considered equal to the
item so named or described if in the opinion of the Architect:
1. It is at least equal in quality, durability, appearance, strength and
design; including compliance with applicable specifications and
compatibility with physical space allocations provided for the item;
2. It performs at least equally the function imposed by the general
design for the work;
3. It conforms substantially, even with deviations, to the detailed
requirements for the item as indicated by the Specifications.
B. Where two or more products or materials are specified, the choice of these
shall be optional with the Contractor.
C. Should the Contractor, after the award of the Contract, wish to use any
products or materials other than those specified, he shall request written
permission of the Architect. His request shall name and adequately
describe (including shop drawings) the proposed substitutions, furnish
any information requested by the Architect, and state what difference, if
any, will be made in the Contract price, including the cost of changes in
the Work, for such substitutions should they be accepted. Upon receipt of
complete information from the Contractor, the Architect will consider all
aspects of the proposed substitution and advise the Contractor in writing
approving or disapproving the substitution. The principal reasons for
FEBRUARY 1999 01600-3 MATERIAL AND EQUIPMENT
LE9813 CHASE KITCHEN RENOVATION
1.04 WORKMANSHIP
A. Comply with industry standards except when more restrictive tolerances or
specified requirements indicate more rigid standards or more precise
workmanship.
B. Perform work by persons qualified to produce workmanship of specified
quality.
C. Secure Products in place with positive anchorage devices designed and
sized to withstand stresses, vibration, and racking.
1.05 MANUFACTURERS' INSTRUCTIONS
A. When work is specified to comply with manufacturers' instructions, submit
copies of published instructions as part of product data required in Section
01300, SUBMITTALS. Distribute copies as specified and maintain one set in
field office as required in Section 01720, PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTS.
B. Perform work in accordance with details of instructions and specified
requirements. Should a conflict exist between Specifications and
manufacturer's instructions, consult with Architect.
1.06 TRANSPORTATION AND HANDLING
A. Arrange deliveries of products in accordance with construction schedules. ••
Coordinate to avoid conflict with work and conditions at site.
B. Prevent damage to and soiling of materials and equipment in transit and in
handling, deliver in dry, undamaged condition in manufacturer's
unopened containers or packaging.
G Promptly inspect shipments to assure that Products comply with
requirements, quantities are correct, and products are undamaged.
1.07 STORAGE AND PROTECTION
A. Store Products in accordance with manufacturer's instructions, with seals
and labels intact and legible. Store sensitive Products in weathertight
enclosures; maintain within temperature and humidity ranges required by
manufacturer's instructions.
B. For exterior storage of fabricated Products, place on sloped supports above
ground. Cover Products subject to deterioration with impervious sheet
covering; provide ventilation to avoid condensation.
C. Store loose granular materials on solid surfaces in a well-drained area;
prevent mixing with foreign matter.
D. Arrange storage to provide access for inspection. Periodically inspect to
ensure that Products are undamaged and are maintained under required
conditions. +*
FEBRUARY 1999 01600-2 MATERIAL AND EQUIPMENT
LE9813 CHASE KITCHEN RENOVATION
SECTION 01600
MATERIAL AND EQUIPMENT
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01 REQUIREMENTS INCLUDED
A. Products.
B. Workmanship.
C Manufacturer's Instructions.
D. Transportation and Handling.
E. Storage and Protection.
F. Substitutions and Product Options.
1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS
A. Conditions of the Contract: Document 00700, GENERAL CONDITIONS and
Document 00810, SUPPLEMENTARY CONDITIONS.
. B. Submittal of manufacturer's certificates: Section 01300, SUBMITTALS.
C Shop Drawings, Product Data submittals: Section 01340, SHOP DRAWINGS,
PRODUCT DATA,AND SAMPLES.
D. Maintenance of approved Submittals on site: Section 01720, PROJECT RECORD
DOCUMENTS.
E. Operation and maintenance data: Section 01730, OPERATING AND
MAINTENANCE DATA.
F. Warranties and Bonds: Section 01740, WARRANTIES AND BONDS.
1.03 PRODUCTS
A. Product include material, equipment, and systems.
B. Comply with Specifications and referenced standards as minimum
requirements.
C Components required to be supplied in quantity within a Specification
Section shall be the same, and shall be interchangeable.
D. Do not use materials and equipment removed from existing structure,
except as specifically required, or allowed, by Contract Documents.
FEBRUARY 1999 01600-1 MATERIAL AND EQUIPMENT
LE9813 CKkSE KITCHEN RENOVATION
PART 3 EXECUTION
Not applicable to this section.
END OF SECTION
FEBRUARY 1999 01560-3 TEMPORARY CONTROLS
LE9813 CHASE KITCHEN RENOVATION
shall notify the owner of specific areas requiring attention as soon as it iv " '-
evident.
1.07 DEBRIS CONTROL
A. Maintain all areas under Contractor's control free of extraneous debris.
B. Initiate and maintain a specific program to prevent accumulation of
debris at construction site, storage and parking areas, or along access
roads and haul routes.
1. Provide containers for deposit of debris as specified in Section 01710,
CLEANING.
2. Prohibit overloading of trucks to prevent spillages on access and
haul routes.
a. Provide periodic inspection of traffic areas to enforce
requirements.
C. Schedule periodic collection and disposal of debris as specified in Section
01710, CLEANING.
1. Provide additional collections and disposals of debris whenever the
periodic schedule is inadequate to prevent accumulation.
1.08 POLLUTION CONTROL
A. Provide methods, means, and facilities required to prevent contamination
of soil, water, or atmosphere by the discharge of noxious substances from
construction operations.
B. Provide equipment and personnel, perform emergency measures
required to contain any spillages and to remove contaminated soils or
liquids.
1. Excavate and dispose of any contaminated earth off-site, and replace
with suitable compacted fill and topsoil.
C. Take special measures to prevent harmful substances from entering
public waters.
1. Prevent disposal of wastes, effluents, chemicals, or other such
substances adjacent to streams, or in sanitary or storm sewers.
D. Provide systems for control of atmospheric pollutants.
1. Prevent toxic concentrations of chemicals.
2. Prevent harmful dispersal of pollutants to atmosphere.
PART 2 PRODUCTS ,,,,w
Not applicable to this section.
FEBRUARY 1999 01560-2 TEMPORARY CONTROLS
LE9813 CHASE KITCHEN RENOVATION
SECTION 01560
TEMPORARY CONTROLS
PART 1 GENERAL
1.01 REQUIREMENTS INCLUDED
A. Provide and maintain methods, equipment, and temporary construction,
as necessary to provide controls over environmental conditions at the
construction site and related areas under Contractor's control; remove
physical evidence of temporary facilities at completion of Work.
1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS
A. Temporary utilities: Section 01510, TEMPORARY UTILITIES.
B. Cleaning: Section 01710, CLEANING.
1.03 NOISE CONTROL
A. Noise levels shall not exceed those stipulated by Occupational Safety and
Health Administration.
1.04 DUST CONTROL
A. Provide positive methods and apply dust control materials to minimize
raising dust from construction operations, and provide positive means to
prevent air-borne dust from dispersing into the atmosphere.
1.05 WATER CONTROL
A. Provide methods to control surface water to prevent damage to Project,
site, and adjoining properties.
1. Control fill, grading, and ditching to direct surface drainage away
from excavations, pits, tunnels, and other construction areas; and to
direct drainage to proper runoff.
B. Provide, operate, and maintain hydraulic equipment of adequate capacity
to control surface and water.
C. Dispose of drainage water in a manner to prevent flooding, erosion, or
other damage to any portion of the site or to adjoining areas and
properties.
1.06 PEST AND RODENT CONTROL
A. The Owner will provide pest and rodent control as necessary to prevent
infestation of construction and storage areas.
B. The Contractor will cooperate with the owner to coordinate and schedule
rodent and pest control activities during construction. The Contractor
FEBRUARY 1999 01560-1 TEMPORARY CONTROLS
III I IN
LE9813 CHASE KITCHEN RENOVATION
3.04 REMOVAL
A. Completely remove temporary materials and construction when
construction needs can be met by use of permanent installation.
1. Remove and dispose of compacted materials to depths required by
various conditions to be met in completed Work.
B. Restore areas to original or to specified conditions at completion of Work.
END OF SECTION
FEBRUARY 1999 01550-3 ACCESS ROADS AND PARKING AREAS
LE9813 CHASE KITCHEN RENOVATION
1. Provide temporary additional roads as needed for required
construction access.
2. Maintain existing construction, and restore to original, or specified,
condition at completion of Work.
B. Designated areas of existing parking facilities may be used for parking of
construction personnel's private vehicles and of Contractor's lightweight
vehicles.
1. Do not allow heavy vehicles or construction equipment in parking
areas.
PART 2-PRODUCTS
2.01 BASE AND TOPPING MATERIALS
A. For temporary construction which will be removed when no longer needed
for construction purposes: To Contractor's option.
B. For earthwork and topping which will become a permanent part of the
Work: Respective sections of Specifications.
PART 3 -EXECUTION
3.01 PREPARATION
A. Clear areas required for access road and parking areas.
B. Fill, compact, and grade areas as necessary to provide suitable support for
vehicular traffic under anticipated loadings.
C. Provide for surface drainage of facilities and surrounding areas.
1. Provide and operate temporary pumps.
3.02 CONSTRUCTION
A. Construction methods for temporary facilities to be removed when no
longer needed: To Contractor's option to provide the required results.
B. For work which will become a part of permanent Work, comply with
respective sections of Specifications for preparation and construction.
3.03 MAINTENANCE
A. Maintain roads, walks, and parking areas in a sound, clean condition.
1. Repair or replace any portions damaged during progress of
construction work.
FEBRUARY 1999 01550-2 ACCESS ROADS AND PARKING AREAS
LE9813 CHASE KITCHEN RENOVATION
SECTION 01550
ACCESS ROADS AND PARKING AREAS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01 REQUIREMENTS INCLUDED
A. Provide and maintain vehicular access to site and within site to provide
uninterrupted access:
1. To temporary construction facilities, storage, and work areas.
2. For use by persons and equipment involved in construction of Project.
3. For use by emergency vehicles.
B. Provide and maintain temporary parking areas for use by construction
personnel.
C. Remove temporary construction road and parking facilities when no
longer needed, and restore areas.
1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS
eok A. Temporary utilities: Section 01510, TEMPORARY UTILITIES.
B. Dust Control: Section 01560, TEMPORARY CONTROLS.
C. Establishment of subgrade elevations: Section 02200, EARTHWORK.
1.03 ON-SITE ROADS AND PARKING AREAS
A. Locate roads, drives, walks, and parking facilities to provide uninterrupted
access to construction offices, mobilization areas, work and storage areas,
and other areas required for execution of the Contract.
1. Location: to Contractor's option.
2. Size of parking facilities: Adequate to provide for needs of personnel.
3. Maintain driveways a minimum of 15 ft. wide between and around
combustible materials in storage and mobilization areas.
C. Maintain traffic areas free as possible of excavated materials, construction
equipment, Products, snow, ice, and debris.
D. Keep fire hydrants and water control valves free from obstruction and
accessible for use.
1.04 EXISTING PAVEMENTS
A. Designated existing on-site streets and driveways may be used for
construction traffic.
FEBRUARY 1999 01550-1 ACCESS ROADS AND PARKING AREAS
LE9813 CHASE KITCHEN RENOVATION
C Relocate barriers and enclosures as required by progress of construction. fir,
3.02 FENCES
A. Prior to start of work at the Project site, install enclosure fence with
suitably locked entrance gates.
I. Locate fence to enclose substantially entire Project site, or that
portion the Contractor establishes as required to encompass entire
Project construction operation, subject to the approval of the Owner.
2. Locate vehicular entrance gates in suitable relation to construction
facilities; and to avoid interference with traffic on public
thoroughfares.
3. Locate pedestrian entrance as required to provide controlled
personnel entry, in suitable relation to construction parking
facilities.
B. Construct chain link fence in accordance with industry standards.
3.03 REMOVAL
A. Completely remove barricades and enclosures, including foundations,
when construction has progressed to the point that they are no longer
needed, and when approved by Architect. ,.. ,
B. Clean and repair damage caused by installation, fill and grade areas of the
site to required elevations and slopes, and clean the area.
END OF SECTION
FEBRUARY 1999 01530-2 BARRIERS AND ENCLOSURES
LE9813 CHASE KITCHEN RENOVATION
SECTION 01530
BARRIERS AND ENCLOSURES
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01 REQUIREMENTS INCLUDED
A. Furnish, install and maintain suitable barriers and enclosures as required
to prevent public entry, and to protect the Work, and existing facilities
from construction operations; remove when no longer needed, or at
completion of Work.
1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS
A. Temporary heat: Section 01510, TEMPORARY UTILITIES
PART 2-PRODUCTS
2.01 MATERIALS, GENERAL
A. Materials may be new or used, suitable for intended purpose, and shall meet
requirements of applicable codes and standards.
2.02 FENCING
A. Minimum fence height shall be 6 ft., or as indicated on Drawings.
B. Chain Link Fence:
1. No. 11 gauge, 2 in. mesh, 72 in. high galvanized chain link fabric, with
extension arms and three strands of galvanized barbed wire.
2. Galvanized steel posts; 1-1/2 in. line posts and 2 in. corner posts.
2.03 BARRIERS
A. Materials to Contractor's option, as appropriate to serve required purpose.
2.04 ENCLOSURES
A. Materials to Contractor's option, as appropriate for sufficient protection of
work and materials.
PART 3-EXECUTION
3.01 GENERAL
A. Install facilities of a neat and reasonable uniform appearance, structurally
adequate for required purposes.
B. Maintain barriers and enclosures during entire construction period.
FEBRUARY 1999 01530-1 BARRIERS AND ENCLOSURES
LE9813 CHASE KITCHEN RENOVATION
B. Ascertain and comply with requirements of Project insurance carrier,
local city/town Fire Department.
C. Permanent fire protection system may be activated to meet these
requirements. Replace fusible link heads and other expended or
discharged components at time of Substantial Completion.
PART 3 -EXECUTION
3.01 GENERAL
A. Comply with applicable requirements specified in Division 15-
MECHANICAL, and in Division 16-ELECTRICAL.
B. Maintain and operate systems to assure continuous service.
C. Modify and extend systems as work progress requires.
3.02 REMOVAL
A. Remove completely temporary materials and equipment when their use is
no longer required.
B. Clean and repair damage caused by temporary installations or use of
140W temporary facilities.
C. Restore permanent facilities used for temporary services to specified
condition.
1. Prior to final inspection, remove temporary lamps and install new
lamps.
END OF SECTION
FEBRUARY 1999 01510-3 TEMPORARY UTILrMS
LE9813 CHASE KITCHEN RENOVATION
F. Work shall meet applicable requirements of NFPA 70 and Section 16400,
ELECTRICAL.
2.03 TEMPORARY HEAT AND VENTILATION
A. Provide temporary heat and ventilation as required to maintain adequate
environmental conditions to facilitate progress of the Work, to meet
specified minimum conditions for the installation of mater als, and to
protect materials and finishes from damage due to temperature and
humidity.
B. Provide adequate forced ventilation of enclosed areas for curing of
installed materials, to disperse humidity, and to prevent hazardous
accumulations of dust, fumes, vapors, and gases.
C. Portable heaters shall be standard approved units with integral controls.
D. Provide metered connections to existing fuel and power sources. Extend
and supplement existing systems with temporary units as required to
comply with requirements. Pay costs of installation, maintenance,
operation, and removal. Owner will pay costs of fuel used from the existing
system. Metering is for Owner's accounting purposes only.
2.04 TEMPORARY TELEPHONE SERVICE AMON
A. Arrange with local telephone service company to provide direct line
telephone service to construction site for personnel and employees and for
Architect and Owner's representative.
B. Pay costs for installation, maintenance, and removal, and pay service
charges for local calls. Toll charges shall be paid by party who places call.
2.05 TEMPORARY WATER
A. Provide metered connections to existing facilities. Provide water for
drinking and construction purposes; Owner will pay costs of water used.
Metering is for Owner's accounting purposes only.
B. Install branch piping with taps located so that water is available
throughout the construction by the use of hoses. Protect piping and
fittings against freezing.
2.06 TEMPORARY SANITARY FACILITIES
A. Provide sanitary facilities in compliance with laws and regulations.
B. Service, clean, and maintain facilities and enclosures.
2.07 TEMPORARY FIRE PROTECTION
A. Provide and maintain suitable fire protection equipment and services, and
establish procedures for fire protection for welding and other potentially
hazardous construction operations.
FEBRUARY 1999 01510-2 TEMPORARY UTILITIES
LE9813 CHASE KITCHEN RENOVATION
SECTION 01510
TEMPORARY UTILITIES
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01 REQUIREMENTS INCLUDED
A. Furnish, install and maintain temporary utilities required for construction;
remove temporary utilities when work is complete.
1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS
A. Conditions of the Contract: Document 00700, GENERAL CONDITIONS and
Document 00810, SUPPLEMENTARY CONDITIONS.
1.03 REFERENCED STANDARDS
A. National Fire Protection Association (NFPA):
70 National Electrical Code
1.04 REQUIREMENTS OF REGULATORY AGENCIES
ow A. Comply with NFPA 70.
B. Comply with Federal, State, and local codes and regulations and with utility
company requirements.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.01 MATERIALS, GENERAL
A. Materials may be new or used, but shall be adequate in capacity for the
required usage, shall not create unsafe conditions, and shall not violate
requirements of applicable codes and standards.
2.02 TEMPORARY ELECTRICITY AND LIGHTING
A. Provide metered connections to existing facilities, sized to provide service
required for power and lighting. Owner will pay the costs of power used;
metering is for Owner's accounting purposes only.
B. Install circuit and branch wiring, with area distribution boxes located so
that power and lighting is available throughout the construction from
construction-type power cords.
G Provide adequate artificial lighting where natural light is not adequate for
work, and for areas accessible to the public. Temporary lighting shall be
based on one 200 watt lamp for each 1,000 sq. ft. of floor area. Work of this
Section excludes power for hoisting, welding and operation of compressors.
E. Ensure that no electricity is used outside of normal working hours beyond
that reasonably necessary for security.
FEBRUARY 1999 01510-1 TEMPORARY UTILITIES
LE9813 CHASE KITCHEN RENOVATION
be used by construction personnel. Contractor will be responsible for
restricting access, for daily cleaning, final cleaning, maintenance,
and repair if required.
3. Drinking water. Provide portable water at building.
4. Cleaning and trash removal. Contractor will be responsible for
maintaining a clean work site. Work site both inside and outside
building will be cleaned up each work day. Trash will be removed to
dumpsters located in approved locations before the end of each work
day.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
Not Applicable To This Section
PART 3 EXECUTION
Not Applicable To This Section
END OF SECTION
row
FEBRUARY 1999 01500-3 TEMPORARY FACILITIES
LE9813 CHASE KITCHEN RENOVATION
1. Fire extinguishers and alarm systems. Alarm system will be
maintained in full functioning status throughout the project. If
temporary shut-down is required, service will be restored and tested at
end of work day: Contractors are directed to contact the Owner for
special requirements. Notify local fire department of telephone alert
status and normal status at end of work day.
2. Building enclosure and lock-up. Contractor will insure that all
windows are closed in work areas at end of each work day. Contractor
will be back-charged if Owner's personnel must perform window
closure after normal working hours. Contractor will be issued
building access card or key by Owner and will be responsible for lock-
up.
3. Post "No Smoking" signs throughout the work area as required by the
Owner.
4. Protection of existing finished areas is essential.
a. Protect existing corridors and stairs serving the areas in which
his forces are working as well as any existing floors to remain with
reinforced Kraft paper, model Seekure 3892, as provided by Fortifiber
of Attleboro, MA.
D. Environmental Protection: ,
1. Environmental protection. Contractor will not dispose of
environmentally detrimental materials in improper manner.
Contractor will submit Material Safety Sheets directly to the Owner
on all chemical products used on job and will comply with applicable
regulations for use and disposal. Copies of all material data sheets
will be kept at project site office.
E. Access:
1. Owner will designate parking, dumpster, service and delivery
locations.
2. Hours of operations for project will be from 7:00 AM to 4:00 PM.
Requests for off-hours or overtime work must be approved by
the Owner.
F. Provide personnel support facilities:
1. Contractor's field office. Contractor will maintain one (1) field office.
Office will be located in work area in building. Office area will include
bulletin board for posting required notices and safety information,
plan and submittal file, telephone and telephone answering machine,
and suitable plan table or working surface.
2. Sanitary facilities. Contractor will be responsible for servicing,
cleaning and disposal. Toilets in building will be out of service due to
construction operations, and access to other, areas of building will not
be permitted. As toilet rooms are returned to service, these are not to
FEBRUARY 1999 01500-2 TEMPORARY FACILITIES
LE9813 CHASE KITCHEN RENOVATION
SECTION 01500
TEMPORARY FACILITIES
PART 1 - GENERAL.
1.01 SUMMARY
A. Provide temporary services and utilities, including utility costs where
indicated:
1. Water (potable and non-potable). Contractor will provide all water
service. -
2. Lighting and power. Contractor will provide. Electrical subcontractor
will arrange for temporary distribution and lighting as necessary.
3. Telephone. Contractor shall obtain telephone service for project.
Contractor may use one existing Owner connections but shall obtain
own line and pay all telephone charges. Contractor shall maintain
telephone and telephone answering machine or portable telephone
and fax machine.
4. Toilet facilities. Provided by Owner.
5. Materials storage. Material storage will be at the direction of the
Owner, including storage inside the buildings or in trailers,
dumpsters, etc. outside the buildings.
B. Provide construction facilities, including utility costs:
1. Construction equipment.
2. Lighting.
3. Hoisting for materials. Bulk materials (eg. drywall) will not be
carried through stairwells. Contractor shall hoist all these materials
through windows on each floor.
4. Elevator may be used by Contractor for moving materials, but will be
responsible for returning it to original point.
5. Storage of materials: Work in various sections will require
removal,and re-installation of various items. These fixtures, etc., may
be stored in work areas in rooms designated by the Owner, providing
suitable protection is maintained for floors, walls and stored items.
6. Storage of items salvaged for Owner's use elsewhere: Owner will
designate a storage site on campus. Contractor will deliver designated
items to storage area.
C Provide security and protection requirements:
FEBRUARY 1999 01500-1 TEMPORARY FACILITIES
LE9813 CHASE KI'T'CHEN RENOVATION
G. Identify materials to be tested or inspected by Testing Laboratory or
Agency.
H. After determination of need for testing or inspecting by Owner, notify
Laboratory sufficiently in advance, minimum five days, of operations to
allow for its assignment of personnel and scheduling of tests.
1. When tests or inspections cannot be performed after such notice,
reimburse Owner for laboratory personnel and travel expenses
incurred due to Contractor's negligence.
I. Employ and pay for the services of a separate, equally qualified
independent testing laboratory to perform additional inspections,
sampling, and testing required:
1. For the Contractor's convenience; and
2. When initial tests indicate Work does not comply with Contract
Documents.
1.08 CONDUCT OF INSPECTIONS AND TESTS
A. The Contractor shall notify the Owner, Architect, and Testing Laboratory
in sufficient time before the performance of work to permit the proper ,
conduct of Owner-authorized inspections and tests.
B. Representatives of Testing Laboratory shall inspect the manufacture,
assembly, and placement of materials as required and as authorized by the
Owner, and shall report their findings to the Architect, Owner, and
Contractor.
G Work shall be checked as it progresses, but failure to detect any defective
work or materials shall in no way prevent later rejection when such
defect is discovered nor shall it obligate the Owner to accept such work.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
Not applicable to this section.
PART 3 EXECUTION
Not applicable to this section.
END OF SECTION
FEBRUARY 1999 01410-4 TESTING LABORATORY SERVICES
LE9813 CHASE KITCHEN RENOVATION
12. Interpretation of test results, when requested by Architect.
13. Observations regarding compliance with Contract Documents.
F. Perform properly authorized additional services as required by the
Owner.
1.06 LIMITATIONS OF AUTHORITY OF TESTING LABORATORY
A. Laboratory is not authorized to:
1. Release, revoke, alter, or enlarge on requirements of Contract
Documents.
2. Approve or accept any portion of the Work, except as specifically .
authorized by the specifications.
1.07 CONTRACTOR'S RESPONSIBILITIES
A. Cooperate with laboratory personnel, provide access to Work, and to
Manufacturer's operations.
1. Monitor. each inspection, sampling, and test.
2. Provide Laboratory or Agency with written acknowledgment of each
inspection, sampling, and test.
3. Within 24 hours notify Architect and Owner in writing of reasons
for not acknowledging Laboratory results.
B. Secure and deliver to the Laboratory adequate quantities of
representational samples of materials proposed to be used and which
require testing.
C. Provide to the Laboratory the preliminary design mix proposed to be used
for concrete, and other materials mixes which require control by the
testing laboratory.
D. Fumish copies of Product test reports as required.
E. Fumish incidental labor and facilities:
1. To provide access to Work to be tested.
2. To obtain and handle samples at the Project site or at the source of
the Product to be tested.
3. To facilitate inspections and tests.
4. For storage and curing of test samples.
F. Fumish verification of materials and equipment compliance with
Contract Documents.
FEBRUARY 1999 01410-3 TESTING LABORATORY SERVICES
LE9813 CHASE KITCHEN RENOVATION
a. National Bureau of Standards.
b. Accepted values of natural physical constants.
1.05 LABORATORY DUTIES
A. Cooperate with Architect and Contractor; provide qualified personnel
promptly on notice.
B. Acquaint Owner's, Architect's and Contractor's superintendent with
testing procedures and with all special conditions encountered at the site.
C. Inspections, sampling, and testing of materials and construction methods
shall be as specified in individual technical specification sections.
1. Comply with specified standards, ASTM, ANSI, and other recognized
authorities.
2. Conduct and interpret the tests and state in each report whether the
test specimens comply with the requirements, and specifically state
any deviations therefrom.
3. Obtain Contractor's written acknowledgment of each inspection,
sampling, and test made.
D. Promptly notify Architect and Contractor of irregularities or deficiencies
of Work or Products which are observed during performance of services.
E. Promptly submit written report of each test and inspection; one copy
each to Architect, Owner, Contractor, and one copy to Project Record
Documents File. Each report shall include:
1. Date issued.
2. Project title and number.
3. Testing laboratory name, address, and telephone number.
4. Name and signature of laboratory inspector.
5. Date and time of sampling or inspection.
6. Record of temperature and weather conditions.
7. Date, of test.
8. Identification of Product and Specification section.
9. Location of sample or test in the Project.
10. Type of inspection or test. ''
11. Results of tests and compliance with Contract Documents.
FEBRUARY 1999 01410-2 TESTING LABORATORY SERVICES
LE9813 CHASE KITCHEN RENOVATION
SECTION 01410
TESTING LABORATORY SERVICES
PART1 GENERAL
1.01 REQUIREMENTS INCLUDED
A. The Owner reserves the right, at his sole discretion, to select and pay for
the services of an Independent Testing Laboratory to perform specified
services and testing as may be in the Owner's best interest.
1. Contractor shall cooperate with the laboratory to facilitate the
execution of its services.
2. Employment of the laboratory shall in no way relieve Contractor's
obligations to perform the Work of the Contract.
1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS.
A. Inspections and testing required by laws, ordinances, rules, regulations,
orders or approvals of public authorities: Condition of the Contract.
B. Respective sections of specifications: Certification of products.
C. Laboratory tests required, standards for testing, and certification of
products: Divisions 2 through 16.
1.03 REFERENCED STANDARDS
A. American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM):
E 329 Inspection and Testing Agencies for Concrete, Steel, and
Bituminous Materials as Used in Construction
1.04 QUALIFICATION OF LABORATORY
A. Meet "Recommended Requirements for Independent Laboratory
Qualification", published by American Council of Independent
Laboratories.
B. Meet requirements of ASTM E 329.
G Authorized to operate in the state in which the project is located.
D. Submit copy of report of inspection of facilities made by Materials
Reference Laboratory of National Bureau of Standards during the most
recent tour of inspection, with memorandum of remedies of any
deficiencies reported by the inspection.
E. Testing Equipment:
1. Calibrated at reasonable intervals by devices of accuracy traceable to
either:
FEBRUARY 1999 01410-1 TESTING LABORATORY SERVICES
LE9813 CHASE KITCHEN RENOVATION
B. • Affix stamp and initials or signature, and indicate requirements for
resubmittal, or approval of submittal.
G Return submittals to Contractor for distribution, or for resubmission.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
Not applicable to this section.
PART 3 EXECUTION
Not applicable to this section.
END OF SECTION
AMIN
FEBRUARY 1999 01340-6 SHOP DRAWINGS,
PRODUCT DATA,AND SAMPLES
LE9813 CHASE KITCHEN RENOVATION
checking is complete; details of items noted by checker are to be clarified
further before full approval can be given for fabrication. Resubmission
required.
REJECTED: Submittal is rejected as not in accord with the Contract
Documents, too many corrections, or other justifiable reasons. When
returning submittal, Architect will state reasons for rejection. Correct
and resubmit. Do not fabricate.
1.09 RESUBMISSION REQUIREMENTS
A. Make any corrections or changes in the submittals required by the
Architect and- resubmit until approved.
B. Shop Drawings and Product Data:
1. Revise initial drawings or data, and resubmit as specified for the
initial submittal.
2. Indicate any changes which have been made other than those
requested by the Architect.
C. Samples: Submit new samples as required for initial submittal.
1.10 DISTRIBUTION
A. Distribute reproductions of Shop Drawings and copies of Product Data
which carry the Architect's stamp of approval to:
1. Job site file.
2. Record Documents file.
3. Other affected contractors.
4. Subcontractors.
5. Supplier or fabricator.
6. Owner
B. Distribute samples which carry the Architect stamp of approval as
directed by the Architect.
1.11 ARCHPTECT DUTIES
A. Review submittals with reasonable promptness and in accord with the
schedule and the requirements of the GENERAL CONDITIONS.
FEBRUARY 1999 01340-5 SHOP DRAWINGS,
PRODUCT DATA,AND SAMPLES
LE9813 CHASE KITCHEN RENOVATION
5. Identification of the product, with the specification section number.
6. Field dimensions, clearly identified as such.
7. Relation to adjacent and critical features of the Work and materials.
8. Reference to shop drawings to the work of other trade(s) shall
designate such trade(s); the term "By Others" shall not be used.
9. Applicable standards, such as ASTM, ANSI, or Federal Specification
Numbers.
10. Identification of deviations from Contract Documents.
11. Identification of revisions on resubmittals.
12. An 8 in. X 3 in. blank space for Contractor and Architect stamps.
13. Contractor's stamp, initialed or signed, certifying to review of
submittal, verification of products, field measurements. and field
construction criteria, and coordination of the information within
the submittal with requirements of the Work and of Contract
Documents.
1.09 ARCHITECTS REVIEW
A. Architect's stamp shall contain the following data:
"Review/approval neither extends nor alters any contractural
obligations of the Architect or Contractor.
APPROVED
APPROVED AS CORRECTED
REVISE AND RESUBMIT
REJECTED"
B. The Architect will insert the date of action taken and an identification of
the person taking the action.
C. Explanation of the designated actions is as follows:
APPROVED: No corrections, no marks: Resubmission not required.
APPROVED AS CORRECTED: Minor amount of corrections; all items can be
fabricated without further corrections to original submittal; checking is
complete and all corrections are deemed obvious without ambiguity.
Resubmission not required. A"k
REVISE AND RESUBMIT: Amount of corrections requires that noted items
must not be fabricated without further corrections of original submittal;
FEBRUARY 1999 01340-4 SHOP DRAWINGS,
PRODUCT DATA,AND SAMPLES
LE9813 CHASE KITCHEN RENOVATION
G. Do not begin work that requires Submittals until return of Submittals
with Architect's approval.
1.08 SUBMISSION REQUIREMENTS
A. Make submittals promptly in accordance with approved schedule, and in
such sequence as to cause no delay in the Work or in the work of any
other contractor.
B. Number of submittals required:
1. Shop Drawings:
a. Architectural Work: Submit one reproducible transparency and
one opaque reproduction.
b. Engineering Consultant's Work: Submit one reproducible
transparency and one opaque reproduction directly to the
consultant; submit one opaque reproduction to the Architect with
a copy of the transmittal sent to the consultant. The Consultant's
review and comments will be made on the reproducible which
will be forwarded to the Architect who will then return the
reproducible to the Contractor.
2. Product Data:
a. Architectural Work: Submit the number of copies which the
Contractor requires, plus two which will be retained by the
-Architect.
b. Engineering Consultant's Work: Submit the number of copies
which the Contractor requires, plus three to the consultant and
one to the Architect with a copy of the transmittal sent to the .
consultant. The Consultant's review and comments will be made
on the Product Data which will be forwarded to the Architect who
will then return the Product Data to the Contractor.
3. Samples: Submit the number stated in each specification section.
C. Submittals shall contain:
1. The date of submission and the dates of any previous submissions.
2. The Project title and number.
3. Contract identification.
4. The names of:
a. Contractor.
b. Supplier.
c. Manufacturer.
FEBRUARY 1999 01340-3 SHOP DRAWINGS,
PRODUCT DATA,AND SAMPLES
LE9813 CHASE KITCHEN RENOVATION
1. Modify drawings and diagrams to delete information not applicable
to the Work, and to identify clearly applicable products and work.
2. Supplement standard information to provide information
specifically applicable to the Work.
1.06 SAMPLES
A. Office samples shall be of sufficient size and quantity to clearly illustrate:
1. Functional characteristics of the product, with integrally related
parts and attachment devices.
2. Full range of color, texture, and pattern.
B. Field samples and mock-ups:
1. Contractor shall erect, at the Project site, at a location acceptable to
the Architect.
2. Size or area: that specified in the respective specification section.
3. Fabricate each sample and mock-up complete and finished.
4. Remove mock-ups at conclusion of Work or when acceptable to the
Architect, unless incorporated in the Work.
1.07 CONTRACTOR RESPONSIBILITIES
A. Review Shop Drawings, Product Data, and Samples prior to submission.
B. Determine and verify:
1. Field measurements.
2. Field construction criteria.
3. Catalog numbers and similar data.
4. Conformance with specifications.
C. Submit Shop Drawings, Product Data and Samples for individual items of
work as single package.
D. Submit interior finish samples as single package. .
E. Coordinate each submittal with requirements of the Work and of the
Contract Documents.
F. Notify the Architect in writing, at time of submission, of any deviations
in the submittals from requirements of the Contract Documents.
FEBRUARY 1999 01340-2 SHOP DRAWINGS,
PRODUCT DATA,AND SAMPLES
LE9813 CHASE KITCHEN RENOVATION
SECTION 01340
SHOP DRAWINGS,PRODUCT DATA,AND SAMPLES
PART 1 GENERAL
1.01 REQUIREMENTS INCLUDED
A. Submit Shop Drawings, Product Data, and Samples required by Contract
Documents.
1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS
A. Definitions and Additional Responsibilities of Parties: GENERAL
CONDITIONS and MODIFICATIONS TO THE GENERAL CONDITIONS.
B. Submittal of manufacturer's certificates: Section 01300, SUBMITTALS.
C Record documents: Section 01720, PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTS.
1.03 SUBMITTAL SCHEDULE
A. A Schedule of shop drawings, product data, and samples shall be submitted
indicating by trade the date by which each such item is to be submitted
and the date by which final approval of each item must be obtained. This
schedule shall be revised as required by conditions of the Work, subject to
Architect's approval. In each case, reasonable time must be permitted for
Architect's review, Consultant's review, and for resubmittals if required.
1.04 SHOP DRAWINGS
A. Drawings shall be presented in a clear and thorough manner.
1. Details shall be identified by reference to Project name and number,
Architect's name, sheet and detail number, schedule or room
numbers shown on Contract Drawings.
B. Minimum sheet size: 8-1/2 x 11 in.
C Each submittal shall be accompanied by appropriate transmittal form.
1.05 PRODUCT DATA
A. Preparation
1. Clearly mark each copy to identify pertinent products or models.
2. Show performance characteristics and capacities.
3. Show dimensions and clearances required.
4. Show wiring and piping diagrams and controls.
B. Manufacturer's standard schematic drawings and diagrams:
FEBRUARY 1999 01340-1 SHOP DRAWINGS,
PRODUCT DATA,AND SAMPLES
owl
LE9813 CHASE KITCHEN RENOVATION
2. Coordinate the work of the various trades so that:
a. Interferences between plumbing, HVAC, electrical, architectural
and structural work will be avoided: and
b. Within the limits indicated on the drawings, the maximum
practicable space for operation, repair, removal and testing of
plumbing, HVAC, electrical and other equipment will be provided.
3. Pipes, conduits, ducts and similar items shall be kept close as possible
to ceiling, walls and columns, to take up a minimum amount of space.
Pipes, conduits, ducts, equipment and similar items shall be located so
that they -will not interfere with the intended use of other building
equipment or systems. Composite drawings shall show the
relationship of new construction to existing construction.
4. Furnish and install all offsets, fittings and similar items necessary in
order to accomplish the requirements of coordination without
additional expense to the Owner.
5. Within 10 ten days after Notice to Proceed prepare and submit for
approval by the Architect composite coordination drawings for all
mechanical equipment rooms and other mechanical/electrical
interfacing areas. Drawings shall show the work of all trades covered,
shall be drawn to a scale same as the Construction Documents, and
shall show clearly in both plan and elevation that all work can be
installed without interference.
6. Any work installed prior to approval of coordination drawings shall
be at the Contractor's risk. Subsequent relocations required to avoid
interferences shall be made without additional expense to the Owner.
In case interference develops, the Architect will decide which work
shall be relocated, regardless of which was installed first.
7. The prosecution of this work shall be orchestrated by the General
Contractor. He shall engage qualified personnel and make the
necessary arrangements with his subcontractors immediately after
award of this contract to assure prompt and expeditious development
of coordinated drawings.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
Not applicable to this section.
PART 3 EXEC LMON
Not applicable to this section.
END OF SECTION
FEBRUARY 1999 01300-3 SUBMITTALS
LE9813 CHASE KITCHEN RENOVATION
6 Within 5 days of notice to proceed all submittals will be made on the
long lead time items.
B. Progress Schedules
1. Prepare schedule in bar chart form or alternate form as approved by
Architect.
2. Show progress of job on weekly basis for each major element of
construction.
3. Identify fixed milestones and critical path elements.
4. Revise schedule on a weekly basis and submit with application for
payment. Submit initial schedule within 15 days after award of
contract.
5. For subsequent submittals, provide written narrative explaining
deviations from originally submitted schedule.
C. Schedule of values
1. Submit schedule of values for the component parts of the work in
sufficient detail to serve as a basis for computing values for progress
payments during construction.
2. The sum of all values listed in the schedule shall equal the total
contract sum.
3. The application for payment shall use the same values and categories
as the approved schedule of values.
4. Resubmit schedule of values until approval by Architect is obtained.
5. Submit schedule of values within 10 days of award of project. Final
approval must be obtained before approval of first application for
payment.
D. Manufacturer's Certificates
1. Submit certificates in duplicate, in accordance with the requirements
of each specification section.
2. Provide proper identification of each submittal; project, contractor,
subcontractor, supplier and specification section or drawing number.
E. Composite Coordination Drawings
1. Due to the Complexity of the mechanical/electrical installation, the
General Contractor shall prepare composite coordination drawings
for the following trades:
Plumbing, HVAC, Fire Protection, Electrical
FEBRUARY 1999 01300-2 SUBMITTALS
LE9813 CHASE KITCHEN RENOVATION
SECTION 01300
SUBMITTALS
PART GENERAL
1.01 REQUIREMENTS INCLUDED
A. Progress Schedules.
B. Schedule of Values.
C. Manufacturer's Certificates.
D. Composite Drawings.
1.02 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Testing Laboratory Reports: Section 01410, TESTING LABORATORY
SERVICES.
B. Manufacturer's instructions: Section 01600, MATERIAL AND EQUIPMENT.
C. Contractor's list of Products: Section 01600, MATERIAL AND EQUIPMENT.
D. Shop drawings submittals: Section 01340, SHOP DRAWINGS, PRODUCT
DATA,AND SAMPLES.
E. Closeout submittals: Section 01720, PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTS; Section
01730, OPERATING AND MAINTENANCE DATA and Section 01740,
WARRANTIES AND BONDS.
1.03 PROCEDURES
A. General
1. Deliver submittals to Architect at address listed on cover of Project
Manual. Send 1 copy of a complete submittal to Owner concurrently.
2. Provide each submittal in form and content acceptable to Architect.
3. After Architect review of submittal, if not approved, revise and
resubmit as required, identifying changes made since previous
submittal.
4. Distribute copies of approved submittals to concerned persons.
Instruct recipients to promptly report any inability to comply with
provisions.
5. Resubmit periodically when conditions are changed so as to warrant
resubmission or as directed by the Architect.
FEBRUARY 1999 01300-1 SUBMITTALS
LE9813 CHASE KITCHEN RENOVATION
9. Coordination of schedules.
10. Review submittal schedules; expedite as required.
11. Maintenance of quality standards.
12. Pending changes and substitutions.
13. Review proposed changes for:
a. Effect on Construction Progress Schedule and on completion date.
b. Effect on other contracts of the Project.
14. Other business.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
Not applicable to this section.
PART 3 EXECUTION
Not applicable to this section.
END OF SECTION
FEBRUARY 1999 01200-4 PROJECT MEETINGS
LE9813 CHASE KITCHEN RENOVATION
a. Office, work, and storage areas.
b. Owner's requirements.
9. Construction facilities, controls, and construction aids.
10. Temporary utilities.
11. Safety and first-aid procedures.
12. Security procedures.
13. Housekeeping procedures.
1.04 PROGRESS MEETINGS
A. Schedule regular periodic meetings, as required.
B. Hold called meetings as required by progress of the Work.
G Location of the meetings: Project site at location designated by the
Contractor.
D. Attendance:
1. Owner
2. Architect, and his professional consultants as needed.
3. Subcontractors as appropriate to the agenda.
4. Suppliers as appropriate to the agenda.
5. Mechanical and electrical subcontractors.
6. Others.
E. Suggested Agenda:
1. Review and approval of minutes of previous meeting.
2. Review of Work progress since previous meeting.
3. Field observations, problems, conflicts.
4. Problems which impede Construction Progress Schedule.
5. Review of off-site fabrication, and delivery schedules.
6. Corrective measures and procedures to regain project schedule.
7. Revisions to Construction Progress Schedule.
8. Progress schedule during succeeding work period.
FEBRUARY 1999 01200-3 PROJECT MEETINGS
LE9813 CHASE KITCHEN RENOVATION
B. Location: A central site, convenient for all parties, designated by
Contractor.
C Attendance:
1. Owner's Representative.
2. Architect and his Professional Consultants.
3. Resident Project Representative.
4. Contractor's Superintendent.
5. Major Subcontractors.
6. Major suppliers.
7. Others as appropriate.
D. Suggested Agenda:
1. Distribution and discussion of:
a. List of major subcontractors and suppliers. A"14
b. Projected Construction Progress Schedules.
2. Critical work sequencing.
3. Major equipment deliveries and priorities.
4. Project Coordination.
a. Designation of responsible personnel.
5. Procedures and processing of:
a. Field Decisions.
b. Proposal Requests.
c. Submittals.
d. Change Orders.
e. Application for Payment.
6. Adequacy of distribution of Contract Documents.
7. Procedures for maintaining Record Documents. Aaw
8. Use of premises:
FEBRUARY 1999 01200-2 PROJECT MEETINGS
LE9813 CHASE KITCHEN RENOVATION
/1°w SECTION 01200
PROJECT MEETINGS
PART GENERAL
1.01 REQU[REMENTS INCLUDED
A. The Owner shall schedule and administer pre-construction meeting,
periodic progress meetings, and specially called meetings throughout
progress of the Work.
B. The Architect- shall:
1. Prepare agenda for meetings.
2. Distribute written notice of each meeting four days in advance of
meeting date.
3. Make physical arrangements for meetings.
4. Preside at the meetings.
5. Record the minutes; include significant proceedings and decisions.
6. Reproduce and distribute copies of minutes within three days after
each meeting.
a. To participants in the meeting.
b. To parties affected by decisions made at the meeting.
c. Furnish one copy of minutes to Architect.
C. Representatives of contractors, subcontractors, and suppliers attending
meetings shall be qualified and authorized to act on behalf of the entity
each represents.
D. Architect may attend meetings to ascertain that Work is expedited
consistent with Contract Documents and construction schedules.
1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS
A. Shop Drawings: Section 01340, SHOP DRAWINGS, PRODUCT DATA, AND
SAMPLES.
B. Record documents: Section 01720, PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTS.
G Operation and maintenance data Section 01730, OPERATING AND
MAINTENANCE DATA.
1.03 PRE-CONSTRUCTION MEETING
A. Schedule within 15 days after date of Notice to Proceed.
FEBRUARY 1999 01200-1 PROJECT MEETINGS
LE9813 CHASE KITCHEN RENOVATION
normal status at end of day. Requirements will be clarified at pre-
construction conference. See Section 01500, Temporary Facilities.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
Not applicable to this section.
PART 3 EXECUTION
Not applicable to this section.
END OF SECTION
FEBRUARY 1999 01100-2 PROJECT PROCEDURES
LE9813 CHASE KITCHEN RENOVATION
SECTION 01100
PROJECT PROCEDURES
PART 1 GENERAL
1.01 SUMMARY
A. Provide coordination of work and administration as follows.
1. Supervisory personnel: provide a project superintendent to be on site
at all times work is underway and a project manager as required. If
second shift work is in effect a superintendent and a project manager
will be present at all times to coordinate the work.
2. Attend preconstruction conference, weekly work meetings and
distribute minutes.
3. Attend other meetings as necessary.
B. Submit daily and special reports.
G Submit progress schedule, bar-chart type, updated weekly.
1. Submit initial construction progress schedule within 5 days of award.
No payments will be approved unless an approve schedule is in place.
�** 2. See Section 01000 - Special Condition, Paragraph 1.05 for accelerated
schedule provisions.
D. Prepare submittal schedule; coordinate with progress schedule.
1. Submittal schedule will list all submittals, samples, mock-ups and
other items required by the Specifications, indicating when
Contractor will submit these items and what action is required by
others. Schedule will include all trades and sub-contractors. Submit
schedule within 10 days of award.
2. If the Contractor fails to prepare as submittal schedule, the Architect
will prepare this schedule and the Contractor will be back-charged
by the Owner.
E. Submit schedule of values; no payments will be make to Contractor until a
schedule of Values in a form approved by the Owner has been received
and accepted.
F. Submit schedule of required tests including payment and responsibility.
G. Perform surveys: Laying out the work and verifying locations during
construction.
H. Submit and post list of emergency telephone numbers and addresses for
individuals to be contacted in case of emergency for 24-hour per day, 7-
day per week availability.
J. Contractor will be responsible for notification of Northampton Fire
Department of telephone alert status and for notifying same regarding
FEBRUARY 1999 01100-1 PROJECT PROCEDURES
LE9813 CHASE KITCHEN RENOVATION
FM Factory Mutual System
FS Federal Specifications
GA Gypsum Association
IEEE Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers
IMIAC International Masonry Industry-All Weather Council
ISA International Society of Arboriculture
MFMA Maple Flooring Manufacturers Association
MIL Military Specifications
ML/SFA Metal Lath/Steel Framing Association
NAAMM National Association of Architectural Metal Manufacturers
NCMA National Concrete Masonry Association
NEBB National Environmental Balancing Bureau
NEMA National Electrical Manufacturers' Association
NFPA National Fire Protection Association
NSF National Sanitation Foundation
NRCA National Roofing Contractors Association
NSWMA National Solid Waste Management Association
NTMA National Terrazzo and Mosaic Association
NWMA National Woodwork Manufacturers Association
PCA Portland Cement Association
PCI Prestressed Concrete Institute
PS Product Standard
SCPI Structural Clay Products Institute
SDI Steel Deck Institute
SDI Steel Door Institute
SIGMA Sealed Insulating Glass Manufacturers Association
SJI Steel Joint Institute
SMACNA Sheet Metal and Air Conditioning Contractors' National
Association
SPRI Single Ply Roofing Institute
SSPC Steel Structures Painting Council
TAS Technical Aid Series
TCA Tile Council of America, Inc.
UL Underwriters' Laboratories, Inc.
MCLIB West Coast Lumber Inspection Bureau
PART 2 PRODUCTS
Not applicable to this section.
PART 3 EXE=ON
Not applicable to this section.
END OF SECITON
FEBRUARY 1999 01090-2 REFERENCE STANDARDS
LE9813 CHASE KITCHEN RENOVATION
low
SECTION 01090
REFERENCE STANDARDS
PART 1 GENERAL
1.01 REQUIREMENTS INCLUDED
A. Abbreviations and acronyms used in Contract Documents to identify
reference standards.
1.02 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Application: When a standard is specified by reference, comply with
requirements and recommendations stated in that standard, except when
requirements are modified by the Contract Documents, or applicable codes
established stricter standards.
B. Publication Date: The publication in effect on the date of issue of Contract
Documents, except when a specific publication date is specified.
1.03 ABBREVIATIONS AND NAMES OF ORGANIZATIONS
A. Obtain copies of referenced standards direct from publication source,
when needed for proper performance of Work, or when required for
submittal by Contract Documents.
AA Aluminum Association
AABC Associated Air Balance Council
AA.v1A Architectural Aluminum Manufacturers Association
AASHTO American Association of State Highway and Transportation
Officials
ACI American Concrete Institute
ADC Air Diffusion Council
AGC Associated General Contractors of America
AI Asphalt Institute
AISC American Institute of Steel Construction
AITC American Institute of Timber Construction
AISI American Iron and Steel Institute
AMCA Air Movement and Control Association
ANSI American National Standards Institute
ARI Air Conditioning and Refrigeration Institute
ASHRAE American Society of Heating, Refrigerating and Air
Conditioning Engineers
ASME American Society of Mechanical Engineers
ASPA American Sod Producers Associates
ASTM American Society for Testing and Materials
AWI Architectural Woodwork Institute
AWPA American Wood-Preservers' Association
AWS American Welding Society
A1W AWWA American Water Works Association
CRSI Concrete Reinforcing Steel Institute
EJMA Expansion Joint Manufacturer's Association
FGMA Flat Glass Marketing Association
FEBRUARY 1999 01090-1 REFERENCE STANDARDS
LE9813 CHASE KITCHEN RENOVATION
1. In general, where mechanical cutting is required, cut work with
sawing and grinding tools, not with hammering and chopping tools.
Core drill openings through concrete work.
2. Comply with the requirements of applicable Sections of Division 2 -
SITE WORK where cutting-and-patching requires excavating and
backfilling.
B. Employ excavating and backfilling methods that prevent settlement or
damage to other work.
C Employ original_ installer or fabricator to cut and patch for:
1. Weather-exposed or moisture-resistant elements.
2. Sight-exposed finished surfaces.
D. Execute fitting and adjustment of products to provide specified products,
functions, tolerances, and finishes.
E. Restore work which has been but or removed; install new products to
provide complete work in accordance with requirements of Contract
Documents.
F. Fit work airtight to pipes, sleeves, ducts, conduits, and other penetrations
through surfaces.
G. Patch with seams which are durable and as invisible as possible. Comply
with specified tolerances for the work.
H. Restore exposed finishes of patched areas; extend finish restoration to
retained work to eliminate evidence of patching.
1. Where patch occurs in a smooth painted surface, extend final paint
coat over entire unbroken surface containing patch.
I. Refinish entire surfaces as necessary to provide even finish to match
adjacent finishes:
1. For continuous surfaces, refinish to nearest intersection.
2. For an assembly, refinish entire unit.
END OF SECTION
FEBRUARY 1999 01070-4 CUTTING AND PATCHING
LE9813 CHASE KITCHEN RENOVATION
8. Written permission of any separate contractor whose work will be
affected.
C. Should conditions of work or the schedule indicate a change of products
from original installation, submit request for substitution as specified in
Section 01600, MATERIALS AND EQUIPMENT.
D. Submit written notice to Architect designating date and time the work will
be uncovered.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 MATERIALS
A. Except as otherwise indicated or authorized by the Architect, provide
materials for cutting and patching shall be selected to produce equal-or-
better work than the work being cut and patched. In terms of performance
characteristics and visual effect. Use materials identical to original
materials where feasible and satisfactory.
B. Comply with specifications and standards for each specific product
involved.
PART 3 EXECUTION
40� 3.01 INSPECTION
A. Inspect existing conditions of Project, including elements subject to
damage -or to movement during cutting and patching.
B. After uncovering work, inspect conditions affecting installation of
Products, or performance of work.
C Report unsatisfactory or questionable conditions to Architect in writing; do
not proceed with work until Architect has provided further instructions.
3.02 PREPARATION
A. Provide adequate temporary support as necessary to assure structural value
or integrity of affected portion of work.
B. Provide devices and methods to protect other portions of Project from
damage.
C Provide protection from elements for that portion of the Project which may
be exposed by cutting and patching work, and maintain excavations free
from water.
3.03 PERFORMANCE
A. Execute cutting and demolition by methods which prevent damage to other
work, and provide proper surfaces to receive installation of repairs.
FEBRUARY 1999 01070-3 CUTTING AND PATCHING
LE9813 CHASE KITCHEN RENOVATION
1.04 SUBMITTALS
A. Submit a written request to Architect well in advance of executing any
cutting, or alteration which affects:
1. Work of the Owner or any separate contractor.
2. Structural value or integrity of any element of the Project.
3. Integrity or effectiveness of weather-exposed or moisture-resistant
elements or systems.
4. Efficiency, operational life, maintenance, or safety of operational
elements.
5. Visual qualities of sight-exposed elements.
B. Request shall include:
1. Identification of the Project.
2. Description of affected work.
3. The necessity for cutting, alteration, or excavation.
4. Effect on work of Owner or any separate contractor, or on structural
or weatherproof integrity of project.
5. Description of proposed work:
a. Description of why cutting and patching cannot (reasonably) be
avoided.
b. Scope of cutting, patching, alteration, or excavation.
C. Methods.
d. How structural elements (if any) will be reinforced.
e. Trades who will execute the work.
f. Products proposed to be used.
g. Extent of refinishing to be done.
h . Approximate dates of the work, and anticipated results in terms of
variations from the work as originally completed (structural,
operational, visual, and other qualities of significance).
6. Alternatives to cutting and patching.
7. Cost proposal, when applicable.
FEBRUARY 1999 01070-2 CUTTING AND PATCHING
LE9813 CHASE KITCHEN RENOVATION
SECTION 01070
CUTTING AND PATCHING
PART 1 - GENERAL,
1.01 REQUIREMENTS INCLUDED
A. Contractor shall be responsible for all cutting, fitting, and patching,
including attendant excavation and backfill, required to complete the Work
or to:
1. ;Make its several parts fit together properly.
2. Uncover portions of the Work to provide for installations of ill-timed
work.
3. Remove and replace defective work.
4. Remove and replace work not conforming to requirements of Contract
Documents.
5. Remove samples of installed work as specified for testing.
6. Provide routine penetrations of non-structural surfaces for
installation of piping and electrical conduit.
1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS
A. Substitutions and product options: Section 01600, MATERIAL AND
EQUIPMENT.
1.03 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Permission to patch any items of work does not imply a waiver of the
Architect's right to require complete removal and replacement in said
areas and of said items if, in Architect's opinion, said patching does not
satisfactorily restore the quality and appearance of the work.
B. Requirements for Structural Work: Do not reduce load-carrying capacity or
load/defection ratio.
C. Operational and Safety Limitations: Do not cut and patch operational
elements and safety-related components in a manner resulting in a
reduction of capacities to perform in the manner intended or resulting in
decreased operational life, increased maintenance, or decreased safety.
D. Visual Requirements: Do not cut and patch exposed work in exterior and
occupied spaces so that visual qualities are reduced or cut and patch work is
visible, as judged by the Architect. Remove and replace unsatisfactory
how work as directed by Architect.
FEBRUARY 1999 01070-1 CUTTING AND PATCHING
LE9813 CHASE KITCHEN RENOVATION
1.05 PROJECT SURVEY REQUIREMENTS
A. Establish a minimum of two permanent bench marks on-site, referenced to
data established by survey control points.
1. Record locations, with horizontal and vertical data, on Project Record
Documents.
B. Establish lines and levels, locate and lay out, by instrumentation and
similar appropriate means:
1. Site improvements.
a. Stakes for grading, fill, and top soil placement.
b. Utility slopes and invert elevations.
2. Batter boards for structures.
3. Building foundation, column locations, and floor levels.
4. Controlling lines and levels required for mechanical and electrical
trades.
C From time to time, verify layouts by same methods.
1.06 RECORDS
A. Maintain a complete, accurate log of all control and survey work as it
progresses.
1.07 SUBMITTALS
A. Submit name and address of surveyor and professional engineer to
Architect.
B. On request of Architect, submit documentation to verify accuracy of field
engineering work.
C Submit certificate signed by registered engineer or surveyor certifying
that elevation and locations of improvements are in conformance, or non-
conformance, with Contract Documents.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
Not applicable to this section.
PART 3 EXECUTION
Not applicable to this section.
END OF SECTION
FEBRUARY 1999 01030-2 FIELD ENGINEERING
LE9813 CHASE KITCHEN RENOVATION
look
SECTION 01030
FIELD ENGINEERING
PART1 GENERAL
1.01 REQUIREMENTS INCLUDED
A. Provide and pay for field engineering services required for Project:
1. Survey work required in execution of project.
2. Civil, structural, and other professional engineering services
specified, or required to execute Contractor's construction methods.
B. Owner's Representative will identify existing control points and property
line corner stakes indicated on the Drawings, as required.
1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS
A. Conditions of the Contract: Document 00700, GENERAL CONDITIONS and
Document 00810, SUPPLEMENTARY CONDITIONS.
B. Record documents: Section 01720, PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTS.
1.03 QUALIFICATIONS OF SURVEYOR OR ENGINEER
A. Qualified engineer or registered land surveyor, acceptable to Architect and
Owner.
B. Registered professional engineer of the discipline required for the specific
service on the Project, licensed in the location of the project.
1.04 SURVEY REFERENCE POINTS
A. Existing basic horizontal and vertical control points for the Project are
those designated on Drawings.
B. Locate and protect control points prior to starting site work, and preserve
all permanent reference points during construction.
1. Make no changes or relocations without prior written notice to
Architect.
2. Report to Architect when any reference point is lost or destroyed, or
requires relocation because of necessary changes in grades or
locations.
3. Require surveyor to replace Project control points which may be
destroyed.
a. Establish replacements based on original survey control.
FEBRUARY 1999 01030-1 FIELD ENGINEERING
LE9813 CHASE KITCHEN RENOVATION
SECTION 01025
ALTERNATES
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01 SUMMARY
A. List price for each alternate in Bid Form. Include cost of modifications to other
work to accommodate alternate. Include related costs such as overhead and
profit.
B. Owner will determine which alternates are selected for inclusion in the
Contract.
C. Alternates are described briefly in this section. The Contract Documents
define the requirements for alternates.
D. Coordinate alternates with related work to ensure that work affected by each
selected alternate is properly accomplished.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS - Not Applicable To This Section
, +► PART 3 -EXECUTION
3.01 SCHEDULE
A. List of ADD alternates:
1. Provide new lighting fixtures in Dining 106 and Special Dining Rooms
107.
2. Provide wood screen fencing at loading dock area.
3. The power pedestals providing electricity via the floor shall be replaced
by an overhead framework providing power via the soffit over the hood.
Food Service Contractor to provide overhead framework and potrack as an
alternate. General Contractor shall provide alternate electrical layout as
drawing in construction documents. (Equipment # 16, 17, 105 and 108).
END OF SECTION
P
FEBRUARY 1999 ALTERNATES 01025-1
LE9813 CHASE KITCHEN RENOVATION
The Contractor will notify the Owner if any hazardous substances are
encountered during the execution of the work.
1.05 SCHEDULE AND COMPLETION
A. Time is of the essence in this project.
B. Construction Schedule: See Section 01300, Submittals, for construction
schedule requirements. A final schedule must be submitted within 5 days
of signing contract. No payments will be made unless a construction
schedule has been submitted and approved. Schedule shall be updated
weekly prior to job meetings. Failure to meet milestones will be subject to
provisions of 1.05.C. below.
C. Accelerated Schedule: If, in the opinion of the Owner, the Contractor does
not proceed with work in a timely manner so as to insure completion by
the required contract dates, the Owner may issue an order in writing that
the Contractor shall increase manpower, initiate overtime and/or other
such measures as the Owner may deem appropriate in order to bring work
back to the agreed upon schedule at no additional cost to the Owner.
D. Schedule of Values: See Provisions of Section 01300, Submittals, for
Schedule of Values. No payment will be made until a Schedule of Values in
the format stipulated by the Owner/Architect has been submitted by the
Contractor and approved by the Owner/Architect.
1.06 TAXES
A. The Owner is exempt from payment of Massachusetts Sales Tax.
B. The Contractor will be provided a Certificate of Exemption number at the
preconstruction conference.
1.07 PERMITS AND FEES
A. The Building Permit shall be obtained and the fee paid by the Contractor.
The successful bidder shall notify the Building Department that he is the
Contractor of record, assume all obligations required by the terms of the
permit, and file any required affidavits and certifications. Notifications,
approvals and fees relating to necessary approvals from the Elm Street
Historic Commission will be the responsibility of the Owner.
B. All other permits required shall be obtained by the Contractor or sub-
contractors, including but not limited to plumbing, electrical, and gas
fitting. All fees for permits, other than Building Permit as described
above, and inspection shall be paid by the contractor and respective sub-
contractors.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
Not applicable to this section.
PART 3 EXECUTION
Not applicable to this section.
END OF SECTION
FEBRUARY 1999 01015-2 SPECIAL CONDITIONS
LE9813 CHASE KITCHEN RENOVATION
ROW
SECTION 01015
SPECIAL CONDITIONS
PART1 GENERAL
1.01 PROTECTION OF FINISHES
A. Finishes in other areas of the project including stair wells, corridors, and
other adjacent areas are in good condition. The Contractor will be
responsible for all damage to existing finishes and furnishings scheduled
to remain which occurs during the course of this work. Existing finishes
include but are not limited to terrazzo, VCT flooring, paint, plaster and
drywall, suspended ceiling panels and grid, hardware, doors, stair treads,
windows, carpet and other finishes or materials, and equipment to
remain.
B. Prior to start of work in any area, Contractor and Owner will conduct a
thorough inspection of existing conditions. Any damage will be
documented and reviewed with the owner. Any subsequent damage will
be repaired by the Contractor at his expense. If the Contractor does not
comply, the owner may elect to correct damaged materials with its own
crews and the Contractor will be backcharged for all associated costs. The
Contractor will be responsible for all such damage whether caused by his
own work or the work of the various subcontractors.
C. Temporary Protection of existing finishes is covered in Temporary
Facilities, Section 01500 and should be considered as minimum protection
standards only.
1.02 MATERIALS HANDLING
A. Contractor will stock all bulk materials (sheetrock, panels, etc.) by way of
hoisting through room windows The stair wells will not be used for
moving these materials. Use of the elevator for material carrying and
handling may be permitted.
1.03 RESTORATION OF SITE AND BUILDINGS
A. Contractor will store and bear all costs for repairs to plantings, including
grass, trees and shrubs, paving, roads and walkways, curbs, building
exteriors or interiors, etc. caused by his work, whether damaged
physically or by spills of oil, paint, refuse or other materials.
1.04 INTENT
A. Work of this project includes selective demolition, new construction, and
alteration and patching of existing construction. All work is expected to
meet standards of quality of new work. The owner expects standards of
workmanship for finish work to match new construction in appearance
and performance. Work not meeting accepted levels of quality for the
trade involved will be rejected. In this specification, where particular
concern for final appearance is warranted, specific procedures or
samples are called for. Samples will be approved by the Architect and
owner and will serve as a basis for judging subsequent completed work.
FEBRUARY 1999 01015-1 SPECIAL CONDITIONS
LE9813 CHASE KITCHEN RENOVATION
1.09 OWNER PURCHASED-CONTRACTOR INSTALLED ITEMS
A. The Contractor will install the following items supplied by the Owner:
1. Food service equipment will be delivered and set in place. The
Contractor will provide all utility connections.
2. The Contractor shall pull all data and communication wiring and
leave each wire labeled. Owner shall make all final connections.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
Not applicable to this section.
PART 3 EXECUTION
Not applicable to this section.
END OF SECTION
FEBRUARY 1999 01010-4 SUMMARY OF WORK
LE9813 CHASE KITCHEN RENOVATION
anything not expressly set forth but which is reasonably implied or
necessary for the proper performance of the project shall be included.
B. Writing style: Specifications are written in the imperative mode. Except
where specifically intended otherwise, the subject of all imperative
statements is the Contractor. For example, "Provide tile" means
"Contractor shall provide tile."
C. Existing Conditions: Notify Owner of existing conditions differing
significantly from those indicated on the drawings. Do not remove or
alter structural components without prior written approval.
D. Definitions for terms used in the specifications:
1. Provide: Furnish and install, complete with all necessary
accessories, ready for intended use. Pay for all related costs.
2. Approved: Acceptance of item submitted for approval. Not a
limitation or release for compliance with the Contract Documents or
regulatory requirements. Refer to limitations of "Approved" in
General and Supplementary Conditions.
3. Match Existing: Match existing as acceptable to the Owner and
Architect.
1.06 EXAMINATION OF SITE
A. Prior to bidding the Contractor shall thoroughly examine the building
site and the Contract Documents to ensure his knowledge of conditions
and requirements affecting the work. No claim for extra compensation or
extension of time will be allowed for Contractor's failure to comply with
this requirement nor will any condition at the site, whether or not in
agreement with conditions shown or called for on the Bid and Contract
Documents, be allowed as a basis for such claims, except as may be
otherwise specifically provided for.
1.07 DISCOVERY
A. If during the work, articles of unusual value, or of historical or
archaeological significance are encountered the ownership of such
articles is retained by the Owner, and information regarding their
discovery shall be immediately furnished to the Architect. Resolution
shall be handled as a change-in-the-work.
1.08 OWNER PURCHASED-OWNER INSTALLED ITEMS
A. The following items will be purchased and installed by the Owner. Provide
access to the site as required. Provide coordination with the contractor(s)
providing and installing this work. Prepare substrates to receive this
work under this contract. The Contractor shall protect all Owner installed
items until project completion.
1. Fire Extinquishers
FEBRUARY 1999 01010-3 SUMMARY OF WORK
LE9813 CHASE KITCHEN RENOVATION
F. A reasonable sum (cost of equivalent replacement) will be deducted from ry
the Contract Sum for any permanent damage to existing trees or
plantings which are outside the limit-of-work lines but on the Owner's
property or which are within the limit-of-work lines and are designated
to be protected. Contractor shall be fully responsible for damage to trees
and plants off the Owner's property.
G. The Contractor shall maintain as low a level of construction noise as
practicable in order not to create a disturbance in the neighborhood.
H. No smoking will be allowed inside the building at the worksite.
1.04 OWNER'S OCCUPANCY
A. Prior to the date of Substantial Completion, the Contractor agrees to the
use and occupancy of any of the buildings or any portions thereof by the
Owner provided the Owner secures written consent of the Contractor,
such consent not to unreasonably withheld.
B. If the Project has not been substantially completed by the specified date,
the Owner may from time to time occupy the buildings or any portion of
any building as the Work thereon is completed to such extent that they
are usable for the purpose for which they are intended.
C. The Owner will give notice to the Contractor prior to any such occupancy'"'
subject to the following:
1. In case of partial occupancy prior to the substantial completion date,
the Owner shall secure endorsement from the insurance carrier and
consent of the Surety permitting occupancy during the remaining
period of construction.
2. In case of partial occupancy after the substantial completion date,
the Contractor shall extend all necessary insurance coverage until
final acceptance of the Project. Owner's use and occupancy prior to
final acceptance shall not relieve the Contractor of his
responsibility to maintain the insurance coverage required by the
Contract Documents.
D. Occupancy of any building or any portion thereof by the Owner shall not
constitute an acceptance of the Work or portion thereof nor relieve
Contractor of responsibility to perform any of the required work not
completed at the time of occupancy.
E. Contractor shall not be required to furnish heat, light, or water used by
the Owner in such occupancy, nor pay maintenance costs, not shall be
responsible for wear and tear or damage in the occupied buildings, or
portion thereof resulting directly from such occupancy.
1.05 CONTRACT DOCUMENT'S
IA. Intent: Drawings and specifications are intended to provide the basis for
proper completion of the work suitable for the intended use of the Owner;
FEBRUARY 1999 01010-2 SUMMARY OF WORK
LE9813 CHASE KITCHEN RENOVATION
SECTION 01010
SUMMARY OF WORK
PART1 GENERAL
1.01 WORK COVERED BY CONTRACT DOCUMENTS
A. Supplementary to Paragraph 1.13 of the GENERAL CONDITIONS, the work
of this Contract shall consist of the complete demolition and construction
as required for the kitchen and related spaces for the Chase Kitchen
Renovation on the Smith College campus.
1.02 WORK SEQUENCE
A. The work shall commence on a timely basis and thereafter be carried out
in a diligent and forthright manner, with a proper supply of labor,
materials, plant, and equipment to assure the satisfactory completion of ,
the work.
B. For the work to be completed under this Contract the Contractor is
notified that time is of the essence. The Contractor is expected to meet the
completion dates set by the Owner for the various parts of the Project.
1.03 CONTRACTOR'S USE OF SITE AND SURROUNDING AREAS
A. Prior to beginning work of the Contract, the Contractor shall meet with
the Owner and the Architect to determine procedures regarding access to
and use of existing buildings and site, exterior staging and storage areas,
tree protection, special site conditions, and any other restrictions
regarding the use of the site.
B. Where work on public roads or walks, or other work on municipal
property or easement is done, all such work shall conform to the rules,
regulations, and specifications of the public agencies having jurisdiction.
All permits and fees for such off-site work shall be obtained and paid for
by the Contractor. The Contractor will be reimbursed by the Owner for all
such fees provided that proper receipts are presented.
C. The Contractor shall keep all public and private access roads and walks
clear of debris caused by this work during the entire term of the Contract.
He shall repair all public and private streets, drives, curbs, walks, and
other improvements where disturbed by work of, or related to, building
operations, leaving them in as good condition after completion of the
work as before operations started, in accordance with rules, regulations,
and specifications of the public agencies having jurisdiction.
D. Parking of workmen's personal vehicles on the site shall be only as
specifically permitted by the Owner and Architect. (See General Project
Procedures.)
00W E. Access roads and fire-lanes on and about the site shall be kept open and
free at all times, except moving traffic, for passage of emergency
vehicles.
FEBRUARY 1999 01010-1 SUMMARY OF WORK
LE9813 CHASE KITCHEN RENOVATION
DRAWING INDEX
February 1999
AO-1 Demolition First Floor Plan
Al-1 First Floor Plan
Al-2 Mezzanine and Roof Plans
A2-0 Demolition Elevation
A2-1 Exterior Elevations
A2-2 Interior Elevations
A7-1 Reflected Ceiling Plan
A9-1 Schedules and Details
A9-2 Details
A9-3 Window Details - For Info Only
S-1 Structural
FS-1 Food Service Equipment - For Info Only
FS-2 Food Service Schedule- For Info Only
FS-3 Food Service Details - For Info Only
FS-4 Food Service Details - For Info Only
H-1 HVAC Demolition Plan
H-2 HVAC Floor Plan
H-3 HVAC Plans
H-4 HVAC Schedules and Details
E-1 Electrical Demolition Plan
E-2 Electrical Plan
E-3 Electrical Plans
E-4 Electrical Schedule and Details
P-1 Plumbing Demolition Plan
P-2 Sanitary and Vent Piping Plan
P-3 Water and Gas Piping Plan
P-4 Plumbing Plans
P-5 Plumbing Schedules and Details
FP-1 Fire Protection Demolition Plan
FP-2 Fire Protection Floor Plan
FP-3 Fire Protection Plans
FP-4 Fire Protection Details
FEBRUARY 1999 1 INDEX OF DRAWINGS
LE9813 CHASE KITCHEN RENOVATION
b. Property Damage: $1,000,000 each Occurrence.
4. Personal Injury, with Employment Exclusion deleted: None.
If the General Liability policy includes a General Aggregate, such
General Aggregate shall be not less than $10,000,000. Policy shall
be endorsed to have General Aggregate apply to this policy only.
5. Business Auto Liability ( including owned, non-owned and hired
vehicles):
a. Bodily Injury: $1,000,000 Each Person.
$1,000,000 Each Occurrence.
- b. Property Damage: $1,000,000 Each Occurrence.
6. Umbrella Excess Liability: $1,00,000 over primary.
d. Add, 11.1.4.
(1) "Submit three (3) copies of AIA Document G705, Certificate of
Insurance, properly executed, including the title and signature of
the authorized representative and the following statement:
A copy of this certificate is on file in the office of the insurance
company which underwrites the ploicies."
(2) Certificates shall be in the name of the Trustees of Smith College,
Northampton, MA.
(3) Submit three (3) copies of any endorsements that are
subsequently issued amendeding coverage or limits.
e. 11.3.7, add the following sentence:
"In waiving rights of recovery under terms of this sub-paragraph,
the term "Owner" shall be deemed to include the Smith College, and
its appointed officials, agents and representatives, Trustees of the
College, and the Architect and his employees as the Owner's
representative, as provided in the Contract Documents."
END OF SECTION
FEBRUARY 1999 01000-3 SUPPLEMENTARY CONDITIONS
LE9813 CHASE KITCHEN RENOVATION
Article 9- Payment and completion
a. Add new Sub-Paragraph:
9.3.1.3. Beginning with the first progress payment the Owner shall
retain ten percent (10%) of the amounts approved for payment, until
fifty percent (50%) of the billing of the total contract amount, after
which no additional retainage shall be withheld.
Article 11- Insurance
a. 11.1.1.8. Liability Insurance shall include major divisions of coverage and
be on a comprehensive basis including:
1. Premises Operations (including X, C, and U coverage as applicable.
2. Independent Contractors' Protective.
3. Products and Completed Operations.
4. Personal injury with Employment Exclusion deleted.
5. Contractual, including specified provision for Contractor's
obligation under paragraph 3.18.
6. Owned, non-owned and hired motor vehicles.
7. Broad Form Property Damage including Completed Operations.
b. 11.1.1.9. If the General Liability coverages are provided by a Comercial
General Liability Policy on a claims-made basis, the policy date of
Retroactive Date shall predate the Contract; the termination date of the
policy or applicable extended reporting period shall be no earlier than
the termination date of coverages required to be maintained after final
payment, certified in accordance with Subparagraph 9.10.2
C. Add the following Clause 11.1.2.1 to 11.1.2.
1. Workers' Compensation:
a. State: Statutory.
b. Employer's Liability: $1,000,000 per accident.
$1,000,000 Disease, Policy Limit.
$1,000,000 Disease, Each Employee.
2. Comprehensive or Commercial Liability (including Premises-
Operations; Indenpendent Contractors' Protective; Products and
Completed Operations; Broad Form Property Damage):
a. Bodily Injury: $1,000,000 Each Occurrence.
b. Property Damage: $50,000 Each Occurrence.
c. Products and Completed Operations to be maintained for
10 years after final payment.
d. Property Damage Liability insurance shall provide X, C,
and U coverage.
e. Broad Form Property Damage Coverage shall include
Completed Operations.
3. Contractual Liability:
a. Bodily Injury: $1,000,000 each Occurrence.
FEBRUARY 1999 01000-2 SUPPLEMENTARY CONDITIONS
LE9813 CHASE KITCHEN RENOVATION
SECTION 01000
SUPPLEMENTARY GENERAL CONDITIONS
PART 1 General
General Conditions
a. The General Conditions of the Contract shall be the American Institute of
Architects (AIA) Document A201. "General Conditions of the Contract for
Construction" fourteenth edition, August 1987, herein referred to as the
General Conditions.
Supplementary Conditions
a. The following items consist of changes and additions to the General
Conditions as is bound therein. Where any part of an article of the
General Conditions is modified or deleted, the remaining unaltered
portion shall remain in effect.
PART 2: Amendments to the General Conditions
Article 1- General Provisions
a. 1.2.6. add, "in the event of discrepancies within the Contract Documents:
1. Addenda shall modify Contract Documents.
2. Stated dimensions shall take precedence over implied dimensions
(DO NOT SCALE DRAWINGS).
3. Large scale drawings take precedence over smaller scale
drawings.
4. The Architect shall clarify inconsistencies in the Contract
Documents. In event of inconsistencies in the specifications the
best quality (usually most expensive) is intended.
5. Notice of any discrepancy shall be forwarded in writing to the
Architect within twenty-four hours, who shall issue a revision to
the Contract Documents.
6. The Contractor is responsible for measuring the work.
Dimensions on the drawings are offered as a guide only.
Article 2- Owner
a. 2.1.1. Change to read "The Owner (The Trustees of Smith College) is the
person", etc.
Article 3- Contractor
a. 3.6 Delete (TAXES)
b. 3.8 Delete (ALLOWANCES)
FEBRUARY 1999 01000-1 SUPPLEMENTARY CONDITIONS
14.4.2 Upon receipt of written notice from the Owner of such termination for the Owner's convenience, the Contractor shall:
.1 cease operations as directed by the Owner in the notice;
.2 take actions necessary,or that the Owner may direct, for the protection and preservation of the Work;and
.3 except for Work directed to be performed prior to the effective date of termination stated in the notice,terminate all
existing subcontracts and purchase orders and enter into no further subcontracts and purchase orders.
14.4.3 In case of such termination for the Owner's convenience, the Contractor shall be entitled to receive payment for Work
executed,and costs incurred by reason of such termination,along with reasonable overhead and profit on the Work not executed.
AIA DOCUMENT A201-GENERAL CONDITIONS OF THE CONTRACT FOR CONSTRUCT[ON - 1997 EDITION - AIA - COPYRIGHT 1997 - TH,
AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF ARCHITECTS, 1735 NEW YORK AVENUE N.W.,WASHINGTON, D.C. 20006-5292. WARNING: Unlicensed photocopying
violates U.S. copyright laws and will subject the violator to legal prosecution.This document was electronically produced with permission of the AIA and can be
reproduced without violation until the date of expiration as noted below.
Electronic Format A201-1997
User Document:97A201-.CON— 11/12/1998.AIA License Number 107575,which expires on 1/31/1999--Page#40
the progress of the Work, the Contractor may, upon seven additional days' written notice to the Owner and the Architect.
terminate the Contract and recover from the Owner as provided in Subparagraph 14.13.
14.2 TERMINATION BY THE OWNER FOR CAUSE
14.2.1 The Owner may terminate the Contract if the Contractor:
.1 persistently or repeatedly refuses or fails to supply enough properly skilled workers or proper materials;
.2 fails to make payment to Subcontractors for materials or labor in accordance with the respective agreements
between the Contractor and the Subcontractors;
.3 persistently disregards laws,ordinances,or rules,regulations or orders of a public authority having jurisdiction;or
.4 otherwise is guilty of substantial breach of a provision of the Contract Documents.
14.2.2 When any of the above reasons exist,the Owner,upon certification by the Architect that sufficient cause exists to justify
such action, may without prejudice to any other rights or remedies of the Owner and after giving the Contractor and the
Contractor's surety, if any, seven days'written notice,terminate employment of the Contractor and may,subject to any prior rights
of the surety:
.1 take possession of the site and of all materials,equipment,tools,and construction equipment and machinery thereon
owned by the Contractor,
.2 accept assignment of subcontracts pursuant to Paragraph 5.4;and
.3 finish the Work by whatever reasonable method the Owner may deem expedient. Upon request of the Contractor,
the Owner shall furnish to the Contractor a detailed accounting of the costs incurred by the Owner in finishing the
Work.
14.2.3 When the Owner terminates the Contract for one of the reasons stated in Subparagraph 14.2.1, the Contractor shall not
be entitled to receive finther payment until the Work is finished
14.2.4 If the unpaid balance of the Contract Sum exceeds costs of finishing the Work, including compensation for the
Architect's services and expenses made necessary thereby, and other damages incurred by the Owner and not expressly waived,
such excess shall be paid to the Contractor. If such costs and damages exceed the unpaid balance, the Contractor shall pay the
difference to the Owner. The amount to be paid to the Contractor or Owner, as the case may be, shall be certified by the
Architect,upon application,and this obligation for payment shall survive termination of the Contract.
14.3 SUSPENSION BY THE OWNER FOR CONVENIENCE
14.3.1 The Owner may, without cause, order the Contractor in writing to suspend,delay or interrupt the Work in whole or in
part for such period of time as the Owner may determine.
14.3.2 The Contract Sum and Contract Time shall be adjusted for increases in the cost and time caused by suspension,delay or
interruption as described in Subparagraph 14.3.1. Adjustment of the Contract Sum shall include profit. No adjustment shall be
made to the extent:
.1 that performance is, was or would have been so suspended, delayed or interrupted by another cause for which the
Contractor is responsible;or
.2 that an equitable adjustment is made or denied under another provision of the Contract.
14.4 TERMINATION BY THE OWNER FOR CONVENIENCE
14.4.1 The Owner may,at any time,terminate the Contract for the Owner's convenience and without cause.
AIA DOCUMENT A201-GENERAL CONDITIONS OF THE CONTRACT FOR CONSTRUCTION - 1997 EDMON - AIA - COPYRIGHT 1997 - THE
AMERICAN INSTMrrE OF ARCHrrECTS, 1735 NEW YORK AVENUE N.W., WASHINGTON, D.C. 20006-5292. WARNING: Unlicensed photocopying
violates U.S. copyright laws and will subject the violator to legal prosecution.This document was electronically produced with permission of the AIA and can be
reproduced without violation until the date of Mirrstion as toted below.
Electronic Format A201-1997
User Document: 97A201.CON-- 11/1211998.AIA License Number 107575,which expires on 1/31/1999—Page#39
the parties may agree upon in writing or, in the absence thereof, at the legal rate prevailing
the Project is located. from time to time at the place where
13.7 COMMENCEMENT OF STATUTORY LIMITATION PERIOD
13.7.1 As between the Owner and Contractor:
.1 Before Substantial Completion. As to acts or failures to act occurring prior to the relevant date of Substantia;
Completion, any applicable statute of limitations shall commence to run and any alleged cause of action shall be
deemed to have accrued in any and all events not later than such date of Substantial Completion;
.2 Between Substantial Completion and Final Certificate for Payment. As to acts or failures to act occurring
subsequent to the relevant date of Substantial Completion and prior to issuance of the final Certificate for Payment,
any applicable statute of limitations shall commence to run and any alleged cause of action shall be deemed to have
accrued in any and all events not later than the date of issuance of the final Certificate for Payment; and
.3 After Final Certificate for Payment. As to acts or failures to act occurring after the relevant date of issuance of
the final Certificate for Payment, any applicable statute of limitations shall commence to run and any alleged cause
of action shall be deemed to have accrued in any and all events not later than the date of any act or failure to act by
the Contractor pursuant to any Warranty provided under Paragraph 3.5, the date of any correction of the Work or
failure to correct the Work by the Contractor under Paragraph 12.2, or the date of actual commission of any other
act or failure to perform any duty or obligation by the Contractor or Owner,whichever occurs last.
ARTICLE 14 TERMINATION OR SUSPENSION OF THE CONTRACT
14.1 TERMINATION BY THE CONTRACTOR
14.1.1 The Contractor may terminate the Contract if the Work is stopped for a period of 30 consecutive days through no act or
fault of the Contractor or a Subcontractor, Sub-subcontractor or their agents or employees or any other persons or entities
performing portions.of the Work under direct or indirect contract with the Contractor,for any of the following reasons:
.1 issuance of an order of a court or other public authority having jurisdiction which'requires all Work to be stopped; .
.2 an act of government,such as a declaration of national emergency which requires all Work to be stopped;
.3 because the Architect has not issued a Certificate for Payment and has not notified the Contractor of the reason for
withholding certification as provided in Subparagraph 9.4.1, or because the Owner has not made payment on a
Certificate for Payment within the time stated in the Contract Documents;or
.4 the Owner has failed to furnish to the Contractor promptly, upon the Contractor's request, reasonable evidence as
required by Subparagraph 2.2.1.
14.1.2 The Contractor may terminate the Contract if, through no act or fault of the Contractor or a Subcontractor,
Sub-subcontractor or their agents or employees or any other persons or entities performing portions of the Work under direct or
indirect contract with the Contractor,repeated suspensions,delays or interruptions of the entire Work by the Owner as described
in Paragraph 14.3 constitute in the aggregate more than 100 percent of the total number of days scheduled for completion,or 120
days in any 365-day period,whichever is less.
14.1.3 If one of the reasons described in Subparagraph 14.1.1 or 14.1.2 exists, the Contractor may, upon seven days'written
notice to the Owner and Architect, terminate the Contract and recover from the Owner payment for Work executed and for
proven loss with respect to materials, equipment, tools, and construction equipment and machinery, including reasonable
overhead,profit and damages.
14.1.4 If the Work is stopped for a period of 60 consecutive days through no act or fault of the Contractor or a Subcontractor or
their agents or employees or any other persons performing portions of the Work under contract with the Contractor because the
Owner has persistently failed to fulfill the Owner's obligations under the Contract Documents with respect to matters important to
AIA DOCUMENT A201-GENERAL CONDITIONS OF THE CONTRACT FOR CONSTRUCTION - 1997 EDITION - AIA - COPYRIGHT 1997 - Th
AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF ARCHITECTS, 1735 NEW YORK AVENUE N.W., WASHINGTON, D.C. 20006.5292. WARNING: Unlicensed photocopying
violates U.S. copyright laws and will subject the violator to legal prosecution This document was electronically produced with permission of the Abk and can be
reproduced without violation until the date of expiration as noted below.
Electronic Format A201-1997
User Document:97A201.CON-- 11/12/1998.AIA License Number 107575,which expires on 1/31/1999--Page#38
the other pan hereto and to partners, successors, assigns and legal representatives of such other parry in respect to covenants,
agreements and obligations contained in the Contract Documents. Except as provided in Subparagraph 13.2.2, neither party to the
40W Contract shall assign the Contract as a whole without written consent of the other, if either party attempts to make such an
assignment without such consent, that party shall nevertheless remain legally responsible for all obligations under the Contract.
13.2.2 The Owner may, without consent of the Contractor, assign the Contract to an institutional lender providing construction
financing for the Project. In such event,the lender shall assume the Owner's rights and obligations under the Contract Documents.
The Contractor shall execute all consents reasonably required to facilitate such assignment.
13.3 WRITTEN NOTICE
13.3.1 Written noticd shall be deemed to have been duly served if delivered in person to the individual or a member of the firm
or entity or to an officer of the corporation for which it was intended, or if delivered at or sent by registered or certified mail to
the last business address known to the party giving notice.
13.4 RIGHTS AND REMEDIES
13.4.1 Duties and obligations imposed by the Contract Documents and rights and remedies available thereunder shall be in
addition to and not a limitation of duties,obligations,rights and remedies otherwise imposed or available by law.
13.4.2 No action or failure to act by the Owner, Architect or Contractor shall constitute a waiver of a right or duty afforded
them under the Contract, nor shall such action or failure to act constitute approval of or acquiescence in a breach thereunder,
except as may be specifically agreed in writing.
13.5 TESTS AND INSPECTIONS
13.5.1 Tests, inspections and approvals of portions of the Work required by the Contract Documents or by laws, ordinances,
rules, regulations or orders of public authorities having jurisdiction shall be made at an appropriate time. Unless otherwise
provided,the Contractor shall make arrangements for such tests, inspections and approvals with an independent testing laboratory
or entity acceptable to the Owner,or with the appropriate public authority,and shall bear all related costs of tests, inspections and
approvals. The Contractor shall give the Architect timely notice of when and where tests and inspections are to be made so that
the Architect may be present for such procedures. The Owner shall bear costs of tests, inspections or approvals which do not
become requirements until after bids are received or negotiations concluded.
13.5.2 If the Architect, Owner or public authorities having jurisdiction determine that portions of the Work require additional
testing, inspection or approval not included under Subparagraph 13.5.1, the Architect will, upon written authorization from the
Owner, instruct the Contractor to make arrangements for such additional testing, inspection or approval by an entity acceptable to
the Owner, and the Contractor shall give timely notice to the Architect of when and where tests and inspections are to be made so
that the Architect may be present for such procedures. Such costs, except as provided in Subparagraph 13.5.3, shall be at the
Owner's expense.
13.5.3 If such procedures for testing, inspection or approval under Subparagraphs 13.5.1 and 13.5.2 reveal failure of the
portions of the Work to comply with requirements established by the Contract Documents, all costs made necessary by such
failure including those of repeated procedures and compensation for the Architects services and expenses shall be at the
Contractor's expense.
13.5.4 Required certificates of testing, inspection or approval shall, unless otherwise required by the Contract Documents, be
secured by the Contractor and promptly delivered to the Architect.
13.5.5 If the Architect is to observe tests, inspections or approvals required by the Contract Documents,the Architect will do so
promptly and,where practicable,at the normal place of testing.
13.5.6 Tests or inspections conducted pursuant to the Contract Documents shall be made promptly to avoid unreasonable delay
in the Work.
13.6 INTEREST
13.6.1 Payments due and unpaid under the Contract Documents shall bear interest from the date payment is due at such rate as
AIA DOCUMENT A201-GENERAL CONDITIONS OF THE CONTRACT FOR CONSTRUCTION - 1997 EDITION - AIA - COPYRIGHT 1997 - THE
AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF ARCHITECTS, 1735 NEW YORK AVENUE N.W., WASHINGTON, D.C. 20006-5292. WARNING: Unlicensed photocopying
violates U.S. copyright laws and will subject the violator to legal prosecution.This document was electronically produced with permission of the AIA and can be
reproduced without violation until the date of expiration as noted below.
Electronic Format A201-1997
User Document:97A201.CON-- 11/12/1998.AIA License Number 107575,which expires on 1/31/1999—Page#37
the condition was caused b,. the Owner or a separate contractor in which event the Owner shall be responsible for payment of
such costs.
12.2 CORRECTION OF WORK
12.2.1 BEFORE OR AFTER SUBSTANTIAL COMPLETION
12.2.1.1 The Contractor shall promptly correct Work rejected by the Architect or failing to conform to the requirements of the
Contract Documents, whether discovered before or after Substantial Completion and whether or not fabricated, installed or
completed. Costs of correcting such rejected Work, including additional testing and inspections and compensation for the
Architect's services and expenses made necessary thereby,shall be at the Contractor's expense.
12.2.2 AFTER SUBSTANTIAL COMPLETION
12.2.2.1 In addition to the Contractor's obligations under Paragraph 3.5, if, within one year after the date of Substantial
Completion of the Work or designated portion thereof or after the date for commencement of warranties established under
Subparagraph 9.9.1, or by terms of an applicable special warranty required by the Contract Documents, any of the Work is found
to be not in accordance with the requirements of the Contract Documents,the Contractor shall correct it promptly after receipt of
written notice from the Owner to do so unless the Owner has previously given the Contractor a written acceptance of such
condition. The Owner shall give such notice promptly after discovery of the condition. During the one-year period for correction
of Work, if the Owner fails to notify the Contractor and give the Contractor an opportunity to make the correction, the Owner
waives the rights to require correction by the Contractor and to make a claim for breach of warranty. If the Contractor fails to
correct nonconforming Work within a reasonable time during that period after receipt of notice from the Owner or Architect, the
Owner may correct it in accordance with Paragraph 2.4.
12.2.2.2 The one-year period for correction of Work shall be extended with respect to portions of Work first performed after
Substantial Completion by the period of time between Substantial Completion and the actual performance of the Work.
12.2.2.3 The one-year period for correction of Work shall not be extended by corrective Work performed by the Contractor
pursuant to this Paragraph 12.2.
12.2.3 The Contractor shall remove from the site portions of the Work which are not in accordance with the requirements o
Contract Documents and are neither corrected by the Contractor nor accepted by the Owner.
12.2.4 The Contractor shall bear the cost of correcting destroyed or damaged construction, whether completed or partially
completed, of the Owner or separate contractors caused by the Contractor's correction or removal of Work which is not in
accordance with the requirements of the Contract Documents.
12.2.5 Nothing contained in this Paragraph 12.2 shall be construed to establish a period of limitation with respect to other
obligations which the Contractor might have under the Contract Documents. Establishment of the one-year period for correction
of Work as described in Subparagraph 12.2.2 relates only to the specific obligation of the Contractor to correct the Work,and has
no relationship to the time within which the obligation to comply with the Contract Documents may be sought to be enforced,nor
to the time within which proceedings may be commenced to establish the Contractors liability with respect to the Contractor's
obligations other than specifically to correct the Work.
12.3 ACCEPTANCE OF NONCONFORMING WORK
12.3.1 If the Owner prefers to accept Work which is not in accordance with the requirements of the Contract Documents, the
Owner may do so instead of requiring its removal and correction, in which case the Contract Sum will be reduced as appropriate
and equitable. Such adjustment shall be effected whether or not final payment has been made.
ARTICLE 13 MISCELLANEOUS PROVISIONS
13.1 GOVERNING LAW
13.1.1 The Contract shall be governed by the law of the place where the Project is located.
13.2 SUCCESSORS AND ASSIGNS
13.2.1 The Owner and Contractor respectively bind themselves, their partners, successors, assigns and legal representatives,,
ALA DOCUMENT A201-GENERAL CONDITIONS OF THE CONTRACT FOR CONSTRUCTION - 1997 EDITION - ALA - COPYRIGHT 1997 - TH.
AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF ARCHITECTS, 1735 NEW YORK AVENUE N.W., WASHINGTON, D.C. 20006-5292. WARNING: Unlicensed photocopying
violates U.S. copyright laws and will subject the violator to legal prosecution. This docurnent was electronically produced with permission of the ALA and can be
reproduced without violation until the date of expiration as noted below.
Electronic Format A201-1997
User Document:97A201*.CON-- 11/12/1998.AIA License Number 107575,which expires on 1/31/1999—Page#36
11.4.7 Waivers of Subrogation. The Owner and Contractor waive all rights against (1) each other and any of their
subcontractors, sub-subcontractors, agents and employees, each of the other, and (2) the Architect, Architect's consultants,
separate contractors described in Article 6, if any, and any of their subcontractors, sub-subcontractors,agents and employees, for
damages caused by fire or other causes of loss to the extent covered by property insurance obtained pursuant to this Paragraph
11.4 or other property insurance applicable to the Work,except such rights as they have to proceeds of such insurance held by the
Owner as fiduciary. The Owner or Contractor, as appropriate, shall require of the Architect, Architect's consultants, separate
contractors described in Article 6, if any, and the subcontractors, sub-subcontractors, agents and employees of any of them, by
appropriate agreements, written where legally required for validity, similar waivers each in favor of other parties enumerated
herein. The policies shall provide such waivers of subrogation by endorsement or otherwise. A waiver of subrogation shall be
effective as to a person or entity even though that person or entity would otherwise have a duty of indemnification, contractual or
otherwise, did not pay the insurance premium directly or indirectly, and whether or not the person or entity had an insurable
interest in the property damaged.
11.4.8 A loss insured under Owner's property insurance shall be adjusted by the Owner as fiduciary and made payable to the
Owner as fiduciary for the insureds,as their interests may appear,subject to requirements of any applicable mortgagee clause and
of Subparagraph 11.4.10. The Contractor shall pay Subcontractors their just shares of insurance proceeds received by the
Contractor, and by appropriate agreements, written where legally required for validity, shall require Subcontractors to make
payments to their Sub-subcontractors in similar manner.
11.4.9 If required in writing by a party in interest,the Owner as fiduciary shall,upon occurrence of an insured loss, give bond
for proper performance of the Owner's duties. The cost of required bonds shall be charged against proceeds received as fiduciary.
The Owner shall deposit in a separate account proceeds so received, which the Owner shall distribute in accordance with such
agreement as the parties in interest may reach, or in accordance with an arbitration award in which case the procedure shall be as
provided in Paragraph 4.6. If after such loss no other special agreement is made and unless the Owner terminates the Contract for
convenience,replacement of damaged property shall be performed by the Contractor after notification of a Change in the Work in
accordance with Article 7.
11.4.10 The Owner as fiduciary shall have power to adjust and settle a loss with insurers unless one of the parties in interest shall
object in writing within five days after occurrence of loss to the Owner's exercise of this power; if such objection is made, the
dispute shall be resolved as provided in Paragraphs 4.5 and 4.6. The Owner as fiduciary shall, in the case of arbitration, make
settlement with insurers in accordance with directions of the arbitrators. If distribution of insurance proceeds by arbitration is
required,the arbitrators will direct such distribution.
11.5 PERFORMANCE BOND AND PAYMENT BOND
11.5.1 The Owner shall have the right to require the Contractor to furnish bonds covering faithful performance of the Contract
and payment of obligations arising thereunder as stipulated in bidding requirements or specifically required in the Contract
Documents on the date of execution of the Contract.
11.5.2 Upon the request of any person or entity appearing to be a potential beneficiary of bonds covering payment of
obligations arising under the Contract, the Contractor shall promptly furnish a copy of the bonds or shall permit a copy to be
made.
ARTICLE 12 UNCOVERING AND CORRECTION OF WORK
12.1 UNCOVERING OF WORK
12.1.1 If a portion of the Work is covered contrary to the Architect's request or to requirements specifically expressed in the
Contract Documents,it must,if required in writing by the Architect,be uncovered for the Architect's examination and be replaced
at the Contractor's expense without change in the Contract Time.
12.1.2 If a portion of the Work has been covered which the Architect has not specifically requested to examine prior to its being
covered, the Architect may request to see such Work and it shall be uncovered by the Contractor- If such Work is in accordance
with the Contract Documents, costs of uncovering and replacement shall, by appropriate Change Order, be at the Owner's
expense. If such Work is not in accordance with the Contract Documents, correction shall be at the Contractor's expense unless
AIA DOCUMENT A201-GENERAL CONDITIONS OF THE CONTRACT FOR CONSTRUCTION - 1997 EDITION - AIA - COPYRIGHT 1997 - THE
AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF ARCHITECTS, 1735 NEW YORK AVENUE N.W., WASHINGTON, D.C. 20006-5292. WARNING: Unlicensed photocopying
violates U.S. copyright laws and will subject the violator to legal prosecution.This document was electronically produced with pennission of the AIA and can be
reproduced without violation until the date of expiration as noted below.
Electronic Format A201-1997
User Document: 97A201.CON— 1 1/12/1998.AIA License Number 107575,which expires on 1/31/1999—Page 435
otherwise agreed in writing by all persons and entities who are beneficiaries of such insurance, until final payment has been made
as provided in Paragraph 9.10 or until no person or entity other than the Owner has an insurable interest in the property requited
by this Paragraph 11.4 to be covered, whichever is later. This insurance shall include interests of the Owner, the Contrr
Subcontractors and Sub-subcontractors in the Project.
11.4.1.1 Property insurance shall be on an "all-risk" or equivalent policy form and shall include, without limitation, insurance
against the perils of fire (with extended coverage) and physical loss or damage including, without duplication of coverage, theft,
vandalism, malicious mischief, collapse, earthquake, flood, windstorm, falsework, testing and startup, temporary buildings and
debris removal including demolition occasioned by enforcement of any applicable legal requirements, and shall cover reasonable
compensation for Architect's and Contractor's services and expenses required as a result of such insured loss.
11.4.1.2 If the Owner does not intend to purchase such property insurance required by-the Contract and with all of the
coverages in the amount described above, the Owner shall so inform the Contractor in writing prior to commencement of the
Work. The Contractor may then effect insurance which will protect the interests of the Contractor, Subcontractors and
Sub-subcontractors in the Work, and by appropriate Change Order the cost.thereof shall be charged to the Owner. If the
Contractor is damaged by the failure or neglect of the Owner to purchase or maintain insurance as described above, without so
notifying the Contractor in writing,then the Owner shall bear all reasonable costs property attributable thereto.
11.4.1.3 If the property insurance requires deductibles,the Owner shall pay costs not covered because of such deductibles.
11.4.1.4 This property insurance shall cover portions of the Work stored off the site,and also portions of the Work in transit.
11.4.1.5 Partial occupancy or use in accordance with Paragraph 9.9 shall not commence until the insurance company or
companies providing property insurance have consented to such partial occupancy or use by endorsement or otherwise. The
Owner and the Contractor shall take reasonable steps to obtain consent of the insurance company or companies and shall,without
mutual written consent, take no action with respect to partial occupancy or use that would cause cancellation, lapse or reduction
of insurance.
11.4.2 Boiler and Machinery Insurance.The Owner shall purchase and maintain boiler and machinery insurance require'=1%'
the Contract Documents or by law, which shall specifically cover such insured objects during installation and until fr,ti
acceptance by the Owner; this insurance shall include interests of the Owner,Contractor, Subcontractors and Sub-subcontractors
in the Work, and the Owner and Contractor shall be named insureds.
11.4.3 Loss of Use Insurance.The Owner,at the Owner's option, may purchase and maintain such insurance as will insure the
Owner against loss of use of the Owner's property due to fire or other hazards, however caused. The Owner waives all rights of
action against the Contractor for loss of use of the Owner's property, including consequential losses due to fire or other hazards
however caused.
11.4.4 If the Contractor requests in writing that insurance for risks other than those described herein or other special causes of
loss be included in the property insurance policy, the Owner shall, if possible, include such insurance, and the cost thereof shall
be charged to the Contractor by appropriate Change Order.
11.4.5 If during the Project construction period the Owner insures properties, real or personal or both,at or adjacent to the site
by property insurance under policies separate from those insuring the Project,or if after final payment property insurance is to be
provided on the completed Project through a policy or policies other than those insuring the Project during the construction
period,the Owner shall waive all rights in accordance with the terms of Subparagraph 1 1.4.7 for damages caused by fire or other
causes of loss covered by this separate property insurance. All separate policies shall provide this waiver of subrogation by
endorsement or otherwise.
11.4.6 Before an exposure to loss may occur, the Owner shall file with the Contractor a copy of each policy that includes
insurance coverages required by this Paragraph 11.4. Each policy shall contain all generally applicable conditions, definitions,
exclusions and endorsements related to this Project. Each policy shall contain a provision that the policy will not be canceled or
allowed to expire, and that its limits will not be reduced, until at least 30 days' prior written notice has been given to the
Contractor.
AIA DOCUMENT A201-GENERAL CONDITIONS OF THE CONTRACT FOR CONSTRUCTION - 1997 EDITION - ALA - COPYRIGHT 1997 - TH_
AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF ARCHITECTS, 1735 NEW YORK AVENUE N.W., WASHINGTON, D.C.20006-5292. WARNING: Unlicensed photocopying
violates U.S. copyright laws and will subject the violator to legal prosecution.This document was electronically produced with permission of the AIA and can be
reproduced without violation until the date of expiration as noted below.
Electronic Format A201-1997
User Document:97A201-.CON— 11/12/1998.AIA License Number 107575,which expires on 1/31/1999—Page#34
employees:
.4 claims for damages insured by usual personal injury liability coverage;
.5 claims for damages, other than to the Work itself, because of injury to or destruction of tangible property, including
loss of use resulting therefrom;
.6 claims for damages because of bodily injury, death of a person or property damage arising out of ownership,
maintenance or use of a motor vehicle;
.7 claims for bodily injury or property damage arising out of completed operations; and
.8 claims involving contractual liability insurance applicable to the Contractor's obligations under Paragraph 3.18.
11.1.2 The insurance required by Subparagraph 11.1.1 shall be written for not less than limits of liability specified in the
Contract Documents or required by law, whichever coverage is greater. Coverages, whether written on an occurrence or
claims-made basis, shall be maintained without interruption from date of commencement of the Work until date of final payment
and termination of any coverage required to be maintained after final payment.
11.1.3 Certificates of insurance acceptable to the Owner shall be filed with the Owner prior to commencement of the Work.
These certificates and the insurance policies required by this Paragraph 11.1 shall contain a provision that coverages afforded
under the policies will not be canceled or allowed to expire until at least 30 days' prior written notice has been given to the
Owner. If any of the foregoing insurance coverages are required to remain in force after final payment and are reasonably
available, an additional certificate evidencing continuation of such coverage shall be submitted with the final Application for
Payment as required by Subparagraph 9.10.2. Information concerning reduction of coverage on account of revised limits or
claims paid under the General Aggregate, or both, shall be furnished by the Contractor with reasonable promptness in accordance
with the Contractor's information and belief.
11.2 OWNER'S LIABILITY INSURANCE
11.2.1 The Owner shall be responsible for purchasing and maintaining the Owner's usual liability insurance.
11.3 PROJECT MANAGEMENT PROTECTIVE LIABILITY INSURANCE
11.3.1 Optionally, the Owner may require the Contractor to purchase and maintain Project Management Protective Liability
insurance from the Contractor's usual sources as primary coverage for the Owner's,Contractor's and Architect's vicarious liability
for construction operations under the Contract. Unless otherwise requited by the Contract Documents,the Owner shall reimburse
the Contractor by increasing the Contract Sum to pay the cost of purchasing and maintaining such optional insurance coverage,
and the Contractor shall not be responsible for purchasing any other liability insurance on behalf of the Owner. The minimum
limits of liability purchased with such coverage shall be equal to the aggregate of the limits required for Contractor's Liability
Insurance under CIauses 11.1.1.2 through 11.1.1.5.
11.3.2 To the extent damages are covered by Project Management Protective Liability insurance, the Owner, Contractor and
Architect,waive all rights against each other for damages,except such rights as they may have to the proceeds of such insurance.
The policy shall provide for such waivers of subrogation by endorsement or otherwise.
11.3.3 The Owner shall not require the Contractor to include the Owner, Architect or other persons or entities as additional
insureds on the Contractor's Liability Insurance coverage under Paragraph 11.1.
11.4 PROPERTY INSURANCE
11.4.1 Unless otherwise provided,the Owner shall purchase and maintain,in a company or companies lawfully authorized to do
business in the jurisdiction in which the Project is located, property insurance written on a builder's risk"all-risk" or equivalent
policy form in the amount of the initial Contract Sum, plus value of subsequent Contract modifications and cost of materials
supplied or installed by others, comprising total value for the entire Project at the site on a replacement cost basis without
optional deductibles. Such property insurance shall be maintained, unless otherwise provided in the Contract Documents or
AIA DOCUMENT A201-GENERAL CONDITIONS OF THE CONTRACT FOR CONSTRUCTION - 1997 EDITION - ALA - COPYRIGHT 1997 - THE
AMERICAN [NSTITUTE OF ARCHITECTS, 1735 NEW YORK AVENUE N.W., WASHINGTON, D.C. 20006-5292. WARNING: Unlicensed photocopying
violates U.S. copyright laws and will subject the violator to legal prosecution.This document was electronically produced with permission of the AIA and can bt
reproduced without violation until the date of expiration as noted below.
Electronic Format A201-1997
User Document: 97A20LCON— 1 1/12/1998.AIA License Number 107575,which expires on 1/31/1999—Page#33
10.3.1 If reasonable precautions will be inadequate to prevent foreseeable bodily injury or death to persons resulting from a
material or substance, including but not limited to asbestos or polychlorinated biphenyl (PCB), encountered on the site by the
Contractor, the Contractor shall, upon recognizing the condition, immediately stop Work in the affected area and reps"" -
condition to the Owner and Architect in writing.
10.3.2 The Owner shall obtain the services of a licensed laboratory to verify the presence or absence of the material or
substance reported by the Contractor and, in the event such material or substance is found to be present, to verify that it has been
rendered harmless. Unless otherwise required by the Contract Documents, the Owner shall furnish in writing to the Contractor
and Architect the names and qualifications of persons or entities who are to perform tests verifying the presence or absence of
such material or substance or who are to perform the task of removal or safe containment of such material or substance. The
Contractor and the Architect will promptly reply to the Owner in writing stating whether or not either has reasonable objection to
the persons or entities proposed by the Owner. If either the Contractor or Architect has an objection to a person or entity proposed
by the Owner,the Owner shall propose another to whom the Contractor and the Architect have no reasonable objection. When the
material or substance has been rendered harmless, Work in the affected area shall resume upon written agreement of the Owner
and Contractor. The Contract Time shall be extended appropriately and the Contract Sum shall be increased in the amount of the
Contractor's reasonable additional costs of shut-down,delay and start-up,which adjustments shall be accomplished as provided in
Article 7.
10.3.3 To the fullest extent permitted by law, the Owner shall indemnify and hold harmless the Contractor, Subcontractors,
Architect, Architect's consultants and agents and employees of any of them from and against claims, damages, losses and
expenses, including but not limited to attomeys'fees,arising out of or resulting from performance of the Work in the affected area
if in fact the material or substance presents the risk of bodily injury or death as described in Subparagraph 10.3.1 and has not been
rendered harmless, provided that such claim, damage, loss or expense is attributable to bodily injury, sickness, disease or death,
or to injury to or destruction of tangible property (other than the Work itself)and provided that such damage, loss or expense is
not due to the sole negligence of a party seeking indemnity.
10.4 The Owner shall not be responsible under Paragraph 10.3 for materials and substances brought to the site by the
Contractor unless such materials or substances were required by the Contract Documents.
10.5 If, without negligence on the part of the Contractor, the Contractor is held liable for the cost of remediation _
hazardous material or substance solely by reason of performing Work as required by the Contract Documents, the Owner shall
indemnify the Contractor for all cost and expense thereby incurred
10.6 EMERGENCIES
10.6.1 In an emergency affecting safety of persons or property, the Contractor shall act, at the Contractor's discretion, to
prevent threatened damage, injury or loss. Additional compensation or extension of time claimed by the Contractor on account of
an emergency shall be determined as provided in Paragraph 4.3 and Article 7.
ARTICLE 11 INSURANCE AND BONDS
11.1 CONTRACTOR'S LIABILITY INSURANCE
11.1.1 The Contractor shall purchase from and maintain in a company or companies lawfully authorized to do business in the
jurisdiction in which the Project is located such insurance as will protect the Contractor from claims set forth below which may
arise out of or result from the Contractor's operations under the Contract and for which the Contractor may be legally liable,
whether such operations be by the Contractor or by a Subcontractor or by anyone directly or indirectly employed by any of them,
or by anyone for whose acts any of them may be Gable:
.1 claims under workers'compensation,disability benefit and other similar employee benefit acts which are applicable
to the Work to be performed;
.2 claims for damages because of bodily injury, occupational sickness or disease, or death of the Contractor's
employees;
.3 claims for damages because of bodily injury,sickness or disease,or death of any person other than the Contractor's
ALA DOCUMENT A201-GENERAL CONDITIONS OF THE CONTRACT FOR CONSTRUCTION - 1997 EDITION - AIA - COPYRIGHT 1997
AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF ARCHTI'ECTS, 1735 NEW YORK AVENUE N.W., WASHINGTON, D.C. 20006-5292. WARNING: Unlicensed photocopying
violate U.S. copyright laws and will subject the violator to legal prosecution.This document was electronically produced with permission of the AIA and can be
reproduced without violation until the date of expiration as noted below.
Electronic Format A201-1997
User Document:97A201.CON— 11/12/1998.AIA License Number 107575,which expires on 1/31/1999—Page#32
.2 failure of the Work to comply with the requirements of the Contract Documents; or
ovwk
.3 terms of special warranties required by the Contract Documents.
9.10.5 Acceptance of final payment by the Contractor, a Subcontractor or material supplier shall constitute a waiver of claims
by that payee except those previously made in writing and identified by that payee as unsettled at the time of final Application for
Payment.
ARTICLE 10 PROTECTION OF PERSONS AND PROPERTY
10.1 SAFETY PRECAUTIONS AND PROGRAMS
10.1.1 The Contractor shall be responsible for initiating, maintaining and supervising all safety precautions and programs in
connection with the performance of the Contract.
10.2 SAFETY OF PERSONS AND PROPERTY
10.2.1 The Contractor shall take reasonable precautions for safety of, and shall provide reasonable protection to prevent
damage,injury or loss to:
.1 employees on the Work and other persons who may be affected thereby;
.2 the Work and materials and equipment to be incorporated therein,whether in storage on or off the site, under care,
custody or control of the Contractor or the Contractor's Subcontractors or Sub-subcontractors;and
.3 other property at the site or adjacent thereto, such as trees, shrubs, lawns, walks, pavements, roadways, structures
and utilities not designated for removal,relocation or replacement in the course of construction.
10.2.2 The Contractor shall give notices and comply with applicable laws, ordinances, rules, regulations and lawful orders of
40W public authorities bearing on safety of persons or property or their protection from damage, injury or loss.
10.2.3 The Contractor shall erect and maintain, as required by existing conditions and performance of the Contract,reasonable
safeguards for safety and protection, including posting danger signs and other warnings against hazards, promulgating safety
regulations and notifying owners and users of adjacent sites and utilities.
10.2.4 When use or storage of explosives or other hazardous materials or equipment or unusual methods are necessary for
execution of the Work, the Contractor shall exercise utmost care and carry on such activities under supervision of properly
qualified personnel.
10.2.5 The Contractor shall promptly remedy damage and loss (other than damage or loss insured under property insurance
required by the Contract Documents)to property referred to in Clauses 10.2.12 and 10.2.1.3 caused in whole or in part by the
Contractor, a Subcontractor, a Sub-subcontractor, or anyone directly or indirectly employed by any of them, or by anyone for
whose acts they may be liable and for which the Contractor is responsible under Clauses 10.2.12 and 10.2.1.3,except damage,or
loss attributable to acts or omissions of the Owner or Architect or anyone directly or indirectly employed by either of them,or by
anyone for whose acts either of theta may be liable, and not attributable to the fault or negligence of the Contractor. The
foregoing obligations of the Contractor are in addition to the Contractor's obligations under Paragraph 3.18.
10.2.6 The Contractor shall designate a responsible member of the Contractor's organization at the site whose duty shall be the
prevention of accidents. This person shall be the Contractor's superintendent unless otherwise designated by the Contractor in
writing to the Owner and Architect.
10.2.7 The Contractor shall not load or permit any part of the construction or site to be loaded so as to endanger its safety.
10.3 HAZARDOUS MATERIALS
AIA DOCUMENT A201-GENERAL CONDITIONS OF THE CONTRACT FOR CONSTRUCTION - 1997 EDITION - AIA - COPYRIGHT 1997 - THE
AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF ARCHITECTS, 1735 NEW YORK AVENUE N.W., WASHINGTON, D.C. 20006-5292. WARNING: Unlicensed photocopying
violates U.S. copyright laws and will subject the violator to legal prosecution.This document was electronically produced with permission of the ALA and can be
reproduced without violation until the date of expiration as noted below.
Electronic Format A201-1997
User Document:97A20LCON— 11/12/1998.AIA License Number 107575,which expires on 1/31/1999—Page#31
9.9 PARTIAL OCCUPANCY OR USE
9.9.1 The Owner may occupy or use any completed or partially completed portion of the Work at any stage when such plaion
is designated by separate agreement with the Contractor, provided such occupancy or use is consented to by the ins
required under Clause 11.4.1.5 and authorized by public authorities having jurisdiction over the Work. Such partial occupancy
use may commence whether or not the portion is substantially complete, provided the Owner and Contractor have accepted in
writing the responsibilities assigned to each of them for payments, retainage, if any, security, maintenance, heat, utilities, damage
to the Work and insurance, and have agreed in writing concerning the period for correction of the Work and commencement of
warranties required by the Contract Documents. When the Contractor considers a portion substantially complete, the Contractor
shall prepare and submit a list to the Architect as provided under Subparagraph 9.8.2. Consent of the Contractor to partial
occupancy or use shall not be unreasonably withheld. The stage of the progress of the Work shall be determined by written
agreement between the Owner and Contractor or, if no agreement is reached,by decision of the Architect.
9.9.2 Immediately prior to such partial occupancy or use,the Owner, Contractor and Architect shall jointly inspect the area to
be occupied or portion of the Work to be used in order to determine and record the condition of the Work.
9.9.3 Unless otherwise agreed upon, -partial occupancy or use of a portion or portions of the Work shall not constitute
acceptance of Work not complying with the requirements of the Contract Documents.
9.10 FINAL COMPLETION AND FINAL PAYMENT
9.10.1 Upon receipt of written notice that the Work is ready for final inspection and acceptance and upon receipt of a final
Application for Payment, the Architect will promptly make such inspection and, when the Architect finds the Work acceptable
under the Contract Documents and the Contract fully performed,the Architect will promptly issue a final Certificate for Payment
stating that to the best of the Architect's knowledge, information and belief, and on the basis of the Architect's on-site visits and
inspections,the Work has been completed in accordance with terms and conditions of the Contract Documents and that the entire
balance found to be due the Contractor and noted in the final Certificate is due and payable. The Architect's final Certificate for
Payment will constitute a further representation that conditions listed in Subparagraph 9.10.2 as precedent to the Contractor's
being entitled to final payment have been fulfilled
9.10.2 Neither final payment nor any remaining retained percentage shall become due until the Contractor submits'
Architect (1) an affidavit that payrolls, bills for materials and equipment, and other indebtedness connected with the WorK .
which the Owner or the Owner's property might be responsible or encumbered(less amounts withheld by Owner)have been paid
or otherwise satisfied, (2)a certificate evidencing that insurance required by the Contract Documents to remain in force after final
payment is currently in effect and will not be canceled or allowed to expire until at least 30 days' prior written notice has been
given to the Owner, (3) a written statement that the Contractor knows of no substantial reason that the insurance will not be
renewable to cover the period required by the Contract Documents, (4) consent of surety, if any, to final payment and (5), if
required by the Owner, other data establishing payment or satisfaction of obligations, such as receipts, releases and waivers of
liens, claims, security interests or encumbrances arising out of the Contract, to the extent and in such form as may be designated
by the Owner. If a Subcontractor refuses to famish a release or waiver required by the Owner,the Contractor may furnish a bond
satisfactory to the Owner to indemnify the Owner against such lien. If such lien remains unsatisfied after payments are made, the
Contractor shall refund to the Owner all money that the Owner may be compelled to pay in discharging such lien, including all
costs and reasonable attorneys'fees.
9.10.3 If, after Substantial Completion of the Work, final completion thereof is materially delayed through no fault of the
Contractor or by issuance of Change Orders affecting final completion, and the Architect so confirms, the Owner shall, upon
application by the Contractor and certification by the Architect, and without terminating the Contract, make payment of the
balance due for that portion of the Work fully completed and accepted If the remaining balance for Work not fully completed or
corrected is less than retainage stipulated in the Contract Documents, and if bonds have been furnished, the written consent of
surety to payment of the balance due for that portion of the Work fully completed and accepted shall be submitted by the
Contractor to the Architect prior to certification of such payment. Such payment shall be made under terms and conditions
governing final payment,except that it shall not constitute a waiver of claims.
9.10.4 The making of final payment shall constitute a waiver of Claims by the Owner except those arising from:
.1 liens,Claims,security interests or encumbrances arising out of the Contract and unsettled;
ALA DOCUMENT A201-GENERAL CONDITIONS OF THE CONTRACT FOR CONSTRUCTION - 1997 EDITION - ALA - COPYRIGHT 1997 - 1
AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF ARCHITECTS, 1735 NEW YORK AVENUE N.W., WASHINGTON, D.C. 20006-5292. WARNING: Unlicensed photocopying
violates U.S. copyright laws and will subject the violator to legal prosecution.This document was electronically produced with permission of the ALA and can be
reproduced without violation until the date of expiration as noted below.
Electronic Format A201-1997
User Document: 97A201,CON— 11/12/1998.AIA License Number 107575,which expires on 1/31/1999--Page#30
9.6.4 Neither the Owner nor Architect shall have an obligation to pay or to see to the payment of money to a Subcontractor
except as may otherwise be required by law.
9.6.5 Payment to material suppliers shall be treated in a manner similar to that provided in Subparagraphs 9.6.2, 9.6.3 and
9.6.4.
9.6.6 A Certificate for Payment,a progress payment,or partial or entire use or occupancy of the Project by the Owner shall not
constitute acceptance of Work not in accordance with the Contract Documents.
9.6.7 Unless the Contractor provides the Owner with a payment bond in the full penal sum of the Contract Sum, payments
received by the Contractor for Work properly performed by Subcontractors and suppliers shall be held by the Contractor for those
Subcontractors or suppliers who performed Work or furnished materials, or both, under contract with the Contractor for which
payment was made by the Owner. Nothing contained herein shall require money to be placed in a separate account and not
commingled with money of the Contractor, shall create any fiduciary liability or tort liability on the part of the Contractor for
breach of trust or shall entitle any person or entity to an award of punitive damages against the Contractor for breach of the
requirements of this provision.
9.7 FAILURE OF PAYMENT
9.7.1 If the Architect does not issue a Certificate for Payment, through no fault of the Contractor, within seven days after
receipt of the Contractor's Application for Payment, or if the Owner does not pay the Contractor within seven days after the date
established in the Contract Documents the amount certified by the Architect or awarded by arbitration, then the Contractor may,
upon seven additional days'written notice to the Owner and Architect,stop the Work until payment of the amount owing has been
received. The Contract Time shall be extended appropriately and the Contract Sum shall be increased by the amount of the
Contractor's reasonable costs of shut-down,delay and start-up,plus interest as provided for in the Contract Documents.
9.8 SUBSTANTIAL COMPLETION
9.8.1 Substantial Completion is the.stage in the progress of the Work when the Work or designated portion thereof is
sufficiently complete in accordance with the Contract Documents so that the Owner can occupy or utilize the Work for its
intended use.
9.8.2 When the Contractor considers that the Work, or a portion thereof which the Owner agrees to accept separately, is
substantially complete, the Contractor shall prepare and submit to the Architect a comprehensive list of items to be completed or
corrected prior to final payment. Failure to include an item on such list does not alter the responsibility of the Contractor to
complete all Work in accordance with the Contract Documents.
9.8.3 Upon receipt of the Contractor's list,the Architect will make an inspection to determine whether the Work or designated
portion thereof is substantially complete. If the Architect's inspection discloses any item, whether or not included on the
Contractor's list,which is not sufficiently complete in accordance with the Contract Documents so that the Owner can occupy or
utilize the Work or designated portion thereof for its intended use, the Contractor shall, before issuance of the Certificate of
Substantial Completion, complete or correct such item upon notification by the Architect. In such case, the Contractor shall then
submit a request for another inspection by the Architect to determine Substantial Completion.
9.8.4 When the Work or designated portion thereof is substantially complete, the Architect will prepare a Certificate of
Substantial Completion which shall establish the date of Substantial Completion,shall establish responsibilities of the Owner and
Contractor for security, maintenance, heat, utilities, damage to the Work and insurance, and shall fix the time within which the
Contractor shall finish all items on the list accompanying the Certificate. Warranties required by the Contract Documents shall
commence on the date of Substantial Completion of the Work or designated portion thereof unless otherwise provided in the
Certificate of Substantial Completion.
9.8.5 The Certificate of Substantial Completion shall be submitted to the Owner and Contractor for their written acceptance of
responsibilities assigned to them in such Certificate. Upon such acceptance and consent of surety, if any, the Owner shall make
payment of retainage applying to such Work or designated portion thereof. Such payment shall be adjusted for Work that is
incomplete or not in accordance with the requirements of the Contract Documents.
ALA DOCUMENT A201-GENERAL CONDITIONS OF THE CONTRACT FOR CONSTRUCTION - 1997 EDITION - ALA - COPYRIGHT 1997 - THE
AMERICAN INS TTIUIE OF ARCHITECTS, 1735 NEW YORK AVENUE N.W., WASHINGTON, D.C. 20006-5292. WARNING: Unlicensed photocopying
violates U.S. copyright laws and will subject the violator to legal prosecution.This document was electronically produced with permission of the AIA and can be
reproduced without violation until the date of expiration as noted below.
Electronic Format A201-1997
User Document:97A201.CON— 11/12/1998.AIA License Number 107575,which expires on 1/31/1999--Page#29
with the Contract Documents. The foregoing representations are subject to an evaluation of the Work for conformance with the
Contract Documents upon Substantial Completion, to results of subsequent tests and inspections, to correction of mino
deviations from the Contract Documents prior to completion and to specific qualifications expressed by the Architec`0"k-•r
issuance of a Certificate for Payment will further constitute a representation that the Contractor is entitled to payment ,,,
amount certified. However, the issuance of a Certificate for Payment will not be a representation that the Architect has(1) made
exhaustive or continuous on-site inspections to check the quality or quantity of the Work, (2) reviewed construction means.
methods, techniques, sequences or procedures, (3) reviewed copies of requisitions received from Subcontractors and material
suppliers and other data requested by the Owner to substantiate the Contractor's right to payment, or (4) made examination to
ascertain how or for what purpose the Contractor has used money previously paid on account of the Contract Sum.
9.5 DECISIONS TO WITHHOLD CERTIFICATION
9.5.1 The Architect may withhold a Certificate for Payment in whole or in part, to the extent reasonably necessary to protect
the Owner, if in the Architect's opinion the representations to the Owner required by Subparagraph 9.4.2 cannot be made. If the
Architect is unable to certify payment in the amount of the Application, the Architect will notify the Contractor and Owner as
provided in Subparagraph 9.4.1. If the Contractor and Architect cannot agree on a revised amount, the Architect will promptly
issue a Certificate for Payment for the amount for which the Architect is able to make such representations to the Owner. The
Architect may also withhold a Certificate for Payment or,because of subsequently discovered evidence, may nullify the whole or
a part of a Certificate for Payment previously issued, to such extent as may be necessary in the Architect's opinion to protect the
Owner from loss for which the Contractor is responsible, including loss resulting from acts and omissions described in
Subparagraph 3.3.2,because of:
.1 defective Work not remedied;
.2 third party claims filed or reasonable evidence indicating probable filing of such claims unless security acceptable to
the Owner is provided by the Contractor;
.3 failure of the Contractor to make payments properly to Subcontractors or for labor,materials or equipment;
.4 reasonable evidence that the Work cannot be completed for the unpaid balance of the Contract Sum;
.5 damage to the Owner or another contractor,
.6 reasonable evidence that the Work will not be completed within the Contract Time, and that the unpaid balance
would not be adequate to cover actual or liquidated damages for the anticipated delay;or
.7 persistent failure to carry out the Work in accordance with the Contract Documents.
9.5.2 When the above reasons for withholding certification are removed, certification will be made for amounts previously
withheld.
9.6 PROGRESS PAYMENTS
9.6.1 After the Architect has issued a Certificate for Payment, the Owner shall make payment in the manner and within the
time provided in the Contract Documents,and shall so notify the Architect.
9.6.2 The Contractor shall promptly pay each Subcontractor,upon receipt of payment from the Owner,out of the amount paid
to the Contractor on account of such Subcontractor's portion of the Work, the amount to which said Subcontractor is entitled,
reflecting percentages actually retained from payments to the Contractor on account of such Subcontractor's portion of the Work.
The Contractor shall, by appropriate agreement with each Subcontractor, require each Subcontractor to make payments to
Sub-subcontractors in a similar manner.
9.6.3 The Architect will, on request, furnish to a Subcontractor, if practicable, information regarding percentages of
completion or amounts applied for by the Contractor and action taken thereon by the Architect and Owner on account of portions
of the Work done by such Subcontractor.
ALA DOCUMENT A201-GENERAL, CONDITIONS OF THE CONTRACT FOR CONSTRUCTION - 1997 EDITION - AIA - COPYRIGHT 1997 ' I
AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF ARCHITECTS, 1735 NEW YORK AVENUE N.W., WASHINGTON, D.C. 20006-5292. WARNING: Unlicensed photocopying
violates U.S. copyright laws and will subject the violator to legal prosecution.This document was electronically produced with permission of the ALA and can be
reproduced without violation until the date of expiration as noted below.
Electronic Format A201-1997
User Document:97A201.CON— 11/12/1998.AIA License Number 107575,which expires on 1/31/1999--Page#28
8.3.3 This Paragraph 8.3 does not preclude recovery of damages for delay by either parry under other provisions of the
Contract Documents.
ARTICLE 9 PAYMENTS AND COMPLETION
9.1 CONTRACT SUM
9.1.1 The Contract Sum is stated in the Agreement and, including authorized adjustments, is the total amount payable by the
Owner to the Contractor for performance of the Work under the Contract Documents.
9.2 SCHEDULE OF VALUES
9.2.1 Before the first Application for Payment, the Contractor shall submit to the Architect a schedule of values allocated to
various portions of the Work, prepared in such form and supported by such data to substantiate its accuracy as the Architect may
require.This schedule, unless objected to by the Architect,shall be used as a basis for reviewing the Contractor's Applications for
Payment.
9.3 APPLICATIONS FOR PAYMENT
9.3.1 . At least ten days before the date established for each progress payment, the Contractor shall submit to the Architect an
itemized Application for Payment for operations completed in accordance with the schedule of values. Such application shall be
notarized, if required,and supported by such data substantiating the Contractor's right to payment as the Owner or Architect may
require, such as copies of requisitions from Subcontractors and material suppliers, and reflecting retainage if provided for in the
Contract Documents.
9.3.1.1 As provided in Subparagraph 7.3.8, such applications may include requests for payment on account of changes in the
Work which have been properly authorized by Construction Change Directives,or by interim determinations of the Architect,but
not yet included in Change Orders.
9.3.1.2 Such applications may not include requests for payment for portions of the Work for which the Contractor does not
intend to pay to a Subcontractor or material supplier, unless such Work has been performed by others whom the Contractor
intends to pay.
9.3.2 Unless otherwise provided in the Contract Documents, payments shall be made on account of materials and equipment
delivered and suitably stored at the site for subsequent incorporation in the Work. If approved in advance by the Owner,payment
may similarly be made for materials and equipment suitably stored off the site at a location agreed upon in writing. Payment for
materials and equipment stored on or off the site shall be conditioned upon compliance by the Contractor with procedures
satisfactory to the Owner to establish the Owner's title to such materials and equipment or otherwise protect the Owner's interest,
and shall include the costs of applicable insurance, storage and transportation to the site for such materials and equipment stored
off the site.
9.3.3 The Contractor warrants that title to all Work covered by an Application for Payment will pass to the Owner no later
than the time of payment. The Contractor further warrants that upon submittal of an Application for Payment all Work for which
Certificates for Payment have been previously issued and payments received from the Owner shall,to the best of the Contractor's
knowledge, information and beliefs be free and clear of liens, claims, security interests or encumbrances in favor of the
Contractor, Subcontractors, material suppliers, or other persons or entities making a claim by reason of having provided labor,
materials and equipment relating to the Work.
9.4 CERTIFICATES FOR PAYMENT
9.4.1 The Architect will,within seven days after receipt of the Contractor's Application for Payment,either issue to the Owner
a Certificate for Payment,with a copy to the Contractor,for such amount as the Architect determines is properly due,or notify the
Contractor and Owner in writing of the Architect's reasons for withholding certification in whole or in part as provided in
Subparagraph 9.5.1.
9.4.2 The issuance of a Certificate for Payment will constitute a representation by the Architect to the Owner, based on the
Architect's evaluation of the Work and the data comprising the Application for Payment, that the Work has progressed to the
point indicated and that, to the best of the Architect's knowledge, information and belief,the quality of the Work is in accordance
ALA DOCUMENT A201-GENERAL CONDITIONS OF THE CONTRACT FOR CONSTRUCTION - 1997 EDITION - ALA - COPYRIGHT 1997 - THE
AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF ARCHITECTS, 1735 NEW YORK AVENUE N.W., WASHINGTON, D.C. 20006-5292. WARNING: Unlicensed photocopying
violates U.S. copyright laws and will subject the violator to legal prosecution. This document was electronically produced with permission of the ALA and can be
reproduced without violation until the date of expiration as noted below.
Electronic Format A201-1997
User Document:97A20LCON— 11/12/1998.AIA License Number 107575,which expires on 1/31/1999—Page#27
7.3.8 Pending final determination of the total cost of a Construction Change Directive to the Owner, amounts not in dispute for
such changes in the Work shall be included in Applications for Payment accompanied by a Change Order indicating the F"40
agreement with part or all of such costs. For any portion of such cost that remains in dispute, the Architect will make an ir,._.
determination for purposes of monthly certification for payment for those costs. That determination of cost shall adjust the
Contract Sum on the same basis as a Change Order, subject to the right of either party to disagree and assert a claim in
accordance with Article 4.
7.3.9 When the Owner and Contractor agree with the determination made by the Architect concerning the adjustments in the
Contract Sum and Contract Time, or otherwise reach agreement upon the adjustments, such agreement shall be effective
immediately and shall be recorded by preparation and execution of an appropriate Change Order.
7.4 MINOR CHANGES IN THE WORK
7.4.1 The Architect will have authority to order minor changes in the Work not involving adjustment in the Contract Sum or
extension of the Contract Time and not inconsistent with the intent of the Contract Documents. Such changes shall be effected by
written order and shall be binding on the Owner and Contractor.The Contractor shall carry out such written orders promptly.
ARTICLE 8 TIME
8.1 DEFINITIONS
8.1.1 Unless otherwise provided, Contract Time is the period of time, including authorized adjustments, allotted in the
Contract Documents for Substantial Completion of the Work.
8.1.2 The date of commencement of the Work is the date established in the Agreement.
8.1.3 The date of Substantial Completion is the date certified by the Architect in accordance with Paragraph 9.8.
8.1.4 The term"day"as used in the Contract Documents shall mean calendar day unless otherwise specifically defined.
8.2 PROGRESS AND COMPLETION
8.2.1 Time limits stated in the Contract Documents are of the essence of the Contract- By executing the Agreement the
Contractor confirms that the Contract Time is a reasonable period for performing the Work
8.2.2 The Contractor shall not knowingly, except by agreement or instruction of the Owner in writing, prematurely commence
operations on the site or elsewhere prior to the effective date of insurance required by Article 11 to be furnished by the Contractor
and Owner. The date of commencement of the Work shall not be changed by the effective date of such insurance. Unless the date
of commencement is established by the Contract Documents or a notice to proceed given by the Owner, the Contractor shall
notify the Owner in writing not less than five days or other agreed period before commencing the Work to permit the timely filing
of mortgages,mechanic's liens and other security interests.
8.2.3 The Contractor shall proceed expeditiously with adequate forces and shall achieve Substantial Completion within the
Contract Time.
8.3 DELAYS AND EXTENSIONS OF TIME
8.3.1 If the Contractor is delayed at any time in the commencement or progress of the Work by an act or neglect of the Owner
or Architect,or of an employee of either,or of a separate contractor employed by the Owner,or by changes ordered in the Work,
or by labor disputes, fire, unusual delay in deliveries, unavoidable casualties or other causes beyond the Contractor's control, or
by delay authorized by the Owner pending mediation and arbitration, or by other causes which the Architect determines may
justify delay,then the Contract Time shall be extended by Change Order for such reasonable time as the Architect may determine.
8.3.2 Claims relating to time shall be made in accordance with applicable provisions of Paragraph 4.3.
ALA DOCUMENT A201-GENERAL, CONDITIONS OF THE CONTRACT FOR CONSTRUCTION - 1997 EDMON - AIA - COPYRIGHT 1997 -
AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF ARCHITECTS, 1735 NEW YORK AVENUE N.W., WASHINGTON, D.C. 20006-5292. WARNING: Unlicensed photocopying
violates U.S. copyright laws and will subject the violator to legal prosecution.This document was electronically produced with permission of the AIA and can be
reproduced without violation until the date of expiration as noted below.
Electronic Format A201-1997
User Document:97A20.1.-CON— 11/12/1998.AIA License Number 107575,which expires on 1/31/1999—Page#26
7.3.1 A Construction Change Directive is a ritten order prepared by the Architect and signed by the Owner and r
w .a chitect,
directing a change in the Work prior to agreement on adjustment, if any, in the Contract Sum or Contract Time, or both. The
Owner may by Construction Change Directive, without invalidating the Contract, order changes in the Work within the general
scope of the Contract consisting of additions, deletions or other revisions, the Contract Sum and Contract Time being adjusted
accordingly.
7.3.2 A Construction Change Directive shall be used in the absence of total agreement on the terms of a Change Order.
7.3.3 If the Construction Change Directive provides for an adjustment to the Contract Sum, the adjustment shall be based on
one of the following methods:
.1 mutual acceptance of a lump sum properly itemized and supported by sufficient substantiating data to permit
evaluation;
.2 unit prices stated in the Contract Documents or subsequently agreed upon; >
.3 cost to be determined in a manner agreed upon by the parties and a mutually acceptable fixed or percentage fee;or
.4 as provided in Subparagraph 7.3.6.
7.3.4 Upon receipt of a Construction Change Directive, the Contractor shall promptly proceed with the change in the Work
involved and advise the Architect of the Contractor's agreement or disagreement with the method, if any, provided in the
Construction Change Directive for determining the proposed adjustment in the Contract Sum or Contract Time.
7.3.5 A Construction Change Directive signed by the Contractor indicates the agreement of the Contractor therewith, including
adjustment in Contract Sum and Contract Time or the method for determining them. Such agreement shall be effective
immediately and shall be recorded as a Change Order.
00W
7.3.6 If the Contractor does not respond promptly or disagrees with the method for adjustment in the Contract Sum, the
method and the adjustment shall be determined by the Architect on the basis of reasonable expenditures and savings of those
performing the Work attributable to the change, including, in case of an increase in the Contract Sum, a reasonable allowance for
overhead and profit. In such case, and also under Clause 7.3.3.3, the Contractor shall keep and present, in such form as the
Architect may prescribe, an itemized accounting together with appropriate supporting data. Unless otherwise provided in the
Contract Documents,costs for the purposes of this Subparagraph 7.3.6 shall be limited to the following:
.1 costs of labor, including social security,old age and unemployment insurance, fringe benefits required by agreement
or custom,and workers'compensation insurance;
.2 costs of materials,supplies and equipment, including cost of transportation,whether incorporated or consumed;
.3 rental costs of machinery and equipment,exclusive of hand tools,whether rented from the Contractor or others;
.4 costs of premiums for all bonds and insurance,permit fees,and sales,use or similar taxes related to the Work;and
.5 additional costs of supervision and field office personnel directly attributable to the change.
7.3.7 The amount of credit to be allowed by the Contractor to the Owner for a deletion or change which results in a net
decrease in the Contract Sum shall be actual net cost as confirmed by the Architect. When both additions and credits covering
related Work or substitutions are involved in a change, the allowance for overhead and profit shall be figured on the basis of net
increase, if any,with respect to that change.
ALA DOCUMENT A201-GENERAL CONDITIONS OF THE CONTRACT FOR CONSTRUCTION - 1997 EDITION - ALA - COPYRIGHT 1997 - THE
AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF ARCHITECTS, 1735 NEW YORK AVENUE N.W., WASHINGTON, D.C. 20006-5292. WARNING: Unlicensed photocopying
violates U.S.copyright laws and will subject the violator to legal prosecution.This document was electronically produced with permission of the ALA and can be
reproduced without violation until the date of expiration as noted below.
Electronic Format A201-1997
User Document: 97A20LCON— 11/12/1998.AIA License Number 107575,which expires on 1/31/1999--Page 425
their materials and equipment and performance of their activities, and shall connect and coordinate the Contractor's constructior
and operations with theirs as required by the Contract Documents.
6.2.2 If part of the Contractor's Work depends for proper execution or results upon construction or operations by the Owns,
a separate contractor, the Contractor shall, prior to proceeding with that portion of the Work, promptly report to the Architect
apparent discrepancies or defects-in such other construction that would render it unsuitable for such proper execution and results.
Failure of the Contractor so to report shall constitute an acknowledgment that the Owner's or separate contractor's completed or
partially completed construction is fit and proper to receive the Contractor's Work, except as to defects not then reasonably
discoverable.
6.2.3 The Owner shall be reimbursed by the Contractor for costs incurred by the Owner which are payable to a separate
contractor because of delays, improperly timed activities or defective construction of the Contractor. The Owner shall be
responsible to the Contractor for costs incurred by the Contractor because of delays, improperly timed activities, damage to the
Work or defective construction of a separate contractor.
6.2.4 The Contractor shall promptly remedy damage wrongfully caused by the Contractor to completed or partially completed
construction or to property of the Owner or separate contractors as provided in Subparagraph 10.2.5.
6.2.5 The Owner and each separate contractor shall have the same responsibilities for cutting and patching as are described for
the Contractor in Subparagraph 3.14.
6.3 OWNER'S RIGHT TO CLEAN UP
6.3.1 If a dispute arises among the Contractor, separate contractors and the Owner as to the responsibility under their
respective contracts for maintaining the premises and surrounding area free from waste materials and rubbish, the Owner may
clean up and the Architect will allocate the cost among those responsible.
ARTICLE 7 CHANGES IN THE WORK
7.1 GENERAL
7.1.1 Changes in the Work may be accomplished after execution of the Contract, and without invalidating the Contract,
Change Order, Construction Change Directive or order for a minor change in the Work, subject to the limitations stated in this
Article 7 and elsewhere in the Contract Documents.
7.1.2 A Change Order shall be based upon agreement among the Owner, Contractor and Architect; a Construction Change
Directive requires agreement by the Owner and Architect and may or may not be agreed to by the Contractor, an order for a
minor change in the Work may be issued by the Architect alone.
7.1.3 Changes in the Work shall be performed under applicable provisions of the Contract Documents, and the Contractor
shall proceed promptly, unless otherwise provided in the Change Order, Construction Change Directive or order for a minor
change in the Work.
7.2 CHANGE ORDERS
7.2.1 A Change Order is a written instrument prepared by the Architect and signed by the Owner, Contractor and Architect,
stating their agreement upon all of the following:
.1 change in the Work;
.2 the amount of the adjustment,if any,in the Contract Sum;and
.3 the extent of the adjustment,if any,in the Contract Time.
7.2.2 Methods used in determining adjustments to the Contract Sum may ineWe those listed in Subparagraph 7.3.3.
7.3 CONSTRUCTION CHANGE DIRECTIVES
ALA DOCUMENT A201-GENERAL CONDITIONS OF THE CONTRACT FOR CONSTRUCTION - 1997 EDITION - ALA - COPYRIGHT 1997 - 1,
AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF ARCHITECTS, 1735 NEW YORK AVENUE N.W., WASHINGTON, D.C. 20006-5292. WARNING: Unlicensed photocopying
violates U.S. copyright laws and will subject the violator to legal prosecution.This document was electronically produced with permission of the ALA and can be
reproduced without violation until the date of expiration as noted below.
Electronic Format A201-1997
User Document:97A201.CON— 11/12/1998.AIA License Number 107575,which expires on 1/31/1999—Page#24
5.3 SUBCONTRACTUAL RELATIONS
5.3.1 By appropriate agreement, written where legally required for validity,the Contractor shall require each Subcontractor, to
the extent of the Work to be performed by the Subcontractor,to be bound to the Contractor by terms of the Contract Documents,
and to assume toward the Contractor all the obligations and responsibilities, including the responsibility for safety of the
Subcontractor's Work, which the Contractor, by these Documents, assumes toward the Owner and Architect. Each subcontract
agreement shall preserve and protect the rights of the Owner and Architect under the Contract Documents with respect to the
Work to be performed by the Subcontractor so that subcontracting thereof will not prejudice such rights, and shall allow to the
Subcontractor, unless specifically provided otherwise in the subcontract agreement,the benefit of all rights, remedies and redress
against the Contractor that the Contractor, by the Contract Documents, has against the Owner. Where appropriate,the Contractor
shall require each Subcontractor to enter into similar agreements with Sub-subcontractors. The Contractor shall make available to
each proposed Subcontractor, prior to the execution of the subcontract agreement,copies of the Contract Documents to which the
Subcontractor will be bound,and,upon written request of the Subcontractor, identify to the Subcontractor terms and conditions of
the proposed subcontract agreement which may be at variance with the Contract Documents. Subcontractors will similarly make
copies of applicable portions of such documents available to their respective proposed Sub-subcontractors.
5.4 CONTINGENT ASSIGNMENT OFSUBCONTRACTS
5.4.1 Each subcontract agreement for a portion of the Work is assigned by the Contractor to the Owner provided that:
.1 assignment is effective only after termination of the Contract by the Owner for cause pursuant to Paragraph 14.2 and
only for those subcontract agreements which the Owner accepts by notifying the Subcontractor and Contractor in
writing;and
.2 assignment is subject to the prior rights of the surety,if any,obligated under bond relating to the Contract.
5.4.2 Upon such assignment, if the Work has been suspended for more than 30 days, the Subcontractor's compensation shall
be equitably adjusted for increases in cost resulting from the suspension.
ARTICLE 6 CONSTRUCTION BY OWNER OR BY SEPARATE CONTRACTORS
6.1 OWNER'S RIGHT TO PERFORM CONSTRUCTION AND TO AWARD SEPARATE CONTRACTS
6.1.1 The Owner reserves the right to perform construction or operations related to the Project with the Owner's own forces,
and to award separate contracts in connection with other portions of the Project or other construction or operations on the site
under Conditions of the Contract identical or substantially similar to these including those portions related to insurance and
waiver of subrogation. If the Contractor claims that delay or additional cost is involved because of such action by the Owner,the
Contractor shall make such Claim as provided in Paragraph 4.3.
6.1.2 When separate contracts are awarded for different portions of the Project or other construction or operations on the site,
the term "Contractor" in the Contract Documents in each case shall mean the Contractor who executes each separate
Owner-Contractor Agreement.
6.1.3 The Owner shall provide for coordination of the activities of the Owner's own forces and of each separate contractor
with the Work of the Contractor, who shall cooperate with them.The Contractor shall participate with other separate contractors
and the Owner in reviewing their construction schedules when directed to do so. The Contractor shall make any revisions to the
construction schedule deemed necessary after a joint review and mutual agreement. The construction schedules shall then
constitute the schedules to be used by the Contractor,separate contractors and the Other until subsequently revised
6.1.4 Unless otherwise provided in the Contract Documents, when the Owner performs construction or operations related to
the Project with the Owner's own forces, the Owner shall be deemed to be subject to the same obligations and to have the same
rights which apply to the Contractor under the Conditions of the Contract, including, without excluding others, those stated in
Article 3,this Article 6 and Articles 10, 11 and 12.
6.2 MUTUAL RESPONSIBILITY
6.2.1 The Contractor shall afford the Owner and separate contractors reasonable opportunity for introduction and storage of
AIA DOCUMENT A201-GENERAL CONDITIONS OF THE CONTRACT FOR CONSTRUCTION - 1997 EDITION - AIA - COPYRIGHT 1997 - THE
AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF ARCHITECTS, 1735 NEW YORK AVENUE N.W., WASHINGTON, D.C. 20006-5292. WARNING: Unlicensed photocopying
violates U.S. copyright laws and will subject the violator to legal prosecution.This document was electronically produced with permission of the ALA and can be
reproduced without violation until the date of expiration as noted below.
Electronic Format A201-1997
User Document:97A20LCON— 11/12/1998.AIA License Number 107575,which expires on 1/31/1999—Page#23
institution of legal or equitable proceedings based on such Claim would be barred by the applicable statute of limitations as
determined pursuant to Paragraph 13.7.
4.6.4 Limitation on Consolidation or Joinder. No arbitration arising out of or relating to the Contract shall include, .
consolidation or joinder or in any other manner, the Architect,the Architect's employees or consultants, except by written consent
containing specific reference to the Agreement and signed by the Architect, Owner, Contractor and any other person or entity
sought to be joined.No arbitration shall include,by consolidation or joinder or in any other manner,parties other than the Owner,
Contractor, a separate contractor as described in Article 6 and other persons substantially involved in a common question of fact
or law whose presence is required if complete relief is to be accorded in arbitration. No person or entity other than the Owner,
Contractor or a separate contractor as described in Article 6 shall be included as an original third party or additional third party to
an arbitration whose interest or responsibility is insubstantial. Consent to arbitration involving an additional person or entity shall
not constitute consent to arbitration of a Claim not described therein or with a person or entity not named or described therein.
The foregoing agreement to arbitrate and other agreements to arbitrate with an additional person or entity duly consented to by
parties to the Agreement shall be specifically enforceable under applicable law in any court having jurisdiction thereof.
4.6.5 Claims and Timely Assertion of Claims. The party filing a notice of demand for arbitration must assert in the demand
all Claims then!mown to that party on which arbitration is permitted to be demanded.
4.6.6 Judgment on Final Award. The award rendered by the arbitrator or arbitrators shall be final, and judgment may be
entered upon it in accordance with applicable law in any court having jurisdiction thereof.
ARTICLE 5 SUBCONTRACTORS
5.1 DEFINITIONS
5.1.1 A Subcontractor is a person or entity who has a direct contract with the Contractor to perform a portion of the Work at
the site. The term "Subcontractor" is referred to throughout the Contract Documents as if singular in number and means a
Subcontractor or an authorized representative of the Subcontractor. The term "Subcontractor" does not include a separate
contractor or subcontractors of a separate contractor.
5.1.2 A Sub-subcontractor is a person or entity who has a direct or indirect contract with a Subcontractor to perform a p0n1L
of the Work at the site. The term "Sub-subcontractor" is referred to throughout the Contract Documents as if singular in number
and means a Sub-subcontractor or an authorized representative of the Sub-subcontractor.
5.2 AWARD OF SUBCONTRACTS AND OTHER CONTRACTS FOR PORTIONS OF THE WORK
5.2.1 Unless otherwise stated in the Contract Documents or the bidding requirements, the Contractor, as soon as practicable
after award of the Contract, shalt furnish in writing to the Owner through the Architect the frames of persons or entities(including
those who are to furnish materials or equipment fabricated to a special design)proposed for each principal portion of the Work.
The Architect will promptly reply to the Contractor in writing stating whether or not the Owner or the Architect, after due
investigation, has reasonable objection to any such proposed person or entity.Failure of the Owner or Architect to reply promptly
shall constitute notice of no reasonable objection.
5.2.2 The Contractor shall not contract with a proposed person or entity to whom the Owner or Architect has made reasonable
and timely objection.The Contractor shall not be required to contract with anyone to whom the Contractor has made reasonable
objection.
5.2.3 If the Owner or Architect has reasonable objection to a person or entity proposed by the Contractor,the Contractor shall
propose another to whom the Owner or Architect has no reasonable objection. If the proposed but rejected Subcontractor was
reasonably capable of performing the Work, the Contract Sum and Contract Time shall be increased or decreased by the
difference, if any, occasioned by such change, and an appropriate Change Order shall be•issued before commencement of the
substitute Subcontractor's Work However, no increase in the Contract Sum or Contract Time shall be allowed for such change
unless the Contractor has acted promptly and responsively in submitting names as required.
5.2.4 The Contractor shall not change a Subcontractor, person or entity previously selected if the Owner or Architect makes
reasonable objection to such substitute. „,ot�
ALA DOCUMENT A201-GENERAL CONDITIONS OF THE CONTRACT FOR CONSTRUCTION - 1997 EDITION - AIA - COPYRIGHT 1997 - n.
AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF ARCHITECTS, 1735 NEW YORK AVENUE N.W., WASHINGTON, D.C. 20006-5292. WARNING: Unlicensed photocopying
violates U.S.copyright laws and will subject the violator to legal prosecution.This document was electronically produced with permission of the AIA and can be
reproduced without violation until the date of expiration as noted below.
Electronic Format A201-1997
User Document: 97A201,CON— 11/12/1998.AIA License Number 107575,which expires on 1/31/1999—Page#22
the Architect when the response or supporting data will be furnished or advise the Architect that no supporting data will be
furnished. Upon receipt of the response or supporting data, if any, the Architect will either reject or approve the Claim in whole
or in part.
4.4.5 The Architect will approve or reject Claims by written decision, which shall state the reasons therefor and which shall
notify the parties of any change in the Contract Sum or Contract Time or both. The approval or rejection of a Claim by the
Architect shall be final and binding on the parties but subject to mediation and arbitration.
4.4.6 When a written decision of the Architect states that(1)the decision is final but subject to mediation and arbitration and
(2) a demand for arbitration of a Claim covered by such decision must be made within 30 days after the date on which the party
making the demand receives the final written decision, then failure to demand arbitration within said 30 days'period shall result in
the Architect's decision becoming final and binding upon the Owner and Contractor. If the Architect renders a decision after
arbitration proceedings have been initiated, such decision may be entered as evidence, but shall not supersede arbitration
proceedings unless the decision is acceptable to all parties concerned.
4.4.7 Upon receipt of a Claim against the Contractor or at any time thereafter, the Architect or the Owner may, but is not
obligated to, notify the surety, if any,of the nature and amount of the Claim. If the Claim relates to a possibility of a Contractor's
default, the Architect or the Owner may, but is not obligated to, notify the surety and request the surety's assistance in resolving
the controversy.
4.4.8 If a Claim relates to or is the subject of a mechanic's lien,the party asserting such Claim may proceed in accordance with
applicable law to comply with the lien notice or filing deadlines prior to resolution of the Claim by the Architect,by mediation or
by arbitration.
4.5 MEDIATION
4.5.1 Any Claim arising out of or related to the Contract, except Claims relating to aesthetic effect and except those waived as
provided for in Subparagraphs 4.3.10, 9.10.4 and 9.10.5 shall, after initial decision by the Architect or 30 days after submission
of the Claim to the Architect,be subject to mediation as a condition precedent to arbitration or the institution of legal or equitable
proceedings by either party.
4.5.2 The parties shall endeavor to resolve their Claims by mediation which, unless the parties mutually agree otherwise, shall
be in accordance with the Construction Industry Mediation Rules of the American Arbitration Association currently in effect.
Request for mediation shall be filed in writing with the other patty to the Contract and with the American Arbitration Association.
The request may be made concurrently with the filing of a demand for arbitration but, in such event; mediation shall proceed in
advance of arbitration or legal or equitable proceedings,which shall be stayed pending mediation for a period of 60 days from the
date of filing,unless stayed for a longer period by agreement of the parties or court order.
4.5.3 The parties shall share the mediator's fee and any filing fees equally.The mediation shall be held in the place where the
Project is located, unless another location is mutually agreed upon. Agreements reached in mediation shaII be enforceable as
settlement agreements in any court having jurisdiction thereof.
4.6 ARBITRATION
4.6.1 Any Claim arising out of or related to the Contract,except Claims relating to aesthetic effect and except those waived as
provided for in Subparagraphs 4.3.10,9.10.4 and 9.10.5,shall, after decision by the Architect or 30 days after submission of the
Claim to the Architect,be subject to arbitration. Prior to arbitration,the parties shall endeavor to resolve disputes by mediation in
accordance with the provisions of Paragraph 4.5.
4.6.2 Claims not resolved by mediation shall be decided by arbitration which,unless the parties mutually agree otherwise,shall
be in accordance with the Construction Industry Arbitration Rules of the American Arbitration Association currently in effect.
The demand for arbitration shall be filed in writing with the other party to the Contract and with the American Arbitration
Association,and a copy shall be filed with the Architect.
4.6.3 A demand for arbitration shall be made within the time limits specified in Subparagraphs 4.4.6 and 4.6.1 as applicable,
and in other cases within a reasonable time after the Claim has arisen, and in no event shall it be made after the date when
O
ALA DOCUMENT A201-GENERAL CONDITIONS OF THE CONTRACT FOR CONSTRUCTION - 1997 EDITION - AIA - COPYRIGHT 1997 - THE
AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF ARCHITECTS, 1735 NEW YORK AVENUE N.W., WASHINGTON, D.C. 20006-5292. WARNING: Unlicensed photocopying
violates U.S. copyright laws and will subject the violator to legal prosecution.This document was electronically produced with permission of the AIA and can be
reproduced without violation until the date of expiration as noted below.
Electronic Format A201-1997
User Document: 97A20I.CON— 11/12/1998.AIA License Number 107575,which expires on 1/31/1999—Page#21
4.3.7 Claims for Additional Time
4.3.7.1 If the Contractor wishes to make Claim for an increase in the Contract Time, written notice as provided herein sh'"�"°°�
given. The Contractor's Claim shall include an estimate of cost and of probable effect of delay on progress of the Work.
case of a continuing delay only one Claim is necessary.
4.3.7.2 If adverse weather conditions are the basis for a Claim for additional time, such Claim shall be documented by data
substantiating that weather conditions were abnormal for the period of time, could not have been reasonably anticipated and had
an adverse effect on the scheduled construction.
4.3.8 Injury or Damage to Person or Property. If either party to the Contract suffers injury or damage to person or property
because of an act or omission of the other party, or of others for whose acts such party is legally responsible, written notice of
such injury or damage, whether or not insured, shall be given to the other parry within a reasonable time not exceeding 21 days
after discovery. The notice shall provide sufficient detail to enable the other party to investigate the matter.
4.3.9 If unit prices are stated in the Contact Documents or subsequently agreed upon, and if quantities originally
contemplated are materially changed in a proposed Change Order or Construction Change Directive so that application of such
unit prices to quantities of Work proposed will cause substantial inequity to the Owner or Contractor, the applicable unit prices
shall be equitably adjusted.
4.3.10 Claims for Consequential Damages. The Contractor and Owner waive Claims against each other for consequential
damages arising out of or relating to this Contract.This mutual waiver includes:
.1 damages incurred by the Owner for rental expenses, for losses of use, income, profit, financing, business and
reputation,and for loss of management or employee productivity or of the services of such persons;and
.2 damages incurred by the Contractor for principal office expenses including the compensation of personnel stationed
there, for losses of financing,business and reputation, and for loss of profit except anticipated profit arising directly
from the Work. 0alk
This mutual waiver is applicable, without limitation, to all consequential damages due to either party's termination in accordance
with Article 14. Nothing contained in this Subparagraph 4.3.10 shall be deemed to preclude an award of liquidated direct
damages,when applicable,in accordance with the requirements of the Contract Documents.
4.4 RESOLUTION OF CLAIMS AND DISPUTES
4.4.1 Decision of Architect. Claims, including those alleging an error or omission by the Architect but excluding those arising
under Paragraphs 10.3 through 10.5, shall be referred initially to the Architect for decision. An initial decision by the Architect
shall be required as a condition precedent to mediation,arbitration or litigation of all Claims between the Contractor and Owner
arising prior to the date final payment is due, unless 30 days have passed after the Claim has been referred to the Architect with
no decision having been rendered by the Architect. The Architect will not decide disputes between the Contractor and persons or
entities other than the Owner.
4.4.2 The Architect will review Claims and within ten days of the receipt of the Claim take one or more of the following
actions: (1) request additional supporting data from the claimant or a response with supporting data from the other party, (2)
reject the Claim in whole or in part,(3)approve the Claim, (4)suggest a compromise,or(5)advise the parties that the Architect
is unable to resolve the Claim if the Architect lacks sufficient information to evaluate the merits of the Claim or if the Architect
concludes that,in the Architect's sole discretion,it would be inappropriate for the Architect to resolve the Claim.
4.4.3 In evaluating Claims, the Architect may, but shall not be obligated to,consult with or seek information from either party
or from persons with special knowledge or expertise who may assist the Architect in rendering a decision. The Architect may
request the Owner to authorize retention of such persons at the Owner's expense.
4.4.4 If the Architect requests a party to provide a response to a Claim or to furnish additional supporting data,such party shall
respond,within ten days after receipt of such request,and shall either provide a response on the requested supporting data,advise
AIA DOCUMENT A201-GENERAL CONDITIONS OF THE CONTRACT FOR CONSTRUCTION - 1997 EDITION - AIA - COPYRIGHT 1997 -
AMERICAN INS TITU i E OF ARCHrrECTS, 1735 NEW YORK AVENUE N.W., WASHINGTON, D.C. 20006-5292. WARNING: Unlicensed photocopying
violates U.S. copyright laws and will subject the violator to legal prosecution.This document was electtottically produced with permission of the AIA and can be
reproduced without violation until the date of expiration as noted below.
Electronic Format A201-1997
User Document:97A201.CON— 11/12/1998.AIA License Number 107575,which expires on 1/31/1999—Page#20
4.2.11 The Architect will interpret and decide matters concerning performance under, and requirements of, the Contract
Documents on written request of either the Owner or Contractor. The Architect's response to such requests will be made in
00"* writing within any time limits agreed upon or otherwise with reasonable promptness. If no agreement is made concerning the time
within which interpretations required of the Architect shall be furnished in compliance with this Paragraph 4.2, then delay shall
not be recognized on account of failure by the Architect to furnish such interpretations until 15 days after written request is made
for them.
4.2.12 Interpretations and decisions of the Architect will be consistent with the intent of and reasonably inferable from the
Contract Documents and will be in writing or in the form of drawings. When making such interpretations and initial decisions,the
Architect will endeavor to secure faithful performance by both Owner and Contractor, will not show partiality to either and will
not be liable for results of interpretations or decisions so rendered in good faith.
4.2.13 The Architect's decisions on matters relating to aesthetic effect will be final if consistent with the intent expressed in the
Contract Documents.
4.3 CLAIMS AND DISPUTES
4.3.1 Definition. A Claim is a demand or assertion by one of the parties seeking, as a matter of right, adjustment or
interpretation of Contract terms, payment of money, extension of time or other relief with respect to the terms of the Contract.
The term "Claim" also includes other disputes and matters in question between the Owner and Contractor arising out of or
relating to the Contract. Claims must be initiated by written notice. The responsibility to substantiate Claims shall rest with the
party making the Claim.
4.3.2 Time Limits on Claims.Claims by either party must be initiated within 21 days after occurrence of the event giving rise
to such Claim or within 21 days after the claimant first recognizes the condition giving rise to the Claim, whichever is later.
Claims must be initiated by written notice to the Architect and the other party.
4.3.3 Continuing Contract Performance. Pending final resolution of a Claim except as otherwise agreed in writing or as
provided in Subparagraph 9.7.1 and Article 14, the Contractor shall proceed diligently with performance of the Contract and the
Owner shall continue to make payments in accordance with the Contract Documents.
4.3.4 Claims for Concealed or Unknown Conditions. If conditions are encountered at the site which are (1) subsurface or
otherwise concealed physical conditions which differ materially from those indicated in the Contract Documents or(2)unknown
physical conditions of an unusual nature, which differ materially from those ordinarily found to exist and generally recognized as
inherent in construction activities of the character provided for in the Contract Documents, then notice by the observing party
shall be given to the other party promptly before conditions are disturbed and in no event later than 21 days after first observance
of the conditions. The Architect will promptly investigate such conditions and, if they differ materially and cause an increase or
decrease in the Contractor's cost of or time required for, performance of any part of the Work, will recommend an equitable
adjustment in the Contract Sum or Contract Time, or both. If the Architect determines that the conditions at the site are not
materially different from those indicated in the Contract Documents and that no change in the terms of the Contract is justified,
the Architect shall so notify the Owner and Contractor in writing,stating the reasons.Claims by either party in opposition to such
determination must be made within 21 days after the Architect has given notice of the decision. If the conditions encountered are
materially different, the Contract Sum and Contract Time shall be equitably adjusted, but if the Owner and Contractor cannot
agree on an adjustment in the Contract Sum or Contract Time, the adjustment shall be referred to the Architect for initial
determination,subject to further proceedings pursuant to Paragraph 4.4.
4.3.5 Claims for Additional Cost. If the Contractor wishes to make Claim for an increase in the Contract Sum,written notice
as provided herein shall be given before proceeding to execute the Work. Prior notice is not required for Claims relating to an
emergency endangering life or property arising under Paragraph 10.6.
4.3.6 If the Contractor believes additional cost is involved for reasons including but not limited to(1)a written interpretation
from the Architect, (2) an order by the Owner to stop the Work where the Contractor was not at fault, (3) a written order for a
minor change in the Work issued by the Architect, (4) failure of payment by the Owner, (5) termination of the Contract by the
Owner,(6)Owner's suspension or(7)other reasonable grounds,Claim shall be filed in accordance with this Paragraph 4.3.
ALA DOCUMENT A201-GENERAL CONDITIONS OF THE CONTRACT FOR CONSTRUCTION - 1997 EDITION - ALA - COPYRIGHT 1997 - THE
AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF ARCHITECTS, 1735 NEW YORK AVENUE N.W., WASHINGTON, D.C. 20006-5292. WARNING: Unlicensed photocopying
violates U.S. copyright laws and will subject the violator to legal prosecution. This document was electronically produced with permission of the ALA and can be
reproduced without violation until the date of expiration as noted below.
Electronic Format A201-1997
User Document:97A20LCON— 11/12/1998.AIA License Number 107575,which expires on 1/31/1999—Page 00 19
4.2.2 The Architect, as a representative of the Owner, will visit the site at intervals appropriate to the stage of the Contractor's
operations (1) to become generally familiar with and to keep the Owner informed about the progress and quality of the portiga.„Qf
the Work completed, (2) to endeavor to guard the Owner against defects and deficiencies in the Work, and (3) to determi
general if the Work is being performed in a manner indicating that the Work, when fully completed, will be in accordance w,.
the Contract Documents. However, the Architect will not be required to make exhaustive or continuous on-site inspections to
check the quality or quantity of the Work. The Architect will neither have control over or charge of, nor be responsible for, the
construction means, methods, techniques, sequences or procedures, or for the safety precautions and programs in connection with
the Work, since these are solely the Contractor's rights and responsibilities under the Contract Documents, except as provided in
Subparagraph 3.3.1.
4.2.3 The Architect will not be responsible for the Contractor's failure to perform the Work in accordance with the
requirements of the Contract Documents. The Architect will not have control over or charge of and will not be responsible for
acts or omissions of the Contractor, Subcontractors, or their agents or employees, or any other persons or entities performing
portions of the Work.
4.2.4 Communications Facilitating Contract Administration. Except as otherwise provided in the Contract Documents or
when direct communications have been specially authorized,the Owner and Contractor shall endeavor to communicate with each
other through the Architect about matters arising out of or relating to the Contract. Communications by and with the Architect's
consultants shall be through the Architect. Communications by and with Subcontractors and material suppliers shall be through
the Contractor.Communications by and with separate contractors shall be through the Owner.
4.2.5 Based on the Architect's evaluations of the Contractor's Applications for Payment, the Architect will review and certify
the amounts due the Contractor and will issue Certificates for Payment in such amounts.
4.2.6 The Architect will have authority to reject Work that does not conform to the Contract Documents. Whenever the
Architect considers it necessary or advisable, the Architect will have authority to require inspection or testing of the Work in
accordance with Subparagraphs 13.5.2 and 13.5.3, whether or not such Work is fabricated, installed or completed. However,
neither this authority of the Architect nor a decision made in good faith either to exercise or not to exercise such authority shall
give rise to a duty or responsibility of the Architect to the Contractor, Subcontractors, material and equipment suppliers,
agents or employees,or other persons or entities performing portions of the Work.
4.2.7 The Architect will review and approve or take other appropriate action upon the Contractor's submittals such as Shop_
Drawings, Product Data and Samples, but only for the limited purpose of checking for conformance with information given and
the design concept expressed in the Contract Documents.The Architect's action will be taken with such reasonable promptness as
to cause no delay in the Work or in the activities of the Owner, Contractor or separate contractors,while allowing sufficient time
in the Architect's professional judgment to permit adequate review. Review of such submittals is not conducted for the purpose of
determining the accuracy and completeness of other details such as dimensions and quantities, or for substantiating instructions
for installation or performance of equipment or systems,all of which remain the responsibility of the Contractor as required by
the Contract Documents. The Architect's review of the Contractor's submittals shall not relieve the Contractor of the obligations
under Paragraphs 3.3, 3.5 and 3.12.The Architect's review shall not constitute approval of safety precautions or, unless otherwise
specifically stated by the Architect, of any construction means, methods, techniques, sequences or procedures. The Architect's
approval of a specific item shall not indicate approval of an assembly of which the item is a component.
4.2.8 The Architect will prepare Change Orders and Construction Change Directives,and may authorize minor changes in the
Work as provided in Paragraph 7.4,
4.2.9 The Architect will conduct inspections to determine the date or dates of Substantial Completion and the date of final
completion,will receive and forward to the Owner, for the Owner's review and records,written warranties and related documents
required by the Contract and assembled by the Contractor,and will issue a final Certificate for Payment upon compliance with the
requirements of the Contract Documents.
4.2.10 If the Owner and Architect agree,the Architect will provide one or more project representatives to assist in carrying out
the Architect's responsibilities at the site. The duties, responsibilities and limitations of authority of such project representatives
shall be as set forth in an exhibit to be incorporated in the Contract Documents.
ALA DOCUMENT A201-GENERAL CONDITIONS OF THE CONTRACT FOR CONSTRUCTION - 1997 EDITION - ALA - COPYRIGHT 1997 - Ti
AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF ARCHITECTS, 1735 NEW YORK AVENUE N.W., WASHINGTON, D.C. 20006-5292. WARNING: Unlicensed photocopying
violates U.S. copyright laws and will subject the violator to legal prosecution.This document was electronically produced with permission of the ALA and can be
reproduced without violation until the due of expiration as noted below.
Electronic Format A201-1997
User Document:97A20,1,CON— 11/12/1998.AIA License Number 107575,which expires on 1/31/1999—Page#18
shall be charged to the Contractor.
3.16 ACCESS TO WORK
3.16.1 The Contractor shall provide the Owner and Architect access to the Work in preparation and progress wherever located.
3.17 ROYALTIES, PATENTS AND COPYRIGHTS
3.17.1 The Contractor shall pay all royalties and license fees. The Contractor shall defend suits or claims for infringement of
copyrights and patent rights and shall hold the Owner and Architect harmless from loss on account thereof, but shall not be
responsible for such defense or loss when a particular design, process or product of a particular manufacturer or manufacturers is
required by the Contract Documents or where the copyright violations are contained in Drawings, Specifications or other
documents prepared by the Owner or Architect. However, if the Contractor has reason to believe that the required design, process
or product is an infringement of a copyright or a patent,the Contractor shall be responsible for such loss unless such information
is promptly furnished to the Architect.
3.18 INDEMNIFICATION
3.18.1 To the fullest extent permitted by law and to the extent claims, damages, losses or expenses are not covered by Project
Management Protective Liability insurance purchased by the Contractor in accordance with Paragraph 11.3, the Contractor shall
indemnify and hold harmless the Owner, Architect, Architect's consultants, and agents and employees of any of them from and
against claims, damages, losses and expenses, including but not limited to attorneys' fees, arising out of or resulting from
performance of the Work, provided that such claim, damage, loss or expense is attributable to bodily injury, sickness, disease or
death,or to injury to or destruction of tangible property(other than the Work itself),but only to the extent caused by the negligent
acts or omissions of the Contractor, a Subcontractor, anyone directly or indirectly employed by them or anyone for whose acts
they may be liable, regardless of whether or not such claim, damage, loss or expense is caused in part by a party indemnified
hereunder. Such obligation shall not be construed to negate, abridge, or reduce other rights or obligations of indemnity which
would otherwise exist as to a party or person described in this Paragraph 3.18.
3.18.2 In claims against any person or entity indemnified under this Paragraph 3.18 by an employee of the Contractor, a
Subcontractor, anyone directly or indirectly employed by them or anyone for whose acts they may be liable, the indemnification
obligation under Subparagraph 3.18.1 shall not be limited by a limitation on amount or type of damages,compensation or benefits
payable by or for the Contractor or a Subcontractor under workers' compensation acts, disability benefit acts or other employee
benefit acts.
ARTICLE 4 ADMINISTRATION OF THE CONTRACT
4.1 ARCHITECT
4.1.1 The Architect is the person lawfully licensed to practice architecture or an entity lawfully practicing architecture
identified as such in the Agreement and is referred to throughout the Contract Documents as if singular in number. The term
"Architect"means the Architect or the Architect's authorized representative.
4.1.2 Duties, responsibilities and limitations of authority of the Architect as set forth in the Contract Documents shall not be
restricted, modified or extended without written consent of the Owner, Contractor and Architect. Consent shall not be
unreasonably withheld.
4.1.3 If the employment of the Architect is terminated, the Owner shall employ a new Architect against whom the Contractor
has no reasonable objection and whose status under the Contract Documents shall be that of the former Architect.
4.2 ARCHITECT'S ADMINISTRATION OF THE CONTRACT
4.2.1 The Architect will provide administration of the Contract as described in the Contract Documents, and will be an
Owner's representative(1)during construction,(2) until final payment is due and(3)with the Ownees concurrence, from time to
time during the one-year period for correction of Work described in Paragraph 12.2. The Architect will have authority to act on
behalf of the Owner only to the extent provided in the Contract Documents, unless otherwise modified in writing in accordance
with other provisions of the Contract.
ALA DOCUMENT A201-GENERAL CONDITIONS OF THE CONTRACT FOR CONSTRUCTION - 1997 EDITION - AIA - COPYRIGHT 1997 - THE
AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF ARCHITECTS, 1735 NEW YORK AVENUE N.W., WASHINGTON, D.C. 20006-5292. WARNING: Unlicensed photocopying
violates U.S. copyright laws and will subject the violator to legal prosecution.This document was electronically produced with permission of the AIA and can be
reproduced without violation until the date of expiration as noted below.
Electronic Format A201-1997
User Document:97A201-CON-- 11/12/1998.AIA License Number 107575,which expires on 1/31/1999--Page#17
3.12.7 The Contractor shall perform no portion of the Work for which the Contract Documents require submittal and reviea�
Shop Drawings, Product Data, Samples or similar submittals until the respective submittal has been approved by the Architec
3.12.8 The Work shall be in accordance with approved submittals except that the Contractor shall not be relieved of
responsibility for deviations from requirements of the Contract Documents by the Architect's approval of Shop Drawings, Product
Data, Samples or similar submittals unless the Contractor has specifically informed the Architect in writing of such deviation at
the time of submittal and(1)the Architect has given written approval to the specific deviation as a minor change in the Work, or
(2) a Change Order or Construction Change Directive has been issued authorizing the deviation. The Contractor shall not be
relieved of responsibility for errors or omissions in Shop Drawings,Product Data,Samples or similar submittals by the Architect's
approval thereof.
3.12.9 The Contractor shall direct specific attention, in writing or on resubmitted Shop Drawings, Product Data, Samples or
similar submittals, to revisions other than those requested by the Architect on previous submittals. In the absence of such written
notice the Architect's approval of a resubmission shall not apply to such revisions.
3.12.10 The Contractor shall not be required to provide professional services which constitute the practice of architecture or
engineering unless such services are specifically required by the Contract Documents for a portion of the Work or unless the
Contractor needs to provide such services in order to carry out the Contractor's responsibilities for construction means,methods,
techniques, sequences and procedures. The Contractor shall not be required to provide professional services in violation of
applicable law. If professional design services or certifications by a design professional related to systems,materials or equipment
are specifically required of the Contractor by the Contract Documents, the Owner and the Architect will specify all performance
and design criteria that such services must satisfy. The Contractor shall cause such services or certifications to be provided by a
properly licensed design professional, whose signature and seal shall appear on all drawings, calculations, specifications,
certifications, Shop Drawings and other submittals prepared by such professional. Shop Drawings and other submittals related to
the Work designed or certified by such professional, if prepared by others, shall bear such professional's written approval when
submitted to the Architect. The Owner and the Architect shall be entitled to rely upon the adequacy, accuracy and completeomik
of the services, certifications or approvals performed by such design professionals, provided the Owner and Architect
specified to the Contractor all performance and design criteria that such services must satisfy. Pursuant to this Subparagrap..
3.12.10,the Architect will review,approve or take other appropriate action on submittals only for the limited purpose of checking
for conformance with information given and the design concept expressed in the Contract Documents.The Contractor shall not be
responsible for the adequacy of the performance or design criteria required by the Contract Documents.
3.13 USE OF SITE
3.13.1 The Contractor shall confine operations at the site to areas permitted by law, ordinances, permits and the Contract
Documents and shall not unreasonably encumber the site with materials or equipment.
3.14 CUTTING AND PATCHING
3.14.1 The Contractor shall be responsible for cutting,fitting or patching required to complete the Work or to make its parts fit
together properly.
3.14.2 The Contractor shall not damage or endanger a portion of the Work or fully or partially completed construction of the
Owner or separate contractors by cutting,patching or otherwise altering such construction,or by excavation.The Contractor shall
not cut or otherwise alter such construction by the Owner or a separate contractor except with written consent of the Owner and of
such separate contractor,such consent shall not be unreasonably withheld.The Contractor shall not unreasonably withhold from
the Owner or a separate contractor the Contractor's consent to cutting or otherwise altering the Work.
3.15 CLEANING UP
3.15.1 The Contractor shall keep the premises and surrounding area free from accumulation of waste materials or rubbish
caused by operations under the Contract. At completion of the Work, the Contractor shall remove from and about the Project
waste materials,rubbish,the Contractors tools,construction equipment,machinery and surplus materials.
3.15.2 If the Contractor fails to clean up as provided in the Contract Documents, the Owner may do so and the cost ther*64
ALA DOCUMENT A201-GENERAL CONDITIONS OF THE CONTRACT FOR CONSTRUCTION - 1997 EDITION - ALA - COPYRIGHT 1997 - Th-
AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF ARCHITECTS, 1735 NEW YORK AVENUE N.W., WASHINGTON, D.C. 20006.5292. WARNING: Unlicensed photocopying
violates U.S. copyright laws and will subject the violator to legal prosecution. This document was electronically produced with permission of the ALA and can be
reproduced without violation until the date of expiration as noted below.
Electronic Format A201-1997
User Document: 97A20*1-.CON— 11/12/1998.AIA License Number 107575,which expires on 1/31/1999--Page#16
3.9 SUPERINTENDENT
3.9.1 The Contractor shall employ a competent superintendent and necessary assistants who shall be in attendance at the
Project site during performance of the Work. The superintendent shall represent the Contractor, and communications given to the
superintendent shall be as binding as if given to the Contractor. important communications shall be confL-med in writing. Other
communications shall be similarly confirmed on written request in each case.
3.10 CONTRACTOR'S CONSTRUCTION SCHEDULES
3.10.1 The Contractor, promptly after being awarded the Contract, shall prepare and submit for the Owner's and Architect's
information a Contractor's construction schedule for the Work. The schedule shall not exceed time limits current under the
Contract Documents, shall be revised at appropriate intervals as required by the conditions of the Work and Project, shall be
related to the entire Project to the extent required by the Contract Documents, and shall provide for expeditious and practicable
execution of the Work.
3.10.2 The Contractor shall prepare and keep current, for the Architect's approval, a schedule of submittals which is
coordinated with the Contractor's construction schedule and allows the Architect reasonable time to review submittals.
3.10.3 The Contractor shall perform the Work in general accordance with the most recent schedules submitted to the Owner
and Architect.
3.11 DOCUMENTS AND SAMPLES AT THE SITE
3.11.1 The Contractor shall maintain at the site for the Owner one record copy of the Drawings, Specifications, Addenda,
Change Orders and other Modifications, in good order and marked currently to record field changes and selections made during
construction, and one record copy of approved Shop Drawings, Product Data, Samples and similar required submittals. These
shall be available to the Architect and shall be delivered to the Architect for submittal to the Owner upon completion of the Work.
3.12 SHOP DRAWINGS, PRODUCT DATA AND SAMPLES
3.12.1 Shop Drawings are drawings, diagrams, schedules and other data specially prepared for the Work by the Contractor or a
Subcontractor, Sub-subcontractor,manufacturer,supplier or distributor to illustrate some portion of the Work.
3.12.2 Product Data are illustrations, standard schedules, performance charts, instructions, brochures, diagrams and other
information furnished by the Contractor to illustrate materials or equipment for some portion of the Work.
3.12.3 Samples are physical examples which illustrate materials, equipment or workmanship and establish standards by which
the Work will be judged.
3.12.4 Shop Drawings, Product Data, Samples and similar submittals are not Contract Documents. The purpose of their
submittal is to demonstrate for those portions of the Work for which submittals are required by the Contract Documents the way
by which the Contractor proposes to conform to the information given and the design concept expressed in the Contract
Documents. Review by the Architect is subject to the limitations of Subparagraph 4.2.7. Informational submittals upon which the
Architect is not expected to take responsive action may be so identified in the Contract Documents. Submittals which are not
required by the Contract Documents may be returned by the Architect without action.
3.12.5 The Contractor shall review for compliance with the Contract Documents, approve and submit to the Architect Shop
Drawings, Product Data, Samples and similar submittals required by the Contract Documents with reasonable promptness and in
such sequence as to cause no delay in the Work or in the activities of the Owner or of separate contractors. Submittals which are
not marked as reviewed for compliance with the Contract Documents and approved by the Contractor may be returned by the
Architect without action.
3.12.6 By approving and submitting Shop Drawings, Product Data, Samples and similar submittals, the Contractor represents
that the Contractor has determined and verified materials, field measurements and field construction criteria related thereto, or
will do so, and has checked and coordinated the information contained within such submittals with the requirements of the Work
and of the Contract Documents.
r
ALA DOCUMENT A201-GENERAL CONDITIONS OF THE CONTRACT FOR CONSTRUCTION - 1997 EDITION - AIA - COPYRIGHT 1997 - THE
AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF ARCHITECTS, 1735 NEW YORK AVENUE N.W., WASHINGTON, D.C. 20006.5292. WARNING: Unlicensed photocopying
violates U.S. copyright laws and will subject the violator to legal prosecution.This document was electronically produced with pertnission of the ALA and can be
reproduced without violation until the date of expiration as noted below.
Electronic Format A201-1997
User Document:97A20LCON-- 11/12/1998.AIA License Number 107575,which expires on 1/31/1999--Page#15
3.5 WARRANTY
3.5.1 The Contractor warrants to the Owner and Architect that materials and equipment furnished under the Contract w
of good quality and new unless otherwise required or permitted by the Contract Documents, that the Work will be free
defects not inherent in the quality required or permitted, and that the Work will conform to the requirements of the Contract
Documents. Work not conforming to these requirements, including substitutions not property approved and authorized, may be
considered defective. The Contractor's warranty excludes remedy for damage or defect caused by abuse, modifications not
executed by the Contractor, improper or insufficient maintenance, improper operation, or normal wear and tear and normal usage.
If required by the Architect, the Contractor shall furnish satisfactory evidence as to the kind and quality of materials and
equipment.
3.6 TAXES
3.6.1 The Contractor shall pay sales, consumer, use and similar taxes for the Work provided by the Contractor which are
legally enacted when bids are received or negotiations concluded, whether or not yet effective or merely scheduled to go into
effect.
3.7 PERMITS, FEES AND NOTICES
3.7.1 Unless otherwise provided in the Contract Documents, the Contractor shall secure and pay for the building permit and
other permits and governmental fees, licenses and inspections necessary for proper execution and completion of the Work which
are customarily secured after execution of the Contract and which are legally required when bids are received or negotiations
concluded.
3.7.2 The Contractor shall comply with and give notices required by laws, ordinances, rules, regulations and lawful orders of
public authorities applicable to performance of the Work
3.7.3 It is not the Contractor's responsibility to ascertain that the Contract Documents are in accordance with applicable laws,
statutes, ordinances, building codes,and rules and regulations. However, if the Contractor observes that portions of the Contract
Documents are at variance therewith, the Contractor shall promptly notify the Architect and Owner in writing, and necessary
changes shall be accomplished by appropriate Modification.
3.7.4 If the Contractor performs Work knowing it to be contrary to laws, statutes, ordinances, building codes, and rules and
regulations without such notice to the Architect and Owner,the Contractor shall assume appropriate responsibility for such Work
and shall bear the costs attributable to correction.
3.8 ALLOWANCES
3.8.1 The Contractor shall include in the Contract Sum all allowances stated in the Contract Documents. Items covered by
allowances shall be supplied for such amounts and by such persons or entities as the Owner may direct, but the Contractor shall
not be required to employ persons or entities to whom the Contractor has reasonable objection.
3.8.2 Unless otherwise provided in the Contract Documents:
.1 allowances shall cover the cost to the Contractor of materials and equipment delivered at the site and all required
taxes,less applicable trade discounts;
.2 Contractor's costs for unloading and handling at the site, labor, installation costs, overhead, profit and other
expenses contemplated for stated allowance amounts shall be included in the Contract Sum but not in the
allowances;
.3 whenever costs are more than or less than allowances, the Contract Sum shall be adjusted accordingly by Change
Order. The amount of the Change Order shall reflect (1) the difference between actual costs and the allowances
under Clause 3.8.2.1 and(2)changes in Contractor's costs under Clause 3.8.2.2.
3.8.3 Materials and equipment under an allowance shall be selected by the Owner in sufficient time to avoid delay in the
Work.
ALA DOCUMENT A201-GENERAL CONDITIONS OF THE CONTRACT FOR CONSTRUCTION - 1997 EDITION - AIA - COPYRIGHT 1997 - -
AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF ARCHITECTS, 1735 NEW YORK AVENUE N.W., WASHINGTON, D.C. 20006-5292. WARNING: Unlicensed photocopying
violates U.S. copyright laws and will subject the violator to legal prosecution.This document was electronically produced with permission of the AIA and can be
reproduced without violation until the date of expiration as noted below.
Electronic Format A201-1997
User Document: 97A20,1.CON— 11/12/1998.AIA License Number 107575,which expires on 1/31/1999—Page#14
carefully study and compare the various Drawings and other Contract Documents relative to that portion of the Work, as well as
the information furnished by the Owner pursuant to Subparagraph 2.2.3, shall take field measurements of any existing conditions
related to that portion of the Work and shall observe any conditions at the site affecting it. These obligations are for the purpose
of facilitating construction by the Contractor and are not for the purpose of discovering errors, omissions, or inconsistencies in the
Contract Documents; however, any errors, inconsistencies or omissions discovered by the Contractor shall be reported promptly
to the Architect as a request for information in such form as the Architect may require.
3.2.2 Any design errors or omissions noted by the Contractor during this review shall be reported promptly to the Architect,
but it is recognized that the Contractor's review is made in the Contractor's capacity as a contractor and not as a licensed design
professional unless otherwise specifically provided in the Contract Documents. The Contractor is not required to ascertain that the
Contract Documents are in accordance with applicable laws, statutes, ordinances, building codes, and rules and regulations, but
any nonconformity discovered by or made known to the Contractor shall be reported promptly to the Architect.
3.2.3 If the Contractor believes that additional cost or time is involved because of clarifications or instructions issued by the
Architect in response to the Contractor's notices or requests for information pursuant to Subparagraphs 3.2.1 and 3.2.2, the
Contractor shall make Claims as provided in Subparagraphs 4.3.6 and 4.3.7. If the Contractor fails to perform the obligations of
Subparagraphs 3.2.1 and 3.2.2, the Contractor shall pay such costs and damages to the Owner as would have been avoided if the
Contractor had performed such obligations. The Contractor shall not be liable to the Owner or Architect for damages resulting
from errors, inconsistencies or omissions in the Contract Documents or for differences between field measurements or conditions
and the Contract Documents unless the Contractor recognized such error, inconsistency, omission or difference and knowingly
failed to report it to the Architect.
3.3 SUPERVISION AND CONSTRUCTION PROCEDURES
3.3.1 The Contractor shall supervise and direct the Work, using the Contractor's best skill and attention. The Contractor shall
be solely responsible for and have control over construction means, methods, techniques, sequences and procedures and.for
coordinating all portions of the Work under the Contract, unless the Contract Documents give other specific instructions
concerning these matters. If the Contract Documents give specific instructions concerning construction means, methods,
techniques, sequences or procedures, the Contractor shall evaluate the jobsite safety thereof and, except as stated below, shall be
fully and solely responsible for the jobsite safety of such means,methods,techniques, sequences or procedures. If the Contractor
determines that such means, methods, techniques, sequences or procedures may not be safe, the Contractor shall give timely
written notice to the Owner and Architect and shall not proceed with that portion of the Work without further written instructions
from the Architect. If the Contractor is then instructed to proceed with the required means, methods, techniques, sequences or
procedures without acceptance of changes proposed by the Contractor, the Owner shall be solely responsible for any resulting
loss or damage.
3.3.2 The Contractor shall be responsible to the Owner for acts and omissions of the Contractor's employees, Subcontractors
and their agents and employees, and other persons or entities performing portions of the Work for or on behalf of the Contractor
or any of its Subcontractors.
3.3.3 The Contractor shall be responsible for inspection of portions of Work already performed to determine that such
portions are in proper condition to receive subsequent Work.
3.4 LABOR AND MATERIALS
3.4.1 Unless otherwise provided in the Contract Documents, the Contractor shall provide and pay for labor, materials,
equipment, tools, construction equipment and machinery, water, heat, utilities, transportation, and other facilities and services
necessary for proper execution and completion of the Work,whether temporary or permanent and whether or not incorporated or
to be incorporated in the Work
3.4.2 The Contractor may make substitutions only with the consent of the Owner, after evaluation by the Architect and in
accordance with a Change Order.
3.4.3 The Contractor shall enforce strict discipline and good order among the Contractor's employees and other persons
carrying out the Contract. The Contractor shall not permit employment of unfit persons or persons not skilled in tasks assigned to
them.
e
ALA DOCUMENT A201-GENERAL CONDITIONS OF THE CONTRACT FOR CONSTRUCTION - 1997 EDITION - AIA - COPYRIGHT 1997 - THE
AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF ARCHITECTS, 1735 NEW YORK AVENUE N.W., WASHINGTON, D.C. 20006-5292, WARNING: Unlicensed photocopying
violates U.S. copyright laws and will subject the violator to legal prosecution.This document was electronically produced with permission of the ALA and can be
reproduced without violation until the date of expiration as noted below.
Electronic Format A201-1997
User Document: 97A201.CON— 11/12/1998.AIA License Number 107575,which expires on 1/31/1999—Page 4 13
Contract. Furnishing of such evidence shall be a condition precedent to commencement or continuation of the Work. .Nfter suet
evidence has been furnished, the Owner shall not materially vary such financial arrangements without prior notice to tht
Contractor. AM W.—
2.2.2 Except for permits and fees, including those required under Subparagraph 3.7.1, which are the responsibility of the
Contractor under the Contract Documents, the Owner shall secure and pay for necessary approvals, easements, assessments anc
charges required for construction, use or occupancy of permanent structures or for permanent changes in existing facilities.
2.2.3 The Owner shall furnish surveys describing physical characteristics, legal limitations and utility locations for the site of
the Project,and a legal description of the site. The Contractor shall be entitled to rely on the accuracy of information furnished by
the Owner but shall exercise proper precautions relating to the safe performance of the Work.
2.2.4 Information or services required of the Owner by the Contract Documents shall be furnished by the Owner with
reasonable promptness. Any other information or services relevant to the Contractor's performance of the Work under the Owner's
control shall be furnished by the Owner after receipt from the Contractor of a written request for such information or services.
2.2.5 Unless otherwise provided in the Contract Documents, the Contractor will be fiunished, free of charge, such copies of
Drawings and Project Manuals as are reasonably necessary for execution of the Work.
2.3 OWNER'S RIGHT TO STOP THE WORK
2.3.1 If the Contractor fails to correct Work which is not in accordance with the requirements of the Contract Documents as
required by Paragraph 12.2 or persistently fails to carry out Work in accordance with the Contract Documents, the Owner may
issue a written order to the Contractor to stop the Work,or any portion thereof,until the cause for such order has been eliminated;
however, the right of the Owner to stop the Work shall not give rise to a duty on the part of the Owner to exercise this right for
the benefit of the Contractor or any other person or entity,except to the extent required by Subparagraph 6.1.3.
2.4 OWNER'S RIGHT TO CARRY OUT THE WORK
2.4.1 If the Contractor defaults or neglects to carry out the Work in accordance with the Contract Documents and fails w"k,a
seven-day period after receipt of written notice from the Owner to commence and continue correction of such default or n._.
with diligence and promptness, the Owner may after such seven-day period give the Contractor a second written notice to correct
such deficiencies within a three-day period. If the Contractor within such three-day period after receipt of such second notice fails
to commence and continue to correct any deficiencies,the Owner may, without prejudice to other remedies the Owner may have,
correct such deficiencies. In such case an appropriate Change Order shall be issued deducting from payments then or thereafter
due the Contractor the reasonable cost of correcting such deficiencies, including Owner's expenses and compensation for the
Architect's additional services made necessary by such default,neglect or failure.Such action by the Owner and amounts charged
to the Contractor are both subject to prior approval of the Architect. If payments then or thereafter due the Contractor are not
sufficient to cover such amounts,the Contractor shall pay the difference to the Owner.
ARTICLE 3 CONTRACTOR
3.1 GENERAL
3.1.1 The Contractor is the person or entity identified as such in the Agreement and is referred to throughout the Contract
Documents as if singular in number.The term"Contractor"means the Contractor or the Contractor's authorized representative.
3.1.2 The Contractor shall perform the Work in accordance with the Contract Documents.
3.1.3 The Contractor shall not be relieved of obligations to perform the Work in accordance with the Contract Documents
either by activities or duties of the Architect in the Architect's administration of the Contract,or by tests, inspections or approvals
required or performed by persons other than the Contractor.
3.2 REVIEW OF CONTRACT DOCUMENTS AND FIELD CONDITIONS BY CONTRACTOR
3.2.1 Since the Contract Documents are complementary, before starting each portion of the Work, the Contractor shall
ALA DOCUMENT A201-GENERAL CONDITIONS OF THE CONTRACT FOR CONSTRUCTION - 1997 EDITION - AIA - COPYRIGHT 1997 - .
AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF ARCHITECTS, 1735 NEW YORK AVENUE N.W., WASHINGTON, D.C. 20006-5292. WARNING: Unlicensed photocopying
violates U.S. copyright laws and will subject the violator to legal prosecution.This document was electronically produced with permission of the AIA and can be
reproduced without violation until the date of expiration as noted below.
Electronic Format A201-1997
User Document:97A20LCON— 11/12/1998.AIA License Number 107575,which expires on 1/31/1999—Page#12
1.3.1 Terms capitalized in these General Conditions include those which are(1) specifically defined.(2) the titles of numbered
articles and identified references to Paragraphs. Subparagraphs and Clauses in the document or(3) the titles of other documents
published by the American Institute of Architects.
1.4 INTERPRETATION
1.4.1 In the interest of brevity the Contract Documents frequently omit modifying words such as "all" and "any" and articles
such as "the" and "an," but the fact that a modifier or an article is absent from one statement and appears in another is not
intended to affect the interpretation of either statement.
1.5 EXECUTION OF CONTRACT DOCUMENTS
1.5.1 The Contract Documents shall be signed by the Owner and Contractor. if either the Owner or Contractor or both do not
sign all the Contract Documents,the Architect shall identify such unsigned Documents upon request.
1.5.2 Execution of the Contract by the Contractor is a representation that the Contractor has visited the site, become generally
familiar with local conditions under which the Work is to be performed and correlated personal observations with requirements of
the Contract Documents.
1.6 OWNERSHIP AND USE OF DRAWINGS, SPECIFICATIONS AND OTHER INSTRUMENTS OF SERVICE
1.6.1 The Drawings, Specifications and other documents,including those in electronic form,prepared by the Architect and the
Architect's consultants are Instruments of Service through which the Work to be executed by the Contractor is described. The
Contractor may retain one record set.Neither the Contractor nor any Subcontractor, Sub-subcontractor or material or equipment
supplier shall own or claim a copyright in the Drawings, Specifications and other documents prepared by the Architect or the
Architect's consultants,and unless otherwise indicated the Architect and the Architect's consultants shall be deemed the authors of
them and will retain all common law, statutory and other reserved rights, in addition to the copyrights.All copies of Instruments
of Service, except the Contractor's record set, shall be returned or suitably accounted for to the Architect, on request, upon
completion of the Work. The Drawings, Specifications and other documents prepared by the Architect and the Architect's
consultants, and copies thereof furnished to the Contractor,are for use solely with respect to this Project. They are not to be used
by the Contractor or any Subcontractor, Sub-subcontractor or material or equipment supplier on other projects or for additions to
this Project outside the scope of the Work without the specific written consent of the Owner, Architect and the Architect's
consultants. The Contractor, Subcontractors, Sub-subcontractors and material or equipment suppliers are authorized to use and
reproduce applicable portions of the Drawings, Specifications and other documents prepared by the Architect and the Architect's
consultants appropriate to and for use in the execution of their Work under the Contract Documents. All copies made under this
authorization shall bear the statutory copyright notice, if any, shown on the Drawings, Specifications and other documents
prepared by the Architect and the Architect's consultants. Submittal or distribution to meet official regulatory requirements or for
other purposes in connection with this Project is not to be construed as publication in derogation of the Architect's or Architect's
consultants'copyrights or other reserved rights.
ARTICLE 2 OWNER
2.1 GENERAL
2.1.1 The Owner is the person or entity identified as such in the Agreement and is referred to throughout the Contract
Documents as if singular in number. The Owner shall designate in writing a representative who shall have express authority to
bind the Owner with respect to all matters requiring the Owner's approval or authorization. Except as otherwise provided in
Subparagraph 4.2.1, the Architect does not have such authority. The term "Owner" means the Owner or the Owner's authorized
representative.
2.1.2 The Owner shall furnish to the Contractor within fifteen days after receipt of a written request, information necessary
and relevant for the Contractor to evaluate, give notice of or enforce mechanic's lien rights. Such information shall include a
correct statement of the record legal title to the property on which the Project is located,usually referred to as the site, and the
Owner's interest therein.
2.2 INFORMATION AND SERVICES REQUIRED OF THE OWNER
2.2.1 The Owner shall, at the written request of the Contactor,prior to commencement of the Work and thereafter, furnish to
the Contractor reasonable evidence that financial arrangements have been made to fulfill the Owner's obligations under the
. AIA DOCUMENT A201-GENERAL CONDITIONS OF THE CONTRACT FOR CONSTRUCTION - 1997 EDITION - AIA - COPYRIGHT 1997 - THE
AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF ARCHITECTS, 1735 NEW YORK AVENUE N.W., WASHINGTON, D.C. 20006-5292. WARNING: Unlicensed photocopying
violates U.S. copyright laws and will subject the violator to legal prosecution.This document was electronically produced with permission of the AIA and can be
reproduced without violation until the date of expiration as noted below.
Electronic Format A201-1997
User Document:97A201-CON— 11/12/1998.AIA License Number 107575,which expires on 1/31/1999--Page#1 I.
ARTICLE 1 GENERAL PROVISIONS
1.1 BASIC DEFINITIONS
1.1.1 THE CONTRACT DOCUMENTS
The Contract Documents consist of the Agreement between Owner and Contractor(hereinafter the Agreement), Conditions U.
Contract (General, Supplementary-and other Conditions), Drawings, Specifications, Addenda issued prior to execution of the
Contract,other documents listed in the Agreement and Modifications issued after execution of the Contract. A Modification is(1)
a written amendment to the Contract signed by both parties, (2) a Change Order, (3) a Construction Change Directive or (4) a
written order for a minor change in the Work issued by the Architect. Unless specifically enumerated in the Agreement, the
Contract Documents do not include other documents such as bidding requirements (advertisement or invitation to bid,
Instructions to Bidders,sample forms,the Contractor's bid or portions of Addenda relating to bidding requirements).
1.1.2 THE CONTRACT
The Contract Documents form the Contract for Construction. The Contract represents the entire and integrated agreement
between the parties hereto and supersedes prior negotiations, representations or agreements, either written or oral. The Contract
may be amended or modified only by a Modification. The Contract Documents shall not be construed to create a•contractual
relationship of any kind (1) between -the Architect and Contractor, (2) between the Owner and a Subcontractor or
Sub-subcontractor, (3) between the Owner and Architect or (4) between any persons or entities other than the Owner and
Contractor. The Architect shall,however, be entitled to performance and enforcement of obligations under the Contract intended
to facilitate performance of the Architect's duties.
1.1.3 THE WORK
The term "Work" means the construction and services required by the Contract Documents, whether completed or partially
completed, and includes all other labor,materials, equipment and services provided or to be provided by the Contractor,to fulfill
the Contractor's obligations. The Work may constitute the whole or a part of the Project.
1.1.4 THE PROJECT
The Project is the total construction of which the Work performed under the Contract Documents may be the whole or a part and
which may include construction by the Owner or by separate contractors.
1.1.5 THE DRAWINGS
The Drawings are the graphic and pictorial portions of the Contract Documents showing the design, location and dimensions of
the Work,generally including plans,elevations,sections,details,schedules and diagrams.
1.1.6 THE SPECIFICATIONS
The Specifications are that portion of the Contract Documents consisting of the written requirements for materials, equipment,
systems,standards and workmanship for the Work,and performance of related services.
1.1.7 THE PROJECT MANUAL
The Project Manual is a volume assembled for the Work which may include the bidding requirements,sample forms,Conditions
of the Contract and Specifications.
1.2 CORRELATION AND INTENT OF THE CONTRACT DOCUMENTS
1.2.1 The intent of the Contract Documents is to include all items necessary for the proper execution and completion of the
Work by the Contractor. The Contract Documents are complementary, and what is required by one shall be as binding as if
required by all; performance by the Contractor shall be required only to the extent consistent with the Contract Documents and
reasonably inferable from them as being necessary to produce the indicated results.
1.2.2 Organization of the Specifications into divisions,sections and articles,and arrangement of Drawings shall not control the
Contractor in dividing the Work among Subcontractors or in establishing the extent of Work to be performed by any trade.
1.2.3 Unless otherwise stated in the Contract Documents, words which have well-known technical or construction industry
meanings are used in the Contract Documents in accordance with such recognized meanings.
1.3 CAPITALIZATION
ALA DOCUMENT A201-GENERAL CONDITIONS OF THE CONTRACT FOR CONSTRUCTION - 1997 EDITION - ALA - COPYRIGHT 1997 - T.
AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF ARCHITECTS, 1735 NEW YORK AVENUE N.W., WASHINGTON, D.C. 20006-5292. WARNING: Unlicensed photocopying
violates U.S. copyright laws and will subjea the violator to legal prosecution.This document was electronically produced with permission of the ALA and can be
reproduced without violation until the date of expiration as noted below.
Electronic Format A201-1997
User Document: 97A201..CON— 11/12/1998.AIA License Number 107575,which expires on 1/31/1999--Page#10
4.3.7.2 2.3, 2.4, 3.3.1, 3.9, 3.12.9, 3.12.10, 4.3, 4.4.8, 4.6.5. 5.2.1.
Work, Definition of 8.2.2, 9.7, 9.10, 10.2.2, 10.3, 11.1.3, 11.4.6, 12??, 12.14,
1.1.3 13.3, 14
Written Consent Written Orders
1.6, 3.4.2, 3.12.8, 3.14.2, 4.1.2, 4.3.4, 4.6.4, 9.3.2, 9.8.5, 1.1.1, 2.3, 3.9, 4.3.6, 7, 8.2.2, 11.4.9, 12.1, 12.2, 13.5.2,
9.9.1,9.10.2,9.10.3, 11.4.1, 13.2, 13.4.2 14.3.1
Written Interpretations
4.2.11,4.2.12,4.3.6
Written Notice
AIA DOCUMENT A201-GENERAL CONDITIONS OF THE CONTRACT FOR CONSTRUCTION - 1997 EDITION - ALA - COPYRIGHT 1997 - THE
AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF ARCHITECTS, 1735 NEW YORK AVENUE N.W.,WASHINGTON,D.C. 20006-5292. WARNING: Unlicensed photocopying
violates U.S.copyright laws and will subject the violator to legal prosecution.This document was electronically produced with permission of the AIA and can be
reproduced without violation until the date of expiration as noted below.
Electronic Format A201-1997
User Document:97A201.CON— 11/12/1998.AIA License Number 107575,which expires on 1/31/1999--Page 49
Subcontractor, Definition of Termination of the Architect
5.1.1 4.1.3
SUBCONTRACTORS Termination of the Contractor
?-
5 14.2.2
Subcontractors, Work by TERMINATION OR SUSPENSION OF THE CONTRACT
1.2.2, 3.3.2, 3.12.1,4.2.3, 5.2.3, 5.3,5.4,9.3.1.2,9.6.7 14
Subcontractual Relations Tests and Inspections
5.3, 5.4, 9.3.1.2, 9.6, 9.10 10.2.1, 11.4.7, 11.4.8, 14.1, 3.1.3, 3.3.3, 4.2.2, 4.2.6, 4.2.9, 9.4.2, 9.8.3, 9.9.2, 9.10.1,
14.2.1, 14.3.2 10.3.2, 11.4.1.1, 12.2.1,13.5
Submittals TIME
1.6, 3.10, 3.11, 3.12, 4.2.7, 5.2.1, 5.2.3, 7.3.6, 9.2, 9.3, 9.8, 8
9.9.1, 9.10.2, 9.10.3, 11.1.3 Time,Delays and Extensions of
Subrogation,Waivers of 3.2.3, 4.3.1, 4.3.4, 4.3.7, 4.4.5, 5.2.3, 7.2.1, 7.3.1, 7.4.1,
6.1.1, 11.4.5, 11.4.7 7.5.1,8.3,9.5.1,9.7.1, 10.3.2, 10.6.1, 14.3.2
Substantial Completion Time Limits
4.2.9, 8.1.1, 8.1.3, 8.2.3, 9.4.2, 9.8, 9.9.1, 9.10.3, 9.10.4.2, 2.1.2, 2.2, 2.4, 3.2.1, 3.7.3, 3.10, 3.11, 3.12.5, 3.15.1, 4.2,
12.2, 13.7 4.3,4.4,4.5,4.6,5.2,5.3,5.4, 6.2.4,7.3,7.4,8.2,9.2,9.3.1,
Substantial Completion,Definition of 9.3.3, 9.4.1, 9.5, 9.6, 9.7, 9.8, 9.9, 9.10, 11.1.3, 11.4.1.5,
9.8.1 11.4.6, 11.4.10, 12.2, 13.5, 13.7, 14
Substitution of Subcontractors Time Limits on Claims
5.2.3, 5.2.4 4.3.2,4.3.4,4.3.8,4.4,4.5,4.6
Substitution of Architect Title to Work
4.1.3 9.3.2,9.3.3
Substitutions of Materials UNCOVERING AND CORRECTION OF WORK
3.4.2,3.5.1,7.3.7 12
Sub-subcontractor,Definition of Uncovering of Work
5.1.2 12.1
Subsurface Conditions Unforeseen Conditions
4.3.4 4.3.4,8.3.1, 10.3 Aark.
Successors and Assigns Unit Prices
13.2 4.3.9,7.3.3.2
Superintendent Use of Documents
3.9, 10.2.6 1.1.1, 1.6,2.2.5,3.12.6,5.3
Supervision and Construction Procedures Use of Site
1.2.2, 3.3, 3.4, 3.12.10, 4.2.2, 4.2.7, 4.3.3, 6.1.3,6.2.4, 3.13,6.1.1,6.2.1
7.1.3, 7.3.6, 8.2,8.3.1,9.4.2, 10, 12, 14 Values, Schedule of
Surety 9.2,9.3.1
4.4.7, 5.4.1.2,9.8.5,9.10.2,9.10.3, 14.2.2 Waiver of Claims by the Architect
Surety,Consent of 13.4.2
9.10.2,9.10.3 Waiver of Claims by the Contractor
Surveys 4.3.10,9.10.5, 11.4.7, 13.4.2
2.2.3 Waiver of Claims by the Owner
Suspension by the Owner for Convenience 4.3.10, 9.9.3,9.10.3,9.10.4, 11.4.3, 11.4.5, 11.4.7, 12.2.2.1,
14.4 13.4.2, 14.2.4
Suspension of the Work Waiver of Consequential Damages
5.4.2, 14.3 4.3.10, 14.2.4
Suspension or Termination of the Contract Waiver of Liens
4.3.6, 5.4.1.1, 11.4.9, 14 9.10.29 9.10.4
Taxes Waivers of Subrogation
3.69 3.8.2.1,7.3.6.4 6.1.1, 11.4.5,11.4.7
Termination by the Contractor Warranty
4.3.10,14.1 3.5, 4.2.9, 4.3.5.3, 9.3.3, 9.8.4, 9.9.1, 9.10.4, 12.2.2,
Termination by the Owner for Cause 13.7.1.3
4.3.10, 5.4.1.1, 14.2 Weather Delays
AIA DOCUMENT A201-GENERAL CONDITIONS OF THE CONTRACT FOR CONSTRUCTION - 1997 EDITION - ALA - COPYRIGHT 1997 -
AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF ARCHITECTS, 1735 NEW YORK AVENUE N.W., WASHINGTON, D.C. 20006-5292. WARNING: Unlicensed photocopying
violates U.S. copyright laws and will subject the violator to legal prosecution.This document was electronically produced with permission of the ALA and can be
reproduced without violation until the date of expiration as noted below.
Electronic Format A201-1997
User Document:97A20LCON— 11/12/1998.AIA License Number 107575,which expires on 1/31/1999—Page#8
9 Contractor
Payments to Subcontractors 1.5.2, 3.2, 3.7.3, 3.12.7, 6.1.3
5.4.2. 9.5.1.3, 9.6.2, 9.6.3, 9.6.4, 9.6.7, 11.4.8, 14.2.1.2 Review of Contractor's Submittals by Owner and Architect
"'` PCB 3.10.1,3.10.2,3.11,3.12,4.2,5.2,6.1.3,9.2,9.8.2
10.3.1 Review of Shop Drawings, Product Data and Samples by
Performance Bond and Payment Bond Contractor
7.3.6.4,9.6.7,9.10.3, 11.4.9, 11.5 3.12
Permits, Fees and Notices Rights and Remedies
2.2.2, 3.7,3.13, 7.3.6.4, 10.2.2 1.1.2, 2.3, 2.4, 3.5.1, 3.15.2, 4.2.6, 4.3.4, 4.5, 4.6, 5.3, 5.4,
PERSONS AND PROPERTY, PROTECTION OF 6.1, 6.3, 7.3.1, 8.3, 9.5.1, 9.7, 10.2.5, 10.3, 12.2.2, 12.2.4,
10 13.4, 14
Polychlorinated Biphenyl Royalties, Patents and Copyrights
10.3.1 3.17
Product Data,Definition of Rules and Notices for Arbitration
3.12.2 4.6.2
Product Data and Samples, Shop Drawings Safety of Persons and Property
3.11,3.12,4.2.7 10.2, 10.6
Progress and Completion Safety Precautions and Programs
4.2.2,4.3.3,8.2,9.8,9.9.1, 14.1.4 3.3.1,4.2.2,4.2.7,5.3.1, 10.1, 10.2, 10.6
Progress Payments Samples,Definition of
4.3.3,9.3,9.6,9.8.5,9.10.3, 13.6, 14.2.3 3.12.3
Project,Definition of the Samples,Shop Drawings,Product Data and
1.1.4 3.11,3.12,4.2.7
Project Management Protective Liability Insurance Samples at the Site,Documents and
11.3 3.11
Project Manual,Definition of the Schedule of Values
1.1.7 9.2,9.3.1
Project Manuals Schedules,Construction
2.2.5 1.4.1.2,3.10,3.12.1,3.12.2,4.3.7.2,6.I.3
Project Representatives Separate Contracts and Contractors
4.2.10 1.1.4, 3.12.5, 3.14.2, 4.2.4, 4.2.7, 4.6.4, 6, 8.3.1, 11.4.7,
Property Insurance 12.1.2, 12.2.5
10.2.5, 11.4 Shop Drawings,Definition of
PROTECTION OF PERSONS AND PROPERTY 3.12.1
10 Shop Drawings,Product Data and Samples
Regulations and Laws 3.11,3.12,4.2.7
1.6, 3.2.2, 3.6, 3.7, 3.12.10, 3.13, 4.1.1, 4.4.8, 4.6, 9.6.4, Site, Use of
9.9.1, 10.2.2, 11.1, 11.4, 13.1, 13.4, 13.5.1, 13.5.2, 13.6, 14 3.13,6.1.1,6.2.1
Rejection of Work - Site Inspections
3.5.1,4.2.6, 12.2.1 1.2.2,3.2.1,3.3.3,3.7.1,4.2,4.3.4,9.4.2,9.10.1, 13.5
Releases and Waivers of Liens Site Visits,Architect's
9.10.2 4.2.2,4.2.9,4.3.4,9.4.2,9.5.1,9.9.2,9.10.1, 13.5
Representations Special Inspections and Testing
1.5.2, 3.5.1, 3.12.6, 622, 82.1, 9.3.3, 9.4.2, 9.5.1, 9.82, 4.2.6, 12.2.1, 13.5
9.10.1 Specifications,Definition of the
Representatives 1.1.6
2.1.1,3.1.1,3.9,4.1.1,4.2.1,4.2.10,5.1.1,5.1.2, 13.2.1 Specifications,The
Resolution of Claims and Disputes 1.1.1,1.1.6, 1.1.7, 1.22, 1.6,3.11,3.12.10,3.17
4.4,4.5,4.6 Statute of Limitations
Responsibility for Those Performing the Work 4.6.3, 12.2.6, 13.7
3.3.2,3.18,4.2.3,4.3.8,5.3.1,6.1.3,6.2,6.3,9.5.1, 10 Stopping the Work
Retainage 2.3,4.3.6,9.7, 10.3, 14.1
9.3.1,9.6.2,9.8.5,9.9.1,9.10.2,9.10.3 Stored Materials
Review of Contract Documents and Field Conditions by 6.2.1,9.3.2, 10.2.1.2, 10.2.4, 11.4.1.4
AIA DOCUMENT A201-GENERAL CONDITIONS OF THE CONTRACT FOR CONSTRUCTION - 1997 EDITION - AIA - COPYRIGHT 1997 - THE
AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF ARCHITECTS, 1735 NEW YORK AVENUE N.W.,WASHINGTON, D.C. 20006-5292. WARNING: Unlicensed photocopying
violates U.S. copyright laws and will subj=the violator to legal prosecution.This document was electronically produced with permission of the ALA and can be
reproduced without violation until the date of expiration as noted below.
Electronic Format A201-1997
User Document:97A201-CON— 11/12/1998.AIA License Number 107575,which expires on 1/31/1999—Page#7
Materials. Labor, Equipment and 6.2.5, 9.3.2, 9.6.1, 9.6.4, 9.9.2, 9.10.3, 10.3.3. 1 1 2, 1 1.-1,
1.1.3, 1.1.6, 1.6.1, 3.4, 3.5.1, 3.8.2, 3.8.23, 3.12, 3.13, 13.5.1, 13.5.2, 14.1.1.4, 14.1.4
3.15.1, 4.2.6, 4.2.7, 5.2.1, 6.2.1, 73.6, 9.3.2, 93.3, 9.5.1.3, Owner's Authority
9.10.2, 10.2.1, 10.2.4, 14.2.1.2 1.6, 2.1.1, 2.3, 2.4, 3.4.2, 3.8.1, 3.12.10, 3.14.2, 4.1.2,4.1.-).
Means, Methods, Techniques, Sequences and Procedures of 4.2.4, 4.2.9, 4.3.6, 4.4.7, 5.2.1, 5.2.4, 5.4.1, 6.1, 6.3, 7.2.1,
Construction 7.3.1, 8.2.2, 8.3.1, 9.3.1, 9.3.2, 9.5.1, 9.9.1, 9.10.2, 10.3.2,
3.3.1,3.12.10,4.2.2,4.2.7, 9.4.2 11.1.3, 11.3.1, 11.4.3, 11.4.10, 12.2.2, 12.3.1, 13.2.2, 14.3,
Mechanic's Lien 14.4
4.4.8 Owner's Financial Capability
Mediation 2.2.1, 13.2.2, 14.1.1.5
4.4.1,4.4.5,4.4.6,4.4.8,4.5,4.6.1,4.6.2,8.3.1, 10.5 Owner's Liability Insurance
Minor Changes in the Work 11,2
I.1.1,3.12.8,4.2.8,4.3.6, 7.1, 7.4 Owner's Loss of Use Insurance
MISCELLANEOUS PROVISIONS 11.4.3
13 Owner's Relationship with Subcontractors
Modifications,Definition of 1.1.2,5.2,5.3,5.4,9.6.4,9.10.2, 14.2.2
1.1.1 Owner's Right to Carry Out the Work
Modifications to the Contract 2.4, 12.2.4. 14.2.2.2
1.1.1, 1.1.2, 3.73, 3.11, 4.1.2, 4.2.1, 5.2.3, 7, 8.3.1, 9.7, Owner's Right to Clean Up
10.3.2, 11.4.1 6.3
Mutual Responsibility Owner's Right to Perform Construction and to Award Separate
6.2 Contracts
Nonconforming Work,Acceptance of 6,1
9.6.6,9.9.3, 12.3 Owner's Right to Stop the Work
Nonconforming Work,Rejection and Correction of 2.3
2.3,2.4,3.5.1,4.2.6,6.2.5,9.5.1,9.8.2,9.9.3,9.10.4, 12.2.1, Owner's Right to Suspend the Work
13.7.1.3 14.3
Notice Owner's Right to Terminate the Contract
2.2.1, 2.3, 2.4, 3.2.3, 3.3.1, 3.7.2, 3.7.4, 3.12.9, 4.3, 4.4.8, 14.2
4.6.5, 5.2.1, 8.2.2, 9.7, 9r.10, 10.2.2, 11.1.3, 11.4.6, 12.2.2, Ownership and Use of Drawings, Specifications and Othe,
12.2.4, 13.3, 13.5.1, 13.5.2, 14.1, 14.2 Instruments of Service
Notice,Written 1.1.1,1.6,2.2.5,3.2.1,3.11.1,3.17.1,4.2.12,5.3
2.3, 2.4, 3.3.1, 3.9, 3.12.9, 3.12.10,4,3, 4.4.8, 4.6.5, 5.2.1, Partial Occupancy or Use
8.2.2, 9.7, 9.10, 10.2.2, 10.3, 11.1.3, 11.4.6, 12.2.2, 12.2.4, 9.6.6,9.9, 11.4.1.5
13.3, 14 Patching,Cutting and
Notice of Testing and Inspections 3.14,6.2.5
13.5.1, 13.5.2 Patents
Notice to Proceed 3.17
8.2.2 Payment,Applications for
Notices,Permits,Fees and 4.2.5, 7.3.8, 9.2, 9.3, 9.4, 9.5.1, 9.6.3, 9.7.1, 9.8.5, 9.10.1,
2.2.2,3.7,3.13, 7.3.6.4, 10.2.2 9.10.3,9.10.5, 11.1.3, 14.2.4, 14.4.3
Observations,Contractor's Payment,Certificates for
1.5.2,3.2,3.7.3,4.3.4 4.2.5, 4.2.9, 9.3.3, 9.4, 9.5, 9.6.1, 9.6.6, 9.7.1, 9.10.1,
Occupancy 9.10.3, 13.7, 14.1.1.3, 14.2.4
2.2.2,9.6.6,9.8, 11.4.1.5 Payment,Failure of
Orders,Written 4.3.6,9.5.1.3,9.7,9.10.2, 14.1.1.3, 14.2.1.2, 13.6
1.1.1, 2.3, 3.9, 4.3.6, 7, 8.2.2, 11.4.9, 12.1, 122, 13.5.2, Payment,Final
14.3.1 4.2.1,4.2.9,4.3.2,9.8.2,9.10, 11.1.2, 11.1.3, 11.4.1, 11.4.5,
OWNER 12.3.1, 13.7, 14.2.4, 14.4.3
2 Payment Bond,Performance Bond and
Owner,Definition of 7.3.6.4,9.6.7,9.10.3, 11.4.9,11.5
2.1 Payments,Progress
Owner,Information and Services Required of the 4.3.3,9.3,9.6,9.8.5,9.10.3, 13.6, 14.2.3
2.1.2, 2.2, 3.2.1, 3.12.4, 3.12.10, 4.2.7, 4.3.3, 6.1.3; 6.1.4, PAYMENTS AND COMPLETION
AIA DOCUMENT A201-GENERAL CONDITIONS OF THE CONTRACT FOR CONSTRUCTION - 1997 EDITION - AIA - COPYRIGHT 1997 - THt-
AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF ARCHITECTS, 1735 NEW YORK AVENUE N.W.,WASHINGTON, D.C. 20006-5292. WARNING: Unlicensed photocopying
violates U.S. copyright laws and will subject the violator to legal prosecution.This document was electronically produced with permission of the AIA and can be
reproduced without violation until the date of expiration as noted below.
Electronic Format A201-1997
User Document:97A201.CON— 11112/1998.AIA License Number 107575,which expires on 1/31/1999—Page#6
9.9.I. 10?, 10.3, 12.2, 14.2, 14.3 Insurance, Project Management Protective Liability
Extensions of Time 11.3
3.2.3. 4.3.1, 4.3.4, 4.3.7, 4.4.5, 5.2.3, 7.2.1, 7.3, 7.4.1, 9.5.1, Insurance, Property
9.7.1, 10.3.2, 10.6.1, 14.3.2 10.2.5, 11.4
Failure of Payment Insurance,Stored Materials
4.3.6, 9.5.1.3,9.7,9.10.2, 14.1.1.3, 14.2.1.2, 13.6 9.3.2, 11.4.1.4
Faulty Work INSURANCE AND BONDS
(See Defective or Nonconforming Work) 11
Final Completion and Final Payment Insurance Companies,Consent to Partial Occupancy
4.2.1, 4.2.9, 4.3.2, 9.8.2,9.10, 11.1.2, 11.1.3, 1 1.4.1, 1 1.4.5, 9.9.1, 11.4.1.5
12.3.1, 13.7, 14.2.4, 14.4.3 Insurance Companies, Settlement with
Financial Arrangements,Owner's 11.4.10
2.2.1, 13.2.2, 14.1.1.5 Intent of the Contract Documents
Fire and Extended Coverage Insurance 1.2.1,4.2.7,4.2.12,4.2.13, 7.4
11.4 Interest '
GENERAL PROVISIONS 13.6
1 Interpretation
Governing Law 1.2.3, 1.4,4.1.1,4.3.1, 5.1,6.1.2,8.1.4
13,1 Interpretations,Written
Guarantees(See Warranty) 4.2.11,4.2.12,4.3.6
Hazardous Materials Joinder and Consolidation of Claims Required
10.2.4, 10.3, 10.5 4.6.4
Identification of Contract Documents Judgment on Final Award
1.5.1 4.6.6
Identification of Subcontractors and Suppliers Labor and Materials, Equipment
5.2.1 1.1.3, 1.1.6,3.4,3.5.1,3.8.2, 3.8.3, 3.12, 3.13, 3.15.1,42.6,
Indemnification 4.2.7,5.2.1,6.2.1,7.3.6, 9.3.2,9.3.3,9.5.1.3,9.10.2, 10.2.1,
3.17,3.18,9.10.2, 10.3.3, 10.5, 11.4.1.2, 11.4.7 10.2.4, 14.2.1.2
Information and Services Required of the Owner Labor Disputes
2.1.2, 2.2, 3.2.1, 3.12.4, 3.12.10, 4.2.7, 4.3.3, 6.1.3, 6.1.4, 8.3.1
6.2.5, 9.3.2, 9.6.1, 9.6.4,9.9.2, 9.10.3, 10.3.3, 11.2, 11.4, Laws and Regulations
13.5.1, 13.5.2, 14.1.1.4, 14.1.4 1.6, 3.2.2, 3.6, 3.7, 3.12.10, 3.13, 4.1.1, 4.4.8, 4.6, 9.6.4,
Injury or Damage to Person or Property 9.9.1, 10.2.2, 11.1, 11.4, 13.1, 13.4, 13.5.1, 13.5.2, 13.6, 14
4.3.8, 10.2, 10.6 Liens
Inspections 2.1.2,4.4.8,8.2.2,9.3.3,9.10
3.1.3, 3.3.3, 3.7.1, 4.2.2, 4,2.6, 4.2.9, 9.4.2, 9.8.2, 9.8.3, Limitation on Consolidation or Joinder
9.9.2,9.10.1, 12.2.1, 13.5 4.6.4
Instructions to Bidders Limitations,Statutes of
1.1.1 4.6.3, 12.2.6, 13.7
Instructions to the Contractor Limitations of Liability
3.2.3,3.3.1,3.8.1,4.2.8,5.2.1,7, 12,8.2.2, 13.5.2 2.3, 3.2.1, 3.5.1, 3.7.3, 3.12.8, 3.12.10, 3.17, 3.18,4.2.6,
Insurance 4.2.7, 4.2.12, 6.2.2, 9.4.2, 9.6.4, 9.6.7, 9.10.4, 10.3.3,
3.18.1,6.1.1,7.3.6,8.2.1,9.3.2,9.8.4,9.9.1,9.10.2, 9.10.5, 10.2.5, 11.1.2, 11.2.1, 11.4.7, 12.2.5, 13.4.2
11 Limitations of Time
Insurance,Boiler and Machinery 2.1.2,2.2,2.4, 3.2.1, 3.7.3, 3.10, 3.11, 3.12.5, 3.15.1,4.2.7,
11.4.2 4.3,4.4,4.5,4.6, 5.2,5.3, 5.4,6.2.4,7.3,7.4,8.2,9.2,9.3.1,
Insurance,Contractor's Liability 9.3.3, 9.4.1, 9.5, 9.6, 9.7, 9.8, 9.9, 9.10, 11.1.3, 11.4.1.5,
11.1 11.4.6, 11.4.10, 12.2, 13.5, 13.7, 14
Insurance,Effective Date of Loss of Use Insurance
8.2.2, 11.1.2 11.4.3
Insurance,Loss of Use Material Suppliers
11.4.3 1.6,3.12.1,4.2.4,4.2.6,5.2.1,9.3,9.4.2,9.6,9.10.5
Insurance,Owner's Liability Materials,Hazardous
11.2 10.2.4, 10.3, 10.5
AlA DOCUMENT A201-GENERAL CONDITIONS OF THE CONTRACT FOR CONSTRUCTION - 1997 EDITION AIA - COPYRIGHT 1997 - THE
AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF ARCHITECTS, 1735 NEW YORK AVENUE N.W.,WASHINGTON, D.C. 20006-5292. WARNING: Unlicensed photocopying
violates U.S. copyright laws and will subject the violator to legal prosecution.This document was electronically produced with permission of the AIA and can be
reproduced without violation until the date of expiration as noted below.
Electronic Format A201-1997
User Document:97A201-CON— 11/12/1998.AIA License Number 107575,which expires on 1/31/1999--Page 45
3.3 2. 3.4.3, 3.8.1, 3.9, 3.18.2, 4.2.3, 4.2.6, 10.2, 10.3, 3.14.2, 6.2.4, 9.2.1.5, 10.2.1.2, 10,2.5. 10.6, 11.1,
11.4.7, 14.1, 14.2.1.1, 12.2.4
Contractor's Liability Insurance Damage to the Work AOW%k_
11.1 3.14.2,9.9.1, 10.2.1.2, 10.2.5, 10.6, 1 1.4, 12.2.4
Contractor's Relationship with Separate Contractors and Owner's Damages, Claims for
Forces 3.2.3, 3.18, 4.3.10, 6.1.1, 8.3.3, 9.5.1, 9.6.7, 10.3.3, 1 1.1.1,
3.12.5, 3.14.2,4.2.4,6, 11.4.7, 12.1.2, 12.2.4 11.4.5, 11.4.7, 14.1.3, 14.2.4
Contractor's Relationship with Subcontractors Damages for Delay
1.2.2, 3.3.2, 3.18.1, 3.18.2, 5, 9.6.2, 9.6.7, 9.10.2, 11.4.1.2, 6.1.1,8.3.3,9.5.1.6,9.7, 10.3.2
11.4.7, 11.4.8 Date of Commencement of the Work,Definition of
Contractor`s Relationship with the Architect 8.1.2
1.1.2, 1.6, 3.1.3, 3.2.1, 3.2.2, 3.2.3, 3.3.1, 3.4.2, 3.5.1, 3.7.3, Date of Substantial Completion, Definition of
3.10, 3.11, 3.12, 3.16, 3.18, 4.1.2, 4.1.3, 4.2, 4.3.4, 4.4.1, 8.1.3
4.4.7, 5.2, 6.2.2, 7, 8.3.1, 9.2, 9.3, 9.4, .5, 9.7, 9.8, 9.9, Day,Definition of
10.2.6, 10.3, 11.3, 11.4.7, 12, 13.4.2, 13.5 8.1.4
Contractor's Representations Decisions of the Architect
1.5.2, 3.5.1,3.12.6,6.2.2, 8.2.1,9.3.3,9.8.2 4.2.6, 4.2.7, 4.2.11, 4.2.12, 4.2.13, 4.3.4, 4.4.1,4.4.5,44.6,
Contractors Responsibility for Those Performing the Work 4.5,6.3,7.3.6,7.3.8, 8.1.3,8.3.1,9.2,9.4, 9.5.1,9.8.4,9.9.1,
3.3.2, 3.18,4.2.3,4.3.8, 5.3.1,6.1.3,6.2,6.3,9.5.1, 10 13.5.2, 14.2.2, 14.2.4
Contractor's Review of Contract Documents Decisions to Withhold Certification
1.5.2,3.2,3.7.3 9.4.1,9.5,9.7, 14.1.1.3
Contractor's Right to Stop the Work Defective or Nonconforming Work, Acceptance, Rejection and
9.7 Correction of
Contractor's Right to Terminate the Contract 2.3, 2.4, 3.5.1, 4.2.6, 6.2.5, 9.5.1, 9.5.2, 9.6.6, 9.8.2, 9.9.3,
4.3.10, 14.1 9.10.4, 12.2.1, 13.7.1.3
Contractor's Submittals Defective Work,Definition of
3.10, 3.11, 3.12, 4.2.7, 5.2.1, 5.2.3, 7.3.6, 9.2, 9.3, 9.8.2, 3.5.1
9.8.3,9.9.1,9.10.2,9.10.3, 11.1.3, 11.5.2 Definitions
Contractor's Superintendent 1.1, 2.1.1, 3.1, 3.5.1,3.12.1, 3.12.2, 3.12.3, 4.1.1,4.3.1
3.9, 10.2.6 6.1.2,7.2.1,7.3.1,7.3.6,8.1, 9.1,9.8.1
Contractor's Supervision and Construction Procedures Delays and Extensions of Time
1.2.2, 3.3,3.4, 3.12.10,4.2.2,4.2.7,4.3.3,6.1.3,6.2.4,7.1.3, 3.2.3, 4.3.1, 4.3.4, 4.3.7, 4.4.5, 5.2.3, 7.2.1, 7.3.1,7.4.1,
7.3.4, 7.3.6, 8.2, 10, 12, 14 7.5.1,8.3,9.5.1,9.7.1, 10.3.2, 10.6.1, 14.3.2
Contractual Liability Insurance Disputes
11.1.1.8, 11.2, 11.3 4.1.4,4.3,4.4,4.5,4.6,6.3,7.3.8
Coordination and Correlation Documents and Samples at the Site
1.2, 1.5.2,3.3.1,3.10,3.12.6,6.1.3,6.2.1 3.11
Copies Furnished of Drawings and Specifications Drawings,Definition of
1.6,2.2.5,3.11 1.1.5
Copyrights Drawings and Specifications,Use and Ownership of
1.6,3.17 1.1.1, 1.3,2.2.5,3.11,5.3
Correction of Work Effective Date of Insurance
2.3, 2.4, 3'.7.4,4.2.1, 9.4.2,9.8.2,9.8.3,9.9.1, 12.1.2, 12.2, 8.2.2, 11.1.2
13.7.1.3 Emergencies
Correlation and Intent of the Contract Documents 4.3.5,10.6, 14.1.1.2
1.2 Employees,Contractoes
Cost,Definition of 3.31, 3.4.3, 3.8.1, 3.9, 3.18.2, 4.2.3, 4.2.6, 10.2, 10.3,
7.3.6 11.1.1, 11.4.7, 14.1, 14.2.1.1
Costs - Equipment,Labor,Materials and
2.4, 3.2.3, 3.7.4, 3.8.2, 3.15.2, 4.3, 5.4.2, 6.1.1; 6.2.3, 1.1.3, 1.1.6,3.4, 3.5.1,3.8.2,3.8.3, 3.12, 3.13, 3.15.1,4.2.6,
7.3.3.3, 7.3.6, 7.3.7, 7.3.8, 9.10.2, 10.3.2, 10.5, 11.3, 11.4, 4.2.7, 5.2.1,6.2.1,7.3.6, 9.3.2,9.3.3,9.5.1.3,9.10.2, 10.2.1,
12.1, 12.2.1, 12.2.4, 13.5, 14 0.2.4, 14.2.1.2
Cutting and Patching Execution and Progress of the Work
6.2.5, 3.14 1.1.3, 1.2.1, 1.2.2, 2.2.3, 2.2.5, 3.1, 3.3, 3.4, 3.5, 3.7, 3.10,
Damage to Construction of Owner or Separate Contractors 3.12, 3.14, 4.2.2, 4.2.3, 4.3.3, 6.2.2, 7.1.3, 7 3 4, 8 2, -
ALA DOCUMENT A201-GENERAL CONDITIONS OF THE CONTRACT FOR CONSTRUCTION - 1997 EDITION - AIA - COPYRIGHT 1997 - Thz
AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF ARCHITECTS, 1735 NEW YORK AVENUE N.W., WASHINGTON, D.C. 20006-5292. WARNING: Unlicensed photocopying
violates U.S. copyright laws and will subject the violator to legal prosecution.This document was electronically produced with permission of the AIA and can be
reproduced without violation until the date of expiration as noted below.
Electronic Format A201-1997
User Document:97A20LCON— 1 1/12/1998.AIA License Number 107575,which expires on 1/31/1999--Page##4
9.8.3, 9.8.4,9.8.5 1.6.1, 3.2.2, 3.6, 3.7, 3.12.10. 3.13, 4.1.1. 4.4.8. 4.6.4, 4.6.6.
Certificates for Payment 9.6.4, 10.2.2, 1 1.1, 1 1.4, 13.1. 13.4, 13.5.1. 13.5?, 13.6.
0"k 4.2.5, 4.2.9, 9.3.3, 9.4, 9.5, 9.6.1, 9.6.6, 9.7.1, 9.10.1, 14.1.1, 14.2.1.3
9.10.3, 13.7, 14.1.1.3, 14.2.4 Concealed or Unknown Conditions
Certificates of Inspection,Testing or Approval 4.3.4, 8.3.1, 10.3
13.5.4 Conditions of the Contract
Certificates of Insurance 1..1.1, 1.1.7,6.1.1,6.1.4
9.10.2, 1 1.1.3 Consent, Written
Change Orders 1.6, 3.4.2, 3.12.8, 3.14.2, 4.1.2, 4.3.4, 4.6.4, 9.3.2, 9.8.5,
1.1.1, 2.4,1, 3.4.2, 3.8.2.3, 3.11.1, 3.12.8, 4.2.8, 4.3.4, 4.3.9, 9.9.1,9.10.2,9.10.3, 11.4.1, 13.2, 13.4.2
5.2.3, 7.1, 7.2, 7.3, 8.3.1, 9.3.1.1, 9.10.3, 11.4.1.2, 11.4.4, CONSTRUCTION BY OWNER OR BY SEPARATE
11.4.9. 12.1.2 CONTRACTORS
Change Orders, Definition of 1.1.4,6
7.2.1 Construction Change Directive,Definition of
CHANGES IN THE WORK 7.3.1
3.11,4.2.8,7, 8.3.1,9.3.1.1, 11.4.9 Construction Change Directives
Claim,Definition of 1.1.1,3.12.8,4.2.8,4.3.9,7.1,7.3,9.3.1.1
4.3.1 Construction Schedules,Contractor's
Claims and Disputes 1.4.1.2,3.10,3.12.1,3.12.2,4.3.7.2,6.1.3
3.2.3,4.3,4.4,4.5,4.6,6.1.1, 6.3,7.3.8,9.3.3,9.10.4, Contingent Assignment of Subcontracts
10.3.3 5.4, 14.2.2.2
Claims and Timely Assertion of Claims Continuing Contract Performance
4.6.5 4.3.3
Claims for Additional Cost Contract,Definition of
3.2.3,4.3.4,4.3.5,4.3.6,6.1.1,7.3.8, 10.3.2 1.1.2
Claims for Additional Time CONTRACT;TERMINATION OR SUSPENSION OF THE
3.2.3,4.3.4,4.3.7,6.1.1, 8.3.2, 10.3.2 5.4.1.1, 11.4.9,14
Claims for Concealed or Unknown Conditions Contract Administration
4.3.4 3.1.3,4,9.4,9.5
Claims for Damages Contract Award and Execution,Conditions Relating to
3.2.3, 3.18, 4.3.10, 6.1.1, 8.3.3, 9.5.1, 9.63, 10.3.3, 11.1.1, 3.7.1,3.10,5.2,6.1, 11.1.3, 11.4.6, 11.5.1
11.4.5, 11.4.7, 14.1.3, 14.2.4 Contract Documents,The
Claims Subject to Arbitration 1.1, 1.2
4.4.1,4.5.1,4.6.1 Contract Documents,Copies Furnished and Use of
Cleaning Up 1.6,2.2.5,5.3
3.15, 6.3 Contract Documents,Definition of
Commencement of Statutory Limitation Period 1.1.1
13,7 Contract Sum
Commencement of the Work,Conditions Relating to 3.8, 4.3.4, 4.3.5, 4.4.5, 5.2.3, 7.2, 7.3, 7.4, 9.1, 9.4.2,
2.2.1, 3.2.1, 3.4.1, 3.7.1, 3.10.1, 3.12.6, 4.3.5, 5.2.1, 5.2.3, 9.5.1.4,9.6.7,9.7, 10.3.2, 11.4.1, 14.2.4, 14.3.2
6.2.2, 8.1.2, 8.2.2,8.3.I, 11.1, 11.4.1, 11.4.6, 11.5.1 Contract Sum,Definition of
Commencement of the Work,Definition of 9.1
8,1.2 Contract Time
Communications Facilitating Contract Administration 4.3.4, 4.3.7, 4.4.5, 5.2.3, 7.2.1.3, 7.3, 7.4, 8.1.1, 8.2, 8.3.1,
3.9.1,4.2.4 9.5.1,9.7, 10.3.2, 12.1.1, 14.3.2
Completion,Conditions Relating to Contract Time,Definition of
1.6.1, 3.4.1, 3.11, 3.15, 4.2.2, 4.2.9, 8.2, 9.4.2, 9.8,9.9-1, 8.1.1
9.10, 12.2, 13.7, 14.1.2 CONTRACTOR
COMPLETION, PAYMENTS AND 3
9 Contractor,Definition of
Completion,Substantial 3.1,6.1.2
4.2.9, 8.1.1, 8.1.3, 8.2.3, 9.4.2, 9.8, 9.9.1, 9.10.3;9.10.4.2, Contractor's Construction Schedules
12.2, 13.7 1.4.1.2,3.10,3.12.1,3.12.2,4.3.7.2,6.I.3
Compliance with Laws Contractor's Employees
AIA DOCUMENT A201-GENERAL CONDITIONS OF THE CONTRACT FOR CONSTRUCTION - 1997 EDITION - AIA - COPYRIGHT 1997 - THE
AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF ARCHITECTS, 1735 NEW YORK AVENUE N.W., WASHINGTON, D.C. 20006-5292. WARNING: Unlicensed photocopying
violates U.S.copyright laws and will subject the violator to legal prosecution.This document was electronically produced with permission of the AIA and can be
reproduced without violation until the date of expiration as noted below.
Electronic Format A201-1997
User Document:97A201.CON— 11/12/1998.AIA License Number 107575,which expires on 1/31/1999—Page 43
INDEX Architect's Administration of the Contract
Acceptance of Nonconforming Work 3.1.3,4.2,4.3.4,4.4, 9.4, 9.5
9.6.6, 9.9.3, 12.3 Architect's Approvals '-
Acceptance of Work 2.4,3.1.3, 3.5.1,3.10.2,4.2.7
9.6.6,9.8.2, 9.9.3, 9.10.1, 9.10.3, 12.3 Architect's Authority to Reject Work
Access to Work 3.5.1,4.2.6, 12.1.2, 12.2.1
3.16,6.2.1, 12.1 Architect's Copyright
Accident Prevention 1.6
4.2.3, 10 Architect's Decisions
Acts and Omissions 4.2.6,4.2.7, 4.2.11, 4.2.12, 4.2.13, 4.3.4, 4.4.1, 4.4.5, 4.4.6,
3.2, 3.3.2, 3.12.8, 3.18, 4.2.3, 43.8, 4.4.1, 8.3.1, 9.5.1, 4.5,6.3, 7.3.6,7.3.8,8.1.3,8.3.1,9.2,9.4,9.5.1,9.8.4,9.9.1,
10.2.5, 13.4.2, 13.7, 14.1 13.5.2, 14.2.2, 14.2.4
Addenda Architect's Inspections
1.1.1,3.11 4.2.2,4.2.9,4.3.4,9.4.2,9.8.3,9.9.2,9.10.1, 13.5
Additional Costs,Claims for Architect's Instructions
4.3.4,4.3.5,4.3.6,6.1.1, 10.3 3.2.3,3.3.1,4.2.6,4.2.7,4.2.8,7.4.1, 12.1, 13.5.2
Additional Inspections and Testing Architect's Interpretations
9.8.3, 12.2.1, 13.5 4.2.11,4.2.12,4.3.6
Additional Time,Claims for Architect's Project Representative
4.3.4,4.3.7, 8.3.2 4.2.10
ADMINISTRATION OF THE CONTRACT Architect's Relationship with Contractor
3.1.3,4,9.4,9.5 1.1.2, 1.6, 3.1.3, 3.2.1, 3.2.2, 3.2.3, 3.3.1, 3.4.2, 3.5.1,3.7.3,
Advertisement or Invitation to Bid 3.10, 3.11, 3.12, 3.16, 3.18, 4.1.2, 4.1.3, 4.2, 4.3.4, 4.4.1,
1.1.1 4.4.7, 5.2, 6.2.2, 7, 8.3.1, 9.2, 9.3, 9.4, 9.5, 9.7, 9.8, 9.9,
Aesthetic Effect 10.2.6, 10.3, 11.3, 11.4.7, 12, 13.4.2, 13.5
4.2.13,4.5.1 Architect's Relationship with Subcontractors
Allowances 1.1.2,4.2.3,4.2.4,4.2.6,9.6.3,9.6.4, 11.4.7
3.8 Architect's Representations
All-risk Insurance 9.4.2,9.5.1,9.10.1
1 1.4.1.1 Architect's Site Visits
Applications for Payment 4.2.2,4.2.5,4.2.9,4.3.4,9.4.2,9.5.1,9.9.2,9.10.1, 13.5
4.2.5, 7.3.8, 9.2, 9.3, 9.4, 9.5.1, 9.6.3, 9.7.1, 9.8.5, 9.to, Asbestos
11.1.3, 14.2.4, 14.4.3 10.3.1
Approvals Attorneys'Fees
2.4,3.1.3,3.5,3.10.2,3.12,4.2.7,9:3.2, 13.4.2, 13.5 3.18.1,9.10.2, 10.3.3
Arbitration Award of Separate Contracts
4.3.3,4.4,4.5.1,4.5.2,4.6,8.3.1,9.7.1, 11.4.9, 11.4.10 6.1.1,6.1.2
Architect Award of Subcontracts and Other Contracts for Portions of the
4.1 Work
Architect, Definition of 5.2
4.1.1 Basic Definitions
Architect,Extent of Authority 1.1
2.4, 3.12.7, 4.2, 4.3.6, 4.4, 5.2, 6.3, 7.1.2, 7.3.6, 7.4,9.2, Bidding Requirements
9.3.1, 9.4, 9.5, 9.8.3, 9.10.1, 9.10.3, 12.1, 12.2.1, 13.5.1, 1.1.1, 1.1.7,5.2.1, 11.5.1
13.5.2, 14.2.2, 14.2.4 Boiler and Machinery Insurance
Architect,Limitations of Authority and Responsibility 11.42
2.1.1, 3.3.3, 3.12.4, 3.12.8, 3.12.10, 4.1.2, 4.2.1,4.22, Bonds,Lien
4.2.3, 4.2.6, 4.2.7, 4.2.10, 4.2.12, 4.2.13, 4.4, 5.2.1, 7.4, 9.10.2
9.4.2,9.6.4,9.6.6 Bonds,Performance,and Payment
Architect's Additional Services and Expenses 7.3.6.4,9.6.7,9.10.3, 11.4.9, 11.5
2.4, 11.4.1.1, 12.2.1, 13.5.2, 13.5.3, 14.2.4 Building Permit
3.7.1
Capitalization
1.3
Certificate of Substantial Completion
AIA DOCUMENT A201-GENERAL CONDITIONS OF THE CONTRACT FOR CONSTRUCTION - 1997 EDITION - AIA - COPYRIGHT 1997 - Ti._
AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF ARCHITECTS, 1735 NEW YORK AVENUE N.W., WASHINGTON, D.C. 20006-5292. WARNING: Unlicensed photocopying
violates U.S. copyright laws and will subject the violator to legal prosecution.This document was electronically produced with permission of the AIA and can be
reproduced without violation until the date of expiration as noted below.
Electronic Format A201-1997
User Document: 97A201.CON— 11/12/1998.AIA License Number 107575,which expires on 1/31/1999--Page#2
00,4,
General Conditions of the Contract for Construction
AIA Document A201 - 1997
1997 Edition - Electronic Format
This document has important legal consequences. Consultation with an attorney is encouraged with respect to its completion or modification. AUTHENTICATION
OF THIS ELECTRONICALLY DRAFTED AIA DOCUMENT MAY BE MADE BY USING AIA DOCUMENT D401.
This document has been approved and endorsed by The Associated General Contractors of America
Copyright 1911, 1915, 1918, 1925, 1937, 1951, 1958, 1961, 1963, 1966, 1967, 1970, 1976, 1987,01997 by The American Institute of Architects.Fifteenth Edition.
Reproduction of the material herein or substantial quotation of its provisions without written permission of the AIA violates the copyright laws of the United States
and will subject the violator to legal prosecution.
TABLE OF ARTICLES
1. GENERAL PROVISIONS
2. OWNER
3. CONTRACTOR
4. ADMINISTRATION OF THE CONTRACT
5. SUBCONTRACTORS -
6. CONSTRUCTION BY OWNER OR BY SEPARATE CONTRACTORS
7. CHANGES IN THE WORK
8. TIME
9. PAYMENTS AND COMPLETION
10. PROTECTION OF PERSONS AND PROPERTY
11. INSURANCE AND BONDS
12. UNCOVERING AND CORRECTION OF WORK
13. MISCELLANEOUS PROVISIONS
14. TERMINATION OR SUSPENSION OF THE CONTRACT
AIA DOCUMENT A201-GENERAL CONDITIONS OF THE CONTRACT FOR CONSTRUCTION - 1997 EDITION - AIA - COPYRIGHT 1997 - THE
AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF ARCHITECTS, 1735 NEW YORK AVENUE N.W.,WASHINGTON, D.C. 20006-5292. WARNING: Unlicensed photocopying
violates U.S.copyright laws and will subject the violator to legal prosecution.This document was electronically produced with permission of the AIA and can be
reproduced without violation until the due of expiration as noted below.
Electronic Format A201-1997
User Document:97A20LCON— 11/12/1998.AIA License Number 107575,which expires on 1/31/1999--Page#1
Portions of Addenda relating to bidding requirements are not part of the Contract Documents unless the bidding requirements
are also enumerated in this Article 8.
40"k 8.1.7 Other documents, if any, forming part of the Contract Documents are as follows:
(List here any additional documents that are intended to form part of the Contract Documents..4M Document.4 0/-199-provides that hrddrng requirements
such as advertisement or invitation to bud. Instructions to Bidders. sample forms and the Contractor's hid are not part of the Contract Documents unless
enumerated un this.dgreement. They should he listed here ono-ifintended to he part of the ContractDoctunents.t
This Agreement is entered into as of the day and year first written above and is executed in at least three original copies, of
which one is to be delivered to the Contractor, one to the Architect for use in the administration of the Contract, and the
remainder to the Owner.
OWNER tggnature) CONTRACTOR(Signature)
(Printed name and title) (Printed name and title)
AIA DOCUMENT A101 OWNER - CONTRACTOR AGREEMENT - 1997 EDITION - AIA - COPYRIGHT 1997 - THE AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF
ARCHITECTS, 1735 NEW YORK AVENUE N.W.,WASHINGTON,D.C.20006-5292. WARNING:Unlicensed photocopying violates U.S.copyright laws and will
subject the violator to legal prosecution.This docurnent was electronically produced with permission of the AIA and can be reproduced without violation until the date of
expiration as noted below.
Electronic Format A101-1997
User Document: 97A101.CON—3/17/1998. AIA License Number 107575, which expires on 1/31/1999--Page#5
6.2 The Nark may be suspended by the 01,kner as prodded in Article 14 of ALA Document A201-1997
ARTICLE 7 MISCELLANEOUS PROVISIONS --
7.1 Where reference is made in this Agreement to a provision of AIA Document A201-1997 or another Contract Docum-
the reference refers to that provision as amended or supplemented by other provisions of the Contract Documents.
7.2 Payments due and unpaid under the Contract shall bear interest from the date payment is due at the rate stated below. or in
the absence thereof:at the legal rate prevailing from time to time at the place where the Project is located.
drisert rate of interest agreed upon.ifany.)
(Usury laws and requirements under the Federal Truth to Lending.4ct. similar state and local consumer credit laws and other regulations at the Owner's and
Contractor's principal places of business.the location of the Project and elsewhere inay affect the validity ofthis provision. Legal advice should he ohtained with
respect to deletions or modifications.and also regarding requirements stick as written disclosures or waivers.)
7.3 The Owner's representative is:
(Name,address and other information)
7.4 The Contractor's representative is:
(Name.address and other information)
7.5 Neither the Owner's nor the Contractor's representative shall be changed without ten days written notice to the other party.
7.6 Other provisions:
ARTICLE 8 ENUMERATION OF CONTRACT DOCUMENTS
8.1 The Contract Documents,except for Modifications issued after execution of this Agreement, are enumerated as followF "'4'
8.1.1 The Agreement is this executed 1997 edition of the Standard Form of Agreement Between Owner and Contractor. AIA
Document A 101-1997.
8.1.2 The General Conditions are the 1997 edition of the General Conditions of the Contract for Construction. AIA
Document A201-1997.
8.1.3 The Supplementary and other Conditions of the Contract are those contained in the Project Manual dated . and are as
follows:
Document Title Pages
8.1.4 The Specifications are those contained in the Project Manual dated as in Subparagraph 8.1.3,and are as follows:
(Either list the Specifications here or refer to an exhibit attached to this Agreement.)
Section Title Pages
8.1.5 The Drawings are as follows,and are dated unless a different date is shown below:
(Either list the Drawings here or refer to an exhibit attached to thts AgreemenL)
Number Title Date
8.1.6 The Addenda, if arty,are as follows:
Number Date Pages
AIA DOCUMENT A101 -OWNER - CONTRACTOR AGREEMENT - 1997 EDITION - AIA - COPYRIGHT 1997 - THE AMERICAN INSTITU l
ARCHITECTS, 1733 NEW YORK AVENUE N.W.,WASHINGTON,D.C.20006-5292. WARNING:Unlicensed photocopying violates U.S.copyright laws anti
subject the violator to legal prosecution This document was electronically produced with permission of the AIA and can be reproduced without violation until the date of
expiration as toted below.
Electronic Format A101-1997
User Document: 97A101.CON—3/17/1998.AIA License Number 107575, which expires on 1/31/1999--Page#4
period covered by the application for Payment.
5.1.6 Subject to other provisions of the Contract Documents. the amount of each progress pay merit shall be computed as
follows:
1 Take that portion of the Contract Sum properly allocable to completed Work as determined by multiplying the
percentage completion of each portion of the Work by the share of the Contract Sum allocated to that portion of
the Work in the schedule of values. less retainage of percent ( %). Pending final determination of cost to the
Owner of changes in the Work. amounts not in dispute shall be included as provided in Subparagraph 7.3.8 of
AIA Document A201-1997-,
.2 Add that portion of the Contract Sum properly allocable to materials and equipment delivered and suitably stored
at the site for subsequent incorporation in the completed construction (or, if approved in advance by the Owner.
suitably stored off the site at a location agreed upon in writing), less retainage of percent
.3 Subtract the aggregate of previous payments made by the Owner.and
- .4 Subtract amounts, if any, for which the Architect has withheld or nullified a Certificate for Payment as provided in
Paragraph 9.5 of AIA Document A201-1997.
5.1.7 The progress payment amount determined in accordance with Subparagraph 5.1.6 shall be further modified under the
following circumstances:
.1 Add, upon Substantial Completion of the Work, a sum sufficient to increase the total payments to the full amount
of the Contract ,Sum, less such amounts as the Architect shall determine for incomplete Work, retainage
applicable to such work and unsettled claims;and
(Subparagraph 9.8.5 ofAN Document A201-199"requires release of applicable retainage tipon Substantial Completion of 11'ork with consent
of surety,if onyJ
.2 Add, if final completion of the Work is thereafter materially delayed through no fault of the Contractor, any
additional amounts payable in accordance with Subparagraph 9.10.3 of AIA Document A201-1997.
5.1.8 Reduction or limitation of retainage, if arty. shall be as follows:
(If it is intended,prior to Substantial Completion of the entire Work. to reduce or limit the retainage resulting from the percentages inserted in Clauses 5.1.6.1
and 5.1.61 above,and this is not explained elsewhere in the Contract Documents.insert here provisions for such reduction or limitation.)
5.1.9 Except with the Owner's prior approval, the Contractor shall not make advance payments to suppliers for materials or
equipment which have not been delivered and stored at the site.
5.2 FINAL PAYMENT
5.2.1 Final payment, constituting the entire unpaid balance of the Contract Sum. shall be made by the Owner to the
Contractor when:
.1 the Contractor has fully performed the Contract except for the Contractor's responsibility to correct Work as
provided in Subparagraph 12.2.2 of AIA Document A201-1997, and to satisfy other requirements, if any, which
extend beyond final payment;and
.2 a final Certificate for Payment has been issued by the Architect.
5.2.2 The Owner's final payment to the Contractor shall be made no later than 30 days after the issuance of the Architect's
final Certificate for Payment,or as follows:
ARTICLE 6 TERMINATION OR SUSPENSION
6.1 The Contract may be terminated by the Owner or the Contractor as provided in Article 14 of AIA Document A201-1997.
AIA DOCUMENT Atoll -OWNER - CONTRACTOR AGREEMENT - 1997 EDITION - AAA - COPYRIGHT 1997 - THE AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF
ARCHITECTS, 1735 NEW YORK AVENUE N.W.,WASHINGTON.D.C.20006.5192. WARNING:Unlicensed photocopying violates U.S.copyright laws and will
subject the violator to legal prosecution.This doh was electronically produced with permission of the AIA and can be rgiroduced without violation until the date of
expiration as noted below.
Electronic Format AIOI-1997
User Document: 97A 10 LCON—3/17/1998. AIA License Number 107575,which expires on 1/31/1999--Page#3
ARTICLE 3 DATE OF COMMENCEMENT AND SUBSTANTIAL COMPLETION
3.1 The date of commencement of the Work shall be the date of this Agreement unless a different date is stated belo%m
provision is made for the date to be fixed in a notice to proceed issued by the Owner.
(Insert the date ofcommencement)fit dij#ers from the date ofthis.4greentent or,ifappltcabie.state that the date will be fixed in a notice to proceed.)
If. prior to the commencement of the Work, the Owner requires time to file mortgages, mechanic's liens and other security
interests, the Owner's time requirement shall be as follows:
3.2 The Contract Time shall be measured from the date of commencement.
3.3 The Contractor shall achieve Substantial Completion of the entire Work not later than days from the date of
commencement,or as follows:
(Insert number of calendar days.Alternatively, a calendar date may he used when coordinated with the date of commencement. Un less stated elsewhere in the
Contract Documents.insert any requirements for earlier Substantial Completion of certain portions of the Work.)
subject to adjustments of this Contract Time as provided in the Contract Documents.
(Insert provisions.)fany,for liquidated damages relating to failure to complete on time or for bonus payments for early completion of the tVork)
ARTICLE 4 CONTRACT SUM
4.1 The Owner shall pay the Contractor the Contract Sum in current funds for the Contractor's performance of the Contract.
The Contract Stem shall be Dollars($ ), subject to additions and deductions as provided in the Contract Documents.
4.2 The Contract Stun is based upon the following alternates, if any, which are described in the Contract Documents and are
hereby accepted by the Owner:
(State the numbers or other identification of accepted alternates.If decisions on other alternates are to be made by the Owner subsequent to the execution of this
Agreement,attach a schedule of such other alternates showing the amount for each and the date when that amount expires)
-ANW.
4.3 Unit prices, if any, are as follows:
ARTICLE 5 PAYMENTS
5.1 PROGRESS PAYMENTS
5.1.1 Based upon Applications for Payment submitted to the Architect by the Contractor and Certificates for Payment issued
by the Architect, the Owner shall make progress payments on account of the Contract Sum to the Contractor as provided below
and elsewhere in the Contract Documents.
5.1.2 The period covered by each Application for Payment shall be one calendar month ending on the last day of the month,
or as follows:
5.1.3 Provided that an Application for Payment is received by the Architect not later than the day of a month the Owner
shall make payment to the Contractor not later than the day of the month. If an Application for Payment is received by the
Architect after the application date fixed above, payment shall be trade by the Owner not later than days after the Architect
receives the Application for Payment
5.1.4 Each Application for Payment shall be based on the most recent schedule of values submitted by the Contractor in
accordance with the Contract Documents. The schedule of values shall allocate the entire Contract Sum among the various
portions of the Work. The schedule of values shall be prepared in such form and supported by such data to substantiate its
accuracy as the Architect may require. This schedule. unless objected to by the Architect,shall be used as a basis for reviewing
the Contractor's Applications for Payment.
5.1.5 Applications for Payment shall,indicate the percentage of completion of each portion of the Work as of the end of the
AIA DOCUMENT AIOt -OWNER - CONTRACTOR AGREEMENT - 1997 EDITION - AIA - COPYRIGHT 1997 - THE AMERICAN INSTIT T.
ARCHITECTS, 1735 NEW YORK AVENUE N.W.,WASHINGTON,D.C.20006.5292. WARNING.Unlicensed photocopying violates U.S.copyright laws and w
subject the violator to legal prosecution This document was electronically produced with permission of the AIA and can be reproduced without violation until the date of
expiration as toted below.
Electronic Format A101-1997
User Document: 97A1OLCON—3/17/1998. AIA License Number 107575,which expires on 1/31/1999--Page#2
Standard Form of Agreement Between Owner and
Contractor where the basis of payment is a STIPULATED SUM
AIA Document A101-1997
1997 Edition -Electronic Format
THIS DOCUMENT HAS IMPORTANT LEGAL.CONSEQUENCES. CONSULTATION WITH AN ATTORNEY IS ENCOURAGED WITH RESPECT TO ITS
COMPLETION OR MODIFICATION. AUTHENTICATION OF THIS ELECTRONICALLY DRAFTED .AIA DOCUMENT MAY BE MADE BY )-SING .alA
DOCUMENT D401
AIA Document A201-1997,General Conditions of the Contract for Construction,is adopted in this document by reference.Do not use with other general conditions unless
this document is modified
This document has been approved and endorsed by The Aswciated General Contractors of America.
Copyright 1915, 1918, 1925, 1937, 1951. 1958, 1%1, 1%3. 1%7, 1974, 1977. 1987,O 1997 by The American Institute of Architects. Reproduction of the material
herein or substantial quotation of its provisions without written permission of the AIA violates the copyright laws of the United States and will subject the violator to legal
prosecution
AGREEMENT made as of the day of in the year of
(In words,indicate day.month and year)
BETWEEN the Owner:
w� (Name.address and other information)
and the Contractor
(,Name,address and other information)
The Project is:
Wame and location)
The Architect is:
(,dame,address and other information)
The Owner and Contractor agree as follows.
ARTICLE 1 THE CONTRACT DOCUMENTS
The Contract Documents consist of this Agreement, Conditions of the Contract (General. Supplementary and other
Conditions), Drawings, Specification, Addenda issued prior to execution of this Agreement. other documents listed in this
Agreement and Modifications issued after execution of this Agreement; these form the Contract,and are as fully a part of the
Contract as if attached to this Agreement or repeated herein. The Contract represents the entire and integrated agreement
between the parties hereto and supersedes prior negotiations, representations or agreements, either written or oral. An
enumeration of the Contract Documents,other than Modifications,appears in Article 8.
ARTICLE 2 THE WORK OF THIS CONTRACT
The Contractor shall fully execute the Work described in the Contract Documents,except to the extent specifically indicated in
the Contract Documents to be the responsibility of others.
AIA DOCUMENT A101 -OWNER - CONTRACTOR AGREEMENT - 1997 EDITION - AIA - COPYRIGHT 1997 - THE AMERICAN INSTITLTE OF
ARCHITECTS,1735 NEW YORK AVENUE N.W.,WASHINGTON,D.C.20006.5292. WARNING:Unlicensed photocopying violates U.S.copyright laws and will
subject the violator to legal proseartiom This documart was electronically produced with permission of the AIA and can be reproduced without violation until the date of
expiration as noted below.
Electronic Forma[ A101-1997
User Document: 97A1OLCON—3/17/1998. AIA License Number 107575,which expires on 1/31/1999--Page#1
LE9813 CHASE KITCHEN RENOVATION
4. DECLARATION OF SUB-CONTRACTORS Alow_
The Bidder shall indicate the names of the subcontractors he will use on the
project for the following trades:
Mechanical
Electrical
Temperature Controls
5. CONTRACT AGREEMENT
The undersigned agrees that if he is selected as Contractor for .the project he
will execute a contract agreement after presentation of same by the Owner,
within the time period stated in the Information for Bidders, in accordance
with the requirements of the Contract Documents and the terms of this
proposal.
b. LABOR
The undersigned hereby certifies that he is able to furnish labor that can
work in harmony with all other elements of labor employed, or to be employed
on the work.
7. TIME OF COMPLETION
The undersigned agrees to commence work on the project the week of
June 1, 1999 and to substantially complete the work on or before
August 20, 1999.
Date
(Name of Bidder)
By
(Title)
(Business Address)
END OF PROPOSAL FORM
FEBRUARY 1999 00300-4 PROPOSAL FORM
LE9813 CHASE KITCHEN RENOVATION
4. 8" unit masonry walls to structure.
Painted as per specification
Add $ 2.F.: Deduct $ /L.F.
5. 2 x 2 ft. lay-in exposed "T" 3/4 in. thick
acoustical tile ceiling (TYPE 1).
Add $ /S.F.: Deduct $ S.F.
6. 2 x 2 ft. FRP ceiling (TYPE 2).
Add $ /S.F.: Deduct $ S.F.
7. Relocation of sprinkler heads for up to 5'-0" each.
Add $ /head: Deduct $ /head
8. Additional sprinkler head with 'associated piping, per head.
Add $ /head: Deduct $ /head
9. Double light switch installation complete.
Add $ /switch: Deduct $ /switch
10. Wall mounted duplex outlets complete.
Add 5 /duplex: Deduct $ /duplex
11. Wall mounted quadraplex outlet.
Add $ /duplex: Deduct $ /duplex
12. Smoke detectors complete.
Add $ /SD: Deduct $ /SD
13. Painting of existing block as per specification.
Add $ /S.F.: Deduct $ S.F.
14. 8'-6" high GWB partitions, 3-5/8" steel stud w/ 5/8" GWB each side
included painted finish, base and batt insul.
Add $ /S.F.: Deduct $ /S.F.
The above unit prices shall include 'all labor, materials, overhead, profit,
insurance, etc. to cover the finished work of the several kinds called for.
Changes shall be processed in accordance with the provisions of the GENERAL
CONDITIONS and MODIFICATIONS TO THE GENERAL CONDITIONS.
FEBRUARY 1999 00300-3 PROPOSAL FORM
LE9813
CHASE KITCHEN RENOVATION
2. ALTERNATES (NOT USED)
3. UNIT PRICES
Should certain additional work be required, or should the quantities of certain
classes of work be increased or decreased from those on which the Contract
Sum is based, by order or approval of the Owner, the undersigned agrees that
the following supplemental unit prices may be used as the basis of payment to
him or credit to the Owner for such addition, increase, decrease in the work, as
determined solely by the Owner in accordance with Article 12 of the General
Conditions.
Unit prices shall cover all costs and the prices given shall represent the exact
amount per unit to be paid the Contractor (in the case of additions or
increases) or to be refunded to the Owner (in the case of decreases). No
additional adjustment will be allowed for overhead, profit, insurance,
compensation insurance or other direct or indirect expense of Contractor or
Subcontractors.
Changes shall be processed in accordance with Article 12 of the General
Conditions.
Unit Prices - Site Work - Should certain additional work be required, or should
the quantities of certain classes of work be increased or decreased from those
required by the Contract Documents, by authorization of the Owner, the below
unit prices shall, at the option of the Owner, be the basis of payment to the
Contractor or credit to the Owner, for such increase or decrease in the work.
The unit prices shall represent the exact net amount per unit to be paid the
Contractor (in the case of additions or increases). No additional adjustment
will be allowed for overhead, profit, insurance, or other direct or indirect
expenses of the Contractor or Subcontractors.
Maximum difference between "Add" and "Deduct" prices shall be 20%.
Base Item/Aria/Deduct
I. Sheet Vinyl
Add $ /S.F.: Deduct $ S.F.
2. Rubber base - 4" Roppe
Standard
Add $ /L.F.: Deduct $ /L.F.
3. 6" unit masonry walls to structure, painted
as per specification to match existing block.
Add $ /L.F.: Deduct $ /L.F.
FEBRUARY 1999 00300-2 PROPOSAL FORM
LE9813 CHASE KITCHEN RENOVATION
PROPOSAL FORM
1. Proposal of
(herein called the "Bidder"), a corporation/a
partnership/an individual doing business as
(Strike
out inapplicable terms.)
TO.
Smith College
126 West Street
Northampton, MA 01063
Gentlemen:
The Bidder, in compliance with your request for bids for the completion of:
Smith College
Chase Kitchen Renovation
Northampton, MA 01063
having examined the Bidding Requirements and the Contract Documents, and
having visited and examined the site of the proposed project, and being
familiar with the conditions relating to the construction, including the
availability of materials and labor, hereby proposes to furnish all labor,
materials, equipment, appliances, plant, supplies, and supervision required,
and to complete the work in accordance with the Contract Documents within
the time set forth herein for the Proposed Contract Sum stated below, such sum
to cover all expenses incurred in performing the work required- by the
Contract Documents, subject to additions and deductions in accordance with the
terms of said Contract Documents.
The Bidder acknowledges receipt of the following addenda:
The Proposed Contract Sum (Total Bid, Firm Fixed Pricing) is:
Dollars ($ )
(Show amount in both words and figures. In case of discrepancy, the amount
shown in words shall govern.)
FEBRUARY 1999 00300-1 PROPOSAL FORM
LE9813 CHASE KITCHEN RENOVATION
1.04 ADDITIONAL SETS OF GENERAL CONDITIONS AND SUPPLEMENTS
Bidders for the general contract may obtain a reasonable number of additional
copies of the General Conditions and supplements for distribution to their sub-
bidders upon request, at their own expense. Such additional sets are made
available because of the important information contained therein which is
pertinent to both general and sub-bids. A set of sepias and a specification will
be at New England Blueprint for any additional sets of drawings required.
1.05 OWNER'S RIGHT TO REJECT BIDS
The Owner reserves the right to reject any or all bids and to waive any
informalities in the- bidding process, should it be deemed (in the Owner's
opinion) to be in any way in the Owner's interest to do so.
1.06 COMMENC 2AENT AND COMPLETION
Work at the project site shall begin on week of June 1, 1999, and progress with
a proper and sufficient force of workmen and ample supply of materials, to the
satisfaction of the Owner. The work must be substantially complete by
August 20, 1999. The Contractor is hereby notified that for this Contract, time
is of the essence and that by signing the Contract Agreement the Contractor
agrees to meet the finish dates listed for the project. The General Contractor
will not be paid overtime for any construction work. Any or all overtime or
off time shall be carried in the bid.
1.07 OWNER-CONTRACT AGREEMENT
The form of agreement for the General Contract shall be the standard Form of
Agreement Between Contractor and Owner for Construction of Buildings A-101,
1987 Edition, as issued by the American Institute of Architects, and as altered
or amended to meet the requirements of the Contract Documents.
1.08 PERFORMANCE AND PAYMENT BOND
The Contractor shall furnish a performance bond and a labor and materials
payment bond covering the faithful performance of the contract and the
payment of all obligations arising thereunder each in the amount of 100% of
the Contract Sum, executed in AIA Form A-311, latest edition, with such sureties
as may be agreeable to the parties. The premiums shall be paid by the
Contractor. The Contractor shall deliver the required bonds to the Owner not
later than the date of execution of the Contract.
1.09 PRE-BID MEETING
A site visit for General Contractor and key subcontractors is required in order
to bid the work. Contractors should notify and coordinate with their key subs
for this visit. The Site Visit is scheduled for 10:00 AM Thursday, March 4, 1999.
The Site Visit will start at the kitchen loading dock area between Chase House
and Gillette House.
END OF INFORMATION FOR BIDDERS
FEBRUARY 1999 00100-4 INFORMATION FOR BIDDERS
LE9813 CHASE KITCHEN RENOVATION
Questions concerning the bidding process and Contract administration should
be directed to:
Mr. Charlie Conant
Smith College
Office of the Physical Plant
126 West Street
Northampton, MA 01063
Interpretation of the meaning of the Bidding Requirements and the Contract
Documents will be made only by written addenda, which will be mailed or
faxed to all bidders and sub-bidders of record. Requests received at least seven
(7) calendar days prior to bid-opening date shall receive consideration.
Requests for interpretation may be by letter or telephone to the office of the
Owner. Addenda, as issued, will be mailed to all general bidders and sub-
bidders of record. Addenda will be forwarded either by certified mail with
return receipt requested, by registered mail, or by fax. Failure of any bidder
to receive addenda shall not relieve the bidder from complying with its
requirements. All addenda shall become part of the Bidding Requirements and
other Contract Documents, as applicable. Any information given to bidders
other than by means of written Addenda will be given informally, and shall
not be used as the basis of a claim against the Owner.
1.02 EXAMINATION OF SITE AND DOCUMENTS
Each bidder shall thoroughly examine the site, the Bidding Requirements, and
the Contract Documents to ensure the bidder's knowledge of the conditions and
the requirements affecting the work. Each bidder, by submitting a bid,
acknowledges that the bidder is fully informed in this regard. No claim for
extra compensation or extension of time will be allowed for Contractor's
failure to comply with this requirement nor will any existing condition at the
site, evident upon careful inspection, whether or not in agreement with
conditions shown or called for on the Bidding Requirements or other Contract
Documents, be allowed as a basis for such claims, except as otherwise
specifically provided for elsewhere within the Contract Documents.
1.03 INFORMATION NOT GUARANTEED
All information given in the Bidding Requirements and other Contract
Documents relating to existing materials or conditions to be encountered and
existing utility lines and/or other structure, is from the best sources presently
available to the Owner. All such information is furnished only for the
information and convenience of the bidders and the Owner does not warrant
or guarantee that such materials, items or conditions will be the same as those
actually encountered during construction. The bidder must satisfy himself
regarding the character, quantities, and conditions of the various material and
the work to be done. It is understood and agreed that the bidder will not use
any of the information made available to him, or obtained in any examination
by him, in any manner as a basis of claim or demand of any nature against the
Owner, by reason of any variance which may exist between the information
offered and the actual materials, items or conditions encountered during the
construction work, except as otherwise specifically provided for elsewhere
within the Contract Documents.
FEBRUARY 1999 00100-3 INFORMATION FOR BIDDERS
LE9813 CHASE KITCHEN RENOVATION
1.01 SUBMISSION OF BIDS
Submit two copies of the Proposal Form.
Bidders changing or incorrectly executing the Proposal Form can be
disqualified.
The Proposal Form shall be properly executed and enclosed in a sealed
envelope plainly marked on the outside with the following information:
PROPOSAL FOR CONSTRUCTION OF:
Smith College
Chase Kitchen Renovation
Northampton, MA 01063
SUBMITTED BY:
(Name of Bidder)
(Address of Bidder)
(City, State and Zip Code of Bidder)
If proposal is mailed, the above required envelope shall be enclosed in a
second envelope identified with the above markings and mailed to:
Smith College
Office of the Physical Plant
126 West Street
Northampton, MA
Questions of a technical nature should be directed to:
Livermore, Edwards and Associates
260 Bear Hill Road
Waltham, MA 02451
Telephone: (781) 890-8873
Fax: (781) 890-2429
FEBRUARY 1999 00100-2 INFORMATION FOR BIDDERS
LE9813 CHASE KITCHEN RENOVATION
INFORMATION FOR BIDDERS
1.00 Sealed lump-sum bids from invited General Contractors in accordance with the
Bidding Requirements and Contract Documents prepared by:
Livermore, Edwards and Associates
260 Bear Hill Road
Waltham, MA 02451
Owner is represented by:
Mr. Charlie Conant
Project Manager - Physical Plant
Smith College
Northampton, MA
(413) 585-2424
will be received until 2 P.M. on Friday March 19, 1999 at the office of:
Office of the Physical Plant
Smith College
126 West Street
Northampton, MA
at which time they will be stamped with date and time of receipt, and after
which they shall be privately opened, examined, recorded, analyzed, and the
selected bidder notified. No public bid opening will be held. No information
about the results of the bid competition will be made public before that time.
Proposals shall remain in effect for thirty (30) calendar days after time and
date of receiving bids, may be accepted by Owner any time within that period,
and may be withdrawn after that time by the bidder without notice. The
selected bidder shall execute the contract agreement within seven (7) calendar
days after receiving' written notification of award of contract or presentation
of the contract agreement, whichever is later.
Prior to picking up drawings, each general contractor must sign a secrecy
agreement as provided by the Owner.
Two (2) sets of prints of documents will be given to each invited General
Contractor and may be picked up at the Smith College Physical Plant after 2:00
PM Monday February 22. Additional sets may be made by the Contractor at his
own expense. Reproducibles will be provided to New England Blueprint, 302
Locust Street, Springfield, MA 01108 (413) 737-3556, from whom prints or
specification copies may be ordered.
General bidders and sub-bidders upon receiving documents by the above
process become "bidders and sub-bidders of record."
FEBRUARY 1999 00100-1 INFORMATION FOR BIDDERS
LE9813 CHASE KITCHEN RENOVATION
DIVISION 11 - EQUIPMENT
Not Used.
DIVISION 12 - FURNISHINGS
Not Used.
pMSION 13 SPECIAL CONSTRUCTION
Not Used.
DIVISION 4 - SYSTE o
Not Used.
DIVISION 15 - MECHANICAL
Section 15300 Fire Protection
Section 15400 Plumbing
Section 15500 Heating, Ventilating and Air Conditioning
DIVISION 16 - ELECTRICAL
Section 16000 Electrical
END OF TABLE OF CONTENTS
FEBRUARY 1999
TC-3 TABLE OF CONTENTS
LE9813 CHASE KITCHEN RENOVATION
DIVISION 4 - MASONRY
Section 04200 Unit Masonry 04200-1 thru 6
DIVISION 5 - METALS
Section 05120 Structural Steel 05120-1 thru 2
Section 05500 Metal Fabrications 05500-1 thru 6
Section 05520 Handrails and Railings 05520-1 thru 5
Section 05580 Sheet Metal Fabrications 05580-1 thru 2
DIVISION 6 -WOOD AND PLASTICS
Section 06100 Rough Carpentry 06100-1 thru 6
Section 06200 Finish Carpentry 06200-1 thru 7
Section 06400 Cabinets and Counters 06400-1 thru 4
DIVISION 7 THERMAL AND MOISTURE PROTECTION
Section 07210 Building Insulation 07210-1 thru 4
Section 07271 Fire Penetration Sealants 07271-1 thru 3
Section 07530 Elastomeric Sheet Roofing 07530-1 thru 8
Section 07900 Sealants 07900-1 thru 6
DMSION 8 -DOORS AI'M WINDOWS
Section 08100 Steel Doors and Frames 08100-1 thru 6
Section 08210 Wood Doors 08210-1 thru 5
Section 08305 Access Doors 08305-1 thru 2
Section 08610 Wood Windows 08610-1 thru 2
Section 08710 Finish Hardware 08710-1 thru 12
Section 08800 Glass and Glazing 08800-1 thru 2
DIVISION 9 - FINISHES
Section 09100 Plastering Work 09100-1 thru 3
Section 09250 Gypsum Drywall 09250-1 thru 11
Section 09270 Fiberglass Reinforced Plastic Wall Paneling 09270-1 thru 2
Section 09310 Ceramic Tile 09310-1 thru 6
Section 09330 Vitreous Clay Tile 09330-1 thru 4
Section 09510 Accoustical Ceilings 09510-1 thru 3
Section 09660 Resilient Flooring 09660-1 thru 6
Section 09678 Resilient Base ans Accessories 09678-1 thru 3
Section 09900 Painting 09900-1 thru 12
DIVISION 10 - SPECIALTIES
Section 10110 Chaulkboards and Tackboards 10110-1 thru 2
Section 10160 Toilet Partitions 10160-1 thru 2
Section 10260 Comer Guards 10260-1 thru 1
Section 10800 Toilet and Bath Accessories 10800-1 thru 3
FEBRUARY 1999 TC-2 TABLE OF CONTENTS
LE9813 CHASE KITCHEN RENOVATION
TABLE OF CONTENTS
GEN-- ..DcX'r! 1am
Information for Bidders 00100-2 thru 4
Proposal Form 00300-1 thru 4
GENER AL(Y1NilrrrnArc
Standard Form of Agreement between Owner and
Contractor (AIA Document A-101, 1980 Ed.)
General Conditions of the Contract for Construction
(AIA Document A-201, 1980 Ed.)
Supplementary General Conditions 01000-1 thru 3
Index of Drawings I
TECBbTICAL SEE CATION
DIVISION 1 - G NERAT RROiTT NIENTS
Section 01010 Summary of Work 01010-1 thru 4
Section 01015 Special Conditions 01015-1 thru 3 .
Section 01025 Alternates 01025-1 thru 1
Section 01030 Field Engineering 01030-1 thru 2
Section 01070 Cutting and Patching 01070-1 thru 4
Section 01090 Reference Standards
Section 01100 Project Procedures 01090-1 thru 2
Section 01200 Project Meetings 01100-1 thru 2
Section 01300 Submittals 01200-1 thru 4
01300-1 thru 3
Section 01340 Shop Drawings, Product Data, and Samples 01340-1 thru 6
Section 01410 Testing Laboratory Services 01410-1 thru 4
Section 01500 Temporary Facilities 01500-1 thru 3
Section 01510 Temporary Utilities 01510-1 thru 3
Section 01530 Barriers and Enclosures 01530-1 thru 2
Section 01550 Access Roads and Parking Areas 01550-1 thru 3
Section 01560 Temporary Controls 01560-1 thru 3
Section 01600 Material and Equipment 01600-1 thru 4
Section 01700 Contract Closeout 01700-1 thru 1
Section 01710 Cleaning 01710-1 thru 2
Section 01720 Project Record Documents 01720-1 thru 3
Section 01730 Operating and Maintenance Data 01730-1 thru 7
Section 01740 Warranties and Bonds 01740-1 thru 2
DIVISION 2 - STTEWORK
Section 02112 Selective Demolition and Cleaning 02112-1 thru 4
Section 02200 Earthwork 02200-1 thru 12
Section 02610 Asphaltic Concrete Paving 02610-1 thru 2
DIVISION 3-CON F'r'F
Section 03300 Cast-In-Place Concrete 03300-1 thru 8
Section 03350 Concrete Finishes 03350-1 thru 2
FEBRUARY 1999 TC-1 TABLE OF CONTENTS
--.OW 64.,
Chase Kitchen Renovation
Smith College
Northampton, MA
Project Specification
February 1999
CLIENT
Smith College
Northampton, MA
MECHANICAL ENGINEERS
Lindgren & Sharples
Springfield, MA
(413) 732-4336
STRUCTURAL ENGINEERS
Ryan Hellwig, PC
Northampton, MA '•r
(413) 584-4594 �G�ZEftED qR�y/
FOOD SERVICE CONSULTANT o ' No. 5348
Holyoke Equipment Company WAFEBrowN,o mss.
Holyoke, MA
413
( ) 536-7750
ARCHITECT
Livermore, Edwards and Associates
Waltham, MA 02451
(781) 890-8873
Oft